(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Gnomon of the New Testament"






Bfiff tt(,( j'l, MUtt'ii' 

It, I' II IJ ' i /i iiVi-. '1 ' 



f^^h^,^^-^^ ^, 



C. U. C. A. 

Biblical Reference Library. 

PRESENTED BY 

ALFRED C. BARNES. 



NOT TO BE TAKEN FROM THE ROOM. 




3 1924 092 350 507_ 




The original of this book is in 
the Cornell University Library. 

There are no known copyright restrictions in 
the United States on the use of the text. 



http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924092350507 



G N I N 



THE NEW TESTAMENT 



JOHN ALBERT BENGEL. 



NOW FIRST TBANSLATED INTO ENGLISH. 



ORIGINAL NOTES EXPLANATOEY AND ILLUSTRATIVE. 

REVISED AND EDITED BY 

REV. ANDREW R. FAUSSET, M.A., 

OF TRINITY COLLEGE, DUBLIN. 



VOL. IV. 



"to give subtilty to the simple, to the young man knowledge and D1.«4- 
cretion. a wise man will hear, and will increase learning; and a man of 
understanding shall attain unto wise counsels." — prov. i. 4, 5. 



EDINBUEGH: 
T. & T. CLARK, 38, GEORGE STREET. 



MDCCCLXXVII. 



PKINTBD BY MUKBAY AND GIBD, 
FOR 

T. & T. CLAEK, EDINBUKGH. 

MNDON, .... HAMILTON, ADAMS, AND 00. 

DUBLIN, .... JOHN EOBEETSON AND CO. 

NEW YOEK, . . . SCRIBNEB, WELFOED, AND AEM3TR0NCS. 



G N I E 



THE NEW TESTAMENT 



JOHN ALBERT BENGEL. 



ACCOKDING TO THE EDITION OKIGINALLT BKOUGHT OUT ET HIS SOB, 

I. EENEST BENGEL 

AND SUBSEQBENTLT COMPLETED BY 

J. C. F. STEUDEL. 

Wlla OOKKBCTIONS AND ADDITIONS rnOM THE ED. SEOTJNDA OF 1759. 



VOLUME lY. 

CONTAINrae THE COMMENTARY ON THE GALATIANS, 

EPHESIANS, PHILIPPIANS, COLOSSIANg, I. and II. THESSALONIANS, 

I. AND II. TIMOTHY, TITUS, PHILEMON, AND HEBREWS, 

TRANSLATED BY 

EEV. JAMES BEYCE, LLD. 



SEVENTH EDITION. 

EDINBUEGH: 

T. & T. CLARK, 38, GEORGE STREET. 



MDCCCLXXVII. 



EPISTLE TO THE GALATIANS. 



CHAPTER I. 



1. TlauXo; amiroXog, oix. a-rr avSpti'ira)!, oWe Si avSpd^iroVf a,XX& did 
'ijjffoD Xpierou, xal @iou varphg rou lyslpavTos avThv sx. vixpuv, Paul an 
apostle, not of [dff called li/] men, nor by \ii&,, instructed through 
the instrumentality of] man, hut through Jesus Christ and God 
the Father, who raised Him from the dead) A remarkable anti- 
thesis, in which, while Paul asserts his apostleship, he mentions 
also his divine vocation, oux a,if Mpu'Traiv, dXXd (supply dia) ©sou 
TUTphg, not of man, but (by) God the Father ; comp. ver. 15, and 
the following verses; and his immediate instruction, o\i3i b! avSpwmu, 
aXX& Si& 'irjgoij Xpienij, not by man but by Jesus Christ. Instruction 
is generally effected by one individual, for example, as Paul was 
instructed by Gamaliel; calling, by more than one; hence the dif- 
ference of number, of men, by a man. Axtemonius page 211, 212, 
contends, after Le Clerc, that we must insert avh from after xai : 
but S/d by is rightly supplied from the last clause, and the force 
of the particle S/d by in this passage includes the meaning of the 
particle avh, from, but not vice versa. Paul, when he men- 
tions the Father and the Son in connection, often uses a single 
preposition. 1 Tim. vi. 13. — 3/d, by) He had just used did with 

VOL. IV. A 



GALATIANS 1. 2-C. 



an apostrophe ; it is now without the apostrophe, for the sake of 
emphasis.— J7£/>a»ro5, who raised) The seeds preparatory to the 
discussion of his subject are [here already] scattered. The re- 
surrection of Christ is the source of righteousness and apostle- 
ship, Rom. i. 4, 5, iv. 25 ; 2 Cor. v. 19. 

2. ndores, alt) This short verse adds to this epistle the form of 
a creed.— IxxXntsfais, to the churches) He uses the plural on account 
of the multitude of churches and towns in Galatia. Nor does he 
add the epithets, which he applies to the Romans, Corinthians, 
etc.. — TaXar/ag, of Galatia) 1 Pet. i. 1. 

4. Toi; dovTog, who gave) Paul adds such a periphrasis nowhere 
else to the prayer for grace and peace : who gave himself, ii. 20. 
— a,/j,apriuv, for our sins) which had enslaved us to this evil 
world. — e^eXnTou, might deliver) Paul describes the whole benefit 
of redemption on that side, on which the Galatians, carried away 
by the mischievous influence of Jewish teaching, experienced 
greatest difficulty. — IvigTUTog, present) This present lasts as long 
as wickedness prevails. — alZvog rnvripou; evil world) A rare mode 
of speaking by which the whole economy of sin under the autho- 
rity of Satan is denoted. The ages of ages {for ever and ever) in 
the following verse are opposed to this world [which is both de- 
praved and unhappy. — V. g.], on which comp. Rom. v. 6 : and 
by it the Galatians had been almost entirely led away. The 
present world obstructs the glory of God, and is under the autho- 
rity roD irovnpou, of the Wicked One. Paul speaks of Satan 
nowhere more sparingly than in this epistle. — xara, according to) 
construed with, who gave ; John x. 18, at the end. — rh 6i\riijua 
the will) without any merit of ours ; comp. John vi. 38, 39.— 
xal, and) See Rom. xv. 6, note [of Him who is at once God (the 
Creator) and our Father]. 

5. 'H do^a, the glory) for this will, which brings salvation. A 
delightftil introduction. 

6. 0au/i(i^w, I marvel) Paul, writing to all the other churches, 
begins with an expression of thanksgiving and praise to God, 
which, although the subject here requires something different, 
has however been virtually expressed, [has been represented by 
an equivalent] ver. 5. He also delays giving them the appella- 
tion of brethren. We give this summary of the epistle. There 
are three divisions. 



GALATIANS I. 6. 3 

I. The Inscription, i. 1-5. 

II. The Kecalling op the Gentiles to the thue 

Gospel, wheee 

I. He reproves them, 6-10. 

II. He asserts the divine authority of the Gospel preached by 

himself: because he 

1) From a persecutor has become an apostle by heavenly 

calling, 11-17. 

2) Never acted as if he had not been Peter's equal, 18, 19 : 

21,22. 

III. He vindicates justification by faith, anew reproaching the 

Galatians,. iii. 1, 2, 15 — iv. 11. 

IV. He explains the same subject to the Galatians, with the 

most tender aflFection, by the allegory of the son of the 
bond maid and of the son of the free woman, iv. 12. 
V. He then exhorts them to maintain their liberty, v. 1-12, 
dissuades them from its abuse, and admonishes them 
not to walk after the flesh, but after the Spirit, 13, 
14, 16.— vi. 5, 6-10. 

HI. Conclusion, 11, 12, 17, 18. 

See also the note at chap. ii. 16. 

— ourw ra^sws, so quickly) Paul had been with the Galatians 
not long before. See Ordo temp, (arrangement of dates) p. 
281 [Ed. ii., p. 242, No. 6.] — ft,iTaTik(sk, you are removed) 
transferred [you have changed your place from Him] A 
weighty expression, having an excuse blended with it. Jerome 
says : Galatia in our language implies transference, [removal 
from one place to another]. — d^J roS KoXiaavng ifioig, from 
Him, who called you) One's calling, is therefore the channel of 
grace, the rule for the fiiture ; ch. v. 8, 13. We have here, 
ver. 6—10, a Proposition [statement of the subject, viz. the 
calling'] and a sort of Division of it into parts [dialfneig] ; and the 
calling in [" into the"] grace [ver. 6] is treated of in continua- 
tion from ver. 11 : the words " there be some that trouble you" 
are treated of, ch. v. 7., etc. — iv yafiTi, in grace fEngl. Vers., into 



4 GALATIANS I. 7-9. 

the grace} Acts xv. ll.-X^/.roD, of Christ) The construction 
is with u'jri from^) 

7. 'O, which) This word relates to the Gospel, not to the words 
a different gospel— oix 'iar,v &XXo,is not another) &X\o [ahud] an- 
other diiFers from 'inpov, [alteram] a second and different.^ Paul 
not merely rejects that so-called Gospel, which the Galatians 
had allowed to be thrust upon them, hut any other whatever.— 
rivlg, some) unhappy persons, ver. 8, ch. v. 10, 12.— rafdgeovTs;, 
that trouble) ch. v. 10.—9i\ovrig, wishing) They reaUy were not 
able, but yet they were earnestly wishing to do it. Paul tiften 
glances at the Galatians and their seducers by this expression ; 
eh. iv. 9, 17, 21, vi. 12, 13. So Col. ii. lS.—fieraeTpe-\^ai) 
-[Sn is frequently translated by this word.— ri ivayyiXiov nu 
Xpmrou, the Gospel of Christ.) Those, who troubled them, did 
not quite deny Jesus Christ ; but Paul acknowledges nothing 
but the pure Gospel. 

8. 'H/iiTg) We, many as we are, ver. 2. — n ayyiXog J§ ovpavou, 
or an angel from heaven) whose authority, with the exception of 
God and Christ, is the highest, ch. iv. 14. — S evtiyyiXigd/ieda, 
which we have preached) This proves the apostolic infallibility. 
— avaSifia, let Mm be [accursed] anathema) Deprived of all part 
in Christ and God. The antithesis is at vi. 16. — sffj-ai, let him 
be) Controversies not only cannot, but not even ought to be 
carried on without strong feehng ; but that strong feeling ought 
to be holy feeling. 

9. 'Xlc, as) He speaks deliberately. He seems to have paused 
between the writing of each verse. A similar asseveration is 
repeated, ch. v. 2, 3, 21. — vponp^xafisv, we said before) In the 
plural : for in ver. 8 he wrote we have preached, also in the 
plural. — Xsyu, I say) in the Singular. All knew the truth of 
the Gospel ; Paul knew that the minds of the Galatians had 



^ This word 'X.ptcrou itself, although it is not considered as a reading fully 
established by the margin of both Ed., is, however, expressed in the Germ 
Ver.— B. B. 

G^ Cypr. Lucif. omit XfiardiJ. But ABHD [adding 'luo-oS with/] Vnlg. 
support it ; — to5 xaAiaain-o; agreeing with Xpiarov, and both governed by 
dvo ; but Engl. Vers, and Vulg. make Xpiarov be governed by x'i^P'ri Ed. 

2 Hxxog, one of many; enpo;, one of two. Diversity is more strongly ex- 
pressed in irepoi than <JAXof Ed. 



GALATIANS I. 10. 5 

been truly impressed with the Gospel ; he now therefore says, 
ye have received, and by this expression there is an epitasis [em- 
phatic addition, or augmentation of force] in the repetition.' — 
£/') if. This is more positive than i&v [though it should happen 
that], ver. 8. — u/iSs ivayyiKi^irai, furnish you with any other 
Gospel [jpreach to you] ) Here i/iSs is put before the verb ihay- 
ytXi^iTai, though in the 8th verse \j[uii is put after ; this is for 
the Sake of emphasis ; moreover we are not to suppose that 
there is no distinction intended in the different cases [u/i« 
and u/tSj] : We have preached the Gospel to you, has the 
dative of advantage : To furnish any one [Accusative] with a 
Gospel, is fitted to direct a sneer against the false teachers' 
pretensions. 

10. "Apr; y&p, for now) The reason why even now he writes 
with such asseverations : now is repeated from ver. 9. — avSpumvg, 
men) This word is without the article, but presently after, rh 
&thv, God, with the article. Regard is to be had to God alone. 
— ■jrtlScii) -TTclSa rivA, is much the same as the word apisxu, which 
presently occurs, / seek to please any one : miSuv nya, to obtain 
the consent or indulgence of any one. Plato de Leg. lib. 10, 
at the beginning; comp. 2 Cor. v. 11, note. — Mpwnrois, men) 
The antithesis is, of Christ. — 'in, yet) The meaning is, I have 
not heretofore sought, nor do I yet seek to please men ; comp. 
yet, ch. V. 11. The particles of the present time, apn, now, and m, 
yet, refute the words of him who troubled the Galatians. They 
here distinguish the present from the former time, not only 
when he was a Pharisee, but likewise when he was an apostle. 
As to the time when he was a Pharisee, Paul neither denies 
nor affirms in this passage. Paul not long before had circum- 
cised Timothy for example. They were .wishing to turn that 
circumstance as a conclusive argument against him with the 
Galatians. — Mpw'Troig, men) for the feelings of men are at variance 
with those of God and Christ ; hence, the evil of this present 
world, ver. 4. — tjp'egxov, I pleased) &psexa, I seek to please, Rom. 
viii. 8, note. A man generally either pleases or displeases him, 

' See Append, on Epitasis. In the first use of the words, ver. 8, 
" Though we, etc., preach any other Gospel," there do not occur the words 
" than that ye have received." The addition of these words, ver. 9, on the 
second use or repetition of the former words, constitutes the Epitasis. — Ej). 



fi GALATIANS I. 11-1«. 

whom he either seeksor does not seek to please. — Xfiofou, of Christ) 
whom I seek to please, as is becoming in a servant, Tit. ii. 9. 

11. 'ASiX(pol, brethren) He now at length calls them brethren, 
—xaru, according to [after}) xarA includes the meaning of the 
prepositions &-!rh, 8iot, and TapA, in ver. 1, 12. My Gospel is 
not according to the estimate of men. 

12. Jiaps-koc^ov, I receivecl) This differs from / was taught it 
[iiihax^n'''] ; for the one is accompHshed without labour ; the 
other is acquired by the labour of learning. — di a<roxaX{f^tcas, 
by revelation) viz., / received. 

13. 'HxoUari, ye have heard) before I came to you. — mre, in 
time past) when Paul was no way desirous of promoting the 
cause of the Gospel. — itophuv, I wasted) This word denotes 
what is quite the opposite of edification [the building up of the 
Church]. 

14. UpoExovrov, I was becoming a proficient [I profited]) in my 
very acts. — euvriKixniras, my equals in years) who were at that 
time in their full vigour. — 'jra.rpixZv fiou, of my fathers [of my here- 
ditary and national traditions]) which were very dear to me, as 
if they depended on me as their sole patron. A mimesis.^ 

15. ^lUxneiv, it pleased) The good pleasuH of God is the 
farthest point which a man can reach, when he is inquiring 
with respect to the causes of his salvation. Paul attributes 
nothing to merit ; presently he adds, from the womb ; comp. 
Rom. ix. 11. — apoplcag, who separated me) that he might show 
to me this good pleasure. — sx xoiXlag /j>yjrp6; fiov, from my mother's 
womb) Jer. i. 5. 

16. ' AmxaXi'^ai, to reveal) construed with it pleased God. 
A remarkable word. — rhv vlhv ainij, His Son) m 20. — h s/loI) in 
me, not merely by me ; for that after all is but the consequent 
[which must be preceded by the revelation in the preacher]. 
The Son of God had been formerly revealed, now He was also 
revealed in Paul, in relation to Paid, i.e. [He was revealed] to 
Paul. So, in, presently in this verse, and ver. 24. — Iv toT; sSnsi, 
among the heathen) whose calling corresponds in many respects 
to my own. There was the less need therefore to repair to 

' See App. Here he imitates the language which himself formerly, and 
which the Jewish legalists used in speaking of the traditions. — Ed. 



GALATIANS I. 17, 18. 7 

Jerusalem. — luSeu;, immediately) This is chiefly connected with 
airnX6ov, I went away. The sudden fitness of the apostle is 
denoted, Acts ix. 20, he straightway preached. [Moved, how- 
ever, by peculiar modesty, he willingly yielded the palm to his 
senior colleagues, if at any time they were present. — ^V. g.] Jerome 
construes eihiis with ha ihayyikiZfisfLai, that I might forthwith 
preach. — ou ■rposaviSe/iri^) I had not recourse to flesh and blood, 
for the sake of consulting them. The same verb, and avi6e//,nv, 
occur ii. 6, 2, The dictionaries (which see) make no distinction 
between the single and double compoimd verb. But the 
apostle seems to have considerately made the distinction, so 
that -rpie means, besides, further, i.e., divine revelation was suf- 
ficient for me [1 went no further than it]. — sctfxi xal ai/ian, to 
flesh and blood) i.e., to man or men, ch. ii. 6; comp. Matt, 
xvi. 17, note. 

17. OuSi avrjXhv) Neither went I up ; so avrikk, John vi. 3. — 
'lepoeoXu/ia, to Jerusalem) the seat of the apostles. — 'Apa^iav, 
Arabia) a country of the Gentiles. — ■jrdXiv lirierpi-^a, again I re- 
turned!) Paul here takes for granted that his journey to Damascus, 
on which he had been converted, was previously known. — 
Aa/iadKh, Damascus) of Sjrria. There is no other Damascus 
than that of Syria, but I have added the mention of Syria, 
because he had been formerly speaking of Arabia, etc. 

18. tpia, three) After he had given proofs of the apostolic 
office. — IgTopi^eai) a weighty expression,^ as referring to an im- 
portant matter. He did not say IdiTv [though Engl. Vers, so 
renders it, to seel, ^^* iffroprigai, " which," (says Chyrs.) " is said by 
those who accurately observe (o/ xaTa//.ccv^a,vovTii) great and sjdendid 
cities." Plutarch represents Solon and many others as having traf 
velled for the purpose of acquiring great wisdom and information 
(igroplas). Julian, when he was about to consult the diviners 
in the cities of Greece, alleged as the cause of his going, the 
extensive information of Greece (xaf kToplav rijg 'EXXdSos), and 
of the schools there. Greg. Naz., Or. i, Cresoll. theatr. rhet., 
p. 163. — TJirpov, Peter) Therefore Paul preferred him to the 

' 'Itrrooea Th. hrap, Unfit; to become acquainted with anything by visiting 
and inquiry, Pol. ix. 14, 3. 'Itrrop. riva, to become acquainted with one by a 
face to face interview. — Ed. 

See Wahi. Clay. 



8 GALATIANS I. 19-24.- II. 1, 2. 

Other apostles, ch. ii. 7 .—Stxa.'jriiiTi, fifteen) during so short a 
time, Paul means to say, Peter would not have been able to 
have made me an apostle. [It is profitable to observe rather 
carefully, what are the dealings of God with thee, that when cir- 
cumstances permit, thou mayest confidently appeal to them even 
after a long interval. — ^V. g.] 

19. rh adiXtphv roD Kvplov, the Lord's brother) cousin of Jesus. 
There was no other James, the Lord's brother, and an apostle 

20. 'laou, behold) viz. lar!, it is ; for on means that? 

21. ■'hx^ov, I came) with the Gospel, ver. 23. 

22. Tns lovdoiia,;, of Judcea) with the exception of Jerusalem. 

23. 'O diuxuv, he who persecuted) He had been very well 
known by this name, nor was the name Saul itself so celebrated, 
as that of the persecutor. 

24. 'ESofa^of, they glorified) And in the present day the 
Church glorifies God in Paul. [Remember thou to observe the 
same thing (to glofify God) as often as a good report (about 
some one converted from ungodliness), has been brought to thee. 
— V. g-] — Ev Eifo/, in me) comp. note to ver. 16. They glorified 
God previously, they now glorified Him also on account of 
Paul. 



CHAPTER II. 



1. Ai&, after) At an interval of fourteen years between the 
two journeys to Jerusalem. 

2. Kara &«oxa,Xv4^iv, by revelation) As Paul had revelations he 
had no need to learn from men. This revelation had been com- 
municated to him for an important reason. — &veSi/iriv) set before 
them [communicated], as equals are wont to do, not that they 
should confirm me, but that they should confirm others. Acts 
XV. 2.—airoTg, to them) at Jerusalem. This is treated of ver. 
3, 4.— xar -lilav) apart, privately) all were not capable of compre- 
hending it. — roTg doxovei, who were held in reputation) In anti- 

' It is the case before God, that, etc Ed. 



GALATIANS II. 3-6. 9 

thesis to Paul, who was less acknowledged. [The apostles are 
principally intended, ver. 9. — V. g.J comp. 2 Cor. xj. 5. Hesy- 
chius ; SoxoDvrEj, o/ hSo^oi. This is brought under consideration, 
ver. 6, 7. — /i^Toos, lest by any means') this word depends on anSi- 
u-n^, I set forth [communicated^. I should run, says he, or had 
run in vain, if circumcision had been judged necessary. — r^E%w, 
/ should run) with the swift victory of the Gospel. 

3. OhKi, not even) We did not even allow the necessity of cir- 
cumcising Titus, who was with me, to be laid upon us. 

4. AiSi di) But this matter concerning Titus happened on ac- 
countpof, etc. — hi, hut [Engl. Vers. And that\ is here a particle ex- 
planatory and intensive. — •!raptiaaxTo\ii) •^a.^k here and in vafu- 
<sr{khv, denotes by the way, stealthily, underhand. — -^iMbabiXfoMi, 
false brethren) He had shown greater respect to those, who were 
professed Jews, as in the case of Timothy, Acts xvi. 3. — o'mm, 
who) Comp. Acts xv. 1, 24. — xa.raex.ovrigai) to spy out, and 
destroy. 

5. Tri i-!forayr\, by subjection) There is here a limitation. We 
would willingly have yielded for love [but not in the way of 
subjection']. — ^ aXrihim) the truth of the Gospel, the pure Gospel, 
not another, ch. i. 6 : which false brethren attempt to substitute. 
The same mode of speaking is found, ver. 14 ; Col. i. 5. Truth, 
precise, unaccommodating, abandons nothing, that belongs 
to itself, admits nothing, that is inconsistent with it. — 
u/iSig, you) Greeks. We defended for your sakes, what you now 
reject. 

6. 'AtJ) Supply 01, 01 avh, x.r.X., and construe, ohhh [loi dia<pepsi, 
omToi mri rtectv a-irh, x-r-X. It is of no importance to me, what sort 
of persons in particular ['whatsoever'] those were, who were of 
the number of those more distinguished. The preposition is put 
in the same way, while the article is omitted, Mark v. 35; 
Luke xi. 49. Not only the three, James, Peter, and John, were 
SoKouvTig, highly distinguished. He therefore says a«h tZv. O'i 
doxouiTsg, viz. o'l h-jrip Xiav a.ntuiro'Koi ; 2 Cor. xi. 5. — iivot.! ri) to be (ac- 
counted) something, among those, who did not so esteem Paul. 
— omibi Tors) vors is here enclitic, not an adverb of time. — Qihg, 
God) Paul followed the judgment of God. He asserts the 
Divine authority ; he does not disparage that of the apostles. — ■ 
ya,p, for) The reason assigned [aetiologia] not of the thing but 



10 GALATIANS II. 7-9. 

of the word. Paul had just made a preface, and points out the 
reason why he did so, and proposes the subject itself. In like 
manner, /o»- occurs, ch. vi. 7. The preface is, that he does not 
depend on the consent of others; afterwards, however, he shows 
that consent.— oOSJi/ vposavUivro) they added [imparted]^ nothing 
to me, i.e. they found no fault in my doctrine. It often hap- 
pens that a man, who wishes to find fault or admonish, does it 
modestly, under the appearance of communicating information. 
" Those, who took the lead," antecessores, as TertulUan calls 
nug SoMuvTu;, used no such method in regard to Paul. I set 
forth, anS'i/inv, to them, ver. 2 ; they had nothing to add.^ 

7. 'idovTig) seeing fi'om the efiect itself, which I pointed out 
to them, ver. 8 ; Acts xv. 12. — rljs axpo^uerlag, of the uncircum- 
cision) Le. of the Gentiles, who were to be brought to the faith 
without circumcision. 

8. E/'s r& 'ihri, to the Gentiles) i.e. to the apostleship of the 
Gentiles. 

9. TvovTig, when James, etc., perceived) After having heard 
and seen me. — SohTsav, given) comp. respecting Paul, 2 Pet. 
iii. 15. — 'laxtii^og") James. He is put here first, because he 
mostly remained at Jerusalem, or even because he took the 
principal lead in this matter, and Paul might have seemed to 
difier more from James than from Peter, more from Peter than 
from John. For many circumstances would lead us to con- 
clude, that James and Paul, as well as Peter and Paul, etc., had 

1 Wahl. Clav. renders the verse here in the middle, " Animus est, novum 
aliquid imponere ;" i.e. they were not disposed to impose any new burden or 
obligation on me. — Ed. 

* 'irpoaauehiiTo, the Trpo; implying addition. — Ed. 

^ TleTpos x.ccl ' laKufios, the marginal reading in this verse is equal in both 
Ed. to the reading 'laxa/ios xal Kyi(pa; adopted both in the Germ. Vers, and 
in the Gnom : ver. U, the name K«(p«j, which had been left dmbtful in the 
larger Ed., is openly preferred in 2d Ed. and Germ. Ver. to the other ; finally, 
ver. 14, the reading Ku(p^ added to the genuine readings on the margin of the 
larger Ed. on the margin of the 2d Ed. is placed among those that are less cer- 
tain, and in the Germ. Ver. is exchanged for the reading mrpa. E. B. 

'Iaxsi/3of x,a.\ Kn(pSis is read by BO Orig. and Cod. Amiat. of Vulg. 
nkpus x..'Uxueos is read by D(A)G/5r Vulg. (Puld. MS., etc.) Iren. A 
omits x«i Knipaj. In ver. 11 ABCH Vulg. read Kn<paf. But D(A)G^ Vulg. 
and Rec. Text have nirpos. In ver. 14 ABC have Ku(p^. D(A)G^ Vulg. 
and Rec. Text have nhpiji. — Ed, 



GALATIAiSS H. 10. 1% 

that in their nature and in the feelings of their soul, which 
would demand that the one should exercise love and forbear- 
ance, along with self-denial, towards the other, without, how- 
ever, any compromise of the truth recognized by all. Hence it 
happens, that one and the same man, or one and the same as- 
sembly cannot with equal facility comprehend both James and 
Paul. This is proved in the failure of Luther, who called the 
epistle of James " an epistle of straw ;" but let those who 
violently arraign him on this account, look at the monstrous 
feelings which they themselves cherish against Paul. Christ is 
the only Head, the only Sun ; the greatest apostles were only 
members ; nor did these, as individuals, all equally receive the 
rays of that Sun, but the whole together represented Christ in 
the apostleship ; comp. on their variety, Rev. xxi. 14, 19, 20. 
And the affairs of the Church were so directed by its Divine 
Head, that James, who was more tenacious of the law, preached 
to the Jews ; Paul, who did not copy others, and was more 
eager for faith and liberty, preached to the Gentiles ; and that 
thus every one might bring a character and endowments as 
much adapted as possible to the province assigned to him. — 
Kriipag, Cephas) In some way or other, I know not how, this word 
has jthe sound of greater veneration than Peter. If Peter had 
held that supremacy, which men afterwards attributed to him, 
Paul would have had the strongest reason for mentioning that 
supremacy on the present occasion, or at least of naming him as 
in an exalted position. — erLXoi) This word corresponds to the He- 
brew term 11DJ? Prov. ix. 1, and wherever it occurs. — Si^ia; 
'iduxav) so, fiw/isv di^iiiv, let US make peace, 1 Mace. vi. 58, etc. — 
xoivmlas) fellowship, which refers to colleagues — ha, that) viz. 
we might go, viz. with the Gospel. — I'ls ra 'ihri, to the Gentiles) 
especially. For Paul also taught the Jews, Peter and John 
the Gentiles, but the former followed out his career beyond 
Judea, the latter had continued in Judea, so long as it con- 
tinued to exist as a nation. If Peter came to Rome, he cer- 
tainly had no fixed abode there. 

10. iSiv <isria-)(Ziv, the poor) From among the Jews. — fivrif^ovsvcfj- 
/iSK, we should remember) The antecedent for the consequent ; 
for Paul was forward, not only to remember, but to assist. — 
k-roUaea, I was forward [anxious, zealous]) even among the 



12 GALATIANS II. 11-14. 

Galatians, 1 Cor. xvi. 1. Paul did not cast away his zeal for 
good works.^ 

11. "On, when) The argument at last reaches its highest 
point. Paul reproves Peter himself, therefore he owes not his 
doctrine to man.— 'Avr;o;^^8/a^, Antioch) at that time the citadel 
of the Gentile Church.— xar^ vp6e!omv, to the face) comp. ver. 
14, before all; so the Lxx., 1 Kings i. 23, twice; 1 Chron. 
xxviii. 8; Ps. .. 21; Dan. xi. 16, etc. Below, xara, iii. 1.— 
ivTigTnv, I withstood [resisted]) A stem yvord.—xareytia^efiims) 
xaTa-/.$xpi//,ivoc, condemned, on account of contrary actions, of 
which the one condemned the other ; see the following verse ; 
comp. ver. 18. The participle has a reciprocal meaning. For 
Peter had condemned himself by his own judgment, by his own 
practice. 

12. ^uv^gSiiv) He ate, Uke as we did, along with the Gentiles. — 
u^rltfrsXXe, he began to withdraw") gradually. — a.pupiZ,ev, separated) 
entirely. — po/Soi/iEvoj, fearing) The fear of man is very injurious. 

13. 'O/ Xoimi) The others, believers. — y.ai)even Barnabas, whom 
you would by no means think likely to do such a thing. — 
amoi.'jrnx^n, was led away) The power of frequent example. 

14. "EiSov, 1 saw) A happy observation [of their error]. — 
ipk-TrohoZai) they walk [with a straightforward and open step] ac- 
cording to the rule, vi. 16; in the right way, or rather with 
body erect [as Engl. Vers, translates it uprightly], so that it is 
opposed to lameness, and to what is properly called straddling. 
Straightness of the feet is the thing intended. The Greeks say 
also iiph^ariTv, opSo&pa/iiTv. — mu liayyiXiou, of the Gospel) Por 
the Gospel teaches, that righteousness from the works of the 
law and the necessity for observance of the ceremonial law are 
inconsistent with redemption by the death of Christ. — iJ-irov, I 
said) Paul alone maintained the point in this place, without 
associates [to support him], against Judaism ; afterwards also 
against heathenism, 2 Tim. iv. 16, 17. — rffl) The authors of this 
conduct ought to be attacked. — 'iiLitpoekv vavrm, before all) 1 
Tim. V. 20. — II ffu, if thou) in this argument Paul reminds 
Peter of the argument which the latter had used against the 

' Though denying justification by them. — Ed. 
* This is the force of the Imperfect Ed. 



GALATIANS II. 15. 13 

Pharisees, Acts xv. 10, 11. Here commences a proposition 
consisting of two members, of wliich the first, if thou, etc., is 
treated of in ver. 15, 16 ; the second, whj/ — the Gentiles, etc., at 
ver. 17, 18. — ^"louSa/bs i-Trdp^aiv, being a Jew) and therefore more 
closely related to the law. — hhmSig ^r\c, livest after the manner of 
Gentiles) So Paul speaks, xar &v6pci)'!rov, i.e. [using the ad hotni- 
nem argument, turning Peter's own practice as an argument 
against him] For Peter, retracting his former mode of Hving, 
declared for the Gentile mode, since it was right in itself. Tak- 
ing away this figure, the proposition itself, we must not live 
after the manner of the Jews, is presently discussed. — ra 'ihti, 
the Gentiles ) set free from the law.^ — avayxdZfii, thou compellest) 
by thy conduct. They would have held it necessary that the 
Gentiles should either follow the Jewish ritual, or be deprived 
of communion with the Church. — 'louhodiiiv, to live as do the 
Jews [Judaize]) what had been formerly obedience to the law 
is now mere Judaism. 

15, 'H/iE/'s, we) Paul, sparing the person of Peter, dismisses 
the second person singular, and passes to the first person plural, 
then figuratively to the first person singular, ver. 18 ; lastly, 
Tin its proper [literal] meaning, ver. 19, 20. We, although 
Jews by nature, and not sinners of the Gentiles, viz., we have 
been : comp. the preterite knowing — we have believed. This we, 
after the reason^ has been interposed in the way of parenthesis, 
is taken up again in the following verse with epitasis [an em- 
phatic addition, viz., even we] and reaches to we have believed. 
— puffs;, by nature) not merely proselytes. — olx, if hhuv a,ii,apra\oi, 
not sinners of the Gentiles) Paul openly declares it as a thing 
acknowledged, that the Gentiles, inasmuch as they did not 
even possess the law, are sinners, while the Jews, on the con- 
traiy, had the law or even works; Tit. iii. 5. Then by the 
way he grants, that it is only in Christ that the Jews can have 
communion with them ; but he especially declares, as a thing 
acknowledged, the justification of the Gentiles by faith, and he 
also infers the same thing concerning the Jews. To this refers 
the expression sinners, ver. 17, note." 

' By 'aetiologia.' See Append. 

' Sinners such as the Gentiles heretofore were justly regarded. — Eo. 



^4 GALATIANS 11. 16- 

16. e;5»«s, hnowing) i.e. since we have come to know.- 
U,..o,, a mun) every man, whether Jew, or Greek.-.| J^y- 
„.A hy ths woiks of the lav,) The followers of Galatism, from 
not clearly understanding and not rightly interpreting the 
nature and end of the moral law, earnestly maintained the cere- 
monial law ; and, acknowledging little or no distinction between 
the moral and ceremonial law, they comprehended both under 
one word, the law, and therefore sought to be justified m the 
observance of the whole law. The apostle therefore m a similar 
manner refuting them, includes the two in one word ; or, where 
he uses the word law more strictly, he means the moral law 
itself; he calls the ceremonial law by a different appellation, 
elements, etc.. But the state of the controversy came more 
prominently under notice, in so far as it regarded the cere- 
monial law, than in so far as the same regarded the moral 
law : since the matter of the former being about times, cir- 
cumcision, meats, etc., met the eye more than that of the 
latter ; and the abrogation of the former, which was complete, 
was more conspicuous, than that of the latter, which was only 
abrogated in some one respect. Hence it happens that some 
arguments serve particularly against justification by the cere- 
monial law; there are more, however, which serve against 
justification by the law taken universally, including even the 
moral law. The whole is more clearly evident from the economy 
of the epistle to the Galatians ; for in ch. i. and ii. the apostle 
shows that he was sent and taught by God, and was in no 
respect inferior to the other apostles, as his conferences for pro- 
moting peace, nay even his controversial debates, held with 
them, and with Peter himself, plainly evince. In the third 
chapter, there is the discussion on the moral law ; whence at 
ch. iv. 1—11, arguments are deduced regarding the ceremonial 
law, and, after an allegory has been interposed in reference to 
both, in ch. v. the question is raised respecting circumcision in 
particular. This is the sum : Moses and Jesus Christ ; the 
law and the promise ; doing and believing ; works and faith ; 
wages and the gift ; the curse and the blessing, — are represented 
as diametrically opposed to each other. And the Decalogue is 
left by Paul either altogether nntoiiched, or it is included imder 
the term law ; nay, the Decalogue is properly that laW, which, 



GALATIANS II. 17. IS 

though it is declared, that it cannot justify, is yet established 
by faith ; for, truly the ceremonial law is entirely abolished : 
[2 Cor. iii. 13] ; Rom. lii. 31. But Sinai, Gal. iv. 24, is much 
more celebrated for the Decalogue than for the ceremonial law. 
Nor was the ceremonial law a yoke intolerable in itself, but it 
derived its strength from the moral law, Acts xv. Therefore 
the moral law is, so to speak, more legal than the ceremonial, 
which was at the same time, as it were, an elementary and 
preliminary Gospel. See also Rom. iii. 20, note. — Jan /i^, [6m< 
byl if not) a particle to be resolved into dXXii, but, though with 
greater force. Man is not justified by the works of the law, 
and therefore in no other Way save by faith. We find the 
same meaning attached to the particles, and not, which occur 
presently after.— r-3;a, by) by is used concerning the Gentiles ; 
from [Ix — If] presently after, concerning the Jews, Rom. iii. 30, 
note. — ^"ijjffoD XpiSTotJ, of Jesus Christ) i.e. in Christ Jesus, as 
the expression follows presently after vdth the names transposed.' 
The name Jems was the name that became known first to the 
Gentiles ; the name Christ to the Jews. Wherefore the order 
is not always indiscriminate, where both names are used as 
here ; Rom. xv. 5, 6 ; 1 Tim. i. 15, 16, ii. 5, vi. 13, 14 ; 2 Tim 
i. 9, 10, notes : and generally in more solemn discourse Christ 
Jesus is used ; in that which is more ordinary, Jesus Christ. — 
xai }i/j,iT;) we ourselves also ; how much more the Gentiles. — 
i<!ri(fTiuea/isv, we have believed) i.e. we began to beUeve long ago. 
— &i6ri, because tJiat) The Consequence is proved in reference to 
the Jews. 

17. E/' 8e, but if) When Peter withdrew himself, and refused 
to hold any longer that commimion in living [food] with the 
Gentiles, which he had begun ; it was the same thing as if he 
had said, that he had lived a heathen sinner, by the fact of and 
during the continuance of that communion. But Christ had 
formed ,a close relationship with the Gentiles, on account of 
which he had very properly eaten with them. Wherefore if 
Peter committed sin in eating with them, the consequence will 
be that Christ was ih.e minister of that sin. Paul so shrinks 

' Engl. Vers, has We hate helieeed in Jesus Christ. But ACD(A)G^ Vulg. 
have the order X^owtw ' Ijiuouk. B/ Memph. and later Sjt. support the order 
Im. \piirT. — Ed 



IS GALATIANS II. 18, 13. 

back from the impropriety of such a consequence, that he not 
only subjoins, God forbid, but immediately softens the expres- 
sion by turning it into an interrogation, and by usmg also the 
word didxovog, minister, which is well adapted to mark the in- 
dignity implied in this passage. There is no blame attached 
to Christ, conferring righteousness and holiness upon the Gen- 
tiles ; but the whole blame lies with him, who renews [builds 
again] a separation from the Gentiles, after they had been 
converted to Christ; see following verse. — l^riTouvreg) while we 
seek, ever since we have received faith and freedom from the 
law. This word, to seek, is represented [virtually expressed] in 
the preceding verse ; and " if while seeking — we are found," is 
a strong antithesis to it. — ilpUri/i'iv, we are found) now, anew. — 
xal aurol) we ourselves also, of our own accord. — Xfusrig, Christ) 
by [m] whom, however, we seek to be justified. 

18. KarsXuifa, I destroyed) By the faith of Christ. — iraKn 
ohoSo/iSi, I build again) by subjection to the law. — ntapa^a-rnv) a 
prevaricator,^ a transgressor of the law, while I seem to observe 
it, \retracting, as it were, my former change (abandonment) 
of Judaism. — ^V. g.] The word {vapa^driii) was dreadful in 
the eyes of those who were more zealous for the law. [This 
was, to wit, to transgress the law of faith. — Y. g.] — guvlerri/ii, 
I commend) Peter had wished to commend himself, ver. 12, at 
the end ; Paul shows by this mimesis,^ the sad fruit of that com- 
mendation. 

19. 'E/w y&,p,for I) The reason assigned [aetiologiaj for, God 
forbid. Christ is not the minister of sin and death, but the 
Establisher [Stator] of righteousness and life. I am entirely 
in Him. This is the very sum and marrow of Christianity. — 3«i 
vofjiou Ko/toi) by the law of faith [I am dead] to the law of works, 
Rom. iii. 27. I do not do an injustice to the law; I depend on 
a law, not less divine. This is set forth as it were enigmatically, 
and is presently explained by the definition of the law of faith. 
In the same sense in which transgressor [vapa^&Tng] is used, 

1 Prsevaricator, a, shuffler, one guilty of collusion, a sTiam-defender, as Peter 
here seeming to be a maintainer of the law, though being a transgressor 
against it. — Ed. 

2 Imitation of the word characterising Peter's aim, viz. to commend him- 
self.— E». 



GALATIANS II, 20, 21. -III. 1. ]7 

law,^ is used, in speaking of faith. — a.'TrUavov, ha, Qia ^iieu) Eom. 
vii. 4, 6, note. 

20. lunsrabptaihai, I am crucified with) Death is included in 
the cross, as is evident from the antithesis, / live ; comp. Phil, 
ii. 8. On communion with the same; Phil. iii. 10. — Zu it, 
nevertheless I live) after that death. — oux 'In iyii) [Engl. Vers., 
yet not 7.] No longer I, as a Jew : Col. iii. 11. 

21. Oux a^srS, I do not frustrate) As the Judaizing teachers 
do, but embrace it with my whole soul. — rn\i x"-f" "" ®^''"3 *^^ 
grace of God) by which Christ died for us. — il ycif, for if) 
Christ is our righteousness in Himself; not in so far as [inas- 
much as] He fulfils the righteousness of the law in us. This 
is evident from the consequence which Paul here shows would 
follow, if the case were otherwise. — anSanv, He died) and so 
rose again. There would have been no need of these, if right- 
eousness had been from the law. 



CHAPTER III. 

1. ''fi, 0) He abruptly attacks the Galatians. — avorim TaXdrai, 
foolish Galatians) inasmuch as not having followed up, and held 
fast, a subject which had been most distinctly set before them, 
ver. 3. He does not call them a/awjiroOs, beloved, because they 
were not to be loved, but to be reproved ; although He really 
loved them. — l^dgxavs, bewitched) [that is, produced in you a 
change so sudden, and at the same time so very great. — V. g.j 
What follows more closely agrees with this word, if the phrase, 
not to bhey th4 truth, were to be laid aside ;^ for the eyes are so 

1 Referring to the law of works. — Ed. 

2 The margin of both Ed. with the concurrence of the Germ. Vers, inxplies 
that it should be laid aside. — E. B. 

ABD corrected later (A), Gfff Vulg. (many MSS., but Cod. Amiat. the 
best, has " veritati non obedire") omit rfi dT^Yihia fi^ ■a-eihafcci. Rec. Text 
with C retains the words. Jerome 7,4180 writes, "Legitur in quibusdam 
codicibus, ' Quisvos fascinavit non credere veritati.' Sed hoc, quia in exem- 
plaribus Adamantii non habetur, omisimus ;" and 7,487a, "licet et Grseca 
exemplaria hoc errore confusa sint."— Ed. 

VOL. IV, B 



13 GALATIANS III. 2, 3 

obstructed by fascination [that a man is either of opinion that he 
does not see what he sees, or thinks that he sees what does not 
exist. — ^V. g.] — xar 6f)3aX/ji,ov;, before the eyes) Very clearly. — -xeoi- 
ypdipr}, hath been distinctly [evidently] set forth by writing) Things 
are said •jpoypdipisSa.i, to be set forth, which are placed publicly in 
writing before the eyes of all, as H. Valesius shows, Not. in 
Harpocr, p. 116. Jesus Christ had been so written or por- 
trayed before the eyes of the Galatians by the Gospel. — h ii/iT> 
igTaupu/j,hog, crucified among you) The form of His cross exhibited 
in your heart by faith, that now henceforth you might also be 
crucified with Him, ch. ii. 20; iv. 19, note. This crucifixion 
with Christ is reahzed especially in the Lord's Supper. 

2. Mo'voi', only) A weighty argument. — f^ahiv, learn) What it 
Is that you think [what sentiment you entertain]. Here is 
the point of his questions: you have learned many things 
from me ; I wish to learn this one thing alone from you. — Jg 
'ipym v6/j,ov, from the works of the law) In which you seek right- 
eousness. — rh TlvitJiia, the Spirit) [in (through) whom you addressed 
God as Father. — V. g.], and whose presence [among the Gala- 
tians] was conspicuous by means of the gifts, which He bestowed ; 
ver. 5 ; Mark xvi. 17 ; Heb. ii. 4. The gift of the Spirit accom- 
panies righteousness [justification], ver. 14 ; Eph. i. 13. There- 
fore the one is often put for the other ; comp. note on Eom. vi. 
18. This argument is repeated, ver. 5 : and it receives addi- 
tional weight by the verses interposed, viz. ver. 3, 4. Further, 
Paul, in this one epistle of his, although he so often names the 
Spirit, does not, however, even once add the epithet, Roly ; and 
this he does not appear to have done without good reason; namely, 
the epithet ' Holy' is a very joyful one, but this epistle is de^ 
cidedly severe.— J), or) Two things directly opposed.— Ig Axon; 
mermg, from [by] the hearing of faith) The nature of faith is 
thus exquisitely denoted— faith [consisting in] not working, but 
receiving. 

3. OuTug a\i6ri70f, SO foolish) oiirug, makes an [Epitasisl em- 
phatic addition [in ver. 1 it was merely &v6nroi] ; you not only 
neglect the evangelical portraiture of Christ [referring to 
ypacpn, ver. 1], but also the gift of the Spirit, which came nvuch 
more under your notice; see at 1 Cor, i. 6.— lvapgcc/i£,o,, havinq 
begun) The progress corresponds to the commencement. Th 



GALATIANS III. i, 6. 19 

IS no second [subsequent] justification given by the works of the 
law. — vuv, now) Whereas having left the flesh, you ought to have 
become more and more spiritual. — gapxl, in the flesh) Heb. ix. 10. 
[Phil. iii. 2 ; Eom. ii. 28]. No doubt the Galatians thought 
that they were going more deeply into the Spirit. The flesh 
may be easily taken for the Spirit, even by those who have made 
progress, unless they continue to maintain a pure faith. — smre- 
XiTtk, are you consummated [made perfect ?]) when verging to 
[aiming at] the end [t-IXoj, contained in sTiTiXiTsh, the end or 
consummation'], you follow the flesh. All things are estimated 
by the end and issue. 

4. 'E-jrakn) have you suffered"^ While you suffered and bore 
with me most patiently (and this patience is the fruit of the Spirit), 
when I portrayed before your eyes Christ and His cross, ver. 
1, note, and laboured among you in the weakness of the flesh ; 
as he speaks more explicitly afterwards at iv. 11 (where the word 
E/'x^, in vain, is repeated), 13, etc. He does not say, have you done 
(comp. 2 John ver. 8), because he refutes in this passage those 
that work ; but he says, have you suffered, with great propriety 
of language (for he suffers, who is brought to the birth^ [in 
Christ], iv. 19 ; as also, he who runs, v. 7) ; also appositely to 
his argument, in order to amplify the indignity of their loss. 
There is a use of this verb not dissimilar, at Amos vi. 6 ; Zech. 
xi. 5. Sometimes su ifae-j(iiv, ayaSbv irde^eiv, is to receive [to be 
favoured with] a benefit, Baruch vi. 33 (34) : but this is not the 
notion of the word adopted by Paul. — I'/yi xal elxtj, if it he yet in 
vain) This is as it were a cojtrection;^ ye have not sufiered so 
many things in vain ; for God has given you the Spirit, and has 
wrought mighty works [' virtutes,' miracles, ver. 5] in you. 
Comp. Heb. x. 32. 

5. 'O sm^opnyZv — KaihipyZv) He that ministered — and wrought 
[viz. God] : so Chrysost. For the participle of the imperfect 
tense is contained in the participle of the present : titl, in the 
first of these participles, is emphatic ; for he who preaches mi- 
nisters (%o^>)7E?). God, in the strict sense, iitix'>?nyii? — fiura/is/r, 

1 The folhw qui paritur of the original cannot be imitated in a trans- 
lation. — Tk. 
' See App. 
• 'Ejrtxopriyclii, to luppl^from above and abundantly gifts and graces, ap- 



20 GALATIANS III. 6-8. 

powers) miraculous. — ig, by) Supply, did He it. — £§ axons 
wldTtui, by the hearing of faith) This expression along with 
the following verse constitutes the proposition, and in xaiiii, even 
as, assumes the force of an affirmative. 

6. 'ABpa&fi, Abraham) See Eom. iv. 3, note. The genealogy 
[pedigreej— the armoury of Paul, ver. 6, 8, 16 ; ch. iv. 22 ; for 
we must have recourse to our origin [the first beginnings of 
things], Matt. xix. 4. 

7. Tivuexsre, know ye) The imperative ; comp. 2 Tim. iii. 1. 
Neither the slowness of the Galatians nor the commencement of 
the discussion admitted of an indicative. — ol sx maTius, those who 
are of faith) For Abraham believed. — olroi) these, and these 
alone, the other descendants of Abraham being excluded. — vkl, 
sons) ver. 29. 

8. Upoidovea di, but [and moreoverl foreseeing) At, but [and 
moreover"] being an emphatic addition Qmranxov), extends the 
force of the argument to the Gentiles also. The term foreseeing 
implies divine foreknowledge, more ancient than the law. The 
great excellence of sacred Scripture is, that all the poiiits likely to 
be controverted are foreseen and decided in it, even in the most 
appropriate language. — ri Ypa(p'fi, scripture) A mode of expression 
abbreviated and condensed in a manifold degree, as will be 
evident to him who evolves the ideas involved in it, thus ; it is 
God who has given testimony to these things ; God foreknew that 
He would act in this manner with the Gentiles ; G^d therefore 
already at that time acted in a similar manner with Abraham ; 
God also caused it to be consigned to writing, and that too when 
at the time that it was written, it was still future. All these things 

are included in that expression, foreseeing ■ ■■ AH these 

ideas could not be so briefly expressed in our mode of speaking 
otherwise [or if they could] they might be considered obscure. 
But the ardour of the apostle's mind, which, being filled with 
the Spirit, was directed to one topic, and that too of principal 
importance, produces this effect [the combination of great brevity 
with freedom fi-om obscurity]. Wliat was spoken to Abraham 
was written out in the time of Moses. — sx iriaTiug, by faith') not 

plies to God. Xopni/uii, to minister those gifts to others as the servant a 1 
instrument of God, applies to the minister. — Ed. 



21 

/ works. — iixaioT, justifies [instead of would justifyj) The pre- 
snt, in respect of Paul then writing ; so, they have the blessing 
ire blessed) elXoyouvrai], ver. 9. — 'irpoivriyyeXleaTo, preached the 
rospel before) A word, which very sweetly approaches to a 
latachresis.^ The Gospel was preached to Abraham before the 
mes of the Gospel. The Gospel is therefore older than the 
iw. — iviuXoyji^^eoiiTai) 131331 Gen. xii. 3 : then more expressly 
n3nni Gen. xxii. 18 ; Ps. Ixxii. 17. There is the mere pro- 
use of blessing ; nothing is said as to works. Moreover, jus- 
fication and blessing are •conjoined. At the same time the 
ature of faith is evident from the form of the Hebrew verb : 
ley shall bless themselves, they shall congratulate themselves re- 
arding the blessing. Is. Ixv. 1 6 ; Comp. Deut. xxix. 18. — h eot, 
I thee) as in the father of the Messiah ; therefore much more 
1 Messiah [Himself]. The Gentiles, as believers in Christ, 
re the seed of Abraham. Seed first, then blessing, was pro- 
lised to Abraham. Add note to ver. 16. 

9. O; ix icienoti) they who are of faith, all, and they alone ; 
,s is evident from its opposite in the following verse. — ebv ra 
■igTu, with the faithful) The blessing was conferred on Abraham 
limself by faith ; with whom those, who believe, are blessed. 
)bserve, he says now, evv, with, not h, in. In thee was said before 
/hrist was born of the seed of Abraham ; subsequently to that 
vent, with, nay even previously ; compare the heirs with him, 
leb. xi. 9. 

10. 'T^ri xardpciy, under the curse) Sub, Under, here and after- 
i^ards, is joined to the accusative with great force. The curse 
.nd the blessing are opposed. — ileh, are) This verb is repeated 
nth great force. — yiypa'KTai, it is written) Deut. xxvii. 26 : 
'jriy.aTaparoi irag avSpai'Trog, offrig ovx e/i/jlbvii •Jtadi roTg Xoyoig rou v6fjiiOv 
ouTov, iroiriaai auTouc ; where •ttSs and ff5<r/ are not in the Hebrew, 
lut in the Samaritan. Perfect obedience is required by the 
xpression, in all things, and continual obedience by the expres- 
ion, continueth Qfi/imi). No man renders this obedience. — ro/j: 
'lypajj^jj^inii b rw ^i^'Kiij), written in the booh) Paul adds this as a 
laraphrase. 



' See Append. A turning aside of the term Gospel here from its strict 
ense, in order to apply it to what was akin to it, viz. the promise given to 
Lbraham. — Ed. 



23 GAIATIANS III. n-13. 

11. 'Ek i/oAiw, in the law) Paul somewhat eagerly urges this 
matter, lest aiiy one should say, I acknowledge that righteousness is 
not by the works of the law, but yet it is by the law itself. Many 
depended on the law, although they did not keep it, Kom. ii. 
17 23. He answers, it is of no advantage to them that do it 
not, ver. 12. — •ra^A rc3 @iSi, before God) whatever it may he 
hefore men, Eom. iv. 2. — hnXov, on, it is evident, because [or 
that']) The phrase refers to what follows: 1 Tim. vi. 7 ; 1 Cor. 
XV. 27. AriXowr, is used by the Greeks as one word, correspond- 
ing to the Latin id est. As concerns the fact, that no one is 
justified in [by] the law before God, it is beyond all doubt true, 
that the just shall live by faith. The former is alleged [referred 
to] as if still open to doubt, but the latter is rh inXov, a thing quite 
manifest, by which even the former ought to be placed beyond 
a doubt. — hiKaioi Ix 'Trlareug, the just by faith [he who stands just 
by faith]) See Eom. i. 17. — ?/ieirai, shall live) The same word is 
in the following verse. 

12. Oux EOT/n Ix -TTieTiug, is not of faith) It does not act the part 
of faith ; it does not say, believe, but do. — o mirigag ausiA, the man 
that doeth them) Eom. x. 5. 

13. Xpiarhg, Christ) Christ alone. This is an abrupt exclama- 
tion without a conjunction, and with some degree of indignation 
against the doers of the law. There is an Asjmdeton not unlike 
this. Col. iii. 4 : where the apostle is likewise speaking of Christ. — 
iifiag, us) The curse chiefly pressed upon the Jews ; for the bless- 
ing also was nearer to them. The antithesis is, on the Gentiles, 
ver. 14 : comp. iv. 3, 6. — l^riyopaeiv, hath redeemed) He set us 
free hy, purchase from the state in which we were held. The 
same word occurs, iv. 5. — In r^g xardpag, from the curse) under 
which they lie, who trust either to the law, or the works of the 
law. — yevofitvog v'?rep tj/lSiv Kardpa, being made a curse for us) We 
have here the abstract, not the concrete noun. Wbo would 
dare without the fear of blasphemy so to speak, if the apostle 
had not led the way ? The word curse, Kardpa, means more 
than anathema, Eom. ix. 3 : for the curse is inflicted by another 
the anathema is spontaneously incurred. In like manner my - 
i^oXoDpivSriesrai, shall be cut off, is said of Christ, Dan. ix. 26 • 
comp. ver. 24 with the annot. of C. B. Michaelis. 'T's-jo for 
instead of, is also used here with the utmost propriety ; for Christ 



GALATIANS III. U, 15. 23 

became the curse, which we were, in our stead, that we might 
cease to be a curse. — yiyfaitTai, it is written) Deut. xxi. 23, 
xtx,a,rrjpa,ii,ing mb ©joO *as xf E/ia/isi/oj ivl ^iXou. — I*/ ^iXou, on a tree) 
between heaven and earth. Our mother-tongue calls it the 
gallows. The apostles, in treating of redemption, mention the 
cross, rather than the agony on the Mount of Olives, 1 Pet. ii. 
24. Had not the punishment of the cross been long ago abo- 
lished, the stupendous power of the cross of Christ would be 
more obviously before our eyes. 

14. "Iva — im, that — that) The first that corresponds to, being 
made (a curse), the last to, hath redeemed us ; comp. that occur- 
ring twice, iv. 5, note. — ilg ret 'ihri) on the Gentiles, who were 
afar off, ver. 8. — rr)v iirayyiXlav roD Tvsu/iaros, the promise of the 
Spirit) Luke xxiv. 49, note. — XdjSu/iiv, we might receive) we 
Jews, nearly related in Christ to the blessing. The nature of 
faith is expressed by this word ; the promise and faith stand in 
relation to each other. — &i& rtjs mgnoig, hy faith) not of works, 
for faith depends on the promise alone. " The Spirit from 
without kindles within us some spark of faith, whereby we lay hold 
of Christ, and even the Spirit Himself, that He may dwell within 
us." — Flacius. 

15. "O/iws) yet; although it be only a marCs testament or 
covenant, from which the comparison is taken. — avSpdmu, of a 
man) whose purpose it is of far less importance to maintain. — 
xex,vpo)//,hrtv, confirmed) when once all things have been ratified, 
for example, by the death of the testator, Heb. ix. 1 6. So xai 
ixupd^ri ayphs, Dp'l, Gen. xxiii. 20. — ovSilg) no man, not even 
the author himself, unless some unexpected cause either in his 
own mind or from without should happen (such a cause as can- 
not occur to God) : much less any other person [since he is here 
indeed speaking of a point of equity (the matter of right), for in 
point of fact testaments or bequests made by men are sooner or 
later infringed not without incurring heavy guilt. — V. g.] ; and to 
that other person the law corresponds in the Apodosis. For 
^6//,og, the law, is here considered also, as a second person dis- 
tinct from the promise of God, as it were by personification, in 
the same way that sin and the law are opposed to God, Rom. vi. 
13, viii. 3 ; and Mammon, as if it were a master, is opposed to 
God, Matt. vi. 24 : and the elements of the world are compared 



24 OALATIANS III. 16. 

with the tutors, and the law is called a schoolmaster, presently 
after, vor. 24, ch. iv. 2, 3. The promise is looked upon as more 
ancient, and as spoken by God : the law, as more recent, and 
as distinguished from God the lawgiver ; because the promise 
more peculiarly belongs to God ; the law is, as it were, some- 
thing more extraneous ; see ver. 17, 18, 21, 22. — ahTsT ri svidia- 
rdesirai, disannuls or adds to it) in whole or in part : by abolish- 
ing, taking away legacies, or adding new charges or conditions. 
Makes of none effect, ver. 17, corresponds to both words. 

16. 'Eppiineav, were spoken) a weighty expression. — a! ivay- 
yiXia.1, the promises) In the plural; the promise frequently re- 
peated [ver. 17, 13] : and it was twofold, of things on earth and 
things in heaven ; of the land of Canaan, and of the world, and of 
all the good things of God, Eom. iv. 13. But the law was 
given once for all. — xal, and) Gen. xiii. 15, xii. 7, xv. 18, xvii 
8. — \iyiij He says) God. — ws l-jrl rnXXav, as of many) as if there 
was one seed before the law, another under the law. — wj if evhg, 
as of one) See how Paul draws a conclusion of great weight 
from the grammatical accident, number ; and this is the more 
wonderful, because jnt is never put in the plural, unless in 
1 Sam. viii. 15, where it however denotes lands, not seeds. 
Indeed, in the LXX. Int. the force of the singular number is 
more apparent. Moreover, Paul has not here determined that 
seed denotes one single offspring alone, and that seeds, and they 
alone [i.e. that it is the plural alone, which must], signify a numer- 
ous offspring : for seed in the singular very often implies a 
multitude ; but he means to say this, that there is one seed, i.e. 
one posterity, one family, one race of the sons of Abraham, to 
all of whom the inheritance falls by promise, [after Moses, as 
well as before Moses ; of the uncircumcision not less than of the 
circumcision. — ^V. g.] not to some by promise, to others by the 
law, Kom. iv. 16. But you will do well to distinguish between 
the promise of the blessing and the promise of the inheritance 
of the world or of the earth ; in the former, not in the latter, the 
appellation, seed, has regard to Christ. For the blessing is ac- 
complished in Abraham, not by or in himself (per se), inasmuch 
as he died before the Gentiles obtained the blessing, but inas- 
much as he has the seed ; and it is accomplished in the seed of 
Abraham, not because that seed is innumerable ; for Abraham 



GALATIANS III. 17. 25 

himself did not bless, but received the blessing ; how much less 
can his posterity bless, who only receive with him the blessing 
by faith. Therefore the blessing is accomplished in Christ, who 
is the one Seed most excellent and most desired, who in and by 
Himself bestows the blessing. But yet, because all the posterity 
of'Abraham are akin to Him [Christ], therefore, the blessing is 
said to be accomplished in the seed of Abraham in common, but 
to come to the Gentiles, ver. 14. The promise of the earth, and 
therefore of the inheritance, was given to Abraham and his seed, 
i.e. to his numerous posterity, ver. 19, 22, not, however, to Christ, 
but in relation to Christ \in Christum, "until Christ should come," 
ver. 19 ; " with a view to Christ," ver. 24, s/'s Xpigrhv, and ver. 17 
in Rec. Text]. — 05 san Xpiarhg, who is Christ^ Sg, who, is not to 
be restrictedly referred to the expression, to the seed, but to the 
whole of the foregoing words in this sense : [all of which God 
says in reference to Christ] that which God says is wholly in 
reference to [with a view to] Christ.^ [i.e. to Abraham and his 
seed belong the promises, or, in other words, the blessing promised 
in Christ. — V. g.] For Christ upholds all the promises, 
2 Cor. i. 20. In Greek and Latin the gender of the pronoun 
often corresponds to the substantive that follows. Cic. Ignes 
guas (attracted to the gender of sidera, instead of that of 
ignes) sidera vocatis, [So here Sj, attracted to the gender of 
Xpidrbg, instead of 3, referring to the whole antecedent dis- 
course.] 

17. ToDro di X'syta, but this I say) He shows to what the com- 
parison, ver. 15, refers. — bia,^fjxriv) The word is taken here in a 
sense a little more extensive than that of a testament, for 6 
3;a^s/i£vos, the party entering into an arrangement, who is referred 
to here, is the immortaP [undying] God. And yet the term 
testament is more consonant with this passage than covenant, 
ver. 18, at the end. Comp. note on Matt. xxvi. 28. — ■rpoxixupia- 
l/.i)inv,^ confirmed before) Confinned, ver. 15, corresponds to this : 

^ Beng. seems to take of, who or which, i.e. as the subject of the whole pre- 
vious discussion, and of all the promises, just mentioned, which God has made, 
is Christ. — Ed. 

' Whereas a testament implies the death of the testator ; Heb. ix. 16. — 
Ed. 

' Tlie words following si; Xpunou hythe margin of the larger Ed. had been 



86 GALATIANS HI. ]8. 

but rrph, before, is added on account of those four hundred and 
thirty years. The' testament was confirmed by the promise 
itself, and that promise repeated, and by an oath, and that too 
many years hefore : 'in, in ver. 18, agrees with this word before. 
— fiira, after) It, will be said : The epistle to the Hebrews (vii. 
28, note) everywhere prefers to the law those things which were 
confirmed ^srii, after the law ; how then is that preferred here, 
after which the law was given ? Ans. Those things are noticed 
there, in which the new confirmation [thing confirmed, cove- 
nant] was expressly derogatory to the old confirmation [thing 
confirmed, covenant] : but that the law was derogatory to the 
promise, which is here urged, was added neither in the time of 
Abraham, nor of Moses. Ti am a.f/7ii, that which was from the 
beginning, is preferred in both cases : comp. Matt. xix. 8. 
Everywhere Christ prevails. — 'irn, years) The greatness of the 
interval increases the authority of the promise. — yiyomg, which 
was, came into existence) This also has the effect of attributing 
inferiority to the law, and of imparting elegance to the personi- 
fication. He does not say, give7i, as if the law had existed be- 
fore it was given ; nor does he add, by God, as he had said 
concerning the testament or covenant. There is another reason 
for these words, John i. 17.— vo/ioc, the law) He speaks in the 
nominative case ; so that God who pron;iises, and the law which 
does not detract from that promise, may be distinctly opposed 
to each other, and the hinge of this antithesis is the personifica- 
tion previously noticed.— oupt d^vpoT, does not make void) A 
metonymy of the consequent [for the antecedent], i.e. the law 
does not confer the inheritance.— e;? rh xocrocpy^ga.,) to make of no 
effect the promise. But it is rendered vain or of no effect, if the 
power of conferring the inheritance be transferred from it to 
the law. 

18. E/, if) A conditional syllogism, of which, when the conse- 
quent IS taken away, the antecedent is taken away; so that 
the conclusion is, therefore the inheritance is not from the law.— 

judged as deserving rather to he omitted, hut hy the ecceellera decision of 

the 2d Ed. they have been received into the Germ. Ver. E B 

DGfg Vulg. and both Syr. Versions support the addition in Rec Text tl 
XowToV. But ABC, some of the best MSS. of Vulg., Memph and Svr J 
ject the addition.— Ed. '' ^ " '^^' 



GALATIANS III. 19, 20. 27 

&ths, God) Here the promise is expressly predicated of 
God. 

19. T/ o5i/ vo/io5 ;)• Some use this punctuation, r/ ouv ; o v6/jioc, 
x.r.X. Indeed r/ oSv is often put by itself; sometimes, however, 
the interrogation is given at length, ri oh (pri/j^i ; 1 Cor. x. 19 : rl 
oh rh ■jrepieah rov 'loudaiou ; Eom. iii. 1. What then is [the use ofl 
the law, i.e., one might say, was the law therefore given in vain? 
— tSiv ■jrapa^dgsciiv x^?'h because of transgressions) that they 
might be acknowledged and might gain strength. Transgres- 
sions committed by men are noticed not so much before, Rom. 
V. 1.3, as after the giving of the law. The same word occurs 
at Rom. iv. 15, where see the note; and in the plural at Heb. 
ix. 15. The antithesis is continueth, ver. 10. The thing itself 
is explained at ver. 21, 22 : namely, all are "concluded under 
sin." — ETstfjj, it was put, given) He does not say, put instead of, 
substituted [for the promise]. Many have vpogiriSn,^ but Jts^jj 
is more consistent with ver. 15. — 'i'^Ori, should come) comp. came, 
ver. 23. — rh si:ipij,a., the seed) viz., believers of the New Testa- 
ment, to whom is given the fulfilment of the promise ; ver. 22. 
— ^ iviiyyiKTM, to whom, the -promise was made) or rather to 
whom God promised; comp. Intnyyikrai, Rom. iv. 21; Heb. 
xii. 26. — Siarayelg, ordained) not smharayilg \^ comp. ver. 15, 
\jnribioi,Ta,ssiTa,i, addeth thereto any new ordinance]. — bi ayysXm, 
h x^'P^ fMSiTotj, by angels, in the hand of a mediator) A double 
mediation. Angels being the representatives of God, Heb, 
ii. 2 : a mediator standing as representative of the people. God 
delegated the law to angels as something rather alien to Him 
and severe : He reserved the promise to Himself, and gave 
and dispensed it according to His own goodness. Moses was the 
mediator ; hence it is frequently said, ntyD l''^, by the hand of 
Moses. We have the definition of a mediator, Deut. v. 5. 
Moses, as a mediator, is quite different from Christ — the one 
keeps back [repels] — the other brings forward [attracts]. 

20. 'O ii jjiisiriii, now a Mediator) The article has the meaning 
of the relative. That Mediator, Moses, who was far later than 

^ Upoae-ri^yi is read by AB (judging from silence) C, both Syr. Versions, 
etc. 'EriSn by GD(A) corrected later, fg Vulg. (positaest), Iren. 182, 318. 
—Ed. 

' Ordained as a new thing to supersede the promise. — Ed. 



18 GALATIANS 111. 21. 

the promise, and at the same time severe. — 'mo;, of one) The 
middle term of the syllogism, of which the major and minor 
proposition is expressed, the conclusion is understood, One does 
not make use of that Mediator (that is, whosoever is one [one 
and the same unchanging being] does not transact first without 
a mediator, then the same one through a mediator ; nor does he 
afterwards withdraw himself [after ha-\dng first dealt with His 
people immediately and directly], so as to transact through a 
mediator ; for familiar acquaintance does not generally decrease, 
but increase) : but God is one. Therefore God did not transact 
first without a mediator, then through a mediator. Therefore 
that party, to which the mediator belonged, is not one and the 
same with God, but different from God, namely the law} — o ii 
0fJs iJi eeriv, but God is one) There is not one God before and 
another after the giving of the law, but one and the same God. 
Before the law He transacted without a mediator ; therefore the 
mediator at Mount Sinai does not belong to God, but to the 
law ; whereas the promise belongs to God ; comp. on the unity 
of God, in reference to the same subject, Eom. iii. 30 ; also 
1 Tim. ii. 5 : and the oneness of God before and after the law 
agrees most beautifully with the oneness of the seed before and 
after the law. Thus Paul infers from the very manner of giving 
the law, that the law was given on account of sin ; and thus 
the new objection in the following verse is in consonance. 

21. o5v, then) This objection may be taken from the circum- 
stance, that the law is said to have been given because of trans- 
gressions. The answer is, that the law is not against the pro- 
mises, and in regard to the answer two considerations are pre- 
sented : The one is, the law in itself, though it were wilhng, 
cannot give the life that has been promised, ver. 21 ; the other 
is, nevertheless, as a schoolmaster, it assisted the promise of life; 

' The syllogism is one of the first figure in Ferio. The major prop, is : 
One does not make use of that mediator. The minor is : But God is 
one ; and the conclusion is, therefore God does not use that mediator But 
the conclusion drawn by Bengel is not directly from the major prop 
but from the explanation of it within the parenthesis, and is perfectly sound 
accordmg to his statement. The conclusion in the last sentence is not quite 
so clear. Let it be remembered, however, that there was a, double media- 
tion. God delegated the law to angels, who gave it to Moses: therefore 
Moses came between the law and the people. Transl. 



GALATIANS HI. 22. 20 

ver. 22-iv, 7. The first consideration is proved by this Enthj- 
meme^ (of the same sort as at ver. 18) : If the law could give 
you life, righteousness would be by the law ; but righteousness 
is not by the law ; supply [the conclusion], therefore the law 
cannot give life. The major proposition is evident, for only the 
just shall live, ver. 11. The minor proposition, and at the same 
time the second consideration itself, is proved by ver. 22 : and 
that too by Epanodus ;^ for of these four terms, to give life, righte- 
ousness, sin, promise, the first and fourth, the second and third, 
have respect to each other. — vofLog, the law) It is called the law, 
not the law of God : but we say, the promises of God, not, the 
promises absolutely. — il yap, for if) The conditional force does 
not fall upon was given, for the law was certainly given, but^ 
upon was able {could have). — i dwd/jLivoi, that was able) The 
article shoTi^s that the emphasis is on d!jm/ji,ou. The law would 
wish [to give life], ver. 12, for it says, he shall live, but it is not 
able. — t,uomin(!ai, to give life) In this expression death is taken 
for granted as threatened [by the law] against the sinner, and 
therefore the language becomes very distinct. The law offers 
life conditionally, ver. 12 ; but does not confer it, because it 
cannot, being deprived of all power to do so by sin. — ovTiog, 
verily) not merely in the opinion of those maintaining justifica- 
tion by works. The matter in hand [justification] is a serious 
one [the question at issue is a serious reality], although it be 
now beyond the power of the law. — fi dixaioaivri, righteousness) 
For righteousness is the foundation of life. The antithesis is 
sin, ver. 22. 

22. 'AXXa, but) So far is righteousness from being of the law, 
that the acknowledgment of sin is rather what comes of the 
law. — guHx'ksieiv, hath concluded) It has comprehended sinneirs, 
that were formerly unconcerned [free from all alarm], and has 
concluded them all together ; comp. inclosed [awexXsieav, of the 
multitude of fishes in the net], Luke v. 6. — jj ypa(p^, the Scrip- 

' See Append. A, covert syllogism, where one or other premiss is under- 
stood. Here it is the oratorical Enthymeme, where an argument is con- 
firmed from its contrary : If the law could, etc., tchich it could not, etc. — 
Ed. 

* See App. It is the repetition of the same words, either as to sound or 
sense, in an inverted order. 



an GALATIANS III. 33-27. 

ture) The Scripture, not God, is said to have concluded all 
under sin ; although a < concluding' of that sort is elsewhere 
ascribed to God, Eom. xi. 32. Moreover, it is worthy of notice, 
that he says, the Scripture, not the law. Scripture began to be 
written, not at the time when the promise was made, but at the 
time when the law was given ; for God stands to His promises 
even without writing : but it was necessary, that the perfidy 
[faithlessness to God's commands] of the sinner should be re- 
buked by the written letter. Furthermore, in the subsequent 
clause also, that, etc., Paul touches upon something, which goes 
beyond the sphere of the law, not beyond that of Scripture.* — 
■r^ Tdvra., all) Not only all men, but also all the things, which they 
are and have in their possession. 

23. Tfiv "xleriv, the faith of Jems Christ) So the following 
verses. — ifipovpod/aSa, euyxiyXusi/jhoi, we were kept shut up) These 
two words elegantly disjoin the law and faith. The being 
' kept' in custody is the consequence of the shutting up. Wisd. 
xvii. 16 : kfipovpeTn ilg rfiv aelbrjpov t'lpxr^v xaraxXeiehig, he was kept 
shut up in a prison without iron bars. — euyxix'Ktiefihoi tig) So the 
Lxx., enyx'kihiv lis idvarov, Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxvii.) 50, xxxi. 9 ; 
Amos i. 6, 9. But it is an abbreviated phrase : shut up, and 
therefore reserved and forced to the faith, etc. [so that there 
remained to us no refuge hut faith. — V. g.] Polybius says, tig 
auT&g auvsxXileSri rag h Idloig oixiraig xai cplXoig IXmbag, " he was 
shut up to those very hopes which were among [which depended 
on] his own domestics and friends ;" and so it often occurs in the 
same writer. — See Raphelius. Irenaeus has, the sons of God are 
shut up to the belief of His coming : 1. iii. c. 25. 

24. Tlaibayatyhg, a schoolmaster) who has kept us under disci- 
pline, lest we should slip from his hands. — vrtvioi, infants [' chil- 
dren'], need such discipline, iv. 3. There is again a personifica- 
tion of the law. * 

26. rhl) Sons, emancipated, the keeper being removed. 

27. Xpigriv sv8usas6t, ye have put on Christ) Christ is to you 
the toga virilis.'' You are no longer estimated by what you 
were, you are all alike in Christ and of Christ ; see the foUow- 

' And for this reason also, jj ypu,(pii is here said, not o j/o'^oj jj^ 

2 Among the Romans, when a youth arrived at manhood, he assumed 
the dress of a full-grown man, which was called toga virilis Tr. 



GALATIANS III. 28, 29.-IV. 1-3. 31 

ing verses [ver. 28, There is neither Jew nor Greek, etc., for 
ye are all one in Christ]. Christ is the Son of God, and ye 
are in Him the sons of God, Tho. Gataker says, if a person 
were to ash me to define a Christian, I would give him no defini- 
tion more readily than this : A Christian is one, who has put on 
Christ : 1. 1, misc. c. 9. 

28. Oux. hi, there is not) These were formerly differences, now 
they are at an end, along with their causes and signs : hi for 
hsari, with the preposition to which h presently corresponds. — 
'lovdaTog, x.r.X, the Jew, etc.) Col. iii. 11, note. — ctfitfsii xal 6ri'Kv, 
male and female) In the circumcision there was the male : for 
the weaker sex, by which the transgression began, was with- 
out it. — iTg, one) A new man, who has put on Christ, Eph. ii. 15. 
— h Xpierifi 'irieou, in Christ Jesus) construed with one. 

29. ''A^a, therefore) Christ sanctifies the whole posterity of 
Abraham.^-ETrayytX/av, the promise) given to Abraham. 



CHAPTEK IV. 

1. Aiycii 8i, Now I say) He explains what he said, iii. 24, con- 
cerning the schoolmaster. — o xXyipovo/iog, the heir) This term is 
brought from ch. iii. 29. — vfjirioi) a child, under agi. — oWsv 5/a- 
fipii dovXov, differs nothing from a servant) Because he is not at 
his own disposal, regarding deeds and contracts. — vavTiav, of all) 
Those things which relate to the inheritance. 

2. 'Emrpomu;) tutors of an heir. — olxovofiovg) curators of goods. 
[Engl. Ver. not so well, governors'}. 

3. 'Tirh TO, eTisi-j(i7a, tou x6g//,qu, under the elements of the world) — 
^m^sTov, an element) A certain first principle, from which other 
things arise and are constituted ; in the universe, 2 Pet. iii. 10, 
see note : and in letters (learning), Heb. v. 12 (comp. eroi^siasii, 
respecting the child in the womb, 2 Mace. vii. 22) : thence by 
Metonjony, elements of the world in this passage, likewise weak 
and beggarly elements, presently, ver. 9, i.e. principles of living, 
which depend on times marked out by the motion of the elements, 
i.e. of the sun and moon ; likewise principles which refer to 



32 GALATIANS IV. i, 8. 

meat, drink, and other sublunary matters, all these being only 
material and external objects, iii. 28. — Comp. Col. ii. 8, 1 6, 20, 
etc. They are called tutors in the concrete, elements in the 
abstract. The Son of God, sent down from heaven, and the 
Spirit of the Son of God, iv. 6, ai-e opposed to these worldly 
things. — diSouXu,u,'£m, reduced to slaver]/ [in bondage]) This an- 
swers to, He differs nothing from a slave [servant], ver. 1. 

4. Ti -rkfipufia rou xP""""} *^^ fulness of the time) This has 
reference to as long as, and to the time appointed, ver. 1 [" as long 
as he is"] ; 2, [" until the time appointed"] : for the Church also 
has its own ages. — i^amernXu, sent forth) Out of heaven, from 
Himself, as He had promised. The same verb is repeated, ver. 
6, concerning the Holy Spirit. [Tlie infinite love of the Father ! — 
V. g.] Comp. Is. xlviii. 16, where Castellio and others give this 
interpretation : Tlie Lord Jehovah sent me and His Spirit. Be- 
fore this visitation men did not seem to be ao much the object of 
God's care ; Heb. viii. 9 : afterwards a new appearance of things 
was presented. — rh mh avrou, His (own) Son) The Author of 
liberty, airov, in a reciprocal sense. His own. What that means 
is evident from the train of thought in this passage, for we have 
received first adoption, then the Spirit of adoption. Therefore 
Christ Himself is not the Son of God, merely because He was 
sent and anointed by the Father. 

5. "Iva roi)s, x.r.x. — harnv,that — iAai) An Anaphora.' The first 
that is to be referred to made under the law: therefore the 
second has respect to born of a woman. There is a Chiasmus 
very much resembling this, atEph. iii. 16, v. 25, 26, which see 
with the annot. Christ, in the simihtude of our condition, made 
our condition good ; in the similitude of our nature. He made us 
the sons of God : y(v6ij.m\i is repeated, giving force to the mean- 
ing, He might have been born of a woman (yiviaSa, Ix yvvaiy.og), 
and yet not have been made under the law (yevisSai iirb vofnov) ; 
but j^et He was born of a woman {iyinro ix ywaixhg), that He 
might be made under the law. The first yivC/nvov, made with 
the addition of U ywaixhc, of a woman, takes (adopts) the mean- 
ing, being horn.—l^ayopasvt, might redeem) from slavery to 
liberty.— rijv uiohalav, the adoption) the dignity o/ sons, a privilege 

' Append. The frequent repetition of the same words to mark beginnino-s 
—Ed. • & b • 



GALATIANS IV. 6-8. 33 

in which those who are of age delight, along with the ^actual en- 
joyment [usufructu] of the inheritance. — anXd^u/av) we might 
receive ; d-iro shows the suitableness' of the thing, which has been 
long ago predestined by God. 

6. "Or/, because) The indwelling of the Holy Spirit is the con- 
sequence of the condition of sons [their status as sons], the latter 
does not follow the former) — Isti) you are; even you of the 
Gentiles, — viol sons) who are of age, living with the Father on 
terms of free-bom liberty. — 'A/3/3a j Uar^p, Abba Father) The 
Hebrew noun is here dehghtfuUy used ; comp. Mark xiv. 36 ; 
and the union of the Hebrew and Greek idiom is consonant 
with the one mixed cry [in prayer] of the Hebrews and Greeks 
[made one in Christ]. The Hebrew says, Abba, the Greek says, 
i^aiAer, both, Abba, Father ; comp. Rev. i. 8.^ So peace, peace, 
is redoubled, in like manner, for the Jews and Greeks, Isa. 
Ivii. 19. Individuals also no less [than the whole Church] re- 
double their call upon the name of the Father. This is a pledge 
of sonship in the New Testament ; comp. Matt. vi. 9, note. 

7. El — ulhg, thou art — a son) Paul passes with a sweet effect 
from the plural to the singular, as in ch. vi. 1 ; and there is at 
the same time expressed in this passage the fatherly answer of 
God towards [in relation to] individuals who cry out, Abba, 
Father, in the spirit. — douXog, a servant) in the manner of in- 
feriors. — xXripovo/jbog) an heir in reality.^ 

8. Tore, then) when we were children [ver. 1],. — oix ildons &dv, 
not knowing God) The very wretched state of the Gentiles. — iSou- 
Xiusari, ye did service) being under a different bondage from 
that of the Jews, ver. 3. You worshipped gods not true with a 

' 'Awo in the compound expresses often something appropriate or due. — 
Ed. I 

2 " I am Alplia and Omega (Greek), the Beginning and Ending" (ex- 
pressed in Hebrew, s and n). The Greek and Hebrew are often so conjoined. 
Or rather it is vers. 7 to which Beng. refers, u»i (Greek), <x^ii:i (Hebrew). 
—Ed. 

' 0£o5, of God) See App., p. 11, on this passage, where the great variety 
renders it probable that Qiov jvas inserted from Rom. viii. 17. — Not. Grit. 
Yet the margin of the 2d Ed. gives less countenance to the omission, and the 
Germ. Vers, expresses the words of God, as if they were not doubtful.— E. B. 

ABC corrected later, g Vulg. Memph., read hx &im. G reads S/oi ©«'» 
Uec. Text reads ©£oS, 8<flJ XpiirTCv, with D(Ay. 

VOL. IV. C 



84 GALATIANS IV. 9, 10. 

worship not true. You had not been accustomed to the Mosaic 
worship ; and therefore it is more a matter of wonder, that you 
now desire [affect] it. You attained to the truth without those 
eleme.nts, and now at length [for the first time] you follow them. 
— r(i~s /iij (pigsi oZgi Siofi) So the Lxx., Tifi /tij hri h/p, 2 Chron. 
xiii. 9. 

9. Tvovres 0ibv, knowing God) The true God, who is a Spirit. 
Wlien you know Him, and yet follow eagerly after those elements, 
it is the same thing as if a master should wish to return to learn 
the alphabet [his A B C D child's book]. — /iaXXov, rather) it is 
the gift of God. He acknowledged and declared you to be His 
sons ; comp. Ex. xxxiii. 12, 17. What belongs to God, is of 
the chief consequence as concerns our salvation, rather than 
what belongs to ourselves ; comp. Phil. iii. 12. — *£?, how ?) An 
interrogation expressing much wonder ; i. 6, / marvel. — oraX/v, 
again) as we have formerly been in bondage. — aehvj^ xal 'JTrai^a, 
weak and beggarly) Weakness opposed to filial boldness, heggar- 
liness, to the abundance connected with the inheritance. — o7g, 
to which) to elements, not to God. — -jraXiv amhv (back) again 
afresh) You wish to be in bondage again : now to elements, as 
formerly to idols ; and afresh, you are in bondage to the same 
elements anew, by which Israel had been formerly enslaved ; 
comp. the word again, Eom. viii. 15, note. — Souy.iviiv, to be in 
bondage) in a manner unworthy of freemen. — SsXert, you wish) 
See ver. 21, and Mark xii. 38, note. [It is not every kind of 
readiness in wishing or desiring, that is good, Col. ii. 18, 23.— 
V.g.] 

10. 'Hfiipag) days : Eom. xiv. 5, i.e. Sabbaths, Col. ii. 16, 
note. The time of the Sabbath was held the most sacred of all. 
Therefore the order of gradation is to be observed, comp. 1 
Chron. xxiii. 31 ; 2 Chron. xxxi. 3 : ed^jSocra, vovm^iag, kpr&f. 
Sabbaths, new moons, feast days, in an affirmative sentence ; but 
in a prohibition, the order is inverted, as in the passage quoted 
fi:om Colossians above.— wapartipiTah) you observe, as if there 
were anything beside^ faith.— xa/ xa.podg, and times) longer 

1 The ■xccp:^ in the compound verb is evidently understood by Bens in 
this sense, as often ■^rccpci is used elsewhere, sc. of something added inciden- 
tally, besides what is really essential. So 6 i-o>o? wxpu^^7,6iu, the law entered 
stealthily, and as something superadded incidentally, Rom. v. 20 Fn 



GALATIANS IV. 11-13. Sfi 

than months, shorter than a year, i.e. feasts D''1J>D, which the 
Lxx. frequently translate xaipoiis, — sviauroiig, years) anniversary 
solemnities, for example, the commencement of the year with 
the month Tisri ; for it cannot be said that the sabbatical years, 
which had been fixed for the land of Canaan, were observed by 
the Galatians, although this epistle was written about the time 
of the sabbatical year, which ended (Dion, era) a.d. 48 ; see 
Ord. Temp, (arrangement of dates), p. 281, 423 [Ed. ii. p. 242, 
364]. 

11. ' X/iag, you) I do not fear this for my own sake, but for 
yours. — eig it/iag) on you ; an emphatic expression. 

12. VivsiSi, be ye) He suddenly lays aside roug Xoyous, the ar- 
guments suited for instruction, and has recourse to i]6n xa! ird^n, 
arguments that are calculated to conciliate and move, ver. 11-20 : 
of which whoever has not the ready command (and no carnal 
man has it), is not a perfect teacher. It is in this respect 
especially that the tenderest affection of the apostle humbly bent 
itself to the Galatians^ — iig syii, as I) Brotherly (referring to 
' Brethren') harmony of minds has the effect of causing the 
things which are taught to be the more readily received; 2 
Cor. vi. 13. He says therefore, " Join yourselves with me in 
my feeling towards Christ." The particle isg, as, denotes the 
closest union, 1 Kings xxii. 4. — xcfyii, I also) 'viz. am. — iig 
v/isTg, as you) I consider your loss as my own. — Shfiai tfiuv) I 
beseech you, that you may think as I do. — oidh fn fidixfjffan, ye 
have injured me in nothing) He who' offends another, or thinks 
that he is offended, stands aloof fi:om him ; but this is not your 
case. Some will say. Had they not offended Paul, by rendering 
his labour among them almost vain ? ver. 11. Paul answers : 
I have pardoned this, I do not recall it to my mind. There is 
at the same time a Meiosis [or Litotes, less expressed than is 
intended to be understood], i.e. you have embraced me with the 
kindest affection, ver. 14, 15. 

13. A(' aehveiav) 5;(i, on account of, by reason of infirmity. 
Infirmity had not been the cause of his preaching : but yet it 
proved an advantage [an assistance], owing to which Paul 
preached more effectively ; 2 Cor. xii. 9 ; though it might have 
seemed that the Galatians would have been the more easily dis- 
posed to reject him on account of it. 



86 GALA.TIANS IV. H-IT. 

14. Thv '!rsipae//,6v /iou, my temptation) i.e. me with p.e._ notwith- 
standing] my temptation. Holy men, even apostles, in former 
times did not conceal their temptations, as men do now, not even 
m public— Jv tT, eapxi /iou, in my fiesh) He mentions Paul in the 
flesh, 2 Cor. xii'. 7.— oJx ilo\jkynsa,rt, ye did not despise) through 
natural pride.— o05s l^iirTbean, nor rejected) through spiritual 
pride, with still greater contempt. There is a distinction— 
(1.) In respect to the object, the temptation in the flesh; 
and these temptations might have seemed worthy of con- 
tempt in a twofold way. (2.) In relation to the antithesis, which 
is twofold : 

a) you did not despise [igou^fv^ffars] me, but — as an angel: 
who might be greatly esteemed from the place which he occu- 
pies in creation, for he has a most excellent nature, on account 
of which even carnal man cannot but magnify the angels : 

j8) nor rejected [s^imxKSa.ri], hut — as Christ : this is more from 
a spiritual point of view [His spiritual relation to us]. 
— ayyiXov, an angel) The flesh, infirmity, even temptation, are un- 
known to angels ; wherefore to receive one as an angel, is to re- 
ceive him with great veneration. — Xpierhv, Christ) who is gi'eater 
than the atigels. 

15. Maxapisz/^hi) Maxapis/Lhi is an expression derived from 
/j,a,xapiZ,ia [I congratulate]. You were thankful for [You con- 
gratulated yourselves on account of] the Gospel, and for me its 
messenger : what cause was there for this thankfulness [congra- 
tulation of yourselves], if you now treat me with disdain V — 
op^aX/ious, eyes) very dear. 

16. 'E'x,6phg, an enemy) He, who speaks the truth, is a friend, 
and truth ought not to produce hatred against him in your 
minds. — aXrihliaiv, speaking the truth) preaching the pure [un- 
mixed] truth, even apart from my former temptation. 

17. ZriXovgiv, they zealously affect) They ^^gaZowsZ?/ solicit [cajole] 
you. He does not name his rivals. — o'u xaXug, not well) not 
[being] in Christ, although they seem to do what is good [welt]. 
The antithesis is, h xaXip, in a good thing, ver. 18. Neithe • the 

' eSaxari fioi, you would have given me) You would thus testify a grateful 
mind, on the ground that you obtained so great blessedness through me. 
That spontaneous affection is not to be looked for on the part of any mere ' 
mercenary. — V. g. ' 



GALATIANS IV. 18, 19. 87 

cause in their case, he says, nor the manner is good. — ixxXeTeai 
lj/j,S,g) exclude you from us, from me. They think, that we shall 
be excluded from you ; but they would not exclude us from you, 
but you from us : IxxXiTaai, I am disposed to think, is not used 
in the sense, in which the Latins say that chickens are hatched 
(excludi, thrust forth from the shell). 

18. Ka,Xhv ds, but it is good) He advises them not to allow 
themselves to be excluded. — rh t^riKovsSai) After the active he 
uses the middle. It is the duty of Paul in the name of Christ 
^(jXoui/, 2 Cor. xi. 2 : it is the part of ^the Church, as the bride, 
^riXotJgdat, to respond to the ardent love [of the Bridegroom and 
of His minister], to kindle zeal by zeal (see Chrys.), to be zeal- 
ous for one another [zelare inter se, to love zealously among 
themselves] ; to makes an emphatic addition [Epitasis. See Ap- 
pend.] — Iv jtaXw, in a good thing) when the matter in hand is 
good. Iv rSj Tapirtai, when I am present, answers to this ; and so 
also •jrdvroTi, always, corresponds to it. The latter is the time 
in general, while the expression, when I am present, is the time 
in particular, and that too modified so as at the same time to 
comprehend the ground of that zeal on their part, viz. that they 
had been able to exult, as they had done, at the presence of 
Paul : the iv xaXSt is in consonance with h ro 'sapiTvai, and may 
be taken with always for one idea, Whensoever any good thing 
is presented in your way, and not merely when I am present. — 
Iv rSj <!rapinai /j,e, when I am, present) They had formerly shown 
towards Paul, when present, great earnestness [zeal] of love, 
and had in turn sharpened the zeal of Paul, ver. 15. 

19. Tixvia fjLou, my little children) A father should be ^jjawt-os, 
i.e. affectionately and zealously honoured by his children. This 
closely agrees with [ver. 17, they zealously affect^ you, as d'e, but, 
which occurs in the following verse [ver. 18] shows. Paul ad- 
dresses the Galatians, not as a rival, but as a father, comp. 1 
Cor. iv. 15, with authority and the tenderest sympathy towards 
his little children — children that were weak and alienated from 
him. The pathetic style often accumulates figurative expres- 
sions. Here, however, the figure, derived from the mother, 
prevails. In the note on ^JiXoDtf^a;, conjugal affection (^^Xoj) 
was assumed from the parallelism. Even in spiritual things, 
love sometimes descends, rather than ascends ; 2 Cor. xii. 15. 



88 GALATIANS IT. 20, 21. 

— vdXiv, again) as formerly ; ver. 13. — ii&hta, I travail) with the 
utmost affection (zeal) ; 2 Cor. xi. 2 ; accompanied with crying 
[referring to (bmv^v, voice'], ver. 20. IWhen Paul wrote these very 
words, he exerted himself to the utmost, straining every nerve. 
— V. g.J He speaks according to the exigencies of the case, for 
in the natural birth, formation precedes the pains of labour. — 
c^xf'S ol, until) We must not cease to strive. Always is the cor- 
relative, ver. 18.— /AOfpw^jj, 6e/(?rme(i) that you may live nothing 
but Christ, and think nothing but Christ, ii. 20, and His suf 
ferings, death, life, Phil. iii. 10, 11. This is the highest beauty. 
This form is opposed eToix^iutsu to worldly formation [the eTaix^Ta. 
of the world, ver. 9]. — X^/ffrJs, Christ) He does not say here 
Jesus, but Christ ; and this too by metonymy of the concrete 
for the abstract. Christ, not Paul, was to be formed in the 
Galatians. — h Ifi/tv, in you) Col. i. 27. 

20. As, hut \indeedY) although my presence is not the one and 
only cause which ought to kindleyour zeal. — 'jrtx.psTmi, to be present) 
ver. 18. — &pri) Now it would be more necessary than formerly ; 
comp. again, ver. 19. — oKKa^ai) \to change] to accommodate the 
varying tones of the voice to the various feelings. They usually 
do so, who have zeal [are zealously affectionate in entreaties] 
whilst striving to recover the affections, that have been alienated 
from them. He writes mildly, ver. 12, 19, but he would wish 
to speak still more mildly. — ttiv (ptovriv fiou, my voice) The voice 
may be rendered more flexible than writing, according as the 
case demands. The art of speaking occupies the first place, 
that of writing is only vicarious and subsidiary ; 2 John ver. 
12 ; 3 John ver. 13, 14. — airopou/j,oi,i, I stand in doubt) I do not ~ 
find the way of coming in and going out among you. Paul 
aimed at the greatest ease in speaking to the Galatians. He 
accommodated his discourse as much as possible to the dulness 
of the Galatians, with a view to convince them. The doctrine of 
inspiration is not endangered by this fact ; see 1 Cor. vii. 25, note. 

21. Aiytri /to;, tell me) He urges them, as if Ae were present, 
tell me. — oOx axovin ; do ye not hear ?) when it is publicly read. 
You therefore act, as if you heard nothing of Abraham written 
in the law. He has recourse to an allegory only by the force 
of extreme necessity. This is, as it were, a sacred anchor ver 
20. ' 



GALATIANS IV. 22-24. 39 

22. Tiypa/trai, it is written) Gen, xsi.—' A^paa/i, Abraham) 
whose sons you wish to be. 

24. ' AXXri7opo{i/i.im) is compounded of 3.XXo; and ayopea, to say ; 
so that an allegory is, when one thing is said, another more ex- 
cellent is signified, for example, in mythology ; see Eustathius, 
or at least the index to his work. This scheme will assist the 
comparison : — 

SUBJECTS. 

HISTOEICALLT, THE TWO SONS OF ABRAHAM. 

Hagar, the Bond^naid : Tlie Free Woman. 

The Son of the Bond^naid : Isaac, the son of the Free 

Woman. 

ALLEGORICALLY, THE TWO COVENANTS. 

She who has a husband : The Desolate. 

Those who are from Mount Those who are of the pro- 



mise. 
The Mountain (that is now) : She who is upwards (that 

shaU be afterwards). 
Jerusalem, which now is : Jerusalem, which is above. 

The Flesh: The Spirit. 

PREDICATES. 

The Mother : brings forth brings forth free-bom chil- 

slaves. dren. 

The OfiBpring, abundant at more abundant afterwards. 

first: 

persecutes : suffers persecution, 

is cast out : rejoices in the inheritance. 

But the language of Paul is of the most extensive application, so 
that his discourse may comprehend the doctrine both of the Law 
and the Gospel, and the Old and New Dispensations ; and not 
only all these things together in the abstract, but also the 
people belonging to each doctrine and dispensation, as if they 
were two families, with their respective mothers, in the concrete. 



40 GALATIANS IT. 2S. 

Hence that declaration, Agar is the covenant from Mount Sinai, 
to which we is opposed, ver. 28. Hence, by parity of reasoning, 
the quick passing from the one to the other in the allegory.-^ 
/iia [Lh, the one indeed) But {&i), in ver. 26, corresponds to this 
indeed (/^sv) ; and there follows at ver. 28, express mention of 
the promise, as an antithesis to Sinai or the law ; and the same 
term, promise, swallows vip the expression, the other covenant, 
which would seem to he required in the Apodosis. — 2/ra, Sinai) 
Therefore Paul chiefly treats of the moral law ; comp. iii. 19 ; 
Heb. xii. 18, etc. — ils dotiXilav jfnZiea, which gendereth to bondage) 
For she has children, and those too at first numerous. — n^ig, 
which) The predicate. Hagar is the subject,^ if the enuncia- 
tion be considered within the context ; on the other hand, with- 
out the context, it is the predicate, as is the case in the alle- 
gorical discourse. Matt. xiii. 37, 38. 

25. Ti ycip S/i/a ofoj, x.t.X., for Sinai is a mountain in Arabia, 
and [but] answereth to Jerusalem that now is, for it is in bondage 
with her children) Hagar, ver. 24, and Isaac, ver. 28, are opposed 
to each other, where we must observe^ that Hagar is mentioned 
by her own name, not so Sarah ; and yet Isaac is named, whilst 
Ishmael is not ; inasmuch as the child follows [and is included 
under] the mother, a bond-maid ; but the son of the free woman 
is distinguished [is taken into account] by his own name. Thus 
the introduction of Hagar in this section stands on a clear and 
well-defined footing. In the meantime, the covenant from 
Mount Sinai, and the promise, are opposed to each other in ver. 
24 and 28; in like manner, at ver. 25 and 26, Jerusalem that 
now is, and Jerusalem above. Some consider these words, "Sim 
opog isTiv h r^ ' ApajSlcf, which are found in all the copies, as a 
gloss; but they are wrong. For thus Paul's argument is 
weakened, when he brings forward the bondage engendered 
from Mount Sinai [as answering] to that of Jerusalem, which 
now is ; ver. 24, 25. Proper copies, quoted in the Apparatus, 
and rh, the neuter gender of the article, show, that the word 
Hagar rather was brought from ver. 24 to ver. 25; for Hagar 
is feminine, but Sinai is neuter.^ Nor do those words, for she is 

' Beng. thus translates it, " Which Hagar is," not " Which is Hagar."— 
—Ed. 

' Hence the omission of the word "Ayccp in this verse, not so much approved 



GALATIANS IV. 25. 41 

in bondage with her children, require Hagar to be mentioned : 
For \y3itK\ her is to be referred, as not to Sinai in the neuter, 
so much the less to Hagar, but to Jerusalem which now is. The 
former (Hagar) had a son, but the latter (Jerusalem) had sons. 
These remarks relate to the whole passage ; we shall now ob- 
ser.ve some things on each portion in detail. — S/va opoc, Sinai, a 
mountain) Ver. 24 has from the Mount Sinai ; now the order of 
the words is changed [Sinai going before mount here ; but mount 
before Sinai in ver. 24] (comp. Eph. ii. 1, note). In the former 
passage, more regard is had to the mountain, inasmuch as it was 
upon it that the law was given, whatever name it might have 
[the name Sinai not being taken into account there] ; after- 
wards, it is rather considered as Sinai [the name Sinai being 
the prominent idea], a moxmtain in Arabia. — is\tiST(iiyi7 il) bi, and 
yet \hui\, although it is in Arabia ; £ruirro(;^£« is used of that 
which agrees with something else in a comparison. This agree- 
ment is evident in itself, for it is one and the same people that 
received the law on Mount Sinai, and that inhabit the city of 
Jerusalem ; and the people at both periods stand on the same 
footing.^ It is to be added, that Sinai and Jerusalem were 
nearly under the same meridian, and were united with slight 
interruption almost by the same chain of mountains. — r^ nDn, that 
now is) The antithesis is, that is above. — »uv, now, refers to time, 
above' to place ; the antithesis of either must be supplied from 
t|ie other in the semiduplex' oratio. The Jerusalem which is 
present [" that now is"], and earthly ; the Jerusalem which is 

of on the margin of the larger Ed., is reckoned among the fxed readings ly 
the margin of the 2d Ed., in which the Germ. Vers, concurs. But the things 
deserve to be compared which Michaelis has in der Einleitung, T. i. p. m. 
646, wheve he shows that Hagar in the Arabia idiom, denotes a, lock^ and there- 
fore the words ra'Aya-p ^lua opog eaTiii iii rji 'Apxfii'f ought to be thus trans- 
lated : " The word Hagar signifies in Arabic the Mount Sinai." — E. B. 

Lachm. read To ydp liua. with CGg Vulg., omitting "Ayap: Tischend., 
To yxp "Ayxp 1i»Si, with both Syr, Versions and Rec. Text. B also has 
To " Aya,p. AD(A) Memph. read to" Se " Ayap. — Ed. 

' "Eadem populi utroque tempore ratio." What holds good of the 
people at the one time, holds good of them at the other, as to their status 
and principles. — Ed. 

' See App. An abbreviated mode of expression, when two members of a 
sentence stand in such a relation, that each needs to supply some words from 
the other. — Ed. 



43 GALATIANS IV. 26-29. 

above, and eternal. The expression, which is above, is said with 
the greater propriety on this account, that it alludes to the 
higher and nobler part of Jerusalem, and rises above Mount 
Sinai : and the Jerusalem which is above, inasmuch as she is 
already our mother, could not be suitably spoken of as future 
[as that which is about to be, in antithesis to the Jerusalem that 
now is] ; not only is she future [" about to be," as regards the 
future], but also more ancient [as regards the past], than ^ m; 
[the Jerusalem] lohich now is, inasmuch as the latter has not 
existed for a long period, nor wiU it exist in time to come. — 
bovXihii, is in bondage) As Hagar was in bondage to her mistress, 
so Jerusalem, that now is, is in bondage to the law, and also to 
the Eomans, — her civil state thus being in accordance with her 
spiritual state. 

26. 'H il am, but she who is above) Heb. xii. 22 ; Kev. xxi. 
— eXeu^epa, free) as Sarah was. — ring, who) Jerusalem. — tirirrif, 
motJier) The ancients said of their own Rome: Rome is our 
common father-land. — vdvraiv, of all) as many as there are of us. 
To this refer the many [children] in the following verse. 

27. TiypaiTTai, it is Written) Is. liv. i. — lippdvSriri, rejoice) with 
singing. — anTpa, barren) Sion, Jerusalem above. — pn^ov, break 
forth) into crying, — xa,! ^orjeov, and shout) for joy. — r5jj ipr}/iou, 
of the desolate) i.e. The New Testament Church, collected for 
the most part from the Gentiles, who had not [answering to t?s 
ipijfiov, the desolate] the promise ; and as this New Testament 
Church was made up of those who heretofore were seen to have 
had no such aims, it is called " not bearing," " not- travailing," — 
Tjjg s^oudjjg, than she who hath) the Jewish Church. 

28. KcctA 'iffaax, [as] after the similitude of Isaac). — Iva.yjikiag, 
of the promise) ver. 23 — leiLh) we are, and ought to wish to be 
so, ver. 31. 

29. 'E&li^xi, persecuted) wantonly. Gen. xxi. 9. Persecution 
is the work of carnal, not of spiritual men. \_Take care lest you 
esteem it of little importance, whatever is done against the children 
of the free woman. — V. g.]—rhv x.a.r&, •mufia) viz. ymn^hTa, him 
who was bom after the Spirit. Paul, having the Apodosis in his 
mind, so frames his discourse respecting Ishmael and Isaac as to 
apply it to carnal men and beHevers. Where the Spirit is there 
is liberty. 



GALATIANS IV. 30, 31.- V. ]. 43 

30. 'H Ypcipfi, the Scripture) Sarah [said], concerning Isaac 
[literally] ; the Scripture [saith so] by allegorj'. — 'U^aXt, cast 
out) from the house and the inheritance. — rriv ifaidlsxriv xai rhv v'lh 
aiiTijg, the bond-maid and her son) The servile condition of itself 
deserves expulsion ; but persecution [on the part of the bond- 
servant] against spiritual sons famishes a hanie for putting the 
punishment in execution.' — ou yiip /j,^ xXij^ono/iijir*), for he shall not 
be heir) Sarah looks to the Divine appointment regarding Isaac 
as the one and only heir, although Ishmael also had been cir- 
cumcised, 

31.' Trjs iXiuSipas, of the free) In the liberty follows. An An- 
adiplosis.* 



CHAPTER V. 

1. T^ iXivSepicf — grrjMTt, stand fast — in the liberty) The short 
clause, wherewith Christ has made us free, has the force of aetio- 
logy, or assigning the reason. Liberty, and slavery (bondage), 
are antithetic. It is without any connecting particle, iii. 13 : 
rfj eXiuhpicf, [by virtue of the] liberty, is emphatically put with- 
out h, in : liberty itself confers the power of standing. 'uXivS'e- 
piiiei signifies has rendered free, and fi coheres with free [rather 
than with the rendered^ : stand, erect, without a yoke. — -rdXiv, 
again) ch. iv. 9, note. — ^uyw douXilag, with the yoke of bondage) 
This expression is applied, not merely to the circumcision which 
was given to Abraham as the sign of the promise, but to circum- 
cision as connected with the whole law, given long after on 
Mount Sinai, ch. iv. 24, iii. 17. For the Jews had been accus- 
tomed to look upon circumcision rather as a part of the law 
received by Moses, than as the sign of the promise given to 
Abraham, John vii. 22. Nor was circumcision so much a yoke 

' Oi/K hfieii, we are not, i.e. we neither ought nor wish to be.— -V. g. 

2 See App. The repetition of the same word in the end of the preceding 
and in the beginning of the following member. Here the t^j i>.iv6ipa.e at 
the end of this ver., and the conjugate word Tij ihtvhpia. at the beginning of 
ch. V. 1, constitutes the Anadiplosis. — Ed. 



44 GALATIANS V. 2-S. 

in itself, as it was made a yoke by the law ; and the law itself 
was much more a yoke. Therefore Paul, by a weighty meto- 
nymy, puts the consequent for the antecedent : Be not circum- 
cised, for he who is circumcised, along with this part of it, comes 
under the whole law, and revolts from Christ, ver. 2—4. Nor 
does the apostle oppose Christ so immediately to circumcision as 
he does to the law. He speaks according to their perverse 
custom, while he refutes their Galatism and Judaism ; and yet 
he does not at all deviate from the truth. Peter also. Acts xv. 
10, calls it a yoke. — my^is^i) ivs^o/i^ai, in the middle voice, / 
holdfast ly, obstinately. That passage in Xiphil. in Epit. Dion. 
concerning a pole fixed in the ground, and which cannot be 
pulled out, shows the import of the word : In rp yfj hie-xiro, ua<!rfp 
klivifxiKuig, " it held a fast hold in the earth, as if it had grown 
there." 

2. 'Eaii 'jrepirifivrieh, if ye be circumcised) This should be pro- 
nounced with great force. They were being pircumcised, as 
persons who were seeking righteousness in the law, ver. 4. — 
ouSh, nothing) ch. ii. 21. 

•3. ' OfiiXirris, a debtor) Endangering salvation. — SXcv, the whole) 
A task which he will never be able to perform. 

4. KarnpyriSnri airh Toy Xpierov [Engl. Vers. Christ is become of 
no effect]) Your connection with Christ is made void: so the Vul- 
gate.i One might be inclined to say in German, ohne werden, 
" to become without." Comp. ver. 2 ; Rom. vii. 2, 6.—drKu,o^eh, 
are justified) Seek righteousness. In the middle voice. — r^j 
Xapirog e^i-rridars, ye have fallen from grace) Comp. ver. 3. You 
have fallen from the New Testament, in all the wide compre- 
hension of that expression. It is we that are and stand in grace, 
rather than grace is in us ; comp. Eom. v. 2. 

5. 'H/iiTs yap, fof we) I and all the brethren, and as many of us 
as are in Christ. Let those, who differ from us, keep their views 
to themselves — •Kn^iLar,, in the spirit of grace) Without circum- 
cision, etc.— Jx «'<rr£ws) from the faith of Christ; comp. the pre- 
ceding verse.— EX^/^a h%a.mmi,hope of righteousness) Righteous- 
ness IS now pi'esent; and that affords us /jope, for the time to 

\ " EVacuati estis a Christo." Wahl renders it, " divelli et prorsus dimo- 
veri a Christo, to be torn off and utterly parted asunder from Christ. 
C/Onip. xetrtipyvreii d,iri toS i/o'ittoi/, Rom. vii. 2 Ed. 



GALATIANS V. 6-8. 4S 

come. Eom. v. 4, 5. — kitiyLliyojuia) We wait for, and obtain hy 
waiting for it. A double compound. Paul includes and con- 
firms present things, while he mentions those that are future. 

6. 'lisx^^') prevails, avails. The same word occurs, Matt. v. 
13 ; James v. 16. — oun anpo^uSTia, nor uncircumcision) This re- 
fers to those who, if they regard themselves as free from the 
law, think that they are Christians on that account alone. — «Vr/; 
3/ ayavni hipyoufisvyj, faith working by hve) This is the new 
creature; vi. 15. He joined hope with/aiYA; now he joins with 
it hve. In these the whole of Christianity [the being in Christ'] 
consists; hipyov/ji^ivrj is not passive, but middle, 1 Thess. ii. 13 ; 
nor does Paul put love as a form of faith, but shows that, along 
with faith, nothing else than love remains, ver. 13, 14 ; in which 
very truth, however, he teaches the same thing as James, ii. 22. 
Faith is recommended to those who defend circumcision ; love, 
to those who think that uncircumcision is [avails] something, 
[tJiat they may be reminded that the laio is not set aside by faith, 
but confirmed. — ^V. g.] Love is opposed to the enmities which 
prevailed so virulently among the Galatians : ver. 13, 15, 20, 
26. Those seeking justification by works are at a very great 
distance from love. TTie Spirit is a Spirit of faith and love. 

-v.g.] 

7. 'Erpi^iTi xoixSig, ye did run well) in the race of faith, as 
your calling required, ver. 8 ; comp. Phil. iii. 14. This implies 
greater activity than to walk. He again comes to arguments 
calculated to conciliate and move the feehngs. — rig, who) no one, 
to whom you ought to have listened. So, who, iii. 1. — Ivexo-vJ/e, 
hindered^ in running. 

8. 'h irtig/jiovn) Most commentators interpret it persuasion, 
also with the addition of this, that, or your [hsec, ista, vestra], 
according to the testimony of Lubinus on this passage. Comp. 
Chrysost. This word very rarely occurs, and Eustathius alone, 
as I can find, has it at Odyss. x-j where he shows that " viTdfia. 
and ■ffiigfj.ovn are said respecting those that start difficulties and 
set themselves in the way [I*/ rZv haTanxSiv — stubborn, obsti- 
nate persons], and are figuratively taken from the cables 
[^£/o/4arwi'], that is, the hawsers used in ships." But a pertina- 
cious and obstinate man is given to starting^ difficulties [is 
iiKSTaTixheJ ; and therefore that man has irueiJ.ovfiv, self-confidence, 



4fi GALATIANS V. 9-11. 

who, having left off running, ivix^Tai, holds fast to [the law] 
obstinately, and who persuades and trusts to himself alone, and 
does not obey l-jrelSera,'] another, ver. 1, 7 ; and in this way /j,fi 
itiihaSai, and n vm/j^ovri, and iti-TtoiSa, form an Antanaclasis, a 
figure, which is frequently used both by Paul, as many con- 
stantly observe, and by the other sacred writers, as Glassius 
well demonstrates. Whether it be a metaphor or not, at least 
this verbal noun, like other nouns in-oi/ii, is intransitive^ [not 
a, persuading of others, but a persuasion in one's self]. — oix, not) 
supply is ; is not of (God), who called you, but from a power 
truly hostile ; and there is subjoined a metonymy of the abstract 
for the concrete, as appears from the previous word, who, not 
what. — TiaXovvrog) who called you ; comp. ver. 13, you liave been 
called. So 1 Thess. v. 24 ; comp. Phil. iii. 14. The calling is 
the rule of the whole race. 

9. Miiipit, tymj a little leaven) One turbulent person, ver. 10. 
[One wicked man destroys much good, Eccles. ix. 18. The malice, 
cunning, or violence of a single person, of ten produces immense in- 
jury.— V. g.j 

10. "AXXo, different) from what [" none otherwise minded " 
than as] I write. — ^poMfjain, you will think) when you read these 
things ; comp. Phil. iii. 15. — o hi, but he who) A distinction is 
drawn hereby between the seducer, of whom there is less hope, 
and the seduced. — rapdasm — xp!/j,a, Seng, troubleth — judgment, 
whosoever) ch. i. 7, 8. — ^asTaan, will b^ar) as a heavy burden. — 
Th xp'ifj^a, the judgment) which certainly hangs over him for so 
great a crime. The article gives force to the meaning. — obtk 
S,\i fi, whosoever he may he) The disturber among the Galatians 
was a clandestine one. osng, whosoever, of whatsoever cha- 
racter. 

11. '"Er/) still [as yet], ch. i. 10.— xjjfiitfffai, I preach) Hence 

', See App. When a word is put twice in the same passage in a double 
sense. 

• Wahl notices the paronomasia in the words mlkaSa.t and ■jriiafioni. He 
gives the latter word a transitive meaning, Studium persuadendi aliis ea qus 
nobis placent et probantur— TAe desire to persuade others of what pleases 
ourselves and meets our approval. ' Ueberredungskunst.' Ed. 

» This particle in the larger Ed. is reckoned rather as an uncertain read- 
ing, but by the margin of the 2d Ed. it is considered among the more certain 



GALATIANS T. 12. 47 

we gather what had been said by this turbulent person, " that 
Paul himself preached circumcision ;" and perhaps he took as 
a pretext the circumcision of Timothy ; and yet the reason for 
his having done so in the case of the latter, a long while back, 
was quite different [from the grounds on which it was advocated 
by the disturber], — Sitixofiai, I suffer persecution) They perse- 
cuted Paul, because he did away with circumcision. It was now a 
useless rite, which, if Paul would have conceded to his opponents, 
there would have been 'immediate peace ; but he did not yield. 
See how keenly the truth should be defended. — apa, then) If I 
were to preach circumcision, he says, there would at present be 
no offence of the Cross ; but the offence still bums hotly. There ■ 
fore it is a false assertion, that I am a preacher of circumcision. 
— gxavSaXov, an offence) among carnal men. — nu gravpou, of the 
Cross) the power of which is inconsistent with circumcision ; 
ch. vi. 12, 14. The Cross of Christ itself is intended. There 
was a great blending together of Jews and Judaizers. Many 
more easily endilred the preaching of the Cross of Christ, by 
mixing it up with circumcision and the preaching of circumci- 
sion. They thus still retained something. 

12. ' Airoxo-^ovrai, shall be cut off) Immediately after the re- 
proof concerning the past, Paul entertains [and expresses] good 
hope of the Galatians for the future ; but he denounces punish- 
ment against the seducers in two sentences, which, by disjoin- 
ing in the meantime the particle o<pi\ov, are as follows: — 6 di 
rapdsguv xifLOLc ^asrdin rh xpt/jka, x-t-X., 'Xal a-Jtaxo-^ovra,! o'l avaeroi- 
roZvTig bfj^as- That one concealed troubler, worse than the 
others, ver. 10, who boasted that Paul himself agreed with him 
about circumcision, is here, cursorily in passing, refuted, ver. 
11 ; but the others also, who are disturbing the Galatians about 
the status of the Gospel [in relation to circumcision and the 
law], are threatened with being cut off. Thus the particle xal, 
and, retains its natural meaning, and these words cohere, 
/SiKtfratfs/ — ds — xal aifoxo-^MTai, as well as, those, xpinri — bi — xa.1 
i^apeTri, 1 Cor. V. 12, 13: avoxo-^ovTai is the future middle, 

and therefore also in the Germ. Vers. It is twice expressed in this verse. — 
E. B. 

D corrected later, Gfff, omit sti. Sut AB Vulg. and Rec. Text retain it. 
C has ei'Ti. — Ed. 



48 GALATIANS V. 12. 

which, as often happens, so here, has a passive signification : it 
corresponds to the Hebrew word ma, and is a conjugate of the 
' verb lyxoVrs/i', ver. 7. Either the whole, when a part is cut off 
[the whole has the part cut o/], or a part cut off from the whole, 
is said respectively a-roxoirneSai. Some ascribe the former sense 
in this passage to the zeal of the apostle, so that the mutilation 
of the hody of the circumcised [viz. by taking away not merely 
the foreskin, but the whole member] may be denoted ; and, in- 
deed, the LXX. often translate ma by xo-jma, a,i:6%a'!mii, etc., 
especially Deut. xxiii. (1) 2, where a.'Troxsxo/ifisvoe is used for that, 
which the French here translate more than circumcised ; but we 
can scarcely receive what is said by the apostle but by metony- 
my, i.e., that as persons cut off they may be debarred from the 
Church. Deut. as above. The second sense is more consistent 
with the gravity of the apostle, that he should speak thus : As 
the prepuce is cut off by circumcision, as a thing which it be- 
comes an Israelite to want, so those shall be cut off, as a worth- 
less prepuce, from the communion of the saints, and shall be 
accursed (anathema) : ch. i. 7, and following verses. With a 
similar reference to circumcision, Paul, Phil. iii. 2, speaks of 
xararofiriv, concision ; nor is it altogether foreign to the subject, 
what Apollon. in Philostr. v. 11, says of the Jews, already of 
old time, they not only cut themselves off from the Romans, but 
also from all men. Now, what is to be done with the particle 
o(pi>.0!i ? Most construe o^eXoh xal avoxo-^ovrai ; but 'iipiXov, though 
it is a particle of sufiiciently frequent occurrence, is nowhere to 
be found construBd with the future of the indicative. The Com- 
plutensian Edition acknowledging this fact, to avoid this difficulty, 
have given amxo-^tavTai ; but it is unsupported by the copies.' 
There are many imprecations in the sacred writmgs, and this 
word opEXci/ is not used in any of their formulse : nor would 
Paul in this passage, after a categorical (unconditional) denun- 
ciation, finally make war by a prayer againsi; the disturbers of 
the peace. Sr/y^ij, the point, is put after opsXov in the sixth Au- 
gustan. I think it will be found so in many MSS., if philologers 
would notice such things ; for the comma is certainly in some 

1 Beng. errs in this. D(A)G support «7roxo'i^aiT«; : and fg Vulg have 
' abscindantur.' But ABO, the weightiest authorities, have ^■yrox.o-ionc,, 
the difficulty of explaining which gave birth to aToxsi^iijTaj.— Ed 



GALATIANS V. 13-lB. 49 

ancient editions, especially in that of Basle, 1545. Nay, opo.ov 
may be very conveniently connected with the preceding words : 
apa, xartipytiTo,! to gxdvdaXov roD sravpoij ; o^sXov, — was then the offence 
of the Cross taken away? I wish it were. "Op\ov is subjoined 
in reference to a thing desirable (such as is also noticed 1 Cor. 
iv. 8), as /i)) y'evoiTo, iii. 21, is used in reference to a matter by 
no means pleasant ; and as ihv among the Greeks in cases of 
concession, or esto among the Latins. And, as in ch. ii. 17, after 
apa is put fir\ yevoiro, SO here, after apa. is put op£>.ov. / wish 
that the Cross were a scandal to no one — / wish that all, along with 
Paul, may hereafter glory in the Cross, ch. vi.l4, 15. — ol amsTouvre; 
ii/iag) The same word as at Acts xvii. 6. It denotes, to remove 
a man entirely from the station which he occupies. 

13. 'T://,iTg, ye) So far am I from preaching circumcision, that I 
would rather show you liberty. — I*' sXivSipicf, [unto'\ concerning^ 
liberty) that you might rejoice in liberty. Your calling is not 
to 'TsiSfiovfiv, self-imposed restraints, but to liberty. — //,6\iov ij^n ) An 
ellipsis of the imperative, having the iuXa,^iia.v, pious precaution, 
subjoined, fiovov i^rt iXsuhpoi ?re r^v iXeukpiav, x.t.X., only ye were 
not made free with this freedom, etc. [for an occasion to the flesh] : 
or else the accusative, r^v hXtvkpiav, is put absolutely. — af>op//,riv, 
an occasion) for which the Jlesh is eager. — rri sapxt, to the flesh) 
ver. 16, 17. — diet rngayaicni, by love) ver. 14, 22. — douXiuiTi, serve) 
A beautiful antithesis.'' 

14. TiXripoiJTai, is fulfilled) Eom. xiii. 9, note. 

15. As, but) The opposite of the service to be rendered by 
love. — ddxviTs, ye bite) [backbite'] in reference to character. — 
xaTegSlere, devour) in regard to possessions [resources]. — avaXu- 
6ijTi, be consumed) strength of soul, health of body, character, 
and resources, are consumed by broils and sorrows. [Ah ! how 
lamentable the extraordinary number of those, of whom the one 
cuts off the life of the other. Men of harsher disposition, careless 
and unthinking, consume others — those of softer disposition, silently 
swallow down (suppress the expression of) their anxiety, and die 
prematurely. — V. g.] 

' " Super libertate.'' With respect to, with a new to a state of liberty.^ 
Ed. 

' If you will have the bondage oi service, then serve one another : in anti- 
thesis to i'Aevhptai/. — Ed. 

VOL. IV. 1> 



50 GALATIANS V. 16-19. 

16. A£7<y &, but I say) He goes on to explain what he pro- 
posed at ver. 13. — nmhiMan, in the Spirit) See [ver. 18, 22, 25, 
ch. vi. 1-8] Eom. viii. 4, note. — ou /aij rikienTi) ye shall not 
fulfil. 

17. tJ Si ■jvivfia) and, on the other hand, the Spirit against the 
flesh. The word imSu/nT itself, or, inasmuch as that word is 
taken in a bad sense, another analogous to it [not lusieth, but 
desireth, tendetK] is to be supplied. There is certainly an ele- 
gance in the ellipsis or zeugma [use of imSv/j^iT in the double 
sense!. — avrixurai, are contrary) utTrnpayicf,, in a mutual serious 
contest. — a otv, whatsoever) Carnal men do whatsoever they will; 
although sometimes the flesh wars with the flesh. In regard to 
those who repent, their' condition is different, and that too a 
wonderful condition ; for the Spirit strives against the flesh, and 
its bad course of action : the flesh against the Spirit, and 
its good course of action : so that (Jva.) neither the one nor the 
other can be fully carried out. In such a state, as being doubt- 
ful, many bad and many good actions are prevented ; but where 
the Spirit conquers, ver. 18, the issue of the conflict is decided. 
This more summary statement in some measure corresponds to 
those things, which are fully explained, Eom. vii. 14, etc. ; 
although, in the present case, the state presupposed is rather one 
already spiritual. 

18. Uvivfiari, by the Spirit) of God, Kom. viii. 14, and of 
liberty. — ayieh, ye be led) The middle voice ;^ see Eom., as 
above, -with, the annot. — l-!rh mfiov, under the law) Eom. vi. 
14, 15. 

19. ^avipii, Si, now manifest) The flesh concealed betrays it- 
self by its own works, so that its discovery is easy. — r& 'ipya, 
the works) unfruitful [as opposed to " the fruit of the Spirit," 
ver. 22]. The works, in the plural, because they are divided 
and are often at variance with one another, and even severally 
[taken each one by itself] betray the flesh. But the fruit, being 
good, ver. 22, is in the singular, because it is united and har- 
monious. Comp. Eph. V. 11, 9.— ar;va, which) He enumerates 
those works of the flesh, to which the Galatians were most prone ; 
on the other hand, also those parts of the fruit of the Spirit^ 

^ Ye give yourselves up to the leading of.— Ed. 



UALATIANS V. 20-22. SI 

which needed to be most recommended to them ; comp. ver, 15. 
He maintains this order, that he may enumerate the sins com- 
mitted with our neighbour, those against God, those against our 
neighbour, and those in regard to ourselves ; and to this order 
the enumeration of the fruit of the Spirit corresponds. — &y.a- 
iaptfla, ae'sXyiia,, uncleanness, lasciviousness) 2 Cor. xii. 21, note. 

20. ^ap/iuxela) See LXX., Exod. vii. 11, and in many other 
passages. That Paul is not speaking here of natural poisoning 
by potions, but of magic, is evident from this, that he joins it 
not with murder, but with idolatry. Comp. Rev, xxi, 8, note. — 
hiyaaragiai, seditions) respecting civil affairs. — alpigeig, heresies) 
respecting sacred things : 1 Cor. xi. 19. 

20, 21. ZriXoi — pSom, emulations [jealousies] — envyings) Both 
emulation [jealousy] and envy are dissatisfied with the advan- 
tages enjoyed by another ; — emulation [jealousy], for the sake of 
the man's own advantage ; envy, even without any advantage to 
the person himself. — kpikfai) This diflfers from 'ipm; : 'ipis, Hader, 
quarrel, dispute ; Ipihla, Triitz, brawHng, defiance, ipihla im- 
plies a wish to be greater, ipig wishes at least not to be less.' — 
■jpoXsycii, I tell you before) before the event. — IfiTv, to you) The 
maintainers of justification by works are often careless.^ 

22.° 'Aydirri, love) It is this grace, as the leader, that* intro- 
duces the family. Fewer words are used with respect to what 
is good, because good is more simple, and one virtue often has 
many things contrary to it ; comp. Eph. iv. 31. — xapa, joy) 
concerning things that are good. — ^ptjUTorrig, ayaSueiivn) differ.* 

' Engl. Vers, renders it weakly strife, and tpi; previously (or ipn;, Rec. Text 
in oppos. to AB), variance. Wahl derives ipiSsi'a from spi$os, a man who 
does bodily work for pay : and explains it, the utmost envy shut up in the 
breast, and a proneness to scheming plots. Here ipihicti will thus he factions, 
and the bad artifices of the factious. — Ed. 

' riH roiitvrct, such things) If any man is guilty, not indeed of all those 
things, but at least of some or one of them, he has lost the kingdom of God. 
-V.g, 

' '0 xctpns, the fruit) Singular, not plural. The works of the flesh are 
many, and these, too, scattered ; the fruit of the Spirit constitutes an entire 
whole, and that, too, united. — ^V. g. 

* Or else, " With this Grace as the leader Paul introduces the family."— 
Ed. 

' Jerome, Comm. ad Oal. r. 22, explains xpnarmns as Benignity concilia- 
tory towards others : but ayaianviin as goodness, which, though ready to do 



62 



GALATIANS V. 23-26. 



Xpridrirn? is rather to be referred to another, ayaSadvri, goodness, 
as it were pouring out, viz. spontaneously. — merig) nilDX, con- 
sistency [steadiness], /(7e%, to which are opposed seditions and 
heresies. Weigh well also the order of the words. 

23. Tuv roiouTuiv, against such IpersonsJ) This is the same, as 
if he had added, after temperance, the expression, and things 
similar to these; although the very want of the copulative con- 
-unction [the asyndeton] has this force. Matt. xv. 19, note: 
rSv Toiourm is in the masculine ; with which comp. ver. 18, 21, 
at the end ; where vpaseovng is added, which is now as it were 
compensated for by roiovruv [such persons] : 1 Tim. i. 9, 10, at 
the beginning. — oix sen ►o>os, there is no law) The law itself 
commands love. [^And therefore the kingdom of God is judged 
not to be unworthy of such persons. — V. g.] 

24. O/ be rod Xpierou, Moreover they who are Chnsfs) He re- 
sumes the proposition laid down at ver. 18. — rriv edpxa,, the flesh) 
of which ver. 19, 20. — israupuaav, have crucified) They do so 
with Christ, Rom. vi. 6,~ by having received baptism and faith. 
They have it crucified at present [they have the flesh now in a 
state of crucifixion]. Supply, and the Spirit is strong within 
them. This is included in ver. 24 from ver. 22. — waSri/iaei, 
with the passions) The lusts spring from the passions, and are 
nourished by them. The affections and appetites both deserve 
the same punishment as the flesh. [The passions are those that 
are violent, boisterous, and outrageous. The lusts, on the con- 
trary, calmly seek after what is calculated to minister food to the 
senses. — V. g.] 

25. K/', if) He returns to exhortation ; Walk, he said at ver. 
16, now, aroi^ufiiv, let us walk. From the beginning of the 
spiritual life, the walk which is o xarA eritiytiv, i.e. xaTo, rd^iv, a 
walk in due order or regularity (says Eustathius), ought to be 
maintained. Comp. concerning the wicked. Col. iii. 7. — eroix^ 
«.£>', let us walk) The same word occurs, vi. 16. ^They live in 
t]ie Spirit, are moved (by the Spirit), and are spiritual. — ^V. g.] 

26. M^ yivd/LiSa, let US not become [Engl. Vers., not so well, 
hej) Those who do not carefully walk in the Spirit, fall in the 
next place into the desire of vain-glory, of which two effects are 

good to others, is not of such a winning aspect and of such sweetness of 
manner as xpwrtVuf. Comp. ^vyii xfwnos, Matt. xi. 30 Eu. 



GALATIANS VI. 1. 63 

here mentioned. — xevo&o^oi) See Chrys. de Sacerd.' § 587. — 
irpoxuXov/^emi, provoking) to envy. The relative exists on the part 
of [has reference to] the stronger. — ipht/ouvris, envying) The 
correlative exists on the part of [has reference to] the weaker. 



CHAPTER VI. 

1. 'AdiX(pol, brethren) An admonition pecidiarly suited to the 
Galatians now follows. — i&v xal, if even) He who provokes, often 
considers another as the person provoking ; but if another has 
been really overtaken in a fault, still we ought not to consider 
ourselves provoked, but rather to consult [to have regard to] the 
benefit of the other : i&v xal denotes a thing easy to occur, but not 
of too frequent occurrence with spiritual persons. — -jrfoXtiipdfi, has 
been overtaken) The passive, as well as the appellation, man, re- 
fers to the procuring of pardon ; but the preposition rrfh, before 
[the over in overtaken"], is to be referred either to the offence, 
comp. Wisd. xvii. 17, irpoXri^hts, or rather to the party injured, 
so that he is said to have been overtaken [^/irst taken, i.e. before 
we injured him — without our injuring him] who, without re- 
ceiving any injury, has injured us. As Herodian says, 1. 5, roD; 
tuepyeglais 'jrpoeiXi'ifoTas, those who Iiave been formerly benefactors. — 
h Tivi •n-apd'jrTu/iaTi, in some fault) for example, vain-glory, v. 26 : 
or a return to legal bondage ; comp. the (r^ alrSiv ■jrapa-KTiinari) 
through their fall \i.e. the Jews' fall into legal bondage, and 
consequent rejection of Jesus], Rom. xi. 11, 12. — o/ «eu/iar;xo;') 
you, who are strong in the Spirit, and watchfully observe that fall. 
So, the strong, Rom. xv. 1. This agrees with in the Spirit, 
which immediately after occurs (comp. ch. v. 25). — xaTaprl^ere) 
restore him, as a member of the Church. All, who can, should 

1 What then, says he, is the food of those wild beasts ? (he means the 
affections of the soul) : the food of vain-glory (xEi/oSoJ/aj) is honour and praise ; 
and of folly {dvovola^), the greatness of power and authority; and of envy 
(fituTKeiviets), the celebrity of our neighbours ; of avarice, the ambition of 
those who supply the occasions ; of licentiousness, luxury, and the perpetual 
intercourse with women — and the one is the food of the other. — E. B. 



6< GALATIANS VI. 2-4. 

assist.— r/'<)!oV;)i-or, of meehness) In this is the power of curing: 
this is the pre-eminent characteristic of the spiritual man [comp. 
ch. V. 22].— ff^dwrSv, looking) The singular after the plural. 
Every one ought to attend to himself. — %ai ei, thou also) When 
one is tempted, another is easily tempted ; especially if he wishes 
to cure another, and does not maintain meekness. — ■jrnpaeSjis, thou 
mayest he tempted) in the same or in some other way. 

2. Ta jSaf»i, burdens) 'EYerj fault is indeed a burden : in ver. 5, 
popriov ; (popriov is a burden proportioned to the strength of him 
who bears it ; ^aprj are burdens which exceed his strength. — 
^acrdt,iri, bear) constantly and steadily : do not give your help 
once and no more. — xat ovruig avairXripweaTs, and thus fulfil) [ad- 
implete]. The imperative, including the future of the indica- 
tive, as John vii. 37 : am presupposes some defect to be made 
good [or, to be repaired'] by the Galatians, — rfv vofiov toZ XpianZ, 
the law of Christ) A rare appellation; comp. John xiii. 34; 
Eom. XV. 3. The law of Christ is the law of love. Moses has 
many other precepts. These words, burdens and the law, involve 
a Mimesis^ in reference to the Galatians, who were eagerly trying 
to come under the burden of the law. 

3. AoxeT iiml n, seems to be something) in the Spirit. Who- 
ever does not think himself to be something, he and he alone 
bears the burdens of others. 

4. t6 ds 'ipyov, but his own work) Again by anticipation another 
extreme is obviated, lest, whilst assisting others, we should forget 
ourselves. — epyov) a real work, not a mere opinion concerning 
one's self. — ils eavrhv //,6vov, in regard to himself alone) Many, 
while they compare themselves with others, who seem to be in- 
ferior to them, are apt to glory : therefore Paul dissuades them 
from this comparison. We should not even glory over our own 
good qualities and deeds ; much less over the vices of others, 
from which we are free. While he excludes glory from the 
latter, he seems to concede glorying over the former ; but the 
concession is not great, for the proving of a man's own concerns 
will at once start many objections, by which glorying will ne- 
cessarily be diminished : moreover, presently after he speaks not 

1 See App. An allusion to tlie opinions or words of him whom you wish 
to correct. — Ed. 



GALATIANS VI. 5-7. 55 

of glorying, but of fofnov, a burden. Nay^ the very word glory- 
ing, used by Mimesis/ at the same time includes the contrary. — 
rh 7i.a\iyriii,a, glorying^ that, by which he says : I am something. 
— ?'§£/, shall have) he himself being judge. 

5. ^oprlov, a burden) either heavy or light. Comp. ^dpr,, 
ver. 2. — Bagrdgii, shall bear) in the Divine judgment. The 
future, the antithesis to which is in the present [Bear ye] in 
ver. 2. There is however a " semiduplex oratio" in these words, 
so that the one is simultaneously indicated by the other.^ Glo- 
rying is used as an " ad hominem" argument, because the other 
exhibits [shows on his part] false glorying : this is taken away 
from him, and the peculiar testimony of a good conscience is 
also in the meantime called glorying, in the way of paraphrase. 

6. KoivtiiiiiiTia ds, but let him communicate) [The connection is 
this :] Paul means to say. When I said [Every man shall bear] 
his own burden, that should not be turned to an argument for 
the diminution of your liberality, xoivav'foi, just in • the same 
way as the Latin participo, includes the idea both of receiving 
and giving a share ; here, the idea is of giving, as in Phil. iv. 
15, very elegantly. — h iraaiv ayahTg, in all good things) in every 
kind of resources, as the occasion may require [as the case 
may be]. 

7. &ehs o!) i/^-MrnpiZirai) The verb is in the middle voice. God 
does not perm/it empty promises to be made to Him [empty words 
to be imposed on Him : lit. smoke to be sold to Him, " Sibi fumos 
vendi"]. The expression, which is by no means common,' 
seems to allude to the LXX., and indeed to Prov. xii. 8, vdiSpoxd/)- 
bioi iMTiTripiZfTai, so that the meaning is : God is not mSpoxdpdioc, 
slow of understanding [like the man in Proverbs], but judges 
truly, and does not keep silence without a purpose, or for ever ; 
Ps. 1. 21. They endeavour to mock Him, who think thus : I 
will sow to the flesh, and yet I will persuade God to give mo 
the harvest of life. — o iav, whatsoever) whether bad or good. — 

1 Alluding to the opinion of the Galatians, not to his own opinions. — Ed. 

' See App. The present is understood in ver. 4, where the future is used ; 
and the future is understood in verse 2, where the present is used. 

» Th. fcvxTtip, the nostrils : properly, to sneer at one with the nostrils 
drawn up in an expression of contempt. Wahl here takes it " patior illvuli 
oiihi."— Ed. 



SG OALATIANS VI. 8-11. 

anipfi, a man sowetk) especially of his resources ; 2 Cor. ix. 6.— 
avdpuirog, a man) any man. — roZro, that very thing). — hpleii, lie 
shall reap) The epistle seems to have been written in the time of 
harvest. Prov. xxii. 8, — 6 a'^nlpoiv f>auXa hplau xaxd, he that 
soweth worthless things shall reap evil [" iniquity — vanity," EngL 
Vers, from Hebr.j 

8. E/'s, into) as into [upon] the ground. — rJ vnu/ia, the Spirit) 
Here his is not added [as in " his flesh"]. In ourselves we are 
carnal, not spiritual. The flesh is devoted to selfishness. — ^ui)t 
aluviov, eternal life) The article is not added, for the question 
here is not about faith, but about the fruit of faith. 

9. TJ) When we do good, perseverance ought to be added. — 
rJ xaXhv 'jtoiouvtis, doing good, well-doing) The expression is diffe- 
rent in ver. 10, epya^d/isSa rj ayaShv, let us work what is good: 
comp. in all good things, ver. 6. — Idlifi, at the proper season) after 
the sowing. We must wait in the meantime. Add the note 
to 1 Tim. vi. 15. Then sowing will be beyond our power. — 
liii saXvo/iivoi) 'ExxaxiTv, to be weary of, is in the will (velle) : 
sxXuiaSai, in the power (posse). ^^ sxXuieiai, to faint, is some- 
thing more than ixxaxiii. Both are to be referred to the sowing ; 
for IxkUsSai arises from an internal relaxation of the powers. 
So the LXX., Isdi /iri ixXv6fi,ivoi, be not faint, Prov. vi. 3. Chry- 
sostom therefore interprets it, that no one should be fatigued in 
it, as in a worldly harvest. 

10. 'fls) as, as far as, at whatsoever time, in whatever manner 
and place. Comp. Eccles. ix. 10, ^^Dn, lxx. iig is d{im//,ic <rou, as 
thou art able, whilst thou art able. — xaiphv) time, viz. that of the 
whole life, and in it the more convenient part of that time. So 
icaipliv sxo^rig, 1 Macc. kv. 34.— £j(;o/tev, we have) For we shall not 
always have it. Satan is sharpened to greater zeal in injuring 
us by the shortness of the time ; Eev. xii. 12. Let us be 
sharpened to zeal in well-doing. — roCs olxilovs rrig meniug, the 
household of faith) Every man does good to his relatives ; be- 
lievers do good to their relations in the faith, especially to those, 
who are entirely devoted to the propagation of the faith, ver. 6. 
So the apostle commends faith itself in this passage, which forms 
the end of the discussion. 

11. "UiTi, see) The conclusion,— ir^x/xo/s yp&iJ-iJ.aeiv) in how 
large letters, i.e. how large a letter; just as long letters [longs 



GALATIANS VI. l"-!*. ftT 

literae] is the expression used for a long epistle ; the quantity is 
not to be referred to the single letters, but to them when joined 
together. The Epistle to the Hebrews is longer, which however 
is said to be short, xiii. 22 ; but this is said to be long, because 
it was on one subject, by the hand of Paul himself, and on a 
point regarding which the Gralatians ought to have been long 
ago well established. Also the former is compared to horta- 
tory, the latter to polemic theology.^ He had not heretofore 
written a longer epistle. 

12. "Osoi) as many as. — tivfwitairrisai) to make a fair show before 
you : comp. 2 Cor. v. 12. — avayxd^ousiv, constrain) by their 
example, ver. 13, and importunity. The same word occurs, 
ch. ii. 3, 14. — /4o'vov, only) Such persons therefore wished to be 
considered in other respects as Christians. — Siuxmrai, they should 
suffer persecution) from the Jews, or even from the Gentiles, who 
now bore more easily with the antiquity [antiquated usages] of 
the Jews, than w^^.h the supernatural novelty [new doctrine and 
rule] of the Christian faith. 

13. AvTol, they themselves) So far from it being their interest, 
that the law should be observed by you. — eapxl, in your flesh) if 
it be circumcised. 

14. 'E/x,ol di, but as for me) I should be sorry to be a partaker 
of such things as those. — ^^ij yhoiro xau;^a(r^a/) Josh. xxiv. 16, 
n?vn, //jii ysvoiTo riiini xtxraXmiiv Kvpiov, God forbid, that we should 
forsake the Lord. — xau;^aff^a/, to glory) We have a specimen of 
this sort of glorying, 2 Cor. v. 15—19 ; Phil. iii. 8, etc. — ei/ ryj 
tSTuvpCj, in the cross) which has nothing to do with circumcision 
of the flesh. To glory in the cross^ is an Oxymoron. — SiSt, ou, 
by which) the cross : for the apostle is speaking here chiefly of 
the cross ; and if the hi ou should even be referred to Christ, still 
the cross must be regarded as the ground on which this reference 
would be made. That, by which anything whatever is such as 
it is, possesses the same nature in a higher degree. — xooiaoj iirrau- 
foirai, the world has been crucified) The world, with its ' elements,' 
has no longer dominion over me ; ch. iv. 3. There is a grada- 
tion from t\ie flesh [ver. 13] to the world [in this 14th verse]. — 

^ And as compared respectively with their subjects, the Epistle to the He- 
brews was short, that to the Galatians long. — Ed. 
2 The cross, and to glory, being contraries. — Ed. 



C8 GALATIANS VT. ]5-17. 

jt^yi ra xigfi-v, and I to the world) ' The world is at variance 
with me : I could not, though I were willing, henceforth gain 
any favour from the world. This cross includes death. Col. 

ii.20. 

15. OiiTi ykf 'jnpiTOii.ri n igrh o'vri aKpci^vffria}) So it IS accord- 
ing to a very old reading. The more recent reading is in con- 
formity with ch. V. 6.^ Both circumcision and uncircumcision 
are not merely of no avail {'fX^^'l! ^''^^ ^^^J '^'^^ [sor/v] nothing : 
but there is truly [something, nay, everything in] the new 
creature and glorying in the cross of the Lord Jesus Christ. — 
xa/Kjj xr/V;s) the new creation arising from the cross of Christ, 
Eph. ii. 15, 16. This is opposed to "old things," 2 Cor. v. 17. 

16. Kami, rule) This refers chiefly to teachers. — iipfivn, peace) 
May it be, and it shall be. On peace, comp. Eph. ii. 14-17. — 
s-tt' avToug, on them) In antithesis to the uncircumcision [those un- 
circumcised, viz. the unbelieving Gentiles]. — xal 'iXiog, and 
mercy) Rom. xv, 9. — xa/ et/ rh 'lapari>^ roZ QeoZ, and on the 
Israel of God) In antithesis to the circumcision [the Jews]. 
The Israel of God are believers of the circumcision, or Jewish 
nation [Phil. iii. 3]. The meaning of the apostle, which is by 
no means Jewish, has beautifully seized on an expression incon- 
sistent with the idiom of the people ; for the Hebrews do not 
say, Israel of God ; nor do they even use the proper name in 
the construct state.' 

17. Tou Xomou, from henceforth) The mode of breaking off the 
discourse. — xoVouj, labours [trouble]) Polemic theology, seriously 
discussed, is a laborious task to godly men; ver. 11, note; and 
iv. 20. See the second Antisturmius of i. Osiander, p. 87, 107 : 
xovoi, labour and anxiety of mind. Matt. xxvi. 10 [Why trouble 

^ Tischend, reads olirs yxp, omitting h yoLp Xpi<rT$ 'Iijo-oi/, with B Syr. and 
Theb. But liachm. and Rec. Text read the latter words, with ACD(A)G 
fff Vulg. Rec. Text has iaxvn with Vulg. ; but ABCDG;^ Origen have itrTin. 
—Ed. 

' The Germ. Vers, offrees with the Gnomon here, althovgh the larger Ed. 
has reckoned the shorter reading among those less sure. The margin of the 
2d Ed., ii/ the mark /3, agrees with the Gnomon and the Vers. There is the 
same reason for the word iariu, to which, by a more recent decision texiti 
ought to yield. — E. B. ' 

I.e. They do not put two proper names together in such a construction 
as " the Israel of God."— Ed. 



GALATIANS \J. 18. 6S 

(xoVous vapsxiTi) ye the woman ?]. — /itjSil; -rapey^roi, let no man 
cause me) Herein there is ' AvoTofila, severity, by virtue of his 
authority as an apostle. — lyii y&p, for I) Affliction should not 
be added to the afflicted. — r& eriyfiara, the marks) from the lash, 
Acts xvi. 23. These marks of stripes rendered Paul infamous 
in the eyes of the ■world, but in reality conferred on him great 
dignity, for by these he was known to be a servant of Christ. 
Marks in the hody are opposed to the mark of circumcision, the 
body of Paul [himself] to ih& flesh of others, ver. 13 [the false 
teachers " glorying in the flesh" of their followers when circum- 
cised]. — rmj Kvpiou, of the Lord) Col. i. 24, " of the afflictions of 
Christ." — l3aSTcit,oj, I bear) so that I consider it an honour to 
me, ver. 14. Therefore they will be disagreeable to me, who 
please themselves in any other way.^ 

18. "H %ap;s, grace) This is in consonance with the whole 
epistle. — fniTci roD irvii/iarog l/iSiv, with your spirit) having van- 
quished the flesh, ver. 1 ; comp. 1 Thess. v. 23 ; 2 Tim. iv. 22 ; 
Philem. ver. 25. — adiXipol, brethren) The severity of the whole 
epistle is thus softened ; comp. i. 6, note. 

' Who seek occasion for giorj'mg in anything but the Cross of Christ. 
—Ed. 



ON THE 



EPISTLE TO THE EPHESIANS. 



CHAPTER I. 

1. ®i\fifi,ot,Tos, the will) So ver. 5, 9, 11. — roTg aylois roTg ovsi, xal 
TigroTg, to the saints and faithful, who are) in all those places to 
which Tychicus went with this epistle. It appears from the 
records quoted in the Apparatus, that no city was mentioned 
by name' in this inscription, whence some have supplied Lao- 
dicea (although all that had a separate reference to the Lao- 
diceans, was explained by Paul in the epistle written to the 
Colossians about the same time, ch. iv. 15, 16) ; others, Ephesus : 
eithqr oS them might be before the mind of the apostle j for 
Paul no doubt told Tychicus whither he should go, — to Lao- 
dicea, for example, and thence to Colosse, which was in the 
neighbourhood of Laodicea, and either first or last to Ephesus. 
Wherefore our annotations are now and then specially applic- 
able to the Ephesians. Nevertheless, in this passage, Totg oleiv, 
i.e. those who are present,^ is said absolutely, as Acts xiii. 1, 

1 Lachm. reads su'Eipwa, with AD(A)G^ "Vulg. and marg. of B corrected 
later ; but B omits it, and Jerome, 7,545a, attests that Origen did not know 
of the words. Basil mentions that old fathers before his time in some ancient 
copies omitted them. Marcion in Tertullian is accused of having added ad 
L<wdicenos. Jerome says, that some suppose the saints at Ephesus were 
addressed by a title, or "vocahulum essentics, so that those who are should be 
so called from Him who is ;" whilst others read simply " those who arc a4 
Ephesus." — Ed. 

" The saints thai there are. — Ed. 



52 EPHESIANS I. 1- 

xarA rii, oka.- JxxX;,(r/av, in the church that was at Antioch ; and 
Eom xiii. 1, «' ^^ otea,, e^ovelui, and the powers that be [the 
existing powers]. Paul, when writing to the churches planted 
by himself, generally mentions many circumstances concerning 
present and former events, having reference to himself or the 
churches ; but he had been at Ephesus, and that too for a long 
time, not many years before. Acts xx. 31. Why then does he 
write as a person unknown, ver. 15, ch. iii. 2, 4 ? and why does 
he descend less to particulars in this epistle, than in any other? 
Why, at ch. vi. 23, 24, does he conclude in the third, and not 
in the second person, as he always does on other occasions? 
Why does he add no salutations, which, however, he does not 
omit even in the case of the Colossians ? Why does he not 
mention Timothy, whom, however, he joins with himself. Col. 
i. 1 ? For, the close resemblance of the style of writing [the 
texture of composition] in both, the same mention in both of 
their bearer, Tychicus, and many other circumstances, confirm 
the fact, that each of these epistles, this and the one to the Co- 
lossians, was sent at one time. Wliy does he only call them 
brethren at ch. vi. 10? Ans. All these things are indeed 
proofs, that Paul so drew up the whole letter, that it might be 
publicly read, or privately perused, both at Ephesus and in 
many of the churches of Asia, to which, as having been perhaps 
pointed out to him by name, Tychicus would go, and that all 
might receive it as if it had been addressed to themselves ; 
comp. Col. iv. 16 ; 1 Thess. v. 27. So far as this matter was 
concerned, full liberty (a carta bianca) was granted. " We 
must observe," says Usher, at A. M. 4068, " that, in some 
ancient copies, this epistle was inscribed in general terms, as 
was usually done in writing evangelical letters, to the saints who 
are . . . and to the faithful in Christ Jesus : as if it had 
been sent first to Ephesus, as the principal metropolis of Asia, 
and was thence to be transmitted to the other churches of the 
same province, with the insertion of the name of each, etc." It 
may be said : Paul wrote this epistle before he had seen the 
Ephesians. Ans. He had formerly [previous to his visit to 
Ephesus, Acts xix., xx.] suffered no bonds so well known and 
so long. Acts xvi. 35, xviii. 10 ; but these, which he mentions 
[iu this epistle], were remarkable and distinguished, Eph. iii. 13, 



EniESIANS I. 3. (SS 

vi. 20. As regards the rest of the inscription, holiness is put 
before faith, ver. 4, 11, 12, where also the word xXripoueSai is 
before hope ;^ moreover, at 2 Thess. ii. 13 ; 1 Pet. i. 2. It belongs 
to God to sanctify [set apart as holy to Himself] and claim us 
to Himself; to us, according to the gift of God, to believe. 

3. EuXoyjjrJs — i!iXoyri<sa; — luXoyltf, Blessed — who has blessed — 
with blessing) An Antanaclasis.- God has blessed us in one sense, 
we bless Him in another. The doxologies at the beginning of 
the apostolic epistles are quite in consonance with the sense of 
the grace which characterizes the New Testament. It is almost 
in this way that the first Epistle of Peter commences, which was 
also sent into Asia, and therefore to Ephesus. Paul writes with 
an affection that had been greatly elevated [sublimed] by ad- 
versity ; and this epistle furnishes a remarkable specimen of the 
evangelical mode of discussion on the thesis [proposition, i.e. the 
broad general truth of the Gospel] ; and, from the third to the 
fourteenth ver. of this ch., it presents an abridgment of the 
Gospel [respecting the grace of God. — V. g.] ; [and that, too, in 
such a way, that the blessed work of Christ, ver. 7, and of the 
Holy Spirit, ver. 13, is inserted each in its proper order. — V. g.] 
Hence he refutes no error, and rebukes no fault in particular, but 
proceeds in a general way. And how great soever may be the 
light which may be obtained fi'om ecclesiastical history, with 
respect to the Epistle to the Colossians, in other respects parallel, 
it is less needed in this epistle. He writes with great propriety 
to the Ephesians, too, regarding the recent union of the Jews 
and Gentiles ; for the temple at Ephesus had been the strong- 
hold of Paganism, as on the contrary the temple at Jerusalem 
had been the stronghold of Judaism. 

Here follows a summary of the Epistle : — 

1. The Inscription, i. 1, 2. 

H. The Doctrine patheticaxly set forth. 
I. Blessing God for the whole range of heavenly blessing 
, bestowed by Him, ver. 3-14 ; and then thanksgiving 
and prayers for the saints, 15-ii. 10. 

' vpotih'jriKvra.s, which Engl. Vers, renders trusted, instead of Iwpe.—Ko. 
' See App. It is the same word occurring in a different sense. 



64 EPHESIANS 1. 3. 

ir. A more special admonition concerning their formerly 
miserable, but now blessed condition, ver. 11-22 ; and 
then the apostle's supplication, that they might be 
strengthened, iii. 1, 2, 14, 15; with the doxology, 
20, 21. 

in. The exhortation. 

I. General — that they should walk worthily, as 

1. The unity of the Spirit and diversity of gifts, iv. 1, 2, 

7,8. 

2. As the difference of their heathen and Christian state 

require, 17-24. 
II. Special — 

1) So that they should avoid 

1. Lying, 25. 

2. Anger, 26, 27. 

3. Theft, 28. 

4. Corrupt conversation, 29, 30. 

5. Bitterness, 31 -v. 2. 

6. Impurity, 3-14. 

7. Drunkenness, ver. 15-20 ; the virtues being every- 

where commended to which those vices are opposed, 
with the addition of submission, 21. 

2) That they should do their duty, 

1. As wives and husbands, 22, 23, 25, 26. 

2. As children and fathers, vi. 1, 2, 4. 

3. As servants and masters, 5, 6, 9. 

3) And, lastly, an exhortation to the spiritual warfare, 10, 

11, 19, 20. 

IV. Conclusion, 21, 22, 23, 24. 

There is a great resemblance between this epistle and that to 
the Colossians, which has been already noticed ; wherefore the 
two writings may be advantageously compared together. — h 
vaeri, with all) Paul describes the source and the archetype of 
this blessing, He has chosen us, having predestinated, ver. 4, 5 ; 
also its nature, lie hath embraced us in IJis grace, ver. 6 ; also 
its parts, remission, etc., ver. 7 8.— siXcy/^ with blessing) The 



EPHESIANS I. 4, 5. G5 

very term denotes abundance. — irvev/iaTixri, spiritual) a thing pe- 
culiar to the New Testament. — h roT; I'jrovpamii, in heavenly 
places) The term spiritual is hereby explained. Often in this 
epistle he mentions the heavenlies : ver, 20, eh. ii. 6, iii. 10, vi. 
12. The glorious abode of the heavenly inhabitants. — h Xfierip, 
in Christ) To this is to be referred the following verse, according 
as — in Him. Here now he somewhat slightly touches upon the 
three persons of the Godhead, who are concerned in our salva- 
tion. The Heavenlies helong to the Father [the First Person] : 
^he expressly names Christ Himself [the Second Person] : the 
Holy Spirit [the Third Person] produces spiritual blessings. 
Paul treats of all in succession subsequently. [^Certainly the 
apostle had before his eyes, in' this passage, the whole career of 
Christ, from His birth to His ascension. He contemplates His 
birth in this verse, then His circumcision, wherefore at ver. 5, and 
not till then, the name, Jesus, given to Him at His circumcision, 
is expressed ; at ver. 6,^ the baptism of the beloved Son is pointed 
to by implication ; which, at ver. 7, the bloody suffering of death 
follows, and finally His resurrection and ascension, at ver. 20, 
etc. — ^V. g.] 

4. Ka6iig i^iX'eS,aro vfiag, according as He has chosen us) The 
blessing corresponds to the [prior] election, and follows upon it 
and makes it manifest. — iv Ahrw, in Him) iii. 11. These things 
presuppose the eternity of the Son of God ; for the Son, before 
the world was made, was not merely the future, but even then 
the present object of the Father's love ; John xvii. 24, 5 , 
otherwise the Father would not have loved Him in [or /or] 
Himself [per se], but likewise through another [per alium: God 
would have loved in connection with the Church, not in Him- 
self purely]. — ff/jJ, before) John xvii. 24. — ihai, to be) i.e. roC ihai, 
that we should be. — Ay/ous, holy) positively. — a/iw/ious, without 
blame?) without evil and fault [eh. v. 27]. 

4, 5. 'Ei/ ayairri <?rpoop'iBag ij/J.ag, having predestinated US in love) 
Many construe these words with the preceding, holy and without 
blame before Him in love. The terms, / love, love, loved, are very 
prevalent in this epistle both ways, so that either the love of God 
to us, or ours to Him, may be denoted ; but it is most consistent 

' " Accepted in the Beloved." As the Voice at His baptism said, ' This 
is my beloved Son,' in whom, etc. — Ed. 

VOL. IV. E 



ee< rPHEsiANs i. c. 

with the very beginning of the epistle, that love should be con- 
strued not with holi/ and without Maine — an expression which ia 
likewise used without express mention of love, ver. 27 — but with 
the subsequent description of adoption ;^ comp. eh. ii. 4, 3 ; 1 
John iii. 1 : and that the love of God should be celebrated be- 
fore ours. In this way the sum of tliose things which follow, 
will be in Igve, ver. 5, at the end. So love is put at the be- 
ginning of the section [tmematis], ch. iii. 18. And in turn, on 
the other hand, the word liaving predesthiated is much more 
emphatic, if we consider it to be placed at the beginning : and 
everywhere the apostle, especially in this chap., closes the period 
with some clause, which, in respect of what goes before, is equi- 
valent to a Syncategorema,^ and in respect of what follows, is 
equivalent to a Thema [the main proposition]. If this be at- 
tended to, and the connection by participles and relatives be 
observed, the analysis will be cleared from all difficulty. This is 
the custom of the ancients, quite different from our present 
method, which proceeds by many divisions and sub-divisions 
(sub-distinctions) set forth expressly and prominently. — 'upo- 
op!sa,i, having predestinated) The participle depends on He has 
chosen: Rom. >viii. 29. Chosen from among others, they are 
predestinated to all things which belong to the obtaining of 
blessedness, yer. 11. — Kara rnv ihdoxlav, according to the good 
pleasure) We are not allowed to go beyond this good 2:>leasure 
either in searching into the causes of our salvation or of any of 
the Divine works, ver. 9. "Why needest thou to philosophize 
about an imaginary world of optimism? That which thou 
oughtest to take care of is, lest thou thyself be bad. Nor was 
there anything in us which deserved love.— roS ^fX^^aro?, of His 
will) ver. 9, 11, 1. 

6. E/j, to) The end aimed sA,.~-'iitamv U^ng rng ydpmg, the 
praise of the glory of His grace) The praise of His glory, ver. 12, 

' Tlie margin of the larger Ed. had preferred this mode of connecting the 
words by punctuation; the margin of the 2d Ed. leaves it an evenly balanced 
juestton as to that other, hy which the words h dyi^y, arereferredto tUme- 
ceding; and the Germ. Vers, distinctly exhibits it.—E. B 

Both Lachm. and Tischend. join h dyi^,^ with '^pUp^ccs: but Engl. 
Vers, with xccriu^moK airoS, " Without blame before Him in love "—Ed 

» See App. An accessory proposition added to the principal one.— Eu" 



KPHESIANS I. 7-9. 67 

14. The praise of grace takes its rise first in order, ver. 7, then 
afterwards the praise of the glory [concerning " the glory," comp. 
ver. 6, 17, 18. — V. g.] — h fi) xa-^in. Words that are conjugate 
[yafiroi — l^^afj/rwffEK], as ayaTDjv — i]ya,'!sr\ei\i, ch. ii. 4. — Jyu/'/rwffEii) 
■^apirliuij of the same form as ayaSoia, Suvaftioai, JiruTriJw, luodoai, ^tjXou, 
SavaTonj, xaTcou, xukXcco, k.t.X., signifies to render acceptable, to embrace 
in the arms of grace ; of which the immediate consequence is 
blessing : comp. Luke i. 28 [XaTpi ■/.t^apiTca/jiivri, which is followed 
by the blessing Kupio; /Mra aou]. To this refer of His grace, here, 
and in ver. 7. — riya-rrri/ihifi, in the Beloved) the Only Begotten 
Son. A suitable Antonomasia.-"^ Love signifies more than grace. 
See 1 Pet. ii. 10, where, concerning those who have " obtained 
mercy" things are spoken such as that the title, The beloved, 
stands far pre-eminent above them. "EXeoj, mercy, necessarily 
presupposes previous misery, but not se love. 

7. "E%o/a£v, we have) in the present. — t-jik airoXlrpaieiv — 5-)5» 
apetf/v, redemption — forgiveness) The peculiar benefit derived 
from the New Testament ; Rom iii. 24. [Another redemption 
(viz. "of the purchased possession" hereafter) /oZfows, ver. 14. — 
V. g.] — ^Tov 'jrXovrov rns yapirai, the riches of His grace) ch. ii. 7 : 
the riches of the glory, ver. 18. Comp. ch. iii. 8, where we have 
the riches of grace, and consequently of glory ; hkewise in ver. 
16, where the exceedingly rich glory o{ the Father Himself is 
understood. 

8. ^H-s) [attraction] for, rjv, viz. ^dpiv. — '-smpkaiudiv, hath 
abounded) viz. God. — irop/a) in wisdom, concerning the past and 
present, in regard to the things which God does, ver. 17. — 
ippovrjge/) in prudence^ concerning the future, in regard to the 
things that we may do. 

9. Tvapigag, having made known) This word depends on liath 
abounded. The same word occurs, ch. iii. 3, 5, 10, vi. 19. — 
ri iL\j(Srripm, the mystery) ch. iii. 3, 4, 9, vi. 19 ; Rom. xvi. 25 ; 
Col. i. 26, 27. — ?v, which) good pleasure. — vpoikro) [purposed^ 
proposed to Himself. Thence ^^w^yose, ver. 11. — b ahra, in Hirh) 
in Christ, [^ut Engl. Vers. " purposed in Himself," i.e. God 
the Father.] 

1 The substitution of a descriptive name for a proper name, by way of 
pre-eminence. See App.--ED. 
' Ai^ssTOf, of blood) ii. 13. — V. g. 



68 liPHESlANS I. 10-12. 

10. K/'s, in) Construe with yvapleag, having made known. — 
eixovofiiav rou •TrX'^pufiarog rtov xaipSiv, the dispensation of the fulness 
of the times) Fulness rSiv xaipuv, of the times,'' is in some degree 
distinguished from the fulness roij %fovoi;, of the time, Gal. iv. 4, 
for it involves the fulness of the benefits themselves, and of 
men reaping these benefits, Mark i. 15. Still each fulness is 
in Christ, and there is a certain peculiar economy and dis- 
pensation of this fulness, Col. i. 25. Paul very ofi;en uses 
the words mXripm and •jTkripufjja, in writing to the Ephesians and 
Colossians. — avaxupaXaruieagSai) that all might he brought under 
one head. All things had been under Christ ; but they had 
been torn and rent from Him by sin : again they have been 
brought under His sway. Christ is the head of angels and 
of men : the former agree with Him in His invisible, the 
latter in His visible nature. — tk mvra, all things [the whole 
range of things]) not only Jews and Gentiles;, but also those 
things which are in heaven and upon the earth : — angels and 
men, and the latter including those who are ahve as well as 
those long ago dead, iii. 15. — roTg ovpavo/g, in the heavens) in the 
plural. 

^11. 'El' alrSi, h ^, in Him, in whom) This is repeated from 
ver. 9, so that ver. 10 is a parenthesis. — lxXnpueri//,iv) He here 
speaks in the person of Israel, we were made nbni, xXrjpog or 
xXr,poiiofija, the lot, the inheritance of the Lord. Comp. Deut. 
xxxii. 9. The antithesis is you, ver. 13. He is, however, 
speaking of a spiritual benefit: xXnpeusSai is not only to obtain 
the lot : see Chrysost. on this ' passage : he interprets it, iymr 
Sri/j,iv xsxXrjpci/ihoi, we were put in possession by lot. — to. nrawa) all 
things, even in the kingdom of His Son. — jSouXjSv, the counsel) 
which is most free. 

12. 'H/jMi, us) Jews. — -roui 'jrporiXmxoTag, who before or first 
hoped or trusted) This is the predicate. The Jews first obtained 
hope in Christ when manifested to them (1 Cor. xv. 19) ; after- 
wards the Gentiles, Acts xiii. 46. The word before or first, here, 



! rather.— Ed. 

Ver. 11, 13. {ifg,ijg — ifiih, we — you) Israelites — Gentiles. V. g. 

Ver. 13. TIi/ivfia.Ti, in the Spirit) Comp. ver. 17. V. g. 

Ver. 14. rii; x^npovofiix; iifiZu, of our inharitanoc) which belongs to sons, 
vfj-. 5 ; mentioned afresh in ver. 18. V. g. 



EPHESIANS I. 13-18. 69 

is not to be referred to Old Testament times ; comp. on the suL- 
jeet of hope, vcr. 18 ; ch. ii. 12 ; iv. 4. 

13. ''n, in Whom) To be referred to in Christ, ver. 12, or to 
in Him, ver. 10. — axoveavrsc, having heard) The sense is suspend- 
ed,' till the participle having believed [" after that ye believed"], 
which is correlative to having heard, be added. — rjjg aXrihia;, of 
the truth) Hence it is called the hearing of faith. The mention 
of truth occurs again, ch. iv. 15, 21, 24, 25 ; v. 9 ; vi. 14. — h w 
xai, in whom also) In whom, after the intervening clause, is here 
taken up again ; comp. in Himself, ver. 10, note. — kipfaykSriri 
— o; sariv appa^i)), you were sealed — who is the earnest) 2 Cor. i. 
22, note. — rSi Ilveu/iar/ rfig iirayysXiag tSi ayiij), with the Holy Spirit 
of promise) The Holy Spirit was promised by the word ; there- 
fore when the Holy Spirit was given, those who believed the 
word were sealed ; and those who have the Holy Spirit, know 
that every promise will be fulfilled to them. 

14. 'H/iwv, of our) He here includes Jews and Greeks. — e/'j 
a.voXvrpaisiv, unto redemption) Construe with you were sealed) ; iv. 
30. This future deliverance or redemption, by the addition of 
r?s Tipi'Troi^gKag, of preservation [' conservationis,' Engl. Vers., of 
the purchased possessionj, is distinguished from the redemption 
made by the blood of Christ. So wipiiroirtois ecarnplag and -^uxnh 
1 Thess. V. 9 ; Heb. x, B^.^-Tripmolrisis is said of that which 
remains still, when all other things perish :" LXX., 2 Chron. xiv. 
12 (13); Mai. iii. 17. 

15. 'Axovaag, having heard) At a distance. This may be 
referred not only to those who were unknown to him by face, 
Col. i. 4, but also to his most intimate acquaintances, Philem. 
ver. 5, in accordance with their present state. — vkriv) Faith to- 
wards God in the Lord Jesus. — n-ai, and) Whosoever has faith 
and love, is a partaker of the whole blessing, ver. 3, etc. Hope 
is added, ver. 18. — «dvrag, all) The distinguishing characteristic 

1 El/ Z, at the beginning of the ver., is not, as Engl. Vers, takes it, 
governed by iiTiT/xars, ye trusted, understood from the previous ver., but by 
'Trtarivootvns below. — Ed. 

2 Wahl, in his Clavis, takes iripmalyiais passively, " res acquisita ; ■x-iptoimai 
X«of, quem Deus hoc consilio elegit ut sit sibi proprius : populus Deo pro- 
prius : toS ?i«o5, Su 'iripisTroiJiaxro &i6s." The full redemption of His pur- 
chased people. — Ed. 



70 EPUESIANS 1. 16-19. 

of Christianity.^ Paul often includes all ; ch. iii. 8, 9, 18 ; iv. 
6,13; vi. 18, 24. 

16. Oil ffaio/ia/, I do not cease) Paul made mention of aU the 
churches in his prayers ; Col. i. 9. 

17. "Ira, that) A subject of prayer for true Christians. — o irarnf ■ 
rr,g do^ng, the Father of glory) That infinite glory, which shines 
in the face of Christ ; nay, more, [the Father] of the glory, 
which is the Son of God Himself; by whom also the glorious 
inheritance will become ours, ver. 18. — nveij//,a eo^lag xai anxa- 
Xj-^iug, the Spirit of wisdom and revelation) The same Spirit, who 
is the Spirit of promise, is, in the progress of believers, also the 
Spirit of wisdom and revelation. Wisdom works wisdom in us ; 
revelation knowledge. — h, in) Construe with may give. — kOtou, 
of Him) God. 

18. Jle<p!>irig/j,'evoiis, enlightened) The accusative absolute, as 
Acts xxvi. 3, when the eyes of your understanding (heart) shall 
have been enlightened. The article rodg, with ixpSaX/iovg, pre- 
supposes that the eyes are already present [inasmuch as being ' 
no longer in the darkness of unbelief] ; and does not allow that 
they can be considered as about to be given now or hereafter, as 
if for the first time. But if opeaX/aous were -without the article, it 
might be taken in an abstract sense, and construed with 7nay 
give. — rovs ofSaXjiiovg rrtg xapSlag, the eyes of the heart) Comp. iv. 
18 ; Matt. xiii. 15. The heart is that by which we perceive 
matters so important, ch. iii. 17. So Theophilus speaks of the 
ears of the heart, 1. i. to Autol. c. 3 ; add the note on Chrysost. 
de Sacerd., p. 429 : and plainly the eyes of the heart. Smyrn. 
ep. concerning Polycarp, § 2. [xapdlag,^ a remarkable reading, — 
Not. Crit.J — Tig — Hg — r/. What — what — what [ver. 19]) Comp. 
the following verse. Three remarkable points of time, in regard 
to the future, the present, comp. iii. 6, and the past. — rrig jtX^fftws 
avTov, of His calling) The calHng by which He called you. In 
the saints follows, as the apostle often names together the called 
and saints. 

19. Toiig msTivovTag, who believe) Faith is therefore something 
Mving and efficacious. — rriv hipyemv, the working) This is the 

^ Is implied, in its embracing all in love. — Ed. 

2 Rec. Text, without any of the oldest authorities, reads liasoU;, of the 
tender standing. But ABD(A)G^ Vulg. read x.»plUs. — Ed. 



EniESIANS I. 20-23. 7] 

action [the actual putting of the might into exercise], — 7-0D 
xfdTove, of might) This is exhibited in the action [i.e. when the 
might is so put into actual exercise] : Job xxi. 23, lon DSW,' LXX. 
h xpdrii kyjjos avTou, in the might of his power. — -Trig layyoi, of 
power) This is the Divine power' itself. 

20. "Hi', which) VIZ. hepyeiav, working ; enpyiTv hepyiiav, as aya,- 
'jr&v a,yd<?rriVj ch. ii. 4. — syiipa; — xal ixdSisev, having raised — ffe set 
Him) Often from the participle the sentence is turned to the 
indicative ; ch. ii. 17 ; Col. i. 6 ; Rev. iii. 7. 

21. 'T'TTipdm) A compound word. Christ not only takes the 
precedency, but is ruler above all. — a^%^s y.al i^ouala; xal buvd- 
fiiiiii) 1 Cor. XV. 24, note. — xal xvpiorriTog) Col. i. 16. — xa,! 'iravTbg 
ovo/iUTog, and every name) We know that the Emperor goes before 
all, although we cannot enumerate all the ministers of his court ; 
so we know that Christ is placed above all, although we cannot 
name them all. — h rSi fiiWom) Alav, age, or the world [order of 
things], denotes here not time, but a system of things and opera- 
tions revealed at its own proper time, and permanent. It is 
CE^lled future, not that it does not yet exist, but because it is not 
yet seen. Authorities, powers, etc., are in the future [_aiuv] ; but 
yet they are named also in this world \_aii)i\ ; but even those 
things also, which are not even named at the present time, but 
both in the name and in reality will be at length laid open to us 
in the future, are subject to Christ. 

22. Tldvra, wera^Ev, hath put all things under His feet) 1 Cor. 
XV. 27. — 'iicaxi) gave. Not, however, that Christ was not for- 
merly liead of the Church, ch. v. 25 ; John iii. 29. — 'wjtip nrdvra, 
above [over] all things) The Church, as being above all things, 
above authorities, etc., the Head of which [ver. 10, ava-zspa- 
XaiuKfocsSai, together under one Head, etc.] is Christ, Col. ii. 10, 
may say, Christ is my Head : I am His body. The dative of 
advantage to the Church is in contradistinction to the over, or 
above [all things]. 

23. TJ •KXfjpajj.a Tou rd xdvra iv 'jradi 'jr'kripou/iivov, the fulness of 
Him, that flleth all in all) This is neither predicated of the 
Church, as most think, nor is it construed with gave, according 

' Engl. Vers., " In his full strength ;" and margin, "In his very perfec- 
tiou,' or •' in the strength of his perfection." — Ed. 



72 EPIIESIANS II. 1. 

to the opinion of others ; but is put absolutely in the accusative, 
as rb iMapTupm, the testimony, is construed in 1 Tim. ii. 6. For 
it is an Epiphonema/ put after those things which are spoken of 
at ver. 20, and by it the apostle implies, that there is in Christ 
the fulness of the Father, who fills all in all. See on the fulness 
of Grod, of Christ, and of the Spirit, ch. iii. 19, iv. 13, v. 18; 
likewise ch. iv. 10 ; John i. 14 ; on the fulness of the times, ch. i. 
10. The glory of Divine love fills all things, and in Christ 
extends itself over all. The passage has an analogy to 1 Cor. 
XV. 28. What I have just now explained, the apostle means to 
say, vividly exhibits to us the fulness, etc., which, as mathemati- 
cians say, was the thing to be demonstrated [quod erat de- 
monstrandum]. The whole of this (the whole of the preceding 
statements) may be reduced to [be brought under] this title or 
brief description, rh irXnpafia , . h iraei, in all) The neuter 
including the power of the masculine. — '!rXrjpou//,evov, i.e. vXrjfxidv- 
ros. But the force of the Middle voice is stronger [than that of 
the active] in denoting the mutual relation of Him who fills, 
and of those who are filled. 



CHAPTER II. 

1. Ka! vf/.ag, and you) This is very closely connected with He 
wrought in ch. i. 20. You is construed with hath quickened to- 
gether {auvei^uomirigiv), ver. 5. — l/i,ag oira;, you when you were) as 
there is found when we were, in ver. 5. The former word, in 
both cases respectively, is emphatic;^ as Phil. ii. 7, note.— I'szpoOs, 
dead) What can be more wretched ? — ro/"s 'irapa.'XTufLae,) Although 
the genuine ratg afictprlaig intervenes, we must refer to the 
irapa'irrwij.a.ei the neuter oJs, in which, ver. 3 : comp. [rotg hui,yii.t>7'„ 
r-or;Ta.S^fj,ag,i\ oTa, oi'oi;; [diay/Mig'j, 2 Tim. iii. 11, where the gender 
IS m like manner twofold.— ra/-s 6ifi.aprla,e, in sins) Refer to this 
word ccTg, in which, ver. 2.- a; afj^aprla,, sins, are chiefly applied 

^ See App. An exclamation subjoined to the relation or proof of some 
important topic. 

' In ver. 1, if^a; precedes 6Wcc;, and is therefore the emphatic word. In 
ver. 5, agrees precedes ^^^j, and therefore the emphasis falls on the S.t»s.- 



EPIIESIANS II. 3. 73 

to the Gentiles, who are ignorant of God : rd TrapaTrti.uoTa, 
trespasses, to the Jews, who have the law,* and yet revolt from 
the light ; ver. 5. Moreover the latter obeyed the flesh ; the 
former, the prince of the poioer of the air ; see following verses. 

2. KarA rh aiSiva, To\J 7c6e//,ou rourou) Aiut and xoe/Log differ f 1 
Cor. ii. 6, 12, iii. 18, 1 9. The former regulates the latter, and 
in a manner gives it form : xoV/aos is something more external ; 
ali)t something more subtle and internal in its character. Time 
is spoken of not only physically, but also morally, there being 
included in its signification [in the notion of it] the character of 
the men who live in it ; and so a/'iiv applies to a long series of 
times, in which one bad age follows another bad age ; comp. 
Acts xiv. 16 ; 1 Pet. i. 18.- — xara rbv afi;^ovra, according to the 
prince) Thus the fact becomes more expressly represented and 
realized. All men are sensible of the existence of the world ; 
but they are not aware that this prince lurks beneath it ; , ch. 
vi. 11, 12 : comp. John xii. 31. — r^s i^uuslag rou aipog, of the 
power of the air) This power is widely diffused and penetrating : 
comp. Job i. 1 5, etc. ; but yet it does not reach [it is beneath] 
the sphere of believers, ver. 6 ; 1 John v. 18. See Buxt. Diet. 
Rabb., col. 1495. Even the celestial orbs themselves are various. 
Christ however is superior to Satan, although the latter also 
holds himself [keeps a position] in heavenly places ; Eph. vi. 
12 \j\i ToTg i'jovpavloig, in the heavenlies, Engl. Vers., in high places'\. 
— Tou ■yrvfj/iarog, the spirit) In apposition to rrig eS,ovaiot,g, tou vntf 
.(taroj. Here the prince himself is not called a spirit ; but the 
spirit in this passage is that internal principle, from which the 
actions of unbelievers flow, and is opposed to the spirit of the 
believing sons of God : comp, Luke iv. 33. — nv, now) in the 
present day ; or rather, [that] now most of all ; for he does not 
say, still, or as yet, but now. Those who despise the Gospel 
through disbelief, remain the slaves of that spirit, and are more 
and more captivated by him. Express mention of Satan is 
principally made in the description of the state of the Gentiles ; 

' xa/i«TT4r^«, from ■Trapaviitra, I fall away from the lajr, I transgress. 
For " sin is the transgression of the law." — Ed. 

* Sie note, Eph. vi. 12. Kotrfio; is the world, miindus, in its wide exten- 
sion ; Aiuv the age, soeculum, the present world, in its^distinguishing clia- 
racter, its course, and the estimate to be formed of it.— Ed. 



74 EPHESIANS II. 3-5. 

Acts xxvi. 18. — Iv Tois u'loTs tTi; airiihiag, in the cliildren of dis- 
obedience or disbelief) Disobedience, or disbelief, in regard to 
the Gospel, shows of itself how powerful that spirit is. Akin 
to this is the phrase, cldldren of wrath, ver. 3. Wrath abides 
upon unbelievers, John iii. 36. 

3. Ka; riiMiTc) we' also, viz. Jews. In the last times of the 
Old Testament sin had greatly prevailed, even among the Jews, 
in order that grace might more abound; Kom. v. 6, 20; Tit. 
iii. 3 ; Luke i. 17, 79 ; Matt. iv. 16. — ipKEus-^apJi/iEv, we were 
conversant \liad our conversation or way of life^ This is some- 
what more specious '■ [outwardly decorous] than to walk, ver. 2. 
Tng aapxog, of the flesh) without the Spirit of God. — rns eap-Ag xal 
Tuv diavoiojv, of the flesh and of the thoughts) The thoughts imply 
the more subtle and practised purpose of sinning ; the flesh 
rushes on with a blind impetuosity [impulse]. — (puasi, by nature) 
Nature denotes the state of man without the grace of God in 
Christ. We owe this to our nature [although we have been 
Jews, Isa. i. 13. — V. g.], that we are the children of wrath. — 
ipyni, of wrath) whilst we all the time thought that we were the 
children of God. The antithesis is in ver. 4. — o/' Xomol) 1 Thess. 
iv. 13 : the others, who do not believe, or at least not yet. 

4. nXoheiog, rich) "over all," Eom. x. 12. — i'Kiii — aya<irri\i, in 
mercy — love) Mercy takes away misery; love confers salvation. 

5. Ka/, even) This is connected with you, when you were, ver. 
1. — njj,ag, us) both, Jews and Gentiles. — suviZ^iiioTco'insi rs Xpisra- 
^dpir! sgri aiS!ij(S//,iviji, hath quickened together with Christ ; by grace 
ye are saved) Quickening precedes the " raising up " [ver. 6], 
and ch. i. 20 ; the raising up presupposes life. We were made 
alive at the time when Christ was made alive ; comp. 2 Cor. v. 
15, concerning the death of Christ, and so of the other steps. 
But when faith is received, all those things are applied to man 
by God, and they are considered as ratified by man. The 
apostle, enumerating this very order of salvation, shows that 
grace is the beginning and the end [proram et puppim] in this 
and in the eighth verse, and sometimes he uses indiscriminately 
the first and second person, on account of the equal footing of 

1 The Gentiles (ye) openly walked in sins. The Jews {we also), in tlieway 
of life and inward character, though not openly walking in the grosser sins 
of the former, were essentially like them in living to the ilesh, Ed. 



EPHESIANS II. C-10. 76 

the Jews and Gentiles. — rp XpigrSi, together ivith Christ) Hence • 
He is the fountain-head, ver. 6—10. 

6. y.uvixdSieeti, made us sit together") Believers are already 
spiritually raised ; they will be raised in the body ; and to each 
of the two resi^rrections the sitting in heavenly places corre- 
sponds. They are not, indeed, present in heaven in the body, 
but they are so in point of right, and virtually in the spirit, and 
they have individually a seat expressly assigned to them, which 
is to be taken possession of at the proper time. They are for a 
while hidden in God ; Col. iii. 3. — b ralg imupavioi-;, in the heaven- 
lies) He does not say, on the right hand. To Christ this is left as 
His own peculiar pre-eminence [prerogative]. — Xpier^ 'Inaov, in 
Christ Jesus) In this sublime discourse, especially, Paul calls 
Him Christ Jesus ; oftener on other occasions, Jesus Christ. 

7. 'Ev ToTg a'lugi roTg siripyofjjivon;, in the ages to come) The 
plural, in opposition to the one had age \rh alum rourou x6e/u>u], 
ver. 2, which blessed ages effectually succeed [upon which the 
blessed ages come unexpectedly with power]. This expression 
is in accordance with Paul's idea regarding the last day, the 
approach of which he believed not to be immediate [2 Thess. 
ii. 2]. — uirip^dXkovra, the exceeding) Kom. v. 20. 

8. T?j — xd.piTi) Tf] has a relative meaning, in reference to ver. 
5, xi-fiTi — ya^, for) He does not say, therefore, but /or, because 
he concludes [infers] from the effect to the cause. — hoL rng 
iridTicac, hy faith) which arises from the resurrection of Christ, 
chap. i. 19,^ [yohence it is not at all mentioned in ver. 5, hut 
for the first time in ver. 8. See Col. ii. 12. — V. g.] The 
antithesis is, not of works ; an antithesis of the same kind as 
that between grace and boasting [" lest any man should boast"]. 
— x.a,l TovTo) and this, namely, believing, or faith, is not of your- 
selves. The antithesis is : this is the gift of God alone. 

10. AuroD, of Him) of God. — ydp, for) He proves, that 
salvation is by faith, not" of works, and that faith itself is 
entirely of the gift of God. — iroir}/j.a, workmanship) The word 
i;arely occurs in this sense, and its force is increased by the 

^ Which passage implies, not merely that faith believes in Christ's resur- 
rection, but that also it is the same Spirit, which raised Jesus, which raises 
the spiritually dead and creates in them faith. Comp. " the power of the 
resurrection," Phil. iii. 10.- --Ed. 



76 EPHESIANS 11. 11, 12. 

KneiivTig, created; comp. ver. 15, ["to make" or " create, in 
Himself of twain one new man"], made spiritually out of nothing. 
We are elsewhere said to be regenerated. Nothing produces 
nothing. Believers of after ages are not only IPU DJ?) a people 
born, Ps. xxii. 32 (31), but also H-\2i, a people created, cii. 
19 (18). — M) for the sake of good works; so that thenceforth 
at last we should devote ourselves to them.^ On that ground, 
Paul never calls the works of the law good. — oTg) o7s — h auroT;, 
Dro "lE'X, for h oTi, in which. — <!ri>oriToifia,ffiv) The '?rph ascribes the 
whole matter to God. ^Toifi,aeiv is used as a neuter verb with 
great force, L,xx., 2 Chron. i. 4, or; rjTolfiaeev aurjj Aauld, because 
David made preparation for it. So usts iroifiaaai avTu, so as to 
make ready for Him, Luke ix. 52. God hath so prepared.' 
\_Grace, therefore, with (as well as) salvation, precedes works. — 
V. g.J — 'jripiirarriattifiiv, that we should walk) not, that we should 
be saved, or, we should live. 

11. Mvn/J'OvivsTi, remember) Such remembrance sharpens gra- 
titude and strengthens faith, ver. 19. — t& 'ihrf) D''1Jn, the Gentiles, 
h gapxl, in the flesh) Paul purposely joins this expression with 
Gentiles, for the Jews simply called the Gentiles the uncircum- 
cision, not the uncircumcision in the flesh. — oi Xsyo/iivoi axpo^ueria, 
who are called uncircumcision) intended as a great insult to you. 
The word called, masc. and neut. (Xeyo/j^im, Xtyo/jLivrjs), appUed 
to the uncircumcision and the circumcision, shows that these 
words are no longer in use, since the distinction is taken away. — 
'Xiyofievrjg, called) This word is construed with the circumcision, 
apart from the epithet, in the flesh made by hands.^ And the 
circumcision is used in the concrete for the people circumcised ; 
in the flesh made by hands, in the abstract. 

12. "On, that) On this word, you were [ver. 12], and you are 
made [ver. 13], depend ; but the particle is repeated from ver. 
11. — x"P'^i without) The antithesis is in Christ, ver. 13. Their 

' Postea demum, i.e. After we have been created anew in Christ, and not 
till then. — Ed. 

2 Thus Beng. does not take Tpovrroifiain!) actively and governing «, implied 
in ois (attracted to 'ipyoi;) : but intransitively, " Created unto good works, in 
■which (oJf— £(/ airoif) God hath so prepared and ordered the matter that we 
should walk." — Ed. 

^ i.e. yicyofiii/yis does not apply to these last words. Ed. 



KPHESIANS ]I. 13, 14. 77 

misery is detailed under these three heads : without, and strangers 
— and without God [&koi, atheists] : you were without Christ, with- 
out the Holy Spirit, without God ; comp. ver, 18 and the follow- 
ing verses ; ch. iii. 6, iv. 4, 5, notes. — %w^;s Xp'isroij, without Christ) 
He proves this in the following clause, being alienated from 
{aT7ikXoTpioiij.i\i(ii) ; nor does he say, aliens (aXXorpioi) i^ comp. 
note at iv. 18. — rjjg ToXirslag riZ ^ lap a.^'K, from the polity of Israel) 
The whole commonwealth of Israel had respect to Christ. — xai 
^svoi, and strangers) destitute of share in. — tSiv diaS^xSiv rni 
l-rayyikiag, the covenants of promise) God, the gift of Christ 
being presupposed, had above all promised the Holy Spirit ; 
i. 13 ; Gal. iii. 14, note ; Luke xxiv. 49 ; Acts ii. ; and the 
covenants had been subservient to that promise, Kom. ix. 4. 
This clause is proved by the following, having no hope ; for if 
they had had a promise, they would have had the hope corre- 
sponding to it ; but they had no hope ; and therefore they had 
not even a promise. — ahoi, atheists) They had not come to the 
fixed opinion, that there were no gods ; for they had even Diana 
and Jupiter, Acts xix. 35 : but, so far were they from having 
the true God, 1 Thess. iv. 5, they were even ignorant of Him, 
who He was. He says first, you were out of \_without] Christ ; 
afterwards he infers, you were without God. — h rOj xoafHf), in the 
world) Paul proves the latter also, that they were without God; 
and he does so on the groimd, that they wandered in the world, 
which is wide (2 Cor. i. 12 ), and vain (Luke xii. 30 ; John i. 
10, at the end), serving the creatures, enjoying the things, that 
perish, removed far off [from God]. 

13. Maxpav) far q^from the people of God, and from God, 
ver. 17, note. — ai/^an, ly the blood) - ch. i. 7. 

14. AiirJs) He.^ We have here Emphasis.' — n iipm) peace, 
not merely, the peace-maker ; for at the cost of Himself He pro- 
cured peace, and He Himself is the bond of both (Israel and the 
Gentiles). — 6) Apposition : Peace ; He who hath made, etc. 
A remarkable saying, ver. 14-18. He imitates poetry [canti- 
cum, a song of joy~\ by the very tenor of the words, and almost 

^ Engl. Vers, loses this point by its rendering, aliens from. — Ed. 

^ He alone and pre-eminently. — Ed. 
, ' See App. An addition to the ordinary meaning of a word, with the 
Dower of increasing its force on either side. 



78 EPHESIANS II. 15. 

by the rhythm.— We have a description— (a.) the union of the 
Gentiles with Israel, ver. 14, 15; and then (/3.) the union of the 
Gentiles and Israel, as now one man, with God, ver. 15, middle 
of verse— ver. 18. The description of each is subdivided into 
two parts, so that the first may correspond to the first, concern- 
ing the enmity that has been taken away ; the second to the 
second, concerning the ordinances of the Gospel. — ra a/ipoVtpa, 
both) The neuter for the masculine, ver. 18 [o'l a/j,p6T£poi], pro- 
perly, because h, one [neuter], follows. — fhieorof^m rou <ppa,yij.(»i, 
the partition wall of the fence [the middle wall of partition]) It 
is called ror^og, a wall, because the separating space between 
[Jews and Gentiles] was very strongly fortified; (ppayfibg, a 
fence, because it is easily removed at the proper time. The 
partition wall separates houses ; the fence separates tracks of 
land ; comp. ver. 19.^ Therefore the distinction between cir- 
cumcision and uncircumcision is hinted at. The very structure 
of the temple of Jerusalem was in conformity with it. The 
wall and the /enc« prevent an entrance; and the Gentiles were 
prevented from entering, inasmuch as they were not permitted 
to approach so near as the Israelites, even as those who were in 
the humblest rank. — Xugag, who hath broken down) Wlio hath 
broken down — who hath abolished, and not being repeated, very 
closely cohere. This short clause, and hath broken down, is ex- 
plained in ver. 15, in the first half of the verse ; He hath 
abolished the enmity in His flesh ; comp. ver. 16, at the end. 
The law of commandments, which was properly adapted to the 
Israelites, He hath abolished, in the universal ordinances of 
grace ;^ comp. ver. 17, at the beginning of the verse. 

15. In" 'ix^po'h enmity) The Jews held the Gentiles in abomi- 
nation ; the Gentiles treated the Jews with scorn on account 
of circumcision, the Sabbath, etc. — Iv r^ aapxl aurtD, in His 
flesh) So, in one body, ver. 16, {i.e. by His suffering and death. 
— ^- g-] — ''^i' ""Vo" ^^'' EiToXSv) the law of commandments, viz. 
ceremonial. — h Uyfiasi, in ordinances, in decrees) belonging to 

' Where ^ivat refers to the separation oi countries by the fence, (ppayfii;: 
Ttacioixoi to the separation of houses by the fitaoToi-jcos, or partition wall; to 
which are opposed respectively isv(t,iciiK~nctt and otaeioi. Ed. 

* But Engl. Vers, takes h loyfiaain with run tn'ctZ" "the law of com- 
mandments contained in ordinances." — Kn. 



EPUF.SJANS 11. 10, 17. 79 

the Gospel, by which mercy was set forth to all, Col. ii. 14, 
note. [_See the same words with the very same meaning, Acts 
xvi. 4, XV. 28. — V. g.] — ytarapyrieai, having abolished) Each !► 
[Ii/ doy/jbccaiv and h rfj dapxi] is construed, as we have already inti- 
mated, with this participle. Christ .abolished, by '^hfiesh, the 
enmity ; [He abolished] the law of commandments by spread- 
ing over the whole world the ordinances of the Gospel. But if 
the expression, in ordinances, belonged to hroXuv, of command- 
ments, the expression, in His flesh, would not have been placed 
before, but after it. It is written, as it were, in the style of a 
lapidary [stilo lapidari].' 

T)]v 'i-j(&pa,v, the enmity, h r5j ea.fT<.i avrou, in his flesh ; 

rh vofiiov Tuv hroXSiv, the laiv of h ioy/j^aeiv, in ordinances, 

commandments, 

xaTapyrisac, having abolished. 
— Tovg Wo, the two) He elegantly omits men ; for formerly they 
had scarcely maintained the name of men. The two, who were 
Jew and Greek. — Kaivhv, new) by taking away the oldness of 
the letter. — 'jroiSiv, making) The participle making depends on the 
verb, might create (xrlsyi) ; and having slain depends on might 
reconcile : each of them has the power of explaining, which is 
derived from what immediately precedes. — elprivriv, peace) This 
peace-making precedes its pubKcation, ver. 17. 

16. 'El/ hi g<i//,aTi, in one body) fixed to the cross. To this is 
to be referred in (by) one spirit, ver. 18 ; comp. iv. 4. — Amxrilmg 
rrjv 'i^6pav, having slain the enmity) By His death, He slew the 
enmity against God Himself. — sv ahrifi) in Him, viz. in His 
body? Comp. what goes before. 

17. '"BXSiiM, having come) from death, from His descent into 
hell, and from His resurrection. He, IJimself a joyful conqueror, 
spontaneously^ preached. A remarkable expression ; 2 Tim. i. 
10 ; John xiv. 18. — euriyyiXlearo, preached) The verb for the 

' The arrangement being such that the alternate pieces of stone match. 
—Ed. 

^ Engl. Vers, has thereby, seemingly referring to the cross; "by it." But 
ver. 15, " Having abolished the enmity ?'» His flesh," shows Bengel's view to 
be correct. — Ed. 

* Implied in ihiav. — Ed. 



80 KPIIPSIANS II. 18 20- 

participle; comp. mi^ea.;, ver. 14. ' He announced joeace with His 
own mouth to the apostles, Luke xxiv. 36 ; John xx. 19, 21, 26 ; 
and by them to others. — ilpfivri^ ^/J'" "'S fJ'O.yipa.v, x.r.\.) Acts ii. 39, 
note. — xa,l roTc) There is great elegance in mentioning iiprivijv, 
peace, only once in this passage. The peace of both is undivided. 

18. "Or;, because) — Uphg rhv naripa) to the Father, as to [our] 
Father. In this verse mention is made of Christ, of the Spirit, 
of the Father, in the same order in which Christ, the Spirit of 
promise, and God, are referred to at ver. 12 ; [comp. ch. i. 3, 5]. 
In a different order [the Three Divine Persons are mentioned] 
in Rev. i. 4, 5. 

19. Omiri, no longer) Antithetic to their former state. — ^eko/, 
strangers) Its opposite is citizens, a metaphor derived from a city 
or state. — -Trdpoixoi, foreigners [' inquilini,' sojourners in the city, 
from a foreign state]) Its opposite is, domestics [home-born mem- 
bers of the household] : the metaphor is taken from a house. — 
rS)v ayim, of the saints) [the holy commonwealth] of Israel, ver. 
12 ; comp. iii. 18. — roD QioZ, of God) Again the Holy Trinity 
is indicated, ver. 19 [God], 20 [Jesus Christ], 22 [the Spirit]. 

20. ''EmrMbo!J.r\6hrii, built upon) A phrase frequent with Paul, 
writing to the Ephesians, iii. 18, (comp. Acts xx. 32) ; and to 
Timothy, bishop of Ephesus, a metaphor taken from architec- 
ture; 1 Tim. iii. 15 ; 2 Tim. ii. 19. — It/ rffl ^s^sX/w, on the foun- 
dation) As the foundation supports the whole building, so the 
testimony of the apostles and prophets is the substruction or 
support of the faith of all believers ; by them the foundation 
was laid ; Christ Jesus is here said to be the head of the comer. 
The same Person is spoken of as the very foundation, 1 Cor. iii. 
11. — Kai irpo^tiTuv, and prophets) Prophets of the New Testa- 
ment, who are next to the apostles ; iv. 11, iii. 5. — ovrog axpo- 
yaiviaio-j avTov, being chief corner stone of it) Paul briefly in- 
dicates the passage in Isaiah xxviii. 16, as very well known ; 
;omp. 1 Pet. ii. 6, note. Christ Jesus is the chief corner stone 
if the foundation. The participle ovros, at the beginning of this 
^lause, is strongly demonstrative in the present tense. The 
pronoun auroD is to be referred to hfj-iXiifi ;^ for if it were con- 

' But Engl. Vers, takes it. Jesus Christ Himself. Beng. renders it, 
' Jesus Christ being the chief corner-stone of it" viz. of tlie foundation.— 

tiu 



tPHESIANS II. 21.-m. I, 2. 81 

stnied with Xpignu, it would be in this form : avnv TOx' Xpifnij 
'Irigou, as we read aurJs 6 'laidnris, x.r.X., with the article/ Matt. 
iii. 4: ; Mark vi. 17 ; Luke iii. 23, xxiv. 15, 36 ; John ii. 24, 
iv. 44 ; 2 Cor. xi. 14. 

21. 'Ev ^, m whom) In Christ. This, by Anaphora [repetition 
to mark beginnings], is repeated in the following verse. — guvap- 
fioXoyov/Lhr} aXi^ii, fitly framed together, growetJi) Words that have 
relation to a living mass, ch. iii. 18, note ; and 1 Pet. ii. 5. So 
evvap/ioXoyoi/ifSvov, &t\j joined together, ch. iv. 16.* So the branch 
and the house are combined, Zech. vi. 12, — mhv, a temple) It is 
a house, and that too a holy house, to which the temple of 
Diana of Ephesus must yield. — aym, holy) i.e. of God, ver 22 
[which answers to dyiov, ver. 21]. — h Kvpi(fj, in the Lord) in 
Christ. To this expression [ver. 21], the words, [through or] in 
the Spirit, correspond in ver. 22. So also ch. iii. 17, 16. 



CHAPTER III. 

1. TouT-ou x^f'^ /'"' *^*** c'^'i^se. This subject is resumed at 
Ver. 14. [/SmcA is the rich abundance of the apostolic spirit. — 
V. g.J — dsg/j,ios) The ambassador, and he too bound [a pri- 
soner^. — iivip i/Luvjfor you) The persecutors were incensed against 
Paul's zeal in behalf of the Gentiles, so that they imprisoned 
him ; and his very bonds were profitable to the Gentiles, ver. 
13; 2 Tim. ii. 10. — run/ shoJv,for the Gentiles) This is explained 
in the following verses. 

2. E/yE rixoJsaTi, since* indeed ye have heard) The things which 

1 Whether the reading "Kpunov ' Imaou or ' Imov Xpiarov should be preferred 
is left doubtful on the marg. of both Ed. The Germ. Vers, separates 'imoii 
by a parenthesis. — E. B. 

" AB Vulg. Memph. Orig. read the order Xpiarov 'Inmu. But D(A)G^ 
and Eec. Text have 'Iijirou Xpicrrov. (Ace. to Lachm., C supports the former 
order. Ace. to Tischend., C supports the latter.) — Ed. 

* It occurs nowhere else in '^ew Test. The two images here are com- 
bined of a building and of a living growing organism. — Ed. 

* Or if: but the Indic. favours since. -~&o. 

VOL. IV. ^ 



R2 EPHESIANS III. 3-5. 

they had heard concerning Paul (comp. note on i. 1') were a 
testimony that he, ver. 1, spoke the truth concerning himself. 

3. Kara affoxaXu-vJ/zv, by revelation) Gal. i. 12 ; Acts ix. 3, 4. — 
symfiKsi iMi, made known to me) God, by His grace. — rh fiuer^piov, 
the mystery) of Christ ; see the following verses. — '7rpoiypoi,-\ia h 
iXiytjj) I wrote before in a few words. He refers to i. 9, 10, and 
he repeats the words from that passage here. 

4. Upos 0, whereby) This expression is not exclusively to be 
referred to in a few words, but to the whole thought ; and vphg 
marks the analogy, according to [" from which ye may under- 
stand"] : as in the common saying, the size of the lion may be 
inferred from the size of his claw? From what I have written 
above, you may, etc. — huvash, you may) The word is modestly 
and ingenuously used. — avayiviiaKovng, when you read) This hook 
is very sublime, and yet it is put into the hands of all to be read. 
— vo?ffa; rjjv ebnaiv /tou, understand my knowledge \_perceive my 
understanding iri\) and therefore profit by me. Paul wrote with 
greater plainness and sublimity in this epistle, than he had for- 
merly done in any other. 

5. "o, which) This refers to ver. 3, as the repetition of the verb 
yvapiH^di, I make known, indicates. — sripaig ysviaTg, in other ages) 
Time in the ablative, as Acts xiii. 36. — ovx lyvmpie^ri, was not 
made known) He does not say olx, a-xixaXvcpSri, was not revealed. 
Making known by revelation (ver, 3) is the source of making 
known by preaching. Revelation is somewhat more special; 
making known is done in the hearing of others also : revelation is 
only made to the prophets. — roTg vioTg run uvSpiiirm, to the sons of 
men) A very wide appellation, expressing the cause of ignorance, 
natural descent, to which the Spirit is opposed ; comp. Matt, 
xvi. 17. He speaks of their former state in the idiom of the 
Hebrew language. Moreover, the antithesis of the apostles and 
prophets of the New Testament to the sons of men leads to the 
conclusion, that by this appellation the ancient prophets are prin- 

' Viz. They had heard of his bonds, and of his being persecuted by the Jews 
for his preaching to the Gentiles. This hearing was not restricted to the 
Ephesians ; but applies to all, to whom, in the different churches, this ency- 
clical letter was to be carried by Tychicus. — Ed. 

' Joh. Michaelis quotes a similar phrase from Thucydides : ttooV rit 
IxtaroKot,; i/s-oVtei/ov, they suspected him by reason of his letters, £ B 



EPHESIANS III. 6-9. • 03 

cipally Intended ; for example, Ezekiel, who is often called m^ p, 
son of man, and has copiously described the city and house of 
God, as Paul does in this place. — $v nvsi/iar/, in the Spirit) the 
gift of whom was reserved for the New Testament, with a view 
to the glorifying of Christ. 

6. Ehai) that the Gentiles are; and that they should be. — 
suyxXrigovo/ia, fellow-heirs) in the inheritance of God. — suasa/ia, o"' 
the same body) under the head Christ. — exjihiiAm-^a, TTJg ivayyeXlaiy 
fellow partakers of His promise) in the cqmmunion of the Holy 
Spirit. The same fis-roy^fi, participation, is mentioned Heb. vi. 4 ; 
the same promise, ch. i. 13 [" that Holy Spirit of promise"] : 
comp. on the Trinity, ch. iv. 4, 5, 6, 18, 21, 30 ; v. 1, 2, 18 ; 2 
Cor. xiii. 14. — Iv rp XpiarSi, in Christ) Construe with, should be.^ 

7. Ou, of which) viz. the Gospel. — xaT& t^v hifyuav, according 
to the working) ver: 20 ; ch. i. 19. 

8. Tw eXa^KfroTiiXfi, less than the least) The idea of the name 
Paul,^ increased by a comparative which rises higher than even 
the superlative ; whereby it is implied that he scarcely reckons 
himself among the saints. This is modestly and very elegantly 
expressed. — rSm ayloiv, of the saints) The saints here are opposed 
to the Gentiles ; comp. the note on Acts xx. 32. — ave^i^viaaTov, 
unsearchable [never capable of being fully traced outj) ver. 18, 19. 
There is a similar epithet found at ver. 10, manifold. — irT^ovrov, 
riches) Here heavenly riches are commended ; presently after, 
wisdom, ver. 10. 

9. ^larkai) to make see, to show ; comp. Col. i. 28. For min, 
Lxx. <(>iiiTiZfi, 2 Kings xii. 3, and in other places. — rl; ;j oixovo/iia, 
what is the dispensation) Col. i. 25, 26. [The reading olxovofiia is 
acknowledged by the most earnest defenders of the more received 
readings.' — Not. Crit.} — sv rSi ©eS, in God) An antithesis to 
creatures, even the most excellent, ver. 10. — rS) rd •j-ai/ra xTiaavn, 

' But Engl. v. connects thus : " His promise in Christ." — Bd. 

' Paulus seems to be derived by Beng. from paulus, a diminution of 
paucus, little. This would give point to the i^a^iamipa ; not only paulus, 
little^ but less than the least ; but the Roman name, Paulus, probably had 
no connection with the adj. paulus. Cruden makes Paul Hebrew = a 
worker : as his former name Saul = a sepulchre, or destroyer. — Ed. 

' Rec. Text has Miuavla., with hardly any authority. So Engl. V. the 
felhwship. But ABCD(A)G^ Vulg. Hilary 64, read oiMsiofiU. — ^Ed. 



84 EPHESUNS III. 10-15. 

who created all things) The creation of all tilings is the founda- 
tion of all the rest of the economy, most freely dispensed, accord- 
ing to the universal power of God. The expression, all things, 
includes rag afyag, z.r.X., principalities, etc. 

10. NDc) now, first : comp. ver. 5. — raTg apx^ii ""^ '"'»'? e^ouglaig, 
to the principalities and powers) good, or even bad ; but in a dif- 
ferent way to the one, as compared with the other. — Sia,, by) 
from those things which happen to the Church; for it (the 
Church) is the theatre in which the Divine works are displayed. 
Comp. 1 Cor. iv. 9. — mXurrolxiXog) Syr. Vers, renders it, full of 
varieties. — aopla, wisdom) The angels are particularly conversant 
about this object, 

11. TlpohaivrSiv aliimv, the purpose of the ages [eternal purpose"]) 
concerning the ages, and before the ages, 2 Tim. i. 9. — v>, which) 
This refers to irpohsn, purpose. — rjij,uv, our, of us) viz. believers, 
who are the Church. 

12. Tn^ -jroifprjelav, liberty) of the mouth, in prajdng. — t^> 
Tpoeay'jiy^v iv ffswo/^^ffsi, access, admission in confidence) in reality 
and with the heart. 

13. Airou/iai) I desire^ ash God : comp. ver. 20, 12. So, 
ashing absolutely. Col. i. 9 ["We do not cease desiring {alnv/iivoi) 
for you :" viz. desiring God]. — //.fi ixxaxiTv, not to faint) that I 
may not prove wanting [that there be no defect on my part], 
but that I may speak boldly and allure many. The infinitive 
referring to the same person as the finite verb / ask." — 6X!-^ie! 
fiou Wip v/iZv, in my afPActions for you) ver. 1. — So^a) [your] 
glory spiritual ; inasmuch as your faith is assisted thereby [1 
Cor. iv. 10]. 

14. Ka/iTrro) to, yovara, /iou, I bend my hnees) If Paul had been 
present, he would have bent his knees with a breast kindling 
into a glow of devotion. Acts xx. 36. — vaTipa) Its conjugate is 
warpid. 

15. 'Eg ou) of Whom, viz. the Father of Jesus Christ. The 
foundation of all sonship is in Jesus Christ. — -raga) the whole, of 

■ Not, " I desire you not to faint,"etc. ; but, " I ask of God that /may not 
faint."— Ed. 

« If the Engl. V. were right, " I desire that ye faint not," there would 
have been ifiHe expressed : but as it is not, the nom. of the finite verb is 
naturally the subject of the infin. which follows, — Ed. 



EPHESIANS III. 16-18. 8B 

angels, of Jews, of other men. — irarpia.) family, depending on 
Him as the [its] Father. Comp. ■jrarpia,, Luke ii. 4 ; Acts iii. 
25. — ono/ia^ero;, is named) In the passive or middle voice. They 
are called the sons of God by God Himself, and delight in this 
name, Isa. xliv. 5y comp. I will call, Rom. ix. 25, 26. 

16. Avva,/j,ii, with might) This accords with the mention of the 
Spirit.i^e'ig rhv 'idia aviputrov, in the inner man) The inner man is 
the man himself with all his faculties, considered as to the things 

-within, ch. iv. 22, 24 ; 1 Pet. iii. 4. The inner man is to the Spirit 
of God what the hearts of the saints are to Christ, ver. 17. The 
inner men is mostly taken in a good sense ; because with the 
wicked all things are in full harmony with wickedness, and there 
is no need of limitation or distinction.^ The Scripture has re- 
gard chiefly to things internal. The Chiasmus must be noticed : 
in the first sentence we have, that He would grant to you; in the 
second, to dwell ; in the third, in love — that you may be able : 
in the fourth, that you might be filled. The third relates to the 
second, the fourth to the first. In the first and fourth God is 
mentioned ; in the second and third, Christ. If we suppose a 
colon placed after avSpojvov and after Xpistou, the matter will be 
clear. 

17. Karoixnaii) that Christ may dwell for ever. It is without 
any connecting particle [Asyndeton]. Where the Spirit of God 
is, there also is Christ. 

18. 'Ev ayd'jrri, in love) of Christ : ver. 19, note. — sppiZ^ujihoi 
xai TikiiikiufXthoi, rooted and founded [grounded^) The root is, of 
a tree — the foundation, of a house. A Syllepsis^ precedes, which 

1 i.e. Botli the inward and outward man are all of one kind in the bad, 
viz. they are all alike bad. Whereas in the godly there is a, distinction 
between the inward new nature and the old nature, which, though still in 
them, is, as it were, something foreign and external to them, and no longer 
constituting their true and inner self. — Ed. 

2 A syllepsis is when the regular syntax of the partsof the sentence is set 
aside, so that more regard in the construction is paid to the sense, in the 
mind of the writer, than to the words and their connection. As here the 
nom. ippi^afiipoi is put as if the sentence wer«, " that you may have Christ 
dwelling in your heart, etc., you being rooted," etc. As the sentence stands, 
syntax would require ip^i^af<.hav to agree with vfiuii. I think there is at- 
traction exercised by the i^iaxiavre, as if Is/ii^. were agreeing with its suU 
ject.— En. 



8fl EPHESIANS 111. 19. 

must thus be explained : that you may have Christ dwelling in 
you, being rooted, comp. Col. ii. 2, note ; unless the Nominative 
rather agrees with you may be able,^ as the ardour of Paul was 
eagerly intent on what follows. So, in the middle of the sentence, 
if and how are placed, 1 Cor. xi. 14, 15, xiv. 7, 16 ; and ha itself, 
that, 1 Cor. xiv. 12 f 2 Cor. ii. 4 ; but the words which precede 
these particles render the earnest striving [of his prayers] very- 
emphatic. — fg;cr;^u(f?)rE) you may be able: even still further. — 
xaTaXaPiff6ai) to attain, to comprehend. — rl rh vXarog xal firJMg 
xal ^ddog xai i-^og, what is the breadth and length and depth and 
height) These dimensions of the spiritual temple refer to the ful- 
ness of God, ver. 19, to which the Church according to its capa- 
city ought to correspond ; comp. ch. iv. 10, 13, concerning Christ. 
For the breadth of the fulness and of the love of Christ is signi- 
fied, and that too in respect of aU men and aU peoples ; and its 
length, extending through all ages, ver. 21: as also its depth, 
which no creature can fathom ; and its height, iv. 8, such as no 
enemy can reach. Comp. Ps. cxvii. In regard to this breadth, 
length, depth, height, all which are one magnitude, there is no- 
thing broad, long, deep, high in any creature. By Chiasmus 
the order of the ideas is, love [ver. 17], breadth [length, depth, 
height, ver. 18] : [then in ver. 19] love, fulness ; of these four, 
the third corresponds to the first, therefore the second to the 
fourth. In ver. 19 the love is at length expressly mentioned ; 
but in ver. 18 the fulness of God in itself; but this very fulness 
is also tinctured with love. 

19. TvZvai TS r^v iwipSaXkovcrav Trig ynieiag, x.r.X., and to know 
what passes knowledge, etc.) This clause also depends on that you 
may be able. This is a very charming correction of himself, so 
to speak f he had said, to know : he immediately denies that mvr 
knowledge can be considered adequate ; we know only this, that 
love is more abundantly rich than our knowledge. The love of 
Christ to us always exceeds our knowledge ; and so in ver. 20 

1 The margin of both Ed. favours this connection of the words, and the 
Germ. Vers, agrees with it. — E. B. 

' OUoiofiijp ^vrruTi ha, iripiaaiivrri, for ^ht. 'iaa. Tripiaa. h olxoiofifi. So 
here eppi^ufihoi ha i^mjcwtiTS, for hx eppi^ufihoi i^iax- — Ed. 

' See App. When we take away what has been said, and put in something 
better or more imoortant : ' correctio.* 



EPIIESIANS 111. 20, 21. 87 

the power of God exceeds our knowledge. — ha, that) without a 
conjunction ; comp. iVa, tJiat, ver. 18. Spiritual knowledge and 
fulness are joined together. — e'lg, unto^) This is the goal. 

20. 'Tv'cp vawoi) irdvTa is governed by '!riii?i<sai, whence i-ffif is 
put adverbially, as presently after umpex'TripiegoZ, and iiirepXlan, 2 
Cor. xi. 5 ; u-irep may however be construed with wdvra : comp. 
ch. i. 22, where i'jrip 'jrdvra means, that which is above all : this 
[His exaltation as Head of the Church] is above all exaltation, 
that He Himself is the Head of the Church, etc.^ — hmpixvipmoZ, 
exceedingly abundant) Construe with to do. — uv) The Genitive is 
governed by the comparative, which is contained in irtpieeoZ, — 
rt voou/iiv, or think) Thought takes a wider range than prayers. A 
gradation. — xa,ra, according to) Paul appeals to their and his 
experience. 

21. 'Ev Ttj IxxX^jff/fif, in the Church) ver. 10. — elg 'jrdsag, into all) 
ver. 11, ch. ii. 7 : comp. again Ps. cxvii. Into all generations, 
which 6 ccluv, the age, comprehends, and-which terminates in the 
everlasting ages, roui alSivag. — rag yindc, generations) A generation 
is properly a period of human life, whilst we proceed from parents 
to children ; a'lSmg are periods of the Divine economy, passing on 
as it were from one scene to another. Here both words, for the 
sake of amplification, with a metaphor in yind, generation, are 
joined together, so that a very long time may be implied. For 
there are in aiung no longer generations.^ 

' Not with, as Engl. V. ; but, " that ye may be filled even as far as unto 
all the fulness of God." — Ed. 

' Beng. would render ch. i. 22, " He hath given Him to be Head over 
the Church, an elevation which is above every other kind of elevation " (i/srie 
■rawTa). — Ed. 

• Therefore ytued must be taken metaphorically. — Kd. 

h 



6S EPHESIANS IV. 1-4. 



CHAPTEE IV. 



1. 'o See//,io;, the prisoner) The bonds of Paul were subservient 
to the calling of the Ephesians ; and these ought to be so afPected 
by them (his bonds) as to delight Paul with their obedience ; a 
striking instance o{ feeling, ^hs. — h Kuplcji, in the Lord) construed 
with prisoner. — r^s xX^sitag, of the vocation) rev. 4. This is de- 
rived irom ch. i. 18 ; nay, rather from ch. i., ii., and iii. [For the 
second part of the epistle begins here, comprehending exhortations, 
and especially those which flow from the doctrine already discussed. 
—V. g.] Comp. Col. iii. 15. 

2. Mini — /tsrci, with — with) To these refer the two following 
participles, avsx6//,im, arouidipvrii;, forbearing, endeavouring dili- 
gently, which, being in the nominative, depend on the preceding 
imperative implied, walk ye. [The man, who is affected, as he 
ought to be, with a sense of the Divine calling, will be found to be 
adorned with the virtues mentioned in this passage, 1 Pet. iii. 9 ; 
Phil. i. 27. — V. g.] — •rraffjis, with all) To be construed also with 
meekness [wpcctrtiTog] (as well as with raviivoipposuvris, lowliness), 
Col. iii. 12, 13. — ra,irim(ppDs{j>ris, lowliness of mind) From a sense 
of grace, Rom, xi. 20. — Iv dyd'jrri, in love) In the bond of peace, 
ver. 3, corresponds to this expression. " In love" occurs again, 
ver. 15, 16. And here, love is preached [inculcated] : faith, in 
ver. 5 ; hope, in ver. 4. 

3. Tripeiv, to keep) Even where there is no division, there is 
need of admonitions. — rriv lv6r>iTa, the unity) So far as we are 
concerned, for the Holy Spirit in Himself remains one, ver. 4. — 
h Tip euvd'sgfiijj, in the bond) The bond, by which peace is main- 
tained, is love itself; Col. iii. 14, 15. 

4. "Ev eSi//,a xa! h vnu/j,a, one body and one Spirit) In the 
Apostles' Creed, the article relating to the Church properly follows 
the article relating to the Holy Spirit. — xal h, and one) Spirit, 
Lord, God and Father : the Trinity ; comp. the following verses. 
— Iv /i/^t IXiribi, in one hope) The Spirit is the earnest, and there- 
fore the hope of the inheritance is joined with the mention of His 
name. 



EFHESIANS IV. 5-«. 80 

5. M/a irtgTi;, tv Bavria/ia, one faith, one baptism) into Christ, 
the Lord. Sometimes baptism, sometimes faith, is put first ; 
Mark xvi. 16 ; Col. ii, 12. 

6. ndvrm, of all) This word occurring thrice, and 'rr&eiv pre- 
sently after, both are masculine ; for all are reduced to unity 
[are brought together as one, under the one God and Father]. — 
i'!rl) high above all with His grace. — Bi& iravr&iv) Working 
throughout all, through [by means of] Christ. — h iraeiv,^) in all 
dwelling, in (i.e., by) the Holy Spirit. > 

7. As, but) The antithesis is the word one [tig Kbpioc and iv 
^a.'imeijja, eTg &e6g] in the foregoing verses.^ — edoOri, has been given) 
This is taken from the psalm in the following verse. 

8. Aiyii, he says) David, nay, rather God Himself, Ps. Ixviii. 
(19) 20, avi^ris tig v-^og, rj'^^/jLaXuiTEVga.g al^aXuelar 'iXa^ig do/iara 
iv avdpu'jrijj. Some also in the LXX. read am^dg. But in the 
version of the LXX. that reading is generally inferior, which too 
closely agrees with the text of the New Testament, because it 
has been (probably) made to be in conformity to it. — H-vf/os, on 
high) So the heavens are called in Hebrew poetry ; likewise in 
Is. xxxii. 15. — fi^aXuTiudi a'lyjhaXose'iai, led captivity captive) A 
frequent repetition ; for example, 2 Chron. xxviii. 5. Here the 
forces of hell are denoted, 2 Pet. ii. 4, that are opposed to men. 
Christ, at His ascension, led them captive ; nor, however, does it 
fare the better for that reason with the malefactor, who is to be 
tried for his life, when he is led from prison to the forum or 
court of justice. This leading captive did not interfere with their 
condition in hell ; [it gave them no respite from torment.] If 
ever there had been for them any hope of escape, that would have 
been the time ; comp. ch. vi. 12, and Col. ii. 15. Nor does every 
ascension, but only the ascension which has captivity taken cap- 
tive joined with it, presuppose and infer a descent into the lower 
parts of the earth. — Ume dofiara. He gave gifts) To this expres- 

1 ABC Memph. read h ■r«<r/» only. DG/jr Vulg., both Syr. Versions, 
Iren., Firmilian ad Cypr. 150, Hilary, add iiiMit. Rec. Text, with no very 
old authority, reads vfuu. — Ed. 

The larger Ed. had preferred the omission of the pronoun, whether 
i^h or iii^h ; but the Germ. Vers., following the decision of the 2d Ed., re- 
ceived the pronoun ^^jj/.— ^B. B. 

» i.e. Though there is one Lord, etc., to us all, yet to each of us there is 
given grace according to, etc. — ^Ed. 



90 .. EPHESIANS IV. 9-11. 

sion may be referred He gave, ver. 11, and is given, and of the 
gift, ver. 7. In Hebrew, nnp^ is an abbreviated expression ; to 
wit, Christ received gifts, which He might immediately give. 
Comp. np^. Gen. xv. 9 [" Take me an heifer," abbreviated for, 
Take and sacrifice to me] ; 2 Eangs ii. 20 ; where sudden action 
is denoted by a concise expression ; so Xa^irmaav eoi, Ex. xxvii. 
20 ; Lev. xxiv. 2. — roTg avSpu'roig, for men) The dative of advan- 
tage for Dia^. Gifts are of advantage, not only to those who 
receive them, but to all. 

9. Ti Si, a/i^n, Now this fact, namely, tliat He ascended) Paul 
proves that the language of the psalm is to be referred to Christ : 
and the ascension is inferred from the descent ; John iii. 13. 
All beheld the sojourn of the Son of God upon the earth : they 
ought, from this fact, to have believed His ascension, which they 
did not see. There is a similar mode of reasoning at Acts ii. 29, 
etc., xiii. 36, 37 ; and especially atHeb. ii. 8, 9. The humble 
characteristics predicated of the Messiah were fulfilled in Jesus ; 
therefore the glorious things also predicated of the Messiah ought 
to be referred to Him. — Kuri^ri •Trpurov, He first descended) Paul 
takes for granted the Deity of Christ ; for those who are of the 
earth, although they did not previously descend, obtain the pri- 
vilege of ascent. — ilg r& xaruTipa fi^ipri Trig yijg) not merely to the 
earth itself, but to the lowest parts of the earth [so that through 
all its depths nothing did He leave unvisited; comp. ver. 10. — V.g-l 
The highest heavens, or all the heavens, are opposed to the lowest 
parts of the earth, or to all parts of the earth. Christ, by His 
own power, took possession of all, — first of the earth, then of 
heaven. Men are joined with the mention of the earth ; the cap- 
tivity is joined with the mention of the lower parts. — rrig yra, of 
the earth) in which men are. 

10. AurJs) He, not another. — Wipava Tavrm rm ohpamv, far 
above all heavens) Avery sublime expression. Christ not only 
ascended into heaven, Mark xvi. 19, but through the heavens, 
Heb.iv.l4,note; a6oue all heavens; theheaven [heavens] o/Zieauens, 
Dent. X. IL—wXripuer,, might fill) by His presence and opera- 
tions, with Himself. — r&. vdvra) all things, the lowest and the 
highest ; comp. Jer. xxiii. 24, where also the lxx. use the word 
ir7:ripo[jv. 

11. AOrJsj He himself) by His supreme power. This aDrif 



EPHESIANS IV. 12. 91 

is repeated from ver. 10. Ministers have not given themselves. 
[The apostle, we might think, takes a wonderful leap in descend- 
ing to these from the comprehensive subject of the whole universe, 
just now spoken of. He no doubt has regard to the body of 
Christ. In like manner, ch. i. 22 (after having just before 
spoken o? principality, power, might, etc.) — V. g.J — affooToXous — 
"jrpoipjjroii — i\'a'yyiKi(!r&,i,K.r.'k.,apostles — prophets — evangelists,etc^ 
Inferior offices might be conjoined with the highest grades ; for 
example, the apostle John acted at the same time as a prophet 
when he wrote the Apocalypse, and as an evaiigehst in the 
Gospel ; but not the contrary [" vice versa," the highest offices 
joined with the lowest grades]. All the apostles had also at the 
same time the prophetic power. Only that the very high de- 
gree of prophecy, by which the Apocalypse was written, was 
peculiar to John. But prophets and evangelists were not also 
at the same time apostles. The prophet takes precedence of 
the evangelist ; for the prophet testifies infallibly of the future, 
the evangelist infallibly of the past : the prophet derives all 
from the Spirit ; the evangelist puts on record a matter which 
has been perceived by the senses of sight and hearing, and 
yet he is fitted for an office of the highest importance, by a 
gift superior to that of pastors and teachers. Workers of miracles 
are not added here ; for their actions have now somewhat less 
reference to the perfecting, etc. And perhaps already, before 
the last days of the apostles, the gift of miracles was more rarely 
exercised ; comp. Heb. ii. 4. — •jroi/iivag xal diSaexaXoug, pastors 
and teachers) The appellation of shepherd (pastor) is everywhere 
else given to the Lord alone. Pastors and teachers are here 
joined ; for they chiefly feed by teaching, as also by admonition, 
rebuke. 

12. Uphg — eig — elg, to [ad, towards'] — for^or [in, for the 
end, unto. Engl. Vers, renders aU /or]) To this refer, into, 
unto, unto [as respectively answering to the previous vphc, t'lc, e/j], 
in the following verse ; although to \vfag, ad, ' towards'], and 
ird.0 [ilg, in, 'unto,' or 'into'], somewhat differ, Rom. xv. 2.^ 
The office of the ministry is denoted in this verse ; in the fol- 

■ E/f dymiof irpig oUa&ofiiv, unto his good, towards edification. The for- 
mer expressing the internal end in respect to God : the latter, the external 
end in respect to man. — Ed. 



92 ErUESIANS IV. 13. 

lowing, the goal which the saints have in view ; in ver. 14, 15, 
16, the way of growth ; and each of these has three parts, 
expressed in the same order. There are three paragraphs, 
divided severally into three parts. The first three parts have a 
mutual relation ; then the second three ; lastly, the third ; and 
all without a Chiasmus. — xara^ r/if/iJv, perfecting [' aptationem,' 
the mutual adaptation]) This in the greatest degree has the effect 
of producing unity. 

13. Mix?h **^0 ^°* ^'^^^ *^® apostles thought themselves to 
have reached the goal, Phil. iii. ; much less the Church. They 
had always to go forward, not to stand still, much less to fall 
behind. And now the Church must not contemplate from 
behind the idea of its own excellence, but ke6p before its eyes 
that idea as a future one, which is yet to be attained. Attend 
to this, ye who do not so much follow antiquity as make it an 
excuse. — xaravTrjeaifisv, till we arrive at) This tense, following 
the past tense, is imperfect [He gave some apostles, etc., tiU, 
and in order that, we all might arrive at'\. This ought to have 
already taken place at the time when Paul wrote ; {or faith [which 
he speaks of, " the unity of the faith"] belongs to travellers.' — o; 
vdvTig^alljyiz. thesaints. — iig — e/j — t!g,unto — unto — unto) [Asyn- 
deton] The repetition is without a connective particle. The 
natural age (life) grows up towards wisdom, strength, and 
stature. The things which correspond to these in the spiritual 
age (life), are, unity of faith, the mind strengthened [ver. 13, 
riXiiov rivSpa, and ver. 16, answer to this], and the fulness of 
Christ. — boTtira, unity) This unity is placed in friendly opposition 
to the variety of gifts, and to the whole body [" we all"] of the 
saints ; and the contrary of this unity is every wind, ver. 14. — 
rrjg mVews xa/ rrig BTiyviieiug, of faith and knowledge) These two 
words both agree and differ; for knowledge means something 
more perfect than faith. — roS T/oD rod 0iou, of the Son of God) 
The highest point in the knowledge of Christ is, that He is the 
Son of God. — E/'s avdpa t'b'Kiiov, to a perfect man) The concrete 
for the abstract; for unity and measure are abstract nouns: 

1 The sense seems, though not very clear, owing to Bengel's extreme 
brevity, All ought to have been by this time on the one and tlie same path 
of faith. For faith is the distinguishing characteristic of those who, as 
travellers, are seeking to arrive at the goal. — Ed. 



EPHESIANS IV. 14, 15. 9S 

concerraug perfection, comp.Phil. iii. 15. — ^X/x/ai;, of the stature) 
that Christ may be all and iti all : rfkmla, spiritual stature is 
the fulness of Christ. 

14. M?)jcer;) that we may be not, as formerly and as yet. — 
vrjmoi, children) 'Hnirioi, children, are opposed to a man in the second 
degree, and to a young man in the first : a perfect man, who 
can no longer increase in stature, but yet in other respects be- 
comes more perfect ; a child, who scarcely begins to grow. — 
xXii3£<)w^o>£iio;, tossing to and fro [as billows]) inwardly, upward 
and downward, even without wind. — ■!ripi<pip6/iivoi vdvu ave/iui, 
carried about with every wind) outwardly [with every wind that 
comes from without], hither and thither, others assaulting us. — 
xv^tlct, by the sleight) A metaphor taken from the player at dice, 
who frames his cast of the dice, so that the numbers may always 
turn up which may suit his purpose. — //^sMtlav) The Methodists 
of the Church of Rome are much disposed to use this word : 
see ch. vi. 11 [where rag /j,iMi!a,s is expressly joined to roD 
S/a/3dXou], note. Add D. Michaelis' Inaugural Dissertation ori" 
the exertions and methods (tricks) of the Church of Rome. 
— 7-?s 'TrXdvris,^ of error) i.e. of Satan. The Metonymy of 
the abstract [for the concrete : error, for the Parent of error, 
Satan] expresses the concealed mode of acting which the 
enemy uses. 

15. ' AXtiSiliomg, speaking the truth) In antithesis to error 
[rXdvris]. On this same word, truth, see ver. 21, 24. — h aydirji, 
in love) by which the body is compacted together. Here we have 
the beginning [the prow], and in ver. 16 the end [the stern : 
prora — •pu'ppis\. The words, speaking the truth, and in love, are 
conjoined. The latter is the more simple. — ait^fisco/iiv, we may 
grow): This depends on that (Jva), in ver. 14. This ai^riffig, in- 
crease, [as it is expressed in] ver. 16, comes in between the [state 
of] children [ver. 14] and that of the ftdl-grown m-an [avdpa. r'tXnov, 
ver. 13]. — e'ls aMv, into Him) Paul has Jesus in his mind, and 
first says Him, and then afterwards shows of whom he is speak- 
ing. — r& Tavra, all things) supply xara, according to, in: we 

1 'Ell TTxuovpyia iffi; t^</ liii^ila-u ziis ■ir'Kaiiins-i " by craftiness, with a view- 
to a methodized plan of deception." Beng., however, because of the anti- 
thesis duipairau, takes ir'ha.i/ii; =: Satan, and perhaps takes the sense thus, 
" By the methodized craftiness of the (parent of) error." — Ed. 



9t EPHESIANS IV. 16, 

severally, one and all, in all things. — ilf, who) This refers to 
Christ. The Head is put in the way of a distinct clause.* — a 
Xpisrhcy Christ) Ploce,^ emphatic [the Christ']. For previously 
it had been said, into Him; though o Xpiarhg is nevertheless 
afterwards mentioned at the end very emphatically, as if he 
were to say, Christ is (the) Christ. To Him all things are to 
be referred. 

16. 'Eg, from) The source of growth. — aumpfio'Ko'yotjfj.fvov zai 
eufi^ilScc^o/jijivov) the body Jitly joined together and compacted; 
the concrete for the abstract ; i.e. the compacting and joining 
together of the body by right confornlation and solid compact- 
ing together : (rwap/j,oXoyov//-svi>\/ refers to what is according to 
rule, so that all the parts may be rightly fitted in their proper 
position and in mutual relation ; ev/ji,j3i^a^6/Lsvov denotes at once 
firmness and consolidation. — di& nraam a^rig r^jg k-Kf^opriyiai) 
[" By every handle of mutual assistance." Engl. Vers. By that 
which every joint suppUeth"]. In the wrestling ground the a,(pal 
are the means by which the antagonist to be assailed is laid hold 
of; for the opponents threw over each other dust and sand, so 
that each might be able to seize his adversary, even though the 
latter was anointed with oil. Here the means [handles] of 
m/utual assistance axe called apa/ rrn im-)(opriyiag. Aia,, by, con- 
strued with iroiii'Tai) makes.' — xar hspyeiav, according to the work- 
ing) The power ought also to be put into active exercise ; comp. 
xuTo, rriv mpyuctv, ch. i. 19, iii. 7. But the article is wanting 
in this place ; because he is speaking of the particular efficacy of 
single members.*— IvJs ixdamv, of each one) To be construed 
with bepyiiav b /j^irpu). — rou gu/ji,ci.Tog, of the body) The noun for 
the reciprocal pronoun [viz. increase of itself, eauni] ; therefore 

1 Beng. seems to translate thus :— " Grow up unto Him, who is Christ, 
the Head." Not as Engl. V., Unto Him, wJio is the Head, (even) Christ. 
—Ed. 

= See App. The same word, Christ (,Him,yer. 15, = Christ, ver. 13), twice 
put; previously as the proper name: here as an appellative, or distinguish- 
ing title. — Ed. 

» " Makes increase by every handle of mutual assistance." But Engl. V. 
joins it with <ru^/3;/3«^o>£»oi/, compacted by that which every joint supplieth. 
— Ed. 

* Whereas in ch. i. 19 he speaks of the ffeneral working of God's po*er. 
—Ed. 



EMIESIANS IV. 17-19. 95 

roifTrai is used, not voiiZ} — h a/a^Ji, in love) Construe with the 
edifying of itself. 

17. ToOro oZv y^iytii, this I say then) He returns to the point 
with which he set out, ver. 1. — /njxlr; u/i,ag iripmanii, that ye 
henceforth walk not) This is an antithesis to ver. 1. — h /iaradrriri, 
in vanity) The root of such walking, departure from the know- 
ledge of the true God, Eom, i. 21 ; 1 Thess. iv. 5 : in (h) is to 
be construed with they walk [iSvri 'iripmaTiT, not with v/iag 
•!ripmaTsT\i]. Vanity is explained at large in ver. 18 ; walking in 
ver. 19. 

18. 'EaxoTigf/iivoi Tp Biavolcj, ovrss, Having the understanding dark- 
ened) This verse has four clauses. The third is to be referred 
to the first, and in it ousav answers to ovtss-; the fourth, to the 
second. For 'hres is connected also in Tit. i. 16, as here, with 
the preceding epithet [^SSiXuxro! ovrcg]. The participles, darkened, 
alienated, take for granted, that the Gentiles, before they had 
revolted from the faith of their fathers, nay rather before Adam's 
fall, had been partakers of light and life ; comp. be renewed, ver. 
23.^ — rrig X,mi, the life) of which, ch. ii. 5. — roD ©eoO, of God) 
The spiritual life is kindled in believers from the very life of 
God. — ^Tuprngiv [Engl. Vers, blindness^, hardness) The antithesis 
is life : life and feeling (opposed to hardness) exist and fail to- 
gether. Comp. Mark iii. 5, note. Tldpuffig, hardness, is contra- 
distinguished from blindness, where the latter is expressly 
noticed; otherwise it includes it in itself. — xapSia;, of heart) 
Eom. i. 21. 

19. ' A-jTriXyri-KoTts) A very significant term, in which pain 
(aXyos) is used by Synecdoche for the whole sensibiHty of the 
affections and understanding, whether painful or pleasant. For 
pain urges us to seek the means of a cure ; and when the pain 
is removed, not only hope, but also the desire and thought of 
good things are lost, so that a man becomes senseless, shameless, 
hopeless. That constitutes AarcZjiess, ver. 18. Despairing (Des- 

1 The middle being reflexive, i.e. the object relating to the same person as 
the subject. — Ed. 

' Implying a previous state of innocence. — Ed. 

' A(os T^i/ ayiioiao, on account of the ignorance) This of itself is the com- 
mencement of their wtetched condition. Eom. i. 21, 23, [also ver. 28]. — 
V.g. 



96 

perantes), in the Vulgate and Syriac Version, is worthy of con- 
sideration, and illustrates its signification. In this way r; avaXytjala 
{insensibility) and >i d'Troymsis (despair) are conjointly noted by 
Chrysostom,Honiil. vi.jOnHeb.iii. 13. But the very word a'!raXys~). 
Cicero seems to paraphrase, lib. ii. famil. Ep. 16, when he says, 
" Diuturna Desperatione rerum obduruisse animxun ad 
DoLOEEM novum," that by long-continued Despair at existing 
circumstances the mind has become hardened to new Pain. There- 
fore avaXyih is more than to despair. Raphelius has given a 
beautiful disquisition on this word out of Polybius, where, of two 
examples ascribed to Polybius by Suidas,the one exists in the same 
words inXiphilinus. — iavroug -Trapsduixavjthey gave themselves over) 
of their own accord, willingly. — ■jrdgrig, of all) aeeXyeia, lascivious- 
ness, the species ; axa6a.pgla, impurity, the genus. Those who 
are occupied with these works of the flesh, as being hurried away 
(seized) with the heated desire of material objects, fall also into 
greediness [fXeovi^lcf, avarice, covetousness] ; and gain made by 
unchastity was frequent among the Gentiles. 

20. 'T/ieTe di ou% olirws i/idhre rov Xpigrh, but you have not so 
learned Christ) The same form of expression is found at Deut. 
xvni. 14, 15, aol di ou^ ovriag 'iduxB Kupiog 6 &s6g 6ov vpocpfiTrit — 
auroD axouaigSi. Christ is one,^ says Paul (comp. 2 Cor. xi. 4) ; 
as then you have heard Him, i.e. so you ought (in conduct) to 
represent (copy) Him. As [ver. 21, xa6tig ianv aXfthia b rSi'lngov], 
which afterwards occurs, is to be referred to [ye have] not so 
[ver. 20] ; not so is opposed to uncleanhess, ver. 19 ; if so be that, 
etc., to vanity, ver. 17, 18.—rbvXpigThv, Christ) B.e uses the name 
Jesus, more expressly denominating the Lord, in the following 
verse. Jesus, most perfectly and briUiantly completed the idea 
of Christ. 

21. Elyi, if so be that [or rather as the Indie, follows, /Since, 
seeing that ye have heard]) The particle does not diminish, but 
increases the strength of the admonition.— airjv, Rim) This word, 
and in [Engl. Vers, by'] Him, which presently occurs, are brought 
in here from the following clause : as you, Gal. iv. 11. To hear 
Christ has a fuller meaning than to hear of Christ.— ^jxoia-an, ye 

' i.e. If there were some other Christ, whom you could serve and yet obey 
your lusts, ye might walk still as in past times. But there is only one 
Christ, and He, one that requireth holiness, 2 Cor. xi. 4.— Ed. 



EPHESIANS IV. 22. 97 

have heard) Even the first hearing about Christ takes away sins. 
— J» alrifi, in Him) i.e. in His name, as to what concerns Him. — 
ehiha.y^^yiri, ye have been taught) you have received the doctrine. 
The consequent of hearing and of being taught is to learn [i/iuhn, 
ver. 20]. — xaSiic, even as) i.e. so as : comp. xaSag, in such a way 
as, 1 Cor. viii. 2, so, as the truth is really in Jesus. The anti- 
thesis is according to, ver. 22 [your former conversation — accord- 
ing to the deceitful lusts]. — aXrikia, the truth) This is opposed to 
heathen vanity in general, ver. 17 ; and is resumed ver. 24, that 
it may receive a fuller discussion. Truth, viz. the true know- 
ledge of the true God. — h rcS'IJiffoS, in Jesus) Those who beHeve 
in Jesus, speak the truth, 1 John ii. 8. 

22. ' AvoSisSa,!, that ye put off) This word depends on / say, 
ver. 17: and from the same verse the power of the particle no 
longer \j/jrixsTi, Engl. Vers, henceforth — not'\ is taken up, as it were, 
after a parenthesis without a conjunction in the equivalent verb, 
vut off [= that ye henceforth walk not, ver. 17] : for the reverse 
of those things, which are mentioned ver. 18, 19, has been al- 
ready set forth and cleared out of the way in ver. 20, 21 ; and 
yet this verb airoSigSai, to put off, has some relation to the words 
immediately preceding ver. 21. Putting on, ver. 24, is directly 
opposed to the putting off [ver. 22]. — xard ttiv vporspav am(STpo(pnv, 
according to the former conversation) according ^^ yon have for- 
merly walked. The antithesis is the whole of ver. 23 : according 
to shows the force of the verb, which has relation to it, put 
off, not merely abstain. — rhv rraXaibv civSpaivov, the old man) The 
concrete for the abstract, as presently, at ver. 24, "the new man:" 
comp. ver. 13, note. The abstract, for example, is lying, ver. 
25. — riv (phipo/j^ivov, who was corrupt) The Imperfect, as xXe^twv, 
who stole, ver. 28. The antithesis is, was created [in righteous- 
ness, ver. 24], and that too in the aorist or imperfect {jiTieShra,, 
not as Engl. Vers. " which is created"], in respect of the first 
creation and the original intention [of God in making man at 
first pure and innocent]. — T-aTo, rag im6u//,!ccs, according to the 
lusts) The antithesis is, according to God, in righteousness [ver. 
24], etc.— rds cmSu/Miag, the lusts) The antithesis is, righteousness 
and holiness. — r^s avdTng) of heathen error. The antithesis is, 
of truth [r^s &XnSeia.g, ht. " the holiness of truth;" so true hohness, 
ver. 24]. 

VOL. IV. <i 



98 EPHESIANS IV. 23-26. 

23. TcS 'jrveufiari mu voo;, in the spirit of the mind) 1 Coi. xiv. 
14. The spirit is the inmost part of the mind. 

24. Thv xdivbv) Tov veov is used, Col. iii. 10, of that which is 
native [the new man becomes natural, i.e. the true nature'] in be- 
lievers ; but here avavioueSai has been used by him just before. 
[Therefore he does not repeat viov, the conjugate]. Vice versa in 
the passage of Col. just quoted, &mxam6/j.im is subjoined [nov 
having gone just before] concerning the aims and pursuits of 
believers.' — xnaShTa, which has been created) at , the beginning of 
Christianity. This new man is created in Christ : comp. ch. 
ii. 10. 

25. Th -^luSog, lying) The mentioning of lying and truth in 
conversation^ is properly added to the universal commendation 
of truth. — or;, because) Col. iii. 11, note. — aXkriXoiv, of one another) 
Jews and Greeks, ibid. — iJ^iM, members) ver. 4. 

26. 'Opy'i^iBk xal /in aiiapranri, be angry and sin not) So the 
LXX., Ps. iv. 5. Anger is neither commanded, nor quite prohi- 
bited ; but this is commanded, not to permit sin to enter into 
anger : it is like poison, which is sometimes used as medicine, but 
must be managed with the utmost caution. Often the force of 
the mood [the Imperative mood] falls only upon a part of what 
is said, Jer. x. 24.' — o n'ktoi, the sun) The feeling kept up during 
the night is deeply seated. — i^n im&v'sru, let — not go down) Deut. 
xxiv. 15, o!)x lirihdairai i nXiog It' aur^, the sun shall not go down 
upon it. — lirl Tifi 'jrapopyig/jiCi ufiuv, upon your wrath^) Not only 

' NIof, recent, lately originated, in opposition to what was originated some 
time back. Katuos, new, not yet used, in opposition to that which has existed 
long and been in use: xeoi/ oTvon, but kxioovs eusKois, Matt. ix. 16, 17. So 
i/eoff eiuSpovo; in Col. refers to the duayivi/riaii:, whereas the xatvo; is one 
who differs from the former man : the xeos is one who is di/xxaivoufiei/os 
Ktn' nxava, of God. — Tittm. Syn. Gr. Test. K«/»oV more applied to the 
results of renewal on the Christian character and walk. Nio?, the new 
nature of believers. Neof is applied to persons in the sense yovmg, which 
xctmos is not. Kaiiios is what is fresh, as opposed to what is worn and trite. 
It is also said of what is strange and foreign. — Ed. 

' ' h.'hiiSiia.u, truth, ver. 21, 24. — ^V. g. 

^ " O Lord, correct me, but with judgment, not in thine anger." Where 
the force falls on the imperat. correct, not in its full extent, but with the 
limitations, with judgment, and not in thine anger : in fact, the main force 
rests on these limitations. — Ed. 

' Uxpopyiafios is not = opyii. The former is absolutely forbidden : the 



EPHESIANS IV. 27-29. 99 

should wrath cease, but a brother should be put right without 
delay, and reconciliation take place, especially with a neighbour 
whom you will not see afterwards in this Kfe,' or whom you have 
seen for the first time in the street, at an entertainment, or in 
the market-place. 

27. MfiTt, Neither) Place is given to the devil by persisting in 
anger, especially during the night ; comp. [the Rulers] of the 
darkness, ch. vi. 12.^ — fj^fiTt is used as nai /irj, ver. 30. 

28. "O xX's'Trnov, who stole) This a milder expression than o 
xXWrng, the thief. The participle is that of the imperfect tense, 
while the present here is not excluded. — /i,&\Xov dh) but even 
rather [let him labour more] than [he would] if he had not 
stolen. In every kind of sin which, a man has committed, he 
ought afterwards to practise the contrary virtue. — xomarw, let 
him labour) Often theft and idleness go together. — rh ayaSbv, good) 
An antithesis to theft, first committed in an evil hour with 
thievish hand [lit. with a /tant? covered with pitch s]. — i-aTs x^f'^h 
with the hands) which he had abused in committing theft. — ha, 
'iyri, that he may have) The law of restitution ought not to be 
too strictly urged against the law of love. [He who has stolen 
should also excercise liberality beyond the restitution of what was 
taken away. — V. g.] 

29. 'S.a'jtphi, corrupt) Having the savoiu* of oldness [of " the 
old man"], ver. 22 ; without grace, insipid. Col. iv. 6. Its oppo- 

latter not so. See Mark iii. 5, where ipyh is applied to the sinless Jesus. 
The sense is not, Your anger shall not be imputed to you if you put it away 
before nightfall ; but let no ■Trapopyiai/.o;, irritation or exasperation, mingle 
with your anger, even though your anger be righteous. Trench, Syn. Gr. 
Test. Engl. V. loses this point by translating wrath. However, I think 
there is also included the notion, that even righteous anger, if kept up too long, 
is likely in us to degenerate into irritation. — Ed. 

) Beng. seems by this to take the sun going down as also figurative, for 
life coming to a close without a reconciliation. 

^ This reference also implies that Beng. takes the night, during which 
anger is retained, as figurative of the darkness over -yhich the deml is prince. 
This does not exclude the literal sense. The literal keeping of anger during 
the night is typical of spiritual giving place to the devil, the ruler of dark- 
ness. — Ed. 

' ' Said of hands to which others' property seems to stick ; thievish — 
Mart. viii. 59.— En. 



100 EPHESIANS IV. 30-32.' 

site is good. — ii>n ixmpiuieSii, let — not proceed) If it be already on 
the tongue, swallow it again. — il rig) if any [whatsoever], as 
often soever : However, equal facility of expression is not de- 
manded of all. — vfli o!xodo//,fiv — Toig axovouei, for edifying — to the 
hearers) This mode of speaking is not such as tends to no profit ; 
it does not subvert the' hearers, as those words of which we read, 
2 Tim. ii. 14. — da x^P'"} "^'^y S'*^^ grace) There is great efficacy 
in godly conversation.' 

30. Mrj XvTTiTre, grieve not) by corrupt conversation. The 
Holy Spirit is grieved not in Himself, but in us [or in other men 
(by reason of our conversation) — Y. g.J, when His calm testi- 
mony is deranged. The LXX. often use Xweh for mn and «lSp. — 
le(()payle^riTi, ye have been sealed) that you may know that there 
is not only some day of deliverance, but also that that day will 
be a day of dehverance to you, as being the sons of God ; and 
on that account rejoice [opposed to grieve^ — s/'c ij/i'spav avokurpti- 
ff£ws, to the day of deliverance [redemption^) This is the last day ; 
of which there is a kind of representation [present realization — 
a pledge given in hand] in the day of death ; it takes for 
granted all previous days, Eom. ii. 16. On that day especially 
it will be a matter of importance to us, who shall be found to be 
sealed. 

31. Tlixpla, bitterness) Its opposite is in ver. 32, xPn'^'^ol, kind 
to all. — 6v//.ig, harshness, cruelty [ssevitia]) Its opposite is merci- 
ful, viz., to the weak and the miserable. — xal opy^, and anger) Its 
opposite is forgiving, viz., towards those who injure us. Thus 
far the climax descends, in reference to things forbidden.— /SXair- 
ipnwia, blasphemy) [evil-speaking'] an outrageous (heinous) species 
of clamour. Love takes away hoth.—xaxlcf) wickedness. This 
is the genus, therefore with all is added. [It denotes that depra- 
vity (evil-disposition, malice), by which a man shows himself ill- 
natured and troublesome to those who associate with him. ^V. g.] 

32. 'ExapiguTo, has forgiven) He has shown Himself kind, 
merciful, forgiving. 



EPHESIANS V. 1—1, 101 



CHAPTEE V. 

1. Mifirira}, imitators) in forgiving (comp. the verse above, 
ch. iv. 32), and in loving ; for beloved {rixm aya'TrriTd, beloved 
children) follows. O how much more glorious and blessed is it 
to be an imitator of God, than of Homer, Alexander, Apelles, 
etc. ! — iig rixva, as children') Matt. v. 45. 

2. Uspi'jraTin-i, walk) The fruit of our love, which has been 
kindled from [by the love of] Christ [tous].^ — uvip i}f/,Zv,for us) 
The Dative, to God, is not construed with the verb, gave Himself, 
but with an offering and sacrifice, which immediately precede it. 
For Paul is alluding to Moses, in whose writings such words are 
common : oXoxavru/Ma Tip Kvpl<jj, iig oe/irjv suudlag, 6vsi(xff/j,a ro5 Kuplai 
edrl, x.T.X., Ex. xxix. 18, 25, 41 ; Lev. xxiii. 13, 18, etc. — Tpog- 
popav xai 6ug!av, an offering and a sacrifice) Comp. Heb. x. 5, 
etc. — t'lghe/jjiiv ihoihiag, for a sweet-smelling savour) By this sweet- 
smelling odour we are reconciled to God. 

3. TLopvild, fornication) impure love. — n irXion^la, or covetous- 
ness) ver. 5, ch. iv. 19. — fi^rjSk infjiaZisSiii, let it not be even 
named) viz. as a thing (ever) done ; comp. 1 Cor. v. 1, axovirai, 
it is reported commonly that, etc. ; or (let it not be named) with- 
out necessity : comp. ver. 4, 12. — -Trpimi, becomes) Its opposite is 
ovx avrixovTo., which are not convenient \_proper'], ver. 4. 

4. Ai<s-)(_p6rrii, filthiness) in word, or even in gesture, etc. — 
fioipaKoyia., foolish talking) wherein a mere laugh is aimed at 
even without wit [the salt of profitable discourse, Col. iv. 6].— 
ri ihrpa-iri'Kia) or jesting.^ This is more refined than filthiness or 
foolish talking; for it depends on the understanding. The 
Asiatics delighted much in it : and in former times jesting pre- 

' And also kindled by the Holy Ghost as the agent. — Ed. 

' Wahl translates this word, which is found here only in the New Testament, 
Scurrilitas. Its classic use conveys no idea of censure ; Th. li and 
Tpiva, one who happily accommodates himself to his company : pleasantly, ur- 
banity. In fiupoXoyU, the foolishness, in a.laxpo'f^'iyix, the foulness, in iirpa.- 
we-ht'x, the false refinement of discourse, not seasoned with the salt of gracp. 
are noted. —Trench, Syn. Gr. T.— Ed. 



102 EPHESIANS V. 5, 6. 

vailed for some ages, even among the learned. Why so ? (He- 
cause) Aristotle considered jesting to be a virtue ; and they 
made much use of Plautus. Olympiodorus obsertes, that Paul 
rebuked evr/xn'TrsKla, jesting, in such a way that uare oiiSs to, 
aenTa dt-/.riov, there is not even a place for urbane conversation 
(pleasantry). — m oiix avrixovTa, the things which are not befitting 
[convenientj) An epithet [not the predicate]. Supply the predi- 
cate, let them be kept out of the way} — ihya^iaria, thanksgiving) 
Supply ayny<.ii, is convenient. The holy and yet jojrful use of the 
tongue is opposed to its abuse, ver. 18, 19. The abuse and the 
use are not compatible with one another. — ihrpamXia, and Eu^a- 
fiSTia are an elegant Paranomasia •} the former disturbs (and 
indeed the refined jest and subtile humour sometimes offend the 
tender feelings of grace), the latter exhilarates the mind. 

5. "'EsTi, be ye) [knowing. Engl. V. makes it Indie, Ye hnow\. 
The imperative, Gal. v. 21. — os kanv ildui'koXdTptjg, who is an idolor 
ter) Col. iii. 5. Avarice (covetousness) is the highest act of 
revolt (desertion) from the Creator to the creature, Matt. vi. 24 ; 
Phil. iii. 19 ; 1 John ii. 15 : and it too in the highest degree 
violates the commandment concerning the love of our neighbour, 
which resembles the commandment respecting the love of God. 
It is then idolatry, and therefore the greatest sin, 1 Sam. xv. 23. 
— rou Xf/ffT-oD xa; 0soC, of Christ and of God) The article only 
once expressed indicates the most perfect unity [of God and 
Christ], 1 Tim. v. 21, vi. 13 ; 2 Thess. i. 12. Comp. Mark xiv. 
33. Elsewhere it is double for the sake of emphasis. Col. 
ii. 2. 

6. KivoTg Xo'yo/?, with vain words) by which the anger of God 
is despised, and by which men strive to withdraw themselves 
from their duty, to consider good as nothing, and to extenuate 
and varnish over evil [in which moreover all things everywhere 
abound. — ^V. g.] This is the genus ; there are three species at 
ver. 4. So the LXX., firi /iepi/imTuaav h Xoyoig xivoT;, Exod. V. 9. 
— di& raura, because of these things) because of fornication, etc. 
— i] opy^ roC Seov, the anger of God) The antithesis to the recon- 
ciliation [on God's part to man, by His forgiving in Christ], 

' Taken by Zeugma out of finli ovo/ia^etrda, ver. 3 Ed. 

2 See Append. A similar sound and form in two nouns, producing a 
pleasant antithesis Ed. 



3i[) mojg po£) JO jjTAi ^m Smop „ 'ifcJirt/fi jayB noioDituas jo ^uiuioa aiu 
sjnd -^ "[Sag; SB "Sin^ ,,1^^311 3^ nioaj ^m pooS qjm Sutams „ 'Ssxuonsi^ 
-rtoj Svjonni J.3ii sMn/^ x| 'josq 'Xpusaai sxom. ■raqD'Br[ SB 'sdo:js Snag ; 

am ui SI t[oit[A4. iiica-^ooB si[:j s9i[STnSui;x9 ja^sBiu 8q; jo jf;ii9A3s 
atj:j n8A3 V)^ "[Xp^^nLap^ 90B]^d iCq:j |yg o'\\ uoipv/si^vs daiB of 
Hid^vi SI 9i[ 'aoviJ iHX Ml }uds3j,d 6uwq uaycn 'fi '[spdMpii /iyf ot 
fJtvBdJ, R%jLmxi »] iixai-^ooB savii pinoiis eii fviff HivssdOdu aq jjim ;_i 
'Aipdnj!, XOS IXKV liiisisiiJjp loxxi/ri n 'nn'X.i /i^^riw /spfcsj tiviotni 'uiJ'Bl 
TB JO J33SJ:9A0 SI (JBqlJ 8ABp 81{:j JO sjCbs UOl{doiI95[ "lUVdll dill 

mojbf SI 90IAJ9S 9S0i{M. ^nq '■doiiuds-dlid 9ai§ jom S90p oqM '9n:jjr[A 
siq:j s9ss9ssoc[ 9q puB f ja^sBui srq jo s;s9J9:jin 9q:> pai^oniojd aq 
qoiqAV jCq 'aABp B jo 9n:;jiA pdiouud 9q^ paigpisuoo s'bas. ^ym-pooifi 
jBq^ 'uoqdou9;5^ jo soraiouoog aq^ inoij 'sifjBiiiga: [[9av snijaqd'eg; 
(j^iawpooB mioh [[nos] ij/odx^ d\j% wloaJ! ^^imuni ii'ri skXn^ j^a^ -^^ '9 

•p[['Bied Qiv. su'Xn'f^ %3 puB isdUxji 
inqSm 'i^ 'gg -mA •oo'epf j og -gg •ni "pQ 'suXn^ xf og 
([^nos] j^v9ii 9i[j. vxoj,/ hkXni'^ xf — q9[['BJBd 9JB 'qo^ ui ^pof) 
Bwuvdf puB '"qdg; ui ''po-Q fo nicn syj Buiop jloj : pOjj) Bwuvodf 
'p9SS9jdx9 snq:} si :ji 9J9qAi 'gg •m qoQ 'sisaq^i^UB 9inBS 9q^ 9A'Bq 
^A\. "C'^'""'*?'^?) po£) 9SB9|d o:f snoreuB 9jb' suosjgd qong "po^) 
(0 iiicn 9iif op oi[(n 3so%ij^ "suy g 1-^I^UO fa s^uvaMs aq; n^o gq 
S9op inotL^ 'o^a 'Bmop 'puyj fo sfuvaMs diij. sv 'sAi.O]]^oj jfp^'BTp 
-aniuii sisaq^nuTj 9qjL (sMsv32dr-u9m sv ^loxoidvM.md^n'a 5u, "g 

•[oj{i uino ■Bpu9i';itnmoo uou] ;i q:jtAS, p9uiof sb p9J9pTsaoo gq o:> 
^ou puB 'iC;iuBi;siaqQ o} [9iBuipjoqns ap^ui] pa^pgfqns si jfjaABjg 
•gg 'ni qoQ 'duioo .' ssdudiBuis o:j paeoddo -^ygiqo si doiaMS-dfid 

aqM. 'sasiaA Suimo[[oj aq^ ui paure;[dxa si siqj^ -^x "S-rsx -uoiqQ 

X 'ticc i,.^U 'qSH ^^* •^°J ■^''^'l ®H* °S (?>*»^Y fa (jf^pqdrais) ssau 
-dlBuisuihmqdm 5Uj. uitjoyjiM — -saTnp ^Tiapu'B ni saA'Bpjo uoi:>rpuoo 
aq^ o:> pj^Sgj: seq ajj '6 ■J9a 'jCijAi'B uq^v% ;ou 9J9m 'p9uj90uoo 
ajB sja^sBui SaiAaipq sb jbj os 'sBuma^vaxyf ji sb jfpspajd (i^M??^ 
•m^J,} puv u,V9f i[%i<n 'norloSj. /nx nogjoi ■^j,3'ri—-nsd^ dtp. 0? BuvpMOOV 
'sppB aq 'jaqiBj 9q; ■)unoooB ^^q^ uo isia^sBui pay^BO ip^n^ 
-osq-B aq ip^'Bipannni os^b ppoqs suosaad qons ^^q; 'f -jaA '[pjo^j 
aq;] ja^sBjY; 9tu:> aq:j jo uojiaaui Sai^iBin jayB 'jadojd pu sbav ;j 
(usdjfdtn 0} BuipMOOV sMpvm unofi Of ^•a-xSm 'a^mc Sioidnic 5/oj — -pua 
aq; ;b '8 '^^^ 's9ABp 0; ;X9U sapgds v sb U9mp99jj jo puB 's9ABp 
JO 'ifpuiBU 'i(pBOjq S5[B9ds 9a9q ajj (s^uva^s 'lox^'i !0 'Q 

•I '9 's 'lA sKvisaiida sii 



EPHESIANS V. 7-13. 103 

ver. 2, ch. iv. 32. — I*/ roug vMs rrn a-reih/ag, on the children q/ 
disobedience) in reference to heathenism. 

7. Mfi, be not) lest the anger of God should come upon you. 
Two parts ; be not willing, and be not willing, ver. 7, and 11. 
Fellowship both with wicked men, ver. 7, and with wicked 
works, ver. 11, must be avoided. 

8. Sxoro's — pZ;, darkness — light) The abstract for the concrete, 
exceedingly emphatic ; for, children of light, follows. 

9. ' O xap'TTos rou tparhi,^ the fruit of light) The antithesis is, the 
unfruitful works of darkness, ver. 11. — Iv, in) is in, consists in, 
etc. — Aya^oishvri xal SixaiogLvr] xal aXrihicf,, in goodness, and righte- 
ousness, and truth) These are opposed to the vices just before 
described, from cb. iv. 25, and onwards. 

10. Aoxifj/A^ovTs;, proving) Construe with walk, ver. 8. 

11. As, xal) xal, even : it i? not enough to abstain [yourself, 
you must also reprove others]. — sXiy^in, reprove) by words and 
deeds worthy of the light. 

12. Toip, for) The reason why he speaks indefinitely, ver. 11, 
of the works of darkness, whereas he described definitely the 
fruit of light, ver. 9. At the same time the kindness, the jus- 
tice, the wholesomeness of the reproving of them, are distinctly 
shown from this circumstance. — xp\i(pr\, secretly) in avoidance of 
the light, and most frequently. — »' aurSiv) by them, who are in 
darkness. — alg^phv, it is a shame) Writing rather familiarly to 
the Corinthians, he names them ; in like manner to the Romans, 
because it was necessary; here however he acts with greater 
dignity. — xat) even to speak of, much less to do them.^Xsys/v, 
to speak of) They may be judged by their contraries [ver. 9], 
goodness, righteousness, truth. 

13. Ah) but; although those things cannot be spoken of or 
named. — eXsy^6/j,e\ia, reproved) by you, ver. 11. — wb rou (pcorog 
ipanpoijrai, are made manifest by the light) faog, (panpog, are con- 
jugates. — (pavspourai, are mude inanifest) that their shamefulness 
may be known, whether those who have been guilty of doing 
them treat their reprovers with scorn or repent of them. — mv, 
everything) The abstract for the concrete ; for the subject here 

' Rec. Text has ■jnisi/aa.ra; with later Syr. But ABD(A) corrected later, 
Gfg Vulg. Lucif. have ^fcroj. — Ed. 



104 EPHESIANS V. 14-lG. 

is the man himself; comp. the following verse, wherefore [Ee 
saith, Awake, etc., which proves that the vav here refers to the 
man reproved]. — yap, for) For makes an emphatic addition 
pEpitasis^] in a gradation. — rh (pavipovfLivov, an Antanaclasi? ""the 
same word in a twofold sense], for <pavipouTai is passive ; p. ^ov- 
fiivov is middle, ''what does not avoid being made manifest ; comp. 
afterwards 'iynpai, and amera. — pSs, light) a Metonymy, as 
ver. 8.' — EOT;, is) becomes, and afterwards is light. 

14. A;6 Xe/e;, Wherefore He says) The chief part of this ex- 
hortation is in Is. Ix. 1, (pariZfiv ipuTi^ov, 'lepouda.'Kfifi- ijnii yap sov 
rh (pSig, Heb. ''"lis ''Dip ; so ibid. ch. lii. 1, 2, s^eytlpov avaST^Si. 
But the apostle speaks more expressly in accordance with (out 
of) the light of the New Testament, and according to the state 
of him who requires to be awakened. At the same time he 
seems to have had in his mind the particular phraseology which 
had been ordinarily used at the feast of trumpets : Arise, Arise 
out of your sleep ; awake from your sleep, ye who deal in vain 
things, for very heavy sleep is sent to you; see Hotting, ad 
Godw., p. 601. And perhaps he wrote this epistle at that time 
of the year : comp. 1 Cor. v. 7, note. — 'iysipai — avaara) Ammo- 
nius : avaa^rivai, lirl epyov syspSrjvai, £§ vwov, to rise up, viz. so as to 
engage in work ; to be awakened, viz. out of sleep. — Ix rwn vfupm, 
from the dead) ch. ii. 1. — IvKpaiiBii) will begin to shine on thee, 
as the sun. Is. Ix. 2. The primitive word, sTupaugxta, is in the 
LXX. ; so from yripdaxa, yripaSu, aptaxai, apitsu. 

15. 'RXiitiTi, see) This word is repeated, ver. 17. — ttws, how) 
True solicitude looks even to the manner. As [wise] corresponds 
to it. — axpi^Zi) circumspectly [_Man soil es genau (precise, accu- 
rate, fitting exactly) nehmen. — ^V. g.] Comp. Acts xxvi. 5. — 
//,fi ug a(so(poi, not as fools) who walk irregularly.* 

16. 'E^ayopa^ofievoi rhv xaipbv, redeeming the time) So the LXX., 

1 naj'T* virtually repeated in wau with the Epitasis of y»p added to the 
latter, so forming a gradation. — ^Ed. 

2 Eoerything which allows itself to be made manifest. Not as Eng. V., 
which takes it actively, Whatsoever doth make manifest Ed. 

' Abstract for the concrete— i« 'light, for, is luminous— is a child of the 
light. — Ed. 

* Prseter propter viam, thereabouts, about, i.e. in and out of the way, un- 
certainly. — Ed. 



EPHESIANS V. 17. 105 

y.tt,ifh)i b/iiT? l^ayopaZfTi, Dan. ii. 8, ye (would) gain the time. The 
days, says Paul, are evil, and are in the power of wicked men, 
not in your own power. Wherefore, since you see that you are 
hard pressed, endeavour, until the hostile intervals of this un- 
happy period pass away, to pass through and spend your time, 
if not with profit, at least without loss, which is done by keeping 
quiet, or at least by acting with moderation. This is the force 
of the verb GDI in a passage of Amos, which will be presently 
quoted. Wisdom and anpi^ua, circumspection, are commanded, 
not sloth. There is however one mode of acting in summer, 
another in winter, even with greater labour [in the former than 
in the latter]. Those who in evil days seek meanwhile no fruit 
of time, but [the mere gaining of] time itself (according to the 
example of the Magi, Dan. ii., or like a besieged city waiting 
for assistance), these act wisely, and in the end wiU the better 
use the time, which they have thus redeemed (gained). Sir. x. 
(27) 31, M^ ho^aZpu In xaipOi grevo^uplixg tfou, boast not in the 
time of thy distress. A similar expression occurs in Polycarp's 
Ep. to the church at Smyrna, where the martyrs are said, dia 
fiia; oipag riji/ altiviot xoXaiiv s^ctyopoiZ^o/xevoi, to have bought off 
(gained exemption from) everlasting punishment by the sufferings 
of one hour. — § 2. The opposite is to lose (throw away) time. — 
il/j,epai, days) ch. vi. 13. — irovripal, evil) Amos v. 13, o guviZv h rS. 
xaipSi £-/,ihif) (DT') diiii'jrfjasTai, on xctiphs -Xi^ripog isriv, he who has un- 
derstanding at that time will be silent, because it is an evil time. 

17. ^miivTig, understanding) Amos, as we have seen, has 
ffuwSv ; hence we may conclude that Paul had reference to that 
passage. — tI rh Siki^/jici} rou Kupiov, what the will of the Lord is) 
not only universally, but at a certain time, place [as occasion 
may arise], etc. 

18. Mij fieSiidxedh o'htfi, be not drunk with wine) So the Lxx. 
plainly, Prov. xxiii. 31 (30). Appropriately to the exhortation 
against impurity, he subjoins the exhortation against drunken- 
ness. -^I» w) in which, viz. wine, so far as it is drunk without 
moderation. — aaoiTia) "Asoitos is used for aaaoerog : hence aacixria, 

^ In this rerse the Germ. Vers, prefers the reading GeoS, which has been 
left by the margin of both Ed. to the pleasure of the reader.— E. B. 

B (adding iif^uu) D(A)Gjr Vulg., Eec. Text, and Lucif. 158, read Kvpiov. 
A/" and several MSS. of Vulg. read ©eoS. — Ed. 



106 EPHESIANS V. 19-22. 

denotes every luxury iuconsistent with frugality. See its oppo- 
site, ver. 19, concerning the effect of spiritual fulness. — dXXcii 
So generally the LXX. in Prov. quoted above : dXka o/iiXfTre 
avSpiiiroig Sixaloig, but associate with righteous men. . 

19. AaXoDiTSff lauToTg, speaking among yourselves) The anti- 
thesis is, to the Lord; comp. Col. iii. 16, note. The Spirit 
makes believers eloquent^ [disertos], — •v)/aX/io7'j, in psalms) of the 
Bible, of Da^dd, new and unpremeditated, with the addition of 
an instrument. — 'i/img, in hymns) to be used in the express 
praise of God. — ubaTg) songs, which are or may be sung on any 

sacred subject -miuixarixaTg, spiritual) not worldly, as those of 

the drunkards are. — rp Kvplu, to the Lord) Christ, who searches 
the hearts. 

20. Eu^apigTouvTig, giving thanks) Paul often urges this duty, 
and diligently practises it : it is performed by the mind, by the 
tongue, and by working. Col. iii. 17. — irdvriav, for all things) 
The neuter, including the power of the masculine ; comp. 
1 Thess. V. 18. — 'ijjiroC, of Jesus) by whom all things become ours. 

21. 'AXXfiXoig, to one another) Now he proceeds to treat con- 
cerning our duty to others ; and the foundation of this is the 
fear of Christ,^ which derives its motives from the Christian 
faith; 1 Pet. ii. 13. A rare phrase; comp. 2 Cor. v. 11 ; 1 
Cor. X. 22. 

22. A/ yuvaiiiis, wives) Inferiors are put in the first place, then 
superiors, ver. 25 ; ch. vi. 1, 4, 5, 9 ; 1 Pet. iii. 1, 7, because 
the proposition regards subjection ; and inferiors ought to do 
their duty, of whatsoever kind their superiors are. Many ot 
those that are inferior become superiors ; and he who acts well 
as an inferior, acts well as a superior.* Moreover, all these are 
addressed in the second person ; therefore it is the dutv of all to 
hear and read the Scripture; comp. 1 John ii. 13. — l^ioig, to 
your own) Wives should obey their own husbands, even although 

' Beng. says this in contrast to Horace's praise of wine, as making 
eloquent, " Fsecundi calices quem non fecere disertum ? " Ed. 

2 Namely, this reading, h (p6l3(j) Xpiarov, which the older Ed. had judged 
not quite certain, both the margin of the 2d Ed. reckons as quite certain, and 
the Germ. Vers, expresses it. — E. B. 

AB Vulg. read Xpiurov; D(A)/ read 'l»o-oS; Og read Insov yipiimv : 
Bee. Text, ©sou, without good authority. — Ed. 

' " Qui bene subest, bene prseest." 



EPHESIANS V. 23-26. 107 

elsewhere they should seem to have superior prudence • ircr%<!- 
e6/j,evoi is to be supplied from ver. 21.* It is said of children and 
servants, obey [waxoisrs], ch. vi. 1, 5. There is a greater 
equality in the case of husbands and wives f comp., however, 
Rom. xiii. 1. — is, as) The subjection which is rendered by the 
wife to the husband, is at the same time rendered to the Lord 
Christ Himself. It is not compared with the obedience which 
the Church renders to Christ, but with that which the wife 
herself ought to render to Christ. Obedience is rendered to 
the husband, under the eye of Christ ; therefore also to Christ 
Himself. 

23. Kal aMg, and He Himself) But the husband is not the 
saviour of the wife ; in that Christ excels. Hence but follows. 

24. 'axx' SiS'Kip, but as) The antithesis is, husbands, wives. — 
{/■jordeesrai, is subject) Supply here also [from the end of the 
verse], in every thing. — al yumTjitg, let wives) be subject [be subor- 
dinate]. 

25. "EaurJv ffa^sSwzsv, gave Himself up) from love to the 
Church. 

26. 'Ayiaert, might sanctify) Often holiness and glory are 
synonymous ; wherefore here also follows, He might present it to 
Himself a glorious Church. — xaiapieag, cleansing) Cleansing pre- 
cedes the bestowal of glory and the formation of the nuptial tie. 
— ha,, that) The construction is, He gave Himself — cleansing 
(i.e. and cleansed) ; that [/na] depends upon both [vap'sScaxsv and 
xa6apiSa;'j, being put twice [i'va ayideri and itia irapasrrigfi, ver. 26, 
and ver. 27] in the text. Sanctifcation is derived from the 
death or blood of Christ ; comp. Heb. xiii. 12 : cleansing or 
purification, as we shall see presently, from baptism and the 
word. Holiness is internal glory; glory is holiness shining 
forth. Why did Christ love the Church and give Himself for 
it ? — that He might sanctiiy it. Why did He cleanse it ? — that 
He might present it to Himself. The former is the new right 
acquired by Christ over the Church ; the latter shows how He 
adorned His bride, as befitted such a bride of such a Husband. 

1 Wherefore in the Germ. Vers., ver. 22 is only put in a parenthesis. 
— E. B. 

' Therefore C'7rorciu)<io/4,iuoi, subordinate, not vTraxoiere, is said iu their case. 
—Ed. 



108 EPHESIANS V. 27-30. 

And the mentioning of the lath [Xour^p, washing] and the word 
is presently urged conjointly, although the word is to be referred 
to the term cleansing} The cleansing power is in the word, 
and it is put forth through the hath [the washing]. Water and 
the hath are the vehicle : but the word is a nobler instrumental 
cause. — Tip XovrpS) ro\> ilSarof h friihaTi, by the washing with 
water [lit. the hath of water] by the word) A remarkable testi- 
mony for baptism; Tit. iii. 5. — h pfuj^an, in [by] the word) Baptism 
has the power of purifying owing to the word, John xv. 3 ; in 
{by] to be construed with cleansing. "IDX, /5^/ia. 

27. "iva -ffapaiT^eri, that He might present) This holds good, in 
its own way, already of the present life ; comp. ch. iv. 13. — 
iavTui, to Himself) as to a Husband betrothed. — evdo^ov, a 
glorious Church) We should derive [draw] our estimate of sanc- 
tification from the love of Christ : what bride despises the orna- 
ments offered by her husband? — rriv) that [the: emphatically] 
Church which answers to His own eternal idea. — e-nTkov) a spot, 
from any wicked disposition whatever. — purida) wrinkle, from 
old age [senile debility and decay]. — iVa fi) that she may be. — 
a//,ufjbog, vnthout blemish) Cant. iv. 7. 

28. ''Eaurh, himself) ver. 29, 31, at the end. 

29. Ohhtti) no man, unless indeed he revolts from nature and 
from himself. — rnv laurov aap%a, his own flesh) ver. 31, at the 
end. — i-/,rpe<pii) very much nourishes it, within. — SaXirii) cherishes 
it, without. The same word occurs in Deut. xxii. 6 ; Job 
xxxix. 14 ; 1 Kings i. 2, 4. This has respect to clothing, as 
nourishes has to food. — rr^v ixxkriBiav, the Church) Nourishes and 
cherishes to be supplied. 

30. "Or/, because) The reason why the Lord nourishes and 
cherishes the Church, is the very close relationship, which is 
here expressed in the words of Moses regarding Eve, accommo- 
dated to the present subject. The Church is propagated from 
Christ, as Eve was from Adam ; and this propagation is the 
foundation of the spiritual marriage : for this cause, ver. 31. — 
rou soj/jyarog aurou, of His body) The body here does not mean 
the Church, which is contained in the subject, we are, but the 
body of Christ Himself — ix, of) Gen. ii. 23, 24, in the LXX.— 

' ill ^Tificiri follows KaSxplccci, not T^ovrp^. — Ed, 



EPIIESIANS T. 31-33. 109 

(Tviv Ai&fii, roDro vuv ienuv ix, tSiv oeTioiv f/,ov, xal (Sa,f>^ ix rrji eafxot 
//lOU. Aurjj xXtiSfiSirai yuvfj, Sti ex roD avdpis aurri; sXjjp^;). 'Evsxiv Tourou 
xaTO/kei-^ii avSpaivos rov 'Traripa airoC xal rfiv /iriTipa xal irpnaxoX- 
XriStiSera,! tj) ymaixl auroD, xal 'isovTai o'l &{io elg eupxa, /ji,lav. — ex rrjg 
aapxhg aurov, x.t.X., of His flesh) Moses mentions bones first, 
Paul flesh; because it is the bones chiefly that support the 
natural structure, of which the former (Moses) is speaking ; but 
in the new creation [of which Paul is speaking], the flesh of 
Christ is more considered. Moreover, Moses speaks more fully ; 
Paul omits what does not so much belong to the subject in hand. 
It is not our bones and our flesh, but vw, that are spiritually, pro- 
pagated from the humanity of Christ, which has flesh and bones. 

31. Ka.TaXsl'^ii, shall leave) Ver. 30 presupposes a Protasis, viz. 
in regard to natural marriage, [to be supplied] out of Moses ; it 
expresses the Apodosis, viz. respecting the spiritual marriage ; 
now, in turn, vice versa, ver. 31 here expresses the Protasis, and 
allows the Apodosis to be supplied : comp. ver. 32, in the middle. 
Christ also, so to speak, left the Father, and was joined to the 
Church. — vpoexoXKn^nairai, shall be joined) by matrimonial unity. 
— I'lg dapxa, fjiiav, shall pass into [shall be as] one flesh) not only as 
formerly, in respect of origin, but in respect of the new relation- 
ship. 

32. Msya, great) Paul felt more than those to whom he wrote 
could comprehend. It is not a marriage among men that is 
called a mystery,^ ver. 33, but the union itself of Christ and the 
Church. [There are in all three kinds of duties which the Law 
prescribes to the husband, Exod. xxi. 10. The apostle had menr 
tioned the two former in a spiritual sense, ver. 29 ; now the order 
would lead him to the third, of which that expression of Hosea is 
a summary, ii. 20 (see ver. 19 also). Thou shalt know the 
Lord. But the apostle suddenly breaks off. Minds of the rarest 
character and capacity are required.^ — V. g.J 

33. liknv, nevertheless) Paul, as it were forgetful of the mat- 
ter in hand by reason of the noble character of the digression, 
returns now to his subject. — ha, that) Supply Jm^Z, or I wish, or 

1 Or sacrament, as the Romanists argue from this passage — Ed. 

* To appreciate spiritually the third of the three duties, " food, raiment, 
the duty of marriage," requires a spiritual mind. A carnal mind cannot 
comprehend it save carnally. — Kd 



no EPHESIANS VI. 1, 2. 

something similar ; comp. 1 Cor. iv. 2, note, vii. 29 ; 2 Cor. 
viii. 13. The particle gives force ; the elUpsis, in a feeling of 
courtesy, restrains that force. 



CHAPTEE VL 

1. ' T'TaxoLiTs, obey) This expresses even more than be subject, ' 
be subordinate (ch. v. 21, imTaggo/ievoi), [comp. ver. 5.] To obey 
is the part of one who is less experienced ; to be subject or subor- 
dinate, of an inferior. — dlxam, right) even by nature. 

2. Ti/Ma, honour) Their duty is more expressly prescribed to 
children than to parents ; for love rather descends than ascends ; 
and from being children men become parents. — evroXn, command- 
ment) Deut. V. 16, Honour thy' father and thy mother, as the 
Lord thy God ENETEIAATO, commai?ded thee, that it may be 
well, etc. — vpuTTj h ImayyiXicj,, the first with promise) The com- 
mandment in regard to having no strange gods,' carries indeed 
a promise with it, but likewise a threatening, and of these, either 
the one or the other belonging to [applying to] all the command- 
ments. The commandment respectingthe profanation of the name 
of God has a threatening. For our duties to God are espe- 
cially due, and most necessary ; therefore they are guarded with 
such sanctions : our duties towards men are due in a less degree 
to men, and so far [in that point of view] are not so necessary ; 
they have therefore a promise attached to them. The command- 
ment about honouring parents, of which Paul is speaking, has 
a peculiar promise above them all, if we look at the whole Deca- 
logue : if we look only at the second table, it also alone has a 
promise ; moreover, it is the first with a promise, even in respect 
to all the commandments, subsequent to the Decalogue. And 
very properly so, too ; for, taking for granted the pious affection 
of parents in training their children to submit to the command- 
ments of God, the honour, which is shown to parents chiefly by 

^ Beng. joins in one our first and second commandment (it being the 
second to which a threat and a promise are attached ; whereas to our first 
commandment there is attached neither). — Ed. 



Ill 

obedience, includes obedience to all the commandments in the 
early period of life. This apostolic observation is a proof that 
the observance of the law in the New Testament is not abolished. 

3. eS eol, well with thee) Let young persons attend to this 
statement. — xal 'iari, and thou mayest [shalt] he) The LXX., in 
both passages, viz. that in Exodus, and that in Deuteronomy, 
where the Decalogue is recounted, have it, tliat thou mayest 
become long-lived, xai ha iia-Kpo')(foyioi yhp, but Deut. xxii. 7, that 
it may be well with thee, and thou mayest have many days — 'ha si 
eoi yivriTai xat iroXurj/jiepog 'idri, from the cod. Al., where the ed. 
Kom. has yhr^ : 'l<sr\, in the future of the subjunctive, is rare. He, 
who lives well for a long time, long experiences the favour oi 

■ God, even in his children rendering him honour, and he has a 
long season of sowing the seed of an eternal harvest. — laax^op^po- 
vitg, long-lived) The more tender age of childhood, according to 
its capacity of apprehension, is allured by the promise of long 
hfe ; the exception of the cross is more expressly added to those 
that are grown up, and are of mature age. But length of days 
is promised, not only to single persons who honour their parents, 
but to their whole stock. — iirl rr\i yng, upon the earth [the land]) 
Moses, writing to Israel, says, in fAe^ood land, inrl 7-jjs yrif aya^ni, 
which the Lord thy God giveth thee. At present godly men live 
equally well in every land, as Israel did in that which God gave 
them. 

4. Kai 01 ntarifig, and ye that are fathers) And is also pre- 
fixed at ver. 9, and ye masters. It is not put before husbands, 
ch. v. 25. Parents and masters more readily abuse their power 
than husbands. He spoke o? parents, ver. 1 ; he now addresses 
fathers in particular, for they are more readily carried away by 
passion. The same^ difference in the words, and the same admo- 
nition, occur. Col. iii. 20, 21. — ^15 irapopyiZfn, do not provoke) 
lest love be extinguished. — ixrpiipiTs, but bring them up in the 
nurture) kindly. — sv vaibiia xal voukula, in the nurture [instruc- 
tion] and admonition) The one of these counteracts (obviates) 
ignorance ; the other, forgetfulness and levity. Both include the 
word, and all other training. So among the lawyers, vouftmfha, 
and admonition, is mentioned, even such as is given by stripes. 
Job V. 17, noiD, admonition; 1 Sam. iii. 13, Eli ohx hou^'iTu, did 
not admonish his sons. 



EPHESIANS TI. 8-10. 113 

slave ; as in the case of pet dogs. — rlf) Kvpltfi, to the Lord. 
The dominion of Christ ought to be the moving principle to 
all, and to govern men, even in rendering external service. The 
Lord looks at the heart. 

8. "o idv Ti) A Tmesis for on l&v, Col. iii. 23. — &ya.6hv, good) 
in Christ. 

9. Ta a!iT&, the same things) Do to them those things, which 
are the part of good-will, by way of compensation. Love regu- 
iates the duties of servants and masters, as one and the same 
light softens [attempers] various colours. Equality of nature 
and of faith is superior to difference of ranks. — amvrs; ttiv 
a,<!reiXiiv, forbearing threatening) Actual severity was generally 
laid aside by the masters when they became believers ; now 
they are even to forbear threatenings, and not (in words) make 
a display of their power to their slaves for the purpose of terri- 
fying them, DVT, LXX. airu'kn. — ahrSiv xal 6/iSi/,° theirs and yours) 
We have an expression almost similar in Eom. xvi. 13. — h 
ovpavoTg, in heaven) who is Almighty. As the Lord hath treated 
you, so treat ye your servants ; or, as you treat your servants, 
so He will treat you. 

10. To Xoiirhv, finally) The particle or form of concluding, and 
of rousing the attention, as it were, to an important subject ; 
2 Cor. xiii. 11. — aSsXpo/,' brethren) He thus addresses them in 

' The reading a; rZ, which was considered not quite sure in the larger 
Ed., is preferred by the marg. of the 2 Ed., and by the Germ. Vers. — E. B. 

ABD(A) corrected later, G^ Vulg., read ii; r$. Sieut et in/. Rec. Text 
omits as, without good authority. — Ed. 

2 This reading, depending on the margin of the larger Ed., is removed by 
the marg. of the 2 Ed. to those that are less certain ; hence the Germ. Vers, 
has acknowledged its use, auch euer Herr — B. B. 

Air^K Kctl ifiuu is the reading of ABD(A) corrected later, Vulg., Memph. 
Ainat vftZi) is the reading of G^. 'Tfiuv avruv, is that oi f and Rec. 
Text, and Syr. Cypr. reads vfiuv »«J aitaii. Engl. V., your Master. 
—Ed. 

» By some accident or other, the pronoun //.ov, the omission of which is 
countenanced by both Ed., has crept into the Germ. Vers.— E. B. 

G^ Vulg., later Syr., read dlihqsol, but omit i^m, which Rec. Text adds. 
BD(A) Lucif. omit both words. A adds «SeA(?>o( after iuivvafiovok, instead 
of before it. The fact of this being the only place where the aSaifoJ is 
read, and also this being an encyclical letter, make it probable, liSs^Kpof is 
an interpolation — Ed. 

VOL. IV. " 



114 EPHESIANS VI. 11, 13. 

this one passage of the epistle. Nowhere do soldiers use to one 
another the title brethren more than in the Jield of battle. — svSuwx- 
/io^ek, be strong) Those, and those only, who are strong in them- 
selves, are fitted for putting on the whole armour [the panoply]. 
— xal) a Hendiadys.— xpar£( r^s iax^os, by the power of His might) 
This is said of Christ, as i. 19 of the Father. 

11. Xlavoirhiav, the whole armour) ver. 13. — ernvai, to stand) 
A word taken from the arena and the camp ; comp. note on 
Matt. xii. 25. The power of the Lord is ours. — /iiMsiag, the 
wiles) which he frames both by force and by craft. ^£^0^05, a 
way opposite to the direct [straight] way, a circuitous road, 
which they take who He in wait, 2 Mace. xiii. 18 ; whence 
ueh&eiiiv, 2 Sam. xix. (27) 28, Lxx. Esth. xi(p. /j.^, concerning 
Haman : ■jro'kvr'koxoig fiidoSm vapaXcyig/^oi'i, with manifold deceits 
of wiles [plans]. Chrysostom has used MehSsia in a good sense 
in HomU. iv., de penit. : ' We ought to be thankful to God, who 
through much discipline {dia iroXXSiv /ishSuuv) cures and saves our 
souls," — dici mWZiv /iikSiiuv, through the alternations of prospe- 
rity and adversity. — mu S;a/3oXou, the devil) the chief of the ene- 
mies, who are pointed out at ver. 12. [The same who is called, 
ver. 16, vovnpog, the wichd one. — V. g.] 

12. Ovx 'ieriv, is not) The evil spirits lurk concealed behind 
the men who are hostile to us. — fj wdXri) the wrestling. — vph; aJ/ia 
xal gdpxa,, against blood and flesh) Comp. Matt. xvi. 17, note. 
Ityai DT, blood and flesh, viz. (mere) men, were weak, even at 
Eome, where they kept Paul a prisoner. — aXXA, but) After a 
very distinct mention of good angels, ch. i. 21, iii. 10, he thus 
appropriately speaks also of bad spirits, especially to the Ephe- 
sians ; comp. Acts xix. 19. The more plainly any book of 
Scripture treats of the Christian dispensation and the glory of 
Christ, the more clearly, on the other hand, does it present to 
our view the opposite kingdom of darkness. — <!rphg, against) 
Against occurs four times [after aXXa']. In three of the clauses 
the power of our enemies is pointed out ; in the fourth, their 
nature and disposition. — Koafioxpdropig, the rulers of the world) 
' mundi tenentes,' The holders of the world, to use the word of 
Tertullian. It is well that they are not holders of all things , 
yet the power not only of the 4evil himself, but also of those 
over whom he exercises authority, is great. There seem to be 



EPHESIANS VI. 12. 115 

other kinds of evil spirits, that remain more at home in the 
citadel of the kingdom of darkness : principalities, powers. This 
third class is different, inasmuch as they go abroad and take pos- 
session, as it were, of the provinces of the world : rulers [holders] 
of the world. — rod exorotj;, of the darkness) Herein they are dis- 
tinguished from angels of light. This is mostly spiritual dark- 
ness, ch. v. 8, 11 ; Luke xxii. 53, which has wickedness presently 
after as its synonym ; yet even to them natural darkness is more 
congenial than light. The contest is much more difficult in 
darkness. — roD aiuvo^ rourou, of this world) The word xog/^oxpaTopa;, 
the holders (rulers) of the world, directly governs the two geni- 
tives exorovs and aimog, of the darkness saaA. of this world, according 
to [in relation to] either part of the compound word. K6e//,og, 
world, and a'lSJv, age, are to be referred mutually to each other, 
as time and place.^ The term. Holders (rulers) of the world, is 
the ground on which this wickedness is practised. There are 
princes of the darkness of the world in the present age. The 
connection between xoe/iog, world, and alijv, age, is not gram- 
matical but logical : xoafioc, world (mundus), in all its extent ; 
aliiv, world, age (saeculum), the present world, in its disposition 
(character), course, and feeling. I cannot say xoa^o; rou a'luvog, 
as, on the contrary, I can say a'liiv nu kosfiou. — rSt '7rvsu/jLarix&, the 
spiritual things) The antithesis is blood and flesh. These spiritual 
things are opposed to the spiritual things of grace, 1 Cor. xii. 1, 
and are contrary to faith, hope, love, the gifts [of the Spirit], 
either in the way of a force opposite [to those graces], or by a 
false imitation of them. Moreover, as in the same epistle, ch. 
xiv. 12, spirits are used for spiritual things, so here spiritual 
things are very aptly used for spirits. For these spirits make 
their assault with such quickness and dexterity, that the soul 
does not almost think [generally is not aware] of the presence 
of these foreign existences lurking beneath, but believes that it 
is something in itself within which produces the spiritual tempta 
tion ; and even wi/Eu/iar/xo'v, spiritual, in the singular, may be 
taken as a kind of military force, in the same way as ri iitrnxit, 
AorseOTOT, is. applied in Rev. ix. 16, and rh arparitariKh is else- 

^ Koafiog refers to place ; «W> to time : 7%e world-rulers of the age; the 
world-rulers of the darkness. But Engl V. makes aiuuo; governed by 
ffxoTot/f, of the darkness of this world. — Ed. 



lie EPHESIABS VI 13, 14. 

where used of an army ; so that here ra vnviha.ny.a., viz. rayiJ^ata, 
may be used as in Zosimus, 1. 3 : rd vil^na ray/^ara, ^mxov, The 
bands of infantry, a foreign force. Aristot. 3, pol. 10, p. 210.— 
h ToTs ivoupoivloig, in places above the heavens) Even enemies, but 
as captives (ch. iv. 8, note), may be in a royal palace, and 
adorn it. 

13. ' AvaXaBiTi, fake unto you) ver. 16 iJn Deut. i. 41, Lxx. 
avaXajSovrii. — rrjv itawxKia.^, the whole armour) A lofty expression. 
Paul (says Vict. Strigelius, in summing up the contents of this 
chapter) gives to the Christian soldier integuments, defences, and 
offensive weapons. The integuments are three, the breastplate, the 
girdle, and the shoes ; the defences or ipvXaxrripia are two, the shield 
and the helmet; the offensive weapons, afiwr^pia,^ are also two, the 
sword and the spear. He had regard, I think, to the order of 
putting them on, and held the opinion that Paul proceeds from 
those accoutrements which adorn the man even when outside of 
the battle-field (as the breastplate of any material whatever), to 
those which are peculiar to the soldier ; and indeed the phrase 
above all is put in between integuments and defences. He adds 
the spear, prayer. Although Paul rather introduces prayer with 
this reference, viz, that we may rightly [duly] use the whole 
armour. — Iv rjj ijfiipcf, rri -xovrip^, in the evil day) Ps. xli. 2, LXX. 
h n/j/ipcf, vovrip^. The war is perpetual. The battle rages less on 
one day, more on another : the evil day, either when death assails 
us, or during life, being of longer or shorter duration, often vary- 
ing in itself \_When the wicked one assails you, ver. 16, and 
malignant forces are infesting you, ver. 12. — V. g.]. Then you 
must stand, you must not then at length [then for the first time 
begin to] make preparation. — aVavra Karipyasd//,ivoi) having rightly 
prepared all things for the battle. So xaTip'ya,t,ie6ai, 2 Cor. v. 5 
[o xartpyasd/jitvog nfiag, He who hath wrought, i.e. prepared us]; 
Ex. XV. 17, XXXV. 33, xxxviii. 24 ; Deut. xxviii. 39. The re- 
petition^ is very suitable, to stand, stand ye. 

°14. HipiZ^wediMivoi, being girt about) that you may be unen- 
cumbered [ready for action]. Comp. Luke xii. 35 ; Ex. xii. 11 ; 

' Usually said of defensive, here evidently of offensive weapons. — Ed. 
' Anadiplosis, the repetition of the same word in the end of the preced- 
ing, and in the beginning of the following member. Append Ed. 

' St^k*;, to stand, for the sake of fighting, ver. 14. — V. g. 



EPIIESIANS YI. 15-2(>. 117 

Is. v. 27. — rri\i idfxiv i,u,uii h aXrjhiiff your loins with truili) accord- 
ing to the example of the Messiah, Is. xi. 5. — cvdvgd/Lim ro> 
diipaxa rrig hmaioautrn — y.a) Tijv '!repixi<paXaiav rou (Twrjj/j/ov) having put 
on the breastplate of righteousness — and the helmet of salvation. Is. 
lixi 17, And He put on righteousness as a breastplate, and placed- 
the helmet of salvation on His head. The seat of conscience is in 
the breast, which is defended by righteousness. — r^s dixaiosuvrig, 
of righteousness) Is. xi. already quoted. For often truth and 
righteousness are joined, ch. v. 9. The enemy is to be van- 
quished by all things contrary to his own nature. 

15. Toiff ■TToSa.g, the feet) The feet are often mentioned in con 
■nection with the gospel and with peace, Rom. x. 15, iii. 15, etc. ; 
Luke i. 79. — h inifiaelcf) iroi/j,a.gia often corresponds to the He- 
brew word t13D, for example Ezra ii. 68, iii. 3 ; Ps. x.' 17, Ixxxix. 
15. The feet of the Christian soldier are strengthened [steadied] 
by the Gospel, lest he should be moved from his place or yield.'' 
[1 Pet, V. 9.— V. g.] 

16. 'Ecr/ voieiv) above [over] all [the pieces of armour], what- 
ever you have put on. — rd inirupuiJ.Ua) properly set on fire, fiery. 
To quench is in consonance with this. 

17. Tou eojrripiov, of salvation) i.e. of Christ. Acts xxviii. 28, 
note. The mention of the Spirit elegantly follows ; and 
therefore, by comparing ver. 13, we have here mention of the 
holy Trinity.'' The head is exalted and defended by salvation, 
1 Thess. V. 8 ; Ps. iii. 3, 4. — hi^aek, receive [take to yourselves]) 
what is offered [implied in hi^aek, receive] by the Lord. — ^ ?/ia 
©sou, the word of God) Matt. iv. 4, 7, 10. 

18. A/A, {byl with) As often as you pray, pray in the Spirit, 
inasmuch as He is at no time shut out from you. 

19. AoSfi, may be given) Paul did not depend on his natural 
and acquired power. — avol^ii rou er6f/,aTog) na pnns. — h irappridicf 
ympigai, to make known with boldness) Therefore boldness [plain- 
ness] of speech is required, because it is a mystery. 

20. IlpisSiuu h aXxieei, I am an ambassador in bonds) A para- 

' WaU translates h iroificurlif, dum habetis animum prompmm,quem gignit 
TO tuayyiKioii, " having the feet shod, or sandalled, in your having the prompt 
and ready mind which the Gospel of peace produces." — Ed. 

' Salvation = Christ: the sword of the Spirit, the word of God; so the 
whole armour <^God, ver. 13. — Ed. 



118 EPHESIANS VI. 21-24. 

dox [an ambassador, yet in bonds]. The world has its ambas- 
sadors surrounded. with outward splendour. "Ira, that, which 
immediately follows, depends on this expression.^ — h aurffi, in it) 
in the mystery. — iis, as) construed with to make known. 

21. Ka; u/MiTs) ye also, as well as others. — irdvTa, all things) A 
salutary relation. — viarbs, faithful) who will declare to you the 
truth. 

22. Uphs vfi,ag, to you) afar off. — ■jrapaxa.Xeeri, might comfort) 
lest ye should take offence at my bonds. 

23. 'Eipm, peace) peace with God and the love of God to us. 
A recapitulation is contained in this word peace, comp. Jude ver. 
2. — V^''" *'ffr£Ms, with faith) This is taken for granted, as being 
the gift of God. 

24. UdvTcav, with all) whether Jews or Gentiles, in all Asia, 
3tc. — 'Ji' ap^apalcf, in incorruption, sincerity) construed with grace, 
viz. let it be : comp. iii. 13, /i^ ixxaxiTv, not to faint, which is a 
proof of sincerity {afSapsia,, incorruption). Add 2 Tim. i. 10. 
We have its opposite, iv. 22. — a,(p6apeia impUes health without 
any blemish, and its continuance flowing from it. This is in 
consonance with the whole sum of the epistle ; and thence 
af^apeia. redounds to the love of believers towards Jesus Christ. 

• Engl. V. by the stopping connects 'ha, rather with irpoaivxii^imi, ver. 18 
Praising — that therein I may speah boldly. — ^Ed. 

2 Toif «S£>i(po7f, to the brethren) In this conclusion he does not say to j(0!(, 
as in ver. 21. It was, it seems, an encyclical epistle. — V. g. 

' T2j/ ciyxTuuTaii, that love) See of how great importance is that love, 1 
Cor. xvi. 22.— V. g. 



EPISTLE TO THE PHILIPPIANS. 



CHAPTER I. 



1. AoiJXoi, the servants) Paul writes more familiarly to the Phi- 
lippians than to those to whom, in writing, he calls himself an 
apostle. Under this common predicate, he very courteously 
joins Timothy with himself, who, by his means, was called to be 
a disciple, and who, having recently joined Paul, had come to 
Philippi, Acts xvi. 3, 12. — euv, with) The Church is superior to 
the bishops ; and the apostolic ^writing is sent more directly to 
the Church than to the presiding ministers ; Heb. xiii. 24 ; Eph. 
iii. 4 ; Col. iii. 18, etc., iv. 17 ; Eev. i. 4, 11 ; 1 Thess. v. 12.— 
imgjio'jroig Tial biaMvoig, with the bishops and deacons) At that time 
the former properly managed the internal, the latter the external 
affairs of the Church, 1 Tim. iii. 2, 8 ; the latter, however, were 
not excluded from care about the internal affairs, nor the former 
about the external. Sometimes Paul, in the inscriptions, calls 
them churches ; sometimes he uses a periphrasis, which either 
signifies something greater, as we have remarked at 1 Cor. i. 2, 
or is used because, as in the instance of the Romans, they had 
not yet been fully reduced to the form of a church. This epistle 



120 PHILIPPIANS I. 2. 

to the Philippians alone is so inscribed as to connect the mention 
of the bishops and deacons with the emphatic paraphrase.' 

2. Euxa.piff'rZ, I give thanks) In this place we shall give a 
synopsis of the epistle. We have in it — 

I. The Inscription, i. 1, 2. 

n. Thanksgiving and Peayees foe the flodeishing 

SPIEITUAL STATE OF THE PhILIPPLANS, Ver. 3, 4, 

9, 10. 

ni. Paul mentions his peesent state, and good hope 
FOE the futuee, ver. 12, 13, 18, 19. 
Whence he exhorts the Philippians : — 

1. Since he is to continue to live, that they should walk wor- 

thily of the Gospel, 25-ii. 16. 

2. Although he should be put to death, that they should 

rejoice with him, 17, 18 ; and promises that he will very 
soon give them all information by Timothy, ver. 19, 20 ; 
and in the meantime sends Epaphroditus, 25, 26. 

rV. He Exhorts them to eejoioe, iii. 1, admonishing them 
to avoid false teachers of righteousness, and to foUow the 
true, ver. 2, 3 ; and commending peace and harmony, 
iv. 1—3. In like manner he exhorts them to joy, accom- 
panied with gentleness and calmness of mind, ver. 
4-7, and to do all things that are excellent, 8, 9. 

V. He accepts waemlt the Libeealitt of the Phi- 
lippians, 10-20. 

VI. The Conclusion, 21-23. 
'Eff/, upon) The mention, the remembrance is the occasion of 

' Michaelis (in der Enleitung, etc., T. I. p. m. 166, sq.) confirms the 
venerable antiquity of the Syriac Version of the N. T. from the fact, that in 
this passage it uses the word elders for bishops, and therefore it was made at 
that time when the real difference between bishops and presbyters was not yet 
known. — E. B. 



PHILIPPIAKS I. 4-7. m 

thanksgiving. — vdgti, every) Paul's heart was large : comp. the 
following verse, where it occurs thrice. 

4. 'X'jrep, for) Construe it with praying. — fiira %«?«?, with joy) 
The sum of the epistle is, / rejoice, rejoice ye. This epistle on 
joy aptly foUows that to the Ephesians, where love reigns ; for joy 
is perpetually mentioned, ver. 18, etc. ; likewise oh. ii. 2, 19, 28, 
iii. 1, iv. 1, 4. The fruit of the Spirit is love, joy. Joy parti- 
cularly gives animation to prayers. — t^v d'erieiv, [my requesi], the 
prayer) of which he had just spoken. 

5. 'Et/, for) Construe with / thank. — xoimvicf, fellowship) 
which has come to you from above,^ and is practised by you in 
holy liberality, ch. iv. 10, 15, 16 ; comp. 2 Cor. ix. 13. — kto, 
from) Construe with I thank. — ii/ji^epas, day) when ye became 
partakers of the Gospel. 

6. UfaoiSiig, being confident) This confidence constitutes the 
sinews of thanksgiving. — o hap^dfitvos iv v/iTv, who has begun in 
you) IV twice emphatically. — sfyov ayaSov, a good work) It is the 
one great and perpetual work of God for our salvation, ch. ii. 13. 
— eiriTikiaii, will perfect) The beginning is the pledge of its final 
consummation. Not even a man begins anything at random.^ — 
oJj/p/s, even to) Believers set before their minds, as the goal, the 
day of Christ, rather than their own death. — rii/Apag, the day) 
ver. 10. 

7. KaSoig, even as) He explains the reason why he speaks so 
kindly as to the Philippians. — hlxam, just) I find just reasons in 
my own case, from the relationship of faith, and these reasons 
are not trifiing. I am both justly bound by them, and demand 
them as a right. — (ppoveTv) to think. — 8i&, for this reason, because) 
This is the connection : I have you in my heart as partakers of 
grace (2 Cor. vii. 3), and long for you, and this not merely from 
natural afiection, but from devotedness to Jesus Christ ; hence 
I clearly perceive, that it is rather the Lord Himself who has the 
same affection for you, and He will carry on the work from the 

^ If only the one or the other part of this fellowship, and that too the 
latter, must be understood, which is performed by the exercise of libera;lity, 
and this is the opinion of some, I- scarcely understand how the words dxpn 
iipcepa; ' Inaov Xpiarov, at the end of ver. 6, can be made to agree with it 
— E. B. 

* Much less does God. — ^Ed. 



122 



beginning to its termination. — 8sg/j,oi'g — amXoyicf, in my bonds — m 
defence) AHendiaiys [My bonds in defence of the Gospel]. Bonds 
do not restrain my love. — affoXoy/qs, in defence) The Romans 
brought accusations against the Gospel. — ^e^aidien, in confirmor 
tion) This is something more than a defence. — rou tuayyiXlou, of the 
Gospel) by which grace is announced. — evyxoivtavoig — ufiag hrag) 
He said above, you; therefore here is the accusative for the 
genitive, as Acts vii. 21, where see the note. 

8. 'En entXayyjmii 'l?j(roS XpiSToii, in the bowels of Jesus Christ) 
Not Paul, but Jesus Christ . lives in Paul ; wherefore Paul is 
not moved in the bowels of Paul, but of Jesus Christ. 

9. Kai TouTo, and this) He declared, from ver. 3 and onward, 
that he prayed for them ; he now shows what was his prayer in 
their behalf. — ij aydirn, love) Love makes men docile and [spiri- 
tually] sagacious, 2 Pet. i. 7, 8. Hence arose the form used 
formerly in the assemblies of the Church,^ and which is verna- 
cular among us : Caritas vestra, your love (charity), in a wider 
sense. — ii//,uv, your) Correlative to the love of Paul, ver. 7, 8. A 
previous [anticipatory] allusion to the love which they had shown 
to him ; ch. iv. 10, 18. — sV; /j,aXXov, yet more) The fire in the 
apostle's mind never says. It is sufficient [past and present attain- 
ments are enough]. — Iv Bmyviicti xai'Trdar) aiaSrieii, in all knowledge 
and perception [judgmentj) Knowledge is a very noble species, as 
sight is in the body : algSfiaig, perception, is the genus ; for we have 
also [included under it] spiritual sight, hearing, smelling, tast- 
ing, touching, i.e. the senses for investigation, and those for 
enjoyment,^ as they are called. So part of the perception [sensel 
is joy, frequently mentioned in this epistle. And all is an in- 
dication that it is the genus ; 2 Cor. viii. 7, note. In philo- 
sophy, the Peripatetics referred aU things only to knowledge 
\which is the principal fault of the modern philosophers also, 
when they come upon spiritual subjects. — V. g.] The Pla- 
tonists referred all things to the remaining word, sense, or 
perception ; for example, in lamblicus. Regard is to be had 
to both in Christianity : each is met with in the Cross, and 
renders men fit to approve. Here, after love, expressly men- 
tioned, he describes faith and hope in the following verse. Paul 
everywhere describes Christianity as something vigorous; 

' Or else in sermons. ' Sensiis investigativi et fruitivi. 



PHILIPPIANS I. 10-U. 123 

wherefore the doctrine of the Mystics on Privation is so to 
be received, as not to be in any respect injurious to that prac- 
tical ardour of mind. 

10. Aoxi/xidt^siv) prove and embrace, Eom. xii. 2. — to, 8ia(pipo]/Tu, 
the things that are ' excellent) not merely good in preference to 
bad, but the best among those that are good, of which none but 
those of more advanced , attainments perceive the excellence. 
Truly we choose accurately in the case of things external, why 
not among things spiritual % Comparative theology is of great 
importance \fro'm which they are farthest distant, who cease not to 
inquire (who are always asking), how far they may extend their 
liberty without sin. — V. g.] — tlXixpinTi, sincere) According to 
knowledge. — avpoaxo'Troi, without offence) According to all sense or 
judgment. 

11. Tli'TtXripiii/Lhoi x,ap<!eh\i dmaioalivric, x.r.X,, filed with the fruits 
of righteousness) The same construction is found at Col. i. 9, 
ha 'Trkripca^nn r^v iTlyvaiaiv ; and the fruit of righteousness is gene- 
rally used in the singular number, Heb. xii. 11 ; James iii. 18 ; 
also Eom..vi. 22, precisely as Paul elsewhere speaks o{ the fruit 
of the Spirit, of light, of the lips. The more common reading is 
Ti'!rX7]pa)/j,ivoi xapTruv, x.r.X.^ 

12. Tivuffjiiiv, to know) The churches may have been prepos- 
sessed with contrary rumours [which the apostle wishes to coun- 
teract}. — /ji&XXov, rather) So far from my bonds having been inju- 
rious. — sig, into) Faith takes inafavourable light all thatis adverse, 
ver. 19, 28, ch. ii. 27. — ikffkvhv, [have fallen out] came) easily. 

13. ToDs deefj,odg, bonds) Paul, delivered up along with other 
prisoners, seemed on the same footing with them : afterwards it 
became known that his case was different, and so the Gospel 
prevailed. — pavepous, manifest) Col. iv. 4. — -rpaiToipiiji, in the prcB- 
torium) The court of Caesar ; comp. iv. 22. — xai, and) then. — 
ToTs Xoimig, in the other) places outside of it; 2 Tim. iv. 17. So 
other, 1 Thess. iv. 13. 

14. tZv ahXipm, of the brethren) who had formerly been 
afraid. — h Kupltii, in the Lord) construed with are bold. — roTg 
iiS,woTg (i,ov, by my bonds) They saw Paul both constant and safe 

' ABD(A)Gfg Vulg. (except Fuld. :^S. corrected by Victor of Capua), 
read xxpmu. No old authority except Syr. supports the Kcto-Ttav of the 
Eec. Text.— Ed. 



124 PHILIPPIANS I. 15-18. 

in his confession of Christ.— dpo/Saus, without fear) no one terrify- 
ing them. Fear often is no longer felt by [flies from] those 
who make an attempt. 

^15. Tiiis /Mv — rivii hs, some indeed — and some) A separation 
[Sejugatio ; see Append.] : for two clauses are laid down, which 
are afterwards more fully treated. — Si eidonlav) of good^ll : 
eidoxla often corresponds to the Hebrew word psn. 

16.^ 'Eg ipikiag, of contention) Construed with preach. — ol;^ 
ayvoig, not sincerely) not with a pure intention, or, not without 
a Jewish leaven ; comp. Gal. vi. 12, 13. They spoke of and re- 
lated what Paul taught : they either did not believe it them- 
selves, or did not confess that they did so. Rumour, report, 
general preaching, is useful for rousing the attention of many, 
and requires no great ability [i^aKoV^jra] in them that preach, 
which is necessary, and demands purity of mind and doctrine in 
closer application ; as, for example, among the Galatians ; comp. 
Gal. i. 7, etc. — oi6//,iiioi, thinking) They thought that the Gentiles, 
when they observed the increase of the Gospel, would be indig- 
nant with Paul in particular ; but the efforts of his opponents did 
not succeed with them, nor did Paul consider it as an affliction, 
therefore he says, thinking. — 6Xi-^iv, affliction) even accompanied 
with the danger of death. — s'?r/fispiiv, to add) His bonds were 
already an affliction : they were adding affliction to the afflicted. 

17. 'Eg ayd'^rig, from love) towards Christ and me. — ii&ori;, 
knowing) An antithesis to thinking. — slg airoXoyiav, for the de- 
fence) not on my own account. — niTihai, I am laid, set) in one 
place. Lying [laid aside in imprisonment], or running, Paul 
still made advancement, 2 Tim. ii. 9. He abode at Rome, as 
an ambassador does in any place on account of a somewhat 
lengthened negotiation. 

18. Tl yicp, what then?) What does it matter? That is, I 
am helped [the cause I have at heart is furthered] either way, 
ver. 12. — ■jrXriv, yet) nevertheless. — vpofaen, in pretext) Such 

' Toj/ XoVoK, the word) which, he says, I preach. — V. g. 

" The Germ. Vers, places the 17th verse before this clause of the 16th, 
following the marg. of the 2d Ed. rather than the larger Ed.— E. B. 

ABD(A)G Vulg. place o/ fih ki, d.ya,%i\i — niifn-ai before oj' \e Ig ipii.— 
(iov. The Eec. Text order is supported by none of the very old authorities 
except the later Syr Ed. 



PHILIPPIANS I. 19-22. 126 

men, says he, make the name of Christ a pretext : they really 
design to excite against me ill-will. — aXrjSelct, in truth) from the 
heart, seriously. 

19. T&p, for) [aetiologia]. The reason assigned, why he 
should rejoice. — rouro /loi li-jrojS^eeTai elf eurrjpiav, this shall turn to 
my salvation) So evidently the LXX., Job xiii. 16, with whom, 
in that one book, the verb amjSaivu is of frequent occurrence ; 
and in the same passage. Job. xiii. 15, 16, the question relates 
to sincerity, which is purity {ayvus) with Paul, ver. 16. — s/'s 
eoiTne'iav, to salvation) not only not to affliction, ver. 16. — Serieteag, 
prayer) ascending to ' heaven — Irnxopriylas, supply) coming 
down from heaven ; lirl- indicates the relation. 

20. 'Ev ovdivl aiSyuv^ridofiai, aXk ev wderj irappr^sidf /jLiyaXvydfj- 
girai Xpidrhg, in nothing sluxll I he ashamed, but in all boldness 
Christ shall be magnified) He removes the ignominy from him- 
self: he ascribes the boldness to himself, the glory to Christ. — 
edijiari, in my body) in bonds. — e/Vs hia, ^ufig, i'ln Si& davdrou, 
whether by life or by death) The disjunctiori follows, ver. 21, 
22. In what way soever it shall fall out, says he, it will be 
well. I cannot lose. Paul himself was ignorant what would be 
the issue ; for the apostles were not omniscient, but rather in 
what referred to themselves they were exercised fdisciplined] 
by faith and patience. 

21. 'E/io;') tom£, at the beginning of a section, means, so far 
as lam concerned; for he treated in the preceding verse of what 
regarded Christ. — rJ ^?jv, XpuSTog, to live is Christ) The article 
denotes the subject, as again in the next clause. Whatever 
may be the life I live (in the natural life), its principle and 
end is Christ.^ [ While I live in the world I consider the cause 
of Christ to be my own. — V. g.] — rh a<!riiSa]ii!ii xspSog, to die is gain) 
Although in dying I seem to suffer the loss of all things. 

22. E/ Sii, but if) Here he begins to discuss the first member 
of the period : the second at ch. ii. 17, yea, and if I am offered. 
Moreover, he uses Si, but, because, from the disjunction [two 
alternatives] laid down in the preceding verse, he now assumes 
the one ; and on this assumption, presently, as if repenting, he 
begins to doubt, in such a way, however, as not to avoid assum- 
ing it in the meantime. — ro Iriv, viz. e'eri /ioi) if living is to me ; 

' * Literally, / live Christ, " Christum vivo.'' 



126 PHILIPPIANS I. 23. 

if I am to live. — haap%i) This is a limitation; for even they 
who die, live. — yf-apirhi 'if/you, the fruit of my labour) I derive this 
fruit from it [from living], that 1 may thereby do the more 
work; a noble worJi, ch. ii. 30 ; desirable /rm'f, Rom. i. 13. An- 
other seeks fruit from [by means of] his labour ; Paul regards 
the labour itself as the fruit. This living is the fruit of my 
labour. The expression, xap'jrbs epyou, the fruit of labour [= the 
labour (is) my fruit] ; as, the river of the Rhine, the virtue of 
liberality [for the river Shine ; the virtue, liberality]. The price of 
the labour is its immediate result.^ Cicero says, " I propose to 
myself as the fruit of friendship, friendship itself, than which 
nothing is mare abundant." — alpfigo/iai, I shall choose) He sup- 
poses the condition, viz. if the power of choosing were given to 
him. This is the reason of [the ground on which he uses] the 
Future. [The lot of the Christian is truly an excellent one. It 
is only of things that are good that the choice can be made, so as 
to perplex or put his mind in a strait with hesitation. He never 
can be disappointed. — V. g.] — ou yvupiZ,'^) I do not explain^ viz. to 
myself; i.e. I do not determine. 

23. 2uvs%o^a;, I am in a strait [I am perplexed]) He suitably 
expresses this hesitation, when he dwells upon this deliberation. 
— bi, but [for]) He hereby declares the cause of his doubt. — 
'ixt/'h having) The participle, expressive of the feehngs of the 
mind, for the indicative. — tig rh avaKxieai) to depart from bonds, 
from the flesh, and from the world. There is no need to seek 
for metaphor. The use of this word is of vdde extent [appKca- 
tion], Luke xii. 36 ; 2 Tim. iv. 6. — eiiv XpierSi, with Christ) there, 
whither Christ has gone before him. Paul takes it for granted 
as a certainty, that, after his martyrdom, he will be immediately 
with Christ, and that his condition will be greatly superior to 
what it was in the flesh. [How delightful it is to rejoice in this 
hope ! Reader, dost thou love Christ ? Think then what will be 
the feeling of thy mind, if, after an interval of some months or 
days, thou shalt be with Christ. If that were indeed sure in thy 
case, what wouldst thou think should be done ? See then that thou 
art doing this very thing at the present time. — V. g.l — rnXXa [laXkov 
KfiTggov, far the more preferable [far betterj) This short clause is 

1 The reward which the labour itself affords is an immediate result, inde- 
pendent of its future rewards.^Eo. 



PHILIPPIANS I. 24-27. 127 

to be referred to the verb to he, not to depart, whether we take 
it as a predicate, or rather understand it absolutely, by supplying 
01', in this sense, since that is much better. For the comparative is 
cumulative ; comp. 2 Cor. vii. 13, note. To depart is better than 
to remain in the flesh ; to he with Christ is far far hetter. The 
Vulgate alone, so far as I know, has rightly, multo magis melius, 
much more hetter [preferable]. To depart was always a thing 
wished for by the saints, but to he with Christ is in accordance 
with the New Testament [a privilege peculiar to the New Tes- 
tament] ; comp. Heb. xii. 24. 

24. 'Em/iUi/ii, to abide longer) — avayxaiorepov, more necessary) 
It appertains more to me [I feel it more desirable], he says, 
even. with a view to the perception of my love [on your part] ; 
more than even the access to blessedness just now mentioned. 
The Philippians might have said, This man is. necessary to us. 
Egotism has ceased in the mind of Paul ; he therefore acknow- 
ledges that circumstance [the personal gain it would be to him 
to depart] ; comp. eh. ii. 25. He however adds this also : It is 
more important for me to he serviceable to yon, than a little sooner 
to enjoy heaven. Heaven will not fail to he mine \at last, notwith- 
standing the delay]. 

25. Ka) n\JTo, and this) While he was writing these things, he 
had a prophetical suggestion in his mind concerning his conti- 
nuance among them. — initoiSiig oTSa, I confidently know) He knew 
by spiritual confidence ; he did not yet know from the report of 
men, ver. 17, ch. ii. 23. — fiivZ, that I shall continue) in life. — 
eufj,-!rapa//,ivui, remain with you) I shall remain for a considerable 
length of time with you. Ps. Ixxii. 5, the LXX., sv/j.'jrapa./jjivii' Tip 
Yikitf), He shall continue along with [as long as\ the sun. There is 
no doubt that Paul returned from his first captivity into that 
country, Philem. ver. 22 ; Heb. xiii. 19. 

26. Ti y.abyrniJ-O' !>/J>Zv, your glorying [rejoicing]) concerning my 
restoration to you, who were praying for that very thing. It is 
correlative to the words, to my rejoicing [glorying over you], 
ii. 16. Glory is joy, proceeding from virtue ; gloryingis the expres- 
sion of joy, an affection fiill of joy : from virtue, either true or false ; 
whence glorying is also true or false; comp. Is. Ivji. 12, where 
righteousness is called, though it is falsely so called, righteousness. 

27. Mom, only) Make this one thing your care; nothing else. 



128 PHILIPPIANS 1. 28-30.-II. 1. 

[ whatever happens as to my arrival. By supposing this 

or that event, not a few persuade themselves, that they will he at 
last such as it is proper for them to he ; hut it is better always to 
perform present duty, without evasions. — V. g.J — roD ivayyiXlov, 
the Gospel) For the sake of propagating which I delight [feel it 
desirable] to remain. [^There is plainly taught in this very pas- 
sage all that is worthy of a Christian man, who desires to be called 
evangelical. Faith is mentioned, ver. 27, hope, ver. 28, love, 
ch.ii. 2. — V. g.J — Idiiv — axoigiii, seeing — I may hear) Comp. ver. 
30. — axoim) I may hear and know ; for axovsu is to be referred 
also to coming and seeing you. — b hi nrn\iiia,ri, in one spirit) one 
among you. — /*;« -^v-xri, with one soul \mind'^ There is sometimes 
a certain natural antipathy among saints, but this feehng is over- 
come, when there is not only unity of spirit but also of soul 

(imad\o\Jvri<;) striving along with me. Paul was struggling in a 
conflict, ver. 30. 

28. M)j 'TTTupofiivoi, not terrified) with a great and sudden terror , 
for -TTvpco is properly said of horses. — ring, which) the striving. — 
auTo/g) to them. — svdti^ig, an evident token) 2 Thess. i. 5. 

29. "Or;, because) The force of the declaration falls upon the 
word exaplsSri, God bestowed it of grace. The gift of grace is a 
sign of salvation. — r>> v'Trlp) It is repeated after the intervening 
clause, rh imp auTou Tag^siv. — irisriieiv 'xudyii", to believe — to 
suffer) ver. 27, at the end. 

30. '-Rxp^rtg, having) construed with ye stand fast, in nothing 
terrified, ver. 27, 28.— s/'Sete, you have seen) Acts. xvi. 12, 19, 
20. — h ifLol, in me) who am not terrified. 



CHAPTER II. 

^ 1. E/r;s) Ifit be thought preferable thatthis word be read four 
times, we may thus explain it : if therefore exhortation^ in Christ 

' The Greek word •Ka.pa.x.f.mis signifies either exhortation or consolation. 
The Engl. Vers, has taken the latter, Bengel the former 



PHILIPPIANS II. 2, 3. 129 

be any (joy), if the comfort of love be an-if (joy), if the fellow- 
ship of the Spirit be any (joy), if bowels and mercies be any (joy), 
fulfil ye my joy ; so that the predicate suppHed four times may 
be joined with the subject expressed. See on a similar ellipse, 
Mark xv. 8, note. Certainly Paul's joy was most present and 
vivid; even with the common reading, 'i'l ng — e" nva, if any— 
if any, the joy is still by implication denoted, being about to be 
fulfilled by harmony, etc. — oSn, therefore) This corresponds to 
ch. i. 27, in one spirit, with one mind. — 'irapdiiXrieig h XpiarCi, 
exhortation [consolaticm] in Christ) This has as its adjunct, com- 
fort of love ; . and fellowship of the Spirit has as adjuncts, 
bowels and mercies. The four finits correspond to these four 
influencing motives in the same order, that, etc., in the follow- 
ing verse, as even the mention of love, put twice [viz. both in ver. 
1 and ver. 2], in the second place indicates ; and the opposites of 
each pair are put away [as unworthy of Christians] in ver. 3 
and 4. All things are derived from Christ and the Holy Spirit. 

2. tJ ahrh (ppovnrs, be like-^minded) The participle that follows 
depends on this. — s{>//i'^vx'>i, of one mind) viz. that ye be. On 
this the following participle also depends. — to h, the one thing) 
The previous, that ye be like-minded, implies that the feeling oj 
the mind ought to tend to the same things : the latter expression, 
being of one mind, implies that the feeling of the mind itself ought 
to be the same. 

3. Mnhh, nothing) viz. mrnid or think, do. — epiSsiav, strife) 
which has no anxiety to please others. — xsvoSo^iav, desire of vain- 
glory) which is too anxious to please others. — impe^ovrai, 
superior) in point of right and in endowments. That may be 
done not only externally, but by true humility, Tarim<ppoa{ivriv, 
when a man, in the exercise of self-denial, turns away his eyes 
from his own privileges and rights, and studiously contemplates 
the endowments of another, in which he is his superior. 

' ABCG/jf Vulg. and Rec. Text read ti'ri Txp»/4,6hoii. Only D(A) corrected 
reads ris. — Ed. 

2 Which both the margin of each Ed. and the Germ. Vers, seem to pre- 
fer.— E. B. 

ABCD(A)G read u rig ff7r7i«y;^;i/«. And so Lachm. Vulg. has " Siquid 
(siquis) viscera." fff Rec. Text and Tisch. with less authority, read e'riva 
mrhay^^uac. — Ed. 

VOL IV. I 



]80 PHILIPFIANS II. 1-6. 

4. M)) TO, lauTuv) not merely r/our own interest, nor on your own 
account: comp, ver. 21. — /iri to. — rf) Perverted usefulness is 
manifold ; true usefulness is simple and one.^ This is the difFei>- 
ence between ra and rh." 

5. OpoveTedai, let the mind be) He does not say (ppontn, think ye, 
but (ppoviieSa, cherish this mind. — h Xpisru 'lr,ffou, in Christ Jesus) 
Paul also was one who had regard to what belonged to others, 
not merely what belonged to himself: ch. i. 24 : and this circum- 
stance furnished him with the occasion of this admonition. He 
does not, however, propose himself, but Christ, as an example, 
who did not seek His own, but humbled Himself. [Even the 
very order of the words, as the name Christ is put first, indicates 
the immense weight of this example. — V. g.j 

6. "Oi) inasmuch as being one who. — -Iv fiopfifj @iou uitApyuy, 
subsisting in the form of God) The name God, in this and the 
following clause, does not denote God the Father, but is put in- 
definitely. The form of God does not imply the Deity, or Divine 
nature itself, but something emanating from it ; and yet again 
it does not denote the being on an equality with God, but 
something prior, viz. the appearance [outward manifestation] 
of God, i.e. the form shining forth from the very glory of the 
Invisible Deity, John i. 14. The Divine nature had infinite 
beauty in itself, even without any creature contemplating that 
beauty. That beauty was the iLop<pn esoS, form of God, as in 
man beauty shines forth from the sound constitution and elegant 
symmetry of his body, whether it has or has not any one to look 
at it. Man himself is seen by his form; so God and His 
glorious Majesty. This passage furnishes an excellent proof of 
the Divinity of Christ from this very fact ; for as the form of a 
servant does not signify the human nature itself— for the form of 
a servant was not perpetual, but the human nature is to continue 

^ Therefore the piurai, t«, is used m the former case ; the singular, to. in 
the latter : a distinction lost in the reading of the EngL Vers. Er 

' The margin of the older Ed., which has the sufii-age of the Germ. 
Vers., prefers the reading ^») ■nH—x.a.l to, but the margin of the 2d Ed. de- 
clares the reading to, I know not whether at the beginning or end of the 
verse, not quite certain. — E. B. 

None but inferior uncial MSS. read to in the second position. ABO 
Vulg. and Rec. Text read xal rx. D corrected Gfg read t« tZi/.—EA. 



PHILirPIANS II. 6. 131 

for ever — yet nevertheless it takes for granted the existence of 
the human nature : so the form of God is not the Divine nature, 
nor is the heing on an equality with God the Divine nature ; but 
yet He, who was subsisting in the form of God, and who might 
have been on an equality with God, is God. Moreover the /orm 
of God is used rather than the/orm of the Lord, as presently after 
on an equality with God : because God is more an absolute word, 
Lord involves a relation to inferiors. The Son of God subsisted 
in that form of God from eternity : and when He came in the 
flesh He did not cease to be in that form, but rather, so far as 
the human nature is concerned. He began to subsist in it : and 
when He was in that form, by His own peculiar pre-eminence 
itself as Lord, it was entirely in His power, even according to 
His human nature, so soon as He assumed it, to be on an 
equality with God, to adopt a mode of life and outward distinc- 
tions, which would correspond to His dignity, that He might 
be received and treated by all creatures as their Lord ; but He 
acted differently. — oi^ apvay/jiou nyfiearo. He did not regard it a 
thing to be eagerly caught at as a prey^ as a spoil. Those, to 
whom any opportunity of sudden advantage is presented, are 
usually eager in other cases to fly upon it and quickly to lay 
hold of it, without having any respect to others, and deter- 
minately to use and enjoy it. Hence ap-!ra,Xsa, with Eustathius, 
means, rA cravu 'Tripis-xohbaaTo,, the things which a man may with all 
eagerness snatch for his own use, and may claim, as his own : and 
the phrases occur, ap'Ttay/ji^a, apvayf^hv, ipf^aiov, lupn/^a, vo/iil^eiv, 
TToiTgSai, r\yiis6ai, apitaZfiv. E. Schmidius and G. Raphelius have 
collected examples from Heliodorus and Polybius. But Christ, 
though He might have been on an equality with God, did not 
snatch at it, did not regard it as spoil.' He did not suddenly 

1 Many thinlc rightly, from a passage of Plutarch, quoted by Wetstein, 
that ipvayfio; signifies the act by which anything is greedily seized, and 
the desire which leads to it ; but that dpTeayfio,, having a neuter ending, in- 
dicates the object desired, the thing seized, the prey. Drusius, in Crit. S.S., 
Lond., tries to show that apxayf^oi^ as well as a.p'Tra.yfA.a, though both 
strictly signifying an act, m,ay signify the thing which is the object o£ the act. 
Wahl renders a,p7ra.ypi,o;, "res cupide arripienda et necessario usurpanda." 
So Neander, " Conscious of Divinity, He did not eagerly retain equality with 
God for the mere exhibition of it, but emptied Himself of the outward at- 
tributes and glory of it." The antithesis favours this view. However, there 



132 I'HILIFPIANS II. 7. 

use that power ; compare Ps. Ixix. 5 ; Gen. iii. 5, etc. This feeling 
on His part is at the same time indicated by the verb ny^teSai, 
to regard, to treat it as. It -wotold not have been robbery (rapina), 
if He had used His own right ; but He abstained from doing so, 
just as if it had been robbery. A similar phrase at 2 Cor. xi. 8, 
where see the note, may be compared with it. — rh iJuai ha, ©ew) 
lea,, the accusative used adverbially, as happens often in Job, on 
an equality with and in a manner suitable to Grod. To be on an 
equality with God, implies ^as fulness and exaltation, as is evident 
from the double antithesis, ver. 7, 8, He emptied and humbled 
Himself. The article, without which /Lopipriv is put, makes now 
an emphatic addition [Epitasis]. It is not therefore wonderful, 
that He never called Himself God, rather rarely the Son of God, 
generally the Son of man. 

7. 'axx', but) To this word the two clauses refer : He emptied 
Himself, to which the form of a servant belongs ; and He 
humbled Himself, on which His obedience depends. The former 
is opposed privatively, the latter also in direct contrariety to 
being equal with God ; wherefore these two words are used in the 
way of gradation, and He humbled is put before Himself.^ 
(Comp. James ii. 18, note). For, to take an example, when 
Philip V. ceased to be King of Spain, whose doings were 
agitating the public mind while we were engaged in these me- 
ditations, he so far emptied himself, yet he did not equally humble 
himself: he laid down the government of a kingdom, but he did 
not become a subject. — lavrh sximai. He emptied Himself) T'DDH, 

seems no very valid argument against ipTray^o; being taken in the strict 
sense, as Engl. V., 'thmigU ' the being on an equahty with God no act of 
' robbery,' or arrogation of what did not belong to Him. It is true the anti- 
thesis, as Olshausen argues, aXx' iximaey, may seem to suit better Wahl's 
rendering. But xp'Tra.yfio;, in the only passage where it occurs, Plut. de 
puer. educ, 120, means raptus or actio rapiendi, not res rapta. It is only 
by metonymy it can be made even res rwpienda. As to the antithesis, «AX' 
plainly means, And yet: Though having been in the form of God, etc., yet, 
etc — Ed. 

^ iavTou iKcmtrev (the ecevToi/ coming first, because Himself, viewed in re- 
spect to what He had heretofore been, is the emphatic word and thought) ; 
but eraxehaaiu iaurov (the iuvtou coming second, and hcca-u'uainii first, because 
the emphatic word is hx'jriltiaaiii, which forms a climax to the previous Ixei/affsv, 
He not only emptied Hhnself of what He was and had, but submitted to 
positive humiliation). — En. 



PHILIPPIANS II. 8. 133 

LXX., xsvhi voiijeai, Is. xxxii. 6, where the matter discussed is 
indeed quite different, but yet Paul, when he uses ixivaisiv, 
translates by it the verb ion, Ps. viii. 5, with which comp. Heb. 
ii. 7. Wherever there is emptying, there is a thing containing 
and a thing contained. The thing containing, in the emptying 
of Christ, is Himself; the thing contained, was that fulness, which 
He received in His exaltation. He remained full, John i. 14 : 
and yet He bore Himself in the same way as if He were empty ; 
for He avoided the observation, so far as it was expedient, of 
men and angels, nay, even of His own self: Kom. xv. 3: and 
therefore not only avoided observation, but also denied Himself, 
and abstained from His rights. — f'Op(priv, form) These three words, 
/iop(pri, o/Ao/W|U.a, ey/t/jja,^ form,likeness, fashion, are not synonymous, 
nor even can they be interchanged the one for the other ; but 
yet they are closely related : form signifies something absolute ; 
likeness denotes a relation to other things of the same condition ; 
fashion is to be referred to the sight and sense. — Xa^chv, having 
taken) The act of emptying carries with it [contains in it] His 
taking the form of a servant. Moreover He was able to take it, 
because He was in the likeness of men. — oixioidiiiari a.ySpdi'jm, in 
the likeness of men) He was made like men, a true man. 

8. Ka/ eyJiiLari, and in fashion) a distinct and lower degree of 
emptying. The antitheses are, the /oj*?n of God, and the form of a 
servant. Yet such a division of the parts of the sentence remains 
as joins the two words, emptied, humbled, by and, without an 
asyndeton." 'AXXa, but, ver. 7, divides into its two distinct parts 
the whole antithesis, which, after the '6;, who, in the former part, 
has two clauses ; more clauses in the second. — s^rjfiari lupiSilg ug 
avipu-rrog, being found in fashion as a man) ayrifhu,, fashion, dress, 
clothing, food, gesture, words and actions. — lupshtg, being found) 
showing Himself such, and bearing Himself so in reality. — iig 
avSpumg) as a man, a common man, as if He were nothing else 

' The word cx^fia, habitus (Th. ajca habeo), ' condition,' ' appearance,' 
'bearing,' has a wider application than fioptpii, forma. 'Ofioiorn; is the 
similarity itself : ' Opioiuais the image or likeness according to which anything 
is conformed : 'O/iotufia. the thing itself so conformed or made like.^ — Ed. 

' So Lachm. rightly punctuates with comma after dtidpiivuv yii/ofisuo;, 
and x«( axifictri — itoi'jreiiioKiiv kavroi/, without asyndeton. But Tisch. joins 
'/rvofieiio; and eipihi; by xal, putting the comma after oiuSpu'rros, so that 
there is an asyndeton between exinaai]/ and iraviluuasu. — Ed. 



134 

besides, and as if He did not excel other men ; He assumed to 
Himself nothing extraordinary. — framhoissv iavrov, He humbled 
Himself [Engl. Vers, made Himself of no reputation]) The state 
of emptying gradually becomes deeper. — yivofuvog uvrixoog) became 
obedient,'HLeh.r. 8, viz. to God. This ellipsis expresses ivXdjBsiav, the 
dutiful condescension of Jesus Christ ; obedience becomes a slave. 
— /ji'sXPh ei^ei^ to [as far as to]) construed with humhled, also with 
obedient. There is the greatest humiliation in death ; ch. iii. 21 ; 
Acts viii. 33 ; Ps. xc. 3, Lxx. ; and the greatest obedience, John 
X. 18. — eroivpoij, of the cross) which was the usual punishment of 
slaves [servants, whose form He took upon Him]. 

9. Alb xal, wherefore also) The most appropriate reward of 
.emptying is exaltation; Luke xxiv. 26; John x. 17. That 
result could not but follow it; John xvi. 15. Whatever be- 
longs to the Father belongs to the Son. Those things could 
not so belong to the Father, as tiiat they should not belong to 
the Son ; John xvii. 5. Paul elegantly leaves the fact to be 
supplied, that they also will be exalted who humble themselves 
according to the example of Christ ; nay, he expresses it, ch. iii. 
21. — &ihg, God) Christ emptied Christ ; God exalted Christ, 
comp. 1 Pet. V. 6, and made Him to be equal with God. — 
i'TTipu-^use, highly exalted) It was thus the hum,iliation was com- 
pensated, A lofty compound. — xal i^aplgaTo, and hath given) 
It was thus the emptying was compensated, to which also the 
fulness is more expressly opposed, Eph. i. 23, iv. 10. By the 
verb xap'iCie^ai, to give, is denoted, how acceptable the emptying 
of Christ was to God, and with how lowly a mind Christ, after 
He had gone through all that state of servitude, received this 
gift. — ovofio.) a name along with the thing, i.e. dignity and praise. 
— u'TTip <!rav ouiLa, above every name) Eph. i. 21, not merely above 
every name among mankind. 

10. nccK j-o'vu — •ratfa y\weea, every knee — every tongue) A Synec- 
doche ;^ i.e. that in every way they may worship and acknow- 
ledge Him as Lord ; comp. Eev. v. 13. — xa/i-v^,?)) may bow, viz. 
itself, either with [in token of] applause or with trembling. — 
inupavim [supracselestium], of the beings dwelling in the upper 

' Bowing the knee, the part put for every kind of worship, the -whole. 
-Ed. 



PHILIPPIANS 11. 11-13. 135 

heaven) The heavenly inhabitants bow their knees, for Christ 
the Lord has taken heaven. — Imysluv, of things on earth) For 
He dwelt upon the earth. — xara,'^6ovliiov, of beings under the earth) 
See Mark iii. 11 ; Job xxvi. 5 [Eph. iv. 9 ; Eev. v. 13.— V. g.] 
Afterwards He also presented Himself to them. This division 
goes further into the height and depth than that, Ex. xx. 4. 

11. 'E^afioXoyrjdrjrai, should confess) expressly. — Kipiog, Lord) 
no longer in the form of a servant. — tig, in) That Jesus Christ 
is Lord, inasmuch as He is in the glory of God the Father [not 
as Engl. Vers. " to the glory"]. So elg, John i. 18 [ilg rhv xoAtov, 
"m the bosom," not into or to the bosom, etc.]. — ©sou Tlarphg, of 
God the Father) The Son acknowledges, and those who see the 
glory of the Son also acknowledge, that the Son has this glory 
with the Father, and from the Father ; comp. 1 Cor. xv. 28. 

12. "iloTE, therefore) He sets Christ before us as an example, 
and infers, that we should maintain the salvation which Christ 
has procured for us. — uT^xoijirarE, ye have obeyed) me, exhorting 
you to salvation, and have obeyed God Himself; comp. obedient, 
ver. 8. — /Asra pojSoD xal Tpofiov, with fear and trembling) You 
ought to be 'servants,' according to the example of Christ; ver. 
8 : moreover fear and trembling become a servant ; Eph. vi. 5, 
i.e. humility ; comp. Rom. xi. 20. Joh. Jac. Wolfius has ob- 
served, in his MS. exegesis of the Ep. to the Phil., Paul, though 
filled with joy, still writes seriously. — ia\jrm, your own) In this 
department, indeed, look each of you at his own things ; comp. 
ver. 4, your own, he says ; because I cannot be present with you, 
be you therefore the more careful of yourselves. — eoirripiav, salva- 
tion) that which is in Jesus. — xaripiyat^igh, work out) even to the 
end. 

13. 'O ®sh; y&p, for God) God alone ; He is present with you 
even in my absence. You want nothing, only be not wanting 
to yourselves ; comp. 2 Pet. i. 5, 3. [ You can do nothing of your- 
selves ; avoid security. Some, trusting too much to their exalted 
condition, think that they may hold the grace of GoD on the same 
footing as the Israelites held the food sent down from heaven. 
Num. xi. 8, and therefore that it is at their own will either to 
struggle against it or anew to grant it admission. — ^V. g.] — to 
fsXeiv, to will) that you have willed salvation in my presence, 
and still will it. — ri hipyin, to do) even now in my absence. — 



i36 PHILIPPIAXS ir. 14-17. 

b'jTip Trig euioxlag, of His good pleasure) To this refer, to will; and 
to do, to, who worheth. 

14. TloitlYi, do) with His good pleasure. Sons ought to imi- 
tate their father, ver. 15. — %w^/5 yoyyMSiiav, without murmurings) 
in respect of others. To this refer afiifiitToi, blameless. Not 
only brawhngs and clamours, from which the Philippians had 
now withdrawn, are opposed to love, but also murmurings. 
Doubting is joined to these, as well as wrath, 1 Tim. ii. 8. \_A 
man may either cherish both in himself or rouse them, in others. — 
V. g.J Inquire or accuse in my presence ; do not murmur be- 
hind my back or in secret. — xa/ diaXoyiff/ji,uv, and doubtings, 
disputings) in respect of yourselves. To this refer dxipawi, 
' indelibati,' ver. 15, unimpaired [Engl. Vers, harmless^, viz. in 
the faith [ver. 17]. Many words of this sort are both active and 
passive at the same time ; comp. Rom. xvi. 19, note. 'Ax'ipaiovis 
applied to a patrimony, that is uninjured, unimpaired, in Chrys. 
de Sacerd. § 17. 

15. QeoiJ, of God) who is good. — axoXiSg) crooked. — (pa'mek) 
ye shine, namely, by having kept this exhortation. Of life 
follows, as the mention of light and life is frequently joined. — 
h -/.oa/jbifi, in the world) among the human race, of whom many 
are yet to be converted, others are to be reproved. 

16. Aoyov Zoini, the word of life) which I have preached to 
you. There is frequent mention of life in this epistle, ch. iv. 3. 
— enri'/ovrii) holding fast, upholding,^ lest you should give way to 
the world. — e/s y-aiiyrnha, for a source of glorying to me) Construe 
with holding fast. — ilg rifj.ipav,in [against] the day) The Philippians 
thought the day of Christ so near, that the life of Paul might be 
lengthened out even till that day. Paul did not consider it ne- 
cessary to confute this. — oJz I'lg Kivh, not in vain) with your fruit. 

17. 'a\X' £/' Kal, but if even) Look back at i. 22, note. — I'l 
xai ffTivdo/jbai s'jrl rfi 6u(!ia xa! XiiTovpyi<f, Engl. Vers, if I am, even 
offered upon the sacrifice and service; Bengel gives, if I am 
poured out on the victim and sacrifice) The Philippians, as well 
as the other nations converted to the faith, were the oblation ; 
Paul was the minister [not here primarily, the offering, or obla- 

' But Engl-, v. Holding forth, referring to the metaphor in tpmriipis, 
lighthouses, which hold forth a beacon-light to warn the unwary. — Ed. 



PHILIPPIANS II. 18-21. 137 

tion, as Engl. Vers, implies], Eom. xv. 16 ; and as at the holo- 
causts, a libation of wine was usually made, and it was poured out 
at the base of the altar, so Paul rejoices that his blood should be 
poured out. The future accomplishment of the sacrifice was 
matter of joy to both. Here is the superior excellence of 
martyrdom. The phrase is in consonance with the punishment 
of the sword, which awaited Paul. — duala, the victim, the sacrifice) 
To this refer, I rejoice with you, rejoice ye. — Xiirovpylif, service^ 
To this refer, / rejoice, and rejoice ye with me. 

18. l\)yya.ifiri fhoi) rejoice with me, congratulate me, on being 
poured out as a libation. 

19. As) but: although I have no grounds at present for writ- 
ing categorically about my death. — iif/^Tv) to [for] you : This 
[" for you," i.e. for your good, to your satisfaction] is more ex- 
pressive, than if it had been the accusative with the preposition 
ilg [which would be merely " to you"]. — }i(f'yi>) I also ; that not 
only you [may be of good comfort], upon your knowing [receiv- 
ing information as to] my afPairs, ver. 23. — ih-^vyu, may be of 
good mind [comfort^ He is anxious about the Philippians ; and 
yet he has good hope. 

20. 0\jbs]ia, no one) None other, him alone [He is the only like- 
minded one I have]. Who depends on him, as the antecedent, 
understood. — Iso-^u'x^ov, like-minded) Paul's second self, viz. 
Timothy : So Ps. Iv. 14, ''31W B'WK nnsi, but thou, man like- 
minded (/Vo■4/u;^J£) ; Deut. xiii. 7 (6), ncaja "it^S, who is like-minded 
with thee (o 'ieog rjj ■^vy^ eov). [Where Timothy is, says Paul, 
there you may consider that I myself am present. — ^V. g.] — 
yvrislus. Sincerely, like a brother, [Engl. Vers, naturallyj) ver. 22 ; 
1 Tim. i. 2.^ — /iepi/jm^eei) will care [_will be solicitous in all that 
concerns you'], whilst among you : and will give an accurate 
report to me. 

21. Oi vdvrig, they all [the whole mass of men]) If at that 
time, so distinguished as it was, Paul quite approved of only one 
out of, as it were, his own band (ch. i. 14, 17), speaking of 
those who were then present, ch. iv. 21, and that too writing 
at such a distance to the church of the Philippians, how many 

^ yi/r:ai'<i> rexiia, a genuine son : Engl. V. " my own son.'' So here, in tlit 
genuine spirit of a brother. — Ed. 



138 PHILIPPIANS II. 22, 

do we suppose in otir times approve themselves unto God ? 
[This fact may he put to the test, when a man ought to have given 
his assistance to a laudable undertaking, either near or at a dis- 
tance, which either he has not under his charge, or which he does 
not perceive will be of advantage to him, Judg. v. 23, viii. 6. Nay, 
even it sometimes happens, that he who possesses some extraordi- 
nary gift or endowment, if in any way he has found an oppor- 
tunity of refusing the benefit of it to others, derives much self- 
gratification from this very fact. Christiaxis, unworthy of the 
name ! — ^V. g.] It was a very nice a'/gSrigig, sense, by which Pau] 
perceived this. — ra iavruv, their own) ver. 4. O how many are 
godly on their own account ! although they are not enemies, 
iii. 18. — ^»)7-oD(r;, seek) A godly intimation may be given to godly 
hearers as to the character of these or those ministers. — oi t&, ' 
XpidTou 'irjgov, not the things which are Jesus Chrises) They expe- 
rience this, who from their heart seek to promote the common 
edification. They find few to assist them, Judg. v. 17, 23, viii. 
6, 8. They are abandoned, when there is no obligation close in 
view, no hope of reward or fame. When the advantage of the 
kingdom of Christ is consulted by most persons, it is generally 
done in the way of a safe or secure expediency.^ When some 
sacrifice must be made, the man does not fight, but flees, and 
excuses himself with the hope of fighting at another time. 

22. As, but) This marks the antithesis between, ver. 21, all, and 
of him. Rare praise, Neh. vii. 2. — yiviLaxin) ye know ; comp. 
Acts xvi. i. 12. — TiKvov evv, as a son with) He speaks with great 
elegance, partly as of a son, partly as of a colleague : so in 
ch. iii. 17, he presents himself as the type [rvmv ; " an ensample," 
Engl, v.], and yet he commands them to be (ru/j,//,i/ji,riTag, fol- 
lowers with him, not merely followers [just as here he makes 
Timothy a son following him as a father, and yet also a colleague 
with him]. 

1 The marg. of both Ed., and also the Germ. Vers., give their decision 
in favour of the reading 'Inirov Xpiimv in this passage. — E. B. 

' Iijiroi/ X/j((7ToS is the reading of ACD(A)Gr;^ Amiat. MS. of Vulg. But 
Xo/ffToS 'Ivimv, B (judging from silence) Memph. and later Syr. Ed. — Ed. 

' i.e. Where consulting Christ's advantage is consistent with consulting 
their own, so as to be free from hurt or loss : " per modum innoxise utilitatis." 
—Ed 



PHILIPPIANS II. 23-30. 139 

23. 'flj &v air'ihoi) amdiiv,'^ to carry off or acquire, to obtain in- 
formation. — e^mrni, presently) The relative force implied in 
the ahrrii of the compound has regard to the phrase, I shall 
have obtained the information (of your state). 

25. ''EwatppohiTov, JUpaphroditus) iv, 18. — evaTpanuTriv, a fellow- 
soldier) ch. i. 27, 30. — {ifMuv Si aToeroXov, and your deputy or mes- 
senger) The Philippians had deputed him as a messenger to Paul 
[iv. 18]. — XiiTovpyk rfii %fi£;as /iou, the minister to my necessity) To 
this also refer your [viz. your minister, the one sent by you to 
minister to my necessity] ; for he had been serviceable to Paul 
in the name of the Philippians. Also see how highly even ex- 
ternal ministration is estimated : ver. 30. — Ts/i-^/a/, to send) He 
says, to send, not to send back ; for he had come to Paul for the 
purpose of remaining with him : ver. 30. 

26. "' Adrifn^ovuv) Hesychius has, aSrif/,ovuv, ayaviuv aSrifiovSi, axrj&iu, 
&ymiu. 'Axr}diuv, worn out with grief. Acedia, languor in spiri- 
tual things. — rixousciTs, ye have heard) and on that account have 
been anxious. 

27. TlapawXrigiov, near) He speaks (at fir^t) rather mildly, lest 
he should at once terrify the Philippians : then ver. 30, he says, 
nyyiaiv, he drew (was) nigh unto, and by this verb greater danger 
is indicated. — alrh fiXirieiv, had mercy on him) by restoring health 
and life. — xai s//,i, and on me) The saints were allowed to con- 
sider all things as given to them. — xWrfv, sorrow) for the death 
of Epaphroditus — sorrow, opposed to the ' joy,' of which the 
whole epistle treats.— I's-/ Kuvr;, on sorroiv) for the sickness of 
Epaphroditus, for his own bonds, etc. 

28. ^'TTouduioripuig, the more earnestly, anxiously [carefullyj) 
sooner than Timothy, ver. 19. — y^aptJTi, ye may rejoice) Godly 
men may receive joy from all things. — aXvTroripog u, I may be the 
less sorrowful) when I know, that you rejoice. 

30. Mixi" 6avo«ro\}, even unto death) This appertains to the 
comparison of duties [to the question of the prior claim among 
comparative duties]. To minister to Paul, seems in itself to be 

' Wahl, Clavis, translates, " Simulac cognovero rerum mearum eventum." 
—Ed. 

2 'En-jToSai/, longing for) Something oi nature may have been mixed up 
with this ; but when grace is the predominant element, all things are esti- 
mated by love. — V. g. 



140 PIULirPIANS 111. 1. 

a matter of somewhat less importance than the danger to the 
life of Epaphroditus, who however most rightly purchased by 
this disadvantage [the danger to his life] that important benefit 
[the glad reception at Phihppi, ver. 29, and the love and prayers 
of Paul, ver. 27, 28] : 2 Tim. i. 16, 17.— ^'77/tfs, drew nigh) Epa- 
phroditus, when setting out from Philippi, does not seem to have 
been aware that he would become sick ; but yet, inasmuch as he 
undertook the arduous journey, not shrinking back through fear 
of whatever might happen to him either from the enemies of 
Paul or from any other cause, the sickness, although unforeseen, 
is attributed to him as if it were undergone out of kindness to 
Paul. — rra.palSciu'kivSa./ji^ivo; rtj ■^v^ft) rri -I'V^JI; the dative. Hesy- 
chius : 'jrapa^ovXeugdf/.iVog, sig idvocrov iaxirh sudoui, escposing one's 
self to death. 'xapix^ouXiiofj.cx.i properly signifies, I take counsel, or 
rather, I form a design contrary to my interests. It is a Parono- 
masia [the signification of a word changed by a slight alteration 
of letters] on the word irapa^aXkofj.ai, I rashly dare, I cast my- 
self recklessly into danger, which the apostle seems to have skil- 
fully avoided, comp. iii. 2, at the end, note. — ri i/^uv \ieTipr\iJ.a, 
your deficiency [Engl. V. hick of service\) This deficiency existed 
not so much in the estimate of Paul, as in the feeling of the 
Philippians themselves, on account of the love which they bore 
to him, ch. iv. 10, 11. 



CHAPTER III. 

1. TJ Xamh, Furthermore) a phrase used in continuing a dis- 
course, 1 Thess. iv. 1. So Xo/'tJv and rov Xoimv are used. — ■'ra 
abra, the same things) concerning joy. [The proper principle 
on which to rest our rejoicing is presently presented, namely, to he 
m communion with Christ. — V. g.] — oI-a, oxvtjphv, is not trouble- 
some) For it is pleasant for a pea-son who feels joy to write : 
rejoice. The contrary is found at Gal. vi. 17. — ui/,n Ss aetpaXig, 

^ Xai'pire h Kvpli^, rejoice in the Lord) dost thou thyself rejoice with all 
diligence (earnestness) and constancy in the Lord Jesus Christ ? ch. iv. 4. 
-V. g. 



PHILIPPIANS 111. 2. 141 

but for you it is safe) Spiritual joy produces the best safety 
against errors, especially Jewish errors, ver. 2. 

2. BXimri, see) Avehement Anaphora,^ See, and you will avoid ; 
a metonymy of the antecedent for the consequent.^ The antithesis 
is (sxo'TreTri, observe, mark,^ ver. 17 ; for ver. 17 returns to this topic, 
wonderfully tempered by reproof and exhortation. — rovi xUag, the 
dogs) Undoubtedly he used this appellation often in their presence, 
ver. 18, and he now brought it to the recollection of the Philip- 
pians ; and hence they would more easily understand it than we. 
Comp. 2 Thess. ii. 5. The three members of the following verse 
correspond, by a retrograde gradation (descending climax), to the 
three clauses of this verse ; so that the dogs are the false apostles 
and carnal men, who do not trust in Christ, but in the flesh, 
and are slaves to foul lusts [utter strangers to true holiness, 
although exulting in the name of Jews. — ^V. g.J, ver, 19. So the 
term dogs is applied to s^diXvy/j^mig, those to be abominated, Eev. 
xxii. 15 ; comp. Eev. xxi. 8 ; or in other words, the abominable, 
impure (/SSsXuxro;, //,s/Ma/ifimii), Tit. i. 16, 15, strangers to 
holiness. Matt. vii. 6 ; quite different from Paul, living and 
dying ; for in life they abound to overflowing in the vices of 
dogs, in filthiness, unchastity, snarling, 2 Pet. ii. 22 ; Deut. 
xxiii. 19 (18) ; Ps. lix. 7, 16 ; and they are most of all the ene- 
mies of the cross of Christ, ver. 18 ; comp. Ps. xxii. 17, 21 : and 
in death they are dead dogs (by which proverb something of the 
vilest sort is denoted) : comp. ver. 19. That saying is appli- 
cable to these, which is commonly used. Take care of the dog* 
The Jews considered the Gentiles as dogs ; see at Matt. xv. 26 ; 
they are now called dogs, who are unwilling to be the Israel of 
God. — Toug xaxous i/yydrag, evil workers) who do not serve God ; 
comp. 2 Cor. xi. 13. — Tfiv xararo/ji^riv, the concision) A Parano- 
masia [See Append.] ; for he claims for Christians the glorious 

1 Kepetition of the same word at the beginnings of several clauses. — Ed. 

' See, instead of amoid, which is its consequence. — Ed. 

' So as to follow; not as here, See so as to avoid. — Ed. 

* EuX«/3oii T^K icvfa, cave canem,usei to be written near the door of 
ancient houses to guard strangers against the dog kept in the ostium oi 
janua. At Pompeii, " in the house of the tragic poet," there is wrought in 
the Mosaic pavement, " Cave canem," and the figure of a fierce dog. See 
Gell's Pomp— Ed 



142 PHILIPPIANS III. 3-5. 

name of tlie circumcision {■jrspiro/ji.rig} in the following verse. The 
circumcision of the body was now useless, nay hurtful. See 
xarari/im on the prohibition of cutting the flesh, Lev. xxi. 5 ; 
1 Kings xviii. 28. He speaks not without indignation. 

3. TAp, for) This gives the reason why in ver. 2 he separates 
and banishes the others to such a distance, [and also why he 
calls the external circumcision of the flesh only concision. — 
V.g.] — n itipiToiin, the circumcision) The abstract for the con- 
crete ; the true people. — •!ni£u/j,aTi, in the spirit) not in the letter, 
Rom. ii. 29. — wid/ictTi &iSi "karptljoiiTe^, serving God in the spirit) 
So Rom. i. 9.^ — Ti.axix'ilJ'ivoi, glorying, rejoicing) This is more than 
iri-TToiSoTig, trusting, having confidence. 

4. Kaiwip iyoi, although 1) The singular is included in the 
preceding plural : we glory, and I glory, although I, etc. ; but 
because the discourse proceeds from the plural to the singular, / 
is interposed and is added, because the Philippians had been 
Gentiles. Paul was of the circumcision. Comp. Rev. xvii. 8, 
note. — '^x^h having) for the construction depends on those 
things which go before^ : Having, not using. — s/V/s ciXKog, if any 
other) a word of universal comprehension : other is sweetly re- 
dundant; comp. note ad Gregorii Neocaes. Paneg. p. 195. — 
syii [x,aXkav, I more) i.e. syii fiaXXov m'TToda, I have more ground 
for being confident. He speaks of his former feeling with a 
Mimesis' of those who gloried in such outward carnalities ; see 
the following verse. 

5. TlipiTOfj^rt 0KToi,7i//,ipDg,* circumcision on the eighth day) These 
heads [of carnal glorying], counted very briefly as it were on 
the fingers, render the discourse very plain. Moreover, for the 
sake of brevity, he puts together the abstract and concrete 
— circumcision, a Hebrew : as in Col. iii. 11. — oKTarjfupo;, on 
the eighth day) not putting it off" until full age. — Biviaf/^h, Ben- 

' Ovx, ill ijapx\, not in theflesK) in carnal circumcision and origin (stock), 
ver. 5. — V. g. 

^ iyu being included in the hi^Hs — ol — TttwoiSori;, constructed with the 
verb lo-MEi/ Ed. 

- A.n allusion, in the way of imitation, to his ox>vonents' mode of stating 
their grounds of confidence. — Ed. 

* The oldest authorities have Tripnopifi, i.e. Being an eighth dap person in 
respect to my circumcision. Sofg Lucif. " circumcisione :" Vulg. " circum- 
cisus octavo die." — Ed. 



rniLippiANs in. e-s. us 

jamhi) son of Rachel, not of the maid-servant.— i^ 'EjSpalm, of 
the Hebrews) not a proselyte, and neither the one parent nor 
the other being of the Gentiles. — ^apidaTog, a Pharisee) of the 
most rigid description ["of the straitest sect," Acts xxvi. 5]. 

6. Aiuxuv, persecuting) He formerly thought that he was act- 
ing most meritoriously. 

7. "Arim, those things which) Referring to the things just now 
enumerated. — xipdri, gains) A very comprehensive plural. — 
riynfiaj, I counted) A inost Christian profession respecting the 
past, present, and future ; extending as far as the 14th verse. — 
hia rh X.pierh, for the sake of Christ) To these words are to be 
referred the words following in ver. 8, 9, ha, x.r.X., that, etc. — 
t^niJiiail) loss. 

8. Msvoui', yea) There is an amplification of the language, 
namely, in the employment of this particle, and then by the em- 
phatic addition [Epitasis. Append.] of synonymous terms ; also in 
the fuller appellation of Christ Himself. — xa; yiyoufj^ai, even I 
count) xai, even, intensifies the force of the present tense in 
nyoZf/jai, I count. Righteousness, not only at first, but always 
throughout the whole career of the saints, is of faith. — iravra, all 
things) not only those which I have now mentioned, but all 
things. — dia — yvwseiag, x.r.X., for — of the knowledge, etc.) Con- 
strued with I count^, and refer to this, ver. 10, 11, row yvumi, 
that I may know. — rb i'lrep's^ov rrig ynuaiag, the excelleticy of the 
knowledge) Excellency properly belongs to Christ ; but when He 
is known, the knowledge of Him likewise obtains excellency. — 
rod Kvplou /jLov, of my Lord) The appropriation of the [Saviour by 
thel believer. — I^TjiH/w^/jv) not only / counted them loss, but in 
reality / cast them away. — exC^a'ka,) There is an amplification 
here in regard to the believer's self-denial as to all things : 
^>i«,/a, loss, is incurred wdth equanimity ; exu^aXa are hastily 
thrown away, as things not afterwards to be considered worthy 
either to be touched or looked at. The Hebrew word, K^S, 
contains an Antanaclasis^ in relation to the Pharisees ;^ see P. 

1 On account of the excellency, etc., I count all things loss : not with 
shai ^nfiia.u, to be loss on account of the excellency of the knowledge. — Ed. 

^ The same word, in the same context, used in a double sense. See 
Append. — Ed. 

^ Of whom Paul, ver. 5, had said he was one, a Pharisee, Th. Pharash, in the 



144 PHILIPPIANS III. 9, 10. 

Zornii, T. ii. Opusc. sacr. p. 514. Gataker says : " (rxu/3aXoi' 
marks out any worthless thing, that is to be cast away, such as 
the excrements of animals, the dregs and grounds of liquors, the 
dross of metals, what falls from plants, the refuse of the crops, 
the bran of meal, the crumbs of the table, the wipings of the 
hands, which are destined for the dogs.^ See this very fully in 
Adversar. misc. posth. cap. 43." — ha, that) The two things are 
incompatible, both to retain other things and to win (obtain) 
Christ. — xipSfjau %ai tupi^Z, that I may win and be found) Each 
of the two is antithetical to Zfl/J-iav, loss. He who loses all things, 
not even excepting himself, wins Christ, and is won in Christ. 
Christ is his, and he is Christ's. More still, Paul speaks as if he 
had not yet won. 

9. is,vpi6a h ahrO) viz. <liv. — /a)j £%wv, not having) The wcrdiS, to 
suffer loss, to win, to he found, to have, are figurative. The 
immediate consequence of being, and being found, in Christ, is to 
have righteousness by faith in Christ. The book lltno, the col- 
lection of prayers for the Jews, has inpnsi DI-UJI ^PW DiB'JJDD *3S 
*riD3 N'n ma?, i.e. In regard to works I am quite empty and bare, 
and Thy righteousness alone is my clothing. — i/iriv, my own) The 
antithesis is, that (the righteousness) which is of (from) God; 
but ifiriv without the article serves to indicate oblivion of the 
past.^ — rjjii Ix vo/jiiov, that which is of the law) ver. 6 ; comp. of, 
Eom. iv. 14. The antithesis is, that which is by faith. — ha 
■r/dTEws XpiSTou) by the faith of Christ, viz. in Christ. — stI rf 
msTii) [which rests] upon faith. 

10. ToD yvSimi, that I may know) The genitive, rou, is con- 
nected with m'ffrs;, faith; and resumes the mention of r^; 
yvwgeaig, knowledge, msrde at ver. 8, and now to be more fully 
explained. — avrhv) Him. — dum/iiv, the power) Eom. i. 4. — r^s 
avasTaenag avrov) It is consonant to the order of the discourse 
that the verbal noun avdaraeig should be taken, not for the re- 
surrection firom the dead, which is expressed in ver. 11 with a 

sense separate : and yet one who counted all else hut Christ 1)^!?, in the sense 
dung. — Ed. 

' According to the derivation assigned to axifia'Koi/, si; xvux; /SaAXfd/, as 
axopxai^n), from ti; x,6pctx.ccs. — Ed. 

2 i.e. A wish to forget his former kind of righteousness, as if not his at 
all.— Ed 



PUILIPI-IANS 111. 11. 146 

change of the word [s^avdeTagiv], but of the rising of Christ, 
Heb. vii. 14 [The Lord sprang out of Juda], as the verb avair- 
rrigai is used in Acts xiii. 32, where see the note [a,vdsrriffa,i 
'Iriiovv — " quum suscitavit et nobis prcesentem exhibuit ;" adding 
that this absolute ' suscitatio' is distinct from the " suscitatio e 
mortuis"]. For amdrasig is not always put for the resurrection 
of the dead, Luke ii. 34 [avaaraff/v iroXkuv h rifi 'lipariX, the 
spiritual rising again, etc., not their actual resurrection], 
(vii. 16) ; Lam. iii. 63 ; Zeph. iii. 8 ; and truly the very rising 
or coming of the Messiah has its own power, on the knowledge 
of which believers depend, 2 Pet. i. 16. — rriv xoivuilav, the fellow- 
ship) Gal. ii. 20. — (!v/j,/ji,oppoL/iiiios, being conformed [" made 
conformable"]) The nominative case after the infinitive is fre- 
quent with the Greeks,, although here it may be construed with 
the following finite verb [xaravr^iria]. Believers are conformed 
by faith. Imitation is not excluded, but most assuredly follows 
after [conformation by faith]. Gal. iii. 1, note ; comp. ei/jr- 
/iop(pov, conformed, fashioned like, ver. 21. 

11. E/VoDs, if by any means, in any way) This denotes the 
struggle of Paul's faith ; so, £/', if, ver. 12. — xaratr^su, I may 
attain) He gradually passes from the figure of loss and gain to 
that of a race. Karavr^sv is to come up to, the very act of 
attaining and gaining possession. — e^avdsrccgiv ^ruv mxpZv) i.e. 
avddTam {XpiiSTou) ix. rSiv nxpSiv, the resurrection (of Christ) 
from the dead; comp. Eom. i. 4, note [2 Tim. ii. 11] ; for the 
style of Paul ascribes amarasiv to Christ ; l^avdeTaen to Chris- 
tians.^ But the resurrection of Christ and our resurrection are 

1 Tviii U is read by ABD(A);^ Vulg., Iren. 309, Lucif. 166. Tii/ tx, is 
read by G. TSi/ by Memph. and Eec. Text. — Ed. 

The Germ. Vers., following the decision of the 2d Ed., adopts the reading 
T^i/ ix, iiix-pun, which was reckoned among those not to be approved in the 
larger Ed.— E. B. 

2 This fact ought to have led Beng. to take d.iia!!Ti.!i'.as above of the 
resurrection, not the mere appearing of Christ. The phrase, " power of 
His resurrection," expresses a parallel idea to Eph. i. 19, 20, " The ex- 
ceeding greatness of His power to usward who believe, according to the 
working of His mighty power, which He wrought in Christ when He raised 
Him from the dead." Comp. Col. ii. 12, iii. 1 ; Rom. vi. 6. The same 
power is needed to quicken the soul as was needed to raise Jesus from the 
dead. To have that power (the Holy Spirit) in us, is a pled'ge of our 

VOL. IV. *- 



146 PHILIPPIANS III. 12, 13. 

considered as one resurrection, by reason of the xoimvla, fellow- 
ship. After the mention of the resurrection, he brings in some 
things suited to his own present state, and interweaves the rest 
[of the discussion of the resurrection] at ver. 20,' 21. 

12. Oii;;^' or/, not that, not as though) In his highest fervour, 
the apostle does not let go his spiritual sobriety. — sXa/Sov, / had 
received [attained]) the prize. — renXelu/iai) riXnog and tstiKiko- 
fihoi differ. The former is applied to the man fully fit for nm- 
ning, ver. 15, 16 ; the latter to him who is nearest to the prize, 
at the very point of receiving [attaining'] it." — xal KaraXd^a) 
Kal, even, is intensive ; for ■/.arakafi.^am, to apprehend (compre- 
hendere), is more than Xafi^dvu, to take hold of (prehendere) : 
Xafi^dnif, to take hold of, is done at the moment when the last 
step has been made ; Karakaii^drnv, to apprehend, is done when the 
man is in fixll possession. There is an example of one " on the 
very point of receiving" [attaining] at 2 Tim. iv. 7, 8 [Ps. Ixxiii. 
2.3, 28]. — sp' Si, since [but Engl. Vers, that for which]) The 
perception of the power of Christ influences the Christian. — xai 
xariXriipSriv, I have been also apprehended) by a heavenly calling, 
ver. 14 ; Acts [ix. 6] xxvi. 14, 19 ; 2 Cor. v. 14. Christ, the 
author and finisher [coiisummator], when He consummated His 
own ' race' of faith, also consummates His people, Heb. xii. 2 ; 
where the very appellation, ap^iyov, prince (author), imphes His 
relation to His followers. Ka;, also, is again intensive, so that 
the force of the first aorist [" I am apprehended"] may be ob- 
served denoting the present state of the apostle. 

13. 'ASiXfol, brethren) He makes his confession in a familiar 
manner. — ^y^,!) Others might easily think this of Paul. — ou Xoyi- 
^o,a.a/, I count not) It is proper for the saints, and conducive to their 
activity, to consider themselves inferior to what they really are. 

hereafter attaining the i^ai/xaTxcri;, Bom. viii. 11. This word probably 
implies the rising of the saints first out of the rest of the dead, 1 Cor. xv. 
23 ; Rev. xx. 5. ''E^avaoTxaii is nowhere else found in N. T. — Ed. 

^ Ts^s/of means often not absolutely perfect, but one having attained the full 
limit of stature, strength, etc., which constitute the man's rtXoj, opposed to 
noi or ira/Sff, youths or children. See 1 Cor. ii. 6. So Paul here, ver. 15, 
claims to be ri'Kiio;, fully established in the things of God, no longer a 
babe in Christ. Yet in ver. 12 he denies that he is as yet mt'Kiiafi.ii'os (a 
race-course expression), i.e. crowned with the garland of victory, his course 
completed, and perfection absolutely reached. See Trench Svn — En. , 



I'HILIPPIANS 111, U-IC, 147 

14. "El/, one thing) viz. I do. — to. hmeu, the things that are be- 
hind) even the very part of the course that has been finished. — 
irnKTiivofiivos) that is literally, extending myself over. The eye 
goes before (outstrips) and draws on the hand, the hand goes 
before (outstrips) and draws on the foot. — Tiara eKowh, along, 
after [towards] the mark) straightforward. — diuixoi, I follow [I 
press]) It is used as a neuter verb, as in Luke xvii. 23. — 
8/>al3im, the prize) the crown of life. — avu, [^'£'^0 above) ver. 20. 

15. TiXiioi, perfect) ver. 12, note. — rouro) this one thing, ver. 
14. — iripui) otherwise than perfect (for the person is changed, 
let us be minded, ye are minded). He does not, however, say 
eVE^oi/ or aXXo [pf ove/ts ; which would mean difference or disagree- 
ment of mind] : nor does he mean aught of " minding earthly 
things," ver. 19. Comp. also Gal. v. 10. — xal roiJTo) even this, 
which we, that are perfect, mind, expressed in ver. 14. — o Qtig, 
God) even though I do not write it. — u/iTv, to you) striving at 
perfection. — a'jroxaXu-^ii, loill reveal) Eph. i. 17. 

16. TiXr,^, nevertheless) The expectation of a new revelation 
should not make you yield the position which you now firmly 
hold. — 6/s 8) in that, to which we have attained. — sipSoiga/iiv, we 
have attained) at a greater or less distance. They are ad- 
monished in order that the others should act with them that are 
perfect. — eroi-xitv, to walk) The infinitive, mildly for the impera- 
tive ; Rom. xii. 15. — xamviy Al. Boem. Clar. Colb. 7. Copt. 
both the Hilarys,' leave out this word; Facundus too, or, by com- 
paring Pelagius, even Sedulius. The clauses thus correspond, 
rip ahrS) groi^en, and rh auro (ppovini. Nor even do we follow the 
Latin Vulgate copies, which transpose the clauses, Covelianus 2 
following them in this, since Ip^atra^sv and eratypi more nearly 
cohere with one another, and sraiyfiM, which is metaphorical, is 
explained by the (ppwiiM which folloxys after. The word xavm 
seems evidently to have been brought hither firom Gal. vi. 16. — 
ro) There is here an Asyndeton. — rJ auri ppoviTv, to mind the same 
thing) He returns to this topic, ch. iv. 2. 

' AB Memph. Theb. read only t^ ctirS aruxiiv : Hilar. 1097, " in ipso 
ingrediamur." DGjr/ (' convenire,' for <nai%iii>) read to ahri ^poviiu, rif 
ain^ uToixiio- Vulg., with Rec. Text, retains x,xv6tii, but transposes the 
order. Rec. Text has tu avr^ aroixfi" xavovi to ttiiTO (Ppoyth. — Ed. 

2 Viz., Hilary the deacon, and Hilary of Poitiers. — Ed. 



148 PHILIPPIANS III. 17-19. 

17. l^iLihifj.Tira}, imitators [followers] together with) Paul him- 
self was an imitator [follower'] of Christ ; the Philippians, there- 
fore, were to be imitators [followers'] together with him. — 
exo-ffiTTi, regard [mark]) with unanimity. — ovrug, so) The inferior 
examples of friends of the Cross of Christ ought to be tried by 
the standard of those that are superior and nearer to perfection. 

18. ^Jlipi'jrarouaiv, walk) before your eyes. — mXXdxig, often) 
There ought to be a constant demonstration. — xXaluv, weeping) 
We may suppose that Paul added this word, after he had mois- 
tened the epistle with his tears ; in joy, there is still sorrow, 
Rom. ix. 2. — roug ix^poiig rou aTavpoiJ, the enemies of the Cross) 
Gal. vi. 12, 14. 

19. 'civ, whose) The nominative is implied ; comp. di, which 
presently after occurs and is dependent on iripiirccToiJeiv, walk. — 
H TiXog, the end) This statement is put before the others, that 
what follows may be read with the greater horror. It will be 
seen in the end. [The end, to which the plans of every man tend, 
shows truly what is his condition. — V. g.] — aTwXsia, destruction) 
The antithesis is suTr\pa, Saviour, ver. 20. — Siv 6 hhg r; xo/X/a, 
whose god is their belly) Rom. xvi. 18. The antithesis is Kupwv, 
Lord, ver. 20 ; and ri gu/La, body, ver. 21, as 1 Cor. vi. 13. 
Their belly is sleek, our body is wasted ; the fashion [s^ri/La out of 
cLerag')(r}/j,aT!(S£i] of both will be changed. — jj So^a, glory) The pre- 
vious, God, and glory, here are set down as parallel ; and there- 
fore So'ga, glory, in this passage denotes a god, or glorying con- 
cerning a god. Hos. iv. 7, LXX., rriv 86^av aurZv ilg aTii^lm 
Sriso/j,ai, " I will turn their glory to dishonour." — aisxviri, shame) 
It corresponds to the Hebrew word nt^a, for example, Hab. ii. 
10. Comp. respecting this prophet, the note at Col. ii. 23 ; like- 
wise nny below, fj xo/X/a, the belly. But at the same time the 
word alludes to an idol, to which nca, als^wn, sliame, corre- 
sponds. The LXX. have sometimes aig^uvri, shame, for nnv, 
nakedness ; therefore in this passage Paul seems to denote rrn 
xararo/iriv, the concision, to indicate, that the circumcision now 
was not glorious, but a subject for shame. So the belly and 
shame are closely alhed. They worship that of which they 
ought to be ashamed, and they will be miserably ashamed of it at 

' iroM^ol, many) To follow mnnv in the way of imitation is dangerous.— 



PHILIPPIANS III. 20, 21. -IV. 1. 149 

the proper time, although even now they want frankness.* — ol ra. 
Wiyiin. (ppovovvrig, who mind earthly things) The antithesis is at the 
beginning of the following verse. 

20. 'H/iSi', our) whom you have as a type or example [ver. 17]. 
— yap, for) This gives the reason why the PhiUppians ought to 
imitate them. — rJ ToX/rEu^a) the community, country, city, ov state : 
for h'jrap-)(ii, has its existence, follows. Therefore it is the ante- 
cedent to 15 ol, from which? — aurripa, the Saviour) This furnishes 
the ground on which we rest our expectation, 2 Tim. iv. 18. — 
Kvpiov, the Lord) now exalted, ch. ii. 11. This famishes the 
confirmation ®f this expectation. 

21. "O5 !XiTa(f^rj/ji.aT!ffii, who will transform) not only will give 
salvation, but also glory; 2 Tim. ii. 10. — Trjg Ta-irnvugiag, of 
humiliation) which is produced by the Cross, ver. 18, ch. iv. 12, 
ii. 17 ; 2 Cor. iv. 10. X3T is in the LXX., ramlmgig, Ps. xc. 3. — 
xarii, according to) construe with He will transform. The work 
of the Lord's omnipotence. — r^» mpynav rotj Smaadai, the working 
efficacy of His power [Engl. Vers, according to the working, 
whereby He is able]) The Infinitive instead of the noun. [His] 
power will be brought forth into action. — xat) even ; not merely 
to make our body conformed to His. — r& <sa.wa,, all things) even 
death. 



CHAPTER IV. 

' 1. "nari, therefore) Such expectations being set before us. — 
aya,'!r>iTo!, beloved) This word is twice used -wath great sweetness ; 
first as at the beginning of the period ; and then, for strengthen- 
ing the exhortation. — immirjrot, yearned after, longed for) so he 
speaks of them in their absence, ch. i. 8. — orlpavo's /lov, my crown) 
ii. 16. — ouru) so, stand ye, as ye now stand; comp. ovria, 1 Cor. 
ix. 24, note. — grrixirs, stand) i. 27. 

' Beng. seems to mean, Even now they deprive themselves of that 
Gospel freedom which they who place no trust in carnal ordinances enjoy. 
—Ed. 

' ToVou, implied in ol/oavois, might seem otherwise to be the word to which 
ou refers. — Ed. 



160 PHILIPPIANS IV. 2, 3. 

2. TiapoixaXSi, I [beseecK], exhort) He uses this word twice, as 
if exhorting each of them apart face to face, and doing it with 
the utmost impartiality [impUed by repeating the like word to 
each separately]. 

3. Na;', i/ea) an agreeable [conciliatory, affectionate] particle, 
Philem., ver. 20; Heb. n:. It is put, as it were, into the 
mouth of the man who is being besought, so that, upon merely 
pronouncing it, he may give his assent. — eii^vyi yvr}gii, true 
[genuine] yokefellow, or yokefellow without disguise) 6 xat h 
eitZ^vyoi, ■persons joined together, properly in marriage, and then in 
other things ; so, however, as that the word is apphed to two, and 
denotes some degree of parity ; yv^sios also is of the common 
gender. Some say, that Paul had at one time a wife, but we 
are convinced, on good grounds, that he is here addressing a man. 
He had many euvepyoig, fellow^workers ; not many ev^vyoug, yoke- 
fellows, first Barnabas, afterwards Silas ; and he seems to address 
the latter in this passage; for Silas had been his yokefellow 
among the Philippians themselves. Acts [xv. 40] xvi. 19. [Oy, 
as I am more inclined to think, Epaphroditus. — V. g.] He was 
also [like Paul] at all events a minister, whom Paul here en- 
treats. — euXy.afilSdvou auraTg, assist those) that thou mayest main- 
tain harmony among them, by removing impediments. — a'mvi;, 
who) It is proper to afford help to a person who once stood well, 
even when he is wavering. — gwriOXriedv /jloi, laboured (wrestled) 
together with me) They seem to have been involved in that 
danger, which is described at Acts xvi. 19. — fura, with) This 
word depends on euv^iXrisav, they have laboured together. — 
KX^fiitTog, Clement) They had imitated the great men, among 
whom Clement was of distinguished excellence. The women 
were thus highly favoured and honoured. — ra ovo'/iara, the names) 
though not here mentioned. The allusion is to the victorious 
competitors in the public games, whose names were openly read 
and became famous. — h ^ij3x^ Xjmg, in the book of life) viz. are, 
or, I pray may be. The optative must be often supplied, ver. 23. 
They seem to have been already by that time dead, lor we 
generally follow such with earnest wishes' of that sort. Who 
would not help the surviving companions of these departed ones, 

1 Wishe» that they may be found among the saved, not frayers, which 
are contrary to Scripture Ed. 



151 

iij"? * Being associated with those who have died with honour, is 
to younger survivors a great recommendation to him who thus, 
as it were, stands in the middle place between those who are 
dead and those who are ahve ; for example, it formed a recom- 
mendation of Timoth)' to the Philippians, because he had been 
the intimate friend of Paul. [Those have also excellent materials 
for concord, of whom some have good reason to think others (who 
have good reason to think of one another that they are) partakers 
of eternal life, 1 Pet. iii. 7. — V. g.] 

4. ^aipiTi h Kvplui- irdvnri, wdKiv ipu, ■^aipiri, rejoice in the 
Lord : again I say, always rejoice) The particle, again, requires 
an Epitasis,^ as in Gal. i. 9, where the Epitasis is in vapiXd^sn, 
comp. ver. 8 ; so the Galatians are more strongly bound, because 
[not only Paul preached, ver. 8, but] they also received or took 
up the Gospel which was preached. Add Gal. v. 3, where / 
testify makes an Epitasis to Xiyot, I say, ver. 2 ; and -xavTi, to every 
man, lias an Epitasis to unto you, ver. 2 ; and oipuXirrig, he is a 
debtor, to shall profit you nothing, ver. 2 : here the word, always, 
forms such an Epitasis with rejoice ye, repeated. At the begin- 
ning of the verse, it is said, rejoice ye in the Lord, as ch. iii. 1. 
Some join •Travrors with the preceding words. 

5. Ti emiix'tg, your kindly spirit [sdqmtas^J) Joy in the Lord 
produces true kindliness in regard to our neighbour, and proper 
unconcern [freedom from over-carefulness] about one's own 
affairs, ver. 6 ; likewise true candour towards men and God Him- 
self: and this candour is expressed by the words, ymeifjToi, let it 
he known, i.e. in acts, and, yvupi^asSoi, let (your requests) he made 
known, viz. by prayer, ver. 6. Moroseness is the companion of 
sadness and care.^yvwff^^rci), let he knoien) from the thing itself. 
There are some who cherish gentleness (sequitas, a yielding and 

' Buxtorf, de Abbrev. Hebr. p. 84, writes, ''•'hi^ra-^J^ 'la'i^si memoria ejus 
sit in benedictione (may his memory be blessed). De pluribus ^j''^?''. memoria 
ipsorum (their memory): nomini piorum virorum defunctorum subjici solet : 
aut in genera sapientum vel Rabbinorum commemorationi." The ^ and ^ 
are the initials used as the abbreviation for the whole words. — Ed. 

' See Append. 

^ Wahl, Clavis, N. 1, renders it 'humanitas,' kindness and genthness 
towards others. He adds, others interpret it ' modestia,' moderation. 
Beng. has ' sequitas,' which includes both fairness and kindliness towards 
others, and eqtianimiiy in one's own mind. Th. ei'xa, I yield. — Ed. 



152 PHILIPPIANS IV. 6, 7- 

kindly spirit) in their mind, and wish no ill to the unkindly, but 
yet they conceal their benignity ; these do not act rightly. — 
wagiv avSpiimig, to all men) good and bad, or the unkindly, ch. 
ii. 15, even that the wicked may be gained. No one is so harsh 
in spirit as not to show himself kindly to some one, from sympa- 
thy, fear, hope of gain, emulation, etc. The believer does this 
to all. \But if, among all men, you know even one who has expe- 
rienced the contrary conduct at your hand, see that even yet you 
show to him kindliness. — V. g.J — 6 Kuplog, the Lord) Christ the 
Judge, favourable to you, but executing vengeance upon the 
wicked. This consideration produces kindlinr g ; James v. 9. 

6. Mnih ii^ipi/LvaTz, be careful for nothing) When others do not 
treat you with kindliness, when different things are pressing upon 
you, be not over-careful, rather pray. Care and prayer, [and 
likewise care and joy. — V. g.] are more opposed to one another 
than fire and water. — h •ttcw/) in every thing. — [jlito. lu^apisriag, 
with thanksgiving) This is the best characteristic of a soul freed 
from cares, and of prayer joined with resignation of the human 
will. Accordingly peace follows, ver. 7 ; and thanksgiving and 
peace are united together also in Col. iii. 15. All things are 
thereby safe and tranquil. — to, ahfiiLara, requests) A thing sought, 
the subject hriSicai, of supplication. — yvufnt^ieSu, be made known) 
Those who veil, stifle, and restrain their desires, with preposter- 
ous shame and distrusting modesty, as if they were too small 
or too great, are tortured with cares. Those who lay them 
before God with a generous and filial confidence, are freed from 
difficulties. The Psalms abound in confessions of that sort. — 
irphg rhv &i6v, to God) Even though often men should be ignorant 
of them, and you should modestly conceal them from your fellow- 
men. Paul had not even asked aught from the Philippians. 
[But the exercise of unaffected candour towards men, ver. 5, and 
here towards God, is perfectly consistent. — V. g.J 

,7. 'H I'lpm, the pea^e) Peace, free from all anxiety [the com 
panionof joy; comp. ver. 9. — V. g.J — ;j i'jripi^ousa itavra, voZv) 
that exceedeth all understanding, and therefore everj' request; 
Eph. iii. 20. — (ppoup^sii) will keep ; it will defend you against all 
inroads (assaults) and anxieties, and will correct whatever is 
wanting to the suitableness (dexteritati, to the spiritual skilful- 
ness, happiness of expression) of your desires, Kom. viii! 26, 27. 



PHILIFPIANS IV. 8, 9. 153 

— xaphlai — vo^f/,iii,Ta, hearts — thoughts) The heart is the seat of the 
thoughts. 

8. Ti) The summing up. In ch. iii. 1, rh Xo/tJv concludes 
the particular admonition to joy ; and here t'o Xoivhv concludes 
the general exhortation to every duty. — Saa., whatsoever things) 
in general. "A, Those things which, ver. 9, specially in regard to 
Paul. — a\ri67j — I'uroimc, true — praise) Eight nouns, in two rows 
of four members each, of which the one has regard to duty, the 
other to the commendation of it. If we compare both rows of 
nouns with one another, the first noun corresponds to the first, 
the second to the second, the third to the third, the fourth to 
the fourth. It is a manifold and elegant Chiasmus, compre- 
hending the duties of children, parents, husbands, and wives, and 
the other (relative) duties. — aXrjSri, true) in words. — gs/ji.va, honest) 
in action. — 81xaia, just) towards others. — aym, [pure] chaste) in 
respect to yourselves. — -itpos^iXn, loveable, lovely) 'xp'oaipiXri svvayuyjj 
ffsaurov 'jroki, make thyself a person to be loved by the synagogue, 
Sir. iv. 7. — 6 go<phg h Xoyiji 'savrov rrpoaaiXtj voirjsii, the wise man 
will make himself a person to be loved in lohat he says, Sir. xx. 
12 (13). — oca, E-jpjj^a, whatsoever things are of good report) 
rpoe<piXfi, lovely or loveable, face to face : e<j(prifia, of good report, 
is used with respect to the absent: comp. i. 27. — apirri, virtue) 
Paul uses this word only in this passage. It refers to dlxaia, 
ivhatsoever things are just. For every virtue is included in 
righteousness, iv ds Bixawamri guXX^^driv ma apirrj lari. — i'?ra.iiioe,praise) 
even in those things which belong less to your neighbour than to 
yourselves. — raOra XoyiZisk, have respect or regard to these things) 
This refers to the things that are true, and which have been prac- 
tised or are now practised even by others, that we may approve, 
remember, help forward, promote (advance), imitate such things. 
We should not only do them when they fall in our way, but 
also take care, beforehand, that they be done. TaZra irpaagin, 
do these things, follows with Asyndeton, which [the absence of a 
connecting particle between raZra XoyH^ish and raZra -itpaesiri^ 
denotes that the one kind of good things [viz. those in ver. 8] 
does not differ from the other [those in ver. 9]. 

9. "A xa;') Those things which also [But Engl. Vers. " which 
ye have both learned and," etc.] Ka/, also, connects this verse 
with the following words, not with tlie preceding words. lie 



154 PHILIPPIANS IV. 10, 11. 

makes a transition from what is general (oaa, whatsoever) to 
what regards Paul. There would have been place for the xai, 
and, before a, which [i.e. but for the Asyndeton], the word xai, 
also, still remaining [i.e. in order to connect this ver. with what 
follows bearing on Paul in particular]. — rixoieare, ye have heard) 
although you have not yet sufficiently (^apiXd^eri) received them. 
— I'l&iTi, ye have seen) although ye have not as yet sufficiently 
learned them Q/jidkre). — '6 &ihg rrii ilpfivrii, the God of peace) not 
only the peace of God, ver. 7, but God Himself. 

10. Me/aXw;, greatly) This would scarcely have pleased a 
Stoic. Paul had large affections, but in the Lord. — ribri wori, 
now at length) He shows that the gift of the Philippians had 
been expected by him ; with what feeling of mind, see ver. 1 1, 
17, now, not too late — at length, not too soon. The time was the 
suitable time. Heb. DJjan nsT. — aviSdXin, ye have flourished 
again or revived) as trees : comp. the same metaphor, ch. i. 11, 
with fruit : am6dXkui is here a neuter verb, on which the infini- 
tive (ppoviTv, to think [i/our care\ depends, by supplying xara, in 
respect to ; you have flourished again, in the very fact of the exer- 
tion which you have made. The deputation from the Philip- 
pians seems to have been appointed in Spring, from which, 
accordingly, the metaphor is taken. The phrase, you wanted 
opportunity [referring to the past time] agrees with Winter.-:— 
rh uwip l/ioD) The accusative rJ is governed by (ppoveTv ; ri {jnp l/toD 
is said, as rd ita.p vfiuv, ver. 18. — s'p' w, wherein) in proportion, or 
according to that which, according to the fact that : iirikpa.vua,.^ — 
r,KaiptT(!h)Katpoi,hY Synecdoche, denotes all abihty and opportunity. 

11. Ka^' vffTeprign) in respect of want. — lyu, J) in so much 
adversity, —'i/jiahv) I have learned, from on high, Heb. v. 8. 
There is a direct Chiasmus in the four words, I have learned, I 
know, I am instructed, I am able. The phrase / am instructed is 
added (as an expansion of the idea) to / have learned; I am 
able, to I know. Often words referring to the understanding 
infer also power in the will. — h oTg iiu,!) in what circumstances I 
am, in my present state, Heb. xiii. 5. — axirdp-Ani) content. 

^ ^ »«; i dto;, and tfie God) This refers also to (think on) have respect or 
regard to (Xoy/^wtfs). 

2 See App. An after mitigation or qualification of the previous words by 
way of conciliating the readers. — Ed. 



VHILIPPIANS IT. 12-16. 155 

12. Tavtinusiai, to be abased) in dress and food. — irifieetlm, to 
abound) even in relieving others. The order of the >vords is 
presently inverted, so that the transition from few to many, and 
from many to few, may be marked. — h iravr!, in everything 
[Engl. Ver. everywhere^ A Symperasma,^ as all things, ver. 13. — 
h ■TTaai, in the case of all) in respect of all men [Engl. Ver. In all 
things']. — //,i/j,{iri/ia,i) 1 am trained (initiated) in a secret discipline 
unknown to the world. — xa,l yxipTdZiedai, both to be full) construed 
with / am initiated. — •^^ppToZfi^M xa! tuv^v, to be full and to be 
hungry) for one day. —tnpieeiUiy xa! uerspiTsSai, to abound and to 
suffer need) for a longer time. The repeated mention of the 
abounding is consonant with the condition of Paul, who then 
abounded in consequence of the liberality of the Philippians. 
Abasement had preceded, and need would perhaps follow. He 
who can relieve others has ample means and high position (am- 
plitudinem), to which abasement is opposed. 

14. ivyxoniavfisavrig) since you have communicated (imparted) 
to me in my affliction of your resources. It is indicated by the 
compound verb,- that different persons also had communicated 
(xoimvriiravrag) in a different way.^ 

15. O'j&aTi, ye know) He shows that he was mindftil even of 
former kindnesses : you know signifies remembrance in respect of 
the Philippians ; knowledge, in respect of other churches. — 
O/X/TTT^iff/o/, Philippians) The proper name indicates an anti- 
thesis to the churches of other towns. — h apyrr,, in the beginning) 
of the Gospel preaching in your case. He had gone forth from 
them some time ago. — ors, when) Join this with the following 
words, no, etc. — obde/ila, no) They might have said, We will do 
it, if others have done it : now their praise is greater on that 
account ; that of the others, less. — sxxXris!a, church) Therefore 
the church of Philippi sent to Paul in common. — e/'s Xoyov, as 
far as concerns) This is a limitation. — doeiug, of giving, of what 
has been given) on your part. — Xri-^siag, of receiving, of what has 
been received) on mine. — /iovoi, alone) in a manner worthy of 
praise. He hereby shows his need. 

16. Kal ci'ira^xal dig) Aig, an ordinal member in this passage; 

' See App. It is the comprehending in a brief summary what has been 
previously stated. 
* ail/ implying they joined together in doing so. — Ed. 



156 PHIUPPIANS IV. 17-21. 

i.e. not once and twice, which would be equivalent to thrice, but 
once and again, so that under dtg, twice, a*af, once, is compre- 
hended. So 1 Thess. ii. 18. 

17. Ovx ori, not that) He explains why he uses many words. 
— eitiZ,r\Tu, I seek) having welcomed your kindness. — e/'s y.oyov 
iifiSiv) [to your account^ in respect to you. 

18. 'Airi^u) The apostle's receipt.^ — mpigeiuu, I abound) Be- 
hold the contented and grateful mind ! — ra -jrap v/iuv, the things 
{which came) from you) They had sent money or clothes and 
what might be serviceable. — os/iriv suaiSlac, the odour of a sweet 
smell) He describes their conduct by a beautiful figure. — ^veiav, 
a sacrifice) Heb. xiii. 16. 

19. 'O di @i6g //,0V, but my God) who will recompense what is 
given to His servant. In ver. 19 this particular statement 
regarding the liberality of the Philippians is concluded by the 
word Si, but ; but in ver. 20 the conclusion of the whole of this 
joyous passage is made by be, but [_' now.^'\ — irXyipueu) may God 
supply, nay, He will fully supply. [We may perceive that this act 
of kindness on the part of the Philippians was indeed excellently 
laid out, if even it only produced this prayer of the apostle. — 
V. g.J — j^pE'aii, need) As you have supplied and relieved my 
need, what is empty of yours will not remain empty [it shall be 
filled, -jrXripuau @i6g]. — h doS,ri, in glory) This should be referred 
to the whole sentence. There are riches in glory, glorious 
riches, immediately at hand ; then besides, God will fully sup- 
ply in glory, i.e. gloriously. 

20. 'h do^a, glory) in return for His gift, 2 Cor. ix. 15. The 
doxology flows from the joy that pervades the whole epistle. 

21. Havra ky'm, every saint) individually. So presently in 
ver. 22, All the saints, xal o'l, and the, viz. saints, so called in a 
wide sense. Therefore, brethren, ver. 21, may rather be under- 
stood of the Jews, (comp. Acts xxviii. 21), and these too be- 
lievers. 

' • Apocha ' may either be his acknowledgment of having received in full 
the debt of kindness due to him from them, or else Beng. uses axov;^ as 
Epictetus for forbearance, moderation in desires. In the ' apocha' there 
is a direct allusion to the dvexu of the text.— Ed. 



EPISTLE TO THE COLOSSIANS. 



CHAPTEK I. 

2. 'Ell KoXoeeaii, at Colosse) a city of Phrygia. — ayloig, to the 
saints) This has the force of a substantive. It implies union 
with God : to the faithful brethren, impHes union with Christian 
men. The word brethren suggests imion. These were be- 
lievers. 

3. 'Eii^apieToiJ/j.ev^axoiiaai/Ti!;, zee give thanks — since we heard) 
Comp. Eph. i. 15, 16. For the Epistle to the Colossians bears 
considerable resemblance to the two epistles to which it is sub- 
joined : to the Epistle to the Ephesians, in its general subject 
(thesis) and mode of exhortation (paraclesis) ; to the Epistle to 
the Philippians, in its opposition to the false teachers, and in 
their refutation. More of these coincidences will be noticed in 
their proper places. The Epistles to the Ephesians and Colos- 
sians were sent a^the same time by Tychicus, iv. 7 ; Eph. vi. 
21. — mvTOTi, always) Construed with praying : Kom. i. 10 ; 
Phil. i. 4. 

4. xidvrag, all) present and absent. 

5. A;a, for) From [the greatness of the object of] hope, it is 
evident how great a cause o{ thanksgiving there' is for the gift of 
faith and love; for {did) is construed with we give thanks, ver. 3. 
[Faith, hope, love, ver. 4, -5, the sum of Christianity. Comp. 
ver. 9, 10, 11. — V. g.J — drnxiifihriv, laid up) so as to be without 
danger [of its being lostj. — nv, which) hope, comp. ver. 23. — 



158 COLOSSIANS I. 6-9. 

tpariyuiugaTi) ye have heard of, before I wrote.— -Ii/ rffl Xo'yw rra 
aXriSelas, in the word of the truth) Eph. i. 13. The truth of 
' knowledge,' ver. 6 [ye — knew — the grace of God], corresponds 
to the truth of preaching in this verse. Neither admits of arti- 
fice (being tricked out for show;. 

6. E/'s) i!g and sv here are parallel. — xa! 'ien, and is) After the 
participle, the form of expression here takes again the indicative 
mood; see ver. 26, ch. ii. 13, 14; [of the Gospel] present, i.e. 
which is come to you, — and (repeat which from the preceding 
clause) is producing fruit. — Kap'!ro<f)Of>o'jfisiiov,^ producing fruit) 
viz. [supply] in all the world. — xaiiig, even as) when travelling 
abroad they recognise with great joy the same fruits of the 
Gospel in every clime ; and its fruits prove that it is the word 
of truth. Comp. presently after, even as, ver. 7. For there is 
an interchange,^ and at length a movement or tendency [of 
Gospel fructification] towards the Colossians for the propagation 
of the word. [An inclination arises on the part of the Colossians 
in their tiu-n to propagate the truth], — ap ?s, from what) con- 
strued with in you. — h aXrihlff, in truth) i.e. in the truth of the 
Gospel testimony, and of faith flowing fi:om the testimony and 
directed toward the testimony. 

7. Ka^cig, even as) Paul thus confirms and approves the doc- 
trine of Epaphras, which perhaps some had despised. It was 
Paul's duty to write rather than Epaphras. — 7i/j,uv, our) Paul and 
Timothy. — uTip i/j,Zt) for you, on your account. — ayd'jrriv h 
Ylveu/Lari, love in the Spirit) Love, the firuit of the Spirit, 
spiritual love ; comp. ver. 9, at the end. 

9. 'HKoCga/iev, we have heard) ver. 4. — trposev^o/nm, praying) 

1 Kctp'xtitpopiivfiimu x,a.\ xu^auofieiiov, the fuller reading, is referred to those 
not quite certain on the margin of the older Ed., but is considered better 
established by the margin of the 2d Ed. and the Germ. Vers. — E. B. 

ABCD(A) corrected, Qfff Vulg. read x«i ai^xi/o/isiioy. Kee. Text omits 
the words without any sanction of the oldest authorities. — Ed. 

'^ " Permutatur enim et tandem ad Colossenses inclinatur, ad propaga- 
tionem sermonis." The Gospel has come to you, even as (»aSa;) it has 
come to all the world, and brings forth fruit in all the world, even as (xaids) 
it does also in you. Beng. seems to mean, There is that kind of interchange 
whereby the Gospel, being seen by the Colossians when travelling to bear 
fruit in all the world, reacts on the Colossians themselves by a reflex effect, 
tending thus to the propagation of the word Ed. 



COLOSSIANS 1. 10-12. I59 

He made mention of prayers for them generally, ver. 3 : he now 
states what lie prays for. — tJ^jj^so^^j-s, ye may be filled) This verb, 
with its derivatives (conjugates), often occurs in this epistle, as 
far as ch. iv. 12, 17. — rriv smymsiv rou hXfifiaTo; airou, with the 
knowledge of His will) There is a gradation in the following 
verse, in the knowledge of GoD. — t-ou kX^fiaTog, will) Eph. v. 17, 
i. 9. — ffop/a, in wisdom) a word often used in this epistle ; that 
they may be led the more from false wisdom and philosophy, 
Eph. i. 8. [There seems to liave been a want of knowledge 
among the Colossians, wlio were otherwise of an excellent spirit ; 
wherefore the apostle urges that point with so great earnestness 
throughout the whole epistle, ver. 11, 28, ii. 2, 3, iii. 10, 16, iv. 
5, 6. — V. g.J Knowledge is less recommended to the Corin- 
thians, who were more apt to be puffed up. Wisdom denotes 
taste' i'^ comp. Matt, xxiii.- 34, note. — amien, understanding) 
that you may discern what is consistent with, or opposed to 
the truth, and may not pass by what requires consideration. 
Wisdorn (etxpia) is something more general ; eivigig is a kind of 
sagacity. So that on every occasion, there may suggest itself 
something which is suited to the place and time, auisais is in 
the understanding ; wisdom is in the whole compass (complexu) 
of the faculties of the soul. — wev/ji.arix.r], spiritual) not natural. 

10. Uipi-ffa.T/iga.i) that ye may walk. Such walking is derived 
from the knowledge of the will of God. — a^'ioig ro\J Kupiov) as it 
is worthy of Christ the Lord, Eph. iv. 1. — apesxiiav, the desire of 
pleasing) on .your part ; so far as (even to that degree that) in 
reahty you may please the Lord, jn, lxx., apiexiiai, Prov. 
xxxi. 30. — x.ap'!ro(popoiJvTe;, bearing fruit) The participles, bearing 
fruit, increasing, strengthened, depend on the verb 'xXripcoSjjn, 
ver. 9, that ye may be filled. 

11. Ativdfii,!!, with might) Eph. i. 19, iii. 16, vi. 10. — po^r}?, the 
power of His glory [Engl. Vers. His glorious power]) Eom. vi. 
4. — ij.a,x.poS\iiJi'ia\i, long-suffering) Eph. iv. 2. — /Jjira -/apni, with joy) 
ver. 24. 

12. ^ly^apigTowTii, giving thanks) i.e. and we give thanks. It 
depends on ver. 9 [we do not cease, etc. — giving thanks] : Us 
presently follows, and you, ver. 21. \He gives thanks, namely, in 

' A relish for spiritual things. Sapientia is from sapere, to have taste. — Ed. 



160 COLOSSIANS I. 13-15. 

behalf of the Israelites, ver. 12—20, on account of the Gentiles, 
ver. 21, etc. Comp. Eph. ii. 3, 11.' — V. g.J — rt» Ixavweavn, who 
hath made us meet) For we had been formerly not meet. The 
same word is found at 2 Cor. iii. 6. — ii(, for) i.e. that we 
might receive a part of the inheritance of the saints ; comp. the 
following verse, and Eph. i, 11, or rather Acts xx. 32, xxvi. 18. 
— /lepida tou xX^po\j) a part given by allotment, not for a price. — 
h, in) construed with a part. Light is the kingdom of God, 
and behevers enjoy a blessed share in this kingdom: h, in, 
is, so to speak, a preposition of place. The opposite. Matt. iv. 
16, should be compared, where in occurs twice.— rc3 (part, in 
light) an antithesis to of darkness, ver. 13. Comp. Eph. v. 8. 
It is the light of knowledge [recognition and perception] and joy. 

13. "O5, who) the Father. — l^ougiag, from the power) The anti- 
thesis is kingdom : power detains captives ; a kingdom fosters 
wiUing citizens ; comp. Eph. ii. 2, v. 5, vi. 12. — ex6Tou;, of dark- 
ness) the darkness of blindness, of hatred, of misery. — roS T/oC r^g 
dydirrie auTou, the Son of His love) [His dear Son, Engl. Vers.] 
John xvii. 26; Eph. i. 6. This is treated in the 15th and fol- 
lowing verses. 

14. 'Eh <L, in Whom) the Son, Eph. i. 7. — rfiv airokliTpueiv, the 
redemption) This is treated of, ver. 18 (from the middle) and 
in the following verse. 

15. "Os iSTiv, who is) He describes the glory and excellence of 
Christ as even above the highest angels, and hereby scatters 
those seeds by which he will prove, next in order, the folly of 
the worshippers of angels. [He teaches believers to make applica- 
tion to Christ Himself, as their Saviour, and at the same time the 
head of all. — V. g.] Those, in short, obtain this full knowledge 
concerning Christ, who have experienced the mystery of re- 
demption, — iixuv TOU 0£oD, the image of God) 2 Cor. iv. 4, note. 
— rou aoparou, of the invisible) A most glorious epithet of God, 1 
Tim. i. 17. The only begotten Son alone represents the invi- 
sible God, and is Himself His image, invisible, according to the 
Divine nature ; visible, according to the human nature [John 
xiv. 9], visible even before the incarnation, inasmuch as the iiv- 
visible things of God [Rom. i. 20] began to be seen from the cre- 
ation, which was accomplished through Him [by Him as the 
instrument]. To this refer ver. 16, things visible and invisible." 



COLOSSIANS 1. 16, 17. Ifil 

— TpuToroxog itaaris xrlsiuf, the Jirst-hegotten of every creature) He 
was begotten ; and that, too, before the creation of all things. 
The <!:ph, which is contained in wfwroVoxos, governs the genitive 
xTietui. Time is an accident of the creature. Therefore the 
origin of the Son of Grod precedes all time. 

16. "Or/, because) The second part of the 15th verse is here- 
by explained. — h, in) h S> denotes something prior to bia, and I'lg, 
which presently occur. There is here noticed the beginning, 
the progress, the end. The same is summarily repeated in 
the following verse. — aurffl, hy Him) He Himself, often used 
here, signifies His great majesty, and excludes every creature. 
— exrigSriy were created) It is evident from the enumeration 
which immediately follows, that the discussion here relates to 
that creation which is described, Gen. i. ; comp. ver. 23. — r<i 
ill ToTg obpauTi, those things that are in the heavens) and the 
heavens themselves. But those things which are in the heavens 
are rather named, because the inhabitants are more noble than 
their dwellings. — to, opara, the visible things) There follows by 
gradation, and invisible, of which the species are subjoined. 
[»S«nce visible things, sxMih as the sun, moon, stars, are named 
first, invisible things subsequently, in succession, it may not he 
unworthy of consideration, whether the visible things may not 
have been created during the period of the six days, and the in- 
visible things on the seventh day ? Gen. ii. 1, 2 ; Exod. xxxi. 17.' 
— V. g-] — £'Vs Spovoi iiTs Kvpiornni, whether thrones or dominions) 
The former greater than the latter. The abstract for the con- 
crete. — e/Vs &p-xa,i iiTi s^ousiai, whether principalities or powers) 
The former stronger than the latter. Both of these two express 
an exercise of an ofSce in respect of the creatures ; but thrones 
and dominions seem rather to have their appellation in their 
exalted relation to God, in so far as they are o;i(;)j/iara, the 
chariots, on which He displays His majesty, Eph. i. 21. 

"17. "EsTi, He is) He does not say. He was made; nor. He 

' The statement, that God rested on the seventh day from all His work, 
seems to oppose this notion ; and still more, Job xxxviii. 7, and other passages, 
which recognise angels as existing at th« time of the earth's creation. Per- 
haps Beng. means invisible things, strictly, not invisible beings.— 'Ed. 

^ E/f auTo^, to Him) All things are referred to Him Himself Not any 
thing was made without Him, John i. 3. — E. B. 

VOL. IV. I- 



162 

was, of which the latter might, however, have been used in a 
dignified sense, comp. John i. 1 ; but He is, in the present ; 
comp. John viii. 58. — -jrph 'ffdvrm, before all things) even before 
time, i.e. from eternity. — xa! to, -jravra h auriji euviarrix,i) and all 
things in Him came together into one system [Engl. Vers. By 
Him all things consist, i.e. are maintained.] The universe found 
its completion in Him. Lxx. ra gvgTr]/ji,ara tuv vSdruv, Gen. i. 
10. He is the first and the last, Rev. xxii. 13. [Is. xli. 4, in 
regard to the origin : I the Lord am first, and I am with the 
last. — y. g.j 

18. Ka!, and) He now comes down from the whole to the 
principal part, the Church, comp. Eph. i. 22, note. — os 'kn, 
who is) The Anaphora [repetition of the same words in begin- 
nings], comp. ver. 15, shows that there is here the beginning of 
a new paragraph, and its own on, because, is added to each 
member. — apx^j beginning) This word corresponds to the He- 
brew word K'Sl, especially concerning Christ, Hos. ii. 2, and 
JT'B'Nn, concerning a first-begotten in particular, Deut. xxi. 17, 
but chiefly of Christ, Prov. viii. 22. a.'jrapy^n, first fruits, is the 
term used, 1 Cor. xv. 23, the word being rather restricted to 
the resurrection of the dead : a^%)5, beginning, more expressly 
denotes distinguished excellence; comp. ii. 10; Ps. Ixxxix. 27. 
apX'h in the singular is antithetic to ap%a', principalities, in the 
plural, ver. 16. — irpairinyiog sx, tSiv vsxpojv, the first-begotten from 
the dead) Christ, even before His resurrection from the dead, 
nay, before the creation of the world, was the first-begotten, 
ver. 15; but He is said to he first-begotten from the dead, be- 
cause, for this reason, inasmuch as He was the Son of God, He 
could not but rise again, and because, in consequence of His 
resurrection. He is acknowledged [recognised] to be the Son of 
God ; comp. Acts xiii. 33, note ; and especially since there flows 
from His resurrection the life of many brethren. — ■yrS.giv, in all 
things) In the neuter gender, ver. 1 7. — aurJj, He) by Himself, 
without deputies or substitute. — -^piarevav, holding the first place) 
for example, in His resurrection, ascension, etc., John iii. 13. 
Victorinus translates it, ■primarius, " the pre-eminent One." 

19.^ Eu5oz?)<Ts, He was well-pleased) viz. God [Engl. Vers, the 

• "Ell avT^, in Him) namely, the Son. The words regarding either the 



COLOSSI ANS I. 20, 23. 103 

Father]. This must be supplied, in accordance with the mind 
of Paul, who, while he mentions the benefit conferred by Christ, 
never fails to remember the Father. As to the Father's being 
well-pleased in the Son, comp. Matt, iii, 17 : For sUohSi with 
the accusative and infinitive following, see 2 Mace. xiv. 35. 
Moreover, on eMo';c?)ire, He has been well^leased, depend to re- 
concile, and having made peace. — mv rb wXripufLa, all the fulness) 
ch. ii. 9, 10, 2, iv. 12, 17, i. 9, 25 ; Eph. i. 23, note. Who 
can fathom the depth of this subject ? — xaToixtjga./, to dwell) con- 
stantly, as in a temple, in which it [the fulness] is ready at 
hand for us. This indwelling is the foundation of the recon- 
cihation. 

20. ' AmxaraWd^ai, to reconcile) Eph. ii. 16. — t& -rravra, all 
things) Eph. i. 10. — s/g airfu, unto Himself) i.e. unto God, ver. 
22 ; 2 Cor. v. 19. — slprivo'Troirisag, liaving made peace) Eph. ii. 14, 
17. The nominative depends on He has been well-pleased. — 
iia rou a'lfiariK roD graufou aunu) hy the blood shed on the cross, 
and therefore by His death on the cross ; or there is an apposi- 
tion with a Metonymy [see Append.] : by the blood, that is. His 
cross. The effect of the crucifixion (although not of the cru- 
cifixion alone) is the shedding of blood. — di' avrov, by Him) This 
repetition both adds to the emphasis, and shows that the all things 
are straightway explained by it, whether the things which, etc. 
This phrase, all things, includes also the dead. — ivt rrn yrig, on 
the earth) It was on the earth that there had arisen the begin- 
'ning of the enmities ; therefore the earth is put first. — to. Iv roTi 
ci\ipa,n7i, the things which are in the heavens) Luke xix. 38. It is 
certain that the angels, the Mends of God, were the enemies of 
men, when they were in a state of hostility against God. 

21. Kal ii/iag, and you) Eph. ii. 1, 12. — a-xnXKorpioi/x.hoix; ■ xa) 
ex^poijs, alienated and enemies) Actual alienation makes habitual 
enemies. — rjj diamlci.) in the original and inmost force [bias, 
Vulg. ' sensu,' in feeling'] of the mind, which draws after it the 
other faculties. — nvi) now, when you have received that faith, 
by which you have been brought to the reconciliation made on 
the cross ; i.e. you were formerly alienated, but now He has 

Father or the Son must be carefully distinguished both in this and iii the 
following chapter. — V, g. 



IC-t COLOSSIANS I. 22-24. 

reconciled you; although you were enemies, nevertheless He 
has reconciled you. The Apodosis is to be referred to the 
words immediately preceding, although they do not render 
the sentence complete. — aitoKarfiXka^iv, reconciled) i.e. God 
hath. 

22. 'Ev rui eufian rri; aapyihg avrov, hy the body of His flesh) 
By this appellation, taken as a whole, He is distinguished from 
the Church, which is called the body of Christ: and at the 
same time the body denotes the true and entire humanity of 
Christ, Kom. vii. 4. Flesh impHes the capacity of suffering, 
and the suffering itself; Eph. ii. 15. — ■jrapaarneai, to present) 
Eph. V. 27. — ayioug, holy) towards God. — a/itifiovg, spotless) in 
respect of yourselves. — aviyxXriroug, unreproveable) in respect of 
your neighbour. 

23. E/' ys, if indeed) This word depends on the finite verb, 
He hath reconciled, ver. 21, rather than on the infinitive ira/^aff- 
rrifai [ver. 22] ; and this ■Trapa.ar^aai, being the ultimate [final] 
object, is itself the most dehghtful fruit of reconciliation ; whence 
it is not the truth of the reconciliation which has been accom- 
plished, that is suspended [is made to depend] on the persever- 
ance of the Colossians, but the most delightful fruit for the 
time to come, which is not to be obtained, unless the Colossians 
shall have persevered ; comp. £/' yt, Eph. iv. 21 ; lavirtp, Heb. 
iii. 6. — rri vinTil) in faith, viz. in confidence ; to which hope 
is usually joined. — Tik/nXicii/jbevoi) secured to the foundation 
[^grounded] : IdpaToi, stable [settled'], firm within. The former is 
metaphorical, the latter less figurative ; the one implies greater 
respect to the foundation, by which believers are supported ; 
but i&paToi, stable (settled), suggests the idea of internal strength, 
which believers themselves possess ; just as a building ought 
to lean (rest) uprightly and solidly on the foundation Gist of 
all, but afterwards to cohere securely, and firmly to stand to- 
gether, even by its own mass [compact solidity of structure]. — 
xal ibpaToi Kat, and stable and) 1 Cor. xv. 58, note ; Eph. iii. 18. — 
roD ivayyiXiou, of the Gospel) by which reconciliation is declared. 
— ■Ttderi, to every) ver. 20 ; Mark xvi. 15, note. — didxovog, minister) 
ver. 25 ; Eph. iii. 7. 

24. Nvv, now) This is in antithesis to from (since) the day that, 
ver. 9. — xa,!, and) This is to be explained thus : in my sufferings, 



COLOSSI ANS 1. 26-27. 165 

in which I JiU up in turn. And is used as lut,^ Eph. v. 27. 
— avTo.va.'jrXripa, I Jill up in turn) The measure of sufferings was 
fixed, which the whole Church must endure. The more of them 
therefore that Paul endured (drained out), the less is left for 
himself and others ; the communion of saints produces this effect. 
[ While the measure of sufferings destined for Paul was filling 
up, the Gentiles attained to the full communion (participation) 
of the Gospel. — V. g.J Hence the Papists infer the doctrine of 
merit in behalf of others, as very many errors in their system 
have sprung from a subtle (nice and profound) truth, received 
without discrimination. — uvep, for) Eph. iii. 1, note. 

25. Ttiv oiKovo/ilav rod ©soD, the dispensation of God) Thence 
Paul (was) a steward [1 Cor. iv. 1, one having dispensation'] of 
the grace of God, Eph. iii. 2. — us v/iag, to you) Gentiles, ver. 
27. — •rXrjpSigai) to fulfil, to bring it fully to all. Paul every- 
where aims towards the farthest point ; comp. Rom. xv. 19, 
•TriirXripuxsvai [round about unto Illyricum I have fully preached]. 
The fulness of Christ and of the times required that. 

26. Th fivarripiov, the mystery) A Hendiadys : tov \6yov, ri /iug- 
rfjpiov, i.e. the word concerning the mystery. The mystery is de- 
clared in the following verse, Eph. i. 9, iii. 9. Glory is the 
object of the mystery. — a.'Troxixpvfi/ievov, concealed) So are con- 
cealed (a.'jroxpupoi), ch. ii. 3. — A'H'h tSiv aiuvoiv, from the ages) 
during which the silence had been greater. — d^o tZv yiviuv, from 
the generations) during which the revelation of other things was 
gradually made. The ' Ages' are to be referred to angels, the 
' generations' to men. — epavipdSri, has been manifested) the verb 
again after the participle. — roTg ayloig, to His saints) Eph. iii. 8, 
note. 

27. 07g) inasmuch as being persons, to whom. An explana- 
tion. — ;5^£?tj)ffEi/, it was the will of God ) most freely. — 6 •jrXourog, the 
riches) [descending] upon all men ; see Eph. i. 7, note. — Sg, who) 
for 0, which. — Xpierig h !ifji,Tv, Christ in you) The parallel expres- 
sions are, Iv roTg shigiv, and h u/jbTv, in the Gentiles, and in you. 
Christ in (among) the Gentiles was the greatest paradox at that 
time. Comp. in, Eph. iii. 8, (17) ; 1 Tim. iii. 16.^ — >i eXirlg rng 

' Not having spot, etc. — but that it should he holy, for, hut holy. — Ed. 
' Bengel, therefore, not attending to nwre emphasis, also acknowledged 
here the same signification of the word ku, which Ernesti approves, in 



1G6 COLOSSIANS I. 28, 2i).-ll. 1. 

do^rig, the hope of glory) Christ in us is a most delightful thing 
in itself, but much more delightful in respect of those things 
which shall be revealed, ch. iii. 4 ; Eph. i. 18. So Rom. v. 2. 

28. 'H/j.ii'i, we) ver. 1 [I and Timothy]. — ffaira civ^paivoii, every 
man) This expression, so often used, has the greatest Simrr,g 
(vehemence) and force, and contains the reason why he writes 
even to them who are unknown to him, ch. ii. 1. The distri- 
bution of the all [" every man — every man — every man"] may 
be compared with ch. iii. 11. — xat Siddaxovng) and teaching, 
vouSsTovvTai {they are admonished) is said of those who have been 
already taught, as the Colossians ; diddaaovrai (are taught) is said 
of the ignorant and uninstructed. — rtXim) See Eph. iv. 13 : 
perfect, without the elements of the world. 

29. 'Ayww^o/isi/os, striving) In ch. ii. 1, the conflict (comp. iv. 
12) refers to this word. — Kardi., according to) Paul would not be 
able to strive in himself: he is only mighty, according as Christ 
works in him. — auroD, of Him) of Christ. 



CHAPTER II. 

1. ©IXw y dp, for I would) He explains, why he used the word 
striving, ch. i. 29, for, conflict, presently follows. — ayum, a con- 
flict) of anxiety, eager desire, prayers, with which I try to make 
amends for those things which I am unable in my absence to per- 
form. — 7f.al oeoi, and as many) Among these may be comprehended 
the Christians who were at Hierapohs, ch. iv. 13. Paul con- 
stituted himself a debtor to all the Gentiles. — oh^ Icopdxagi, have 
not seen) For this reason Paul does not use the familiar titles, 
brethren, beloved, in this whole epistle, and in it alone. \_More- 
over, he writes to those churches which he had instructed face to 
face concerning their particular affairs, which were to be put to 
rights on his return to them ; he suggests many things, and now 

Attone Bibl. th. T. x. p. 130 ; but in the Germ. Vers., on the margin, he 
has not hesitated to intimate, that that maturer communion with Christ, 
which assuredly surpasses all human reason, is the delightful consequence 
of preaching among the Gentiles, by the quotation of Eph. iii. 17.— E. B. 



167 

and then uses a reproof, which savours of paternal autliority. 
But to those places where he had not been personally present, he 
sent -such letters as may be compared to persons preaching to 
strange hearers (Gastpredigten) ; presenting to them a compeiv- 
dious view of the whole doctrine of salvation. See that you have 
profited by both kinds of discussion. — V. g.] — rJ ■nfLeuivm /iou, my 
face) Even the aspect of Paul had a power of comforting (jtrapa- 
x\r\aii), ver. 2 ; Acts xx. 38. 

2. Su^/S/jSaff^inrav) The participle categorically affirming : they 
are united together (" knit together"), says Paul, in love ; comp. 
ver. 5 ; the other things should be added. If you would read 
^gu/i^il3a,aS'iVTig, this will be the solution : ha <Ka,j'a%\n^u6i raTg 
xapdiaig airav, gu/jiBi^oigSivrssj that they, being knit together, may be 
comforted in their hearts. Comp. 1 Cor. vi. 16, note. — h ayd-irp) 
in the mutual love of God and believers. — xa,i) even. — us — els, to 
— to) An Anaphora [repetition of the same words in beginnings ; 
Append.], of which the second part explains the first in two 
clauses. — roD ©sou xal 'Tra.Tphg xal nu Xpierou, of God and the Father 
and of Christ) The article is accurately put. He here lays down 
a proposition regarding God and Christ, and discusses it at ver. 
8, 9, 12, 13 : for all the fulness of the Godhead is in Christ, 
ver. 9. 

3. 'Ev S) in Whom, rather in which, viz. the mystery of God 
and the Father and of Christ. He who possesses this ought to 
ask for nothing more, so far as wisdom and other good things are 
concerned. Regarding Christ Himself, the question is taken up 
at ver. 9. — s/V/, are) Construe : all hidden treasures are in that 
mystery [But Engl. Vers, makes a^rox/jupo; prsedicate, In whom, 
are hid, etc.] : &ir6xp\}(poi, without the article. — irairs?, all, cor- 
responds to the all, ver. 2. — o/ Srisaupol, treasures) Hence are 
derived TXoDros, the riches, ibid.— r^s cop/as, of wisdom) Hence 
comes the evviaig, under standi7ig, ibid. — r^j yvwcTEws, of knowledge) 
Hence imyvasig, the full knowledge," ibid : comp. 1 Cor. xiii 

1 So indeed the margin of the 2d Ed., rather than the larger Ed., advises 
the adoption of this reading. — E. B. 

2uf4/3;/3a(r^£</T£f is read by ABCD corrected, (A). /Vulg. have 'instructi. 
Hilar. 1025, 'instituti.' 'S.vfi^i&ciaSinav has none of the oldest MSS. in 
its favour. — Ed. 

^ Engl. Vers, acknowledgment. 'Eiciyvaai; is more than yuuai;. — Ed. 



168 COLOSSIAKS II. 4-6. 

12, note. — a.'jToxpvpoi, hidden) for it is a my&tery, ibid : comp. I 
Cor. ii. 7, 8. 

4. M)7 Tii, lest any man) So ver. 8, 16, 18. — vapaXoyiZ;riTat h 
mSavoXoytcf, beguile you with enticing or plausible words) Comp. 
Kom. xvi. 19, with what goes before. That is, an enticing 
plausible speech, which, for example, makes a show of humility, 
ver. 18, 23. Some mixed together Judaism and the Eastern 
philosophy. See Budd. eccl. apost., pp. 466, 467. 

5. Xalpm xat ^xWuv, joying and beholding) i.e. beholding with 
joy. — rd^n, order) lest anything should be out of joint (' lame'), 
Heb. xii. 13. Both individuals and those who are joined 
together should maintain order. Paul looks to those joined 
together, that they be hnit together, evfjL^ij3aci6iVTig, ver. 2. — 
enpiufia, stedfastness) that it may not easily lose order. Sted- 
fast faith does not permit anything to be removed out of its 
order. This stedfastness is required in individuals, as the full 
assurance in ver. 2. Order is understood to belong to hve 
Faith is stedfastness when it is itself stedfast. 

6. Th Kvpiov, the Lord) The article shows that they had re- 
ceived Christ as the Lord. — sv aur^ vipmaTiTn, walk ye in Him) 
This is the scope of the epistle. "We give the following summary : — 

I. The Inscription, i. 1-2. 

II. The Doctrine, by which the apostle pathetically explains 
the mystery of Christ, in the way of thanksgiving for the 
Colossians, ver. 3 seq., and prayer for the same, 9, 10, 
12,13, 15,16,21,22 : 
Along with a declaration of his affection for them, 24, 25 ; 
ii. 1, 2. 

III. The Exhortation. 

1) General, by which he stirs them up to perseverance in 
Christ, 6, 7 : 
And admonishes them not to be deceived, 8. 
Here again he describes the mystery of Christ, in order, 

9,10: 
And in the same order derives his admonitions from 
Christ, the Head, 16 : 



COLOSSIANS II. 7, 8. 169 

And from His death, 20, et seqq. : 
And from His exaltation, iii. 1—4, 
2) Special, 

1, That vices should be avoided, 5-9 : 
And virtues practised, 10, 11 : 
Especially love, 12, 13 : 

And the study of the word of Christ, 16, 17. 

2. That they should do their duty. 

1. "Wives and husbands, 18, 19, 

2. Children and parents, 20, 21, 

3. Servants and masters, 22, 23; iv, 1. 
, 3) Final, To prayer, 2, 3, 

To spiritual wisdom, 5, 6. 

IV. Conclusion, 7, 8, 10, 11, 15, 16, 18. 

7, 'Epf'it.tof/.im, rooted) Eph. iii. 18. Time past instead of the 
commencement.^ — litomohot/^oxiinvol) The present, as being even 
still in progress. Acts xx. 32. — h aura, in Him) in Jesus Christ, 
as Lord. In the faith is the parallel, which presently follows. — 
Iv eu^apisr/'c/,, with thanksgiving) This constitutes and shows the 
lawful and joyful use of (external) things, which some biirden 
with prohibitions, ver. 21 ; 1 Cor. x, 30 ; 1 Tim. iv. 3, 4. 

8. M>] Tig edTai) So, iva sgrai, Rev. xxii. 14. — euXayciiyuv) who 
not only makes spoil out of you, but makes yourselves a spoil. 
Both to this word auXayoiyZv, and to the word xivtie, vain, are 
opposed fulness, riches, treasures [ver. 2, 3, 9]. — diA, by) This 
expresses the instrument. — piXosopla; xa! xiv^g a^arjis, phi- 
losophy and vain deceit) a Hendiadys, as ver. 18, Philosophy 
is in itself a kind of thing indifferent (midway between good 
and bad) ; but its abuse, however, tending to deceit, is more 
easy [than its use for good], especially in that Jewish philosophy 
of which they at that time boasted, and which they endeavoured 
to accommodate to the purity of the faith ; for Paul does not say, 
that we are brought to Christ by philosophy. Paul maintains 
tliat what his opponents boasted to be philosophy and ' wisdom,' 

' i.e. Their faith was already long established, not merely beginning. 
— Ed. 



170 COLOSSIANS II. 9, 10 

ver. 23, was vain deceit. — xara, according to) This definitely 
points out what philosophy is intended, and restricts the general 
appellation to the Jewish philosophy. This is indicated in the 
discussion, ver. 11, 16, 20; wherefore the proposition in ver. 8 
ought not to be more widely extended, as if also applying to 
the Gentile philosophy, although the Jews had taken their phi- 
losophy from the GrentUes ; and, by parity of reasoning, this 
remark applies to all philosophy. — rSiv Mft^irm, of men) The 
antithesis is, of the Godhead, ver. 9. — ra eroix^Ta, the elements 
[rudiments]) The antithesis is, bodily, ver. 9, 17 : comp. elements, 
Gal. iv. 3, note. — yiai ou Kardt, Xpisrhv, and not according to Christ) ■ 
He ought therefore peculiarly and solely to approve of the doc- 
trine that is according to Christ. 

9. "On) ft)r, since. The reason is hereby given, why those 
alone should be attended to, who teach according to Christ. — 
h avTw, in Hini) John xiv. 10. — xaroiXE^ dwells) oh. i. 19, note. 
— -Trav rh '!:\r^piii(ha. rtjg Siorrirog, all the fulness of the Godhead) Be- 
lievers are filled with [rather into, il; rh irK^ipca/j^a, so as to enter 
into a living participation of] all the fulness of God ; Eph. iii. 
19. But all the fulness of the Godhead, i.e. the Godhead in its 
greatest fulness, dwells in Christ ; not merely the Divine attri- 
butes, but the Divine nature itself; ch. i. 19. The abstract 
word is most significant.^ — e(aiLa,Tix.ug, hbdily) God is the head of 
Christ, 1 Cor. xi. 3, and Christ is the head of all, ver. 10 ; and 
Christ is related to God, as His body, tlie Church, is to Christ ; 
but Christ could not with propriety be called the body of God. 
Therefore the language is varied. The Godhead itself, as it 
were the very entire substance (essence) of the Godhead, dwells 
in Christ, in a manner most immediate (vividly present) and 
most real. The type was God's glory dwelling in the temple 
of Solomon. 2w^a, the body, does not always denote the body 
properly so called; ver. 11, 17 

10. Ka;') and therefore. — esri) ye are. — TswAtjpu/jbsm, filled up, 
made full [complete']) John i. 16. The fulness of Christ re- 
dounds to the Church ; Ps. cxxxiii. 2. Therefore His fulness 
is infinitely more abundant. He Himself is full; we axe filled 

^ " Of the Godhead," in its easeTice • not merely ^s/o'tutoc, of the godlike 
character. — Ed. 



COLOSSIANS II. 11-13. 171 

Pay and from Him] with wisdom and power. — fi xspaXjJ ffcto-jjg, tJm 
head of all) Eph. i. 10. — waifjjs afx^s, of all principality) There- 
fore we ought to present our petitions to CImat, not to angels. 

11. Ka;') also. Paul now enumerates the steps in the pro- 
gress of those, who have become partakers of the fulness of 
Christ. — iTnpiiTiLriSnri, ye are circumcised) As circumcision, so 
baptism, refers to initiation. — Tff/ro,u,5), with the circumcision) 
of the hea,rt.—&xiipomiyjTif), not made with hands) An epithet 
very suitable for the New Testament ; comp. Eph. ii. 1 1 ; Heb. 
ix. 11, 24. — a'TTsjiduesi) a word most significant ; ver. 15.— roS 
sufiaTog, of the body) This, as a whole, is opposed to the part, 
imcircumcision : aTixductig sw/iarog, the putting (stripping) of^ the 
body, a mild definition of death. It is different therefore from 
baptism : it is the circumcision of the heart ; it is death spiritual, 
in a good sense, whereas baptism is compared to burial. [Com- 
munion with (joint participation in) the death and burial and 
resurrection of Christ is described in this and the following verse. 
— V-g-J — Trie eafx.})g, of the flesh) There is an apposition between 
the body of sins and the flesh [not the body of the sins of the flesh, 
as Engl. Vers., but the body of the sins, that is to say, the flesh']. 
— h Tri 'jrepiTo/iri tou Xpidroif) by the circumcision of Christ, which 
accords with the New Testament ; a circumcision, to which 
that of Moses, in the flesh, gives place. 

12. Ba.'Trrle/j.aTi, in baptism) As death is before the resurrec- 
tion, so in this third or middle term of the comparison, baptism 
naturally precedes matured (full-grown) faith. — h Si, in which) 
An Anaphora [the frequent repetition of the same words in the 

beginnings], comp. ver. 11. — &ia rrig irieriaig rijs hspyilag rou 

©sou) A remarkable expression : faith is of Divine operation, 
and Divine working is in believers ; Eph. i. 19, ii. 8 ; 1 Thess. 
ii. 13. 

13. Ka.1 iifjb&g, and you) The discourse, ver. 10—12, was inde- 
finite under the form of the second person, whereas now he 
speaks strictly in the second person ; and, indeed, there is a re- 
markable Asyndeton [want of the copulative conjunction], by 
which ver. 13, 14, 15, are connected. — vixpoijg hrag, being dead) 
Eph. ii. 1, 2. — rfi aTipo^uericf rrig dapxog, in the uncircumcision of 
the flesh) An exquisite term for original sin. — guvif^mvoindi eiiv 
aur^) God hath quickened you together with Christ; comp 



172 COLOSSIANS II. 14. 

Eph. ii. 4, 5. The words, tool away {k'^ev, ver. 14), and made a 
show (eSiiy/j.dTigiv, ver. 15), which have no copulative conjunction 
connecting them, either with one another or with ffui/s^ajoiro/jjirEv,^ 
depend on this expression, along with the annexed participles, 
all of which (viz. both the verbs and the participles) are to he 
referred to God the Father. — ^apiadfievog) The aorist is deter- 
mined by the tense of the verb, to which it is added. Now, I 
adopt this reading, ;^a^;ffa/A£i/os u//,rv,' and connect this clause with 
the preceding words. In this view, ver. 13, along with those 
that precede it, addresses the Gentiles ; and ver. 14 introduces 
the Jews speaking. — '!rapa'?rrw/i,aTa, offences) from which death 
had arisen. Deliverance from the reproach of sin, ver. 14, and 
deliverance from the power of darkness, ver. 15, are united with 
this deliverance from sin. 

14. ' E^aXi!-^a,g, having blotted out) A word appropriate in 
regard to writing : join it with ripxsv, took away, — xad' f}/ji,uv, 
against us) This verse brings in the Jews speaking. \_Not only 
was the law against us, xa6' ri/iojv, by its demands, but also an ad- 
versary to us, uTi'jdvriov riiu\i (Engl. Vers, contrary to us), by its 
accusation. — V. g.] — yiifoypa(pov, handwriting) When a debt has 
been contracted, it generally follows, that the debtor by his hand- 
writing acknowledges himself to be bound. The debt is for- 
given : and then, and not till then, the handwriting is blotted out. 
Our sins were debts : our sins themselves were not the hand- 
writing, but that which flowed from them as a consequence, the 
undeniable stain, the remembrance, the outcry (see Jer. xvii. 
1, 2), not so much in our conscience, as in the presence of God, 
while the law in various ways accuses and condemns us. [All 
this constitutes the handwriting.] Heb. x. 3, 17 : 1 Cor. xv. 
56. To be against {%aS rj/j-Zv), and to be our adversary or inimi- 
cal (u-irivdvTiov rmity), differ, as a state of war and an actual engage- 
ment. The handwriting was against us, but God blotted it out. 

1 For the x«i before wuto qualifies it, and is not a copulative of the verbs, 
as the Engl. Vers, makes it. — Ed. 

2 For the reading viiiu, in the larger Ed., is considered not so certain: 
whereas by the margin of 2d Ed., with the concurrence of the Germ. 
Vers., it is reckoned among those that are more certain. — E. B. 

"Hfih is read by ABCDG/Jr Hilar. 204, 773. 'Timv is supported by 
Vulg. Hilar. 090, 1067, and according to Lachm. by B (but Tisch. claims 
B for i,«(i/). — Ed. 



COLOSSIANS 11. 15. 173 

The -handwriting was an enemy to us, but God took it out of 
the way, Eph. ii. 15, seq. — ro/j UyiiaM, by the decrees) the deter- 
minations of His good pleasure. These are the decrees of grace. 
[But Engl. Vers, the handwriting of ordinances, viz. the legal 
ordinances.] The mention of the writing is included in that 
which was against us, not in that by which we were reheved.' 
The letter killeth, 2 Cor. iii. 6. See Ven. D. Hauberi tract, ad 
h. 1. — vvevavriov, an adversary [Engl. Vers. contran/J) M does 
not mean, secretly, underhand, in this compound, as is evident 
from the LXX.^ — xa! auTo) it also.^ — ^pxiv sx, roO /^effou) So xaTap- 
yndag, Eph. ii, 15. — 'TrpoeriXuiirac, having nailed it to) The allusion 
is to the nails of the cross of Christ. The handwriting, being 
pierced through, is considered as abolished. It may be resolved 
into, after He had nailed it to His cross ; for ^pxev. He took away, 
refers to the fruit of the resurrection. So also ver. 15, after He 
had triumphed over them. The full exercise of power over the 
vanquished is now the beginning of the triumph, when the van- 
quished are bound, and are made ready for becoming a show. 
The triumph takes for granted the victory, and follows it after an 
interval. It perhaps took place when Christ descended into 
hell. 

15. ' A'lri-A.dvgd/jLsiiog, having stripped off, having spoiled) Matti 
xii. 29. — rai apy&g -/.a! rag Ifoutf/aj, principalities and powers) 
Those, who worshipped good angels, at the same time feared the 
bad ; neither with good reason : comp. ver. 10. — i&tiyfidrieeii, 
made a show) This was done at His ascension, Eph. iv. 8. — 
h Tappneicf, openly) While both they themselves beheld it in their 
turn, and good angels, and then men, and God Himself. The 
nakedness of the vanquished enemy was manifest from the fact 
itself, and in the Gospel. — aurois, thern) The masculine refers to 
the angels. — h avrSi, in Him) in Christ. So Hilarius the deacon 
explains it. This {iv aura) refers (belongs) to the whole para- 

' i.e. No writing is mentioned in connection with the decrees of grace, as 
it is in the case of the law Ed. 

2 Tittmann, however, says, ' T'Treva.urioi; and euaPTio; certe sic differunt nt 
illud denotet adversarium, nulla manifestce via notione, potius contrarium . 
somewhat contrary, hamng a latent opposition to us. — N. T. Syn. — Ed. 

' Not, as Engl. Vers., the kxI joining (rvui^oioToi'mi' and ipxm : there is 
Asyndeton. — Ed 



174 COLOSSIANS II. 16, 17. 

graph, [which treats of GoD down from ver. 12.— Y. g.J and 
which is here concluded. [Evidently as Eph. i. 20, ii. 5. — V. g.] 

16. Ol\, tlierefore) The therefore is deduced from ver. 8-15. 
See ver. 16 (comp. note on ver. 20), ch. iii. 1, 5, 12. — xpfura, 
let no man judge) A Metonymy of the antecedent for the conse- 
quent, i.e. attend to no one who attempts to judge you; so 
ver. 18. — h Ppdgii, in meat) He says less than he wishes to be 
understood (Tapeinosis)} — h [j-ipu kprrig, [in part or partly] in 
respect of a holiday) The expression, [in part or partly] in respect, 
here seems to have the power of separating. One might dis- 
turb believers on the subject of meat and drink (ver. 21), 
another again about holidays. The holiday is yearly ; the new 
moon, monthly; the sabbaths, weekly. Comp. Gal. iv. 10, note. — 
J) ea^Barm, or of sabbaths) The plural for the singular. Matt. 
xii. 1 : but it is used here significantly [with express design] ; 
for the several days of the week are called Sabbaths, Matt, 
xxviii. 1 [o^|vs ds sa^^drtav. See Gnom. there] ; therefore Paul 
intimates here that all distinction of days is taken away ; for he 
never wrote more openly concerning the Sabbath. Christ, after 
that He Himself, the Lord of the Sabbath, had come, or else 
before His suffering, in no obscure language taught the liberty of 
the Sabbath ; but He asserted it more openly by Paul after His 
resurrection. Nor has it yet been expressly defined what degree 
of obligation is to be assigned to the Sabbath, what to the Lord's 
day ; but this has been left to the measure of every one's faith. 
The Sabbath is not cited as authoritative [laudatur], is not com- 
manded ; the Lord's day is mentioned, not enjoined. An ap- 
pointed [a definite and fixed] day is useful and necessary to those 
who are rather deeply immersed and engrossed in the concerns 
of the world. They who always sabbatize [they who keep a 
continual Sabbath], enjoy greater liberty. The Sabbath is a 
type even of eternal things, Heb. iv. 3, 4 ; but yet its obligation 
does not on that account continue in the New Testament, other- 
wise the new moons should be retained. Is. Ixvi. 23.^ 

17. y.x.ia, a shadow) Heb. viii. 5, x. 1. A shadow, without 
life. — (Sufia, the body) the very truth shadowed forth by the old 

^ See App. 

2 For there we find in a future state an antitype to the new moons as well 
tts to the Sabbath, which would prove too muph. — Ed. 



COLOSSIANS 11. 18. 175 

ceremonies. The hody, as well as the shadow, to which it is 
opposed, is the predicate ; and therefore it may be thus resolved : 
meat, drink, etc., are the shadow of things to come ; but the body 
of Christ is the body [the substantial thing], or, in other words, 
that which belongs to Christ is the body. Allusion is made to 
the very body of Christ, but Christianity is understood ; rJ rou 
Xpisnu sari eS/j^a. If you suppose that ' body' is to be supplied 
in the subject, it will be a Ploce.^ 

18. Mrjdiis t^as xaTa^pa^iu'sru, let no man assume the office of 
umpire to dictate to you [let no man beguile you of your reward'^ ) 
A word closely connected yfith. judging {xpiviTca), and establishing 
ordinances or dogmas (boyiJ.aTiZieh), ver. 16, 20 ; for ^pa^iiia, I 
guide or regulate ['moderor;' Engl. Vers. rwZe], see iii. 15, 
note ; from which Kara^papiua differs, as xara^pdo/iai [abuse] 
differs from y^pdo/j.ai [use] ; and the verb itself, which is com- 
pounded with KKTa, governs the accusative, v/j,ac, you, for the 
preposition xaroi would require the genitive : Hesychius has 
xarajSpa^erai (read xara^pa^ivsrai) xoiTaxphsTai, xarayati^iTai. 
Therefore Paul means to say. Let no one, usurping the autho- 
rity of judge [arbitrator] of the prizes, and accordingly abusing 
it, guide and regulate you in the race which you are running, 
and mislead you by prescribing what you, about to receive the 
prize, should follow, what you should avoid A French inter- 
preter has skilfully used the word maitriser, "to domineer ;" for 
the apostle is not speaking of a rival snatching the prize of the 
race before you, but of an odious, perverse, insolent judge 
(umpire). On this verb depend four participles, through as 
many sentences, of which the first and third, the second and 
fourth, have respect to each other. The manifold advantage of 
this Chiasmus, now noticed, will by and by appear. — SiXuv h 

' See App. A word put twice, once in the meaning of the simple -word, 
then to express an attribute of it. The bodt/ of Christ is the body, i.e. the 
s^ibstance, the essential thing. — Ed. 

^ This is the Engl. Vers. Bengel translates it, let no one tr»at you ac- 
cording to his cum whim (pro arbitrio). The verb x,arajip»fiiiia signifies to 
decide against any one in adjudging the prizes at the public games. It ap- 
pears, from a passage in Demosthenes, to imply fraud and injustice in the 
decision. 

Wahl, Clavis N. T., renders the verb, palma or prcemiofraudo. " Properlj 
it means, to be umpire in a contest to the detriment of some one." — Eu. 



17(5 COLOSSIANS II. 18. 

ra'zim(ppoe\i\iyi) Often j'sn, with 3 following it, is expressed by the 
word ^iXoi, UiXoj, ihboKoi, BouXo/j!,ai iv tivI, for example, 1 Sam. 
xviii. 22, 25 ; comp. the compound IkXoSprie-Ktla, ver. 23 : C'lXm, 
one who does something with his will [with inclination : a volun- 
teer in doing]. Comp. Mark xii. 38, note. — Ta-Trimippogvvri xal 
6pri(rxeicf. tZh ayyiXm, with humility of feeling (sentiment) and 
worshipping of angels) A Hendiadys. They worship angels 
under pretext of humility and modesty, as if they dared not 
immediately and directly address themselves to God and Christ. 
" This error," says Alexander Morus, " had driven its roots so 
deep into the earth, that not even after three centuries could it 
be pulled out ; for the 35th canon of the Council of Laodicea 
was framed against it ; and this city was the metropolis of 
Phrygia, where Colosse also was. That canon condemns the 
Angelioi, for so they were called." " The Angelici" says Au- 
gustine Haeres. 39, "are those inclined to the worship of 
angels." By this authority, the invocation of saints and in- 
tercourse with spirits, how plausible soever they may be, are en- 
tirely taken away. — a ij,r\ i<ipa.xiv, ifb^ariijiav) Heinsius observes, 
This language is similar in principle to that of the Greek trage- 
dians, Ken' Ifi^ariuoiv, offfa /ji,ri ^Xe<riiv 6i/j!,ic, intruding into those 
things at which it is unlawful to look. 'Euipaxiv, saw with the 
eyes, and i/j,^areljuv, intruding with the feet, are spoken meta- 
phorically of the mind. The foot should not get before the 
eyes : ifilSocTiuu, I go in, I enter in, I pass through (penetrate). 
It is used concerning a hostile invasion, 1 Mace. xii. 25. It is 
figuratively applied to the understanding, and signifies, I pry 
into or search, I handle, Chrys. de Sac. For how should Christ, 
6 Tag avavTuv sfi^ariucav xapSlac, who searches the hearts of all, 
ask for the sake of learning ? On this passage we have made 
several observations, T. I. p. 376. Moreover, there is a com- 
pound, xivifi^aTin, said of the vain study of abstruse subjects, on 
which see Suicer's Thesaurus ; and the same Al. Morus proves 
by the examples taken firom Damascius, that this word was used 
by Plato. And there is little doubt, that Paul himself had in 
his mind the word of Plato, when he was refuting those who 
held the same opinion as Plato concerning angels ; comp. xivng, 
ver. 8. But yet, when lie might have said, a, [lii lupa xen/jo^or 
Tiiiuv, he yet does not say so (for the things into which tha 



COLOSSIANS U. 19-22. 177 

xara^fa^iLm intrudes, are not in themselves utterly xtna, mm, 
but only not seen by him) ; but he lays down something even 
more weighty, since the l/L^arttjiiii rather expresses the haughti- 
ness of the xaTa^paBsiiiv. On the opposite side, the xpariiv, to 
hold the Head, corresponds, which is not done in vain, but tends 
to increase. — <f)U(!iov/j,evog, puffed iip) The antithesis is, humility of 
sentiment (ramivo^pogvvri) ; and yet these two are joined together. 

19. OO xparSiv, not holding) He who does not hold Christ 
solely and abovfe all others, does not hold Him at all. — rrtv xt(pa- 
Mv, the Head) Here faith has a foundation whereon it may be 
fixed. The opposite is, a fi,fi idpaxiv, e/jbtBarium, he who'^ies be- 
yond things placed in the middle (within reach), and tries to catch 
those that escape his grasp. — If ov, from which) [not from . which 
Head, but from which hold~\ from holding the head; or else, from 
whom, viz. Christ, the Head. — fi/d rZv ci,<pSi]i) hy the joints (ties),'- 
viz. of faith, Eph. iv. 16. It is to this word that itnyapriyovi/.ivof 
refers. — xai euvdii/niiv) and bonds (bands) of ' love' and ' peace,' 
Eph. iv. 3. It is to this that tfu^/3/j3a^o/isi/oii refers ; comp. ver 2. 
— emxopriyov/j^ivov) receiving swixopvy'f.v, ministration to it (being 
ministered to) ; so 3 Mace. vi. 38, vavf ivh nu ^a.ei'Kims x"!''^' 
•you/isvoi, supplied with all things by the king. 

20. E/, if) The inference, begun at ver. 16, is continued; 
and at ch. iii. 1, a new inference follows. — amSdiisTi d^o, ye are 
dead from) An abbreviated expression, i.e. dead, and so set free 
from the elements, etc. — d^rJ rSiv aToiyiiuf), from the elements) ver. 
8. — boyfjuariZieii) in the Middle voice, you receive (take up) 
dogmas, ordinances. 

21. Mjj, not) Thus the dogmatists commonly spoke. — ci-^ri, 
touch) The genus ; the species are, to taste {yivari) with/ the 
tongue, and to handle (Jiyra) with the hand. 

22. "A hri, which are) Those things, namely, which are 
touched,- tasted, etc. — e/'s ipkp^v, [are to end in destruction'] to perish) 
and which therefore do not defile ; 1 Cor. vi. 13 ; the middle 
of Matt. XV. 17. — rjj d'jroxpfjeei) in the using up (entire consump- 
tion), not strictly so called [not the abuse], but so far as it de- 
notes the use, which is natural, civil, external, truly indifierent, 

' Beng. here translates atpau, nexits; but see the somewhat diiFerent expla- 
nation in Gnom., Eph. iv. 16* — Ed. 

VOL. IV. M 



178 COLOSSIANS 11. 23. 

and removed from superstitions fear and severity (rigour). — ■ 
xara,, according to) as the commandments of men are loont to be. 
— TO, svTdX//,(xra xa,l &iba«x,aXiai, the commandments and doctrines) 
Matt. XV. 9, note. 

23. " Arim, which) An Anaphora [repetition of the same word 
in beginnings] ; comp. a, which, ver. 22. — 'ien, are) Construe, 
are — -for, to the satisfying {isriv — fphg vXrig/iovriv), as ver. 22, are 
for perishing {iST IV — s/'s <p6opa\i); therefore resolve 'i-xp^ra. into though 
(whereas) they have, that it may form a clause : 'ien, are, and 
•^phg, to, being disjoined, the sentence becomes appropriately 
(appositely) suspended. — Xoyov) a name and a plausible appear- 
ance. — fLiv, indeed^ The force of the particle bi, hut, which makes 
an Apodosisjis concealed inthefinite verb 'ien, are} — skXoSpriexilct^ 
willr^worship) skXoSprtsxiia, as well as humility of sentiment (raviivo- 
(ppoeiivrj), has a plausible appearancel For this word, as E. 
Schmidius well shows, denotes worship (whether right or wrong), 
performed willingly and with ready inclination : such ilirilhia, 
ready promptness or obsequiousness, has the appearance of wisdom : 
comp. James iii. 17; for it seems to be removed from obstinacy, 
as humility of sentiment (rawemippoauvri) seems to be removed from 
pride. — ra'7reivo(ppoavvri, humility of sentiment) ver. 18, note. — xal 
a(fiii6i(f Bii/^aTog, [Engl. Vers., neglecting of, etc.] and with severe 
treatment of [iiot sparing'] the body) which is the case when 
many things are withheld from the body, which might be af- 
forded to it, ver. 21 ; nay, the body itself is purposely worn 
down [mortified]. This also looks plausible, for it becomes 
saints, 1 Cor. ix. 27 ; although acpubla. expresses something more 
odious, than rh i-Trama^siv xai SovXaycayeh, in the passage quoted 
from first Corinthians. These three things, plausible in appear- 
ance, involve a threefold relation : to God, to angels, to one's 
own self; and therefore they have, when joined together, a 
perfect appearance. — oux sv ri//,ri. rm, not in any price or estima- 
tion \lionour\) This clause closely coheres with the preceding ; 
and the latter, h, in, is opposed to the preceding h, in. The 
Lxx. avixi Tif^ni, i.e. without price, for nothing, Is. Iv. 1 ; Ps. 
xliv. 13 ; Job xxxi. 39. It becomes the man who is ennobled 

' Which, though having indeed {ftiu) a name of wisdom, etc. , yet (li under- 
gtood and implied in eVr/) are to the mere satisfying of the flesh.— Ed. 



COLOSSIANS 11. 23. 179 

by faith, to have a just estimation of himself, not in himself, 
but in his Lord Jesus Christ alone, whereby he is not unworthily 
to degrade himself, inasmuch as having been redeemed at such 
a price, and striving for such a great reward, for example, 
through the appearance of ikXoSpriexiia,;, will-worsliip : Acts 
xiii. 46 ; Rom. ii. 7 ; 1 Cor. vi. 15, iii. 21 vii. 23 ; 1 Thess. 
iv. 4. This estimation produces holy p;Xor;^/av, ambition {<piA<r- 
Ti//,(iij/isv, we labour with ambition), 2 Cor. v. 9 ; but it is 
restrained by true self-denial, and again is tarnished by the 
commandments of men [ver. 20, 21], which, because they bring 
to us nothing worth while, nothing worthy of estimation [nothing 
h TiiiPfj Ttvi], comp. Heb. xiii. 9, have an entirely empty and 
vain appearance of wisdom and every good thing : comp. by all 
mean^, ihn, vainly, ver. 18. This passage is in consonance 
with Phil. iii. 19, where see the note ; and both accord with 
Hab. ii. 16, nAHSMONHN ATIMIA2 l« ba^m, x.t.'a., Thou hast 
filled thyself with shame for glory ; drink thou therefore also, and 
let thy foreskin be uncovered. But true r/^j], "price or estimation 
[' honour'], is theirs who see the glory of the Jjord, lb., ver. 14. 
— "Trphi ir\ri<it^ovr\v Trig eapnoi) to the satisfying of the flesh : irXrie/jiOvn, 
satisfying to the fiill, satiety, generally denotes excess : cap^, 
flesh, does not signify the body, but is put as at ver. 18.^ 
Hilarius the deacon, whose commentary on the thirteen epistles 
of Paul is found among the works of Ambrose, on this pas- 
sage, says : " Sagina camalis sensus, traditio humana est," 
human tradition is the overloading (surfeiting) of the carnal sense 
or appetite. A golden sentence. Tradition puffs iip ; it clogs 
the sense of heaven (the perception of heavenly things). 'E^eXo- 
dpriaxila, x.r.X., and ffXjiff/ion) rfig eapxog, are therefore in antithesis, 
and yet joined together. They put away true rifLriv, price, value, 
or estimation [' honour^'], that they may satisfy to the fiill the 
flesh ; frpog denotes that which is regarded as the important 
concern, or the end, for the sake of which the other things 
(practices) are assumed (adopted). 

' Tciv vooy Tij; capKo; auToD, of his fleshlt/ mind : i.e. flesh, not literally, but 
in the spiritual application carnaliti/. — Ed. 



180 COLOSSIANS III. 1-5 



CHAPTEK III. 



1. Tot am f^rireTri, seek the things that are above) Christ, after 
the resurrection, immediately directed His eager thoughts 
towards heaven, John xx. 17, note.^ So also believers, Eph. 
ii. 6. 

2. ^poveTn, Have a relish for, set your mind, or affections) 
They who truly seeh the things that ard above, cannot but relish 
or set their affections on the things that are above. The apostle 
says, relish in the second place, not seek ; for there is an anti- 
thesis to earthly things (ra fV/ r^s 7^s)j which we are said to 
relish or set our affections upon, to care for, but which we could 
not properly be said to seek, because they are present with us. 

3. ' A-?rida,veri, ye are dead) to the earth and to the world, 
spiritually, ch. ii. 20. — ri Zoin i/j,Siv xsxpvTTTai, your life is hid) An 
abbreviated expression in this sense : ye are dead to the world, 
that ye may Uve to God ; but that life is as yet hid. — xixpuvrai 
eiiv 5-a XpiifTuj, is hid with Christ) The world knows neither Christ 
nor Christians, and Christians do not even know distinctly 
themselves, i.e. one another. 

4. "Orav, when) This word, used absolutely, strikes (flashes 
upon) the whole mind of the reader, as if he had been un- 
mindful of the preceding words, with a sudden light, so 
that it is doubtfiil whether a7id or but should be suppUed. — 
0avepcii6fi, shall be manifested) in glory, 1 Pet. iv. 13. — jj t^oin C/iSn, 
your life) This expresses the aspect (in relation to you), under 
which He will be manifested. — rors, then) We should not de- 
mand it sooner. — xai iaeTg, ye also) This hope draws men off 
from the earth. — h U^ri, in glory) a glorious life. 

5. Nixpueare, Mortify^) [not knowing to spare.^ — V. g.] — ra 

' Comp. note, Luke ix. 51. Jesus ever kept His eye iixed on the goal to 
which He was hastening. So, in John xx. 17, He says, as if a present 
thing, / ascend^ not, / will ascend : He hastened in feehng over the inter- 
mediate forty days to His actual entering heaven Ed. 

' Lit. Punish with every kind of death. 

' Strangers to all tender-heartedness, such as would lead you to spare 
the flesh.— Ed. 



COLOSSIANS HI. 6-11. 181 

mX»i, your members) of which united the body of sin consists, ch. 
ii. 11. [Here all impurity, without exception, is repelled and 
excluded. — V. g.] — Iff/ rrn yni, upon the earth) where they find 
their support. Tliese things are presently enumerated. — mpviim, 
X..T.X., fornication, etc.) Eph. v. 3, 4. — -KaSog, passion [inordinate 
affection^ the disorder of lust within. — ImSu/j^lav, concupiscence) 
the disorder of the external senses. — rfiv -irXiovi^/av, covetousness) 
The article has the effect of Epitasis [an emphatic addition], and 
includes the whole genus of vice, which is different from the 
genus of the species just now enumerated. Avarice most of all 
makes men cling to the earth. 

6. A/' a,,for which things) Eph. v. 6. 

7. 'EZflTi, in which ye lived) as if in your essential first principle, 
origin, [i.e. these sins were the very air which you breathed from 
your birth, they were your] native element. Comp. Gal. v. 
25, on the spiritual life. 

8. Ka/ i/iiTi, ye also) This answers to the ye also, ver. 7. In 
ver. 7 it was, ye also, as well as the other " children of unbelief" 
(' disobedience'). In ver. 8 it is, ye also, as well as other believers. 
— roi Tcivra,) all old things, especially anger, etc. So in the antithesis, 
above all, ver. 14. — opyriv, iv/ibv, anger, harshness or cruelty [Beng. 
translates 6{///,ov, scevitia, Engl. Yers.,,wrath']) Eph. iv. 31 [where 
also Su//iov is scevitia, harshness]. — xanlai) faults connected with 
the mind [evilr^ispositionl ; for example, suspicion, perversity, 
impatience [Engl. Vers, renders it malice^. — fi\a<s<pr\i/jiav, 
aldXPoXoylav, blasphemy, filthy communication) The words,' Out of 
your mouth, have respect to these two. 

9. M^ -^luSeffh, Lie not) Eph. iv. 25. — ils) to, or against. 
See History of Susanna, ver. 55, 59, l-vj/sinriu ilg rnv eiaurou xKpaXTjv, 
thou hast lied against thy own head. — avix.Sxxs&iJ^tvoi, having put off) 
Eph. iv. 22. ' 

10. Ton v£ow Tov avaxaivoiujemv, the new man renewed) lb., ver 
24, note. — il; smyvaen, to [or m] knowledge) of the truth (ch. i. 
6, 9, 10), by which all love of lying is destroyed. — xar (Mva, 
according to the image) This image consists in perfect truth. — 
roZ xTigavTog avrov, of Him that created him [viz. the new manj) 
i.e. of God, Eph. iv. 24 : compare ib., ch. ii. 10. Eegeneration 
is indicated by the word ' creation,' from which the image results. 

11. "Ovov) where, i.e. in whom, or in which thing. — oux hi, there 



182 COLOSSIANS III. 12, 13. 

is not present) In the estimation of God and of believers there is 
present neither Jew, etc. — -"EXXjjii xal 'loudaTbg, Greek and Jew) 
The concrete for the abstract, as afterwards also Christ is used : 
for circumcision and uncircumcision, which occur presently, axe 
abstract nouns. — a-Kpo^ueria, uncircumcision) Even the Greek 
might have been circumcised. Therefore the mention of uncir- 
cumcision renders the expression more distinct. — Bdp^apog, Sxi^jjs, 
Barbarian, Scythian) These two words, put by Asyndeton with- 
out a conjunction, make equally a pair (ffu^uy/av) as bond, free. 
The Greeks were on the west, the Jews on the east ; the Bar- 
barians on the south (for Scaliger shows that the term Barbarians 
is an Arabic word properly applied to the Numidians), the Scy- 
thians on the north, more barbarous than the barbarians (properly 
so-called). And with this impression Anacharsis, as Galen 
relates, was reproached by, I know not whom, Srt jSdpjiapog e'/ri xal 
^xiSijg, that he was a barbarian, and [what is tantamouilt to] bar- 
barous, a Scythian. Every nation, as it prefers some one other 
nation to itself, so again, under whatever pretext, prefers itself 
to all the rest. Therefore the Barbarian, as occupying the 
middle place between the Greeks and Scythians, gave the palm 
to the Greek, but at the same time considered himself superior 
to the Scythian. Faith takes away this distinction. Perhaps 
at Colosse there were one or two Scythian Christians. — rd •adwa 
x,ai h Toiai Xpigrhg, Christ is all and in all) The apposition is Xpierhg 
( m) TO, irdira xal iv msi. A Scythian is not a Scythian, but 
Christ's. A barbarian is not a barbarian, but Christ's. Christ 
is all, and that too in all, who believe. The new creature is in 
Christ, ver. 10 ; Gal. vi. 15. 

12. 'ExXiKTol, elect) This is equivalent to a substantive ; its 
epithets are, holy and beloved. He calls them the elect of God, 
as Eom. viii. 33. The order of the words admirably corresponds 
to the order of the things [' elect' before ' holy,' and ' holy' before 
' beloved'] : eternal election precedes sanctification in time. The 
' sanctified' feel the love of God, and then in consequence after- 
wards imitate it. — eiuXayxya, bowels) Eph. iv. 32. — ra'jrsivtKppoevvTtt, 
humility of feeling, humbleness of mind) ib. iv. 2 [ra^rs/wpf offunjj?, 
" with all lowliness"]. These virtues are kept in exercise by 
* forbearing' and ' forgiving.' [See next ver.] 

13. 'Avixo/j-mi, forbearing) in regard to present offences.— 



COLOSSIANS 111. 14-16. 183 

•^api^o/iivoi,. forgiving) past offences. On these depends the 
clause, so also ye [i.e. the i.u.s/'s is construed with ave^ofiivoi]. — 
XpidTog, Christ) who had the greatest cause of complaint 
against us. 

14. 'Eff/, above) Here the climax reaches its highest point ; 
love, superior to all things, 1 Pet. iv. 8. — njn aydirriv, love) viz. 
put on. — axjvdis/Mi, the bond) Love comprehends the whole range 
of the virtues (graces), 2 Pet. i. 7. — reXiiorriTog, of perfection) 
DD, TiKiiorrig, Judg. ix. 16 ; Prov. xi. 3. He who has love, 
wants nothing : he is not kept bound by the elements of the 
world. Particular duties are also derived from this source, 
ver. 19, 21. 

15. Kai) and, so. The connection may be inferred from Eph. 
iv. 3.' — ri iipm rou ®eov, the peace of God) PhU. iv. 7. — jSpa- 
,8sulriw) a remarkable word. Hesychius has, ^pajSivsrco, //,eei- 
Tiuirca, //-timsaTu, i6ijvi(sSca, Wisd. X. 12 : Wisdom [gave Jacob the 
victory, Eng Vers.] was the guide and director of Jacob in a sore 
conflict : therefore j3pa,piusiv, is to regulate or direct a person run- 
ning, until he reaches the goal. Keep in safety {(ppovpnen), Phil, 
iv. 7, is nearly akin to it. Give yourselves up to the peace of 
God, that directs and regulates all things. An imperative after 
an imperative involves the signification of a future indicative." 
Antithetical to ppal3iviiv here, is xaraSpa^ihuv, ch. ii. 18 (where 
see the note), having in it the notion of excess. — exXriSyjri, you 
have been called) Eph. iv. 4. — iu^apiam, thankful) for that call- 
ing. This stands as a statement of subject (Propositio) in 
relation to what follows. The same duty is commanded, Eph. 
V. 4. 

16. 'o Ao'yoc, the word) by which ye have been called. — boi- 
Kiirta, have its indwelling in you) as in a temple, for ever. — 
£» hfjiTv, in you) in your inner man ; comp. full, Rom. xv. 14. — 
ffXoii(f/<i)s, richly) The distribation follows : in all wisdom^ — one 

' Where " forbearing one another in love" is followed by "endeavour- 
ing to keep the unity of the Spirit in the bond of peace," as the consequence. 
—Ed. 

' " Put on charity, and let the peace of God regulate :" equivalent to, 
" put on charity, and then the peace of God shall regulate," or, be the regu- 
lator. — Ed. 

^ Engl. Vers, loses this ' distribution ' of the rich indwelling of the word 
of Christ, by putting a semicolon after wisdom., " Let the word of Christ 



184 COLOSSIANS HI. 17, 18. 

another [lavnus, admonishing yourselves] : with grace — in ^your 
heart, i.e. mutually and apart. In wisdom, with grace, occur 
again, oh. iv. 5, 6. — h vagti eo(piif biSdgxovrig, teaching in all wis- 
dom) So it must be construed, comp. eh. i. 28. The nominative, 
by Syllepsis,^ depends on hoixilra, " let the peace dwell in you," 
i.e. have ye it dwelling in you [and therefore hibadKovTa, agreeing 
with Ifiiti, is pat] ; and this construction is the more suitable on 
this account, that y'me^s, be ye, which occurs a little before, has 
possession of the reader's mind. — Eaurouc, yourselves) oKkfiXoxa, 
one anotJier. There are parallel expressions at ver. 13.— vJ/aX- 
fioTg, in Psalms) Eph. v. 19.— Iv x"'P''^h «'«'^* grace) X"-P'l> 1"? ^^' 
xlv. 3. 

17. nomre, ye do) The word is used in a wide sense, so as 
also to include the act of speaking. — trdwa,, all things) viz. do 
ye. — b hwihart, in the name) so that it may be just the same as 
if Christ were doing it, ver. 11 ; or at least that you may be 
able to prove all things to Christ [to do all things so as to gain 
His approval]. The man who can say, Jesus Christ, I have 
done this in Thy name, certainly proves his conduct to Christ. 
In the name of Christ, i.e. for the sake of Christ : comp. the 
following verses. — hi axirou, by Him) not by angels. — Theodo- 
ritus. 

18. — Chap. iv. 1. A/ yvvaTnig, x.r.X., wives, etc.) Eph. v. 22- 
vi. 9. — h Kvp/ifi, in the Lord) These words are construed with 
v'jroTdegisSi, submit yourselves ; comp. Eph. vi. 1 : or else with 
ws &vn%iv, as it is Jit ; comp. in this view ver. 20, unless wajtouin, 
obey, ver. 20, be there likewise construed with h Kupli/j. It may 
be construed either way. 

dwell in you richly in all wisdom ;" Lachm. rightly puts (o Aoyoj to3 Xowtow 
hoiKeha iv v/mu ■^'Xovaias) in a parenthesis, , and thus h ■jtdajj co(piif iiiao- 
xouTss, etc., is joined with the previous ivfcetpitrroi yiveah. — Ed. 

1 The 2d Ed. prefers, and the Germ. Vers, distinctly expresses the 
plural, hu raif xetphletis, which is not approved in the margin of the older 
Ed.— E. B. 

ABCD(A)6^ Vulg. read t«;s x.a.pli»is. So Lachm. Tisch., without any 
of the oldest authorities, reads as Eec. Text, t^ xctplia. — Ed. 

2 Where the concord of the parts of speech is regulated not by strict 
syntax, but by the meaning in the mind, as here, en v/^lu — S/Sao-xoi/rss, for 
iiixaxouaiv. But Lachmann's punctuation makes this needless. See my note 
above. — Ed. 



COLOSSIANS III. 19-25.-1V. 1-3. 183 

19. M^ mxpahcgh, be not bitter) xiixpla, ha;teful conduct 
(offensive behaviour) mixed with love. Many, who are polite 
to all abroad, notwithstanding without scruple treat their wives 
and children at home with covert bitterness, because they do 
not fear them ; and when this feeling is vanquished, it affords a 
specimen of great softening of natural ruggedness of temper. 

21. '"Iva /i:) aSu//,ugn, lest they be discouraged) ah//j!a, despon 
dency (a broken-down spirit), the bane of youth. 

22. OsJk, God) who knows the heart. 

23. "Or; JAv <!ToinTi, whatsoever ye do) in your service. — o lav n, 
Eph. vi. 8. 

24. Tj)s xXripovo/iiag, of the inheritance) Although you have no 
inheritance in the world, but are part of an inheritance passing 
from your Master to His children. — Xf/orffl, Christ) who rewards 
them that serve Him. — SouXEusrs, ye serve) while you thus serve. 

25. 'Abixuv, he that doeth wrong) In actual deed and from the 
heart. — oux. ieri •jrpoeumXri'Jf/ia, there is no respect of persons) Men 
of low rank and poor circumstances often think that they should 
be spared on account of their humble condition. That is denied 



CHAPTEK IV. 



1. TJ dlxaiov xal r^v ieoTijra, justice and equity) Comp. ra avr&, 
[ye masters do] the same things [unto them], Eph. vi. 9, note. 

2. T^ Tf o(f£u%^, in prayer) Eph. vi. 18. 

3. ' H/iUV, for zis) Ch. i. 1. — avol^ri Supav nu XoyoUf would open 
■ the [but Engl. Vers, not of the mouth ; therefore, " a door"] door 

of utterance) i.e. the mouth, Eph. vi. 19 ; Mic. vii. 5. A great 
opportunity is elsewhere called a door [and so Engl. Vers. 
here'], 1 Cor. xvi. 9. — hibi/iai, ha pavipuea, lam in bonds, that 
I may make it manifest^) a paradox ; as^ in 2 Tim. ii. 9 ; Phil, 
i. 12, 13. 

1 0/ ir«T6/!ef, the fathers) The husband is' the head of the wife ; where- 
fore power is principally attributed to the fathers.— V. g. 

' But Engl. Vers, puts a colon after bonds ; so that h» is thus connected 
with ■TrpotrBvxomi'Oh ^ot ms/aeti, — Ed. 



186 COLOSSIANS IV. 4-lff. 

4. 'n;, as) This depends on XaXrieai, to speak, ver. 3. 

5. 'El' (Top/a, in wisdom) Epli. v. 15, note. 

6. ndvTOTi, always) Supply ^'™, let it he. — h x'^l"'^') joined 
with spiritual grace, Eph. iv. 29. — dXari) with the salt of wisdom. 
[Lest there should be anything corrupt and tainted under it. — 
V. g.J — iihUai) \hy your knowing how']. The infinitive used 
as an ablative case. 

7. To, -/.ar e/ih, the things concerning me) Eph. vi. 21. 

8. Vvip rrk -Ttipl v/iuv) yvSire ra, vtpl ij/iaiv is found in Al. Colb. 
7, etc. It has been transferred to this place from Eph. vi. 22. 
See App. Crit. Ed. ii.' on this passage. The two epistles 
[Ephesians and Colossians] truly have many points of resem- 
blance to one another, but yet so as that the things that need 
to be changed are changed in each respectively (mutatis mu- 
tandis). And generally in parallehsms of this sort, which the 
officiousness of transcribers has mixed together [blending the 
parallel readings of two epistles into one], one reading in the 
one place, and another in the other, is the genuine reading. 
Tychicus, and through Tychicus (as it appears) Paul, was to 
learn the state of the Colossians (whence, instead of yvSi [third 
person, viz. Tychicus], yvu [first person, viz. Paul] may be 
also read), just as he learned the state of the Thessalonians 
through Timothy ; that of the Corinthians through Titus ; that 
of the Philippians through Epaphroditus ; and more especially 
did Paul wish to learn that of the Colossians, because he had 
a great ' conflict' on their account [ch. ii. 1]. Moreover the 
knowledge of the Colossians concerning Paul is snfiiciently in- 
dicated (marked), not only by the preceding words, as in the 
Epistle to the Ephesians, but also by those following, which are 
peculiar to this Epistle to the Colossians : vavra Ifuv ympiovei rd 

10. 'Suvai^aXuTos fiov, my fellow-prisoner) This was the state 
of Aristarchus (viz. that of a prisoner), not so Epaphras, ver. 
12 : but it is Epaphras; not Aristarchus, that is spoken of as 
his 'fellow-prisoner' in Philem. ver. 23, 24. Perhaps Epaphras, 
when he came to Kome, was imprisoned, and presently after 

1 TuiJTs Tcl wepl iifiaii is the reading of ABD corrected, (A), Gfg, and so 
Lachm. But yuZ — ifiZi/ in C Vulg. and Rec. Text, and so Tisch. — Ed. 
^ Therefore Beng. rejects the reading yi/are rd ■Trepl fiftav. Ed. 



COLOSSIANS IT. 11-15. 787 

liberated. Paul might have so called Aristarchus, because he 
had been formerly imprisoned. — o ave-^iig Bapvd^a, [sisters son, 
Engl. Vers.J kinsman to Barnabas) Barnabas was better known 
than Mark ; therefore the latter is designated from the former. 
— Tip! ol, concerning whom) namely Mark ; the o5 refers to the 
nominative, not to the oblique case, of Barnabas [though 
Ba.pva&a, immediately precedes]. — IXaBsTi) ye have received. 
Tychicus and Onesimus seem to have borne these command- 
ments to the Colossians, along with this epistle. Ye have re- 
ceived, he says, not, you will receive ; for the ancients suited their 
language to the time when the epistle was read, not to the time 
when it was written, as we should do. Thus, / have written, 
for I write, Philem. ver. 19. — hroXoig, commandments) These 
are put in antithesis to the writing. — eav, if) This is the sum of 
those commandments. 

11. O/ ours;, who are) namely, Aristarchus, Marcus, Jesus. — 
u,6m, alone) of the circumcision. — ■rapriyopla) The propriety of 
the word should be observed; what vapa.fj.uiia is in domestic 
sorrow, irapriyopia is in forensic danger.^ 

12. TiXiioi xal mvXnpoifj/ivoi, perfect and complete) This is in- 
troduced from the former discussion.'' — h ntawl, in all) Construe 
with, ye may stand. 

13. Ticp, for) The reason (aetiologia : see Append.) is properly 
in, he hath. The verb, I bear him record, is modal.^ — C'''^""; 
zeal) lest you should be seduced, ch. ii. 4 : comp. 2 Cor. xi. 2. 

14. 'O /arphg, the physician) He is so called, either because 
he had practised, or was practising, medicine. He calls him 
Luke, as being sufficiently known to Timothy by his name 
alone, in 2 Tim. iv. 11. He calls him the physician here, as 
being unknown to the Colossians. — Ari//,ag, Demas) He alone 
is put without any descriptive epithet ; comp. 2 Tim. iv. 10 : 
but perhaps the reason for this was, that Demas wrote the 
epistle under the dictation of Paul. 

15. Nu/ipai;, Nymphas) of Laodicea, as may be collected from 

' Inasmuch as TLapafiviia comes from ftihs-, word of advice : Uxpyiyopix, 
from ciyopa, theforwm, dyopsva. — Ed. 

' Ch. i. 28, ii. 2, iii. 14 Ed. 

' Expression of feeling ; opposed to categorical. See Append, on ' modus,' 
' modahs.' — ^Ed. 



188 COLOSSIANS IV. 16-18. 

this passage. The house of Philemon was open to the congre- 
gations of believing Colossians, Philem. ver. 2. 

16. 'AvaymeSri, shall be read) publicly, in the church, Comp. 
1 Thess. V. 27 ; Rev. i. 3 ; Deut. xxjd. 11. — n imsToXri, the 
epistle) this very one. — mineare, cause) So also 1 Thess. as 
above. — rrtv ex Aaodixilag, the one from Laodicea) Mill is of 
opinion that the Epistle to the Ephesians is intended, -which 
was to be got from Laodicea, and to be brought to Colosse. It 
is certainly not without a reason that Paul mentions the town 
from which the epistle was to be procured, rather than those 
to whom he sent it. ' 

17. E/Wt-e, say) Speak ye, in my name, as witnesses. This 
was more affecting than if he had addressed Archippus himself. 
And perhaps Archippus, a minister, was prevented from going 
to the public assembly by weak health or old age. For that he 
was near the end of his career, may be inferred from the word 
fidjil, Philem. ver. 2. Moreover it is not the different overseers 
of the Church, but the Church itself, which is commanded to 
speak to Archippus. Therefore the epistle was directed to the 
Church, although its subject is very sublime. [Why then are 
laymen, as they are called, to he prevented from reading the 
Scriptures ? — V. g.J — ?ji/ <!rapiXou^i;, which thou hast received) by 

' a mediate calling [i.e. through the mediate instrumentality of 
men, who ordained him] ; for there does not follow, from the 
Lord, but in the Lord. 

18. 'O aeitatsfi^x;, the salutation) Paul adds this verse with his 
own hand, acknowledging that all which goes before, proceeded 
from himself. — fivij/iovfOire, be mindful) especially in prayer, 
ver. .% 



ON THE FIRST 



EPISTLE TO THE THESSALONIANS. 



CHAPTER I. 

1, Ilai/Xoff, Paul) Paiil, in this epistle, which was the first 
of all that he wrote, uses neither the title of an apostle, nor any 
other, because he writes most famiharly to the godly Thes- 
salonians, who did not require a preface regarding his apostolic 
authority, eh. ii. 6. 

The divisions of the epistle are as follows : — 

I. The Inscription, L 1. 

II. In the course of the discussion, he celebrates 

(makes honourable mention of) the grace of 
God towards the Thessalonians, ver. 2, et 
seqq. ; adding a notice of the sincerity of him- 
self and his colleagues, ii. 1 ; and of the 



obedience of the Thessalonians, 


. 13, 14 


in. He then declares, 

1. His desire, 

2. His solicitude,, . 

3. His joy, with his prayer, 


ii. 17 

iii. 1 

6, 7, 10, 11 



190 1 THESSALOMANS I. 2, 3. 

IV. He exhorts them to progress, 

1. In hohness, . . . . iv. 1, 2 

2. In brotherly love, combined with pru- 
dence, . . . . 9, 10, 11, 12 

V. He teaches and exhorts them, 

1. Concerning them that are asleep, 13, 14 

2. Concerning the times, . . v. 1, 2 

VI. He adds miscellaneous exhortations, v. 12, 13, 

14, 15 ; with prayer and consolation, . 23, 24 

VH. Conclusion, ... 25, 26, 27, 28 

There is a kind of unmingled sweetness in this epistle, which, 
by a reader not accustomed to the expression of sweet affections, 
is less relished than the others, that act upon the palate with a 
certain degree of harshness. The expectation of the coming of 
Christ among the Thessalonians was unclouded. So exalted 
was their condition, and so clear of impediments and encum- 
brances (unencumbered) was the state of Christianity among 
them, that they were able hourly to look for the Lord Jesus. 
The epistles to them were written before the others ; afterwards 
various evils crept into the churches. — QisgaXovixiut, of the Thes- 
salonians) Jac. Mehmingius says, " In the memory of oui 
fathers, there were two Greeks, first among the Moravian 
brethren, afterwards in Belgium, who asserted, that even now 
both of St Paul's epistles to the Thessalonians are well preserved 
by them in autograph."— Hist, baptismi, A. 1647, Germanice 
edita, p. 739. — h, in) Union with God is indicated. 

2. Mveiav — adiaXimTcag, mention — unceasingly) Comp. Eom. 
i. 9 ; 2 Tim. i. 3. 

3. 'T/iSiv, your) This depends on rri; mariui, of faith, (Ac. — 
IpyoM — x.om\j — bmfj.onii, work — labour — patience) These have 
the force of epithets, joined to 'faith', 4ove,' 'hope.' Work is 
opposed to mere empty words [iv Xoyiji /io'vov, in word only, ver. 5], 
and in the singular signifies something lasting and efficacious, 
which faith has in itself, exertising itself in the very fact of be- 



1 THESSALONIANS I. 4-6. 191 

lieving, not proceeding merely from love. — 'xoVou, Idbow) in 
spiritual and external acts of kindness. Those who evade all 
exertion that gives them trouble, in consideration of their own 
interest and quiet, love little. \Some one may say, Who will pro- 
cure for me leisure to undertake this labour ? Nay, hut heware of 
losing time in the indulgence of sloth, in protracting social enter- 
tainments longer than is proper, and in vain conversation; and 
you will find abundance of time for performing the labour of love. 
— ^V. g.] — roD Kupm, of our Lord) Construe this with patience 
[but Engl. Vers, hope in our Lord Jesus, etc.], as at 2 Thess. 
iii. 5 [p'Tro/jiovriv rou Xpidrou, the patience of Christ"] : as I might say, 
the heavenly devotion of sighs [meaning, The heavenly devotion 
expressed by sighs : so the patience of our Lord, i.e. Patient] 
Perseverance for the name of Christ. — 'i/i'Trpoehv, in the sight) 
This is construed with fivri/ioviUvTig, remembering. 

4. E/'^oVes, [we] knowing) Construed with we give thanks, ver., 
2. — a,di'k<poi nyairniLimi iivh ©sou, brethren beloved by God) Comp. 
2 Thess. ii. 13. — ixXcy^v, election) 1 Cor. i. 27, note. 

5. "On, because) This because extends its power beyond this 
verse. — ilg u/i&s) so far as you are concerned [in your case]. — h, 
in) These words refer both to the teachers, as appears by compar- 
ing the end of this verse, and to the Thessalonians, by comparing 
the following verse. — h duvd//,ii, in power) for example, in reference 
to (having the effect of producing) faith. — iv nviv//,ari 'Aylui) in 
the Holy Ghost, and His saving operation, for example, having 
the effect of producing love ; also in His miraculous operation. — 
h -irXripofoplcf., bome along in full' course (pleno latu) [in full as- 
surance]) for example, in reference to (producing) hope, ver. 3. 
— o'iiari, ye know) E/'&Vfs, knowing, in ver. 4, corresponds to 
o'lban here. Both [Paul, Sylvanus, and Timothy, on one 
hand, and the Thessalonians on the other] knew. — ohi, what 
sort of persons) imparting to you the word with joy.— S/ ii//,a,g, 
for your sakes) that we might gain you. 

6. Mi/jt,7)Tal, imitators [followers]) Imitators [Followers] be- 
come ru'!roi, types, patterns [ensamples], ver. 7. — rou Kupiou, of the 
Lord) Christ, who acted as the apostle^ of the Father, brought 



i. 3, 4.— V. g. 
2 Heb. iii 1.— Ed. 



192 1 THESSALONIANS I. 7-10. 

the word from heaven, and taught it under adversities. — /iiri, 
with) Construe this with having received (^Si^d/jimi). 

7. TuTTous/ types, patterns) Ensamples of faith ; see presently, 
and in the following verse. 

8. Tap, for) The intensive particle.— if ^%)jra;) was given 
(spread) abroad with a clear sound. — roii Kuplou, of the Lord) 
Christ. —ugTi, so that) It is lawful to speak where the subject is 
the conversion of souls. Paul takes this for granted ; and he 
himself would have taken also the subject of his remarks from 
the conversion of the Thessalonians, had not others known the 
fact already before, and spoken about it. — XaXiTv r/, to speak any- 
thing) concerning your faith, ver. 9. 

9. Tlifl n/Luv, concerning us) both teachers and believers [both 
us who taught, and you who believed]. — douXiLiiv &i(fi, to serve 
God) The Thessalonians are thus distinguished from the Gen- 
tiles ; so also from the Jews, in the following verse. — xal aXriSiv^, 
and true) This denotes the truth of [His] nature. 

10. Kal ava/j,hii\i, and to wait for) The compound, am/Lemv, 
is applied to Him who has so gone away, as that He is 
about to come [again], John xiv. 3, note; Acts i. 11, note. I 
do not altogether deny the return, but I say that the coming is 
elegantly used for His return, because the glorious coming has 
very many things altogether new connected vnth it. [To be 
waiting for [Him], is the most certain characteristic of the true 
Christian. — V. g.] — ov ^yeipsv ix vixpiuv, whom He raised from 
the dead) The pre-eminent (palmarium) argument is here 
brought in, from which [viz. His resurrection] it is evident, that 
Jesus is the Son of God. — pvi/ji^ivov, Who deliverer) Christ once 
sXuTpwdaTo, hath redeemed us. He alway pusrai, delivers us. — awi 
Ttjg hpyrii rrn lp-)(p(ihrii, from the wrath to come) The wrath 
comes at the last judgment, ch. v. 9. 

1 The Germ. Vers, expresses rvvou in the singular; a reading which, by 
the margin of both Ed., is held of equal authority with the plural. — ^E. B. 

BD(A) corrected, df Vulg. Memph. Theb. read riixoi/. So Lachm. and 
Tisch. ACG^, Later Syr., and Rec. Text, have riJxoyc. — F.o. 



1 THESSALONIANS II, 1-3. 198 



CHAPTER II. 



1. Tap, for) This refers to ch. i. 5, 6 ; for what was there laid 
down as the proposition, is now taken up again to be discussed, 
and that, too, regarding Paul and his companions, ver. 1-12 ; 
regarding the Thessalonians, ver. 13-16. — ou xiv^, not vain) but 
full of power. 

2. JJpo'iroi.UvTii, having suffered before) that which might have 
deterred others from preaching. 

3. Toip, for) For occurs again, ver. 5. There is a double 
reason assigned (JEtiologia), a, in the thesis, concerning their 
(his and his companions') regular and constant practice ; jS, in 
the hypothesis, how they behaved (proceeded) among the Thes- 
salonians, ver. 5 and the following verses ; comp. with 2 Cor. i. 
12, concerning his general and special mode of proceeding to- 
wards others. — wapdnXrisig, exhortation) The whole preaching of 
the Gospel is so called, seasoned as it is with the sweetness of 
sufferings ; see ver. 2, with which comp. 2 Cor. i. 3, et seqq. 
TlapdxXrisi:, Zuspruch, has an extensive meaning ; when he 
rouses the slothful, it is exhortation QjrapdxXrisii) : when he ap- 
plies balm to sorrow, it is comfort or consolation (wapafiudiov) ; 
comp. ver. 11, note. — oux — ol5i — otire, not — nor — nor) He dis- 
avows evil intentions, in relation to God, himself, and others. 
The antithesis to this is similarly universal, in the following 
verse, which should be compared with ver. 10 [where see the 
note on the similar threefold relation]. — oux ix vXdvni, not from 
[of] deceit) namely, is ; comp. we speak, in the present, ver. 4. — 
audi fg d>ca6ap(s!a;, nor from \oi'\ uncleanness) This uncleanness is 
when the fruit of the flesh is sought after : comp. Phil. i. 16. 
The fruit of the flesh is somewhat subtile : Eigenheit, self-seek- 
ing (seeking one's own honour or gain), peculiarity.^ Concern- 
ing its antithesis, purity, see Acts xv. 9. 

' Beng., I conceive, contrasts /iMr%, in the sense of singleness of aim for 
God's glory and Christ's, Matt. v. 8, with carnal seeking of self, the want 
of a pure intention, oujj iyvZs, not purely, Phil. i. 16. Comp. James iv. 8, 
Purify your hearts, ye double-minded. — Ed 

VOL. IV. N 



194 1 THESSALONIANS II. 4-7, 

4. AihoKiiiaaiiiSa, we have been proved [approved]) Eefer to 
this word, do-/.ifj,a(ovTi, who proveih and trieth, which presently 
occurs. — apiffxovrig) careful to please. 

5. 'Ev Xoyui xo'Kaxiiag, in flattering words) The antithesis is in 
ver. 7, 8 ; even as a cloke of covetousness has its antithesis in 
ver. 9 ; and the word glory, ver. 6, has its antithesis in ver. 10. 
— xoXaxilag, of flattery) which they chiefly use who are anxious 
to please men. — xa^ijg o'idan — ©sJs /idprui, even as ye know — God 
is witness) These two clauses [neither — ye know ; nor — witness] 
correspond to each other, just as the double confirmation of the 
third member of the sentence [nor of men sought we glory], 
which is placed in the next verse, follows in the same ver. 10. 
He appeals to men, as the witnesses of a matter generally known ; 
to God, as the witness of a matter which is concealed in the 
heart ; to men and God, as the witnesses of a matter in part 
generally known, and partly concealed. — irpo^dsii) with the spe- 
cious pretext (cloke), under which we might cover avarice. 

6. 'At' fiXKm, from others) those, to wit, who would have ad- 
mired us, if we had treated you more haughtily. — duvd/tmi) 
when we might have, although we might have. — h . ^dpii umi, 
I^Engl. Vers, been burdensome] been in honour and authority) 133 
Qdpoi;, weight, dignity, authority ; the splendour which the majesty 
of the Lord communicates to His ambassador. Ao'^a, glory, in 
the preceding verse, is nearly akin to it ; comp. ^dpoi io^m, 2 
Cor. iv. 17. Brightness produces a weighty or powerful effect 
(gravis) on the sight, as a weight upon the sense of touch, and 
a loud sound on the hearing ; and hence such things are said to 
be borne or not to be borne,^ Heb. xii. 20. The conjugate, 
im^aprjsai, presently occurs, ver. 9. Both ideas, weight [autho- 
rity], and a burden, must be included. But the apostles re- 
frained from both. 

7. "Hmoi, gentle) A very sweet word, which is wont to be ap- 
plied chiefly to parents and physicians. It is opposed to flattery 
[ver. 5] : for he is called ^'mos, who has true gentleness. — h /isffy 
uffewK, in the midst of you) like a hen surrounded by her chickens. 
They did not act as if from the chair (ex cathedrS,, from the autho- 
ritative chair), which is said to belong to Peter, and which calls 

' ovK sOiiio-, they were not able (o ^enr. nroperly said of a weight. — Ed. 



1 THESSALONIANS II. 8-13. 195 

the style of its court apostolical. — r^opos) a mother, and at the 
same time a nurse. Weigh well the expression, her own. The 
spiritual are analogous to the natural affections, ver. 11 ; 1 
Tim. V. 1, 2. 

8. Ol/rws, i/ieipo/iivm i//,uv, ivbonou/jbivj and seeing that it was so, 
i.e. inasmuch as we felt the strongest affection for you, we were 
ready, etc. The text has been at once suited for (pronunciationem) 
correct delivery, whilst in the marks of punctuation a more 
careful stopping of the sentence is equivalent to a note. The 
same word, //is;poKra/, is found in Job iii. 21. Ei^oxoD/ieii, even 
without the augment, may still be the imperfect tense : in the 
whole^ of Paul's statement all the facts proceed in the preterite, 
which the versions here also retain. — ■^u^oig, souls) Our soul 
desired as it were to enter into your soul. 

lO.'^ 'ns off/ws -/.a,! hixa'iui xal afjiy's/i'jrTuc, how holily and justly and 
unblameably) Those who seek no glory from men attain to this 
character, that they conduct themselves holily in divine things, 
justly towards men, unblameably in respect of themselves. — roT; 
msnuouiiv, among [in the eyes of, towards] you that believe) 
although we might not appear to others to be so. 

11. 'fie sua. 'ixasTov, how every one) They do not act in this way 
who seek [their own] glory, ver. 6. — w; itarnp, as a father) Mild 
gravity is the characteristic of fathers. — irapa-/.aXo\J\iTeg, exhorting) 
This depends on eyi\iridri//,iv, we became (behaved), ver. 10. 
UapaxXtisig, exhortation, rouses one to do something willingly; 
"Trapa/jijiiSiov, consolation, to do it joyfully ; rJ /iaprvpei'fSot.i, earnest 
entreaty, testifying [cliarging^, to do it with awe. 

12. BaeiXilav xal do^av. His kingdom and glory) A magnificent 
combination. 

13. A;d TouTo, for this cause) i.e. because you have had such 
teachers. — ei^apigTov/^iv, we give thanks) The naked and cate- 
gorical sentence would be. You have received [the word of God]. 

' In the last Ed. of the Gnomon, published at Berlin, and in the 
Tubingen Bd., 1773, I find nota instead of tota : the translation in that 
case would be, in a well-known narrative. Tota seems to suit the sense 
here Tb. 

Tota is the reading of Ed. 2, quarto, a.d. 1752, and is doubtless the true 
reading. — Ed. 

' 'Ifctif fiaprvfts K»i i ©to';) ye are witnesses, and what is of much more 



196 1 THESSALONIANS II. U-16. 

Affection has rendered the language modaP by adding thanks- 
giving. — vapaXa^ivTig) ■ita.fiaXaiJ.^avia signifies sirrvply receiving; 
iiyQiji,a,i, includes also in \hQ sigm^caiion, pleasure and inclination 
in receiving!' — oh Xoyov avipuirmv, not the word of man) This is an 
explanation of what he just now said, " the word of God." Ye 
have received it, nanaely, not the word of men, etc. — os, wlw) viz. 
God,° who thereby shows [viz. by its effectual working in you] 
that the word is truly the word of God, ch. iv. 8, 9 ; Acts xiv. 
3. — hipyiTrai, works effectually) Gal. iii. 5. [/if, for instance, 
worketh in you patient endurance, ver. 14. — V. g.] 

14. Tap, for) Divine working is most of all seen and felt in 
affliction. — h rri 'loudaicf, in Judea) The Jewish churches were 
distinguished examples to all the others. — ra avT&,the same things) 
So, aurhv, the same [conflict], Phil. i. 30. The sameness of the 
fruit, the sameness of the afflictions, the sameness of the experi- 
mental proofs and characteristics of believers, in all places and 
at all times, afford an excellent criterion of the truth of the 
Gospel. — Idiav, your own) Matt. x. 36; Lukexiii. 33, at the end. 
— (nj/ji<puXiTSJv, fellow-countrymen) [liter. " persons of the same 
tribe."] These were Thessalonians, Jews and Gentiles. Acts 
xvii. 5. 

15. ' Amxriivdvrav, who have killed) This is indeed the sin of 
the whole people, their greatest sin, and one not yet acknow- 
ledged. — ■n-po(prirag, the prophets) This word is construed with who 
have killed. That former guilt of theirs [in killing the prophets] 
woke up in all its strength then especially, when they slew the 
Lord Himself. — ^/^as, us) the apostles. — exdiu^dvrciiv, who have 
cast out by persecution) Luke xi. 49, note. — /iri apiexovTav) not 
seeking to please. — havTlm, and are adverse [contrary]) The Jews 
regarded the Gentiles with aversion, and were unwilling at that 
time that the word should be preached to them. 

16. AaX^ffa;, to speak) Less is said than he wishes to he 

consequence, God is witness. The language is not inconsistent with pro- 
priety, as the Jews falsely represent it to be. See Josh. xxii. 22 ; 1 Sam. 
xii. 5, as showing whence it is derived. — V. g. 

' See App. under the title, " Modalis Sermo." 

2 « When ye received the word — ye welcomed it." The distinction of the 
verbs is lost in Engl. Vers. — Ed. 

' But Engl. Vers, makes the antecedent of o(, not Qtis, but Xoyo; : which 
effectually/ worketh — Ed. 



1 THESSALONIANS II. 17-19. 197 

understood by Ta-^rtlmgig. — elg rh avairXripuieai, that they may Jill wp) 
Obstinacy against receiving the word above all fills up tbe mea- 
sure of sins. — ain-£n, their) the sins of the Jews. — irdwoTi) as 
always, so now also. — iig tsXos, [tending] to the end) A sad 
closing catastrophe [Engl. Vers, to the uttermost']. The same 
phrase occurs at Luke xviii. 5. Under Herod Agrippa the 
Jewish state had begun again to flourish, but after his death, 
Acts xii. 23, the Eoman procurators returned. Cumanus and 
Felix, and their successors, more and more harassed the Jews. 
This epistle was written in the year of our Lord 48, and about 
that time a tumult arose at Jerusalem during the feast of the 
passover, and an immense multitude were slain : some say, more 
than thirty thousand. The wrath of God closely pursued these 
miserable men, and ilg rsXoj, [at the last] at length, destroyed their 
city and temple. 

17. 'AdiX(po>, brethren) He begins a new division of the epistle. 
— a,mp(pa,vigSsvTeg, Jiaving been bereft of you) as parents, in the 
absence of their children. — wphg xaiphv upag, [lit. for the space of 
an hour] for a brief space) naiphg means time indefinitely; upa, a 
definite period, Ex. xiii. 10, iMJlVD? ; lxx., xara, xaipoijg upSiv. — ■ 
IdiTv, to see) 2 Tim. i. 4. 

18. "A'ffaf xal dig) So the LXX. Neh. xiii. 20. — o 'Sarava;, 
Satan) Paul wisely considered that there lurked beneath this the 
first cause of evil — a cause, of which we should have had no 
suspicion otherwise, when reading the history in Acts xvii. 13, 
14. Satan acted by means of wicked men. 

19. Tig yap) So, rig yap, LXX., 1 Sam. xi. 12. — eXmc, x.r.X.) 
our hope, etc. : comp. the end of this verse. It is great praise. 
— erifang xauy^riseug, a crown of [rejoicing] glorying) So LXX., 
Prov. xvi. 31. — xai itLiig, even ye) He does not exclude others : 
he chiefly reckons these among the number. — iv, in) Regarding 
this particle, comp. ch. iii. 13 ; Eom. ii. 16, note \_In the day 
expresses something more than against the day]. So far is hope 
extended ! [So far does his hope reach ! even to the day of 
Christ.] 



ISS 1 THESSALONIANS III. 1-8. 



CHAPTER III. 

1. A;o fi,rix.eri gTeyovres, wherefore no longer being able to forbear) 
This is resumed at ver. 5, as if after a parenthesis. — fiovoi, alone) 
Observe how highly Timothy was esteemed, since at Timothy's 
departure Paul and Silas seemed to themselves to be alone, in- 
asmuch as in a city altogether estranged from Grod. Comp. 
Ord. temp., p. 278 [Ed. 2, p. 239]. 

2. ''Eirifi-^a/iiv, we sent) I and Sylvanus sent. 

3. ^ahtsSai) [that no man should be moved, — seduced and 
cajoled out of his faith] : ealm from siu, to move. Eustathius 
shows, that it is properly applied to dogs, when they fawn by 
wagging the tail ;^ by metaphor sic roO? u-irovXouc xat y,oXaxix(,v(, 
applied to those that are deceitful at heart and prone to flatter ; and 
this is obviously the idea here. For in afflictions, relatives 
and opponents, and the heart itself, mingle their flatteries, and 
when these are overcome, believers are confirmed. — rauraic, in 
these (present) afflictions) ThS present time. — xei/j,i$a, we lie, i.e. 
are set, are appointed unto this) An argument from our calhng : 
comp. ch. v. 9, God Usro, hath appointed us. 

5. 'o irsipd^uv, the tempter) i.e. Satan, ch. ii. 18. The expres- 
sion contains an Euphemism. Often this enemy is near [lurks 
underneath] when one would not think that he is. Comp. at 
Matt. iv. 3. 

6. "Apri, now) Immediately after the arrival of Timothy, he 
writes these things with fresh joy and the most tender affection. 
Consonant with this is the ilayys'Kieafi.hoD, a striking participle. 
— i<!riiToh\J\iri<;, desiring greatly [having a yearning desire]) This is 
the sign of a good conscience. 

7. A/A 7ni — vldTsais, by — faith) Construe this with va.pv/.'KriSri- 
ficv, we were comforted. 

8. Nuv ^w/isn, now we live) now we feel that we are alive. 
The form of testifying the highest joy ; comp. Ps. Ixiii. 4. 

' So Latin ceveo in Persius ; Th. cieo, to move or shake, as aai'i/a from 
Ilia, ctiO). — Ed. 



1 THESSALONIANS III. 10-13.-IV. 1-3. 139 

10. NuxrJj, night) Alluding to his holy thoughts during the 
night, 2 Tim. i. 3. — r& ierip^/iara, the things which are wanting) 
[the deficiency, that which is lacking]. Even the Thessa- 
lonians had points in which they were in need of improvement. 

11. AMg, Himself) Both epistles to the Thessalonians have 
almost aU the several chapters singly sealed and distinguished 
by single breathings of prayer [each chapter sealed with 
its own prayer], ch. v. 23 ; 2 Thess. i. 11, ii. 16, iii. 5, 16. — 
'lijffoDs, Jesus) Prayers and vows are also addressed to Jesus 
Christ ; for the word xci,rsMvai, direct, extends both to Him [as 
the subject] and to the Father : comp. 2 Thess. ii. 16, 17. 

12. 'Tfias, you) whether we come or not. — •^rXsovdeai na! mpis- 
fiusat) On the difference between these two words, comp. 2 Cor. 
iv. 15, note.' — xa,i fiinTg, even we) namely, even as we are full of 
love [towards you]. 

13. MiTot,, with) Construe with h rrt ■zapovglcf, at the coming ; 
comp. 2 Thess. i. 7. — ■rdvTcitv rZv ayiw, ivith all the saints) This 
phrase comprehends angels and the elect of the earth. — auroD, 
His) Christ's, Acts ix. 13. 



CHAPTER IV. 

1. 'Apiexiiv, to please, to show yourselves pleasing, acceptable) 
to the Lord. 

2. napa.yyiXlas, commandments) Paul uses this word at this 
very early time, when writing to the Thessalonians, whose piety 
took it in the right spirit, as did also the piety of Timothy, to 
whom he gives his commands with the greatest sternness. The 
same word occurs, ver. 11, 2 Thess. iii. 4, 6, 10, 12. In ad- 
dressing other churches subsequently, when his authority was 
estabhshed, he uses it very seldom. 

3. 0£X?i/ia, a will) [a thing which God wills]. So ch. v. 18, 
without the article. There are many wills. Acts xiii. 22. — 6) 

* VKeova^u has a positive force : irepiaviia, the force of a comparative : 
The Lord make vou full and even abound. — Ep. 



^00 1 THESSALONIANS IV. 4-C. 

The mark of the subject. — ayiaB/j^hg v/j,uv, your sanctification) 
The word, your [i.e. present sanctification, as contrasted with the 
past], recalls to the memory of the Thessalonians their former 
profane condition. Sanctification especially includes chastity. — 
avh Trii mpvilai, from fornication) Exalted Christians as they 
were, yet they required to be admonished respecting this sin ; 
for the Gentiles had no scruples as to carnal lewdness. 

4. E/Ssva;, should know) o7da, I know, not only denotes know 
ledge, but power of mind [mental self-control so as to], Phil. iv. 
12 : comp. [husbands, dwell with your wives] according to know- 
ledge, 1 Pet. iii. 7. Both are certainly required for matrimonial 
chastity. — exsuo;, vessel) his body, 1 Sam. xxi. 5 ; 1 Cor. vi. 18. 
— xragdai, to possess, is illustrated from Luke xxi. 19. — xa/ r;^^, 
and in honour) The contrary is anihia, disgrace, Eom. i. 26, 24 
[■^S^jj aTiiLiai, affections of dishonour, ix. vile ; &Tii/,dZis6a.i iru/iara, 
to dishonour their bodies]. 

5. M;j £11 -xahi imSu/iiai, not in the lust of concupiscence) As 
concupiscence gains the mastery, it at length waxes strong, so 
as to become a wretched passion and disease, 2 Sam. xiii. 4. — 
TO, 'iSvn, the Gentiles) These are also denoted at ver. 12, 13, by 
different periphrases [" them that are without," ver. 11 : 
' others,' o'l Xomo!, ver. 13], — rd ^i) ildoTa, who know not) Igno- 
rance is the origin of unchastity, Kom. i. 24. [Look at the 
serenity of heaven, and thou wilt conceive a loathing of impurity. 

—y-g-] 

6. TJ /i») v'jrip^a.inty xal rrXtovexriiv) The article rh makes an 
emphatic addition [Epitasis], which falls upon the verb tmp^ai]!- 
eiv. Eustathius explains i^s^/S^i/a/ as, tJ xaff wip^oXfiv aeToyjrieai n\i 
dkvTo;, to miss the mark as to what is in the highest degree neces- 
sary. Therefore Paul does not seem to be speaking here of 
avarice, which however is joined to sins of impurity in Eph. 
V. 5 and Col. iii. 5 (whence also the article makes an Epitasis or 
emphatic addition), and which, as being a capital transgression, 
is called idolatry ; but of the deceptions and arts of adulterers, 
Heb. xiii. 4 ; for the Asyndeton [no copula between slS'itai, ver. 4, 
and rh ij,ri i-n-ep^amiv, ver. 6] indicates that the same subject is 
continued ; and he is speaking of a ' matter' of such a kind, as 
that the blame attached to it is greater than that attached to 
theft, Prov. vi. 30 : and in ver. 7 he returns to the mention of 



1 THESSALONIANS IV. 7-11. 201 

impurity and holiness alone. It is by a Euphemism that the 
apostle does not call it adultery, — h rj3 itpajihan, in the matter or 
business) The article points out the particular business in hand 
at this or that time, 2 Cor. vii. 11. — aSeXfhv, brother) The reason 
assigned (-Etiology) for avoiding the transgression [rh xi-itip^aimv, 
viz. adultery]. — 'ixdixo;, avenger) Heb. xiii. 4, note. — o Kipiog, the 
Lord) Christ, the Judge. 

7. 'Ev ayiagfiif), in sanctification) hwl, for, on account of, rather 
expresses the end ; b, in, the nature or character of the thing 
[viz. of our calling]. 

8. 'O akroiv) he who despiseth this thing. — tIv xat Sovra, 
Who has also given) The word also intimates that a new- 
importance is here added to what immediately precedes. — 
TO JJviufjia aiiroS rh ciyiov ilg u/tSj, IJis Holy Spirit to you) Eph. 
iv. 30.1 

9. Ou ^^s/av £%o^£v, we have no need) Heb. viii. 11.^ — kobi- 
Sa,xroi, taught of God) God imbues [not teaches, strictly] us with 
love by regeneration ; therefore the word taught has a Cata- 
chresis [an application of a word not in its strictly regular sense], 
that it may be opposed to the writing [ypd^in hij,7v\. — tig rh ayanr^i.^, 
with respect to loving) The force of Divine doctrine flows into 
(has its confluence in) love. 

11. ^iXoTi/jLiTdSai rjeuy^d^eiv) that you study (be ambitious) to be 
quiet) An Oxymoron.^ Political ambition is ashamed to be quiet. 
Its opposite is ■Trepnpydi^eeSai [to be busybodies, opposed to, with 
quietness — wor]c\, 2 Thess. iii. 11, 12. It is therefore added 
here, •trpagativ ra 'Ilia, to do your own business. There is, however, 
a strict propriety imparted to the word (piXon/MiisSa.i from ver. 12, 
at the end.* — ipya.Z,i(f6a.i, to labour) It was necessary to mention 
this to men who had acquired a taste for heaven. Men im- 

' 'T|M«f is the reading otBDOfc/: "in vobis" is that of ff and Vulg. ; 
but iifii; of A and Rec. Text. — Ed. 

^ B (erxofiiv') D corrected, G Vulg., later Syr. fff, support the first per- 
son plural. The MS. Amiatinus of Vulg., like B, has the past tense, 
' habuimus.' "ExofttD is Lachmann's reading. But Tisch., as Rec. Text, 
fX^i, with Syr. and Memph. — Ed. 

' See App. The figure by which things contrary fas here ambition and 
quiet) are acutely and wisely joined together. 

* i.e. " Having nothing which you need " to solicit ambitiously from 
others Ed. 



202 1 TIIESSALONIANS IV. 12-15. 

mersed in the world labour of their own accord. The admoni- 
tion increases in force at 2 Thess. iii. 6, 7. 

12. 'E,l(S-)(r\ijj6ms, becomingly) Lest men should be able to say 
that Christianity leads to sloth and poverty. The opposite is 
the disorderly (unruly), v. 14 ; 2 Thess. iii. 6. — fin^ivbg) of 
nothing, which you require to solicit from those without. This 
is the highest degree of lumpla, i.e. freedom from entanglement 
in matters of property, and is to be desired by a Christian, on 
account of the liberty which it bestows. 

13.' "Iva firi Xwrrriah, that ye sorrow not) for those who have 
lately died, being in the faith ; for hope in regard to them is 
well-grounded [is a valid hope]. The efficacy of the Christian 
religion is even in an especial degree evident from this circum- 
stance, that it does not take away or embitter, but sweetly 
soothes (modifies), regret for the dead ; the finest of the affec- 
tions, whether their death has taken place recently or in former 
times.^ 

14. Tap, for) The Scripture, from among so many topics of 
consolation in regard to death, generally brings forward this one 
concerning the resurrection, as principal and pre-eminent. — 
A'rUaiie, died) This word is usually applied to Christ ; whereas 
to fall asleep is applied to believers, 1 Cor. xv. 3, 6, 18, 20, 51. 
— ovru) in like manner, as Jesus Himself rose, so we believe 
that we shall be conducted alive by the path of death. — Si& roD 
'Ijio-oC, in Jesus) This is construed with xoi/xriShrag,^ who have 
fallen asleep. For the verb, will lead [bring], which follows, has 
accordingly the with Him standing in apposition, and answering 
to the words, bia tou 'lijaoD, in Jesus. 

15. 'T/jlTv) To you, who are worthy of knowing this. — Xlyo/iit 
Iv Xo'/ijj Kuphi; we say by the word of the Lord) The Lord, the 
Christ, has spoken to us ; we have spoken to you : comp. 
1 Kings XX. 35, nini nana, h \6yM Kvplov, by the word of the 
Lord. Phrases such as these are used in respect of a matter 
which is now for the first time opened up (disclosed). [Many 

^ Xlepl rZu x.ix.oi(t,vi[iha«, concerning those who have fallen askep) This is 
consolation offered in a case of recent grief, — not for those who have been 
long ieai.—Not. Crit. 

* 'E?i5r/3«, hope) and joy. — V. g. 

' Lit. Those lulled to sleep by Jeaua. —Ed. 



] THESSALONIANS IV. 15. 203 

matters connected with an altogether extraordinary subject, which 
would be in vain sought for elsewhere, are here discussed. — ^V. g.J 
— rjiiui, we) The saints, by speaking thus in their own age, have 
greatly added to the obligation resting on those of following ages 
to look for the Lord. The we is presently explained by the 
following words, who are alive, and further on, who remain. — 
01 ZaivTii 01 'jripiXeiiro/iivoi, who live, who remain [who live, surviv- 
ing]) So also ver. 17. This is equivalent to an apposition. 
Who live, is an antithesis to, who sleep. There is at the same 
time intimated the small number of those who live, compared 
with the multitude of the dead ; likewise the good condition of 
those who are asleep, so that the living may desire to be 
gathered to them. Men of all ages conjointly have a lively 
anticipation of [realize to themselves the immediate fulfilment 
of] some one thing ; ^ and so believers, who are now long wait- 
ing, and who regard themselves in the light of persons who are 
to live at the coming of the Lord, have spoken in accordance 
with this their character (spake in the manner that became 
the character they represented, viz. those who shall be alive 
at the Lord's coming). Those who live, and those who remain 
till the coming of the Lord, are the same, and these are denoted 
by the pronoun we. Each generation, which lives at this or 
that time, occupies, during that period of their life, the place ol 
those who are to live at the time of the coming of the Lord.^ 
So the ice is put here, as elsewhere the names Cajus and Titius,^ 
and that, too, with the greater propriety, because believers of 
that age [i.e. of each successive past age] have -not yet been 
allowed distinctly to know the vast period of time to elapse tiU 

^ Or ' repraesentant ' means, Men of different ages aiming conjointly at 
some one object (for instance, the House of Commons in successive ages 
seeking civil liberty and good government) are, joint representatives of that 
one idea : and so the men of each particular age might regard themselves as 
the representatives of it in their particular age. — Ed. 

' That is, they are called on to live in daily and hourly expectation of 
the Lord's coming in their time, since the time of His coming was left un- 
certain for that very purpose, Matt. xxv. 13. Such ' watchers ' in each 
generation are representatives of those who shall actually be found alive 
when He comes. — Ed. 

' Imaginary persons put in law as representatives to exemplify some 
principle. — Ed. 



204 1 THESSALONIANS IV. 1G_]8. 

the end of the world. The present tense in both participles 
is in reference to [i.e. in order to suit] the coming of the 
Lord itself, as in Acts x. 42 ["Trap^y/s/Xsv xttpu^ai on aM; etSTiv], 
and elsewhere frequently. Hence Paul has not hereby asserted 
that the day of Christ is so near ; see 2 Thess. ii. 2, 3. A 
.similar phrase is found at Eom. xiii. 11 ; 1 Cor. xv. 51 ; James 
V. 9 ; 1 Pet. iv. 5, 6 ; Matt. xxiv. 42, note.— toI; Kupiou, of the 
Lord) Jesus Christ. — o!i /ji^ri ipSdga/Mv, we shall not [preveni\ get 
before or anticipate) This assurance sweetly counteracts the 
fear of the survivors regarding the dead, and reckons the ad- 
vantage of the former, including himself, not to be greater than 
that of those who are asleep. 

16. Aurfs, Himself) A word of high import. — sv xiXiue/iaTi, 
h ipuvri ap^ayyi'kov, xal h eaXiriyyi 0£oD, with a shout, loith the 
voice of the archangel, and with the trumpet of God) A gradation 
(ascending climax), comprehending three things. — x.iXi\i(SiJ,a is 
applied, when a multitude is ordered to do something, for 
example, by a herald. It is not used by the Lxx. — ap-)(a.yyi\o[i, 
the archangel) Michael, or some other. The article is not in- 
serted.- — h eakirtyyi 0eou, with the trumpet of God) and there- 
fore great. — vpurov) previously^ 

17. ° Afio) Ammonious, a/^a /aev sSti ^povmiv Ivippri/ia' OittoD ds, 
Torixov, " d//,a is an adverb of time, o/iou of place." You see here 
the propriety of the apostle's language. — ilg aspa, in, or rather, 
[caught up] into the air) The ungodly will remain on the earth. 
The godly, having been acquitted, will be made assessors in the 
judgment. — xal ovrcii, and so) When Paul has written what 
needed to be written for consolation, he treats of [lit. he wraps 
up] the most important matters in this brief style. — •jranore, 
[ever] always) without any separation. — eiv Kvplui, with the 
Lord) not only in the air, but in heaven, whence He came. — 
ie6/j,iki, we shall he) both [the living and those raised from the 
dead]. 

18. Hapaiiay.iiTi aXk^Xoui, comfort one another) in your grief. 
Comp. also ver. 11. 

' Previously to the act of the living along with the dead saints being 
cauffht up. Not, " the dead in Christ shall rise before the other dead," as it 
is often explained. — Ed. 



1 THESSALONIANS V. 1-3. ?05 



2 



CHAPTER V. 

1. ntpl rSiv %foniJv, of the times) When these things shall happen, 
which I have mentioned, Kaipoi, seasons, are parts yjfmm, of 
the times?' — oi ^fs/ai' '^x^ri, ye have no need) Those who watch 
do not require to be told when the hour will come ; for they 
are always ready. 

2. 'as xXirrng, as a thief) 2 Pet. iii. 10. A usual expression 
with the apostles, agreeing with the parable of the Lord, Matt, 
xxiv. 43. — iv m%Ti, in the night) Refer those words to a thief, just 
now mentioned [not, the day of the Lord cometh in the night ; 
but, as a thief cometh in the night'\. The night is there, where 
there is unconcern and quiet ; comp. however. Matt. xxv. 6 
— ouTug) so, as we shall describe in the following verse. Comp. 
so after' for, Matt. i. 18, [" The birth of Christ was so ; for 
when His mother Mary was espoused," etc. : ourug riv. ft,ir)eTevhlei]g 
"Z&p, etc.J — 'ifyjTai, comes) The present expressing a sudden 
event* with great emphasis. So ver. 3, Sudden destruction 
cometh; comp. Luke xxi. 34. 

3. Aiyum, they say) all the others (the rest, o'l Xoivol), who are 
of darkness, ver. f), 6 [ch. iv. 13]. — ilpfjvri xai aefdXiia, peace 
and safety) They will regard it as an established fact, that the 
world is eternal. 



' Xpoiios gives the notion of indefinite time ; Kctipog, the time, the op- 
portune point of time, when a thing should be done. Ammonius says well, 
xotipos indicates quality (■jroiorvymi) of time ; and xpivo;, quantity (^roiro'- 
Tmct). — Ed. 

* " At midmight there was a cry made, Behold the Bridegroom cometh ;'' 
which seems to imply that it shall not be merely in a figurative, but in a 
literal sense, that the Lord shall come in the night. — Ed. 

' Here, however, yap, for, is thought to be better omitted by the margin 
of both Ed. The Germ. Vers., for the sake of connection, puts nemlich. — 
E. B. 

AG/ff, Iren. 329, Cypr. 326, and Syr. Version, omit ycip, and so Tisch. 
Lachm. reads Se, with BD(A), Memph. and later Syr. Rec. Text reads yxp, 
with Vulg._ED. 



2ue ] THESSALONIANS V. 6-10. 

^ 6. Ka/ \ifi(pot[Mv, and let us be sober) This denotes the state, 
amvn({>o), i-/.vri<pu, the act, 2 Tim. ii. 26 ; 1 Cor. xv. 34. — vjjpw is 
a milder term. 

7. Mi6uex6fjbmi — /ledirjdiv, those who are drunken, are drunken) 
Mi6{iexo/iai denotes the act, /j,i6{iu, the state or habit; so in 
xahvScj'-'.g — xakudo-jei, the Ploce^ is apparent. For first, xcchu- 
^oK«shas the inchoative fower, falling into sleep; then xakuSousi 
expresses continuance, they go on in sleep. — mxrh;) in the night 
time, for the most part. Even constant somnolency and 
drunkenness render the very night vs^orse. Such persons are 
averse (shrink) from the day. 

8. 'EXm'Scs eurnplac, the hope of salvation) Kefer to this the 
next verse. 

9. "Bhro, hath appointed) So the Lxx., Ps. Ixvi. 9, roij St/jblvou 
rnv -^vxh" /Aou ih ^w'ji', wlio hath placed (holdeth) my soul in life ; 
Judg. i, 28, 'ihro rbv XavavaTov eig (pofov, put the Canaanite to 
tribute ; where indeed the Vatican reading has Imlriei, but 'iSiro 
was a phraseology certainly not unusual with the transcriber. 
— 'jripmoirjsiv eairripiag) Salvatiofi of that sort is intended, by 
which they who are saved are taken out (excepted) from the 
multitude of those that perish.^ 

10. ' AmSuvovTog, who hath died) That appointment for a pecur- 
liar preservation (yrepmolrigiv euirripiai), consisted in the death 
of Christ itself. — I'ln xahuda,u.sv, whether we sleep) as to the body, 
in natural sleep or in death. — a/ji,a) at the same time as the 
coming takes place. Or are we rather to take it, together with 
Him, in the same place where, and in the same manner as. He 
lives ? I cannot think so. The whole subject is " concerning 
the times " (ver. 1), and at the end of the discussion the dis- 
course returns to those things with which it began. They had 
always set before themselves the coming of Christ as a thing 
near at hand. So also does Lubinus explain it. 

^ K«! ob ft,^ ix-Ovyuvi, and they shall not escape) how anxiously soever 
they might desire it. — V. g. 

2 The figure by which the same word is twice put, once in the simple 
sense, next to express an attribute of it. Append. — Ed. 

' See note on Eph. i. 14, as to the meaning of ■wipmomat;. It is said 
of that which remains, when all else is lost. So here of the elect saved, 
when all others are lost. — Ed. 



1 THESSALONIANS V. 12-19. 207 

12. ' Eptiiru/j,iv, we pray or beseecK) Paul beseeches, making the 
cause of those labouring in the word as it were his own : an- 
other verb follows, viz. 'jrapaxaXoiJfitv, we exhort, ver. 14. — eldsmi) 
to know, to have respect and a regard for ; a metonymy of the 
antecedent for the consequent. — KomZvrag, labouring) Some- 
times one and the same person may labour, vpoiaraaSai, be over 
or preside, voi/hnTv, admonish ; sometimes different persons, ac- 
cording to the variety of gifts. To labour is not only the genus, 
but it denotes different functions, which are not comprehended 
under presiding and admonishing ; for example, Rom. xvi. 2. 
Phosbe was fpoaTdrig, a superintendent ; on the contrary, ver. 12, 
Tryphcena and Tryphosa had indeed laboured, but they had 
not been irpogTciriSeg, they did not preside or act as superintendents. 
Acting as superintendent implies authority ; vovknTv, to admonish, 
denotes zeal and skill, which one exercises more than another. 

13. 'Ell ia.vToT';, among yourselves) Mutually. 

14. ToD$ ardxTovc, the disorderly [unrulyy) Such persons were 
not wanting, how flourishing soever that church might be. 
And aroi^la, disorder, presently increased, 2 Thess. iii. 6, 11. — 
am^sgh) pay attention to, IDB', avTi^ig^ai, to have regard to, 
Prov. iv. 6. — irpJs 'xawa.i;, to all) There is no believer to whom 
long-suffering (jiay.po6\jiJ,ia, implied in /iaxpodufiiiri) may not be 
shown ; none, to whom a believer ought not to show it. Many 
show it more to strangers than to their own families, more to 
the powerful than to the more humble ; but it should be shown 
towards all. 

15. 'Op&Ti, see) Let every man watch over himself and the 
other (his neighbour). A person who has received an injury, 
and is, in a passion, sees too much ; his neighbours therefore 
ought to see (for him). 

18. 'Ev 'iravrl, in every thing) although it may seem adverse ; 
[and that, too, not only generally, but, like David, in particular 
cases. — V. g.]— roDro, this) that ye should give thanks. — 6sXri/jt,a, 
will) which is always good, always keeping in view your salva- 
tion in Christ Jesus. 

19. TJ miu/ia) the Spirit, i.e. spiritual gifts. A Metonymy. 
— fiil s^muTt, quench not) Where the Spirit is. He burns ; there- 
fore He ought not to be quenched, either in ourselves or in the 
case of others. 



208 1 TtlESSALONIANS V. 20-23. 

20. XipopTirelas, prophesyings) Which should be exercised 
more than the other gifts ; 1 Cor. xiv. 1, 39. — /t)j s^ouhvirri, do 
not despise) The other gifts were more showy. 

21. IlaiTa') all things, viz. spiritual things, which, without 
any carelessness and undue curiosity, you may be liable to 
consider as in any way belonging to you, and as not exceeding 
your ability. 

22. 'Affi •jravrhs I'Jdoug -Tronrjpod, from every bad species or kind 
of thought, act, or word) Species, in the sense, " appearance of 
evil" [as Engl. Vers.], would be ildo; TOT irovrifoij, with the 
article, which TO xaXhv, that which is good, has, ver. 21. But 
sidog irovriphv is a bad kind or species : sJ&og, species, Germ. Gattung; 
LXX., Jer. XV. 3 [" I will appoint over them four kinds — the 
sword — the dogs — the fowls — the beasts"]; Sir. xxiii. 21 (16), 
XXV. (2) 3. We ought to abstain from every species of evil 
[evil species of thing], lest we be deceived. The whole genus 
of good is simple, belonging to the " spirit, soul, and body," 
[ver. 23] ; the species or kinds of evil are many, 2 Cor. vii. 1 ; 
comp. the antithesis in the following verse. 

23. Avrhg) [The very'] Himself. You will be defended, says 
Paul, not by my zeal, but by the Divine protection. — o 0eos tth 
tipnvrig, the God of peace) who gives all that is good, and takes 
away all that is evil : ilprivn and oXoTiXni, in the Hebrew thv, are 
conjugates. [Therefore the following pyrayer shows what this title 
implies (involves in it). — V. g.] — oXonXerg — iXoxXripov) He wishes 
that collectively {oXorsXiTg) and as individuals (oXoxXripov) they 
should be claimed for God [as His], and being so claimed, should 
abide in Him : collectively, all the Thessalonians without excep- 
tion, so that no one should fail ; individually, every one of them, 
with " spirit, soul, and body." The exposition of this verse 
will perhaps be more matured in course of time. There might 
be supposed an elegant Chiasmus, and if oXoxXrifnv were taken 
adverbially, it would cast new light on the exposition.^ If we 

' The Germ. Vers., following the decision of the 2d Ed., subjoins the 
word ii.—E. B. 

Lachm. adds li, with BD(A)G^ Vulg. and later Syr. But Tisch. omits 
it, with A, Orig. 4,289c (3,825c).— Ed. 

^ The Chiasmus would make oT^oxKyipov answer to aZ/aa, and wsvfici to 
ypvxti : meaning. May your body be wholly preserved, as also your spirit and 
soul ! — Ed. 



i THESSALONIANS V. 24, 25. 209 

give the passage another sense, iXoxXripov vfiZv, would constitute 
the genus and the whole; the three following words {■nviy/La, 
ffS/ia, -vj/i/^il) would be the parts. — u/iSi/ ro ■aviZi/^a xal rj -\^uxri 
xat TO ffS/ta, your spirit and soul and body) You ; he just before 
has called them universally : and the same persons he now de- 
nominates from their spiritual condition, my vnsh being, saith 
he, that your spirit (Gal. vi. 18) may be preserved 6X6-/.\ripot, 
whole and entire ; then from their natural condition, and soul 
and body, for the nature of the whole man absolutely consists 
of these two parts, my wish is, that it may be preserved blame- 
less} The mention of the body agrees with the preceding 
discussion, iv. 4, note 16. 

24. ^'O xaXZv l/j,ag) He, who lias called you, so that He will 
not even now change His [purpose of grace in] calling you 
This verse exhibits much of a triumphant spirit. — m^sii, will 
do it) will preserve you, ver. 23. So that His calling of you 
may attain its designed end, Phil. i. 6 ; 1 Pet. v. 10 ; Rom. 
viii. 30. 

25. Tlsp! ij/iuv, for us) as we for you, ver. 23. [Paul begs the 
same thing in the second epistle to the Thessalonians, also in the 
epistle to the Romans, Ephesian, Colossians, and Philemon, and 

' The Germ. Vers, exhibits on the marg. this periphrasis of the pas- 
sage ; — " May your Spirit, i.e. you yourselves be most fully preserved ac- 
cording to your spiritual state, which you have attained in respect both of 
soul and body." In accordance with this view, I may observe, is the fact, 
that iriitvfia. is a heavenly principle — the life from above — linking us to a, 
higher order of beings, and imparted by " the second Adam/' who, in 1 
Cor. XV. 47, is called ^aoTroiovu Ti/ivft.x, " a quickening Spirit.'' Hence 
irtuvfiot is seldom if ever found associated with unbelievers. Passages are 
found where this word is used of good and bad alike " yielding up the 
Ghost." But these mean rather " breathed their last," Trvevfia being used 
simply of the breath. Yu^^j anima, on the other hand, is the inferior prin- 
ciple, common to bad and good, linking us to the first Adam, the ^aax 
■4'"xil, living soul ; from which we derive the nZifAa ipyxitov, the natural or 
animal body — a body animated by the 4'"%^) ^^ contrasted with the aZfio. 
riiivf4,a.Tuoi>, body animated with the Spirit, spiritual, which shall be given 
to the believer hereafter, 1 Cor. xv. 44-47. Comp. Rom. viii. 11 ; Jude 
19, i^vxiiKo!. — Ed. 

' viFros, faithful) In this short clause the whole summary of consolation 
is included. If you will enjoy your calling, rejoice in the faithfulness of 
Him who will do it. — V. g. 



210 1 THESSALONIANS V. 27. 

in passing, in the second epistle to the Corinthians, as well as to the 
Philippians. He does not make this request in the epistle to 
Timothy and Titus, because he either addressed them as sons or 
ivas sure of their spontaneous intercessions. He did not indeed 
ash this of the Corinthians in his first epistle, nor of the Gala- 
tians ; for he required to rehuhe them in the exercise of his pater- 
nal authority. — V. g.] 

27. 'Op-/.it,u h/Mai, I adjure you) In the Old Testament Moses 
and the prophets were pubUcIy read. In the New Testament 
this epistle, as being the first of all that Paul wrote, is, as a 
sample of what they should do in the case of the others, recom- 
mended to be publicly read, as afterward the Apocalypse, eh. i. 3. 
This was the very important reason, why Paul so adjured the 
Thessalonians \and these too so greatly beloved by him. — V. g.J ; 
and there had been some danger, lest they should think, that the 
epistle should be concealed on account of the praises given to 
themselves. — rh Kvfiov, the Lord) Christ. The divine worship 
of invocation is presented to Him, Ps. Ixiii. 12 (11). — w&ei, to 
all) at Thessalonica, or even in the whole of Macedonia. — 
aSeXipoTg, the brethren) The dative, in the strict force of it. 
The epistle was to be read, whilst all gave ear to it [in the 
hearing of all], especially those, who could not read it them- 
selves ; women and children not being excluded. Comp. Deut. 
xxxi. 12 ; Josh. viii. 33, 34. WJiat Paul commands with an 
adjuration, Rome forbids under a curse. [Those who stealthily 
take away the Scripture, and render the reading of the word of 
God so difficult to the common people, beyond all doubt deal un- 
fairly in their own treatment of it (they must themselves in their 
mode of handling it evade its meaning by subterfuges and per- 
versions) ; they therefore are shunners of the light. But how 
sadly will they be struck dumb, when the Judge shall inquire, Why 
have you so violently forbidden others to read My word ? Why did 
you take it from those, who would have used it better than your- 
selves ? " It would be desirable (and this is the remark of a 
Wittemberg divine of high character) that in many places, and 
those too of a more exalted condition, instead of the sacred 
prayers, which seem to be often more numerous than was suit- 
able, the reading of certain chapters of sacred Scripture should 
be appointed in the Church, and should be a solemn and regular 



1 THESSALONIANS V. 27. 211 

usage," etc., Franz, de Interpret., p. 47. That would be indeed 
quite right. At present it is so much the more our duty to lament, 
that many esteem the dignity of the public assemblies of the Church 
to be greater only in proportion as the regard paid to Scripture is 
tlie less. — V. g.] 



ON THE SECOND 



EPISTLE TO THE THESSALONIANS. 



CHAPTER I. 



3. ' OipilXo/jiiiv, we are bound) Urged by exultation of mind on 
grounds so manifest. So also ch. ii. 13. \There is herein shown 
a generous sense of a debt of that kind. — V. g.] — a^iov, worthy, 
meet, befitting) On account of the magnitude of the fact. Comp. 
1 Cor. xvi. 4. \Are the proofs of thy Christianity ' worthy' of 
thanks being given to God on account of them by those who know 
thee ? — ^V. g.] — !j viSTig- ri aya'trrt, faith ; love) Of hope, ver. 4, 5. 
For these three graces are usually joined. 

4. 'H/ias auToug, we ourselves) Paul himself, with SUvanus and 
Timothy, gloried, as being a witness ; he not merely heard of the 
fact from witnesses. — v-rrip, for) construed with eu^apjereiv, to 
render thanks, ver. 3. Hence at the end of ver. 3 we must put 
a comma; comp. Col. i. 5, note. The parallelism [the clauses 
and words in ver. 3, 4, standing parallel to one another] gives 
force. — xul -ffleTiu;, and faith) Faith here denotes faithful con- 
stancy in confession of the truth. 

5. "EvSs/y/ia) namely, ov [It being a token, etc.] The Accusa- 
tive absolute; comp. Acts xxvi. 3, note. The fact of your 
a/i^seSai, enduring, ver. 4, is a proof or token. — Sixaiag, just, 
righteous) What is stated as a Proposition in this clause is dis 



2U 'i THESSALONIANS I. 6-9. 

cussed at ver. 6, 7. — s/s rJ xarafiw^Jjva;, that you may he counted 
worthy) This clause is connected (coheres) with ye endure. — 
imp ri;) for which. The suffering {^aeyiri) makes them worthy 
of the kingdom. 

6. nafA &iSi, with God) Although good and bad men do not 
estimate the injuries done by the latter, and the sufferings 
endured by the former, . as of so great importance. — SXl^ouen — 
0X/-4/;i', affliction [tribulation] — to them that afflict [trouble]) 
The lex talionis [compensation in kind]. To this refer ver 
8,9. 

7. Kal v/iTv, and to you) To this refer ver. 10, 11. — roTg 
SXi^ov/jbivoig, who are afflicted) In the middle voice, who endure 
affliction; comp. ver. 4, at the end. — avsaiv, rest) 6\i-^ig, affliction, 
and avsais, rest, are opposed to each other with great propriety, 
2 Cor. vii. 5, viii. 13. Moreover rest includes also abundance 
of good things, ver. 10. — fie6' riiiuv) with us, i.e. with the saints 
of Israel, ver. 10, note. Comp. 1 Thess. ii. 14. — fjnr ayyi'kmv 
Smafiicag, with angels of might, mighty angels) The angels serve 
Christ in the putting forth of His power. 

8. 'Ev <!rvpl fiXoyhg) Others read iv ipXoyl wvfhi} The same 
variety occurs, Acts vii. 30 : h (pXoyl irvfhg, LXX., Is. Ixvi. 15. — 
roTg fi.^ ti&oii &ihv) to those who are living in heathen ignorance of 
God, 1 Thess. iv. 5 ; Ps. Ixxix. 6. So Job xviii. 21, h^ VT N$, 
tSiv firi t'lhormv rh Kvpiov, of those" who know not the Lord. — i^ri 
uTaxououff;, who do not obey) chiefly by the Jews, to whom the 
Gospel concerning Christ' had been preached. 

9. ' A.irh, from) It is Si, judicial procedure from the JivnaQ pre- 
sence itself, that wiU inflict punishment upon them. ''3SD, from 
the face. Devils will not be the tormentors ; for even in this life 
bad men are not punished by devils, but rather by good angels : 
and in Ps. Ixxviii. 49, the phrase, angels of (bringing) evil, 

' Lachm. reads h 0^oyl <!cupos with BD(A)G^ Vulg., Iren. 273, 265. 
Tisch. reads h -irvpl (pxoyoj with A/ and Rec. Text Ed. 

2 The Hebrew is sing., of him that knoweth not God. — Tb. 

' It is considered, however, by the margin of the 2d Ed., that the name 
of Christ should rather be omitted in this verse, and therefore the Germ. 
Vers, has rejected it. — E. B. 

BD(A) omit XpiitTou, and so Tisch. But AG^ Vulg., Iren. 266, and 
Rec. Text, support it. Lachm. therefore retains it, but in brackets 
—Ed. 



2 TIIESSALONIANS 1. 10, 215 

may even denote good angels.^ Ex. xil. 23 ; 2 Sam. xxiv. 16 
— 'ttfoeiiivov, the face) This face will be intolerable to them ; they 
shall not see it, but they shall be made to feel it. Face and 
glory are generally parallel. — hxiog, of His might) Lay aside 
your fierceness (haughty confidence of 'might') ye wicked 
men ! 

10. 'El-, in) Saints and believers shall not only behold Him, 
but by them the admirable glory of Christ will put itself forth in 
its fiilness. See the following verses. — ayioig, the saints) The 
mention of glory, and the saints, is sweetly joined, as is also the 
mention of admiration (Christ coming " to be admired"), and, 
believers (" them that believe"). — 'sa.ei, all) This word, not added 
to, the saints, but to them that believe, intimates, that the term 
believers [" them that believe"] has a somewhat wider significa- 
tion than saints. See Acts xx. 32, note. So all, Phil. i. 9,^ 
note. ' Saints' are those of the circumcision ; ' believers' are 
they of the Gentiles, among whom were also the Thessalonians 
\who, when the testimony of the Apostles had reached also them, 
received it with praise-^iorthy firmness of mind. — V. g.J. Comp. 
the two expressions' standing in antithesis to these, ver. 8, note. 
— en, because) The motive of ' admiration' [which shall prompt 
them to " admire Christ"] will be, that the testimony of the 
Apostles concerning Christ, having obtained faith among the 
Thessalonians, proves to be what it professed [stands forth un- 
shaken] in that day, on which truth alone stands firm. Comp. 
Phil. ii. 16 ; 1 Thess. ii. 19. — iirisriiSri) JDNi, msrhv, stood forth as 
faithful [was proved to be trustworthy and stedfast], and as such 
was received [credited] by you, upon whom it (the testimony) 
had come. — s<p' iif/j&s [among you, i.e.] even to you) coming 
as far as to you, in the west. — h rfi) construe with eX^jj, 

' "He cast upon them the fierceness of His anger — by sending evil 
angels among them." iiXX. S;' ayyeAn,!/ ■jtounpuv. — Ed. 

'^ " I pray that your love may abound — in knowledge and in all judgment :" 
where the all is prefixed before 'judgment' as being the more general 
term ; but not before knowledge as being more special and limited. So 
here, all before " them that believe," but not before the more restricted 
term, " the saints." — Ed. 

' Viz. Toif fivi liloai &iov, " them that know not God," namely, Gentiles ; 
and Toif fc^ i'jrxxoiovirii/, " them that obey not, namely, the Jews who re- 
fused to believe, though the Gospel was preached to them. — Ed. 



816 2 THESSALONIANS 1. II, 12.-II. 1. 

When He shall come [not with $m<rriuSri, was believed or accounted 
faithful]. 

11. E/'s 0, for which object) We strive for this in prayer. — 
a^iuff'/i, would make you worthy) There is no dignity in us before 
we are called, 2 Tim. i. 9. It is not until afterwards conferred 
upon us in that way, which is presently described. — o 6205 jj/iSii) 
our God, whom we serve. — eudoxlav, good pleasure) on the part 
of God. — msTicas, of faith) on your part. 

12. To ovo//,a, the name) We confer nothing on the Lord, 
whereas the Lord really confers upon us salvation ; and hence 
His name is glorified in us ; and we ourselves moreover in Him. 
— X"'P'^) 9^0'Ce) with this grace in view, he mentioned ayaSusmii;, 
of goodness, ver. 11. 



CHAPTER IL 

I. ' Epii)Tu/iiv, we beseech) There are five divisions of the epistle, 
of which the principal one begins here. 

I. The Inscription, i. 1, 2. 

II. Thanksgiving for the Thessalonians, 3, 4. 

With prayer, 11, 12. 

III. The Doctrine concerning the man of sin, who 

is to come before Christ, ii. 1, 2, 3, 4. 
Whence he comforts the saints against that calamity, 9, 

10, 13, 14. 
With the addition of exhortation and prayer, 15^16, 17. 

IV. An exhortation to prayer, accompanied also with a 

prayer for them, iii. 1, 2. 
And an exhortation to reduce to order the brethren who 
are walking disorderly, with a prayer also for them 
subjoined, 6, 7, 16. 

V. Conclusion, 17, 18. 



2 THESSALONIANS II. 2, 3. 217 

— 6t£^) with respect to [not iy, as Engl. Vers.]. The particle 
is intended for clearly indicating the subject in hand, not for 
adjuration ; although the subject under discussion ought in itself 
to rouse the Thessalonians : comp. v'jrip, 2 Cor. v. 20.^ — emauv- 
ayuy^s, (final) gathering together) which will take place at the time 
of the coming of Jesus : care must be taken lest any falls away. 
Believers are already gathered in to the Lord ; but that gather- 
ing together then at last will be the complete and crowning one. 
This is the force of the double compound when it is broken into 
its component parts : comp. Heb. x. 25, note. 

2. laXeuS^vai,^ be moved) in mind. — 6posTaBai, be troubled) in 
your affections or emotions. That readily occurs in the case 
of those who are too eager to know future events. — imbiLaroi) 
'aviZ/ia, a prophesying spirit. — >.6you — imeroXrn, word — letter) 
ver. 15. — iig di rifj,Zv) as coming through us. This was the ground 
on which the Thessalonians might be moved. A genuine 
epistle of Paul might indeed be wrongly explained ; but there 
might also be fraudulently imposed on them a letter written by 
another person ; ch. iii. 17. — iig on hiar/ixiv, as if it were immedi- 
ately at hand) This word signifies to be exceedingly near ; for 
hidrug means present. It is therefore declared that the day of 
Christ is not so immediately near. The epistles to the Thessa- 
lonians are the oldest of the apostolic epistles. Hence it is evi- 
dent that the apostles, in speaking of the nearness of the day of 
Christ, were not in error, but spoke with full knowledge. — rod 
Xpiarou, of Christ) to Whom Antichrist is opposed, in a sense of 
the word long used in the Church.' 

3. Kara jMrihtm rpoirov, by no means) He indicates three means 
in which they might be deceived, ver. 2. — on, because) Supply 
from what goes before, the negative particle with the substantive 
verb, it does not come to pass (that day shall not come), unless, 
etc. But this ellipsis shows evXdjSsia, pious, reverent caution. 

' " We are ambassadors for Christ," i.e. with respect to Him. He and 
His Gospel are the foundation of our mission. — Ed. 

' Literally, tossed, agitated as persons on the sea, traXof. — Ed. 

» The Germ. Vers., however, prefers the reading Kvplov, following; the 
margin of both Ed.— E. B. 

ABD(A) corrected, Q/g Vulg., Orig. l,668i, read Kuplou. Rec. Text, 
without ffood authority. XdwtoS. — Ed. 



218 2 THESSALONIANS II. 3. 

He is elXa/Sjis, reverently cautious, who comprehends well, and 
receives in a right spirit, the matter set before him, not with an 
unseasonable and foolhardy rashness, saclite, scheu, etc. EuXa- 
^iia is shown in the fact, that Paul does not expressly say : The 
day of Christ does not come, unless, etc. He speaks mildly 
(moderately) ; he abstains from words to which the lover of the 
coming of Christ would not willingly listen. — IAk /aji, unless) 
What we read in ver. 3-8 demands a fuller consideration. 
And, first, we shall look closely into this paragraph by itself; 
then we shall compare the Apocalypse with it. The former 
aspect of it comprehends something like the following positions : — 

I. The object of Paul is to admonish the Thessalonians not to 
think the day of Christ nearer than it really is. — The expectation 
of future events, which is supposed to rest upon Divine testi- 
mony, and which after all is discovered in the end to be false, 
occasions great offence (raises a great stumblingblock in the 
way of religion). Such an expectation of the day of Christ 
might occasion very great offence: wherefore Paul anxiously 
obviates it. The Thessalonians had been prepared to receive 
the Lord with joy, ch. i. 11; 1 Thess. i. 10: and indeed a 
desire of that sort presupposes hope and faith ; but yet this very 
desire may be out of due order. It is therefore reduced to 
order. 

H. Paul especially teaches, that some great evil will first 
come. — Paul does not enumerate all the events which were to 
intervene between that age and the day of Christ; but he 
points out a certain one thing, especially remarkable, the ex- 
plicit declaration of which was even already at that time season- 
able and salutary to the Thessalonians. He therefore describes 
the apostasy, the Man of Sin, etc. 

HI. Not only does the apostle point out the evil, but also the 
check upon it. — He who hindereth or checketh, 6 xari^m, is made 
mention of, the person who checks or holds back the Man of Sin. 
That check is in some measure prior to the evil itself, and there- 
fore the announcement of it appertains much (in a great degree) 
to the design of the apostle, which is, that the time may be defined, 
though with a proper latitude, when the adversary is to be 
revealed. 

IV. The evil extends itself from the times of Paul, even up to 



2 THESSALONIANS II. 3. 519 

the appearance of the coming of Jesus Christ. — That evil is not 
only most widely extended, ver. 4, 10, 12, but also very long 
continued ; and although it rises up by various degrees, yet it 
is also continuous from its first beginnings (staminibus, threads 
in weaving the web) even to its end. Now already, says the 
apostle, the mystery of iniquity is working. It already wrought 
in the time of the apostles, but more after their death, most of 
all after the death of the men who were the contemporaries and 
immediate successors of the apostles (i.e. the apostolic fathers). 
They do not arrive at the best and wisest conclusion, who enter- 
tain the opinion, that the ideal and rule of the Church lie in the 
ancient practice (the antiquity) of some of the earliest ages, 
rather than in the truth itself, seeing that those ages merely re- 
buke the greater declension of posterity [and do not, by the fact 
of their antiquity, establish their own complete coincidence with 
the truth]. 

V. There was also a check in the time of Paul, and that check 
then, and not till then, ceases to exist in the way, when the evil 
breaks out in all its force. — He who now holdeth (the evil) lack 
[" letteth," Old Engl.], says Paul, until he he taken out of the 
way. Hence it is evident, that the restraining check was not 
the preaching of the Gospel, either universal or apostolical. 
The check remained even after the time of the apostles, who 
finished their course long before the check ceased to act as a 
check ; but the preaching of the Gospel is never wholly taken 
fi-om among men [" out of the way"]. 

VI. The evil is described first in the abstract, then in the con- 
crete. — The mystery of iniquity is said to he now already work- 
ing ; but after an interval, that Iniquitous one ( Wicked) himself 
shall be revealed. The event turned out corresponding with 
this order. Not dissimilar is the fact, that in ver. 3, previously, 
the appellation given is first apostasy, then the Man of Sin. In 
preaching of Christ, it was said first, in the abstract, the kingdom 
of heaven is at hand ; then Christ Himself, with His glory, was 
more openly manifested. So, on the opposite side, the testi- 
mony is similarly framed concerning fthe coming] evil. The 

1 olvo/Ltoi, ver. 8, the embodiment and incarnation of the previous 
dua/nicc. — Ed. 



J20 2 THESSALONXANS II. S, 

vicious humour is drawn together, and breaks out at length in 
one abscess. 

VII. The apostasy and the mystery of iniquity are a great evil. 
— The description of the evil in the abstract and concrete has 
different parts, and these mutually explain each other. Apos- 
tasy is a falling away from the faith, and is clearly described, 
1 Tim. iv. 1. This apostasy is not determined in its extent by 
any particular place ; — as widely as the faith extended, so widely, 
for the most part, does the apostasy extend ; — yet it prevailed in 
the greatest degree among the Jews. There is also the apos- 
tasy of those to whom faith had been offered, although they did 
not receive it. Some of those who had received it ^drew lack 
[" departing from the living God"] : comp. Heb. iii. 12. The 
people is treated as equivalent to one man, whether regard is 
had to the Divine grace, which offers itself, or to man's refusal 
of it, under whatever circumstances. It was apostasy in the 
people who refused to enter into the promised land, LXX. Num. 
xiv. 31. The bitterness of the Jews wa^ excessive, especially at 
Thessalonica, Acts xvii. 5, 11, 13 ; and Judaism at Rome occa- 
sioned great damage to Christianity. In like manner, iniquity, 
the mystery of which was then already working, is not ini- 
quity of any kind whatever, although it be manifold. Matt. 
xxiv. 12, but that from which the Iniquitous one (' Wicked :' « 
avo/ioi) himself is denominated, ver. 8, with which comp. ver. 
3, 4. The mystery of this iniquity was then already working 
(comp. Deut. xxxi. 21, 27), and was so concealed, that it crept 
in among men almost without themselves being conscious of it, 
and went on increasing for many ages. But even yet it is 
working, until the working of Satan shall bring forth the 
Iniquitous one himself (" that wicked") : ver. 9. Judaism, infect- 
ing Christianity, is the fuel ; the mystery of iniquity is the spark. 
VIII. The Iniquitous one (' Wicked^) himself is the greatest evil. 
— He is the Man of Sin, the son of perdition, opposed to and exalted 
above all that is called God, or that is worshipped ; so that he 
sits himself as God in the temple of God, and declares himself to 
be God (a god). Pie is the very Iniquitous (' Wicked') one, 

' Perhaps the italicised resilierunt of Beng. refers to the vTTo(ire!r.fiT»i 
and vTrodToKii of Heb. x. 38, 39, which see ; also Psalm Ixxviii. 57. — Ed. 



2 THESSALONIANS II. 3. 221 

■whose coming is according to the working of Satan, etc. These 
points we shall afterwards consider one by one. 

IX. The check is used indifferently in the masculine and 
neuter gender [i xare^oiv and rh xari^ovj : unless the neuter be 
put first in the text for this purpose, namely, in order that i 
xarixdiv, He who holdeth back {' letteth,' viz. the evil), may be 
afterwards opposed to the adversary, who is described in the sin- 
gular [ver. 8]. — He who now holdeth back (' letteth'), says he, 
will cease to be in the way (to be among men) ; and a little before, 
Now ye know that which withholdeth (holds back), so as that he 
may be revealed in His time [and not sooner ; but for rh xars^ov, 
he would be revealed sooner than the proper time]. 

X. That check, whatever it is, does not restrain the apostasy 
and the mystery of iniquity — but the Man of Sin himself, that ini- 
quitous, or wicked one. — The mystery of iniquity, and he who 
holdeth back Q letteth' ), fall upon one and the same time [are co- 
incident in time] ; but, when he who holdeth back, and that which 
holdeth back (' withholdeth'), have ceased to be in the way, then 
the Iniquitous one (Wicked) is revealed. 

XI. At length out of the apostasy arises the Man of Sin ; more- 
over, the political power of Rome, as a check, holds this very per- 
son back. — We clearly see, from the mutual comparison of the 
evil and the check upon it, and of the quahties of each, what 
both are. That Iniquitous one (' Wicked'), besides marks of 
falsehood, has also a certain degree of majesty, set off under a 
spiritual disguise, as if he were a god. The civil authority acts 
as a check upon him ; and this authority was assuredly in the 
hands of the Romans in the time of Paul, and comprehended 
Jerusalem; Eome, and Corinth, from which he was writing, as 
also Thessalonica, to which he was writing, etc. 

Xn. The date of this epistle in no small degree helps the in- 
terpretation. — It was written in the time of Claudius ; comp. 
Acts xviii. 2, 5, with 1 Thess. iii. 1, 6 : and this very circum- 
stance utterly refutes Grotius' attempt to interpret the prophecy 
of Paul concerning Caligula. The ancients were of opinion, 
that Claudius himself was absolutely this check ; for from this 
circumstance, as it appears, it came to pass, that they considered 
Nero, the successor of Claudius, to be the Man of Sin; and when 
the wickedness of Nero, how forious soever it might be, had 



222 2 THESSALONIANS H. 3. 

not, however, filled, up that measure, they accounted Domitian, 
and the other emperors of a similar character, as a kind of com- 
plement to make up the full measure of the evil. They cer- 
tainly did not by this interpretation exhaust the prophecy ; but 
yet they attained to some part of the truth, namely, that some- 
thing connected with Rome is here intended, whatever might be 
the mode of its exhibition. 

Let us go a little closer. The check is something with 
which the Thessalonians were unacquainted when Paul had 
been with them not long before : and ' now,' when the same 
apostle wrote these things, they ' knew* it, from the fact of the 
beginnings of the events corresponding [to his words] more than 
many, a little before, would have thought. This is evident from 
the antithesis between the fifth and sixth verses. The epistle 
was written about the eighth year of Claudius, 48 of the Dion, 
sera, as we show in Ordo temporum, p. 278. At that period 
Claudius had expelled from Rome the Jews, whether believers 
or unbelievers, and this because the latter were constantly rais- 
ing tumults ; and in Judaea itself, too, Cumanus was grievously 
oppressing them. Therefore, in the provinces, the prefects and 
procurators, in Italy and at Eome the Emperor himself, was 
holding back the evil. It is a remarkable proof of this fact, 
that the Jews did not kill James until after the death of Festus, 
and before the arrival of Albinus. Whatever they did on that 
occasion, they would willingly have done on other occasions 
against Christ, but could not for the Romans. So Gallio held 
them back at Corinth, Claudius Lysias at Jerusalem, Acts 
xviii. 14, 21, 32. In the time of Paul, the Roman power cer- 
tainly held back the evil ; not immediately (directly) : there- 
fore it must have been mediately (indirectly). Moreover, the in- 
strumentality or medium of holding it back was severity towards 
the Jews, who would have proceeded farther, if they had been 
permitted by the Romans. I shall willingly listen to an easier 
and simpler (I should be glad to hear a more ready and probable) 
interpretation, 

XIII. When the check ceased to he in the way, that Iniquitous 
one [' Wiclced'"'] is revealed. — This position agrees with the fifth, 
and yet it also differs from it. The former marks the long 
continuance of the check; the latter, the time of revealing the 



2 THESSALONIANS II. 3. 223 

Iniquitous one [' Wicked']. The coming of the Iniquitous one 
[' Wicked''] is according to the working of Satan in all power, and 
signs, and lying wonders, etc. This coming has not yet taken 
place, although its preludes are for a long time not wanting ; 
therefore the check still exists. And it is evident from this 
most powerful argument, that the. political power in the hands 
of the Romans is the check. For no other check, so powerful 
and so long-continued, will anywhere be found. This check, 
however, did not restrain the working of Satan, but the setting 
up of the dominion of the Iniquitous one [' Wicked'] ; and when 
it is removed, Satan lends his aid to the Iniquitous one 
['Wicked']. 

We shall now take the assistance of the Apocalypse. 

XIV. That Iniquitous one [_' Wicked'] is the beast ascending 
out of the bottomless pit. — So long and so continuous is the 
evil described by Paul, § iv., that it cannot but fall in at some 
period with the times of the apocalyptic beast ; and the resem- 
blance between the Iniquitous one [' Wicked'] and the beast is so 
great, the power so widely spread and so exalted, that they 
can only be one subject [they must be one and the same person 
or existence]. The Iniquitous one [' Wicked'] will not finally 
perish [his destruction will be deferred] until after the de- 
struction of the beast ; for in that battle, which is described in 
Rev. xix., the Lord's enemies are so completely destroyed, that 
the calamity described by Paul cannot be extended to a period 
farther on. Moreover also the Iniquitous one [_' Wicked'] will 
not perish previously [before the destruction of the beast, etc., 
in Rev. xix.] : for he remains even till the appearing of the 
coming of the Lord, [2 Thess. ii. 8.] 

XV. Therefore the whole evil described by Paul is strictly and 
intimately connected with the Roman empire. — What tie of re- 
lationship the apostasy and the Man of Sin himself had with 
the city Rome, could not be known by the Thessalonians, unless 
Paul taught them it face to face. The Apocalypse and the 
event teach us, and will teach posterity more and more fully. 
We then, according to our present ability, will institute a com 
parison. 

XVI. That Iniquitous one [' Wicked'] is yet to come. — ^It is 
one and the same beast which ascends first from the sea, theu 



224 2 TIIESSALONIANS U. 3. 

from the bottomless pit. That beast has very much to do with 
the woman, who is Babylon, Eome. Sometimes it carries the 
woman, at length it destroys her with the assistance of the ten 
horns [Rev. xvii. 16]. The beast out of the sea is the papacy 
of Hildebrand ; but the beast from the bottomless pit, excepting 
the succession in the papacy (which does not take away the 
ancient tradition concerning the rise of Antichrist from the Jews, 
but leaves it in its own place [just as it finds it]), will have a 
quite new and singular character of wickedness, on account of 
which he is called the Man of Sin, etc. All these observations are 
demonstrated in my German and Latin interpretation of the 
Apocalypse. Antichrist, or the Man of Sin, as being about to 
come in the nineteenth century, could not be retarded by the 
Roman power of the first and following centuries, on which 
comp. Rev. viii. ix. Therefore the Roman Emperor will be 
among the ten kings ; and when he, with the nine others, shall 
give his power to the beast, he will be taken out of the way, 
and will give place to the Man of Sin. The Roman power is 
the check even up to the time of the rising of the Iniquitous 
one [' Wicked'], who, after he has arisen, makes the whore deso- 
late, with the assistance of the ten horns. 

XVn. Rome is, notwithstanding, the channel in which the 
apostasy and the mystery of iniquity have /lowed for many ages. 
— Claudius did not long exclude the Jews, and along with them 
the Christians, from Rome ; a short time after, they returned, 
and with the good the evil also obtained abundant opportunity 
of being increased. The two parts of the evil are, the apostasy 
[" falling away"], and the mystery of iniquity. Apostasy from 
the faith, and hyjieras'iai or divisions, which lead men to for- 
sake the doctrine of the apostles, are very closely connected; 
and the latter already at that time were arising at Rome on 
the part of some, who were under the influence of Satan ; Rom. 
xvi. 17, with which comp. ver. 20. Moreover, apostasy from 
the faith, bringing in doctrines concerning the worship of inte7-- 
mediate divinities (intercessors),-"^ concerning the avoiding of 
marriage under pretence of spiritual perfection, and abstinence 
from meats, only indeed some kinds of meat, 1 Tim. iv. 1, 3, 

' Alluding to the " doctrines of letifioms," 1 Tim. iv. 1, not ' devils,' as 
Engl. Vers. ; but inferior divinities, genii, etc. — Ed. 



•2 THESSAI.0N1ANS II. 3. 225 

is peculiarly applicable to Eome, although it was long untainted 
by other heresies. The iniquity [avo//,ia, ver. 7] chiefly con- 
sisted in the most deadly sin of pride, ver. 3, 4. The beginning 
of man's pride was his apostatizing from God; since his heart 
loithdrew itself from Him who made him. For pride is the be- 
ginning of all sin} Sir. x. 14, 15. The seeds and commencing 
fibres lay concealed in the elevation of human authority, in 
Petrism [" I am of Cephas"] ; 1 Cor. i. 12, note. Hence by 
degrees arose the primacy of the Bishop of Eome, and the whole 
system of the papacy. 

XVIII. A Iso, now and then, the Pope very closely approaches 
the characteristics of the Man of Sin himself. — The Pope is in 
some respects the Man of Sin, while he eagerly promotes the 
transgression of the Divine law and the Divine commandments, 
and greatly impedes the observance of them, but defends with 
the utmost severity his own decrees : he is the son of perdition, 
in that (whilst) he has plunged innumerable souls into destruc- 
tion, and has delivered to death immense multitudes of men 
either devoted to himself or in any way resisting him : he is 
opposed [ver. 4] to the majesty of Csesar, formerly his master, 
and is exalted above all that is called God or worshipped, by the 
fact of his claiming as his right the highest authority, the 
highest worship, by his commanding angels, and subjecting the 
Emperor to himself. It is not merely once that the paroxysm 
of pontifical pride has broken out to such degree, that he called, 
or permitted himself to be called, god or vice-god [vicegerent of 
God] ; and the solemn titles, Most Holy Lord (for godhead and 
holiness are synonymous in the language of Scripture), and, 
Most Blessed Father, have the same meaning : comp. Matt. xix. 
17. Sometimes the Pope, as if he were the divine image ^ [or 
pageant representing God], is placed with his chair [comp. 

' The Wisdom of Sirach, x. 12, 13 ; 'A/sx^ i/Tepvitpaiiixi, dii6pi>Ti>v tiipurTot- 
fihov di'Tro 'K.i/ptoVt Kotl d'Tro rov Troi^uoctiro^ cx.vrov a.ntku'V^ ^ KapiHA aurou. 
On dpxii vneepvi(pa,i>ia,i aiicipria,. — Ed. 

* The Latin word is ferculum, one of whose meanings is, "bearing in the 
hands the images of the gods." Csesar had a ferculum decreed to him, 
which implies, that his statue was to receive the same honour as those of 
the gods. If I understand this passage aright, it means, that the Pope, as 
the earthly image or representative of God, was to be placed on the altar of 



226 2 TIIESSALONIANS II. 3. 

sitteth, ver. 4] upon the altar [comp. in the temple, ver. 4], by 
princes acting as bearers. Their due praise remains undi- 
minished to the first bishops of Eome ; but yet in the progress 
of time, by gradual advances in spiritual and civil authority, 
according to the order in the text, the lineaments are to be seen 
of that form which will put itself forth before the world as 
palpably as possible in that Iniquitous one [' Wicked'] in its own 
time. 

XIX. First he who withholdeth, next that which withholdeth, 
ceases to be in the way. — We have mentioned this circumstance 
already, § ix. : but here it comes to be repeated more strictly. 
He who withholdeth, is he who hath Rome under his sway : that 
is, heathen, or Christian emperors at Eome, or Constantinople , 
the kings of the Goths, and Lombards ; again the Carlovin 
gian and German emperors, from whom comes the wound of the 
sword, Rev. xiii. This is He that withholdeth, going far into 
the middle of the times of the beast that arose out of the sea. 
Those princes so held back the papacy, as even notwithstanding 
to give it help ; they so helped it, as notwithstanding to hold it 
back also. In the last time that lohich withholdeth is the power 
of Rome itself, when the beast carries the woman, and itself is 
not [Rev. xvii. 8]. When that shall be removed out of the way, 
the Iniquitous one [' Wicked'] will be revealed. 

XX. The Iniquitous one [' Wicked'~\ is revealed, when he begins 
to act with open wickedness. — Revelation is opposed to mystery, 
and the former is thrice mentioned, ver. 3, 6, 8. Therefore that 
is not called ' revelation' by which the Iniquitous one [' Wicked'] 
is convicted through the testimony of the truth ; but that by 
which he himself, after the check is removed, acts with open 
wickedness, although few perceive (see through) the wickedness. 

XXI. The appearance of the coming of Jesus Christ, by which 
the Iniquitous one [' Wicked'~\ will be destroyed, will precede the 
actual coming itself, and the last day. — This appearance, with the 
destruction of the beast, or the Iniquitous one [' Wicked'], is 
described. Rev. xix. 11, etc. : where these two, the beast and the 
false prophet, are cast alive into the lake of fire, that burns with 
brimstone ; moreover the kings of the earth and their armies are 
slain, ver. 20, 21. Lastly, the captivity of Satan and the king- 
dom of the saints follow. For the Aoocalypse clearly interposes 



2 TUESSALONIANS II. 3. 227 

a thousand yeai's between the destruction of the beast and the 
last day. But how joill these years he reconciled with the lan- 
guage of Paul ? Ans. Paul, looking back (referring here) to 
Daniel, as we shall afterwards see, at the same time implies 
those things, which are marked by the same prophet as about to 
happen between the destruction of the little horn and the end of 
the world, vii. 7, 9, 14, 22, 26, 27. Many things long prior to 
the destruction of the beast, as well as also the entrance of Jesus 
Christ through suffering into glory, are connected with His 
coming in the clouds ; Matt. xxvi. 64 ; John xxi. 22, notes, 
Therefore the same coming might be connected with the destruc- 
tion of the adversary, which is a matter of very great import- 
ance between the two comings of Christ, And as the end of 
the world admitted of being (was able to be) connected with 
the destruction of Jerusalem, because the revelation of the 
intermediate events was not yet matm'e ; so Paul might connect 
the coming of Christ with the destruction of the adversary, be- 
cause [the revelation of] the thousand years were reserved for 
(against the time of giving) the Apocalypse, which much more 
clearly explains these points, so that the prophecy of Daniel 
itself may obtain light from the Apocalypse subsequently given. 
However, Paul appropriately [skilfully] terms it, the appearance 
of the coming, not the coming itself. It was not yet the time for 
more special information, and yet the Spirit of truth dictated 
those words to Paul, that they might exactly agree with the 
very things, which were afterwards to be more particularly 
revealed. The prophecy proceeds gradually. The Apocalypse 
speaks more explicitly than Paul ; and Paul in this passage 
speaks more explicitly than the Lord Himself, before He was 
glorified; Matt. xxiv. 29 : where see the notes. Moreover we 
ought to interpret the more ancient and more involved expressions 
by such as are most recent and most distinct, and not abuse the 
former for the purpose of weakening and eluding the latter. Nay, 
even in actual fact the destruction of the adversary coheres 
(is connected) with the coming of Christ ; for there are two 
things especially illustrious in the glory of Christ, namely, that 
He is the Son of God, and that He is coming to judgment. 
Concerning each of these the Scripture has a similar mode of 
Bpeakine, which we should carefully observe. It alleges the 



228 2 THESSALONIANS II. 3. 

generation of the Son as a thing then present [then vividly 
realized], as often soever as anything very vs^orthy of the only- 
begotten of the Father occurs ; Acts xiii. 33, note. And thus 
it also represents [vividly presents to us] the glorious coming 
under the aspect of the judgments, which are altogether worthy 
of the Judge of the living and the dead ; comp. Eom. ii. 16, 
note. The beast and the false prophet are first of all cast into 
the lake of fire at the appearance of the coming of the Lord 
Jesus; and when He actually comes, all who are not found 
written in the book of life are cast into the lake of fire. The first 
judgment is a prelude and altogether peculiar specimen of the 
second judgment ; nay, it is in reality one and the same judg- 
ment, only separated by time, and out of the whole period [Eev. 
viii. 2-xi. 1 5], falling under that portion which is marked now 
by the trumpet of the seventh angel. 

The principal points of the subject-matter have been, I thinh, 
cleared up ; and we shall now proceed to illustrate what remains, 
VIZ. the phrases or particular expressions. — ri airoeraeia, the apos- 
tasy [falling away]) ' The Greek article is frequent in this para- 
graph, n airoeraaia. — o avofLOi, and it is to be referred (ascribed) 
either to what Paul had previously said, or to the prophecies of 
the Old Testament. — 6 nvSpsiiiroi rris af/^aprlag, the Man of Sin) 
who is the greatest enemy of true righteousness. Paul so de- 
scribes him, as to allude by way of contrast to Jesus Christ, 
and especially to the passage, Zech. ix. 9, 10 : for the King of 
Zion is, 1) Righteous; 2) Full of salvation; 3) Meek, and 
riding on an ass : in short. He is the author of peace. But His 
enemy is, 1) The Man of Sin ; 2) The son of perdition ; 3) He 
opposes and exalts himself: in short, he is the Iniquitous one 
[Wichdl. For where justice and equity [as opposed to the 
Iniquitous one : nefarius, fas'] flourish, peace flourishes. The 
whole benefit derived fi-om Christ is indicated by peace. But 
the Iniquitous one [Wicked'] occasions all misery and calamity. 
The law is holy and just and good ; the a,voiJ.oc, on the other 
hand, is profane and unjust and evil. Moreover, what Paul 
principally declares elsewhere concerning Jesus, he declares the 
exact reverse concerning the enemy, ascribing to him revelation 
and mystery, coming signs, etc.— o u'lhg rng avuXilag, that son of 
perdition) who will both consign as many as possible headlonf 



2 THESSALONIANS II. i. <l,i9 

to destruction, and will himself go away to the deepest perdition, 
Rev. xvii. 8, 11. 

4. ' O atirixii/isvog, x.t.x., who opposeth, etc.) The two preceding 
names correspond by direct antithesis to the name of Jesus. 
What follows correspond by antithesis to the majesty of Christ. 
So Dan. xi. 36, et seqq. : Ka! v-^cuSrjdiTai xa,l fiiya.XmSrjSsrai o 
fSasiXiug eiri <!ra,VTa hhv xai iiri rlv ©gJv tuv 6euiv, xai "kakfidn mipoyxa, 
And the king shall be exalted and be magnified above every god, and 
against the God of gods, and shall spealc high-swelling words. This 
then is what Paul means to say: The day of Christ does not come, 
unless the prediction of Daniel given in these words concerning 
Antiochus be so fulfilled (in the Man of Sin), that it shall even 
be more applicable to the Man of Sin, who corresponds tc 
Antiochus, and is worse than he ; comp. on Rev. xiii. 1, Thes. 
vii. § Non momentanea, etc., " It was not by an instantaneous 
transformation that the Pope passed," etc., at the end. These 
two words, (o) avTixil/jbivog xal uTipaipofitiiog [" who opposeth and 
exalteth himself"], stand under the one article : for it is for this 
reason he opposes himself, in order that he may exalt himself. 
He exalts himself in heart, tongue, style, and deeds, by himself 
and by his adherents. — im' Tdtra Xsyo/isnoi/ kh n eej3as/ia, above 
all that is called god or is worshipped) Angels are wont to 
be (sometimes) called gods, as are also men who possess great 
authority, 1 Cor. viii. 5. Above every such god, the Iniquitous 
one [Wicked] will exalt himself: ailSagf^a is, that which is wor- 
shipped; and the Roman Emperor is distinguished by the peculiar 
title, 6 iz^agrog, Augustus, Acts xxv. 21. Therefore the majesty 
and power of Csesar, which are most conspicuous at Rome, con- 
stitute the principal gs0as/j,a, object of worship, on the earth. 
Now the Iniquitous one [Wicked] exalts himself so, as that he 
not only arrogates to himself greater power and worship than 
any one who is called god or is worshipped possesses, but also so 
as that every one who is called god or is worshipped is forced to 
be subject to him, i.e. on the earth, or is feigned to be so, so far 
as the inhabitants of heaven are concerned. Clement VI., in 
his Bull concerning the jubilee, commanded the angels of 
paradise to introduce the souls of those that died on their journey, 
being entirely set free from purgatory, into the glory of paradise. 



880 2 THESSALONIANS 11. 5, 6. 

civil power, and in both cases the highest degree of power. — 
si; rhv vahv roS Qeov, in the temple of God) in that temple of God 
which is mentioned, Rev. xi. 1. For in ver. 7 of that passage 
this adversary is the subject of discussion. — xadlaai, sitteth) by 
virtue of his authority} — avohemviivTa iaurhv, declaring himself 
[" showing himself "J) a'TTodeuvu//,!, to mark out, to designate, to 
declare. Herodian uses more than once the phrase, a/7rodii^ai 
Kaigapa,, to name, or declare the Caesar. — 'in tan ©eJs, that he is 
God) The strong asseveration of the Iniquitous one [' Wicked'] 
concerning himself is here expressed. He will not say, that he 
is very God, the Creator of heaven and earth, but still, that he 
is a god superior to any other that is called god. 

5. Ou //,vri/j,onusTi ; do ye not remember?) The apostle intimates, 
that he neither contradicts himself, nor helps out his former 
statement by some sort of new declaration, as men under the 
influence of a fond imagination (conjecturers) are wont to do 
after being the cause of oifence : that he had not said, the day 
of the Lord was near in such a sense, as that other important 
great events would not occur in the meantime. — 'in, yet) The 
Antithesis is vijv, now, ver. 6. — t/jo; if/,a.g, with you) In the pre- 
sent day Judaism greatly prevails at Thessalonica, and at the 
proper time the opportunity will be given of observing whether 
tlie Iniquitous one [' Wicked'] is to have a great party, especially 
in that city. Some even of the tribes [puXwv ; not as Engl. Vers. 
kindreds'] of Israel, before the death and resurrection of the two 
witnesses, will stand by the beast. Rev. xi. 9, and after the ascen- 
sion of the witnesses into heaven, and the earthquake, will repent. 
In my opinion, it may happen, that a concealed Jew may be- 
come Pope; comp. Thes. xvi., on ver. 3 above. I do not 
assert this positively. — iXeyov vp.Tv, I told you) So, ver. 15, ye have 
been taught. 

6. Tb xar's'^ov, that lohich withholdeth, holdeth back) Some in- 
terpret it of one obtaining authority ; but 6 ■/.azi'yai is not thus 

' For the marg. of both Ed., as well as the Germ. Vers., intimate that 
the words ii; hov before xaSiaai should not be considered as a various read- 
ing, but should be retained. — E. B. 

ABD(A) corrected, / Vulg., Orig. l,424d, 669o, Iren. Memph. and 
Theb. Versions, omit as hen ; Rec. Text reads u; ho-j, with Syr. and later 
Syr. Versions, and, according to Tisch., with G. But Lachm. quotes Gff 
iiir hct $t6i/. — Ed. 



2 THESSALONIANS II. 7, 8. 231 

used absolutely, much less to xarey^ov : xari^iu, is to detain, to 
delay, in LXX., Gen. xxiv. 56, /tij xari^ere /mi, Hinder me not. 

On zaTixov, sig to , coming presently afterwards, depends. 

If there were not the Ti -/.aTiy^ov, the Wicked would be sooner 
revealed.— o}'(5a7-f, ye know) They knew from the present informa- 
tion given to them in this epistle, and by adding a view of exist- 
ing events. He speaks safely [with prudent caution], nor was it 
necessary to say anything more openly. — in tCj uItov naipu, in Ids 
proper time) not sooner. 

7. VAp, for) Hereby is given the reason why he just before 
spoke of the revelation as still future [ver. 6]. For there is 
subjoined /jbvgTripiov, the mystery, which is already present.^ — 
'hepyetTai, is at work) The verb is in the middle voice (as Rom. 
vii. 5), with the personification, indicating the most secret con- 
duct of the enemy. — /aovov, only) This word shows, not the short 
continuance of the person, or power, " who holdeth back" the 
evil, nor the speedy full realization of the event, but the fact of 
the person or power who holdeth it back being the one and only 
check to its development, 'iaig, until, presently after, denotes 
delay. The subject is, he, who now holdeth back [_' letteth'] : the 
predicate is elliptical, holdeth back, or continues to he in the loay, 
till he be taken out of the way or ceases to exist, so that he can 
nowhere be a hindrance to the Iniquitous one [' Wicked']. The 
power of him that holdeth hack, as a whole, possessed of authority 
[an authoritative whole], has been successively divided into many 
parts : and yet the Withholding power or person is but one. 

8. ToVe, then) immediately. — o avo/jbog) This is the last and 
most weighty appellation, comprehending the force of the pre- 
ceding ones. That unjust, iniquitous, laivless one, and (by a 
more nervous term used by Plautus and Nonius, ' ille.v') the 
outlaw, ytjn, LXX., aai^rig, ungodly, Isa. xi. 4 : He shall smite 
the earth with the word (rod) of His mouth (rou STofiarog auToti), 
and with the breath of His lips shall He slay the ungodly (.s» meli- 
lia,Ti — aveXe? asi^n). — oi', whom) after having long enough acted 

' Beng. means, The revelation of it is still future ; for (yxp), though it is 
in a sense already present and at work, it works now only as a mastery, not 
as a thing revealed. — Ed. 

' "Hit!, already) It is the one and the same impurity, diffusing itself over 
many ag^es. — V. s. 



*W 2 THESSALOKIANS II. 9-12. 

the part of a man of violence.— o Kupk;,^ the Lord) the Lord of 
lords, Rev. xix. 16. — tSi miiiij.ari roD (TTo/Aaroc auroD, hy the breath 
[or rather, the Spirit'] of His mouth) There also proceeds out of 
this mouth a sword Qo/Mfiaia,), lb. ver. 15, 21. — rji s-irKpavsicf, rrj; 
Tapoijeiag duTou, with the appearance of His coming [But Engl. 
Vers., with the brightness of His comingl) In some places ap- 
pearance, in others coming ^jTrapouela], is mentioned, the latter in 
ver. 1, both being used in the same sense ; but here the appear- 
ance of His coming is before the coming itself, or at least (it 
expresses) the first dawn of the brightness of His actual coming, 
as £m(pdvsia rri; riiJiij>ai [expresses the appearance or dawning 
of day]. 

9. o5, of whom) viz. the Iniquitous one [Wicked]. Paul now 
subjoins a more lengthened description of the calamity, with the 
design that in the way of contrast he may console the Thessalo- 
nians ; ver. 13. — roS 2arara, of Satan) As Christ is related to 
God, so on the contrary is Antichrist to Satan, standing mid- 
way between Satan and lost men. — %a/ ari/LiUic, and signs) These 
signs will be shown by the false prophet, who serves the interest 
of the beast, and that too even before the ascent of the beast from 
the bottomless pit. Rev. xiii. 13. 

10. T^f aXn^siag, of the truth) which is in Christ Jesus. — oiix. 
id's^avTo, they did not receive) The Jews were mostly chargeable 
with this conduct, John v. 43 ; and that Iniquitous one [Wicked] 
will be particularly hm-tful to the Jews. The remarks, which 
we a little before threw out concerning the Jews here and there 
in the positions laid down, refer to this point. 

11. nxdvrig, of error) [Engl. Vers, evipyiiav TXanjs, strong delvr 
sion,] which is in Antichrist. 

^12. na>5-£s, all) That error then is to exhibit extensive, long- 
continued, and violent prevalence. 



1 The 2d Ed. prefers the fuller reading i Kvpi'o; 'Inaovg ; and the Germ. 
"Vers, follows it.— E. B. 

Tisch., with B (judging from silence), Rec. Text, Orig. l,66Sd, reads o 
Kipiog. But Lachm. better, with AD(A) corrected, Gfg Vulg., Orig. 
4,3215, Iren. 182, 323, Hilary, reads 6 Kipios'lmovs. Orig. l,424e haa 
Kupios 6 ©Eo'f . — Ed. 

2 EjV to, that) Endeavour therefore with all your might to believe the 
truth.— V. g. 



2 THESSALONIANS U. 13-15. 233 

13. U/^iTg d'l, but we) Comfort after the prediction of mourn- 
ful events. So 2 Tim, ii. 19. It may be said, What need was 
there of comfort at that time to the Thessalonians ? Ans. The 
mystery of iniquity was even then in operation ; and instruction 
may be equally derived from the distant future, as from the 
remote past, 1 Cor. x. 1, et seqq. — ops/Xo/isv, we are hound) 
ch. i. 3. — Iml Kupm, hy the Lord) Christ. — i'iXiro — a-r af^^s) 
He does not say i^iX's^aro, but in this one place, and on this 
subject, he uses s'l'kiTo. That effect was produced by the success 
of evangelical calling ; and yet there is added, from the begin- 
ning, i.e. from eternity, comp. 1 John i. 1, because believers 
are fortified and claimed as such by the eternal decree, Eph. i. 
4, in opposition to those who worship the Man of Sin, Eev. xiii. 
8. Comp. Deut. vii. 7, X. 15, •ffpoelXiro Kupiog u//,&g xal i^iXe^aro, 
the Lord preferred and chose you, etc. Ibid. xxvi. 18, Ti''»sn, 
has avouched (e/Xet-o, has taken to Himself) thee this day to be His 
peculiar (vipmsiov) people. The decree is truly from eternity, 
as truly as the generation of the Son of God is from eternity : 
yet the decree is one thing, the generation is another.' — h a.yta,eijjif> 
UievfunTog, in sanctifcation of the Spirit) The Holy Spirit sanc- 
tifies us, and sanctification is the test of election, 1 Pet. i. 2. 

14. El; 0, Whereunto) The phrase, to salvation, is hereby ex- 
plained. — I'lg Trspimlrjaiv, [to the obtaining, Engl. V.] to the deliver- 
ance) ilg is resumed the second time : supply, namely. There is 
IK) TE/j/To/'jjff/s, or mere deliverance (preservation^), from the ship- 
wreck of the world, but as it is conjoined with glorification, 2 Tim. 
ii. 10. iTipiodem, in Deut., cited above, is in consonance with 
this. — roD) [Ku/!;'ou] construed with 'ffspmoirisiv [not with do^rig, as 
Engl. Vers.] 

15. "Apa oSv, therefore then) The conclusion. — xpapri7Ti, hold) 
adding nothing, subtracting nothing. — rocg irapabaang, the tradi- 
tions) I wish that those who are most urgent on the subject of 

^ Just as God's decree and His eternal adoption of believers are distinct 
things. — Ed. 

^ Beng. understands TrepiTroim" of "that which remains when all else 
perishes." He translates it conservationis in Eph. i. 14, and distinguishes 
it from redemption by the blood of Christ. Here liberatio, viz. final de- 
liverance, which is connected with glory, and which is to be the gift of onr 

Lord Jpjnta V.T\ 



»n4 2 THESSALONIANS II. 16, 17.-I1I. 1, 2. 

Traditions, liad also from this passage held, and would hold, the 
traditions which Paul has furnished in this chapter. Tradition 
is a very great benefit. God bestows traditions by means of the 
messengers of the Gospel. Paul taught many years before he 
began to M'rite. Tradition is given either by speaking [comp. 
ver. 5] or by writing. — bi swigroXrjc, by letter) He had written 
on this subject, 1 Thess. iv. and v. 

16. 'O Kxjpiog, the Lord) Eefer to this the words, through 
grace. — o Qsh;, God) To this refer the words, who loved ; 2 Cor. 
xiii. 13. — aimlav, eternal) Nothing then can destroy believers. 

17. Tlapaxa'Kimi, comfort, console [' adhortetur,' liter, give con 
soling, comforting exhortation']) This is deduced from who hath 
given (us) irapaiikrien, consolation [ver. l&j.—arripi^ai, establish) 
This is deduced from who hath given (us) good hope through grace. 
■ — Xoytf),^ in word) by vapaxXrigi, consolation. — ipyifi, work) by 
sTfjpi^iv, establishment, 1 Cor. xv. 58. 



CHAPTER III. 

1. Tpixfi) fnay run, have free course) quickly ; comp. Ps. 
cxlvii. 15 ; without impediment [liter, without a drag on the 
icheels of its course], 2 Tim. ii. 9. — bo^aZriTai, may be glorified) 
Acts xiii. 48. 

2. ' Aro'Km) aro-jrog, inept [liter, out of place], unreasonable. — 
oh -Trdnm, does not belong to all) Tapeinosis,^ i.e. of fear. The 
Thessalonians, who had believed with great readiness, might 
easily suppose that all would be equally ready. Paul declares, 
from his own experience of the very reverse, that it was quite 
otherwise. — n vIstic, faith) viz. in God through Christ. It is this 
alone that takes away rh utovov xal -jovripov, what is inept [unreor 
sonable] and wicked. 

^ The margin of both Ed. and the Germ. Vers, prefer the reading ifya 
x-xi Tio'y^ in the inverse order. — E. B. 

_ ABD(A)/ Vulg. read 'ipy^ ,cccl Uyu,. Gg and Bee. Text read ?i(!yffl x«i 
tsyif). — Ed. 

' Less said, than is to be understood. Append.— Ed. 



2 THESSALONIANS 111. 3-8. 238 

3. TLisToi di, but faithful) After stating a very distressing fact, 
lie immediately subjoins what may serve as a consolation ; so ch. 
ii. 13. In opposition to the unbelief [want of faith on the part] 
of men, be praises the faithfulness of the Lord. So 2 Tim. ii. 
13. — erriplBei i/ttSj, will establish you) although all others may not 
even receive faith. — a.'ith roZ tovji^oD) from the wicked one [Engl. 
Vers, from evil], from Satan ; not merely from vs^icked men, by 
whom he assails faith. 

4. 'Ell Kupi(f), in the Lord) Trust ["Have confidence in"] no 
man by himself. — -TrapayyiXXo/j.ev, ive charge or command) for ex- 
ample, that ye pray for us, that ye fortify yourselves. See 
ver. 1 [2, 3]. 

5. Kiie/o?, the Lord) Christ. — s/'j rfiv aydirrip rou ©sou, into the 
love of God) You will thus favour the running (free course) of 
the word of God, and will not be aroicoi, unreasonable. — s/'s vvo- 
fiovriv Tou Xpierov, to the patience of Christ) It is thus you will 
endure the hatred of the wicked enemies of Christ. Each 
must be taken objectively : love towards God, patience shown 
on account of Christ [But Engl. Vers, patient waiting for 
Christ']. 

6. 'STiXXegSai) This word is properly applied to sailors and 
travellers, to be bound for some place, or to set out from some 
place. Hence to avoid ; comp. ver. 14. He keeps the Thessa- 
lonians in suspense, until at ver. 11 he brings out the matter, 
at which he was aiming. They seem to have given up labour 
on account of the near approach of the day of Christ. The 
admonitions of the first epistle were more gentle ; in the second, 
there is now some degree of complaint, although that complaint 
regards a slip of that kind which only tempts minds of high 
(spiritual) attainments. — ffavro;, from every) although he may 
be otherwise walking speciously [with a fair show]. — ardxruig, 
disorderly) Therefore the Order of Mendicants is not an order, 
but a burden [ver. 8, hvi^apngai] upon the republic, ver. 8. If 
the Thessalonians had bound themselves by a vow, what would 
Paul have said ? 

7. Iiaij) [' how'] in what manner of living ? 

8. 'E^7a^o>£i/o;, loorling) This is construed with l(pa.yo//,iv, we 
ate.—lm^aen(Sa.i, to be a burden to) Whilst waiving (yielding) his 
right, he exnresses what mieht have been viewed as a matter of 



236 2 TIIESSALONIANS III. 10-14. 

justice (his just claim to maintenance) by a somewhat unfavour- 
able term. 

10. "o«, when) They had already seen the necessity of thi.« 
commandment among the Thessalonians. — 'ii n; ol 6i\ii, if any 
will not) To be unwilling is a fault. — /j,ridh eeh'sru, let him not eat) 
An Enthymeme.' Supply, But every man eats : therefore let 
every man labour. Paul does not mean, that such a man should 
have his food immediately withdravcn from him by others ; but 
he proves from the necessity of eating the necessity of labouring, 
by throwing out this pleasantry, let such a one show himself as 
an angeV There is a similar Enthymeme at 1 Cor. xi. 6.* 

11. 'AXXa, hut) From a state of idleness, the disposition of men 
is naturally prone to pass to the indulgence of curiosity. For 
nature always seeks something to do.* — itifiipyaZoiihovg, busy- 
bodies [curiously-inquisitivej) Opposed to doing on^ s own business/ 
1 Thess. iv. 11. 

12. MiTo. fjsiixioig, with quietness) Laying aside curiosity [over- 
ojfficiousness or inquisitiveness'].-—iaiirSi\/, their own) not another's. 

13. KaXovoiouvTig, doing well) even with the industry of your 
hands. 

14. "A/A Trig smffToXijg tovtov crifitiovah, note this man by (this) 
letter) This same epistle is meant ; comp. 1 Thess. v. 27, where 
the article has the same demonstrative meaning : ffrt/iiiovah, mark, 
with a note of censure ; using this epistle for the sake of ad- 
monishing him, and inculcating it upon him. Comp. Oib Vm, 
xal eyiv^dtidav h ffrifiiiw (said of Korah and his company), and they 
became a sign, Num. xxvi. 10. The signification of the verb 
Tapahiyihari^iiv is akin to this. It may be done to others either 

^ This is the oratorical Enthymeme, wherein the argument is confirmed 
from its contrary. The logical Enthymeme is a covert syllogism. — Ed. 

' i.e. Let him do without food, as the angels do. — Ed. 

' " If the woman be not covered, let her also be shorn." (But she is 
not shorn ; therefore let her be covered). — Ed. 

' And if not doing one's own business, a man for want of something to do 
meddles with his neighbour's business. For " Nature abhors a vacuum.'' 
—Ed. 

" The antithesis is conveyed by the very sound of the words in the 
original, ikdSeV epyx^ofteiiovg, aXha, wspiefiyiii.^oftivovs, doing none of their 
own business, and yet over-officious in the business of others. — Ed. 

• Tf 'Koyif iifiiiii, our word) already spoken, ver. 10. — V. g. 



2 THESSALONIANS III. 15-17. 287 

by letters, if they are in a foreign land, or face to face, if present. 
This diversity of circumstances does not alter the meaning. — 
"tm ivrpaTri) that, having seen the judgment of others (respecting 
him), he may humble himself \he ashamed, Engl. Vers.]. 1JJ333 
they humbled themselves, 2 Chron. xii. 7. 

15. Ka; /til, and yet do not) Caution is given us on all sides, 
lest we fall into extremes. — vouhreTre, admonish) It is not enough 
not to keep company with a person : ver. 14 ; the man ought to 
know [ought to be made sensible] why it is so done. 

16. 'O Kupiog Trii iipfjvrig, the Lord of peace) Christ. — rrjv iJptivriv, 
peace) with the brethren. — h mam] rpovoj) [" by all means"] in 
every mode (way) of living, even as to what concerns the doing 
of work ; comp. ch. ii. 3, xarA firjdha, r^oTov, by no means. Paul 
uses ■jravrt rpovM without h, Phil. i. 18. 

17. T^ liajj x^'Ph '^ith my own hand) Therefore the greater 
part of the epistle had been written by another hand. — ari/ism, 
token) We have reason to believe that Paul [with a view to guard 
against fraud of every kind, ch. ii. 2. — V. g.] distinguished, by a 
peculiar and inimitable painting (tracing) and formation of the 
letters, the words of the salutation, grace, etc., ver. 18. — h 'na.gp 
111 sroXri, in every epistle) He had at that time, therefore, already 
written more. — outu, so) not otherwise. He hereby meets any 
doubt. 



our THE 



FIRST EPISTLE TO TIMOTHY. 



CHAPTER I. 

1. 'ActVtoXos, an apostle) This title serves to confirm Timothy. 
FainiHaxity must be laid aside, where the cause of God is con- 
cerned. — xar imraynv, according to the commandment') So Rom. 
xvi. 26 ; comp. 1 Cor. i. 1, note. — nurnpoi ti/iZv, our Saviour) So 
God the Father is also called, ch. ii. 3, iv. 10 ; Tit. i. 3, ii. 10, 
iii. 4 ; Jude ver. 25 ; Luke i. 47. The reason [for the Father 
being so called] is explained, 2 Tim. i. 9. — r^g eXvlSog ri/iuv, who 
is our Hope) Synonymous with ^carripog, our Saviour. 

2. Ti/io^'iifi, to Timothy) The epistles sent to Timothy, Titus, 
and Philemon, as being addressed to individuals, have some 
thiDgs which are rather sealed, than exphcitly set forth, for 
example ver. 18. If there were no epistle to Timothy extant, 
we should have particularly wished that there was one, in order 
that we might see what Paul would chiefly recommend to 
Timothy; now, since there are two, we ought the more earnestly 
to turn them to use. — rlxnw, son) Acts xvi. 12. — %af/s, sXeos, 
i'lpm, grace, mercy, peace) Paul, when addressing the churches, 
writes, grace to you and peace. When writing to Timothy, he 
adds mercy in this passage, and many years after, in 2 Tim. i. 
2 : comp. Jer. xvi. 5 ; Gal. vi. 16. Mercy implies grace, as it 
were, of a more tender kind towards the miserable, and the ex- 
perience of this divine mercy produces fitness for the Gospel 
minktrv vpr. 1.^. 1 fi •. 2 Car. iv. 1 : 1 Cor. vii. 25 : comD. Heb. 



240 1 TIMOTHY I. 3. 

ii. 17. — XpiSTou 'iridov, Christ Jesus^) Paul often, especially when 
writing to Tiniotliy, puts the surname Christ before the name 
Jesus, in respect of [as having a view to] the promises of the Old 
Testament concerning the Messiah, which were fulfilled in Jesus 
and were well known to Timothy, 2 Tim. iii. 1 5. 

3. KaSiig, even as) The Protasis ; the Apodosis is at ver. 18. 
\_In the meantime Paul refutes those who taught other doctrine, 
by the very striking example of his own conversion. — V. g.J 

There are three divisions of this epistle : 

I. The Inscription, i. 1, 2. 

II. The instruction of Timothy in regard to the holy 
administration of the church affairs at Ephesus in the 
absence of Paul : where 

1) In general, he commits to him a charge to be delivered 

to those who erroneously taught the law, the sum of 
the Gospel being established and confirmed by his 
own example, ver. 3, 4, 8, 9, 11, 12, 18, 19. 

2) In particular, 

1) He prescribes the order of prayer, ch. ii. 1, 2, 

chiefly to men, ver. 8 ; moreover to women 
good works, ver. 9, 10, with modesty, ver. 11, 
12. 

2) He enumerates the requisite qualifications of a 

bishop, iii. 1, 2. 
And also the duties of deacons and women, ver. 
8, 9, 11, 12, 13. 

3) He explains what Timothy ought to teach, after 

he had very weightily set forth the most mo- 
mentous points, ver. 14-iv. 3; in 4 and 5, 
also what he ought to avoid, and what he ought 
to follow, 7, 8, 12, 13 : 

Then how he should deal with men and women, 
V. 1, 2 ; 

With widows, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12, 16 ; 

' So the order of X^wtoS 'imoS stands in AD(A)G^ Vulg. But other 
MSS. of Vulg., Orig. 2.7396, and Rec. Text, read 'lutroS X^/ittoD.— Ed. 



TIMOTHY I. 4. 241 

With elders, ver. 17, 18; 

With offenders, ver. 20, 21 ; 

With Timothy himself, ver, 22, 23 ; 

With those of whom he is in doubt, ver. 24, 25; 

With servants, vi. 1, 2. 
4) Those who teach otherwise are reproved, 
ver. 3, 4, 6, 7 ; but Timothj is admonished 
and incited forward, ver, 11, 12, and a charge 
is given to him, ver. 13, 14 ; and precepts are 
prescribed to be enforced upon the rich, ver. 
17, 18. 

m. The Conclusion. 

— vpoez/^iiiai, to abide) The same word occurs in Acts xviii. 18. 
The presence of good men is a restraint upon the wicked. 
Timothy at Ephesus, Titus at Crete, were not bishops, but were 
directors of the bishops, and, so to speak, Vicars Apostolic. — ^"1 
eTifoSi3asii,aXiTti, to teach no other doctrine) than that which I have 
taught. Let them not substitute anything else for it, let them 
not add [Hter. impart by rubbing, ' affricent'] aught to it. Comp. 
the address of Paul to these same Ephesians, Acts xx. 28, 29, 
30. The same word occurs, ch. vi. 3, where those things which 
are contrary [to wholesome doctrine] are condemned, just as at 
the beginning of the epistle, the things which are good are com- 
mended. Even the things which seem to be only different 
(" other doctrine"), carry with them something which is posi- 
tively contrary [to the true doctrine]. They taught the law, in 
opposition to the Gospel, ver. 7, 11. 

4. Mribi 'xpodi^iiyi, nor give heed) in teaching. — /lCOois xai yma- 
Xoylaig, to fables and genealogies) A Hendiadys. Comp. on fables, 
ch. iv. 7 ; 2 Tim. iv. 4; Tit. i. 14 ; on genealogies, ib. ch. iii. 
9. And because these two things are joined together, and be- 
cause those who taught such doctrines boasted of the law, it is 
evident that the apostle is not speaking of the genealogies of the 
Jewish families, but of the genealogies of the oeons, against which 
Irenaeus and Tertullian quote this very passage. Nay, even Paul 
opposes to them the true consideration of the ceons, ver. 17 [ra 
^usiXiT Tuv altivm — dS^a s/'s roug aiuvag rSiv aiiivus, " to the King 



242 1 TIMOTHY 1. 5. 

of the aeons (ages)^ — be glory, throughout the aeons of aeons"]. 
But if there be any doubt, whether those who taught another 
doctrine used the word oeons already at that time, the wisdom of 
God [" the only wise God," ver. 17] should be the more ad- 
mired, which confutes (by anticipation) words not yet framed ; 
comp. note to Matt. xxvi. 27. yind. and a/'iiv are kindred words. 
The more inquisitive Jews had at that time very much mixed 
themselves up with the Gentiles. Paul casts no reproach on 
civil genealogies : he puts fables before this word ; a fact quite 
inconsistent with his meaning the genealogies of families, which 
were evidently not fabulous. At least Paul would not have cared 
whether they were true or false. There was on the part of 
those men a certain degree of boasting, that they can search 
more deeply than others into the mysteries contained in the law 
— a circumstance which greatly impeded the power of the Gos- 
pel, especially around Ephesus. — ^jjTijtre/s, questions) Questions 
to be terminated by no decision, nothing at all desirable ; pure 
truth is profitable. Comp. on these, and on " strifes about 
words," ch. vi. 4 ; 2 Tim. ii. 14, 23, 24 ; and presently after, 
ver. 6, 7 ; Tit. iii. 9. — o/xovo/i/av ©eoD) [godly edifying"]. Okmc- 
fjbia, in this passage, implies the act, not the state ; moreover, 
the constant act [' edifying']. Where time is wasted in useless 
questions, there the necessary and salutary /wnc^ions in the house^ 
of God are neglected. 

5. TJ riXog, the end) to which all things tend. The article 
denotes the subject. Whoever rightly looks to the end, cannot 
suffer his energies to be diffused on other things. Paul does 
not, even to Timothy, write about profound mysteries in parti- 
cular, in order that he may the rather rebuke the Gentiles ; the 
governor of a church ought to look to the things which are ne- 
cessary, not to such as are sublime (too high-flown), in discharg- 
ing the duties of his office. — rijs wapayyiXlag, of the command- 
ment) which you ought to ufge upon men at Ephesus, ver. 3, 
18. — aydirri, love) The foundation is faith, ver. 4 : the end is 
love, ver. 14 ; Tit. iii. 15. Contentions are unfavourable to this 
love. — x.a6apas, pure) 2 Tim. ii. 22 ; Tit. i. 15. — swiidfinu; 
uyaSrJi, a good conscience) ch. iii. 9 ; 2 Tim. i. 3 ; 1 John iii. 

' In allusion to the derivation of oiKoi/ofii» from olxo; and uiftu. So a;di- 
ficatio, edification, from sedes facere. —Ed. 



I TIMOTHY I. C-8. 243 

19, note.' Here, with Paul, conscience is in the understand- 
ing; the heart is the seat of love. The former would be in 
the idea, the latter in the desire ; comp. Matt. xxii. 37, note.^ — 
viCTeug, of faith) Faith towards God becomes stronger when the 
heart is purified in respect of our neighbour, and when the con- 
science is cleansed (rectified) in respect of one's self; wherefore 
faith is put in the third place. Pure faith and a good con- 
science are also treated of conjointly, in ver. 19, and ch. iv. 1, 2. 

6. ''ilv, from which) a pure heart, etc. — agTo-xrisavrig) The 
same word is found at ch. vi. 21 ; 2 Tim. ii. 18. aera-xiTv is 
said of him who misses the point at which he aimed, who does 
not obtain his end. — l^sTpd'rtiga.v, have turned away) Not only 
did they not become better, but worse. A false and prepos- 
terous elevation and extent of knowledge renders its possessor 
more estranged from the faith, and from the sense of good and 
evil, etc., than is any illiterate person. — ile /x,aTa,ioXoy!av, unto vain 
jangling) Tit. i. 10, iii. 9. He comprehends in this one term 
the empty (vain) babblings and oppositions, ch. vi. 20. It is the 
greatest vanity where Divine things are not truthfully discussed ; 
Eom. i. 21. 

7. &sXovTtg, desiring) rashly. — /irire — Mri, neither — nor) A 
good teacher ought to be intelligent, and at the same time well- 
informed. Paul says, both of these qualities are wanting to 
those of whom he is here speaking. — a) those things, which : 
mpl Tivuv, concerning what things [whereof]. 3j and rls difler. 
— fi^Ti a 'Kiyovai, neither what they say) Thence arise the profane 
vanities of words [" vain babblings"], ch. vi. 20. — |(i^« mpi rlmv 
Sm^s^aiouvTai, nor whereof they affirm) Thence arise the opposi- 
tions of science, falsely so called, ch. vi. 20. iSfjSaiog and Ssaig, 
firm and position, accord vrith one another.' — ha^i^aioZwo.!, 
affirm) Tit. iii. 8. 

8. 'O v6/ios — vo/ji,l/j,tag) Conjugate terms: m/il/niig, according to 
what is agreeable to the law. They used to " strive about the 

' Peter and Paul alone use tlie term awelim'S, conscience. John uses 
xapiicc instead. — Ed. 

' Job. Jam. Sirbius says, " there are three foundations of all that is 
found in man, Idea, Desire, Motion." 

' i.e. The fiijixios in het^ifixiovinai here, answers to the iiun in the 



244 1 TIMOTHY 1. 9, 10. 

law," Tit. iii. 9. — ■/^priTai) Sophocles has the phrase, vo/tij; ^p^ff^ai, 
which is explained as equivalent to vo/j,ohTiTii by the Scholiast ; 
and so Paul is speaking in this passage, not of the hearer of the 
law, but of the teacher. 

9. 'Eldiiig, knowing) construed with y^prirai, use. — hxaiw, for a 
righteous man) Many things which follow are put in antithesis 
to this one word. Therefore righteousness is widely spread. — 
ou xirrai) is not in force, doth not exist among us, in its applica- 
tion is not intended [" is not made"1. Therefore a true teacher 
ought not to use the law against a righteous person. Gal. v. 23. 
The antithesis is avrhnrai, in the following verse. — kvofLmi, for 
the \lawless\ unrighteous) Paul here names the unrighteous ac- 
cording to the order of the Decalogue ; from which it is evident 
that the commandment, Honour thy father, is fourth, not third.^ 
— avo/jioi; xat aroiroraymii, lawless and disobedient) Referring to 
the first commandment, the foundation of the law, the founda- 
tion of all obedience. — aaifSigj xal a,/j,apT(aXoTs, for the ungodly and 
sinners) not reverencing the ' name' of God, and thereby in- 
volved in great guilt,^ Ex. xx. 7. — avoeloi; xal j8ej8^Xo;5, for un- 
holy and profane) despising the true worship of God with a 
profane mind.' Such were those very persons whom Paul 
notices ; comp. iv. 7. BsjSjjXos is compounded of the inseparable 
preposition, jSs, Lat. ve, and /3»iXJs, a threshold, especially a sacred 
threshold : whence /3£/3?jXo/ to-ttoi, o'i /Saro/ xal ro/j Tu^ouei, places 
accessible to the common people. See E. Schmid. on Matt, xii., 
and Eustathius. 

10. ' Avbpa'jroiierafi) who make free men avdpdmSa,, slaves, by 
violence. They do not differ far from these, who do not levy 
(legally enhst) soldiers, but take them away by allurements, 
fraud, violence. — iTipov, any other thing) inconsistent with the 
ninth and tenth commandment.* — rjj uyiamueri diSaffxa'Alcf, to 
sound doctrine) So 2 Tim. iv. 3 ; Tit. i. 9, ii. 1 ; and wholesome 

' The Church of Rome suppresses the second commandment, and divides 
the tenth into two. So Beng. also. Thus our^fA is his/oartA. To make 
om fifth into third, their third and fourth must be joined and made second. 
—Ed. 

* Referring to the third commandment, as we divide them. Ed. 

' This will answer to o\a fourth commandment. — Ed. 

* i.e. Our tenth divided into two, ninth and tenth. The 'atwpMn and 
4'iuaTxi! answer to our ninth, Bengel's eighth.— Ed. 



1 TIMOTHY I. 11, 12. 245 

words, ch. vi. 3 ; 2 Tim. i. 13 ; and to he sound in regard to 
believers, Tit. i. 13, ii. 2. The contrary is, vosut, morbid 
[" dotin^''\, ch. vi. 4 ; a canker, 2 Tim. ii. 17. 

11. Karii, according to) This is construed with sound doc- 
trine, ver. 10. Paul hereby establishes the authority of his own 
' commandment.' Those who know the glory of God from the 
Gospel, vehemently detest all kinds of profligacy. The law is 
thus established by faith. Or else xard is construed with 
XP'^rai, if a man use it, ver. 8 ; although I know not whether it 
can be said, that we must use the law according to the Gospel ; 
or with •xigTiosi, from faith, ver. 5. — r^? So^lSj of the glory) Glory 
redounds to the Gospel from the Divine blessedness, and thence 
there results ' soundness' of doctrine. — nu /j^axccpiov, of the blessed) 
The same epithet is applied to God, ch. vi. 15. A peculiar 
phrase, indicating immortality '^ and supreme happiness, which 
most powerfully move men to confess the Gospel. The highest 
pinnacle of praise is blessedness ; comp. notes on Chrysostom 
de Sacerdotio, p. 371. The Blessed blesses : thence He is called 
the Saviour, ver. 1. — 3 smertvSriv eyri, with which I was entrusted) 
Tit. i. 3. This sets forth the peculiar and extraordinary privi- 
lege of Paul, Eom. xv. 16; Eph. iii. 8 ; Col. i. 25. 

12. Xapm 'i-)(u, I thank) A modal expression, [See Append, 
on Sermo Modalis.'] These are correlatives : Christ entrusted 
Paul with the Gospel : Paul, being " accounted faithftd," 
'thanks' Christ. He thanks Him at ver. 17; and in all his 
epistles and in their introductions. — hSum/iciaavri, who hath en- 
dued me with power) True conversion and calling confer power, 
Rom. V. 6. — -r/tfro'v fii riynean, counted me faithful) A Metonymy 
of the antecedent for the consequent ; i.e. He hath entrusted to 
me the oiEce of the Gospel ministry : Si/ji^ivo;, while he put {in 
that He put me), denotes the very act. The fact that He en- 
trusted the ministry to me, is the moral aspect : the fact that 
He put me into it, is as it were the physical aspect of His act. 
In the phrase. He counted me faithful, we have an example of 
Mfuvo-jrdhia (the actions of men attributed to God). For if I 
count any one faithful, and trust him, this is a kind of thing 
opposite of actual knowledge.'^ But the Divine judgment con- 

» That is to say, Trust in the faithfulness of a man can only strictly ex- 
ist on the part of man. God knows all that is in man, and what he is 



248 1 TIMOTHY I. lS-15. 

cerning Paul, that he would be faithful, is infallible. God 
sees and knows all things. Therefore, in the active sense, rnVr*? 
does not properly apply to Him. Faith and vision are things 
antithetic. I wished to convey all this idea by the expression, 
Metonymy, which I used above. 

13. BXatfp))/iov, a blasphemer) against God. — diwx,rriv, a perse- 
cutor) against holy men, lest others should be converted. — 
b^pierriv, despiser) [Engl. Vers., injurious'], in rejecting my own 
salvation. This threefold relation to God, his neighbour, and 
himself, is frequent in this epistle especially, and in that to 
Titus ; see presently at ver. 14, which forms an antithesis to 
this verse: likewise ver. 5, 9. Tit. ii. 12, where the word 
ludilSuig, godly, is opposed to adi^ilcf, ungodliness, and yet the 
two words, soberly, and righteously, are opposed to worldly lusts. 
So here love (ver. 14) alone has a threefold relation : it is love 
toM'ards God, of which the opposite is a blasphemer ; it is love 
towards the Church, of which the opposite is a persecutor ; it is 
love towards himself, of which the opposite is a despiser. — riXeri6r)v, 
I obtained mercy) This word is resumed, as if after a parenthesis, 
in ver. 1 6. This sense of mercy was perpetual in the mind of 
the apostle, ver. 2, note. — on, because) Ignorance does not de- 
serve pardon in itself; but in classifying the reasons which 
might impel a man to reject salvation, it is opposed to pride 
and every higher degree of wickedness. 

14. ' 'T'!npiT}.i6\iaiffi de, and was exceeding abundant) He explains 
how he obtained mercy, namely, with faith, etc. The epistles to 
Timothy, in a peculiar degree, breathe this ' abundance.' — 
v %«/"?, grace) by which / obtained mercy, ver. 13. — Kvpiou, of 
the Lord) Jesus. — /isrii menag, with faith) Its opposite is, in un^- 
belief, ver. 13. — xal aydirrjg, and love) Its opposite, as we have 
said, are the three, a blasphemer, a persecutor, a despiser. The 
words, mercy and grace (in ver. 13, 14), correspond to each 
other. Unbelief and faifh are opposed. 

15. nidrhg, faithful) A very solemn form of preface. Paul 
knows what he says, and whereof he affirms (ver. 7), and refutes 
the false teachers by the very simplicity of his language, treat- 
ing, but with great beauty, of common topics, so much the 

about to do. Therefore trust in a man's faithfulness only applies to God by 
eiuSouTroirahix. — Ed. 



1 TIMOTHY I. IG, IT 24T 

rather, as others aiFected to treat of those which are more ab- 
struse. So also Tit. ii. 1. — Traffjjs, all) Even faith is a kind of 
acceptation. This statement deserves all acceptation by all the 
faculties of the whole soul : airobo^'^ (from dexef^oci, Luke viii. 
13), is when I am thankful, and speak of a thing as a good 
deed {a boon conferred on me) : comp. the correlative, aTodsxrhv, 
acceptable, ch. ii. 3. — Xpigrhs 'ifjaoui) Christ, viz. as promised : 
Jesus, as manifested, Franckius, in Homil. on this passage, 
shows that in this sense the name Christ here is put first, and 
Jesus after it ; comp. 2 Tim. i. 9, note. — MSfiov, world) which 
was fiiU of sin, John i. 29 ; Rom. v. 12 ; 1 John ii. 2. — a/iaf- 
raXoiig, sinners) great and notable sinners. He saves also those 
whose sins have been not so aggravated ; but it is much more 
remarkable that He saves so great sinners. It can scarcely 
happen, but that they who themselves have tasted the grace of 
God, should taste its universality, and, in like manner, from it 
entertain favour towards all men. Paul draws the conclusion 
from his own individual case to all men. — irpurog, first) This is 
repeated with great force in the following verse [a force which 
is lost by the Engl. Vers., c/w'«/]. The example of Paul is 
incomparable, whether we consider sin or mercy. [There had been 
then no such example from the ascension of the Lord- — V. g.] 

^16. 'AXkoL, but) Although I am the first (foremost and chief) 
of sinners. — bia, touto) for this very cause. — r^,' "raeuv //^axpo6v/j,!aii) 
all long-suffering; whereas even a less proportion (of long-suf- 
fering), so to speak, may restore such as ari, not so great sinners ; 
comp. Ex. xxxiii. 19, that expression UIQ 73, all the goodness of 
the Lord, in respect of a people exceedingly guilty. — '?rphi ImoTxi- 
Tiaaiv, for a pattern) that others might so vmnmuaSai, be con- 
formed to the pattern, or might revolve it in their mind, and 
make it the subject of their serious consideration. If you be- 
lieve, as Paul did, you will be saved as Paul was. [In like 
manner, David also desired to be an example, Ps. xxxii. 6. — 
V. g.] The same word occurs, 2 Tim. i. 13. — Iv Aura) on 
Him, on God. — iig, to) This may be construed with pattern. 

17. Tffl di) The doxology flows from a sense of grace. — BccaiXiT 
riiv aiiivm, to the King of aeons or ages [eternal^ A frequent 

» E;>i, lam) I am, he says, not / was, including the very moment of 
writina' — V o-. 



248 1 TIMOTHY I. 18, 19. 

phrase with the Hebrews. The thought of eternity is parti- 
cularly dehghtful to those assured of grace, while it miserably 
terrifies others. — aopdrtjj, invisible) This attribute is given Him 
in the way of praise. See how perverse they are who affirm 
that there is no God, because they do not see Him. — /iovw ©sa, 
the only God) So, the only Potentate, ch. vi. 15 ; comp. Ps. 
Ixxxvi. 10; John v. 44; Jude 25. [_A magnijicent reading!^ 
— Not. Crit.] — r/ju.)], So^a, honour, glory) Such an Asyndeton is 
commonly used, where circumstances and feeKngs would tend 
to render the words much accumulated (tend to produce some- 
what of an accumulation of words) : for example, honour and 
glory and strength, etc. ; and where nevertheless he leaves them 
to be supplied in the mind of the hearer. Such an Asjmdeton 
is very suitable to the ardour of the apostle in doxologies, ch. 
vi. 16 ; 1 Pet. v. 11 ; although the transcribers have very gene- 
rally inserted xaK Th^ omission of this particle in so many 
passages ' is not accidental ; but its addition is due to the over- 
busy officiousness of transcribers.'' 

18. Xlapa,rik//,ai doi, I commit to thee) to lay before thy hearers, 
ver. 3. [Its sum is indicated in ver. 5. — ^V. g.J — -rrpoayoUa;, 
that went before) When hands were laid on Timothy, the spirit 
of prophecy showed that many things of great importance were 
about to be entrusted to Timothy, ch. iv. 14. — ^rf opjjrt/as) Divine 
predictions (Acts xi. 27), given forth regarding thee by many 
witnesses, ch. vi. 12. — grpanuri, mightest war) A comparison 
taken from military concerns. In the following verse the com- 
parison is from naval concerns. — avra/'g) -Trpo^rjrtlaig, viz. the 
predictions. — rriv xa\r,v erparilav) that good warfare. 

19. "Extav, having) Whilst the warfare has to be maintained. 
— vidTiv, faith) Faith is like a very precious liquor; a good con- 
science is hke clean or pure glass. — riv, which) good conscience. 
— a<!rm<!a[i.im, having thrust away) It withdraws unwillingly; it 
always says, Do not injure me. He who retains it, does not 

1 So AD(A) corrected, Gfg Vulg. But Rec. Text adds tr6((>^ to ^o'»u, 
•with later Syr. He who alone is God gives a more striking sense than the 
only wise God. — Ed. 

' Unfortunately for Bengel's argument, the best authorities, which 
Lachm. and Tisch. follow, read the ku'i. However, many secondary authori- 
ties omit it Ed. 



1 TIMOTHY I, 20.-II, 1. 249 

easily make shipwreck of his faith. — Jvauay>jtfav, have made ship- 
wreck) Therefore they had entered on the voyage of faith. 
Hesychius explains ha,\id,yn(sa,v as ixivSuvsvaav, 

20. "T/ihaioe xccl ' A'Ke^avSpos, Hymenceus and Alexander) A 
reproof, with the names expressed : comp. on Hymenseus and 
Alexander, 2 Tim. ii. 16, 17, iv. 14, 15. — ous, whom) though 
absent. They were at Ephesus; Paul was at Eome. This 
was the part of an apostle ; it was the part of Timothy merely 
to avoid them and to be on his guard. — vapsSaxa, I have de- 
livered) for [or to] the destruction of the flesh [1 Cor. v. 5]. — 
/i^ ^Xastpn/ifii) lest they should fall into blasphemy, and wholly 
complete their guilt by becoming more hurtfiil to themselves 
and others. \_The danger of blasphemy is near at hand to the 
man who has made shipwreck of his faith. Satan might Jiarass 
them: he could not force them to blaspheme. — V. g.] 



CHAPTER II. 

1. TlapaxaXu, I exhort) In this chapter he describes public 
worship : I. In regard to prayers ; II. In regard to doctrine, 
ver. 11, 12. — oui', therefore) This exhortation flows from that sense 
of grace [spoken of, last chap., ver. 14]. Paul intimates not 
only what he himself wishes, but what Timothy ought to incul- 
cate. — vpSiTov vavrm '?roieia6a,i, first of all to make) The highest 
duty. [The apostle here furnishes sufficient employment to pre- 
vent any aXKorpioemaxoiria;, curious investigation into irrelevant 
questions, ch. i. 4. — V. g.] — diriang, 'jrpogiv^&s, Ivriv^ui, ihyapie- 
rlag) The plural number indicates force : Sirieis (from dif) is the 
imploring of grace in any special necessity : vpoatuyf,, prayer, is 
exercised, when on any occasion we offer our wishes and desires 
to God: 'ivTiv^ii is earnest intercession for other men or crea- 
tures, ch. iv. 5, even if they cannot pray for themselves : lii^a- 
pidTia;, giving of thanks, is becoming to be made also for all 
men, because, for example, God wishes all men to be saved, and 
Christ is the Mediator of all. — v'rep, for) This is connected with 



280 1 TIMOTHY II. 2. 

supplications — thanksgivings. All, at separate times, have special 
necessities. — ■Trdnriav, for all) ver, 4, 6. 

2. 'ririp ^aeiX'sm, for kings) on whom other men depend, [and 
who frequently enjoy less opportunity of arriving at the knowledge 
of saving truth. — V. g.] — vavrw, all) Often the humblest magis- 
trates, even in villages, do much harm, or else are of much 
benefit. — h imipoy^, in eminent stations, authority) as for instance 
the counsellors of kings, or, where there is no king, other magis- 
trates. — ha, that) The reason, why we must pray for kings. — 
fipe/ji,ov, quiet) free, aliens being removed out of the country. Chry- 
sostom, for example, applies tjpffilav to the Holy of Holies in the 
temple ; and the word agrees with ipri/iog, lonely, by Metathesis. 
— iisu^iov, peaceable) free ; those who are aliens, if allowed to 
reside, at least giving us no disturbance. — ev(re^ii(f, in godliness) 
piety towards God. The word is frequently used in the epistles 
to Timothy and Titus. [Luke uses the same word in the Acts, 
and Peter in his second epistle. It may be mentioned among the 
vile rabble of a most perverse world as a remarkable stratagem, 
contrary to the kingdom of God and advantageous to the aims of 
Satan, that piety, in name at least never hitherto lightly esteemed, 
has at length been converted into a term of reproach, ' Pietist,' 
by an anonymous person of the worst character, whose death, as 
toe are informed, was shocking. Nor even does the termination 
itself involve anything bad in itself, as it corresponds to the 
words. Statist, Copyist, Linguist. But if the intention is to dis- 
tinguish by a peculiar name fanatics and men assuming the appear- 
ance of holiness (in which case it ought to be made certain, that a 
blow is not dealt at those really innocent), why, pray, is piety 
hereby virtually punished f A serious matter is at stake. Expe- 
rience cries out in witness of the fact ; in conversations and social 
meetings, when a man, having said not as mu^h as a word for the 
cause of religion, has conducted himself somewhat more modestly, 
he is easily assailed by this title, of which not even the pronun- 
ciation is in some instances well known to the common people. It 
can scarcely be told, what a number of sparks of piety have been 
quenched by the use of the scoffing term, pietist. GoD will 
execute judgment for all this, Jude, ver. 15. — V. g.] — «£/«- 
virriTi, [honesty] propriety) on the part of men towards on^ 
another. 



I TIMOTHY II. rt-5. 251 

3. 'i'ouro y&p, for this) The reason, why we must pray for all. 
It may be asked, why are not more converted ? We do not 
sufficiently pray. It is a religious duty, that in behalf of our- 
selves, and in behalf of others, we should meet the will of God, 
which is favourable to us. — xal) and, therefore. — rou Swr^^os jj/awii, 
our Saviour) who has actually saved us that believe. The anti- 
thesis is in the following verse : Who wishes that all, even in- 
cluding those who do not believe, should be saved : comp. eh. iv 
10. It is strange if a soul, having found in reality the salva- 
tion of God, can deny the universality of grace. 

4. UdvTag) all, not merely a part, much less a very small 
part ; ver. 3, note. — avSpd'jrovg, men) lost in themselves. — SeXei, 
[' wills'] wishes) in serious earnestness of wish : ibid. — cuirjva,!, 
to be saved) This is treated of, at ver. 5, 6. — Ka; elg, and unto) 
This is treated of, at ver. 6, 7. — ukrihiag) of saving truth, — 
ikkni, to come) They are not forced. 

5. E/s) one, common to all. They who have not this one God, 
by one Mediator, have none, [ — and therefore they are not 
saved. Yet God wishes all men to be saved by the saving know- 
ledge of God and the Mediator ; but there is a legitimate and most 
lioly order in the exercise of that will, wherewith men ought to 
receive it. All mankind constitute as it were one man before God ; 
wherefore it is right, that they who have obtained salvation should 
intercede for those who are farther distant from, it. If that were 
done, how much better would be the condition of the human race ! 
Let him pray, I request, who knoivs how to pray. — V. g.J — y&p, 
for) ver. 4 is proved from ver. 5 ; ver. 1 from ver. 4. The whole 
is universal. Comp. Isa. xlv. 22. — iJg xal, one also) [who is 
Mediator.^ He does not say, also one ; therefore the stress of the 
voice does not so much fall upon the adjective, one, as upon the 
substantives. We could not rejoice that there is a God, if we 
did not rejoice also in the Man Mediator. — elg—i7g, one — one) 
Mark xii. 29, 32 ; 1 Cor. viii. 6 ; Eph. iv. 5, 6.— /i£<r/V»,c, Me- 
diator) This is as it were an epithet of the noun, man ; and the 
word, one, coheres at the same time with both of these. — av6puTog, 
man) The Saviour, not without reason, is here called man, rather 
than God ; that the reason may be marked, why all men should 
be converted to this Mediator, who [i.e. inasmuch as He, a man] 
has given Himself for all fnienl : comp. Kom. v. 15, note. 



252 1 TIMOTHY II. 6-8. 

The article is not added. Again, in turn, he calls Him GocL, 
ch. iii. 16. 

6. Ti /lapripiov, the testimony) The accusative absolute, as 
hhiiyiLo,, 2 Thess. i. 5. A word suited to the character which 
Paul and Timothy sustained ; for they were witnesses. The 
testimony of universal redemption is intended. — xaipoTg Idloig, 
in its own due times, or His own due times') ch. vi. 15, 
note. 

7. Kripv^) p^ng. Vers, preacher] a herald solemnly appointed, 
sent by God. A word of large import, as 2 Cor. v. 20 ; 1 Thess. 
iL 6, at the end. — amSToXog, an apostle) of Christ. — aknhiaii Xiym, 
I speak the truth, ou -vJ/EiiSo/ia;, / lie not) This affirmation belongs 
to the preceding clause ; for there are added to the subsequent 
clause the parallel words, h irlarti xa) aXrihtof, in faith and truth ; 
[i.e. parallel to aXriL Xiyu, and ob -^/ivL] 

8. BouXo/ia; oh, I will therefore) The apostolic authority is 
represented in this expression ; ch. v. 14 : comp. presently ver. 12, 
I suffer not. The particle therefore takes up again, ver. 1. — 
-Trpogev^teOcii nvg avdpa.e, that men pray) So also in 1 Pet. iii. 7, 
prayers are assigned to m£n, in a certain particular point of 
view. He is speaking here of public prayers, in which the heart 
of the people follows close after the language of him who prays : 
comp. the next verse concerning women. — h wavu roVw, in every 
place) construed with avBpag, men. Paul also appeals elsewhere 
on this subject to a similar practice in all the churches. Wher- 
ever men are, there are those by whom and for whom prayers 
are to be made. — i'Tea.lpovTo.g, lifting up) They turned up the 
palms of their hands to heaven, as those asking for help are wont 
to do. — offlovg x^fo'Sj ^oly hands) Wrath and doubting are in the 
soul : but the hands also ought to be holy. The contrary is 
found at Is. i. 15, at the end. The word ieloug is especially 
used in the propriety of the Greek idiom for freedom from all 
violence. — opyijg, wrath) which [molesting men especially. — V. g.j 
is the reverse of love (comp. 1 Pet. iii. 7, at the end), and the 
mother of doubting. — diaXoyja/ioiJ, doubting) which is opposed to 
faith. Christianity consists of faith and love, and comprises 
grace and truth : it therefore ought to form the principal object 
of our desires, that we may both pray, and live and die, without 
doubting and wrath. The exercise of prayer, and of the whole 



1 TIMOTHY II. 9-13. 253 

of Christianity, is at once either true or vain.^ Grace cherishes 
faith ; truth, love, Eph. iv. 15. 

9. KarairroXji) A well-chosen word.^ "Women are delighted 
with elegant clothing ; and to this the apostle alludes in this pas- 
sage. They were rich at Ephesus, ch. vi. 17. — xoe/^lcfi, elegant, 
becoming, ornamental [modest, Engl. Yers.]) spiritually, as it is 
presently described at ver. 10. — aldoug, sJiamefacedness) ver. 11, 
12. — (SMippoB-ovns, sobriety) A word of frequent occurrence in the 
epistles to Timothy and' Titus. This virtue governs the whole 
of private life. — V^) cu denies, /Ji,ri forbids, in a discourse of this 
kind. There is a great difference between oO and /i^. OO indeed 
might even here be used, because there is not here a finite verb ; 
and so in the case of participles. But otherwise the particles 
cannot be exchanged. 

10. 'ETayyeXXo/jiimig) promising (engaging to follow), profess 
ing. The same word is at ch. vi. 21. — Si spycuv, with works) 
construed with adorn ; with works, without speaking, which is 
competent for (the province belonging to) men, ver. 8, 11, 12 ; 
1 Pet. iii. 1. There is a very fre'^uent mention of works in the 
epistles to Timothy and Titus, and those are adorned with the 
appellation of good works, which come to be performed in the 
ordinary affairs of human life. 

11. MavSanru, let the woman learn) The antithesis of to teach, 
ver. 12. — uTorayr}, in subjection) The antithesis is to the phrase, 
to use (usurp) authority, ver. 12. 

12. OvK imrps'Trca) I do not commit to the charge of the woman 
[suffer"] ; i.e. I cannot commit or entrust it. Litotes (see Append.). 
— abSivTiT)! avSphg) to use authority in respect to [over] the man, 
viz. by teaching, by speaking, for example, in prayer. — a>5/'k, 
in respect to [over] the man) This implies not merely a husband, 
but the whole race of men. 

13. ' ASa//, yap, for Adam) The reason which applies to the 
first man, holds good for all men ; and that which applies to Eve, 

' That is, Prayer and the whole sum of Christianity stand or fall 
together. If one is true, both are true ; if one is false, both are false. 
—Ed. 

^ Plutarch uses it of moderation or simplicity in dress. — Ed. 

' Koff^f/* kecvroU;, to adorn themselves) ccfastrued with hi spym dyot^uv, 
ver. 10. — V. g. 



264 1 TIMOTHY II. 14, 15. 

holds good for all women. Again, what is said of the salvability 
[safety] of the woman, ver. 15, is also appropriate to be under- 
stood of the first woman. — ■spuToi) Jirst ; so that the woman was 
created for him, 1 Cor. xi. 8. 9. 

14. 0\jx, ri-saTriSri, was not deceived) The Serpent deceived the 
woman ; the woman did not deceive the man, but persuaded him : 
Gen. iii. 17, thou hast hearkened to the voice of thy wife. In the 
preceding verse, we are taught why the woman ought not to 
exercise authority, now, why she ought not to teach ; more easily 
deceived, she more easily deceives; comp. Eccl. vii. 29. 
Deceiving indicates less strength in the imderstanding ; and this 
is the strong ground on which a woman is not allowed to teach. 
— o.'xaTrihTsa b Tapa^daei yiyott, being deceived, fell into^ the 
transgression) i.e. was guilty of falhng into the deception (Gen. 
iii. 13, o(pig Tj-xdrnai //,s), and so she began to be in the trans- 
gression. It is not said, Iv 'jra.fa^dgei ysyovuia. ^irar^^i), having 
come to be in the transgression, she was deceived. Therefore 
ysyove does not apply to the very origin of the woman ; for the 
deception followed not until after that ; but y'syovs closely agrees 
with £11 '^rapa^dsei, which has the meaning of a noun ; see Acts 
xxii. 17 [sv hgrdaei, in a state of trance^ ; and comp. note on 
John i. 15. The state of transgression which quickly followed 
the deception, once for all admitted, is here intended. A 
phrase very like this is found at Num. xxvi. 10, cymri^rieav iv 
trj/iilifi. 

15. ^atS^gtTai di, but she shall be saved) She shall be rescued 
from that offence (and from its consequences). — Sid rrjc nxvoyovlai, 
in child-bearing) The part of the woman is here described, in 
antithesis to the duty of teaching and governing: rexvoyotiia, 
bringing forth and training children. He is not speaking here as 
to the properly-called cause of salvation ; for many who bring 
forth children nevertheless perish: many, who do not bear 
children, are saved ; but the state or "condition is denoted, in 
which a woman may be likely to obtain salvation, although she 
be not mixed up with the duty that belongs to the man. 
Wherefore the if has a stronger force here than did, in : and the 
continuing takes for granted the standing in faith, etc. — /iihueiv, 

^ ' " Was in," Engl. Vers. ; rather, " Came to be in." For it is yiyom, not 
v"- — Ed. 



1 TIMOTHY III. ], 2. 2K5 

if they continue) Namely, the women. A Syllepsis^ of the 
number. For sobriety, which is presently praised, is competent 
for (a grace peculiarly becoming in) women : comp. ver. 9. Let 
them remain within these bounds. — visTsi xal ayav-ri, in faith and 
love) General divisions. — aytaefhii ii.«ra. em(ppois\)\iiK) in holiness with 
sobriety. A special part of sanctification is modesty or modera- 
tion, a grace which regulates man in respect of himself, as faith 
in respect of God, love in respect of our neighbour: ayiae/jAi, 
holiness, especially chastity: auKppoavvti, moderation, self-control, 
ver. 9, 11 



CHAPTER III. 

1. Uigrhi 6 X0705, this is a faithful saying) This preface is used, 
because it does not seem so to the world. — ip'eyerai — ImSu/itT) 
There is here great propriety in the words : opiyto, to stretch out, 
thence ipiyo/iai, to ask eagerly with outstretched hand, to grasp : 
imh/aia of the mind, seeking rJ xaXhv, a good thing, produces 
'ipi^iv ; again opi^ig indicates imdufilav : hpiyigdai, (piuyiiv, are opposed 
to each other : see Arist. 1, Rhet. 10, n. 12. In human affairs, 
those things are more agreeable, which a man confers or performs 
of his own accord, than when he is asked : how much more in 
the affairs of religion? 1 Cor. xvi. 15, at the end. But away 
with sacrilegious solicitation of favour and interest. There were 
not wanting persons who wished to obtain it, James iii. 1. Paul 
does not altogether reject their desire, but he reduces it to order. 
— xaXoD) an honourable good, excellent, demanding noble virtues. 
To this is to be referred the then or therefore (ouv) in the follow- 
ing verse. — 'ipyou, work) It is a work, a business, not ease ; Acts 
XV. 38 ; Phil. ii. 30. 

2. AiT, must) Paul shows what Timothy ought to look to in 
the appointment of bishops, ver. 15 ; wherefore he so in parti- 
cular describes the virtues as they meet the eye.— rouv, therefore) 

' A figure whereby i yvuij, the singular, is here expressed, whilst the 
plural is meant. And accordingly the plural verb fisii/aam is put, agreeing 
with yvuxixss, women, understood. — Ed. 



25Q 1 TIMOTHT III. 2. 

A good office must be entrusted to good men. — rhv Maxowoii, tfio 
bishop) Deacons are directly opposed to bishops, ver. 8 ; therefore 
the presbyter is included in the bishop ; Acts xx. 28, note. — 
ave'jriXri'Trrov, blameless) without crime, bad report, and just sus^ 
picion ; comp. Tit. i. 6. — elvai, be) not only during the time of 
discharging his duty, but at the time when he is being appointed: 
ver. 10. The order of the virtues, which follow, should be 
attended to. — /na; yumixog avdpa, the husband of one wife) So ver. 
12, ch. V. 9 ; Tit. i. 6. This element of the blameless man's 
character is put in the first place. It is the ancient nature of 
marriage, that one man should have one woman. The husband 
(man) of one wife (woman) is therefore a simple periphrasis of 
husband ; ch. v. 9, note. The opinion as to successive polygamy' 
being forbidden here to bishops, seems formerly to have been 
drawn firom "the Canons of the Apostles ;"^ since the 17th Canon 
runs thus : " Whosoever after baptism enters into a second mar- 
riage^ or keeps a concnbine, he is disqualified fi-om being a 
bishop." Some have understood it, as if second marriages were 
forbidden, and certainly the old translation gives this meaning : 
*If any one after baptism is joined in wedlock for the second time, 
etc. ; whence the unfavourable interpretation of the Canon was 
easily transferred to Paul. But of what importance is it, whether 
a man has for his help one woman during twenty years, for 
example, or two after a term of widowhood? But why does 
Paul, rather taking for granted than requiring that the bishop 
should have one wife, not add Jj ayafiov, or be unmarried'^ 
Unmarried persons were then rare, nor does he exclude the 
latter fi-om the sacred office, but yet he assumes that the father of a 
family was somewhat better fitted for the discharge of these duties: 
and that, of two candidates, if they be equal in other respects, 
he who has a wife and virtuous family, is to be preferred to a 
bachelor, who has less testimony firom actual practice (experience), 
ver. 4, 5 ; for he who is himself bound to discharge the domestic 

' That is, the marrying a second time after the death of the first wife, 
which was forbidden by the subsequent canons of the Church in less pure 
ages. — Ed. 

- A work of later ages, wrongly so called. — Ed. 

' iivirl yafioi; BVfi'sr'ha.x.lli. 

* Si quis post baptisma secundis fuerit nuptiis copulatus. 



1 TIMOTHY 111. 3. 23t 

duties, which are here so frequently mentioned, is likely to be 
more attractive to those who are in like manner attached by 
ties to the world, and is of advantage to the community by a 
more popular example : ver. 4. It is to be added to this, that 
indiscriminate celibacy has rendered many open to blame. 
The Jews also teach, that a priest should be neither unmarried 
nor childless, lest he should be unmerciful. — ii>)paX/ov) vigilant in 
mind; so ver. 11 [yripaXlovi, which Engl. Vers, renders sober]; 
Tit. ii. 2 ; for vijpw is to watch. See on Chrys. de Sacerd., p. 428. 
This is opposed to slumbering and sloth, which are sins in defect. 
Uri^u, when it is used alone, denotes both watchfulness i and 
sobriety, and by Metonymy the one is put for the other (comp. 
1 Thess. V. 8, Let us be sober, v^<piafj,!v) ; but when ypnyopsM 
and vri<pta are joined (as at 1 Thess. v. 6), the latter verb 
has the strict signification, to be sober, and is opposed to 
liMnxiaSoii, to be drunk. — aiippova) of sound mind [^ sober\] 
under self-control. It is opposed to vehemence (impetuosity) of 
mind, which sins in excess. The derivatives, gaxppovZ, eaifposum., 
X.T.X., have a consonant signification. Comp. Tit. i. 7, 8, where 
-rdpom? (which in Greek implies a bold and rash man, such as 
drunkards usually are) and gwppuv are opposed to each other. — 
xogfiiov, decorous, orderly [of good behaviour]) What the eu^pm 
is within, the xoa/nos is without. Hesychius defines xogfiloug as 
avBmXri'jrrDug ; Plato, xog/iioi xal tux.o'koi, men moderate and good- 
natured. The new man bears somewhat of a sacred-festival 
character, and is at variance with every species of pollution, con- 
fiision, disorder, excess, violence, laxity, assumption, harshness, 
depravity, mutilation, meanness; he sparingly and in private obeys 
the necessity of nature, and of the material food, which is put in 
motion by ingestion, digestion, and egestion, and keeps all the 
traces of the corruptible body concealed ; Phil. iv. 8. — <pi\6^ivov, 
hospitable) to strangers, especially to the needy and exiles, whom 
many treat with disdain. — Ma,vi.Ti%h, apt to teach) See 2 Tim. ii. 
24, note. 

3. M)j itapomv, not given to wine) 'aXX' hmiiKn, but patient, 
lenient, reasonable, is to be referred to this expression. For 
xctpoivia here, as everywhere else, not only signifies drunkenness, 
comp. ver. 8 ; Tit. ii. 3, but also the violent and unreasonable 
conduct towards others, proceeding fi:om it. — iJ^n -jrX^xrriv, no 



2S8 1 TIMOTHY III. 4-b, 

striker) with the tongue or the hand. For there is nothing to 
prevent this word from heing taken in its proper sense, 2 Cor. 
xi. 20, note.^ Refer to it aX>'. aiLayav, but no brawler, not using 
the fists; comp. 2 Tim. ii. 24. 

4. Tou Idiov o'i'xov, his own house) Many men, for instance, are 
mild abroad, but are the less disposed to restrain their passion 
at home, which they direct against their wives, etc. — xaXug 
vpoigTii/iiviiv, one who ruleth well) To this apiXapyvpla chiefly 
refers. — fiiT& mang ei/jLvorriToc, with all gravity [propriety]) so 
that there may be no luxury \_&scaTia, riotous living^ : Tit. i. 6. 

5. Oux Olds, if a man does not know) Paul intimates that the 
man who rightly rules his own house will have well-behaved 
children. — ^Zg, hoiv) It requires higher qualifications to rule the 
Church, than a family. 

6. M)j n6(puTo\i) not a man recently converted from heathenism. 
Such persons might be more easily and more safely set over 
others who have also been newly converted. Acts xiv. 23, than 
over old and experienced Christians, who were numerous, and 
among whom the number of candidates was greater. It is a 
metaphor taken from plants; John xv. 2, note, [Rom. vi. 5, 11, 
17, 18 ; 1 Cor. iii. 6, 7.] The young plants generally exhibit 
a luxuriant verdure ; the newly converted man has not yet been 
macerated by the cross.^ The antithesis is an aged disciple, 
Acts xxi. 16 [Mnason of Cyprus, apyaiw /ia^jjrji]. — ruipuSitg, 
lifted up with pride) The same word occurs, ch. vi. 4, note ; 2 Tim. 
iii. 4. — Txxpia is xaloi, to burn : rZpog, a smoking heat without 
flame : whence they are said rupovsSai, whom wine, as well as 
those whom a high opinion of their knowledge and pride ^haughti- 
ness}, render no longer masters of themselves, and affect with 
giddiness [puffed up, having the head turned with conceit] : see 
Is. xxviii. 7, Lutheran version. — ilg KplfLa, into condemnation) i.e. 
into the same condemnation into which the devil fell, being 

' " If any strike ^ou on the fact" under the plea of divine zeal ; Isa. Iviii. 
4 ; 1 Kings xxii. 24 ; Neh. xiii. 25 ; Acts xxiii. 2. — Ed. 

^ In every kind of life, it may be observed, that those who immediately 
begin at the highest point of elevation can hardly adopt wise measures for 
their own advantage, scarcely condescend to inferiors, cannot be affected by 
the condition of the afflicted, and cannot rule themselves, and maintain 
moderation in all things; but all these qualities particularly apply to the 
office of a bishop. — V. g. 



1 TIMOTHY 111. 7-9, 259 

lifted up, at the very beginning of his most blessed (brilliant) 
state, like a novice ; comp. Job xxxviii. 15 [the high arm shall 
be broken], concerning the proud (weprjcpdvuv, lxx.). " He 
seems to have been raised and exalted more than the other 
angels, to the government of many angels, though he was 
younger than many of them ; and this very circumstance be- 
came the occasion of pride to him." — Artem. ad init. Joh. praef., 
p. 23. The words of Paul do not bear out the whole of this 
statement. The condemnation here is taken passively ; and 
yet mi&ie/iig, reproach, in the following verse, is active ; for 
condemnation corresponds to the internal condition of the soul : 
reproach is opposed to "a good report from those that are without;" 
and the devil may bring a reproach upon men, he cannot bring 
them into condemnation ; for he does not judge, but is judged. 

7. Kal fiapTupiav, also a good report) Not even former life 
should be open to any reproach. Mere report is not sufficient ; 
but there ought to be a good report along with the practice of 
the virtues, nay, a good testimony. Paul wishes that the 
character of Christians should be in high esteem; comp. ch. 
V. 14, note. — d^i rSiv 'i^iahv, from those that are without) that 
they may be more easily gained over, and the glory of God be 
promoted. — oviiiig/ihv, reproach) Comp. ch. v. 14. The devil 
may occasion the greatest trouble to the minister who is sub- 
jected to bad reports, by hhnself (the devil), and by means of 
the calumnies of men. — xal -Trayiia, and a snare) Comp. Matt. 
xxii. 15. 

8. A/axoKous, the deacons) Supply it behoves to be. — m SiXSyoug, 
not double-tongued) saying some things to some men, and other 
things to others. The deacons might take occasion to commit 
such sins, in performing the duties of their office. The deacons 
should not be double-tongued, nor the deaconesses calumniators, 
ver. 11 [slanderers] : it seems the deacons visited more houses 
than the deaconesses. — /^ri ohu), not to wine) The danger of 
drmikenness threatens those who in the way of duty visit many 
houses. 

9. Trii ■jtiSTiui, of the faith) The deacons were often speaking 
of the Christian faith, as opportunity offered, in the discharge 
of their duty ; and even though they should not speak, still 

flin„ „, 1 J i_ _ij. 5 i« i\,n ATii\ac! nf tVipir nffiffi. n.nrl an 



SfiO 3 TIMOTHY III. 10-15. 

to the church with a holy mind, and with the desire to show a 
good example. 

10. Kai olroi di, and these also) The bishop was bound to 
have more and greater virtues (qualifications) conspicuous, and 
he was of greater dignity ; wherefore in his case no further 
scrutiny (' proving') is required ; but the deacons were bound 
to give proof of what they were, in performing the duties of the 
deaconship, before that they be fully admitted into the ofiice. 

11. TumTjiag, wives) This depends on 'iyavTai, having, ver. 9. — 
iieauTcag, in like manner) This refers to ver. 8. — /^ri Sia^oXoug, 
not slanderers) especially among those that are without. — msrag, 
faithful) This refers to ver. 9. 

13. ^a,6ii,hi) a degree, from the humble deaconship to the 
higher ofiices in the church. He who is faithful in an inferior 
degree, is promoted to a higher station. — lauro/i, to themselves) 
They do not merely promote the interests of others. — iroXXiiv irapprr 
elav) great boldness with regard to God and man, from being 
well exercised. — h vlarti, in the faith) that they may perceive that 
they are made most richly partakers of His faith and benefits. 

14. TauTo., these things) The whole epistle. — iXm'^ojv, hoping) 
Paul, however, did not put off" necessary admonitions. — Ixhh, 
to come) ch. iv. 13. 

15. 'Eav hi ^paSim, but if I tarry long) Comp. ch. iv. 13, at 
the beginning. — ha, that) The scope of the epistle. — <!Tug M, how 
it is becoming) comp. ch. iv. 11. — Iv o/Vw 0eoO, in the house of 
God) God is i Ssemrri;, the blaster, 2 Tim. ii. 12. — ^ns, which) 
It indicates the universal Church, not universally, but so far as 
a part of it was then at Ephesus, committed to Timothy.— Ix- 
tcXfiela 0ic,u, the Church of God) the community of those who 
are the Lord^s ; 2 Tim. ii. 19. — ^Zmg, of the living) The Church 
of the Hving God is opposed to the temple of Diana of the 
Ephesians. The life of God, the foundation of our hope (' trust'), 
ch. iv. 10, and the fountain of truth, in this passage. The 
epithet is not added, in the first instance, to the same name 
(God;— the living God) — it is afterwards added for the sake of 
Epitasis (see Append.), as in 2 Cor. vi. 16. — SruXog xat idpala/Ma 
rijg aXrihlag xai o/ioXoyou/ilnw; /J^iya, x.t.X.) Jac. Cappellus, in his 
Observations on this passage, says, That this was the original 
reading of this place, was the opinion of the distinguished men, my 



I TIMOTHY III. 15, 261 

beloved colleagues, Andrew Melvin, John Cameron, John Fabri- 
cius ; and not without good reason. Respecting the same read- 
ing or the pointing of the words, I have made some slight oh 
servations in the Apparatus, p. 709, 710 [Ed. ii. p. 399, sq.], 
which I would wish to be carefully noticed ; but I have reserved 
further remarks for the Gnomon here. At ver. 14, 15, the 
apostle evidently concludes the former paragraph, which began 
at ver. 1, and was brought down io this point, and he now com- 
mences a new paragraph, which is continued in ch. iv. 1 in so 
close connection, that the old interpreters, according to R. 
Stephanus and others, reckoned a seventh chapter of tjiis epistle 
from iii. 16, inclusive, to ch. iv. 7. The almost toniversal opinion 
of interpreters in the present day, among Protestants, fixes the 
commencement of the period at the word gruXc;. I have quoted 
a great number of them in the Apparatus ; G. G. Zeltnerus 
and J. C. Herzogius are added. Certainly this clause, trruXo; 
xcil ibfiaioiiia, rrj; aXrikiag, is not at all advantageously connected 
with the preceding words, although Lightfoot says that the 
great Sanhedrim was everywhere dignified with this title ; but 
this same clause is much more inconveniently separated from 
what follows. For the particle xal, xa! 6/jioXoyou/iimg, is unsuit- 
able at the beginning of a new paragraph. Suppose ifioXoyou- 
,u,img to have been written without xa;, then indeed one might 
acknowledge it to be a suitable commencement of the new divi- 
sion ; comp. ver. 1 and ch. iv. 9, in which passages, for very 
much the same reason, the sentence is begun thus, marhg i XSyog, 
without xal. Now, when xal is in the way (occurs), the word* 
between which it is placed are connected by it : srvXoe xat 
idpalu/J-a rijs a,\r\hiac xal o/ioXoyovfiivaig /teya, x.t.X. The Rab- 
binical phrases, which are not dissimilar, are usually brought 
forward, in which the strength and gravity of the subject which 
comes to be discussed are declared ; but the phraseology of 
the apostle should be considered in the first place. For in 
this epistle, which is intended to confirm and rouse Timothy, 
the form of a preface is frequent, by which Paul commends 
some topic about to be presently discussed by him, as true and 
good, solid and salutary, and to be laid hold of by all the force of 
the understanding and the will [the desires] : Tigrbg o }.6yog xa! 

m»!*_, ,'.^^!)^...S,^ iiSir,^ V «■ > pIi i- in. iv. 9. fi. whprR «r/ffrEiM: 



262 1 TIMOTHY III. 15. 

[iv. 6] agrees with mgrhi fver. 9], Ka'Arj; [ver. 6], with amh-^ni 
a^iog [ver. 9]. He expresses that formula, consisting of two 
members, in this by far the most magnificent passage, through 
the medium of loftier words, which are to be met with in the 
writings of the Hebrews ; for example, R. Le%'i of Barcelona 
gives this reason, why so many memorial signs of the deliver- 
ance of the Israelites from Egyptian bondage are appointed in 
the fifteen precepts bearing upon the Passover, because that is 
the great foundation and strong pillar of the law, as well as of the 
Jewish religion. And Maimonides says. This is the foundation 
of the foundation, and the "pillar of wisdom, that we may know, 
etc. Therefore Paul says : sriiXog xa! idpalia/ia r^g akrikiag, xal 
o/ioXoyov/i'emg fi'sya, seH rJ Trig tlgi^elag fj,uerripwv : i.e. This mystery 
of godliness is the pillar and groundwork of the truth (equivalent 
to merhv), and is something confessedly great (equivalent to bto- 
bixTov). Let us examine the words one by one. These two 
terms, oruXos xai kdpa,ioi//^a, are equivalent to one word, expressing 
something very solid, by which is denoted the mystery, exceed- 
ingly high (whence srdXog, from eraoi) and exceedingly deep 
(whence Idpamfio., from s'^w), Iren. i. 3, c. 11. The Gospel is 
the pillar and ground of the Church. In Hebrew, ODS, truth, 
and pX3, itisrh, faithful, are conjugates. In like manner, 
6//,oXo'yia, (whence ofioXoyoufiivag) and aToSo^n, each referring to 
the heart and the lips, are equivalent ; comp. 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; 
Heb. iii. 1 ; John xx. 28. Hence also Tairjjs airodo^rig a^iot and 
o/jLoXoyou/ihcag fMja are equivalent ; fjAya. is not an epithet which 
is to be construed with ibpaiuftja, or with [uiarnpiov, but is put 
absolutely, /J-iya, a great thing, as in 1 Cor. ix. 11 ; 2 Cor. xi. 
15 ; in the same way as ayairnrhg, our beloved, Philem. ver. 1, 
is used absolutely. The mystery is a thing great in itself; 
a thing to be with the greatest earnestness confessed, and 
embraced with all the force of confession ; is a thing, the 
magnitude of which, in regard to the great salvation, all 
the sons of truth experimentally know and confess. Paul did 
not mention rh avohexrhv without rh marhv in this passage, but 
he praised both ; just as rh msTbv xai ri xaXhv are commended 
together. The mystery of godliness is the subject ; the remain- 
ing words are the predicate. And godliness is joined with truth, 
as in Tit. i. 1. The Gentiles also had their mysteries, but they 



1 TlMOTHr 111. 16. 20)3 

were distinguished by ungodliness and error. Departure from 
the faith, lying, and fables, are opposed to the truth (iii. 16), a 
thing which is most especially to be noticed, ch. iv. 1 (the par- 
ticle Si being interposed in ver. 1) : inver. 1, 2, 7, the hypocrisy 
of those who speak lies, and have their consciences seared, is op- 
posed to confession [o/ioXoyovfji.emg, confessedly, iii. 16], in ver. 2 : 
the dotage of old women [ver. 7, ypaMug /iiSou;, old wives' fables'] 
to that which is great [fniya, iii. 16], and profanity to godliness 
[iii. 16], ver. 7 [ch. vi. 3]. Finally, there is a remarkable Oxy- 
moron [see Append.] : o/^oXoyoufihug and /j^u<STripm, confession and 
yet mystery. This doctrine of godliness is celebrated in the 
whole Church, but in the Church alone. Now, reader, read 
again the text, if you are at leisure, from iii. 14 to iv. 7, 8 ; and 
consider the subject with an unbiassed and religious judgment. 

16. &ihg, God) He had called Him Man, ch. ii. 5. He now 
compensates for what might there seem to have been derogatory 
to Him, calling Him here God.^ (See however Apparat, 
p. 710, s.) [Ed. H., p. 400, seqq.] ; for even the greatness of 
the mystery depends especially (even most of all) on the 
greatness of the subject, God. Paul, writing to Timothy and 
Titus, whose faith was greatly advanced, calls the Father 
Saviour, and in turn the Son God ; and he subjoins three pairs 
of predicates, in which the whole economy of Christ, from His 
departure to His return or assumption, is summarily compre- 
hended. The sum of these predicates, viz. He was taken up in 
(to) glory, is ascribed to the same Subject, God, in Ps. xlvii. 
5, 6 ; and this One place compensates for the ambiguity in the 

1 &10S of the Rec. Text has none of the oldest MSS. in its favour, no 
version as early as the seventh century ; and as to the fathers, ex. gr. Cyril 
of Alex, and Chrysostom, quoted for ©to?, see Tregelles on the printed 
text of N. T., in which he shows these fathers are misquoted. Theo- 
doret, however, does support it. Liberatus, Victor Tununensis (both of 
6th cent.), affirm that Macedonius, under the Emperor Anastasius, changed 
Of into &eos in order to support Nestorianism. AC corrected, G, read S;. So 
Memph. and Theb. The old Latin fff and Vulg. have qitod, referring to 
fivdTTipioii, taken as a personal designation for the antecedent. The Syr. 
Peschito, and in fact all the versions older than the seventh cent., have the 
relative, not ©eoj. D(A) corrected, alone of the uncials, favours o. The 
tilence of the fathers of the fourth cent., though &sos would have furnished 
them with a strong arg^iment, is conclusive against it. — Ed 



2G+ 1 TIMOTHY 111. 16. 

reading of Paul, if any such there be, in this passage. — If avj- 
piiSri h eapx), was manifested in the flesh) The same verb occurs, 
1 John i. 2 ; the same noun, John i. 14. This manifestatior 
applies to the whole economy of Christ, who was at one timt 
conspicuous (visible) to the eyes of mortal men. — BdixaiiiSrj h 
THEii/iar/, was justified in the spirit) Christ, while He was mani- 
fest in the flesh, walked among sinners and men subject tc 
death. He was thought to be just such a one as any of them- 
selves and in reality bore their sins ; but afterwards, by His 
death which He endured in the flesh. He abolished sin, that had 
been laid upon Him, and claimed for Himself and His people 
eternal righteousness, with the entire approbation of the Father, 
withdrawing from the sight of men, and entering into the 
spiritual and glorious state, which was suitable to His righteous- 
ness, by His resurrection and ascension. See respecting the 
notion o{ flesh and spirit, Rom. i. 3, 4 ; 1 Pet. iii. 18, note.' 
He was in this sense justified in the spirit. At the most pre- 
cious and actual moment of His death. He ceased to be mortal, 
and to be burdened with the sin of the world. Comp. on the 
righteousness and justification of Christ, Matt. iii. 15 ; Luke 
vii. 35 ; John xix. 30, xvi. 10 ; Acts xxii. 14 ; Rom. vi. 10, 7; 
Heb. ix. 28 ; Isa. 1. 8 ; 1 John ii. 1. And He Himself, going ir 
spirit to the spirits in prison, preached that righteousness, and 
from that time powerfully put it forth into exercise (operation) : 
comp. Rom. iv. 25. This clause accords with the passage ol 
Peter already quoted ; as the expression. He was preachea 
among the Gentiles, with 1 Pet. iv. 6. — oupSri ayyVktic) He wot 
seen, chiefly after the resurrection, by angels, good or even bad ; 
of whom the former were at the same time made acquainted 
with His dispensation [the plan of redemption by Him], the 
latter were struck with terror, Eph. iii. 10 ; in which passage 
the mention of angels, properly so called, is in consonance wit! 
this summary of Paul here. — exripvx^ri, was preached) This ele- 
gantly follows. The angels enjoyed the most immediate admis- 
sion to Christ (" the Lord of angels") ; the Gentiles, in theii 
admission, were the furthest removed (in the greatest degref 

* Fksh and Spirit do not denote strictly the human and divine nature o 
Christ respectively ; but either of the two, according as it is His state of lifi 
among men, or as it is His glorified state with God. — Ed. 



1 TIMOTHY IV. 1. 2fiE 

" afar oflF," Eph. ii. 17). And the foundations of this preaching, 
and of the faith existing in the world, were laid before Christ 
was taken up (" received up") into heaven ; John xvii. 18. The 
preachers and first believers were as it were the seed of the rest. 
— sviSTi\j6n) He was believed on. — h xoafkui) in the world, i.e. the 
whole world. [A circunj,stance calculated to fill us with astonish- 
ment. — V. g.] The world, or globe, is opposed to heaven, into 
which He, being God, was taken up. He fills all things. — an\ri<p6r\ 
h Sog)]) was taken up in glory [" received up into glory," Engl. 
Vers.]) Supply, And He is now in glory, and comes in glory. 
The first thing is, manifest in the flesh ; the last. He was 
received up in glory. These things even, especially refer to the 
greatness of the mystery. Even this single expression, He was 
taken, or received up, confutes what Artemonius has on this pas- 
sage, Pref. p. 27. 



CHAPTEK IV. 



I. Ae, [now] but) The antithesis is between iBpala/ia, the 
ground, ch. iii. 15, and awoorjjffoura/, shall depart ox fall away; as 
also between " the mystery of godliness," and " the mystery of 
iniquity," of which the apostle speaks here by description, and 
by name at 2 Thess. ii. 7. — ^))j-Ss) expressly, as of a thing of 
great importance, which will speedily come to pass, in a set form 
of words. — Xiyti, speaketh) by the prophets in the time of Paul, 
or by Paul himself, who also was a prophet ; hence he says, 
" This know" 2 Tim. iii. 1. — h iarepois xaipoTs, in the last times) 
Paul shows that these times, following after the ascension of the 
Lord, ch. iii. 16, were then already in existence, inasmuch as 
he uses a present remedy for the then existing evil, ver. 5, 6 ; 
comp. 2 Tim. iii. 1, et seqq. vgTspo; is used comparatively {lat- 
ter), for vBToiTog expresses a different idea (the last times of all). — 
airoirriaovTOil rivig rns maTiu;, some shall depart, ov fall away, from 
the faith) Comp. 2 Tim. ii. 18 ; shall depart, viz. by denying 
what is true and adding what is Mse.—nvii) some, i.e. many, 



266 1 TIMOTHY IV. i. 

and gradually more ; Rom. iii. 3, note.^ Their names are not 
mentioned. There are not wanting those who suspect the per- 
son meant to be Apollonius Tyansens, who came to Ephesus in 
the lifetime of Timothy. They do not deserve well at the hands 
of the truth, who too much extenuate the heretical doctrines of 
the first century. — r^s vigTioig, from the faith) which in all its 
exactness maintains Divine revelation, ver. 6, [and of which the 
foundation was a little ago described (iii. 15, 16). — ^V. g.J — vveu- 
/iaffi 'TrXdms xa! didagxaXlai; iaifiovioiv, seducing spirits and doctrines 
of demons') Seducing spirits are those who speak by false pro- 
phets, and are called spirits, not only in respect of their own 
nature, but because they inspire^ (with their deceit) these false 
prophets ; therefore the word spirits is parallel to doctrines [not 
to demons]. Aai/iovlm, of demons, is the genitive of the cause 
(the source from which the doctrines flow). Aou/jloviov is often 
taken in a good sense by the Greeks ; for example, by the 
Athenians, Acts xvii. 18 : but with the LXX. interpreters and 
the apostles, it always denotes evil spirits. 

2. 'Ei/ v'jroxplgii ■^euSoXoym, [Engl. Vers, speaking lies in hypo- 
crisy/] through the hypocrisy of liars) This is construed with they 
shall fall away, or depart. That hypocrisy, which is the charac- 
teristic of liars, shall carry them away. Tmg, soms, viz. they, are 
the seduced; the liars are the seducers. -^iuboXoym, the genitive, 
depends solely on i'jroxpiesi. The expression, of liars, implies a 
relation to others, and therefore the antithesis is in Idiav, their 
own conscience. — xixaijTripioi,a/j.hav rriv Idiav auvildrism, having their 
own conscience seared with a hot iron) As faith and a good con- 
science are joined in ch. i. 5 (where see the note*), so, hypocrisy 
(i.e. unbelief, Matt. xxiv. 51, note^) and a depraved conscience 
in this passage ; where, on the contrary, ' faith' and " the know- 

1 Some, for many. An Euphemism. And moreover unbelievers, though 
they be many, are spoken of as some, indefinitely, because they are not much 
taken into account.-yEo. 

^ The use of spirant in connection with spiritus, cannot be imitated in a 
translation . — Tr ansl. 

' Faith is as the precious liquor, a good conscience as clean glass. Faith 
is towards God ; conscience, towards one's self. — Ed. 

■• In Matt. xxiv. 5, "Shall appoint him his portion with the hypo- 
crites;" in Luke xii. 46, "with the unbelievers." The two are therefore 
akin. — Ed. 



1 TIMOTHY IV. 3. 267 

ledge of the truth," and ' thanksgiving' (ver. 3, 6), are presently 
after commended. The medical use of cautery is for the pur- 
pose of curing ; here, therefore, a different use is denoted, it is 
for the purpose of branding men as infamous. Those who are 
auToxaTaxpiToi, condemned of themselves, are here intended, Tit. 
iii. 11 ; those wJio are infamous of themselves in their own con- 
science, which is branded with spots (scars) of deceit ; having a 
conscience not gpod and pure, because they have cast it from 
them, but /ji^i/nas/ihriv, polluted. For so, in Tit. i. 15, those 
neared as with a hot iron here, are described by the expression, 
their conscience is defiled; just as liars (■^evdoXoyoi) here, are de- 
scribed by the words there, their mind is defiled. Kaurnp, a 
branding iron, denotes the same thing, in a bad sense, as gtppaySi, 
a seal, in a good sense, 2 Tim. ii. 19 ; although Macarius uses 
both words in a good sense, concerning the flock of Christ, 
Homil. xii. § 13. Plato, in Gorgias, speaks of " the soul marked 
with stripes {hafj.ifi^asTiyiafi.hr^v) and covered with scars {ouXuv 
/iiSTriv), in consequence of perjury and iniquity, which every 
man's own conduct has deeply impressed Q^a/ubop^aro) upon his 
soul." Claudian says, " Why do you foolishly deny what is 
manifest? lo ! branded spots disfigure the breast."' — rrjv Id/av, 
their own) while, however, they urge others. 

3. KuXuovnav ya/LiTv, AviyieSai ^pcu/idroiv, forbidding to marry — 
to abstain from meats) The hypocritical appearance of false 
doctrines, very austere and plausible, which gains a show for all 
the rest of their dogmas (giving colour to them in the eyes of 
the dupes), is here expressed : comp. Col. ii. 23. Explain the 
sense by analysis thus, commanding, not to marry, to abstain from 
meats. KcaXuv is the same as / command, that not, not to. To 
marry and to abstain are construed with commanding ; the ne- 
gative belongs only to the expression, to marry. Pricseus has 
pointed out examples of this Zeugma, of which examples that of 
Chrysostom corresponds most nearly to the present instance : 
TaDra Xs/cu, ou xr}diuiiv xuiXvaiv, aXXn fiLsra gv//,/J,sTp!cc<; touto monTii, 
" I mention these things, not forbidding you to take care, but 
desiring you to do this only in due measure." Paul refutes the 
more specious error respecting meats. He considers it enough 
> " Quid demens manifesta negas? En pectus inustte 
Deformant maculuB." 



268 1 TIMOTHY IV. 4-6. 

here merely to mention that respecting marriage (unless the a, 
which, that follows, is to be referred to this also), and he refutes 
it also below, ch. v. 14. — ^poi/j.dTo>v, meats) They shall not forbid 
all kinds of meats (therefore the article is not added) ; for who 
would listen to such prohibitions ? therefore it is only some kinds 
that they forbid. Also it is implied here, that he who forbids 
even one kind does a wrong to his Creator and to beUevers. 
The old heresies are chiefly denoted; but their remains, how 
ever, have come down to those who pride themselves on antiquity. 
— To7g) the Dative, as the Hebrew h, signifies, so far as concerns 
believers. For God hath created meats, even for those who are 
without faith and do not give thanks. Paul turns away from 
them who are without faith and the knowledge of the truth, and 
leaves them, as it were, to themselves ; he declares that he is 
speaking of believers. — meroTg xal imyvuxogi, to them who believe 
and have known) The words are synonymous. The second 
synonym, knowing the truth, gives occasion for presently declaring 
the truth, or/ ^av, x.t.X., and forms a more express antithesis to 
lying, -^ivdog, which is contained in -^ivdoXoym, ver. 2. — rjji/ aX^hian, 
the truth) This is explained in the following verse. 

4. KaXbv, good) Gen. i. — xa!, and) The particle connects the 
two propositions, of which the second has this subject, every thing 
which is received with thanksgiving; the predicate, is not to be re- 
fused. — /jt,er& ivxapierlag, with thanksgiving) This includes a good 
conscience. Eom. xiv. 6, " He that eateth, eateth to the Lord, 
for he giveth God thanks." 

5. 'AyidZirai, is sanctified) Lev. xix. 24. — 8i& \6you Qioij, hy 
the word of God) The word of God enters into all thanksgiving, 
nay, also into the creation and granting of meats. — xa/ hnv^euc, 
and intercessory [or consecratory] prayer) It is the duty of the 
children of God to offer intercessory [ch. ii. 1 ; or consecratory"] 
prayer for the creatures which they use. It is a high dignity. 
Not only Christians, but also Jews and Heathens, consecrated 
the table with prayer. 

6. ' lCmTi6i/j,evog) bringing undfi^ the notice, suggesting mildly. 
Eustathius says, vosTii on the one hand imTjAies perceiving at once 
and spontaneously ; ImiieSai, on the other, to cause to perceive, by 
admonition. — xaXhg didxovog, a good minister) 2 Tim. ii. 15. — 
hTpefi6/ji,mt) The present cv>mbined with reference to the preterite, 



1 TIMOTHY IV. 7-10. 3G9 

nourished up, 2 Tim. i. 5, iii. 15. Continued nourishment. — 
r^s irlgTiaig, of the faith) in thy behalf [for thine own good]. — 
rijs xaXrjs didadxaXiag, of good doctrine) in behalf of others [for 
the good of others]. — fi -TraprixoXouSnxa,;) which thou hast commenced 
(undertaken) to follow up (i.e. in all its details). Concerning 
this word, see Luke i. 3, note. 

7. Be/3))Xous, profane) The antithesis presently follows, godli- 
ness. Whatever is not profitable to this godliness, though 
specious, is profane, 2 Tim. ii. 16. — Vu^owff, fables) The antithesis 
is faithful, ver. 9. — Tapairou) refuse, reject them, so as not to 
suggest them to the brethren. — yv/ivat^e ds Siaurhv, but exercise thy- 
self) A rare expression (as 1 John v. 21") for /u/iva^ou ; comp. 
Notes on Chrys. de Sacerd., p. 393. Paul had been accustomed 
to 'exercise' Timothy when present with him ; he now com 
mands Timothy to be a Paul to himself. 

8. 'H da/iaTix^ yufitaela, bodily exercise) and that, whether 
violent or pleasant. — 'Ttphg oXlyov, is profitable to but a short extent) 
viz. its benefit extends only to the private fortune, to one's repu- 
tation, to one's enjoyment, to the promotion of long life ; and 
therefore it is terminated in this life of the body. Timothy, as a 
young man, seems to have sometimes used some bodily exercise 
[ch. v. 23], which Paul does not so much forbid as not praise. 
He mixes up a similar admonition, salutary to a young man, with 
the same argument against profane doctrines, 2 Tim. ii. 22. — 
vph; itwira, unto all things) in the case of body and soul. — sVay- 
yikiav, promise) on which hope (' trust') is brought to bear, ver. 
10. Whatever does not serve this purpose is scaxcfAy profitable. 
— Z,uni rrig vZv, of the life that now is) the advantage of which they 
who exercise the body seem in other respects to consult. 

9. Uisrhg, faithful) The following verse is joined to this short 
preface by the for, as in 2 Tim. ii. 11. Godly men appear 
often to suffer loss with respect to the enjoyment of the present 
life. Paul refutes this notion. 

10. E/'s roDro, it is with a view to this, that) on this account, 

' K«) ypauhiii and old wives') Both old wives' fables and youthful lusts 
are equally to be avoided, 2 Tim. ii. 22. — V. g. 

' The active verb with the reciprocal pronoun ((puXaJotTS savroii;, keep 
yourselves from idols), is elegantly used as expressing more than (pt/^laJ«(^tfs, 
Be on your guard — Ed. 



270 1 TIMOTHY IV. 11-13. 

tor this end, with this hope. — xal xomu//,H xal otiidit^SfieSa, wt 
both labour and suffer reproach) despising the advantages and 
aids (safeguards against suffering) of this life : 6veidit,6fi,i6a, in 
the Middle voice [we suffer ourselves to be reproached]. — ^Xm'x- 
a/j,iv, we have hoped) we have placed (rested) our hope, viz. for 
the future, despising present things. — ^wir/, living) who will 
also give life to us, ver 8 ; 2 Tim. ii. 18. — ■yrdvruv Mpw-Ttw, ilo.- 
\iera mgraiv, of all men, especially of those that believe) Paul 
shows that he, and men like him, hope for a double salvation 
from God : salvation [or safety] in this life, for God saves [or 
else preserves'] all men (nay, even He wishes all men to have 
salvation for ever) : as also, what is of greater consequence, in the 
life that is to come, for He especially saves [or preserves] them 
that believe, who even in this life also experience greater pro- 
tection, on account of their greater temptation. — /^dXigra, most of 
all) There lies hid beneath this word the strength of the argu- 
ment from the less to the greater.^ 

^11. TauTo.) these things, dismissing all other things. 

12. Mndsk, no man) Conduct thyself so, that no one can de- 
spise thee on the ground of being a young man. Worthless old 
men are glad to do so. — ruTOf, a type, an example) The way of 
obtaining true authority. — h X6yw, in word) public and private. 
— sv avaerpoipfi) in daily intercourse or conversation. — h aydfri — 
£v irnii/JiaT/, in love — in the Spirit) 2 Cor. vi. 6, note.' — Iv irlgni, 
in faith) Faith, considered apart from its office in justification, 
enters often into the middle of an enumeration of this kind, and 
denotes sincerity of the mind trusting in God, in prosperity 
and adversity : ch. vi. 11 ; 2 Tim. ii. 22 : comp. Gal. v. 22, 
which passage has faith likewise in the middle of the enumera- 
tion. — iv dyviici,, in purity) ch. v. 2. 

13. Tji Amymgii, to reading) of the Sacred Scripture in the 
Church. To this are added two principal genera : exhortation, 
which refers to conduct ; and doctrine, which refers to knowledge ; 
ch. vi. 2, at the end ; Rom. xii. 7, 8. 

' If God saves, in a sense, even the ungodly ; a fortiori, the godly. — Ed. 

2 TliarZu, of believers) who place their hope in the living God. — V. g. 

° " By the Holy Ghost, by love unfeigned." Love follows immediately 
after mention of the Spirit, as being its principal fruit, and that which 
governs the use of spiritual gifts. — Ed. 



} TIMOTHY IV. U-16. 271 

14. M)) a,/jt,eXii, do not neglect) They neglect, who do not exer- 
cise the gift, and who think that they cannot fall away. — x'^e'"'- 
fiang, the gift) 2 Tim. i. 6. — dia ■jrpo<priTiloi,i fi-irdt, emd'ieiug rSn 
XitfZiv ro\i ■TrpiaBuTipiou, by prophecy, with the laying on of the hands 
[viz. by prophecy] of the presbytery) Construe the prophecy oj 
the presbytery. For Paul laid his hands on Timothy, 2 Tim. i. 
6 ; i.e. the presbytery consisted of Paul himself (comp. 2 John 1 ; 
1 Pet. V. 1) and Silas, or others also. Many Latin copies have 
presbyteri, " of the presbyter." The imposition of the hand is 
properly done by one person, and that, too, a person more dig- 
nified. But prophecy was also exercised by equals, viz. by 
more than one, who, while Paul was laying his hands on 
Timothy, were offering congratulations, and augured every 
good thing; perhaps even in the absence of Timothy. This 
is an energetic young man, they said ; God will do much good 
by him. 

15. Mikira, meditate) MEXsr^n is also applied to the gymnastic 
exercises ; comp. ver. 7, yb/j^vaUji (Sia\jr6v. Let this, he says, be 
thy study. He directed Timothy to continue in the same study 
when he was further advanced in life, Ep. 2, ch. iii. 14, etc. 
Who would not desire to be engrossed with the same study as 
long as he lives ? There are vicissitudes in all other studies ; 
some are the fashion to-day, others will be the custom to- 
morrow. The one study which is devoted to (bestowed upon) 
Sacred Scripture never seems to be very conspicuous, but at the 
same time it alone never becomes obsolete. It has an everlast- 
ing kingdom, without tyranny and superstitious fascination, a 
sohd reward, an use which will cause no regret. — h rouToig "sh, 
give thyself wholly to them) He who gives himself wholly to 
them, wiU be less in worldly boon-companionships (convivialities) ; 
he will less engage in the study of other things, in collecting 
books, shells, coins, in which many pastors, unawares, waste a 
considerable part of their life. — <Keo%oirn, profiting) which is main- 
tained by exercise. 

16. "'Eitiyri, take heed) Hesychius has the following : eVs s, 
iwixiieo, '?rp6aixh "•"•"Xh f^'/^fE ; Job xviii. 2, i:''3n, im'gxis, give 
heed, ' mark ;' and so, often the son of Sirach. — avToTg, to them) 
Refer this to raWa, these things, ver. 15 ; or to what follows 
(roui axodovrds nou), i.e. (continually attend) to them that hear 



272 1 TIMOTHY V. 1-4. 

thee. — aueeig, thou shalt save) viz. so as not to be seduced ver. 1 . — 
Toii; axoiovrag, them that hear) with obedience. 



CHAPTER V. 

1. npia^vr'spw, an elder) The word here denotes age. — /i)i 
Iwi'jrXri^ri;, do not rebuke) This belongs also to the words which 
follow. — iis dSsXpoiff, as brethren) So an old man ought to exhort 
the young men as children. 

2. 'n? adeX<pac, as sisters) Such respectful treatment is well 
fitted to promote purity. 

3. X^pag, widows) Chrysostom speaks at great length of 
widows, de Sacerd., p. 166, et seqq. — Ti/j,a, honour) by acts of 
kindness, ver. 17, 18. — S^ras j^ijfas, widows indeed) Ploce;^ the 
word indeed excludes those who have children or live luxuriously 
(ver. 6). 

4. MavSaviTciigav, let them learn) i.e. let the sons learn ; and 
rather the grandsons, for in the correlative progenitors {roTg vpo- 
yivrng) alone are mentioned. There is an elegant Metonymy 
of the antecedent for the consequent ; the consequent is, that 
the widows should remain with their relations (viz. their sons 
or grandchildren). — vparov rhv 'idiov, first their own) before they 
are put into any public office (duty). — olxot £U(rs/3e/V, to treat their 
family with dutiful afection) We have the same word with the 
accusative. Acts xvii. 23. The reason (ground) for the dutiful 
conduct enjoined, is evident from the end of the verse. — a/io;/3<if 
liTodidomi roTg irpoyovoig, to requite their progenitors [^parents, Engl. 
Vers.]) Some think that the duty of widows who have families, 
is here intended ; and Pricseus compares with this passage that 
of Augustine regarding his mother Monica, She had requited her 
parents, she Jiad treated her family with pious affection, 1. 9, Con- 
fess, c. 9. That saying of the Roman censors m reference to 
old bachelors is quite in accordance with this : Nature writes in 

1 A word put twice, first in the simple sense, afterwards to express an 
attribute of the simple word. Widows, in the second instance here, means 
one who realizes the description given in rer. 5. — Ed, 



1 TIMOTHT V, 6-0. 273 

you the law, as of being bom, so also of begetting; and your 
parents, by supporting you, have bound you, if you have any 
shame, to pay the debt of bringing up grandchildren (for them). 
— Val. Max., 1. 2, c. 4. But the word /i,av6a/sragav, let them 
learn, and its plural number, shows that the matter under dis- 
cussion, is the duty of children and grandchildren. Therefore 
the widow in ver. 5, who has no children, is opposed to the 
widow who has children, because the former has no one from 
whom she can receive requital, and she therefore has her hopes 
placed solely in God. 

5. Mefiovia/iivri) desolate (reduced to desolation). The idea 
of the word %^?a, signifying orbity [bereavement^, is here un- 
folded. — ^'kiri'Kiv, hath put her trust) The antithesis is in ver. 4. 
— vpog/i'sni rati difisedi, continneth instant in supplications) The 
antithesis is in ver. 6. 

6. SraraXStfa) She that liveth in pleasurie (luxuriously), 
James v. 5, iT^up^ffars xai IsTaToK^^are. Hesychius explains 
eirarak^, as Tpvp^. — ^cDffa rUvrtM, though living, she is dead) This 
remark may be applied to any ungodly man, although he may 
be actively engaged in the business of life, but especially to a 
widow devoted to pleasure. Although she seems to her own 
self still to enjoy Ufe, yet she is dead while she lives, because 
she is now no longer of benefit (profitable or serviceable), either 
naturally or spiritually, and therefore she deserves no honour 
(ver. 3, i.e. no share in the public maintenance), 

7. Tavra, these things) which have been just now spoken. — 
aeiv, may be) viz. true widows. 

8. 'Idluv, his own) even out of his house. — ruv o'lxtlm, those of 
his own house) Such even especially as the mother or lonely 
(helpless) widow, at home, ver. 4. Many parents make this an 
excuse for their avarice ; but this passage chiefly treats of the 
duty of grandchildren, which ought to flow from love, not to 
be opposed to faith. — ou TpovoeT, does not provide) with food and 
necessary clothing. — rfiv -irisriv lipvi^rai, has denied the faith) Paul 
hopes that there will be no one among Christians who does not 
providefor his mother. Faith does not set aside natural duties, but 
perfects and strengthens them. — Amerov, an infidel) whom even 
nature teaches this, although he has never embraced the faith. 

9. KaTaXeyisScii) let not a widow be taken into the number.—, 



271 1 TIMOTHY V. 10. 

ju.^ 'iXarrov Iruv i^rixovTa) The genitive here does not depend o; 
the comparative, for in that case it would have been writtei 
'iXoiTTcav,^ but on x^pa ; sXarrov (for xara 'ikarrov, as Lat. summun. 
minimum, for ad summium, ad m/inimum,, at most, at least) i 
used adverbially. So Plato, raXawa, oux, 'iXarrov sxarov (at leas 
a hundred talents ; literally, a hundred talents — not less). — sri 
i^ny-ovra, of sixty years) The antithesis is in ver. 11. Eve: 
virgins of this age might be reckoned among widows. But th^ 
apostle would by no means praise those who would thrust thei 
younger daughters into monasteries, where they may remaii 
from their youth up to their death. — hhi, of one) i.e. who ha 
been lawfully married, or has had one husband, or one and after 
wards a second. 

10. "'Epyoig xaXoTg, good works) These are presently enumerated 
among which is also this species, itavrl tpyui ayaS^ i^jraxoXouSih 
where ayadhg is more than xaXog. — srexvorpoprjetv) if she hav 
rightly brought up children, either her own, or those of others 
for the benefit of the Church. — s^eM>86xrioi>'} lodged strangers 
that she may be worthy of being publicly compensated by th( 
Church for the benefits which she has conferred on its members 
— woSag ivi-^ev, has washed the feet) A Synecdoche of the part 
for every kind of humble offices. — SXiSofiivoig, the straitenei 
[the a_fflictedj) with poverty. — ^ IffijxoXoWjjffs, has followed up) I 
is the part of ministers and men to take the lead in good works 
Tit. iii. 8, 14 ('Trpotsra.ffSa.i, not as Engl. Vers, to maintain, bu 
to take the lead in good works) ; of women to follow up, b] 
assisting so far as they are able. The glosses in Pricseus are 
e-rrtjXoXoiSrieiv, ixoivuivrieiv, vTrip'sTriasv. 

^ A widow having attained the age of sixty years — not less. — Ed. 

^ Tlemrl spyiji a,ya,6^, every goad work) Wherever any good springs forth 
either near or at a distance, it is a sacred duty for us to go to its support 
If it was the duty of widows, who subsequently were glad to enjoy the as 
sistance of others, how much more does it become men, and those, too 
appointed to offices? Many pay attention to their sons perhaps, theii 
relatives, neighbours, or countrymen. But, indeed, they consider i 
altogether alien to them (an uncalled for act) to bestow anything oi 
persons unknown and on strangers ; or if any case occur seeming to b( 
rather unconnected with them, or a little more remote, to attempt anything 
in its behalf ; 1 Sam. xxv. 10. Whoever has attempted a good work wil 
experience the truth of this. — V. g. 



1 TIMOTHY V. 11-U, 275 

11. UapouTou, refuse) Do not take up their case. The same 
word occurs, Tit. iii. 10 (reject, vapairou). — Srav ykp KarueTfri- 
v;a,<itii(Si To\J XpigTou) when they have begun to wax wanton (to in- 
dulge in luxury) against Christ, viz. with regard to ecclesiastical 
benefits. The genitive is governed by xara; what erprmos is, 
see Rev. xviii. 3 ("The abundance," or "power," of her deli- 
cacies, erp^vovg). Extravagance (wantonness) and Christ are 
by no means compatible. — roD Xpisrov, Christ) to whom they 
had entirely devoted themselves. — SeXovsiv, they will) the matter 
being no longer undecided. 

12. "E^ouca/, having) for certain, by this time. — on) because. — 
rriv iipijirr{» 'kUtiv jj^ETjjifav) Tr/ffr/v ahrsTu, as Raphelius shows from 
Polybius, is not to keep the faith ; comp. ver. 8. It is called 
vpwTri mdTig, their first faith, the faith of their early life, which 
they had before they were enrolled among the widows. Their 
second vows break this faith, and are opposed to it ; comp. " thy 
first love" Rev. ii. 4. 

13. MavSavovai •jTipnpyojjtiva.i, they learn going about) This par- 
ticiple is not put for the infinitive, but the genus, ' learning,' is 
reprehended : the species follows, they learn the things which are 
learned by going about from house to house, i.e. they curiously 
pry into the state of famihes. The Mimesis ^ lies in this, that 
the expression used is, they learn. For elsewhere those things 
are only said to be learned which are good. But these women 
learn by going about, they search out all things ; and thence 
their progress is progress in the wrong direction. — rag olxiag, 
houses) 2 Tim. iii. 6. — <pX\iapoi, [tattlers] triflers) in respect to 
words. — iriphpyoi, busybodies) in respect to deeds. — XaXovaai, 
speaking) This word is construed with they learn. They speak 
out all that they have learned. — ra, [in Ssovra) S, /jltj dsT, Tit. i. 11. 

14. NsaiTipag, the younger women) He does not add, widows, 
for the widow in this passage is properly she who remains a 
widow. And this arrangement (mode of acting), which the 
apostle mentions, equally applies to the unmarried and to 

' A figure, whereby the word which the party reprehended would use is 
alluded to ; as here these young widows would call their inquiries by the 
favourable term, lea/rning. They learn (the genus), says Paul; but the 
species of learning they learn is what is to be learnt by going about visiting 
houses. — Ed 



276 I TIMOTUT V. 15- IS. 

widows under sixty years. The monastic system regarding 
nuns is quite inconsistent with the whole meaning of the 
apostle ; and Paul does not write to Timothy about the govern- 
ment of any company of monks, for there were none such in 
existence. — ya/is/ii, rsx.vo'yovsni, oixodsSToreTv, to marry, to bear 
children, rule their family [guide the Aowse]) Three successive 
steps in domestic society. So they shall have full employment, 
without idleness or curiosity. — rSi avnxii/Lhu), to the adversary) 
The word ptf, Symmachus, in Ps. xxxviii. (20) 21, has trans- 
lated by the word avrixiifiai, and in the following verse men- 
tion is made of Satan : yet the word avrixiifiivog, adversary, 
may be in this place understood of wicked men ; comp. ch. 
vi. 1 ; Tit. ii. 8, 10. — Xtudop/ai %a^/i', for the sake of calumny 
[by way of reproach]) which is eager to exaggerate the vices 
of a few, and to impute them to the whole Church and its 
doctrines. 

15. "hS?), already) A particle used for the purpose of appeal- 
ing to experience.^— r;i/£s, some) rashly professing widowhood. — 
s^irpa'Trrisa.v, have been turned aside) and thereby have given oc- 
casion to calumny. — o'^rleai reu SaravS, after Satan) who turned 
them aside from Christ. 

16. 'E'japxilTu, let him (or her) relieve them) ver. 10 [SXi^o/i'mif 
i'jr^pxiaiv, " relieved the afSicted"]. — jj IxxKneia, the Church) in 
relieving the widows. — iTtapxieji, in order that it may have enough 
for relieving) viz. the Church. 

17. AwXijs, double) On account of their being older, and on 
account of their oflBce. The eldership involves of itself venera- 
tion on account of age. Even Peter opposes the elders to the 
younger men {yniiripotg), and yet he speaks as concerning an 
office, 1 Pet. V. 5, 1, etc. Double, i.e. large, Eev. xviii. 6. 
— /idXigra,, especially) Some then were able to rule, and to 
rule well, although they were not employed in word and 
doctrine, viz. in sacred studies, and in the instruction of others. 
But those who had been so employed (xomSivTes), were less 
at leisure for working, and for acquiring fortune, and were 
worthy of compensation. 

18. Kal, ci^iog, and, worthy) The apostle quotes this, either 
as Scripture, or as a proverb approved of by the Lord, Matt 
X. 10 ; Luke x. 7. 



1 Timothy v, 19-21.. 277 

19. nptaiSvr'epov, an elder) ver. 17. — xartiyoflav, accusation) 
According to the law of Moses, a private person might be sum- 
moned, but not condemned, when there was only one witness : 
Paul directs that an elder should not even be summoned; for both 
his character as an innocent person stands higher, and he is more 
exposed to envy and calumny. — //,fi Tapad'exov, do not receive) 
Timothy had therefore the power of judging in the Church, ver. 
21, 24. 

20. Toils afiaprdvovrag) them that sin, the elders convicted by 
witnesses. The others are contradistinguished from those. — ai 
Xoiiroi) the others in the flock, who have either committed the 
same sin, or lest they should commit it. — ipo^ov, fear) suitable to 
those who are prepared to sin. 

21. 'Evtimov, before) Paul presents vividly to Timothy the last 
judgment, in which God will be revealed, and Christ will be 
seen face to face with His angels ; comp. 2 Tim. iv. 1. And 
yet the words, face to face, do not shut out reference to the pre- 
sent time, ver. 4 (Imitm roD 0eoO) ; 2 Cor. viii. 21. See ch. vi. 
13, etc. — xal Kupiou, and the Lord) The article is not added, 
though it is immediately added with respect to the angels. 
Therefore the appellations, God and Lord, refer to one subject 
[before Him who is at once God and Lord, Jesus Christ] -^ 
comp., however, 2 Tim, iv. I.'' The old reading has not Kuf/ou.* 
— hXixroiv) An epithet, which sharpens the reverence of 
Timothy ; -ixkiy-rhg, choice, 1 Pet. ii. 6. — x"!"^ 'irpoKft/ji.arog) yu?'^ 
rou •?rpoitiTug x.ai 3/%a y,ixpifjbe\irig ^ovXrig Tpa^ai ee ti* Glos. ap. 
Pricseum. — Tpoaplf/^a, prejudice (prejudging), is the failing of him 
who determines, before the matter folly opens itself out ; ver. 22, 

' This is a principle laid down by Bishop Middleton, that where the one 
article precedes two appellatives, they must refer to one and the same 
person ; a most important canon against Socinians. See Tit. ii. 13. — Ed. 

' hii'iriou rou &iov, xctl XnKrrov ' Ivinv. But Middleton's canon does not ap- 
ply there ; for Xprn-rtu ' IniroS are used as proper names, not appellatives. So 
here, too, if the Kvpi'ov be not read. Therefore ©eoS is God the Father. — Ed. 

» Wherefore it is omitted in the Germ. Vers., which follows the margin 
of both Ed. — E. B. 

AD(A) corrected, Gfff Vulg., Hilar. 328, Lucif. omit Kvpiov. Rec. Text 
has no good authority for it. — Ed. 

* i.e. Without thy doing aught precipitately and apart from decided de- 
liberation or counsel. 



278 1 TIMOTHY V. 22-24. 

note. There ought to be judgment, not pryudice {prejudging) , 
ver. 24. — xarSi, Tp6sx.Ximv) The glosses by the same writer are, 
xara irpoayXiSiv, xard, x^P"} ''''poeTahici.ii, 5j STipof/^ipeiav, In short, 
prejudice through hatred, partiality through favour. ^Often 
a man is hurried headlong by some impulse, and treats this 
or that person either well or ill accordingly ; but we should act 
considerately, and think, what is suitable to the Divine will. — 

v.g.] 

22. XeTpag, hands) It was the duty of Timothy to lay his 
hands on the presbyters. — rap^jsMg, hastily) without previous 
examination. — /j,riSi xoiviivti, nor be partaker) They do so, who 
do anything hastily. [And indeed, in this passage, the sudden 
imposition of hands is that upon which a check is placed. But 
certainly, in the other departments of life, the participation of other 
tnen's sins is very frequent. That happens either before or after 
the act, in our thoughts, affection, gestures, words, writings, works ; 
by doing, omitting to do ; in regard to superiors, equals, inferiors, 
ministers, subjects ; while a greater or less portion of the fault 
falls sometimes on the one side, sometimes on the other. — V. g.J 
Ver. 24, 25, show that waiting for a time is salutary, and 
an admonition is introduced parenthetically ("keep thyself — 
infirmities"), which young Timothy was meanwhile carefully 
to observe. 

23. 'Siaurhv, thyself) The antithesis is, other men's, Timothy 
is admonished, in passing, how he should regulate his own con- 
duct, while he is engaged in regulating the conduct of others ; 
and this parenthesis very elegantly imitates the delay that ought 
to be allowed to intervene in such matters. — [irfHiTi, no longer) 
A safe admonition, always keeping in view the precept, keep 
thyself pure. 

24. Timv, of some) Not only is the aspect of the sins which 
are committed p.e the footing on which they stand, the point of 
view from which they are to be regarded] different, but also of 
the men, though committing the same sins. — a'l afiaprlai, the 
sins) their evil deeds, and their evil habits to be known from 
the former. — vpihrtkoi) manifest before any inquiry is made, or 
anything determined concerning the men. — trpodyovgou) going 
before, preceding him that commits them, so that he is imme- 
diately seen to be unworthy of the imposition of hands. The 



1 TIMOTHY V. 25-VI. 1, 2, 279 

antithesis is, follow after. — s/s ytplaiv) [Engl. Vers, to judgment'] 
so far as concerns the judgment to be formed of the men.— r/ff;') 
That is more emphatic than if he had repeated timv ; some also 
their own sins follow, — IvaxaXouSousi, follow after) Meanwhile 
we must wait patiently, till the matter fully discloses itself, and 
we must not inquire too harshly. God, however, directs His 
faithful servant to do and say what is seasonable. The prepo- 
sition It/ implies no long interval. 

25. TA aXKtai 'iyptra, the works that are otherwise) Those which 
are not beforehand manifest. The saying, which is found at 
Eccl. viii. 14, is remarkable, and should in the present day be 
especially attended to. — xpvjS^vai, be hid) long. — oi dumrcti, cannot) 
although they who do them may often wish to keep them con- 
cealed, 



CHAPTEK VI. 

1. 'Tto ^uyJii) under the yoke, viz. of heathen masters. The 
antithesis is, but, ver. 2. Service therefore, in the case of be- 
lievers, is not a yoke. — idloug, their own) Let them not turn from 
them, and attach themselves to others. Confusion [confound- 
ing of the existing order of things] is forbidden. — ri/irig, honour) 
although they are without, i.e. not Christians. The opposite, 
despise, occurs presently. — a^love, worthy) although they be 
without virtue [any remarkable merit]. — riyiieSadav, let them, 
count) with affection, and in their actual conduct. — ha //jyi, that 
not) For the masters would say, that this was the cause of their 
contumacious disrespect ; comp. Tit. ii. 5. 

2. 'AdeXipol, brethren) and in that respect equal. — ilah, are) 
viz. the masters. Servants (slaves) might seek a pretext for 
refusing obedience, whether they had beheving or unbelieving 
masters. Both sins are met (counteracted). — SouXeuerueav, let 
them do service) let them remain in the household. — msroi elai 
xal &ya,-!rnrol, are faithful and beloved) Supply, the masters, be- 
loved, having experienced the Divine love, and then in conse- 
quence showing love to their servants (slaves). — 0/ rng ivepyigla: 



280 1 TIMOTHY VI. 3-5. 

a,vTiXa/^^a.\i6/ji,im, [Eng. Vers, partakers of the henefit, but BengelJ 
subserving the [divine] beneficence) Beneficence is the beneficence 
of God, as the word, the name, the Spirit, the wrath, stand for the 
word of God, the name of God, etc. Believing masters, as being 
benefactors [ivipyirai, taken out of ehipyisiag], subserve this bene- 
ficence. Believers experience the heavenly beneficence towards 
men, and subserve it ; for example, masters towards their house- 
hold, and through their household towards others. This by 
implication teaches also beheving masters their duty : ver. 17 
also teaches it. 

3. 'ETipodidasxaXei', teach otherwise) The antithesis is, teach, in 
ver. 2. The conclusion thus corresponding to the beginniog of 
the discussion, ch. i. 3. — ,ari vpoeip-xerai, accede [consent] not) 
Seneca has, " accedere opinioni," to accede or consent to an 
opinion : and so others, as we find in Pricseus. 

4. TiT\)(piuTai, jiiijbh evierd/isvog) Harpocration : TeTuptafiai, avri 
Tou i/il3ij3f>6vrri/Jia,i, l^w tuv tppivoiv ysyova, x.r.X. TiruOufiai for 
i,u,^i^p6:iTrifiai, I am gone out of my senses. Compare Eaphelius 
ad Polyb. — ,u,rjdev smeTa/iivoi, knowing nothing) although he claims 
knowledge to himself : comp. ch. i. 7. — nouv iripl, sick ['cfoim^'], 
or morbid, about) The antithesis is wholesome, ver. 3. Plut. : 
voffs/V vspi do^av, 'Hipl e<ppayibia ToXuriXri, to be sick for glory, for 
expensive seals (signets). — Xojoihayjctc., strifes of words) 2 Tim. 
li. 14, note.' — 1§ u« yinrai, from which cometh) lb. ver. 23. — 
ipig, contention) Tit. iii. 9. — iirovoiat -Temripai, evil surmisings) by 
which those who do not at once agree to all things, are regarded 
as enemies (objects of odium). 

5. Aia.'jraparpi^ai) diarpijSri, a scholastic disputation or treatise. 
The insertion of 'irapA renders it significant of something per- 
verse, as xaraTo/iij for -jrepiro/i^, Phil. iii. 2. It is opposed to 
accede (consent), ver. 3. — iiaircx,pa,Tpi^ai 8ii(pSap/ihm avlipuizw) per- 
verse disputings, which only become men of corrupt minds, 
2 Tim. iii. 8 : men corrupted in mind. — vofiit,6vTi>\i, thinking) 
i.e. inasmuch as they think, for there is no and put before it ; 
comp. Eom. ii. 18, 20 ; 2 Tim. ii. 21 ; Heb. vi. 6, where the use 
of the participles is the same. — mpiff/ih) a gain" (means of 

' Not as Engl. Vers, of 2 Tim. ii. 14, " Strifes about words," but " strifes 
»n (i.e. by means of) words about" most momentous subjects.— Ed. 
' The article before imifiuav, and not before ■jropitrfiou, show the construe- 



1 TIMOTIir Vr. 6-9. 281 

making gain), a thing given for the sake of procuring pro- 
perty. 

6. "Esti Si, but is) He does not wish altogether to deny that 
godliness is a gain, — mpig/ih;) a ready and sure {' expedita') mode 
of providing a living} — /i'syac, great) for it produces aurapxeiav, 
a mind contented with its lotf unknown to all others. — fierce 
a'jTOipxilag, with contentment) This is the companion of godliness. 

7. OuSh, nothing) A man, when he is bom, consists of soul 
and hody : all other things are to him foreign and exterjial. — 
ilarj/iynafiiv, we have brought in) Supply, and yet we have obtained 
life (including a livelihood) ; see Matt. vi. 25. — iSikm in) to wit 
[Engl. Vers, and it is certain that"] ; a form of declaring. — ou3g 
i^ivsyxiTii, nor carry out) Why then do we heap up much wealth ? 
The only object to be aimed at is that we may have Tofov, an 
unembarrassed journey, till we reach our true country. 

8. "Ey^ovTig, liaving) It is by impHcation affirmed, that we shall 
have them. — bia,rpo<f)dii) food {means of sustenance), by which we 
may in the meantime be nourished. This is the meaning of 
hL — exiirae/MaTa, clothing) also a covering or shelter. — Totrojg) 
with these, although money be wanting, ver. 10. — otpxigdn<fo/ii6a) 
we shall have enough in fact : why then not also in feeling 1 

9. BovXo/Mvoi, wishing) This unsh is the enemy of a mind con- 
tented with its lot ; it is not the wealth itself (that is the enemy 
of contentment) : rich men are not therefore commanded to cast 
away their wealth, ver. 17, 18. — tXovtiTv, to be rich) to have 
more than food and clothing. — sfiviirTauei — BMiiZauei, fall into — 
drown) A sad gradation. — •nipag/iiiv) There is a Paronomasia 
[the signification of a word changed by a sUght change of the 
letters] : mpigfihg, mipagfihg. Temptation is opposed to ' food,' like- 
wise to faith : a snare is opposed to ' clothing' and to righteous- 
ness : ' lusts^ are opposed to " a contented mind." — irayiSa, a 
snare) Therefore they do not find «>ov, true gain. — oXidpov, 
destruction) of the body. — avuiKuav, perdition) also of the soul : 
comp. of all, ver. 10. This is opposed to that expression, great 
gain, ver. 6. 

tion to be, "that godliness is a gain," a way to advance one's worldly interest : 
not as Engl. Vers., "that gain is godliness."— Ed. 
' nopiofiosis strictly the act of providing a living, meam of gain : mpi<rfiu. 



282 1 TIMOTHY VI. 10-12. 

10. ndvTuv Tuv xaxuv, of all evils) For it destroys faith, the 
root of all that is good : at first sight, the love of money seems 
to take away the nutriment or food that supports many crimes, 
as luxury, wantonness, etc. ; but it is in reality the root of all 
evils. All evils in ver. 9 are comprehended under temptation, 
a snare, lusts, destruction, perdition ; although the article ruv 
does not precisely relate to those evils, but is added to nravrm, 
according to custom, for the purpose of amplifying or heighten- 
ing the effect, without its relative power. — ipiXapyvpia, the love of 
money) When money is loved for itself, it is not used for procur- 
ing " food and raiment." — ?s) fnXapyvplag, viz. apyvpou. — r/vsj) 
som,e : the Ephesians, ch. v. 15. — opeyo/ievoi, having coveted) ch. 
iii. 1, note [Tiaving grasped at]. — oSLvaig iroXkaTg, with many sor- 
rows) of the conscience, producing remorse for property badly 
acquired ; also of the mind, urging to the laying up of more. 
The remedy of these sorrows is faith. 

11. ''n civSpoiwi rou &sou) man of God. So the Lxx. for the 
Hebrew, man of God, i.e. a prophet, a mediating messenger of 
God to men, one removed from earthly things. — rauTo. peCye, 
flee these things) He resumes, after the parenthesis, the words 
which he had spoken at the end of ver. 5. Therefore the ex- 
pression, these things, is to be referred to ver. 4, 5 : for both 
enumerations form an evident antithesis [to what follows in ver. 
11] : to this antithesis flee, follow, belong. — dixaioeuvriv, righteous- 
ness) This comprehends all the other things, and is again put in 
the first place, 2 Tim. ii. 22. — eve'el3iioi,v, godliness) The antithesis 
is the abuse of godliness, ver. 5. — rnVr/i-, ayd'ffriv, faith, love) Their 
antitheses are envy, strife, ver. 4. — virofiovfiv, patience) by which 
even calumnious railings are endured, ibid. — -Trpcforrira, meekness) 
by which evil surmisings are overcome, ibid. 

12. Th xaXb aySiva, the good fight) In antithesis to strifes of 
words, ver. 4. — IviXafioiJ, lay hold of) as something that is within 
reach and near at hand. Leave to others their own questions, 
ibid. A Metonymy of the consequent for the antecedent, with 
the argument drawn from what is easy [laying hold of eternal 
life is easy as contrasted with the questions and strifes in ver. 4]. 
The same expression is found at ver. 19. It is a simile taken 
from the race-course and the prizes ; comp. 2 Tim. iv. 7, etc. — 
exX^Srii xal u[Lo\6yriisag, thou hast been called and hast prof essed) 



1 TIMOTHY VI. 13-15. 283 

The divine calling and profession of believers are correlatives. 
Both take place in baptism. \If at any time thou hast made a 
promise to GoD, He Himself deems that thou art bound to Him ; 
and that is remarkable good-will on His part. — ^V. g.J — rriv xaXriv 
o//,oXoyiav) that [not a, as Engl. Vers.] good profession, [viz. that 
concerning the kingdom, of Christ, ver. 13. — V. g.] So also in 
the following verse [" Christ Jesus, that witnessed — that good 
profession "]. But the words differ : Thou hast professed, ac- 
companied with the assent of witnesses : He witnessed, though 
Pontius Pilate did not assent. — hwviov iroXkoiv /j^apTvpciiv, before 
many witnesses) who would testify against thee, if thou wert to 
fall away. 

13. Ilapoi'yyiX'ka, I give thee charge) See how important is the 
office of preaching the Gospel ; 2 Tim. iv. 1. — roD Z^uovoiavvrog rSi 
•frawa, who quickeneth all things) LXX., Neh. ix. 6 [ffu fVo/>)(raj — 
xal ai l^mmieTs rrl va\iTa\. Here the creation of all things, which 
is there mentioned, is taken for granted. Part of the hymn 
is expressed, the whole hymn is implied. The power of God 
quickens (gives life to) thee also, O Timothy, in the discharge of 
thy duty, and will raise thee up to everlasting life. — roS f/^afrxt- 
pfidavroe, who witnessed) The confession of Christ quickens [gives 
life to] all confessions (professions, ver. 12). To witness a con- 
fession was the part of the Lord ; to confess a confession (profes- 
sion, ver. 12) belonged to Timothy. — It/ Tlovrlov liiXdrov, before 
Pontius Pilate) A well-known chronological era. — r^v) that 
which all Christians know was made by Him, viz. that concern- 
ing His kingdom, ver. 15. 

14. Triv) this. — agiri'Kov, avi'TiXri'jrTov, without spot, unrebukeable) 
in the masculine gender.' — pixPh until) Believers, in regulating 
their practice, used in that day to set before themselves the day 
of Christ as near at hand : we are accustomed to set before us 
the hour of death. — l-sifaniag, the appearing) This word often 
occurs ui the second Epistle to Timothy and in the Epistle to 
Titus. 

15. -SLaipoTi idioig, in His own fitting times) The plural number 
is to be noticed, which does not much abridge (does not confine 
within very narrow limits) the sh-^rtness of the times : His own, viz. 

' i.e. Agreeing with « ""t with riu wtoX^k. — Ed. 



284 I TIMOTHY VI. 16, 17. 

of which the reason (^the regulating principle), power, knowledge, 
and revelation, is in His own hand. So /diog, ch. ii. 6 ; 2 Tim, 
i. 9 ; Tit. L 3,. A divine reservation. — Sei^si, He shall show) To 
he shown is an expression used of what formerly existed. God 
will show Hira (Acts iii, 20), of whom a most magnificent 
panegyric follows, involving in it the glory of Christ itself [as 
well as that of God the Father]. — o p.a.%a^iti xal fiovog Syvaerris, 
the blessed and only Potentate) These are two predicates :^ the 
first, with the addition also of only, is treated of in ver. 16 ["who 
only hath immortality"] ; for the word funKdfiog and dx^paro;' 
have the same ^derivation, and signify immortal; and hence 
honour (yex. 16) is due to Him ; the second, is treated of pre- 
sently after in this verse, and hence power everlasting (ver. 16) 
is due to Him. This is the reason why men in power, and death 
threatened by them, should not be feared in the confession ol 
the Gospel. So eternal power is mentioned at Rom. i. 20. — 
rZv ^aeiXiuovrmv — xtipiiuoi/Tuv, of those reigning — of those ruling) 
Spiritually and politically, 

16. Movog, only) This word only was properly put off in being 
treated of till now, because another similar phrase follows, 
" Whom no man hath seen, nor can see." — sp(^4»v) having, and 
therefore about to give to us. — u^ameiav, immortality) The 
adjective dSdvang, immortal, is not found in the New Testament, 
but a(p6aprog, incorruptible. The LXX. has neither dSdvang nor 
aSamnia. The Book of Wisdom, which never existed but in 
Greek, has both. — <pSig, light) After life, mention is immediately 
made of light. — a-KposiTov) inaccessible to creatures, unless in as 
far as they are both admitted by Him and He goes forth to 
them, — ouSs/j avdeoj-irav, no man) So Exod. xxxiii. 20 : That 
which is denied to mere men, John i. 18 ; 1 John iv. 12, will be 
vouchsafed to the saints ; Matt. v. 8 ; 1 Cor. xiii. 12 ; 1 John 
iii. 2 ; Rev. xxii. 4. 

17. To/s ■jrMualoig, the rich) There were many rich men at 

' Who is the blessed and only Potentate, o Ivmiirrti; is not the subject 
of hi'^u, but a predicate of its subject. — ^Ed. 

' Bengel derives fiaxapios from ft,^, and x^p, death ; and so dxiipaTOs from 
« privative, and »^p, death. The derivation of dxtiparo; is rather from 
a and xipauvvfii : and ftetnipioi is of dubious etymon. Some give ^aipu (?). 
—Ed. 



285 

Ephesus. This forms the Appendix {the Postscript) of the 
epistle, which is of great importance.— ;3X«xsiia/, to have trust) 
This bad * trust,' which nerves the grasp with which they cHng 
to riches, checks the enjoyment (amXaueiv), which Paul pre- 
sently mentions. — ainXornn, uncertain) [lit. the uncertainty of 
riches]. We ought for this reason not to trust in wealth, because 
it is most uncertain, as regards the time to come (ile ri fi'sXXov, 
ver. 19). — Im rjS @ia, upon, or in God) Al. Auff. 6, Boemer. Clar. 
Colb. 7, even more than these have J^/. So the antithesis is 
more expressly marked to the words, Jir/ ■irXoiroii adriXornri. 
Trust, when leaning upon God, is strong. The common read- 
ing has h, subjoining rSi &ta rSi Zfiivn, taken from ch. iv. 10, as 
I think; iov Al. Boem. Colb. 7, Rae. 2, Aeth. Lot. in M.S., 
Eeuthng, Gildas, Haimo, have not rSi Zfivn.^ — wXouaiug, richly) 
otherwise no one would be -rrXoigiog, rich. — I'lg avoXauaiv, to enjoy) 
Enjoyment consists in giving, not in holding fast. Inactivity 
(i.e. the state of non-employment) should be far removed, as 
from man, so also from his resources : James v. 2, 3. 

18. ' A-yaSoefiyi/v) to aim to do good. To be rich in good works 
follows as the consequence of this diligence : ayaShv and xaXhv 
differ; ayaShg involves at the sametime the idea of (divine) 
blessedness (comp. Mark x. 18, note) : xaXhg includes in its 
notion, beauty. — eu^iTa.d6Tou5, ("ready to distribute"] liberal) in 
imparting, viz. individually. — xoimvixoiig, willing to communicate) 
by lending, by contributing for the common good, viz. along 
with many. In ordinary cases ti.e. where the grace of God 
does not change them], the rich are chiefly delighted with a divi- 
sion [i.e. individual monopoly, as opposed to communicating] in 
proceedings, plans, and properties, and are imperious and insolent. 

19. ' Awo6riea,vpl^ovra,g iauTo/g, laying up in store for themselves) 
The best kind of property which is laid up "against the time 
to come." The antithesis is xoimvixoiig, willing to communicate. 
So Tob. iv. 10, /lA^ po/3oD 'XtnTv iXsri/ioewrir dsnot ■ ap aya.6hv 6tiSa\j- 
flssig eiauTSj $ig ii/j,spav ava-yxrig : " be not afraia to perform works 

' 'Exi is the reading of Lachm., witli AD(A) corrected, G Orig. 1,7096 
cod. Tisch., with less authority, viz. / "Vulg. Orig. cod., and Kec. Text, 
reads h. These latter, except Vulg. (best MSS.), add t^ ^auri to 
Oep ; and so also D(A) and both Syr. Versions. But AG Orig. cod., g 
Vulg. (Amiat.) Memph. and Theb. omit t? Z,unt. — Ed. 



286 I TIMOTHY VI. 20. 

of charity, for thou wilt lay up for thyself a good deposit foi 
the day of necessity." Otherwise the rich do not coUeci 
treasures for themselves, but for others. To collect by giving 
forms a pleasant Oxymoron [see Append.] The prepositior 
d'iTh has admirable force in d*o^»j(raufi;'^ovrag, apart [in store] fm 
a distant time. — hfiB'kiov xaXhv, a good foundation) An elUptica 
apposition, i.e. a'7ro6rigavpl^(ivTa,s Sriaavphv, namely, h//,sXiov xaXov 
The metaphor is cumulative, as in Ps. xxxvii. 5 (6), with the 
explanation of Gejer. He calls works of beneficence a gooc 
foundation, to which is opposed the uncertainty of riches.— 
0f/j,s\i(ts, -\p'<y, that on which we depend as a security (a bond), 
a pledge. [Ji! is commonly called a basis (fiindum). — V. g.]— 
iig rh /isXXoK, for the time to come) The antithesis is, in the presem 
world {h rffl dOv aiSj-ii), ver. 17 ; comp. ch. iv. 8. — imXd^mTai, 
may lay hold) as persons emerging from shipwreck. Th« 
merchant saved from shipwreck [in this case, as contrasted 
with all other cases of shipwreck], finds his treasures sent hom6 
before him. In ver. 12 mention is made of a fight : the ex- 
pression is the same, but the figure is different. — rrn^ mm, 
^4j^g) Comp. 0VTO5, ch. V. 3, 5, 16. True life [that which is lift 
indeed] from the living God. 

20. ''a TifiShe, Timothy) He calls him familiarly his son, ch. i 
18, with gravity and affection. What comes last in ver. 20, 21 
corresponds to the beginning of the epistle, and is to be explainec 
from it. — Tnv 'irot.paSriariv, what is committed) i. 18. So the com- 
mandment, ver. 14 ; 2 Tim. i. 14, note. The opposite in this 
passage is vain babblings, emptiaess of words. — rag ^i^rfKaui xiw 
(puvlag, profane and vain babblings) LXX., tovs xivoXoyovvrai foi 
n''SVSVDn, Is. viii. 19. Barbarous words were formerly used bj 
the Magi, which are said to have a secret power, though thej 
have in reality none, and are altogether vain. Paul seems to hav( 
had respect to this circumstance, as he has substituted the mor* 
significant term; for (puvri, a voice, an utterance, expresses vehe 
mence; comp. 2 Tim. ii. 15, 16, note, [where rhv X&yov rrn iXn^iia- 

This reading, to which the larger Ed. had given rather little counte 
nance, is preferred to the reading alaulm, by the margin of the 2d Ed, 
with the concurrence of the Germ. Vers.— E. B. 

AD(A) corrected, G^ Vulg. read t^s oVrjf. Rec. Text has toS ctm'm 
with only inferior uncial MSS Ed. 



1 TIMOTHY VI. 21. 287 

is opposed to ximipmlas ; the ipmri, implying vehemence of voice, 
being opposed to temperate speech or word, ^toyos]. Moreover, 
the word yvSisis agrees with the Hebrew ''J1V^^ a wizard, in the 
passage quoted above, which the Greeks, in the books of Samuel 
and Kings at least, have interpreted ymsTriv [as we use the term, 
" a wise man," of a dealer in magic, a wizard]. And in this 
way, Paul calls the false teachers by the terms signifying magi 
and magic, to show how much he held them in abomination : 
comp. yonreg, 2 Tim. iii. 13. Clemens Al., 1. 2, Strom, f. 280, 
puts under these words of Paul the following : ii'Tti raurrig tkiy- 
yifLimi TTii (piiivris o'l airo ruv a'/p'eaiciiv, rAj vphg Ti/j,6Siov ahToveit 
sviSToXd;, " the heretics being reproved by this word (voice), 
reject the Epistles to Timothy." — xal avTi6seiig, and oppositions) 
A false yvuaig, knowledge, curiously set forth (puffed off) various 
oppositions taken from philosophy, pretending that there are 
two Gods opposed to each other as rivals (&vTiTi')(yo\ii), the one 
good and the other bad ; and in both, that there are wonderful 
avTieToi^lag, corresponding oppositions. Paul notices these oppo- 
sitions, and at the same time severely ridicules them by a play 
on the words ; because their teachers oppose themselves to the 
truth, and their 6ssiig, positions [taken out of avnSeasig, op- 
positions'], are contrary to the ' foundation' already laid. See 
the conjugates, avTidiuTih/^ivovg and h/isXiog, 2 Tim. ii. 25, 19. 
On the other hand, Paul himself, in his epistles, especially to 
Timothy, handles most wise oppositions or avTifeeeig : for example, 
1 Tim. i. 7, 8 ; iii. 16 ; iv. 1, 6, 7, vi. 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 11, where 
we have expressly. But thou [marking an antithesis]. More- 
over 2 Tim. ii. 15-23, in which again the phrase. But thou, is 
frequent ; ch. iii. 10, 14, iv. 5. — •vJ/suSwi/j/ioti yvdiiug, of science 
falsely so called) which in ver. 21 is to be referred to science, 
by separating it from its epithet. The Gnostics, who are here 
denoted by a Metonymy of the abstract for the concrete, boasted 
of and applied the name science to their teaching ; but Paul 
says that it was so named falsely ; they are without understand- 
ing, ch. i. 7. 

21. nep! rriv irlgriv naroxnioi-h i^V ^'^^^ ^'''"^^ concerning the 
faith) Although they attempt to appropriate to themselves 
imerrj/iriv, science, and yvoieiv, knowledge, ver. 4, 20, and its 
liisn^iaii, accurate reasoning \ hitting the mark, opposed to aeroy^su, 



288 1 TIMOTHY VI. 21. 

/ miss the mark, err] and sagacity, yet they have lost the true 
sagacity, which is connected with faith, not comprehending 
what is to be believed, and what it is to believe ; comp. 2 Tim. iii. 
7, 8. — ?i %af"f, grace) not unknown to thee. He hrieiiy indicates 
it. — fitrA gov, with thee) No salutations to others are here added, 
for the epistle was not to be read in public. 



ON THE 



SECOND EPISTLE TO TIMOTHY. 



CHAPTER I. 

1. UauXos, Paul) This epistle has three divisions. 

I. The Insckiption, i. 1, 2. 

II. An Invitation, Come to me in prison, variously 
hinted at. 

1. He expresses his affection for Timothy, 3, 4, 

And kindly exhorts him : BE NOT ashamed of me, 
ver. 6, 7; to which are subjoined sad instances of 
abandonment, ver. 15, and blessed examples of 
attachment, 16, 17. 

2. The twofold proposition, Be strong, and commit thy 

office to faithful men, ch. ii. 1, 2. The first part is 
treated, ver. 3—13 ; the second, ver. 14, with an ex- 
hortation to Timothy to behave himself as a man of 
God before his journey, 15, 16 ; iii. 1, 2 ; iv. 1, 2, 

3. Come quickly, ver. 9. Here Paul — 

1. Mentions his solitary state, 10, 11. 

2. He orders his books to be brought, 13. 

3. He admonishes him concerning the adversary, 

14, 15. 

4. He points out the inconstancy of men, and pro- 

claims the faithfulness of God, 16, 17. 



eSfi 2 TIMOTHY I. 2-3. 

4. Come before winter. This invitation is encom 
passed with salutations, 19, 20. 

in. The Prayer, 22. 

Paul wished Timothy to come to him in prison without fear , 
and he was about to deliver up to him before his decease the 
lamp (torch-light)^ of the evangelical office, ch. iv. 5, 6. This 
epistle is the testament and last words [" cygnea cantio," swan 
like death-song] of Paul. It was written long after the first 
Epistle to Timothy, and yet the tone of both is very much alike. 
— xar litayyi'Kia.v, according to the promise) Paul subserves the 
fulfilment of this promise in the discharge of his office. So zard, 
according to, in accordance with, John ii. 6 : comp. on the particle 
and on the truth itself, Tit. i. 1, 2. — Zfiifn, of life) prepared both 
for me and thee and the elect. This is the secret spring of the 
power, which he exhibits in exhorting Timothy, ver. 10 ; ii. 8. 
\In fact the journey which he wishes to be undertaken by Timothy 
did not seem to he without risk of life. — V. g.j 

2. ' Ayavrir(fi, dearly beloved) An appropriate epithet ; for the 
strongest declaration of love follows. In the first epistle he had 
written, my genuine [/nrjff/w] : that is compensated for here in ver. 
5 [by the expression. Trie h col awroxplnv irlanug, the unfeigned faith 
that is in thee, which corresponds to it]. 

3. Xdpiv 'iy^a, I feel thankful) Drawing very near to his mar- 
tyrdom, still he gives thanks. Paul feels thankful to God for the 
faith bestowed on Timothy, ver. 5. Therefore from its adidXimrm, 
as [not that, as Engl. Vers.] without ceasing, to %afSs 'TrXripuSu, 1 
might be filled with joy, is put as a parenthesis, to explain those 
things which follow, vm/jivriaiv Ka/j,l3diim, calling to (or rather, 
receiving a) remembrance, etc. : for iig, even as, inasmuch as, is an 
explanatory particle. — w Xarpiiu, whom I serve) Kom. i. 9, note. 
— B'j-i 'Trpoyiimv, from the [our] [not jwy, as Engl. Yqv5^ forefathers) 
Paul means the forefathers ; not Abraham, etc., whom he calls 
To-jg itaripag, the fathers [Eom. ix. 5], never 'irpoyovovg, forefathers 
or ancestors, but the immediate progenitors ; and signifies their 
long continuance in the true religion all along from an earlier age 

* Alluding to the ancient torcli-races of the ?i«/«3-aS^ipo^o(, in which the 
torch was handed by the runners from hand to hand. Ed. 



2 TIMOTHY I. i, 5. 231 

of mankind, whether Paul's ancestors were themselves godly men, 
which is highly probable, or not ; for he does not add, my. The 
memory of those who have gone before, and to whom he is being 
[i.e. about to be] gathered, delights him, now that he is pre- 
pared to die. He even calls to remembrance Timothy's grand 
mother and mother, ver. 5. This epistle especially has some- 
thing of the ripeness of old age, mild and good-natured [con- 
ciliatory]. 

4. 'Emvoiuv (Si ISiTv, earnestly desiring to see thee) He begins his 
invitation to Timothy at first gradually. — /ie//-vrifi,ho; eou tSiv 
daxfiiaiv, remembering thy tears) He seems not merely to speak of 
the former tears of Timothy shed at bidding Paul farewell (for 
tears are usually elicited at parting, comp. Acts xx. 37), but of 
his habitual tears under the influence of pious feeling. In this 
respect also he had him like-minded [Phil. ii. 20] with himself: 
Acts XX. 19, note. Tears, the flower of the heart, indicate either 
the greatest hypocrisy or the utmost sincerity. Turning tears 
into ridicule is a proof of the depravity of our age. — ha, in 
order that) Construe with idiTv, to see thee [not with fiifiV7j/j,evo; — 
daxpitiiv]. 

5. ' Tm/Mne'v Xa/i^amv, receiving a remembrance) [a reminis- 
cence reminding me] Some external occasion, or a message from 
Timothy, had brought his faith to Paul's remembrance [not as 
Engl. Vers. " When I call to remembrance"]. Ammonius says, 
" avdfivngi; is, when a man comes to the remembrance of things 
past — M/ivridig, when they are suggested to him by another 
[whether person, or thing].' — vlsnag, of faith) Among all the 
virtues of Timothy, faith is most to the purpose which Paul has 
in view. — evMriei, dwelt in) This word conveys the idea of con- 
tmuance [had its fixed dwelling in]. — -Trpurov) first, perhaps oe- 
fore the birth of Timothy. So far the remembrance of Paul 
reaches. What the condition of the parents of Lois was, is not 
mentioned. — /id/j^/^ri, grandmother) The remembrance of the dead 
is pleasant to intimate friends, especially to those whose death is 
at hand, and to the posterity of the dea.d.—M'^pl, mother) She had 
married a Greek.— -Evvilxri, Euriice) That name is found in 

' They differ as the German Andenken and Erinnerung : fivriftvi and 
fiteia : memory or recalling to mind, and the act of putting in mind or the 

heiaiyt ../i™.'™^/.^ Soo Titfm Svn and Wahl LeX. — ED. 



292 2 TIMOTHY I. 6, 7. 

Hesiod's Theogony. Lois seems to have been the mother of 
Eunice, and both were dead. 

6. a/ jJv a'lTiav, for which cause) namely, because / have been 
reminded, im/Lvfigiriv [referring to ver. 5, im/ivrieiv Xa/i/Savwv]. — • 
amtiifivne-Aoi, I put thee in remembrance) Being reminded himself, 
he puts others [sc. Timothy] in mind. — ava^umpeh) to stir up} 
The same word occurs, Gen.xlv. 27, 1 Mace. xiii. 7 : lumpica, of 
raising the dead, 2 Kings viii. 1, 5. The opposite e^smsiv, to 
extinguish ; Matt. xxv. 8 : 1 Thess. v. 19. Timothy, being long 
without Paul, seems to have become somewhat remiss ; comp. 
note to ch. ii. 22 : at least he is now stirred up to greater exer- 
tions. — rh xo-pie/ioi,, the gift) which is joined with faith, ver. 5 : 
and is energetic and lively, ver. 7. 

7. nvsD/ia, spirit) That is, the spirit which God has given us 
is not the spirit of fear, but of power, etc. Hence arises the tes- 
timony which believers give, spoken of in the following verse and 
in John xv. 26, 27 [ye also shall bear witness, etc.]. — SuXiag) 
Eustathius says, SnXb; 6 dsSiibg rag iXag, one that is afraid of troops 
of soldiers ;^ comp. Sir. xxxvii. (11) 12. This derivation is quite 
in consonance with the sense here ; comp. ch. ii. 3. The fear 
meant is that, of which the causes are in the mind, rather than 
from without. This fear within in too great a degree exaggerates 
the causes which are without. The act of fear always has its 
cause in the mind, but a courageous disposition repels and over- 
comes external causes. — di/iia.//,Btag) of power. Auna,<i;s, power, 
strength, is opposed to fear. Divine power in us, not our own, 
is intended ; see ver. 8 ; and so of love and sober-mindedness. 
[They also, the aja,itr\ and 6(a<ppo)iisiJjog (which Engl. Vers, renders 
a sound mind) meant, are not our own, but are created by God 
in us]. All these operate in us, and animate us to the discharge 
of our duties towards God, the saints, and ourselves. Power 
[strength^ and sober-mindedness are the two extremes, but these 
in a good sense ; love is in the middle, and is the bond, and as it 
were the check upon both, taking away [counteracting the 
liability to] the two bad extremes, timidity and rashness. Con- 
cerning strength or power, see ver. 8, etc. ; concerning love, ch. 

^ Lit. to rekindle or revive the spark of; Th. dvx ^uou iriip. — Ed. 
' This- is one of the fanciful etymologies of Scholiasts. The — Xof is 
simply a common adjectival termination ; the root is of course Ss/Su. — En. 



2 TIMOTHY I. 8, 9. 293 

ii. 14, etc. ; concerning sober-^nindedness, cli. iii. 1, etc. [These 
gifts are preferable to any miraculous powers whatever. — V. g. 1 — 
xa! ayd'rrni, and of love) Moreover love embraces even those who 
are prisoners [in a spirit of bondage], by driving out fear ; comp. 
1 John iv. 18. — nal sdifpovis/iou, and of sober-mindedness) This is 
a verbal noun [the being sober-minded']. The duty of young 
men is sai<ppov!t,is6ai, to act with sober-mindedness, Tit. ii. 4, 6 : 
and Timothy was a young man, ch. ii. 22 ; 1 Tim. iv. 12. He 
is therefore admonished to give up all the advantages and plea- 
sures of life, ch. ii. 4, and to remove the ' thorns,' by which he 
may be entangled; Luke viii. 14. The Spirit teaches this 
lesson ; and he who learns it, is delivered from fear, and heartily 
embraces the testimony of his Lord. 

8. Mfi ouii iiraieytivSfii, be not thou therefore ashamed) Shame is 
the companion of fear ; if fear be overcome, false shame flees 
away. Comp. ver. 12, 16, where Paul proposes his own 
example and that of Onesiphorus, adding, in conjunction with 
this, examples of a contrary character in ver. 15. — roS Kxipku 
ij/iuv, of our Lord) A rare Antonomasia.^ Elsewhere Paul either 
omits our, or adds the name of Jesus Christ. Now, when he 
says our Lord, he places BSm in opposition to Csesar, whom his 
courtiers so called. — /j^rjSi s/j,£, nor of me) The cause of the ser- 
vants of God cannot be separated from the cause of God. — 
rhv diB/j,iov, His prisoner) Men are easily ashamed of those that 
are in prison, especially at Rome. — gvyxaxo-rdSrigov, but be thou 
partaker of the afflictions) Suffer afflictions [Endure hardness], 
ch. ii. 3, 4, 5 : and that too together with me and with the Gospel. 
— &\imf/,i\i, power) This, which is far above all things beside, is 
nervously described, ver. 9, 10 ; and at the same time the pre- 
vious exhortation, ver. 8, is deduced from the subject itself, and 
derives its strength from the following description, ver. 9, 10. — 
&iov, of God) Jesus Christ and the Holy Spirit are mentioned, 
ver. 13, 14. 

9. Swo-anros, who has saved) by conversion ; Acts ii. 47. There 
is here an excellent description of the love of the Father, of the 
grace of the Saviour, and of the whole economy of salvation, 
for the propagation of which it is worth while to suffer and die. 

' A common or general designation, used instead of a proper name ' 
Kvpiov for ' Iriirat/. Append. — Ed. 



•mi 2 TlMOTUr I. 10, 

This salvation is not merely a thing to be acquired (acquisitiva), 
biit a thing to be applied (applicativa), for this very reason, that 
it is so closely connected with the calling. All the things which 
are placed, ver. 9, under xard, in actual fact [in the very act] 
precede salvation and calling. Salvation and calling, in point of 
fact, follow. If a man comes into the state of being called, this 
is already the beginning of his whole salvation ; and in this 
sense calling is a part of salvation : salvation is the whole, but 
both are very closely connected. The anxiety itself of the 
Shepherd is prior to the actual time of the little sheep hearing 
the voice of the Shepherd. — xXriaii aylcf,, with a holy calling) 
which is entirely from God, and claims us entirely for God. The 
holiness and Divine origin of this calling is afterwards more fully 
described, especially as the epithet iSlav, His own, excludes our 
own works. — !d!av. His own) Rom. ix. 11 ; Eph. ii. 8 ; 1 Tim. 
vi. 15, note. — rrjv doSiTgav, given to us) Before we existed, it was 
given to us, the Mediator even already at that time receiving it. 
— h XpigTui 'ijjffou — dici — 'irjBou Xpisrou, in Christ Jesus — by — of 
Christ Jesus) The name Christ is very skilfully put first when 
the old economy is mentioned ; the name Jesus, when the new 
economy is mentioned. — it/j J ^pomv alwim, before eternal ages) 
Tit. i. 2 ; Rom. xvi. 25, note. 

10. ^avipcikTgav, manifested) Those remarkable words, .r?j 
i'jrKpa.Hia.g, the appearing, and purisavrog, bringing to light, agree 
with this expression. — iiri<paviiai, appearing) in the flesh. It 
does not merely mean here the very act of His coming, but the 
whole time of the abode of Christ among men. — 'rh iamnv, 
death) The article is used here emphatically and designedly. 
Paul in this passage, as it were, directly abolishes death.^ Hence 
the soldier of Christ ought now no longer to fear death. — fmri- 
aavroi, bringing to light [exposing to the light]) An abbreviated 
expression : implying, and has procured for us (that should be 
supplied from the antithetic word xarapyijgavro;, who has abo- 
lished) and has brought to light by the Gospel ; comp. Eph. ii. 
17. — Z,mi xat aipSapgiav) A Hendiadys. — di& roD) Schoettgenius 
construes this with xaXlffai/ro?, ver. 9. We may construe thus : 

* The article is often used to express a thing in the abstract. Death, 
not merely in some particular instance, but in all its aspects and bearings, 
and in its very essence, being, and idea, is abolished. — Ed. 



2 TIMOTHY I. 11-13. 295 

fatcpuhTsav SiA rrii — (xa/) bi& toZ dayyiXlov, made manifest by 
His appearing — (and) by the Gospel. 

11. 'e^vwv, of the Gentiles) Construe this not only with teacher, 
but also with preacher and apostle. There are three designations, 
preacher, apostle, teacher. I. A public preacher is one who may 
discharge his oiBce even in one and the same place. II. An 
apostle goes about everywhere ; but he would have fully satisfied 
the requirements of his apostolic office, if he had once for all 
declared his message. III. Teacher. Here we have in addition 
diligence and perseverance in teaching ; from which arose suf- 
fering. 

12. Taura itae-^^u, I suffer these things) These adversities hap- 
pen to me. — yap, for) Confidence as to the future drives away 
shame. — S) He says w, not rivi. I know JHim, in whom} I have 
placed my faith, although the world knows Him not. — •niriCTsuxa) 
I have believed, and committed to Him my deposit. Here the 
faithfulness of God is intended ; comp. ch. ii. 13 : His power 
also is presently afterwards mentioned [He is able^ — iriirueiMai, 
I am persuaded) Kom. viii. 38. — iuvocThg, able) against so many 
enemies. — rr^v vapa^rixnv, my deposit) There is one deposit which, 
committed to us by God, we ought to keep, ver. 13 ; comp. ch. 
ii. 2, '^apdSov, commit : there is another which, committed to 
God by us, and mentioned in this verse. He keeps ; and this is 
indeed our soul, 1 Pet. iv. 19 ; comp. Luke xxiii. 46, that is, 
ourselves and our heavenly portion. Paul, with death imme- 
diately before him, had two deposits, one to be committed to the 
Lord, and another to Timothy. — (puXd^ai, to keep) even in death. 
— hihriv, that) ver. 18, ch. iv. 8. 

13. 'TCT'oruTftHf/K^) 'TTorvTroo/j-a,!, I revolve in the mind. Therefore 
Paul viishes that those things which Timothy had once heard, 
should be always kept in view, and should remain impressed on 

' Not t/«;, Who the person is, in whom : rlvi. — Ed. 

° Engl. Vers, translates the form. Beng. takes it, a lively and lasting 
mental impression. — Ed. 

However Wahl, Clavis, translates it, delineation forma, " a delineation," 
"a form," from {nmv7ciiii/,oi.ii adumbro, delineo, Poll. xxii. 13, 6, "I give 
an outline or sketch of." If any particular form of sound words were 
meant, t^j/ would have been prefixed. The Engl. Vers., without warrant, 
gives the article. The absence of it makes Bengel's interpretation likely. 
-Eu. 



2i)fi 2 TIMOTHY I. H-16. 

his mind. It is from this that an outward profession must de- 
rive its strength. Paul placed before Timothy faith and love : 
let Timothy ' express' and ' represent' in turn [alluding to 
■j'lrorWugig, rhmi\ faith and love. — 'iyi) ^oW, : a word suited to 
the context, which is respecting a deposit. He uses ej/e, not 
Ix^ii. Nor was it the intention of Paul to give as a teacher 
information to Timothy about the sum of sound words [a verbal 
summary of the plan of salvation]. — vaf ifiou JiKouciac, which 
from me thou hast heard) Comp. ii. 2, where thou hast heard of 
me, occurs in a different order of the words. Here indeed, 
ver. 13, the authority of Paul is urged as a reason, why he 
should hold it the more on that account ; hence from me 
is put first. But ch. ii. 2, thou hast heard, and commit, 
are the words in antithesis ; hence thou hast heard is put 
first. — Iv, in) Construed with ej/e, hold; comp. 1 Tim. 
iii. 9. 

14. Tnv xaXriv 'jrapadfixtiv, this good deposit) namely, the sound 
words [words of salvation] which I have committed to thee; 
comp. ch. ii. 2. — Si& Uviv/ians ' Aylov, by the Holy Spirit) He is 
the earnest of the heavenly deposit, which he who keeps, also 
keeps the deposit committed to him ; whence His indwelling is 
pressed upon our notice. 

15. ' ATiSrpciftieav /ie, have turned away from me) at Home, 
ch. iv. 16. — h rji 'Aficf,, in Asia) They therefore returned thither. 
Not so Timothy, although he was also in Asia at Ephesus. — 
^vysKXoi v.a.1 'Epfioyhric, Phygellus and Hermogenes) One might 
perhaps have thought, that these would have been more steady 
than the others. 

16. Aw)), give) He does not make use of any imprecations 
against those who had been unfaithful to him, ver. 15. He 
offers the most excellent prayer for those who had stood fast. 
The categorical or absolute sentence implied is this ; Onesi- 
phorus was beautifully consistent. The feeling forms a modal 
discourse [gives the sentence its modal form. See Append., 
" Sermo modalis"]. — eXeos, mercy) Onesiphorus had aboimded 
in works of m,ercy. — o Kvplog, the Lord) Christ. — rSi ' Ovrjenpopou 
t'l'xifi, the house of Onesiphorus) at Ephesus, ver. 18, ch. iv. 19. 
Onesiphorus himself was absent, or was already then dead. 
Paul therefore honours the survivors by his wish, nay, 



2 TIMOTHY I. 17, 18.-II. 1, 2. 297 

also himself,' ver. 18. — rnXkaKii, often) at Ephesus and 
Rome. 

17. Ka/ ilpi, and found') by Divine aid. A great thing in so 
great a city, where not many would care for Paul a prisoner. 
The word, find., in ver. 18, corresponds to this expression. He 
found me in so great a crowd : may he find mercy in that day 
of the general assembly of all men. A similar allusion occurs 
twice, ch. ii. 9, note. 

' 18. A^»j, give) A pathetic Anaphora [the frequent repetition 
of a word in beginnings of sections. See ver. 16, " The Lord 
give!''] — auT-p, to himself^ An antithesis to his house. — o Kvpioi, 
the Lord) Christ, for whom he so acted [to whom he rendered 
that service. Matt. xxv. 45]. — ^apA KvpUv, from the Lord) The 
same Christ, who shall reward him. The noun for the reciprocal 
pronoun, with emphasis, as Luke xi. 17, note ; 2 Thess. iii. 5. — 
iitixovrtm, ministered) even after my departure ; 1 Tim. i. 3. — 
B'sXtiov) better than I [not as Engl. Vers, very well]. 



CHAPTER IL 

1. 2u, thou) The exhortation is intensified ; ver. 3, ch. iii. 10, 
note [in antithesis to the previously mentioned backsliders, 
ch. i. 15]. — TBjcvov fi^ov, my son) An argument why Timothy 
should imitate Paul, viz. from his spiritual relationship. — hSwa- 
/toD) i. 7, be strong, and show thyself to be so. \_This is treated 
of in ver. 3—13. — ^V. g.] — h rjj xapin, in the grace) Common 
grace incites and strengthens us even for extraordinary duties. 
It is an incentive and stimulus. 

2. Aia, by) before, 1 Tim. vi. 12. — -xapASoM, commit) before 
thou comest thence to me. — vieroTc, to faithful men) This is to 
be the distinguishing grace to be sought for in those to whom 

' That Onesiphorus was dead is a gratuitous assumption. The fact that 
Paul nowhere else prays for the dead, is fatal to the notion here. Beng., by 
the word ' voto,' wish, probably implies that Paul does not here praj/, but 
wish, that in that day it may be found Onesiphorus is among those who 
are to obtain mercy. — Ed. 



298 2 TIMOTHY II. 3-o. 

thou committest this trust or deposit. \This is treated of iii 
ver. 14-21. — V. g.] — 'isovTo.!, sJiall be) after thy departure. 

3. 2i) oh, thou then) An Anaphora;^ conip. ver. 1. Timothy 
is here,' ver. 3, called to higher duties ; comp. ver. 2. 

4. OiidBig, no man) The word abstain (abstinence) is recom 
mended in this verse : sustain' (endurance) is added to the 
recommendation in the next. — eTpanuofiivcQ, warring) Do with 
all thy might what thou art doing. — wpay/jjaniaig, with tlie affairs 
[matters of business] of this life) in which merchants and work- 
men are involved. — apiari., may please) being entirely devoted 
to the duties of a soldier. 

7. No£() attend to, consider, what I say : evvigig, understanding, 
is of the divine gift ; voiTv, to consider, is the part of a well- 
minded man. Paul says this, if you compare ver. 6 with 
ver. 5. If the husbandman (Timothy) hath (or shall have) 
laboured, then first he ought (he is entitled) to partake of the 
fniits (in which the resurrection of Clirist abounds, ver. 8, 11, 
12) ; but if this were the whole meaning of Paul, he would have 
said, rhv /ji,sTaXri-^6fie\ioii bit nom^v. Therefore from this seventh 
verse we may gather that a thought rather different is involved 
in this expression, which amounts to this : — Paul trained the 
mind of Timothy, i. 6 ; therefore fruits are chiefly due to him 
from Timothy. In this view, Paul does not openly require, 
as is necessary in addressing dull men, but by amphibology 
and enigma, that Timothy should ingenuously acknowledge 
and perform the duty ; and this he does by three comparisons 
taken from the employment of the soldier, the wrestler, the 
husbandman. — Sijijjj yap eoi, for may the Lord give to thee) The 
meaning is. He will give ; there is thus a connection between 
consider and for; but affection adds the modus or nkg [see 
Append, on " Modahs Sermo." Here the imperative nwod ex- 
presses the feeling']. — o Kvpiog, the Lord) Christ. — Jv rcaei, in all 
things) He had already given him understanding in many things : 
this being taken for granted, Paul says. May He give it in all 
things. 

8. Mi/jj/jtonEus) remember, so that thou mayest follow. Paul, 

* Frequent repetition of the same word in beginnings. Append. — Ed. 
' It is here in the sense of withstand. It was thought right to use it tc 
give the reader an idea of the antithesis in the original. — Tu. 



2 TIMOTHY II. 9-13. 299 

as usual, quickens (gives life to) his own example by the 
example of Christ. — lyriyep/^hov ix vsupuv) An abhreviated ex- 
pression, i.e. Who died and was raised from the dead; so we 
[if we are to share His resurrection, must share His death], 
ver. 11. Kara, according to, depends on these words. — ix gvip- 
/iaroi Aauld, of the seed of David) He wishes Timothy to attend 
to this one genealogy [as opposed to the other 'genealogies,' 
1 Tim. i. 4], which serves as a proof that Jesus is the Christ. 

9. 'En w, in which) viz. in the Gos^el.^xaxova.Su, I suffer 
[troublel) xaxoZpyog, an evil-doer, is the conjugate. The evil of 
suffering [is my portion], as if the evil of doing had preceded 
it [on my part]. — StSfiSiv, bonds) Ou dsdiTai, is not bound, is 
the conjugate. — ii; xaxovpyog, as an evil-doer) attended with 
danger of life and with disgrace. — ou diSerai) is not bound, i.e. 
makes progress without hindrance. 

10. Aia TouTo, for this cause) because the Gospel runs forward, 
while I am bound. — eoiTripiag — /^srii 3of>j5, salvation — with glory) 
There is an exquisite propriety in the^ words : (Karnpia, salvation, 
viz. the deliverance from evil, is the privilege of those receiving 
faith : &'|a, glory. Viz. the abundance of good things, is the 
privilege of those reaching the goal, Acts ii. 47 ; Rom. viii. 24, 
21 : [comp. Ps. Ixxxiv. 12.] 

11. 2uva,mSa,vo/j,iv) The ffOi' occurs thrice in the compound verbs 
here : viz. with Christ : eum'!riSa,vofj,iv, in the sense of the preterite, 
having respect to them that hope for life. 

12. ' Trnf/^ivofiev, we endure) The present and something more 
significant, and reaching further than to die ; therefore also there 
is a further reward than life, viz. the kingdom. — e/' apvoufuSa, if 
we deny) with the mouth. If toe do not believe, viz. with the 
heart, follows in the next verse. The denial is put first, for 
it extinguishes the faith which had previously existed. — xj^xiTvog, 
He also) Christ. 

13. Tlierhs fisvsi, remains faithful) This expression, by corn- 
paring with it. He will deny, most sweetly affects beyond his 
2xpectation the faithful (believing) reader,^ who is not to be 
denied : He remains faithful to Himself, viz. towards [in rela- 
tion to] us, who are unHke Him. [It is therefore our own fault, 

' Comforts him by the implied promise coming in unexpectedly in the 
midst of threats.— Ed. 



300 2 TIMOTHY 11. 14, lo. 

if we fall away. — V. g.J Thus the subsequent axiom corre- 
sponds to it, He cannot deny, etc. So in Deut. vii. 9, 10, He is 
praised as the faithful God, i &ibg 6 merog, who both rewards the 
godly and takes vengeance on them that hate Him. — oi hwarai. 
He cannot) This impossibility is worthy of our praise: Jer. 
xliv. 22. 

14. TaDra) of these things, which thou hast heard of me, 
ver. 2. — !j'?ro/j,i/MV7)a7i.i, put in remembrance) them, over whom thou 
presidest; Tit. iii. 1. — huwov rou Kvpiov, before the Lord) Comp. 
1 Tim. V. 21, note [referring to the last judgment, but includ- 
ing also the present time]. — /iij Xoyofj^ayiTv) Logomachy here 
does not mean a battle about words, but a battle which is en- 
gaged in by words, ver. 23, 24, about the most important matters, 
ver. 17, 18- Comp. Acts xviii. 15. — ■j(jfr,giihot, useful) viz. h 
["which tends to nothing useful — to no profit" ^]. The accusative 
absolute, as in Luke xxiv. 47. 'SXixpnsTov, admirably useful 
["meei for the Master's ms«"], ver. 21, corresponds to it. — 
ivt, tending to, or resulting in) They are not only not profitable, 
but they are also injurious and subvert. 'E*/ expresses the con- 
sequence, as in 1 Thess. iv. 7, oix ew/ axadapalcf, not to unclean- 
ness. Subversion is opposed to edification. 

15. 'SvouSasov, be diligent [study'\) A word suited to the cha- 
racter of the whole epistle. — eiavThv, thyself) An antithesis to 
the work [ver. 21], of which workman is the conjugate. — boxifiov) 
approved unto God ; not reprobate unto every good work. Tit. 
i. 16, but having his work perfect, James i. 4. Hesychius : 
doxifiov, ^pfisi/iov, reXiiov. — ipydrriv avi'Traiayyvrov, a worktnan not 
ashamed) to whom thy own conscience can occasion no shame. 
The Scholiast quoted by Pricasus explains anirai6-j(^mrci^ by 
irappridiaZ^aiiivov ; comp. Phil. i. 20. 'O^^oro/ioDn-a follows, viz. one 
who will extend the word of truth among all others. — hphroiMvwa) 
Here many are of opinion that the idea of cutting is implied; 
but the Vulgate translates it, " recte tractantem," rightly treating 
or handling : an excellent rendering ; comp. LXX., Prov. iii. 6, 
xi. 5, opSorofi^en i&odg, the same as in Latin, secare viam, " to 
travel a road," to muke one's way.' Nor do xtvoTOfila, xepTo/ila, 

' Or, perhaps, Bengel construes it rather, " Which is useful for nothing," 
%pil(ji(t,ov si; ouih. — Ed. 

" In which the idea of cutting does not enter; so rtuutm iliii. — ^Ed. 



2 TIMOTHY n. 16. 301 

mean cutting in the literal sense (xiap, the heart is cut, meta- 
phorically, by xsprofi,lat), nor xaivoTO/jbiu, pv/iorofiita 'BuTOfios oZ/iOf. 
The literal meaning and force of the opSig is rather to be re- 
tained in ophTo/iovvTa : for in the passages quoted [where ophn/jjsTv 
is in the LXX.J we find the Hebrew word IB'^, and this form of 
the verb might have been expressed by the same Greek verb 
in 2 Chron. xxxii. 30, concerning a water-course, and Ps. cxix. 
128, concerning the Divine word itself. Therefore the meaning 
of Paul is, that Timothy may prepare a right course (may make 
ready a straight way) for the word of truth, and may himself 
walk straight forward according to this line, turning neither 
to the right nor to the left hand, teaching no other doctrine, 
1 Tim. i. 3 ; and in this view the antithesis of the word, will 
go forward,^ which presently occurs, ver. 16, is more clearly 
perceived. — rJn 7Jyov Trig aXriklag, the word of truth) The anti- 
thesis occurs presently after, xivoipuviag, of which the first part 
of the compound, signifying empty, is opposed to truth (akrihlag) ; 
the last part, involving vehemence of voice, is opposed to the 
temperate word (rhv Xoyov). 

16. Tag di) So ver. 21, 22, by Anaphora [The frequent repe- 
tition of words at beginnings. Append.]. Therefore profane 
vain babblings, which maintain great errors, differ from questions 
(1 Tim. vi. 4) about things not worth a straw ; the former are 
pernicious, the latter useless (unprofitable), Tit. iii. 9. — ■a-epifsraso) 
The same word, ibid. : in which -irspl elegantly means the same 
thing, as in 'jtipiymij^ai ; but •Kipiyhofjiai [I am over and above, I 
overcome, I get the better of another] denotes the act of separat- 
ing and overcoming ; 'repitara/jiai, the state. Timothy had never 
entangled himself; therefore Paul exhorts him to continued 
stedfastness : remain thou separate. — s'jrl irXitoi asijSilag) to a 
greater degree of ungodliness. So It/ "^rXeTov xaxlag 'xpojSa.hm, to 
advance more in vice. — Diodorus Siculus quoted by Pricseus. — 
r^ojco'^/ouff;, they shall go forward) namely, those who give utter- 
ance to such vain babblings. To this subject (' those') we also 
are to refer the word their, ver. 17. There is in it a Mimesis," 

' UpoK6-4,ovait/, Engl. Vers., "will increase." The metaphor is from 
pioneers clearing the way be/ore an army, by cutting down all obstacles : 
Tpo and xoVtid ; hence, to make progress, to advance. — Ed. 

• An allusion to the language which those seducers used. They no 



302 2 TIMOTHY II. 17-19. 

as afterwards in the phrase vowriv i^ii, will have pasture, will eat. 
These men think they are going forivard, in sacred things. The 
fiiture is used in its strict sense ; for it is a prediction, as in will 
have pasture (will eat) in the next verse ; comp. iii. 1. 

17. 'T/iivaiog, HyrnenoBus) who continued pertinacious ; comp. 
1 Tim. i. 20. — xa/ O/'Xjjros, and Philetus) who assented to 
Hymenseus. 

18. Tnv avdaragn, the resurrection) Perhaps these Ephesians 
had laid hold of a pretext taken from Paul's own Epistle to the 
Ephesians, Eph. ii. 6. Clemens Al. says, that the defamers of 
marriage interpreted the resurrection [wherein " they neither 
marry nor are given in marriage "], Luke xx. 35, concerning 
this life. \_So the hope of eternal life was taken away. — V. g.] — 
avaTpewoudi, subvert) The figure is derived from a foundation, a 
house ; see the following verses. 

19. 'O /jjivToi dTipihg ['nevertheless,' Engl. Vers.], indeed sure) 
The antithesis is, they subvert, ver. 18 : add by all means the 
note on 1 Tim. iii. 15. Indeed (/jbivroi) has its Apodosis in the 
6e, but, ver. 20. — h/j^eXiog roS Qeou, the foundation of God) Hebr. 
^P''J^, foundation, that is, the subject which is the point at issue 
(the matter in question) ; for example, in a contract [the subject- 
matter, which is the foundation on which the contract rests], as 
Sam. Petitus observes, Var. Lect. c. 10. The foundation of God, 
on which they who are His depend, so that they cannot be over- 
thrown, is the immoveable faithfulness of God. — lerrixiv, Iiath 
stood and stands) It is said to stand, for to remain unmoved as a 
sentence, a decree, is said to stand [to be fixed]. The word desist, 
presently occurring, corresponds to it ['A's-offr^jrw and isttitiiv are 
conjugates]. Paul expresses the meaning of D''pn to be firm, sure. 
— e(ppayTda, the seal) Sentences in former times were wont to be 
engraven on seals. — ravrriv, this) to which the whole remaining 
part of this verse is to be referred. — iym Kvpiog, the Lord knows) 
i'lriejuVTai xal liriyvia o Oeo; roiig ovrag aiiTou, xa/ roi); aylovg 
•apoeriyayiTo vphg iauTov, God has looked upon and knows them thai 
are His, and draws His saints near to Him, Num. xvi. 5. He 
knows His own in love, nor ceases to know them, but always 

doubt flattered themselves they were going forward {vpoKovTitu), and had 
spiritual pasturage or eating (i/oft^v 'i^ci). To this Paul replies by allusion, 
using the words in a bad sense. — Ed. 



2 TIMOTHY II. 20, 21. 303 

preserves them as His ; and that fact jni^ He will make known, 
ibid. — Kobl, and) Observe, says Petitus, according to Paul, that 
some vpords were written on both sides on the round surface of 
the seal ; for on the one face of the seal these words are read, 
the Lord knows, etc., but on the other, let him desist, etc. — 
airoSTijrtii dirJ ahmiag, let him desist from iniquity) Ibid., ver. 26 : 
avoe^l adjure a^J ruv exrimv ruiv avdpuiroi'j tuv exXripuv rouruiv, be 
separated from the tents of these wicked men. Paul uses the 
abstract, iniquity, for the concrete ; comp. ver. 21 (note), if a man 
by purging himself shall go forth from these ; and at the same time 
he has regard to that passage of Is. Hi. 11, AnosTHTE, etc., 
" Depart te, depart te, touch no unclean thing 
(AKA0APTOT) ; be ye clean that bear the vessels (SKETH) of 
the Lord." The Imperative, let him desist, pronounced in the 
name of God, implies power to depart; and also implies the 
blessedness of those who depart. — •s-Sj 6 ivo/idt^uv) every one that 
names the name of Christ, as his Lord : comp. Acts xix. 13, 
note. That is done by preaching, Jer. xx. 9, and by celebrating 
His name, Ps. xx. 7. — to ovo/aa,, the name) Concerning the name 
of the Lord, concerning the Lord knowing none save His own, 
concerning unrighteousness, comp. Matt. vii. 22, 23. 

20. MiyaXii], great) Such is the Church. — %pi/ira x.a,l apyvpa, of 
gold and of silver) of precious materials, hard, able to endure 
fire. — ^uXitia Tiai herpaKim, of wood and earth) of viler materials, 
fragile, and fearing the fire. — %al a fiAv — a, is) and the former in- 
deed, viz. those of gold, to honour ; but the latter, viz. those of 
wood, to quite a different purpose. Even the gold vessel may be 
applied to dishonourable purposes ; that of wood, to such as are 
honourable ; but that does not easily happen in a well regulated 
household. Members of the Church inferior in point of gifts and 
degrees of faith and sanctification are not vessels for dishonour, 
nor ought any one sxxaSaipen, to purge himself from these. 

21. 'Eav oh rig, if a man therefore) for example, Timothy. — 
hxa6dpjj IttUTiv a.'jrh toutuv) by purging himself, shall go forth from 
the number of these vessels, to dishonour. The active voice with 
the reciprocal pronoun indicates the utmost freedom of power on 
the part of believers. — riyiaa/ihov, sanctified) The pecuhar pro- 
perty of God, and entirely devoted to Him. — xul, and) elg Ti//,fi^ 
iiToi/iae/iivov, for honour prepared, forms four clauses ; oi 



304 2 TIMOTHY U. 22-34. 

which the first is explained by the second, the third by the fourth. 
Therefore and connects these two pairs. Comp. iii. 17, apnui — 
sgji/T/ff/iEi'of. — Tip itsitorri, truly-sei'viceable to the Master^ viz. God, 
whose house Paul in his epistles to Timothy calls the church. — 
?r5v 'ipyov ayaShv, every good work) ch. iii. 17; Tit. i. 16. 

22. Niurspixag, youthful) in which young men indulge; 1 
John ii. 16, note ; and which are hurtful to the 'purity of heart, 
spoken of presently in this ver. and ver. 21. Paul had formerly 
warned Timothy against old wiveS fables and against the drink- 
ing of water, 1 Tim. iv. 7, v. 23 : now he warns him against 
the other extreme, youthful lusts. — Sixaitei/vriv, righteousness) 
This is put in the first place, in opposition to iniquity, ver. 19. 
— /lira, with) Construed with peace. ^ Zeal for party, where that 
party is holy, is holy zeal ; Rom. xii, 9 ; 3 John 11. — t£< 
iirinaXouiiimv, them that call upon) Comp. note on ver. 19 {Every 
one that nameth, etc.). Acts ix. 14. — tov Kupiov, the Lord) Christ. 
— xaSapag, pure) ver. 21, ixxaSdpp. Liists are hostile to this 
purity ; its attendants are righteousness, faith, love, peace. 

23. Mcapag xai a-jraiSiiiroug, foolish and unlearned) For thou 
oughtest •jTaihxiiiv, to instruct, ver. 25, and to be wise, iii. 15 ; 
comp. foolish, Tit. iii. 9. — /iax"?; strifes) Ibidem. 

24. Ou hi7 ii,a,yje^a.i, ought not to strive) ought not to be a bitter 
controversialist. — ri-riov, bibaxnxhr ave^lxaxov, 'jrcii&iuovru, mild, apt 
to teach : patient, instructing) A Chiasmus. In respect of all, 
the servant of the Lord ought to be mild, so he will be apt to 
teach : in respect of adversaries, he should be patient, so he will 
be able to instruct." He ought neither to attack, nor resist : he 
ought to be mild, lest he should be the occasion of evils : and 
patient, so that he may endure evils. — bihaxnxh, teaching) i.e. apt 
to teach. This implies not only solidity and ease in teaching, 
but even especially patience and assiduity. For we must 
aiiTS'xisda.i, hold fast, Tit. i. 9, note, and that too with gentle- 
ness, James iii. (17), and perseverance. Acts xx. 31, in all long- 
suffering and doctrine, below, ch. iv. 2. — an^ixaxov) enduring 

' " Peace with them who call on the Lord." Not as Engl. Vers., putting 
a comma after peace; i.e. "Along with them who call, etc., follow peace." 
— Ed. 

2 A/Saraia implies teaching, imparting knowledge. Ilutliva implies 
training, disciplining, tuioving. — Ed. 



2 TIMOTHY U. 25, 26. 305 

evils. There is sometimes need of zeal, always of gentle- 
ness. 

25. M^oTs) fin interrogative : with this expectation, if at any 
time, etc. — iui auroTg 6 0dg, God may give to them) For it does not 
belong to human power. A motive for patience. [He who 
attempts to use violence, so much the less accomplishes aught: 
nor, yet, should he give way to sluggishness. — V. g.] — (LtTamav, 
repentance) This is antecedent to knowledge or acknowledgment. — 
£/'5, to or for) So s/'s in the following verse. 

26. Ka/) and so. — &\avri-\iMti) This depends on if at any tim£i 
if they may awake, and shake off sleep. — ix tth — -jcayiboi, from 
the snare) There are here two evils, captivity and sleep ; and there 
are two good things, awaking and deliverance. An abbreviated 
expression. — l^oiypri/jLivoi) Luke v. 10 ; taken captive willingly. — - 
W auT-oD, by him^) by the servant of the Lord, Where God 
goes before, ver. 25, the work of His servant (ver. 24) is suc- 
cessful. God rouses : His servant draws them out of the snare. 
— £/V rJ) Construed with, if at any time they may awake. 'Ex 
marks the terminus from which they set out, £/'s that to which 
they are to go. The former terminus is, oppose themselves, 
ver. 25, and the snare of the devil, ver. 26 : the latter is the 
acknowledgment of the truth and the will of God. — Himv, of Hirr?) 
God.—6£Xri//,a, will) which is entirely free, and gives freedom ; 
1 Pet. iv. 2. The opposite is, from the snare. Paul himself was 
awakened to conversion, so that he might " know the will of 
God ;" Acts xxii. 14. 

1 Not, by the devil, as in the Engl. Vers. They are taien so as to be 
taved alive, as t^aypnfiiiioi literally means. So our Lord uses the same 
word, and of the same thing, to Peter, Luke v. 10. — Ed. 

2 'Eȣ/i/(iy being evidently distinct from ainov ; the latter referring to 
the servant of God, the former to Ood. Not as Engl. Vers., both referring 
to the devil. — Ed. 



VOL IV. 



306 a TIMOTHY III. 1-6. 



CHAPTEK III. 

1. TouTo Se yhunxi, hut know this) The apostle's statement is 
quite distinct, 1 Tim. iv. 1. — h kxarais iifiipaig, in the last days) 
which had at that time begun to be, ver. 5, at the end. A 
similar expression is found at 2 Pet. iii. 3 ; Jude ver. IS.—her^- 
eovrai) shall come unexpectedly. The future, in respect of pro- 
phecies that had gone before. — -/.aipoi yaXinra), perilous times) 
■when it will be difficult to discover what should be done, 

2. "'Egovrai o'l avSpavoi, men shall be) Such shall be of higher 
rank and of greater number in the Church than ever formerly : 
ver. 5. They shall be worse even than those who had abused the 
light of nature alone, Eom. i. 29, etc. : where we explain many 
things in the notes, which are here repeated. — (plXauroi, lovers of 
their own selves) The first root of evU. — piXdpyvpoi, lovers of 
money) The second root. — yoviugiv ainihTg, disobedient to parents) 
The character of the times is to be gathered even especially Irom 
the manners of the young. — a^dpHToi, ungrateful) The obhga- 
tion of a grateful mind is next to that of filial duty. 

3. 'AxpariTg, avfifiipoi, incontinent, fierce) at once both soft; 
(yielding as to self-indulgence) and hard. — a,<piXd'ya6oi, luxters of 
those that are good) Its contrary is a lover of good, Tit. i. 7, note 3. 

4. npomreTg) rash, those who are headstrong [Engl. Vers. 
heady'\ in acting, etc. — Tirv^ca/ji,evoi, [highr-mindedl^ puffed up) 
1 Tim. vi. 4, note ; as if a person should be so suffocated with 
smoke {ri^oi), that he has no longer power over his mind. Such 
is the condition to which pride brings men. — (piX^Sovoi, lovers of 
pleasure) An epithet of the Epicureans. Pleasure destroys the 
love and sense of God. Such are our Epicureans. 

5. MopfMiv) the outward appearance, not without some inter- 
nal rudiment of godliness. — d.'jroTps'Trov) Tpmirai is said of one 
who, when he is forced, flees : arrorpi-xirai, of one who amyupif, 
withdraws, and spontaneously shuns any one. — Eustath. 

6. 'Ex Toiirm, of these) See the preceding verse, these (suclt). 



2 TIMOTHY III. 7-10. 307 

The expression is clearly demonstrative. — o/ hdlmTic, they who 
creep in) privately. — ymamapia) silly women, who are presently 
described as like those (in ver. 5). — £mSv/ji.loi.ig mxlXais, with 
various or divers lusts) of the mind and of the flesh : iv. 3. Even 
this variety is a source of delight. 

7. Ma,v6<imTa, learning) fop the indulgence of curiosity. — 
firihhroTi, never) Whence they are easily led captive, ver. 6. 

8. 'lavvrti nal 'lafi^prig, Jannes and Jamhres) Euseb., i. 9, 
Rrsep. Evang., quotes the following passage from Numemius : 
" Jannes and Jambres, understood to be Egyptian sacred scribes 
(kpoypoi/jb/iaTsTg, a lower order of priests in Egypt), men of no 
small skill in magical operations, at the time when the Jews 
were driven out of the land of Egypt," etc. Jannes and Jambres 
were names very well known in Paul's time ; for they were very 
often mentioned in the ancient books of the Hebrews, as two of 
the principal magicians among the Egyptians. The very acute 
HUlerus, according to the Abyssinian language, interprets 
Jannes, a jester or trickster, and Jambres, a juggler ; for he is of 
opinion, that the appellatives were changed into proper names 
in the lapse of time. — Onom. S., p. 671, 843. Certainly, if 
they were entirely proper names, we may believe that they were 
formerly /ilffa (terms' intermediate between appellatives and 
proper names), which indicated the profession of the art itself 
(as well as the person) ; comp. Acts xiii. 8. — avri<sTn«a,\i Mwo-jj, 
withstood Moses) by rivalling to some extent his wonders. — 
MlgravTai, resist) The opposite is, shall suffer persecution, 
ver. 12. — aSoKi/ji.oi) reprobate, having no power to approve : comp. 
Eom. i. 28. 

9. Oi <itpox6-^oueiv Iml •irXfTov, they shall proceed no further) not 
so as to seduce others, although they themselves, and those hke 
them, shall proceed (•!rpox6'^ouffiv) to worse and worse, ver. 13. 
Often malice proceeds deeper down when it cannot extend 
itself.— avo;a, folly) though they may think themselves wise. — 
h&riXo;) brought from (ix.) concealment into open day. — ^ ixilmv, 
theirs) Ex. vii. 12, viii. 18, ix. 11. A very severe punishment 
is denoted by the moderate expression, used by the apostle in 
reference to a well-known fact. 

10. 2u di, but thou) An antithesis : so again after new descrip- 
tions of evils, ver. 14, ch. iv. 5. — vafnxoXovSnxas, thou hast foU 



308 2 TIMOTHY III. 11, 12, 

lowed out) \_fully followed up, traced out and known]. Timothy 
became the companion of Paul after the persecutions mentioned 
in this place, Acts xiii. 50, xiv. .5, 19, xvi. 3. This is therefore 
a well chosen word to employ here, as in Luke i. 3. So An- 
tiochus concerning his son : " I am persuaded that he, under- 
standing my mind {irapaxoXouhuvra, following up my mode of 
thinking) ; 2 Mace. ix. 27. — tji aywyri) ayuyri, mode of life, Fr. 
conduite. — rp vpoSegei, purpose) His purpose for the future follows 
close after his (present) mode of life ; comp. Acts xi. 23, note ; 
and long-suffering follows close after faith, as in Heb. vi. 12 : 
patience follows close after love, as in 2 Thess. iii. 5. 

11. 'Ev ' Avnoy^ela, h 'Ixovtu), b AvgTpm:, at Antioch, Iconium, 
Lystra) Acts xiii. 14, 51, xiv. 6. — oJa) ohg shows the weighti- 
ness of the matter in hand : 1 Mace. v. 56, " he heard the valiant 
and warlike deeds, oTa i-xoirieav, how great were the acts which they 
did'' — ohug Siuyfjiovg, how great persecutions) The noun repeated 
after the interposition of another adds perspicuity and weight 
to what is said. Aiuy/j-h; and <!rd6r}/x,a are species and genus : 
persecution is properly, when they drive a man fi-om one city 
to another, or when they attempt to apprehend him in his 
flight ; but suffering is any calamity in general, for example, 
when Paul was stoned, etc. — u'lr^nyxa, I endured) The mark of 
an apostle. — Ippuearo, delivered) Another mark, to be miraculously 
preserved ; Ps. xxxiv. (xxxiii.) 17, Ix 'iraaSiv ruv flX/'-vj/ewi' auruv 
eppusaTo aiiTovg, He delivered them out of all their afflictions. — 
Klipiog, the Lord) Christ. 

12. Kal vdvTig de, yea and all) all, and they alone. The 
third mark, to have persecutors ; so far should persecution be 
from being a stumbling-block to any one. At the beginning 
of persecution, it does not yet appear that that is the mark of 
an apostle : it at length appears from the help that is afforded, 
and from the endurance of them. In this, however, is the third 
mark of an apostle : viro/iovfi, patience, is a great thing in the 
eyes of the apostle ; he prefers it to all the others. All other 
things may be taken from a man, so that he may suffer their 
utter loss and he himself fall away ; but when he has w/iovrt, 
all things are preserved. Hence Timothy might at the same 
time gather that he would also suffer persecution. There is 
a similar transition from Paul to all godly men, ch. iv. 8. — 



2 TIMOTHY III, 13-15. 309 

M 6iXcvT£s, tJiose wishing or willing) Consider therefore whether 
you are willing ; comp. the word wishing (intending), Luke 
xiv. 28. Even a persevering will has a beginning. — luge^Sis 
^^k) to live godly ; the whole energy of their life being devoted 
to Christian piety, Phil. i. 21. — ^jjv, to live) to pass life, Gal. 
ii. 14. — Iv XpiSTi/j, in Christ) There is no godliness out of Christ 
Jesus. [And indeed the world easily wears tJiat mask of religion 
which depends on itself; but the piety which flourishes directly 
from Jesus Christ is very hateful, as it was to the old Jews, so 
to the modern Christians, who are without any token of good. — 
V. g.] — diiii^6^(!ovTa,i, shall suffer persecution) Nor will they 
indeed refuse it, Gal. v. 11. They shall proceed to worse and 
worse, ver. 13, stands in opposition to this future. 

13. xiovripol, evil men) The antithesis is godly, ver. 12. These 
are «Xa,vui//,ivoi, with a middle signification, who permit themselves 
to be seduced. — yo'jjres) seducers, enchanters, like those of Egypt, 
ver. 8. These are irXavuvng, seducers. — Trpoxo-vJ/ouir/v, shall pro- 
ceed to) so that no one will persecute them, but they will per- 
secute the godly. — vXavSivrt; xal 'jr'kavu/itiioi, deceiving and being 
deceived) He who has once begun to deceive others, is the less 
easily able to recover himself from error, and the more easily 
embraces in turn the errors of others. 

14. 20 de, but thou) "Whatever they may do. He takes up 
again what he began to say at ver. 10. — emeruiiris) -riarota, I 
make sure a thing on the mind : h oT; iirieriiSrig, in which thou 
hast been rendered msrhg, faithful and firm (thou hast been 
assured) [out of the Scripture, ver. 15. — V. g.] Comp. LXX., 
Ps. Ixxviii. 8, 37, where "xierougSai corresponds to psa. — liSiig — 
xal Sti oJSag, knowing — and because thou hast known) A. double 
-Etiology [assigning of a reason ; see Append.], of which the 
first part is to be referred to in those things which thou hast 
learned, the second to thou hast been rendered faithful (assured). 
A similar construction, ha — xal Sti, occurs, John ii. 24, 25 : 
also imyvoiig — xal Sti, Acts xxii. 29. — irapa rmg, from whom) 
irom Paul, an approved teacher, ver. 10, 11. 

15. Kal, and) Even after the death of Paul, Timothy is the 
more bound to the Scripture. Paul does not bind Timothy to 
himself alone, but enjoins him who, however grown up, was 
his son in the faith, to use the Scriptures. They ought to 



310 2 TIMOTHY III. 16, 17. 

consider this, who are so devoted to their teachers, under whose 
training they have been once for all brought up, that they 
admit nothing beyond their circle which is afterwards presented 
to them from Scripture. Sometimes slothful over-falness 
of the mind and auSdhm, self-complacency, creep over men 
under the name of stedfastness (steadiness) and sobriety. — airh 
^p's(fio\ig, from childhood [a child]) Tender age is best adapted for 
■!TieTo\Je6ai, being made faithful (assured), so that faith may be 
impressed upon it, diflfusing firmness throughout the whole life. 
— TO, iep& ypd/Lfjiara, the sacred Scriptures) the books of Moses 
and the prophets. For these existed when Timothy was a 
child. — oTSag, thou hast known) by the instructions of thy mother, 
ch. i. 5. — ra duvd//,iva, which were able) The force of a preterite 
redounds from thou hast hnown, to the participle. This ability 
(of Scripture) expresses (its) suffciency and perfection. — as, thee) 
in such a way as if they were written for thee alone. — eofkat, 
to make wise) A grand expression. The antithesis is avoia, folly, 
ver. 9. — ih eciTriplav, to safoafiow) thy own and that of others. — Sia, 
•jrlerstag, through faith) He who does not believe, does not receive 
wisdom and salvation. Through is construed with salvation. 

16. nSffa ypa(pri, all Scripture) The sacred Scripture, in all 
its parts. All the latest epistles of Paul as much as possible 
recommend the Scripture. — howeugTog, given by inspiration o 
God) This is a part, not of the subject (for what Scriptiire or 
class of writings [as Scripture means] Paul intends, is evident 
in itself, as elsewhere, so in this passage), but of the predicate. 
It was divinely inspired, not merely while it was written, God 
breathing through the writers ; but also, whilst it is being read, 
God breathing through the Scripture, and the Scripture breath- 
ing Him [He being their very breath]. Hence it is so profitable. 
— -Trphg didaaxaXlav, for doctrine) Doctrine instructs the ignorant ; 
reproof convinces also those who are labouring under error and 
under prejudice ; correction recalls a man from wrong (obliquity) 
to right (rectitude) : training [' eruditio,' Engl. Vers, instruction] 
in righteousness positively instructs ; ch. ii. 24 ; Sir. xviii. 13. 

17. " Apriog fi, may be perfect) in his duty. — 6 roD ©eou HvSpuirog, 
the man of God) 1 Tim. vi. 11, note. — vpbg i:a,v, for every good 
work) These kinds of such works are enumerated, ver. 16. 
For the man of God ought to teach, reprove, correct, train or 



311 



instruct; comp. iv, 2. — s^ijpri(f//,iiiog, thoroughly fitted or perfected 
IfurnishedJ) by Scripture. He ought l^ofTiligiai, to be tho- 
roughly perfected, then he will be apnoi, perfect. To become and 
to be differ. 



CHAPTER IV. 



1. Ouv, therefore) This is deduced from the whole of ch. iii. — 
lyii, I) whom thou hast known, ch. iii. 14. — ^wvras %a) vixpovg, 
the living and the dead) Paul's death was at hand, while Timothy- 
was to survive. — xara) then when He shall appear ; xarA refers 
to time, Heb. i. 10 [Kkt' apy^a,g\. — iiripdviiav) imfidviia, xal 
SagiKila is a Hendiadys : s'ZKpama is the revelation and rise of the 
kingdom, 1 Tim. vi. 14, 15. 

2. ' KvigrtiSi) be instant, he VLTgent. — tuxalpcog, a,xa!pcag) Pricseixs 
understands the word as it were proverbially, for assiduously, or 
at every time ; and brings in support of his view the examples 
which foUow : — Nicetus Choniates : itailaymySi If/^^pihT kinoig, 
i\i%aipcai &%a'ip(ai air'mTKrtTTn, " like a severe schoolmaster, he was 
always beating, in and out of season." Such is that expression 
of the Tragic writer Seneca : Incipe quicquid potes, Medea, quic- 
quid non potes, " Medea, attempt whatsoever thou canst do and 
whatsoever thou canst not do ;" i.e. anything whatever. Of 
Plautus : qui comedit quod fuit, quod non fuit, " one who eats up 
what there was, what there was not ;" i.e. who devours every- 
thing. Of Terence : cum milite isto prcesens absens ut sies, 
"that whether present or absent, thou mayest be with that 
soldier." Of Catullus : ffoc facias, sive id non pote, sive potest, 
" Do this, whether it be impossible or possible ;" i.e. it must be 
done. Of Julian : iTo^sisro I*/ rcks tZv plXuiv oixlccg ax'krjroi, 
xixXri/j^mg, hiaXKdesuv nvg olxiiOTarovg aX^^Xo/s, " he went to the 
houses of his friends, whether invited or not, reconciling those 
most nearly related to one another." Of Aristophanes : dixaiai; 
xal &bixug, "justly and unjustly," where the Scholia say, " for in 
every way." Of Virgil : digna, indigna pati, " to suffer things, 
worthy and unworthy ;" where Servius says, it i^ a proverbial 



312 2 TIMOTHY IV. 3-7. 

expression for all things. Of Terence : justa injusta, "things 
just or unjust ;" where Donatus says, expressions of this kind are 
proverbial — ^^fanda nefanda" right or wrong ; " digna indigna," 
worthy or unworthy. Pricseus has collected these examples, and 
more, all of which do not rest on the same footing as the example 
in the text. This is the meaning of the apostle : Be instant at 
ordinary and proper times, and beyond these, whether it be con- 
venient for thyself and thy hearers or not, night and day ; Acts 
XX. 31. — iXsyS,ov, J«r//i>iffov, reprove, rebuke) The want of the con- 
junction is here appropriate. All these things do no violence to 
long-suffering [ch. iii. 10, ii. 24, 25], but require it. — didaxri, in 
doctrine) ch. ii. 24, note. 

3. "Esrai) will be, and now is, ch. iii. 1. — didaexaXiag, doctrine) 
The concrete follows, teachers. He who despises sound doctrine, 
leaves sound teachers ; they seek instructors Kke themselves.' — 
imSv/j.lag) carnal lusts, in the indulgence of which they are un- 
willingly interrupted by true teachers, and the seasoning of which 
they seek in the sweetness of softer (laxer) doctrine. — i-nnsupiit- 
tsaxxsi, they shall heap up) A weighty compound, denoting abun- 
dance. Variety delights those who have itching ears. 

4. T)ii/ aKo^v, their hearing) The ear of man does not brook 
teachers who are opposed to the lusts of the heart. 

5. N?^£ h -jtaisi, watch in all things) in all circumstances, so as 
never to fall asleep. So vipi ntawa. Tit. ii. 7. — s^/ov, the work) 
1 Tim. iii. 1. — mineov, do) The journey to Paul is chiefly included. 
— ibayyikiaraujof anevangelist) A magnificent term. — itXripopoptieov, 
fulfl) by resisting those (followers of their own lusts), and com- 
ing to me. The same word occurs, ver. 17. 

6. 'Eyu yap, for T) A cause which should influence Timothy 
to the discharge of his duty, — the departure and final blessedness 
of Paul. The end crowns the work. — ij&ri, now by this time) As 
the time was indicated to Peter, 2 Pet. i. 14, so also to Paul. — 
dTsvSof/.ai, I am poured out as a libation [I am ready to beoferedj) 
Phil. ii. 1 7, note [His converts were the sacrifice or offering, he 
the minister ofiiciating ; and his blood the libation to be poured on 
the sacrifice]. — dva'Adeius, of my departure) Ibid., ch. i. 23, note. 

7. Thv ayZm xaXhv) thai good fight. Comp. 1 Tim. vi. 12, 

' " Similes labra lactucas quserunt." Our proverb is, " like teacher, 
like pupil," or " like priest, like people."— Tft. 



2 TIMOTHY IT. 8, 9, 313 

note. — rri> irloTiv, the faith) The real thing, twice expressed by 
metaphor, is now in this the third instance expressed without a 
figure. — rerfiprixct, I have kept) to the end, Rev. ii. 10. 

8. Aoirhv, Henceforth) How dehghtful is this particle! — the 
decisive moment. Paul, in accordance with the actual moment 
of his departure, looks to his three states: 1. the past, I have 
fought ; 2. the immediately present, there is laid up ; 3. the future, 
the Lord shall give. — a'^roxsirai, there is laid up) after all hard- 
ship and danger have been for ever overcome. — dixamlivris) of 
righteousness, for which I have contended. The righteous refers 
to this. — (STe<pavo;, a crown) The crown used to be bestowed after 
wrestling, running, fighting. — amdiigei, will award) The word 
righteous accords with this, 2 Thess. i. 6, 7. — oKu^.of, the Lord) 
Christ. Of whom also, ver. 1, 14, 17, 18, 22, speak. — b sxihri 
rjj ri/iiipcf, in that day) Whether or not Paul knew of the first re- 
surrection, and claimed any such thing for himself, I do not know. 
That day is the last — the day of the universal judgment. A 
great part of the glory will then, and not till then, be added to 
the elect, 2 Cor. v. 10 ; a passage which ought to be understood 
universally. There is nothing to prevent the partakers of the 
first resurrection from receiving a crown also at the last day, and 
from obtaining in that general assembly of all men an entirely 
new award of praise. The number of the brethren, Matt. xxv. 
40, will be far less than that of the others who conferred benefits 
upon them. Therefore the favourable sentence passed upon 
those 'brethren' is taken for granted as already awarded.* — 
i/io/, to me) Individual application. — 'K&gi, to all) This is a great 
additional source of joy to Paul ; it is calculated to sharpen 
Timothy. Paul had gained many of these. — ^yairrixoffi, who love 
and have loved) This has a higher signification in the preterite, 
than ayu'irrieag, ver. 10 ; where see a mournful antithesis. This 
desire of the appearing of the Lord presupposes in the individuals 
the whole state of sincere Christianity, especially faith. A 

. Metonymy of the consequent for the antecedent. — kitKpdnia.v, His 
appearance) viz. the first and the second. 

9. 2*ou3a(rov, do thy diligence) This word is repeated, ver. 21. 
—l\kn irp6g /ii, to come to me) That which Paul handled hitherto 

' The ' brethren ' are supposed as already having had glory awarded to 
them, and as sitting beside the Judge as His assessors in judgment — Ed. 



814 2 TIMOTHY IV. 10-13. 

somewhat covertly, he at length, in the epilogue of the epstle, 
states openly, ver. 21. Timothy was both about to be a comfort 
to Paul the martyr, and about to be strengthened by him, and 
afterwards was about to carry on the work of the Gospel, perhaps, 
for some little time at Rome. He is reported to have become 
a martyr at Ephesus. 

10. ' E/'s OsseaXovlxriv) The Scholiast M.S. in the Medic. Library, 
x.al exit (at Thessalonicd) hfiu; elduiXm yevo/isvog, " and {Demas) 
hecame there (at Thessalonica) an idolatrous priest ;" of which I 
have read nowhere else : Pricseus. — TaXarlav, Galatia) This read- 
ing seems to have crept in here 'owing to the rhythm it forms to 
AaXfioiTlav. Adequate authorities have TaXXlav;^ and some who 
retain TaXarlav, refer it to Western or European Galatia, i.e. 
Gaul. See Pregizeri Suevia Sacra, page 499, seq. ex P. de 
Marca. — T/ros, Titus) He therefore departed from Crete, after 
the affairs of the churches were " set in order" there, Tit. i. 5. 
These persons had either attended or visited Paul. 

11. AouKoig, Luke) Luke has not brought down the history of 
the Acts of the Apostles to this period. — /iovos, alone) He is 
speaking of his companions ; for he had many other friends pre- 
sent : ver. 21. — suxpriarog, profitable) more than formerly. Acts 
xiii. 13, XV. 38 : comp. Philem. 11. Demas apostatizes: Mark 
recovers himself: but he (viz. Mark), who had gone away in the 
case of an easier undertaking, ought now to be present in a time 
of more serious difficulties. 

12. Tux'ii'iy, Tychicus) whom Timothy might set over the 
Church [in his own absence when going to Paul] ; but Paul 
leaves this to himself [without even suggesting that he should do 
so] : comp. Tit. iii. 12. 

13. Th cpaiXiiin^, the cloak) Some take it for a book-case ; but 
it would not be called a case apart from the books. — aviXmov, I 
left) The cloak, perhaps, when they first laid violent hands on 
Paul, might have been taken from him at Rome, if he had 
brought it with him. Now when Timothy is desired to bring 

^ ydpffor) Paul is almost left alone. — ^V. g. 

2 Hence the margin of the 2d Ed. raises the reading Va.'KXiix.v, formerly 
marked e, to y, and the Germ. Vers, has entirely adopted it. — E. B. 

KT){A)Qfg Vulg., Iren., and Rec. Text, read T(x>,arla.ii. C is the only 
very old MS. which supports Vah>.ioi.« : so Epiphanius and Jerome. — Ed. 



a TIMOTHY IV. H-17. 315 

it, personal security is not obscurely promised to him. — -jrapo!. 
Kapvui, with Carpus) The man must have been very faithful, to 
whom the apostle would entrust this most precious deposit. 

14. 'Evedsi^an, exhibited towards or occasioned me [did me]) 
at Ephesus, or even at Rome. — Avoduiri, reward) The apostle 
knew that he would not be unavenged ; he therefore [does not 
hereby indulge in revenge, but] expresses his acquiescence in 
the judgment of the Lord. — Xiav, greatly) Therefore he will not 
discontinue. — fi/Lsrepoig, our) Believers have a common cause and 
interest : and Timothy already at that time was the companion 
of Paul. This adversary was there, where/ Timothy was, and 
where Paul had been, viz. at Ephesus, and Timothy must there- 
fore be on his guard against him. 

16. UpuTp, in the first) (defence). It was now therefore the 
second ; and at it he wishes Timothy to be present with him, 
and is confident that the Lord will stand by him, that he may 
overcome. — svf/.'Tra.pi'yheTo) The eiiv indicates that they were in no 
great danger. — liyxariXmov, forsook) from fear. — //j'^ aiiroTg Xoyia- 
kiri, may it not be laid to their charge) The greatness of the sin 
is hereby implied, as well as the wish of Paul : the axiroTg, to 
them (to their charge), as being put before the verb, intimates, 
that it will be laid to the charge of those who had deterred the 
godly fi-om standing by him.' 

17. '0 Ss Kvpiog, but the Lord) the more on this account. — 
vapigrrj, stood by me) This is more than vapayineSai, to be pre- 
sent. — hiSutd/iiijee, strengthened me) The opposite is, forsook. — 
ha bi e/iou, that by me) One single occasion is often of the 
greatest moment. — •jrdvra tA shri, all the Gentiles) of whom Rome 
was the capital. — eppusSrjv sx ero/jjarog XiovTog, I was delivered out 
of the mouth of the lion) Ps. xxii. 22, aueov [le Ix, trro/iaros "Kiovng. 
We may suppose that Paul had seen a vision under the form of 
a lion. The Hon signifies either Nero, or some one who threat- 
ened danger. It is at all events a figurative expression ; for he 
would have said, from the mouth of the lions, if he intended 

' Ha.ntf, all) Lamentable to hear. — V. g. 

' That is to say, the osi™? is emphatic, being put first, « May it not be 
laid to their charge," to the charge of the godly who were intimidated : im- 
plying, that will be sure to be laid to the charge of those who intimidated 
them Ed. 



SIC 2 TIMOTHY IV. 18-22. 

beasts without a figure. / was delivered, he says, not He de- 
livered me, because, that the Lord Itad done it, was not out- 
wardly apparent. 

18. Ka;, and) Hope draws its conclusions from the past to the 
future. — pUiTui //,!, shall deliver me) Paul understands (views) all 
things on the side of salvation. Does he live ? He has been 
delivered. Shall he be beheaded ? He will be dehvered ; the 
Lord being his deliverer. — 'ipyou irovnpou) The antithesis is aCroD, 
His. — xal, and) A sweet conjunction. He is the Lord, and the 
Deliverer, 1 Thess. i. 10 ; and Saviour, Phil. iii. 20. He takes 
away evil. He confers good things. — ediau, will preserve) This 
word was in Paul's mind from the Psalm quoted above. — ^aaiXdav, 
kingdom) better than that of Nero. — ^ n bd^u,, to whom he the 
glory) The very hope produces a doxology : how much greater 
will be the doxology, which the actual enjoyment will produce ! 

20. "'Epa.dTog — Tp6<pi/Mov, Erastus — Trophimus) The reason 
why these do not send salutations, is by implication indicated. — 
'ifiiinv, remained) while I was prosecuting my. journey. The 
second imprisonment of Paul was not long ; for he wrote these 
things a short time after his journey, a little before his death. — 
iv KophSiji, at Corinth) his native country, Eom. xvi. 23. — 'sV 
MiXriTu, at Miletus) Miletus was near Ephesus. Whether 
Timothy knew of the sickness of Trophimus or was ignorant of 
it, still Paul might have mentioned it. And perhaps Trophimus 
accompanied Timothy afterwards to Rome. The Scholiast on 
this passage in Pricseus says : " Trophimus, Aristarchus, and 
Pudens, after they had suffered severely with the apostle in the 
persecutions, were at last beheaded along with him." 

21. Uph ■/iiiJiuvoi;, before winter) In former times, during the 
actual winter, there was almost no sailing ; and the martyrdom 
of Paul was at hand. — iXhTv, to come) He is invited by the men- 
tion of Euhulus, etc., who were with Paul, and were notwithstand- 
ing aUve [therefore Timothy need not be afraid of his Ufe in 
coming]. — x-al Ahos, and Linus) He is put third in order; he was 
not yet a bishop. 

22. Ms^' u/jlSiv) with you, ver. 19. 

' ' Kvi'Kmw, Ileft) Therefore Paul had returned from Asia to Rome not 
very long before. — V. g. 



ON THE 



EPISTLE TO TITUS 



CHAPTEE I. 

1—3. UavXo(, Paul) A title suitable to the character of Paul, 
and to the office of Titus. — xarA, according to) Comp. xar^, ver. 
4, 9 ; 2 Tim. i. 1, note. It is the duty of an apostle to propa- 
gate the faith, Horn. i. 5. — vlanv, faith) faith — hope are the sum 
of Christianity ; and these things Titus ought to regard in all 
his teaching, and avoid everything else ; comp. 1 Tim. i. 5, iii. 
15, 16, iv. 1, 3, 10. — ixXixTiiv 0SOV, the elect of God) for whose 
sake we ought to do and endure all things, 2 Tim. ii. 10. The 
elect were from among Jews and Gentiles ; and their faith was 
common, ver. 4 ; 2 Pet. i. 1 : of the former was Paul ; of the 
latter, Titus. 

2. 'Ekvldi ^iiiijs aioi/iov, in the hope of eternal life) ch. iii. 7. 
Hope has reference to the promise. — n^, which) life. — a-^tv&rn, 
who cannot lie) The foundation of our confidence- — '^ph yj^mw 
aijivtm, before eternal ages, before the world began) The pro- 
mise of eternal Hfe is already contained in the appellation, the 
God of Abraham, etc. [Luke xx. 37]. There is here implied 
an explicit promise to men. See Gen. iii., etc. The xP'""' 
aluvioi followed the creation and the fall. 

3. KjoupoT;) %pow)/ were longer than these. 

4. Koivfiv, common) Otherwise Titus, who was bom of Gentile 
parents, would fall short of it. 



318 TITCS I. 5, 6. 

5. Toirou ya-?"-) /<"" *^"* cause) The divisions of the epistle 
are four. 

I. The Inscription, i. 1, 2. 

II. The Instructions given to Titus, to this effect : 

1 ) Ordain good presbyters, 5, 6. 

2) Such are needful among the wicked Cretans, 10, 11. 

3) Rebuke them sharply and admonish them, 13, 14. 

4) Teach old men and women, and young men, showing 

thyself an example of good works, ch. ii. 1, 2 ; and 
also teach servants, ver. 9, 10 ; where an excellent 
motive fixira the very marrow of the Gospel is intro- 
duced, 11-14, 15. 

5) Admonish them to obey magistrates, and to show 

gentleness to all men ; wherein the same motive is 
repeated, iii. 1-7. 

6) Good works should be performed, foolish questions 

avoided ; one that is a heretic should vrithout hesi- 
tation be left to himself, 8-11. 

III. An Invitation to Titus to come to NicopoUs ; and an 

admonition to attend to some necessary directions, 
12, 13. 

IV. Conclusion, 15. 

' — ra. XuvovTo,, the things that are wanting) the things which I 
could not accompHsh when I was there, in consequence of the 
shortness of my time. — imdiopSweri) Paul biopSuearo (set in order), 
Titus smdiopSourai (completes the setting in order). — ois, as) Paul 
had stated the qualifications which the presbyters ought to 
have ; he now repeats them. 

6. tiistA, faithful) For he who could not bring his children to 
the faith, how shall he bring others ?— <iffwr/as, of luxury, of not) 
which would be wrongfully supported at the expense of the 

^ '^'E. Kp^r„, in Crete) which is now called Candia, a populous island.- 



TITUS I. 7-9. 3!9 

7. 'Xlf &10U oixovoficiv, as the steward of God) The greater that 
the Master is, the greater virtues should be in His servant. 
Paul calls the ministers of the Gospel the stewards of God, 1 Cor. 
iv. 1, note. The power, therefore, of a bishop is indeed cir- 
cumscribed, but he has still some authority. He is a steward, 
and the -steward of God ; but a steward has at least some autho- 
ritj and power, something is entrusted to his fidelity and skill ; 
he does not merely use the power of locomotion, he is not an 
instrument or a machine : the steward of God is not the slave 
of men, not a drudge or a sutler ; only let him be a true 
steward. This remark needs to be made in opposition to the 
false poHticians, who desire that the ministers of Christ, and the 
princes, whose name they abuse, and believers and aU things, 
should belong, not to God, not to behevers, but to themselves. — 
liii a\i6a,hr\, not harsh or self-willed) The antithesis is in ver. 8, 
a lover of hospitality ; for auSddtn, a man harsh, inflexible, ne- 
glects humble guests, as Nabal did, 1 Sam. xxv. ; he cares for 
himself alone, and whatever is connected with himself: others 
also he bids to keep their own affairs and anxieties to themselves. 
— liii ipylKov, not soon angry) The antithesis is a lover of good. — 
fiii Tcipomv, not given to wine) The antithesis is sober. — fi^ vXrixTriv, 
no striker) The antithesis is just, who decides by reason and 
equity, not by violence. — /i,ri alexpoxep&ti, not covetous of filthy 
lucre) Base gain (filthy lucre) might be acquired in a matter 
honourable in itself, as in the work-shop, in bargains and mer- 
chandise, in the oiEce of a bishop ; ver. 11 ; 1 Tim. vi. 5 ; 2 Cor. 
xi. 12, 20 ; PhU. iii. 19 ; 1 Pet. v. 2 ; 2 Pet. ii. 3. The anti- 
thesis is oiiov, holy. 

8. 'Eyxpar^, temperate) 'Eyxparrie and axpar^s are sometimes 
taken in a wider sense ; comp. Matt, xxiii. 25 (axpaelag, excess), 
note. The opposite, axpar^g, is clear, so that it was not necessary 
to express it ; and axpaeia, so far as it is opposed to rri vapoivlcf, 
would not come so much under the eye of Titus. 

9. 'AvrixoM-ivov) one who will holdfast, defend, zealously urge. 
By this word the LXX. mostly translate the Hebrew verb pin. 
— xara) i %ark rr^t diSaxrin 'kiyog [Engl. Vers, the word as he ha* 
been taught], the word appertaining to doctrine. — visrhi, firm, sure 
[lit. to be relied on], fi^om which exhortation and power to convict 
(vcipaxaXtTi, sXiyx^iv) receive their strength. — xal — xal)both — and. 



320 TITUS I. 10-12. 

10. Mara/oXoyo( xai fipiva<!rdra/, vain-talkers and deceivers) 
Two nouns, of which the epithet is uvuirSraxroi, unruly. As to 
who are vain^talkers, see 1 Tim. i. 6, 7. (ppeta-rdrai, those who 
deceive men's minds : AvuiroTaxroi, unruly ; like horses, that hold 
the bit with their teeth, they are unwilling to submit to the 
obedience of the faith. 

11. 'ET/ffro/t/^i/n) to stop the mouth; to reduce to silence by 
the power of the Spirit, as the unruly deserve. — oXouf o7xou;, 
whole houses) A great loss to Paul. | But in the present day 
what takes place as regards whole streets ? What is done regard- 
ing country hamlets and cities ? — V. g.J — amrpWouei, they sub- 
vert) as deceivers. — diSdaxovres a fiii SiT, teaching things which they 
ought not) as vain-talkers. — als^pov xifbovi ydf'^i /"*" ^^^ ^^^ "/ 
jilthy lucre) Construed with, they subvert. Baseness is seen 
most of all in {vile) contemptible gain ; Ez. xiii. 19. [1 Tim. 
vi. 5.] 

12. E?j| r;5, one said) Those who are too much devoted to 
the study of profane writers ought not to applaud themselves 
because Paul quotes from Menander, Aratus, Epimenides ; for 
he does not even mention their names : Acts xvii. 28 ; 1 Cor. 
XV. 33. — 1| avTuv 'Jdio; avruv, of their own) in origin and condi- 
tion. That circumstance increases the authority of the witness. 
Testimonies of the wickedness of the CiHcians were also brought 
forward, but by others [not by one of themselves, as in the case 
of the Cretans] ; therefore Paul, a Cilician, might quote this 
without reproach. — ■jrpoprirrig, a prophet) Epimenides, according 
to the statement of Diogenes Laertius, uttered many predic- 
tions; and he acted in the character of a prophet when he 
spoke these things which Paul quotes. — ail, always) Every 
natural man is at times guilty of lying, but always is a more 
heinous matter. — -^{iJeTai, liars) unlike God, ver. 2 ; Hars also 
in their doctrine concerning God, since they love fables, ver. 14. 
The Cretans had the sepulchre of Jupiter ; therefore they were 
called liars by the poets. — xaxa Stipia, evil beasts) Crete was 
considered a x'^P"' "■^lpos> a country without wild beasts ; whether 
that be true or false, Al. Moms considers Epimenides (in this 
line of his) drew the point of his pleasantry from the fact. — 
yaeripti apyal) Pasor is of Opinion that dpyhs is here used by 
Aphseresis for ^tiapyog, voracious ; comp. ch. ii. ,2—6. But the 



TITUS 1. 13-16.-II. 1-3. S21 

common idea is satisfactory : bellies are slow which are useful to 
nobody. 

13. 'AXnSrjg, true) Although it comes from a Cretan. — 'iy^tyxh 
rebuke) The chief part of the rebuke follows. 

14. mWo/j, fables) The antithesis is truth. 

15. TlavTo, fi,h, all things indeed) The defenders of fables and 
of the commandments of men used this pretext, which Paul 
sweeps away. — nTs xaSapoT;, to the pure) Supply, and to the faith- 
ful, taken from the antithesis (unto the unbelieving) ; 1 Tim. iv. 
3 ; Acts XV. 9 ; Eom. xiv. 23. All outward things are pure to 
those who are pure within. — /jn/iiag/ihoig, to them that are defiled) 
This is discussed presently. — a-Trlgroig, to the unbelieving) This is 
discussed in ver. 16. — ovSh) nothing, either within, or conse- 
quently without. — voug, their intelligence, mind) Eom. xiv. 5. — 
guvildridis, conscience) concerning things which are to be done, or 
that have been done ; 1 Cor. viii. 7. 

16. &ihv, God) "Whom to know is the highest wisdom. — 
i/MoXoyovei iJdimi) profess, and by profession claim to themselves 
knowledge ; 1 Tim. vi. 20. — apvouvrai) deny Grod. — ^SiXvxrol) 
abominable. This agrees with the Lxx., Prov. xvii. 15 : axa- 
idprog xal ^SeXuxTog, unclean and abominable. — adoxi/ioi) This 
may here be taken actively for those who are not fit for any- 
thing, because they cannot approve what is good either in 
themselves or in others. 



CHAPTEE n. 



1. AdXv, speak) with unrestrained lips ; carefully, vigorously, 
freely. 

2. nptgpvrag, aged men) Supply exhort from ver. 6.—vri<paXloug, 
watchful) in feehng. — gi/mioiig, grave) in actions. — giippovag, sober) 
in their mode of living. — r^ u*Ojttoi/jj, in patience) A virtue chiefly 
becoming old men. 

3. 'El. xaragT^fiari ^hpowpimt) hpowpe'?rfig, observant of sacred 

' The larger Ed. had preferred the plural iepov/iiirfis, but the marg. of 
VOL. IV. X 



»»2 TITUS II. 4-11. 

decorum. — xoi.rdgTt}/j,a., behaviour, dress [' habitus' exterior^, is 
used here of the ornament "of the virtues, which are presently 
enumerated. — xarddTtj/iba, is used in a large sense, as we find in 
the Greek Lexicon formerly printed at Basle in fol. — SidouXu- 
//ismg, enslaved, under slavery to) It is indeed slavery not to 
overcome the appetite ; 2 Pet. ii. 19. — xaXoS/SaMaXous) teachers 
of good things, as follows. 

4. 'Sia<ppovl^aigi rag v'sag, that they may teach the young women to 
be sober) Titus is enjoined to treat the Cretan women with 
somewhat greater severity than Timothy was to treat the women 
of Ephesus, 1 Tim. V. 2. He himself was to admonish the 
latter; Titus is to admonish the former, by means of tho 
women who were more advanced in age. 

^ 7. Tlipi TrdvTo) in all things. — aiavrhv, thyself) Even thou, 
Titus, though rather young thyself. — h rfi didaaxaXlcf, in doctrine) 
Public doctrine or teaching is intended, to which Xoyo;, the word, 
in daily practice is presently opposed. In the case of the for- 
mer, a<pSopia and gs/ivoTris are required, to which the epithets 
iiyiij and axardyvusTov correspond in the case of the latter, so 
that the subject-matter and the form may be rightly framed in 
the case of both. — afSoplai) viz. ■rapixo/J'ivog : here we must not 
repeat siaurov. 

8. 'Evrpoivri, may be confounded) The great force of truth and 
innocence. 

9. AoiiXous, servants) namely, exhort, ver. 6. 

10. 'AyaSriv, good) in things not evil. — xog/Lusiv, may adorn) 
The lower the condition of servants, the more beautifully is their 
piety described. [Even such as they should not cast themselves 
away, as if it were of no importance what sort of persons they were. 
-V. g.] 

11. 'E'TTEpawi yap i} yapig, for the grace has appeared) There is 
a double appearance, viz. that of grace and that of glory, ver. 
13. — garripio;, that bringeth salvation) as the very name, Jesus, 
indicates [comp. ver. 10]. — •jragm, to all) [of whom so many 

the 2d Ed. refers Itpovpe'jrei to the more certain readings, which the Germ. 
Vers., corresponding to the Gnomon, imitates. — ^E. B. 

AD(A)QH Rec. Text read hpavpiitiis. But Cfg Vulg. read iepovpneei. 
—Ed. 

^ oUovpovs) ver. 5, properly, those who keep the house, Prov. vii. 11 - 
V.g 



TIT as II. 12-15. 823 

different classes are mentioned, ver. 2—9. — V. g.] even to ser- 
vants, even to the Gentiles ; comp. ch. iii. 2. 

12. Tiiv asi^iiai, ungodliness) In antithesis to euffsjSiJs, ^od!^y. — 
riis xog/iixag, worldly) which prevent men from living sohei-ly 
and righteously. — suppovoig %ai dmalcag xal euite/Sms, soberly and 
righteously and godly) The three cardinal virtues, from which, 
either single or united, all the others spring. 

13. Tlposdi^o/iim, looking for) with joy. — sXir!&a — 0£oD, hope 
— of God) This may he referred to Christ.^ — eoirnpo^, Saviour) 
ch. iii. 4, 6, where the mention of the Father and of the Son is 
made in very close connection, as here, ch. ii. 11, 13. [Hope 
corresponds to the name of Saviour ; the appearance of the glory, 
to that of God.—V. g.] 

14. 'Ilia XuTfiierjrai, that He might redeem) An allusion to xe- 
iiQm^^on imra. slavery? — "Kah -ffspioitsiov, a peculiar people) The 
adjective would be translated into Latin by superfactum. Co- 
lumella writes, villica debet separare, quae consumenda sunt, ei 
quce superfieri possunt, cu-stodire, " a farmer's wife should se- 
parate what is to be consumed, and keep what may be left over 
and above." Comp. vipmineis, 1 Pet. ii. 9, note. [The -jtipl in 
composition often expresses something remaining over and above. 
So mpmolrigig, in Peter, something which God reserves to Himself 
out of all. And -jripiovgiog, a people peculiai'ly God!s own above 
all nations, Ex. xix. 5, 6 ; Lxx.] 

15. Mridilg, let no one) 1 Tim. iv. 12, note. — TipifpovilTu, de- 
spise) The minister of the Divine word, defenceless, unwarlike, 
is certainly despised by those who do not submit themselves to 
the word of God, but think that it is only political defences that 
are of any avail. But perverse hearers much more despise him 
who teaches somewhat slowly : they ought to be made to feel 
Jmrayijv, i.e. what is inculcated, as coming from authority ; not to 
draw it to themselves [to wrest the authority from the minister 
and draw it to themselves]. 

' See my note on 1 Tim. v. 21. This must refer to Christ ; for iTiipcc- 
Kia is never applied to God the Father, but always to the Son. And when 
two compatible attributives joined by a copula are thus preceded by but 
one article, they must refer to the one and the same person : of Him who 
is at once the great God and our Saviour : toD, viz. ovros ftty. ©soy xccl 
ar.— Ed. 

' He-had been speaking oi slaves or seruants, ver. 9. — Ed. 



324 TITUS in. 1-5. 



CHAPTER III. 

1. " Kfya-ti xal s^oveiais, to principalities and powers) Crete was 
a Roman province. — vmrdgeiiSai, vnSapx'^Tv, to be subject, to obey) 
The words, avonroi, foolish (comp. Ps.xxxii.9), avukTi, disobedient, 
ver. 3, are opposed to them. 

2. 'AiJ,axovi, no brawlers) Such as do not attack. — Iwiaiii, 
gentle) Such as yield to any one attacking them.— ravras, all) 
Crete was an island much frequented by men engaged in mer- 
cantile transactions) ; and they were generally such as are 
described, ver. 3. 

3. Tap, for) As God has treated us, so we ought to treat our 
neighbour. — %a.l ri/MTg, we also) Eph. ii, 3. — avorjToi, foolish) We 
have not come to the knowledge of God of our own accord (of 
ourselves). [TAis is the very exact image of human life without 
grace. Grace, and grace alone, is the remedy even for foolishness. 
Some, which may appear wonderful, though they excel in some 
things by singular skill and sagacity, yet in other things, when 
godliness or even mere natural equity is the point at issue, make 
the most wretched blunders, and permit themselves to be imposed 
upon, and their authority to be basely exercised. — V. g.J — amikTi, 
disobedient) We did not obey God. when revealing Himself.— 
riimati, pleasures) which consist even in evil speaking, not merely 
in the taste of the tongue {i.e. the pleasures of the palate). — 
iromiKaTg, various, divers) 2 Tim. iii. 6. A remarkable epithet. 
Variety delights. 

4. 'H yjnorirrii xa/ (piXavSpuma,, kindness and love to men) 
Human vices of a quite contrary character are enumerated, ver. 
3. — tciirnpog, our Saviour) The conjugate, leuatv. He saved, occurs 
ver. 5. 

5. Oiijt eg 'ipyuv, not of [by] works) The negative belongs tc 
the whole sentence : we had not been in a state of righteousness ; 
we had not done works in righteousness ; we had no works by 
which we could be saved. So Moses to Israel, Deut. ix. 5.— 



TITUS III. 6-8. 325 

'3;a Xourpou 'ffaXiyyevtelas. xai avaxaimdius UnifiaTog ' Ayiov, by the 
washing of regeneration and renewing of the Holy Ghost) The 
renewing is immediately construed with by ; for as washing and 
regeneration, so renewing and He shed on us, are closely connected. 
Two things are mentioned : the washing of regeneration, which 
is a periphrasis for baptism into Christ ; and the renewing of the 
Holy Spirit. Comp. Heb. ii. 4, note. For in both places the 
benefits are praised, which have come to us by Christ and by the 
Holy Spirit. So it is called the work of divine grace, not only 
in respect of individuals, but in respect of the very abundant 
economy of the New Testament. This regeneration and renewing 
takes away all the death and the old state, under which we so 
wretchedly lay, and which is described, ver. 3 : 2 Cor. v. 17. 

6. Ou) TLnv/^arog ' Aylov. — Sia, through) This depends on He 
saved, etc., ver. 5 ; as the conjugates saved and Saviour prove. 
[Through Jesus our Saviour is not to be connected, as in Engl. 
Vers., with He shed on us.'] 

7. "Iva, that) This depends on He saved. — dtxaiuSitiTig, being 
justified) For formerly we were without righteousness, ver. 5. — 
ixemv. His) God's, ver. 4, 5. ixiTvog, He, or that person, points 
often to something remote. That which is more remote (as 
expressed by kximg) is estimated from the position of the words, 
not exactly irom the thought itself. The grace of God is an or- 
dinary phrase ; and it is of that grace that the kindness and love 
to men have appeared, to which all things are here attributed. 
God is supremely good, we are exceedingly evil. — %af/r;, by 
grace) An antithesis to works. — xar sKiti&a,, according to the hope) 
which we did not formerly possess. \This hope truly softens 
the mind, 1 Fet. iii. 9. — V. g.] — Z,mg, of life) Construed with 
heirs. 

8. Uigrlg, faithful) The reference is to what goes before. — 
mfl roiirm, concerning these things) not concerning things 
frivolous : 1 Tim. i. 7, at the end. — pf ovr/^wtf;, that they be careful) 
no longer foolish, ver. 3. [Diligence is necessary. — V. g.] 
— xaXd;, good) entkely and substantially so. The antithesis is, 
vain, in the next verse. — u^iXi/ia, profitable) The antithesis is, 
unprofitable, ibid. 

'■ "Eraffei/ iifias. He saved its) Chrigtianity itself, as opposed to for- 
mer misery (ver. 3), brings a most real and present salvation. — V. g. 



Sa? TITUS III. 10-14. 

10. A'/pirixiv, a heretic) one following, according to his own 
will, the things which are found fault with at ver. 9. — Tapairoy, 
reject) cease to admonish him, for of what advantage is it ? We 
should be labouring in vain.' Matt. vii. 6. 

11. 'E^itTpavrai) It is thus the Lxx. translate the Hebrew 
nan, Deut. xxxii. 20. — ai^apram, sins) Whatever he does and 
thinks, he is wrong. — c3> avToxardxpiro;) xplais eauroD, his own 
judgment, accompanies sin (&fj,apriav), a.nixaTa.7ipisig, condemnation, 
follows close after ; Rom. xiv. 22, 23. 

12. 'Apn/aav 5) Tu%/xJ», Artemas or Tychicus) into whose hands 
Titus might deliver the lamp of the Gospel. — ixkh •rpog /j,i, to 
come to me) when affairs in Crete shall have been more fully set 
in order. — sxiT, there) He does not say here, Paul was not yet at 
Nicopolis. 

13. "ixa fifiSh, that nothing) Titus therefore had the means. 
They did not go empty. 

14. MavSaviToisav, let them learn) by thy admonition and 
example. — xal o'l rjfiiTipoi, ours also) not only we, but also ours, 
whom we have gained at Crete. These seem not to have given 
sufficient assistance to Zenas and Apollos, when they ought to 
have done so. [It is not proper that some should ever and anon 
devolve the business in liand from themselves upon others. — V. g.] 
Zenas and Apollos were already in Crete with Titus ; for 
this is the reason why he distinguishes them from Artemas 
and Tychicus, who were not until afterwards to be sent. — s/'s ras 
avayxiiag ■^pi'iac, for necessary uses) even as spiritual necessity 
[i.e. the tie which necessarily binds saints to help one another] re- 
quires ; so XP^'"'} -^cts vi. 3. Spiritual necessity [' necessitudo,' 
tie of necessary obligation or relationship] lays the foundation of 
obligations, so that one cannot withdraw from another [so as not 
to help him]. 

' The proverb is, we should be washing a bricL 



ON THE 



EPISTLE TO PHILEMON. 



1. UaxiXog, Paul) A familiar and exceedingly courteous 
{adTiib;, urbane) epistle, concerning a private affair, is inserted 
among the books of the New Testament, intended to afford a 
specimen of the highest wisdom, as to the manner in which 
Christians should manage civil (social) affairs on more exalted 
principles. Frankius says : The single epistle to Philemon very 
far surpasses all the wisdom of the world, Prsef. N. T. Gr., p. 
26, 27. — d'eg/jiiog, a prisoner) and therefore one to whom why 
should Philemon refiise his request ? ver. 9. — Ti/iohog, Timothy) 
This epistle (ver. 22) was written before the second Epistle to 
Timothy. 

2. 'A'!r<picf, to Apphid) the wife of Philemon, who had some- 
thing to do with the business of Onesimus. — o/xov otu, thy house) 
viz. Philemon's. 

5. 'Ajcouwi/, hearing) Paul had gained over Philemon, ver. 19, 
afad here he praises his consistent character. From Onesimus 
himself he might hear of his love and faith. — ayavny — ■jrkriv — 'irphg 
— 'iridovv x.ai s'lg — Aytoug, love — faith — to — Jesus and unto — saints) 
So Eph. i. 15 : but in this passage there is a Chiasmus in 
regard to Philemon. The first is connected with the fourth, the 
second with the third ; but love is put in the first place, because 



328 PHILEMON 6-9. 

it is to a specimen of love that he is exhorting Philpmon, to whom 
the order of faith and love had been long known. Paul gives 
thanks to God for this blessed state of Philemon. 

6. "0*cus, that) This depends on thou hast, ver. 5. — jj xoisavla 
Trig •Kkredg eov, the communion [the communication\ of thy faith) 
i.e. thy faith, which thou hast in common with us and exercisest. 
— hipyiii yhrjTai, may become effectual) Paul speaks at first in- 
definitely. — h i'Kiyvuieii vavrhg ayahu, in [byj the acknoioledging 
of every good thing) Every good thing is all the riches which 
Jesus procured for us by His poverty, when he lived as a poor 
man upon the earth. He briefly intimates to his fi-iend what 
he lays down more expressly in 2 Cor. viii. 9, where there is 
also, ye know. Jesus ought in turn to enjoy (in His own people) 
those benefits which He has conferred upon us. An elegant 
circle, ayaih, good or benefit, occurs presently afterwards, ver. 
14. — t'lg, into) Construed with may become. The good shown 
to us ought to redound unto Christ. 

7. Xapav — xa! 'jrafdxXrigiv, joy — and consolation) .Thsse viovis 
are usually put together [a customary Syntheton] : 2 Cor. vii. 
4, and I rejoice, says he, for thanksgiving, 1 Cor. xvi. 17, note. 
[Paul, in respect of God, returns thanks, when he might have 
said, I rejoice : but when he writes to men, instead of, / return 
thanks, he says, I rejoice.^ — rSiv dyim, of the saints) The house 
of Philemon was open to them, ver. 2. 

8. Aih, wherefore) I exhort depends on this particle. — hi- 
rdaeiiv, to command) Implying great authority, of which the 
foundation is the obligation of Philemon, ver. 19, requiring 
obedience, ver. 21. 

9. 'A/affjjv, love) Mine to thee, thine to Onesimus. Phile- 
mon's love to Patd was previously mentioned. Paul asks 
lovingly one who loves him. — /i&Wov, rather) He does not say, 
if you refuse you will incur my indignation and that of Peter, 
according to the style of the Eoman court, a style which is by 
no means apostolical. — 'irapaxaXSi, I beseech). 

There are three divisions of the epistle : 

I. The Inscription, 1-3. 
II. Having mentioned the flourishing condition of Philemon 



PHILEMON 10-12. S29 

in spiritual things, ver. 4, etc., He begs him to re- 
ceive Onesimus, a runaway slave, 12—17. 
And desires him to provide a lodging for himself, 22 

in. Conclusion, 23-25. 

— romrog, such) He lays down three arguments why he would 
rather affectionately exhort and ask him, than issue a command : 
his own (Paul's) natural disposition, long ago well known 
to Philemon, his old age, and his imprisonment. Old age 
renders men mild : comp. Luke v. 39 : but even before old 
age, Paul was stiU Paul ; he formerly depended on the kindness 
of others, and now, in no respect happier abroad, he still depends 
upon it. The graceful courtesy in this epistle is mixed with 
gravity. 

10. Uapaxa,Xu, I beseech) This word is repeated with great 
force, as if after a parenthesis. — mpl tou J/aou r'exvov, concerning 
my son) Besides other things, he puts first a favourable descrip- 
tion of the person, having suspended the sense till he mentions 
the hated (offensive) name of Onesimus. And the whole epistle 
savours of the recent joy for Onesimus, who had been gained as 
a convert, and from whom it seems he concealed the circum- 
stance that he was writing so kindly about him. — syhvtiaa,, 1 
have begotten) He was the son of Paul's old age. — ' Ovriai/^ov, 
Onesimus) He alludes pleasantly to this name in the following 
verse. 

11. "Axprjarov, unprofitable) A Litotes [see Append.] for he 
was guilty of injury. In like manner there is a mild expression 
in the use of the word, was separated [departed], ver. 15 ; like- 
wise ver. 18, but if — he oweth. — eoi x.at sfiol, to thee and me) He 
courteously puts Philemon before himself. He treats of himself, 
ver. 13, 14; of him, ver. 15, 16. Chiasmus [see Append.] — 
j8;^P>iffroi', truly profitable) The allusion is to the name of 
Onesimus ; so omlfirtv, ver. 20. Not even does a servant 
do his duty without godliness. With godliness any man is 
profitable. — aniri/^-^a, I have sent back) Onesimus even be- 
fore he had attained true profitableness, had however thought 
well of Paul, and fled to him on the occasion of his own crime. 

12. Tii 6/A(i evKdyx"^} ^V bowels) An example eropynt, of 



3S0 PHILEMON 13 1R. 

spiritual affection, ver. 17. — -rposXaSoiJ, receive) A mild word, 
occurring again in the same verse (17). 

13. 'Ov, whom) He shows that Onesimus was now worthy to 
be trusted. — Ivep gov, for thee) on thy account [in thy stead]. 

14. 'a;, as it were) A mitigating particle ; for although 
Philemon had not been compelled, yet his willingness would 
not have so much appeared [had Paul kept Onesimus without 
formally asking Philemon's leave]. — amyxriv, necessity) for 
Philemon could not have resisted. 

15. Tdxa, perhaps) The apostle speaks thus after the manner 
of men, as 1 Cor. i. 16. Because the judgments of God are 
concealed; see Hieron. on this passage. — i^uplgSn, departed) [was 
separated]. A mild expression. — aliiviov, for ever) in this life, 
Ex. xxi. 6, and in heaven. A very elegant amphibology, quite 
true in both cases. The whole time of the absence of Onesimus 
was but a short hour compared with that lengthened duration. 
— aTi^fii) thou shouldst have him for thyself. 

16. OuxsTi iis aouXoii, no longer as a servant) He had been a 
servant. — uTip fioDXou, above a servant) This is equivalent to ah 
epithet. But is connected with a brother : above a servant from 
whom thou art about to derive greater benefit than from a 
servant. 'T'lrspSovXog is a compound word according to Apol- 
lonins, 1. 4, de Syntaxi, c. 3 ; but what it means, or whether it 
has any relation to the matter before us, I do not know. — 
adiXiphv, brother) He does not add iig, as [which he had used 
before servant']. He evidently recommends him for a (true; 
brother. — ayaTrirhv, beloved) Love is borne to a brother and a 
friend, not to a servant. — fukXigTa e/^o!) especially to me, before 
all others, who are however not excluded. — eol) to thee, even 
before me : to me .and thee are construed with a brother beloved. 
In the flesh he is v'Ttip SouXov, above a servant, a freedman (comp- 
u'lrip, ver. 21) ; in the Lord, a brother. 

17. "E;^£;s) thou hast, without a figure [but Engl. Vers., If 
thou count] ; for receive comes in after it. — xonuvhv, a partner) 
that what is thine may be mine, and mine thine. 

18. E/ he re, but if anything) A gentle expression. Onesimus 
had confessed to Paul what he had done. — Jj opelXei, or owes) 
A milder synonym is put after the verb wronged. — eK'K6yei) 
Hesychius, eXXoyei, i.e. xaraXoyriea,!. Consider me the debtor. 



PHILEMON 19-24. 331 

19. 'Eyci naSXos, 7 PawZ) It was his handwriting. — lyii i.mrlaui, 
I will repay) as a parent is wont to pay the debt of his son. 
The prisoner writes in good earnest, and with confidence that 
he would not want the power [of fulfilling his engagement]. 
But yet he promises conditionally, viS;. if Philemon would 
exact it, ver. 21.^ — eiaurhv, thyself) It cannot be told how great 
is the obligation which is owed to those who have won souls. 
External property is due for spiritual benefits, but not by 
political obligation. — TpogofiiiXiis, thou even owest) This refers 
to owes, ver. 18. It is not only fitting that the pardon of 
Onesimus be granted to me, but thou even owest me thyself. 

20. 'Eyti, /) Thou shouldst have had profit from Onesimus, 
I should now have it fi:om thee. — omlfinv, let me "profit) An allu- 
sion to the name of Onesimus. — avairaueov, refresh) by receiving 
Onesimus. 

21. Xloi^ssig, thou wilt do) towards Onesimus. 

22. Bivlav, a lodging) where others may come to visit me. 
See the power of hope. Paul, a prisoner, makes this arrange- 
ment (appointment) at so great a distance. 

23. 2uva,i^aXiarot;, my fellow-prisoner) On this very account 
Epaphras is placed before the others. 

24. Aouxas, Luke) He, who was most closely connected with 
Paul, is named after the others. There is a note in two Greek 
copies, in the possession of MiU and Kuster, intimating, that 
the blessed Onesimus died a martyr at Rome, having suffered 
the punishment of breaking the legs. 



ON THE 



EPISTLE TO THE HEBREWS. 



Many anonymous writers, though unknown, endeavour to be 
useful to their readers ; but the writer of this Divine Epistle 
shows, that he was known to those to whom he writes : xiii. 19. 
And the Apostle Paul is said to be the writer of the epistle, 
with the general consent of antiquity. Above all, Peter, writ- 
ing to the elect strangers scattered through Pontus, Galatia, 
Cappadocia, Asia, and Bithynia, praises the letters of Paul, 
which he wrote to them also. But the other epistles of Paul 
were sent to Gentile converts ; this one alone to the Hebrews, 
although he himself does not call them Hebrews ; and in the 
title, no doubt old, but not prefixed by the hand of Paul, they 
are with less propriety called Hebrews, instead of Judaico- 
Hellenistic Christians, to whom we have observed below that he 
wrote, ch. vi. 10. Moreover the method and style of Paul may 
be easily recognised : for he puts the proposition and division 
before the discussion, ch. ii. 17. He distinctly and separately 
subjoins the practical to the doctrinal part : he puts the practical 
part at greater length at the end of the epistle. He quotes the 
same words of the Old Testament which he does elsewhere, ch. 
ii. 8, X. 30, 38 ; also, i. 6 : he uses the same ideas and expres- 
sions. See note on ch. i. 3, 6; ii. 2, 5, 8, 9, 10, 14, 15; iii. 1, 
6, 12, 16 ; iv. 9, 16; v. 6, 11, etc.; vi. 1, 9, 10, 11, 12 ; vii. 2, 



83t HEBREWS. 

5, 18, 19, 22, 25, 26, 28 ; viii. 1, 6, 11, 13 ; ix. 1, 10, 11, 15, 
28 ; X. 5, 39 ; xi. 7, 11, 13, 19, 35, 37 ; xii. 1, 4, 10, 12, 22, 
23, 27 ; xiii. 1, 5, 9, 10, 14, 18, 20, 21, 23, 25. In former 
times, some thought that Barnabas, or Luke, or Clemens Romanus 
was the author: in fact, because every one of them had this epistle 
without the author's name in his hands, each of them was con- 
sidered as the author himself. But why did not Paul prefix to 
this one epistle his name, which, from ch. xiii. 19, was evidently 
dear to those to whom he was writing? He did not preiix it, 
because he did not use an inscription ; for men in former times 
did not always use it in accordance with primitive simplicity. 
Comp. 2 Kings v. 6, x. 2, 6, where the word "lOS?) placed before 
them, scarcely permits us to believe that excerpts are given 
rather than the epistles themselves. And also the ardour of 
spirit in this epistle, alike as in the First Epistle of John, burst- 
ing forth at once into the subject, the more effectively strikes 
the hearers : but he compensates at the conclusion of the epistle 
for the absence of salutation and thanksgiving, which werd 
usually placed by Paul at the beginning of the other epistles. 
This epistle of Paul, and the two of Peter (to which may be 
added those of James and Jude, which are very similar), were 
written to the same believing Israelites, scattered abroad in 
Pontus, Galatia, Cappadocia, Asia, and Bithynia, and much 
about the same time. Three years before the destruction of 
Jerusalem, Paul and Peter were put to death at Rome ; there- 
fore this epistle was also written to them when the temple was 
standing, ch. viii. 5. Peter wrote both of his epistles a httle 
before his martyrdom ; and in the second, praises the epistles 
of Paul — this one by name (expressly), which was then new 
(recently sent), many of the first hearers of the Lord being by 
this time dead ; Heb. ii. 3. 

As Peter, James, Jude, wrote in Greek, not in Hebrew, so 
Paul did the same here ; for he quotes the Greek translation of 
Moses and the Psalms, where the reading is different from that 
of the Hebrew, ch. i. 6, x. 5. He comprehends in one Greek 
word, xardTavaig, the meaning of the two Hebrew words, 
r\2& and nn*3D, ch. iv. 4, 5. He translates the Hebrew words 
into Greek, ch. vii. 2 ; and insists upon the proper idea attached 
to the Greek word Bia,6m, cJ*- ix. 16. 



HEBREWS. 335 

The whole application of the discourse is, to confirm the faith 
of the brethren in Jesns Christ, ch. xiii. 8, 9. Moreover, he 
confirms it, by demonstrating His glory. He calls this the sum 
(the principal point), ch. viii. 1. Hence all the divisions of the 
epistle, abounding in the sharpest admonitions, and the most 
powerful incitements, are set forth in one and the same form of 
discourse ; and doctrine and practice are everywhere connected 
by the word, therefore. 

This is the Sum : — 

The glory of Jesus Christ shines forth — 
I. From a previous comparison with the Prophets and 
AjfGELS, i. 1-14 ; 
Therefore we ought to give heed to what He says, ii. 1—4. 

n. [His glory shines forth] principally from a comparison of 
His SUFFERING and His consummation. We must 
here observe — 

1. The proposition and sum from Ps. viii., 5—9. 

2. The discussion : We have the Author of salvation and glory 

PERFECTED [consummated] ; who suffered first for 
OUR sakes, that He might become (1) a Merciful, 
and (2) Faithful (3) High Priest, 10-18. These 
three things are one by one explained, being most 
suitably from time to time interwoven with His 
PASSION and His consummation. 

A. He has the virtues of the priesthood : — 
I. He is faithful : 

Therefore be ye not unfaithful, iii. 1, 2, 
7-iv. 13. 
II. He is merciful : 

Therefore let us draw near with confidence, 
14;v. 3. 

B. He IS called of God a priest. Here — 

I. He sum (of His priesthood) is set forth from Ps. ii. 
and ex., and from His actual performance of the 
duties of the office, 4-10 ; 



336 HEBREAVS. 

And hence the hearers are summarily roused to 
ACTION, ii.-vi. 20. 
n. The fact itself is copiously 
(1.) Explained. He is to us 

a. A GREAT HiGH PrIEST, 

I. Such as Psalm ex. describes , 

1. According to the order of Melchisedek, 

\ai. 1-19 : 

2. With AN OATH, 20-22 : 

3. For ever, 23, 24, 26-28. 

II. And therefore peculiarly excellent ; 

1. A Heavenly Priest, viii. 1—6 : 

2. And that of the New Covenant or Testa- 

ment, 7—13. 
g. The entrance intothe Sanctuary, ix. l-x.l8. 
(2.) It is turned to a practical exhortation. There- 
fore 

I. Evince your faith, hope, love, x. 19-39. 
These three things are urged more at large : — 

a. Faith with persevering endurance, which is 
to be exercised according to the example 
of the old saints, xi. 1—40 ; xii. 1 : 
And of Jesus Himself, 2, 3 ; 
And it ought to be exercised, 4—11 — 
Cheerfully, peacefully, holily, 12-17 
|S. Hope, 18-29. 
y. Love, xiii. 1—6. 

II. For improvement in these graces, call to remem- 

brance your former ministers, 7-16 : 
And make use of the watchfulness of your present 
ministers, 17-19. 
The PRAYER, the doxology, and the calm conclusion 
are suitable to this paragraph, and to the whole epistle, 20—25. 

The addresses to those to whom he writes — for example, 
Brethren — are not inconsiderately used, but indicate either a 
new division of the epistle, or an outburst of affection. There- 
fore the apostle for the first time addresses them in ch. iii. 1, 
12 : and says, hoh/ brethren, partakers of the heavenly calling, 



HEBREWS I. i. 337 

and simply, brethren : and so again not until ch. x. 19. For 
two principal and special exhortations begin at these passages. 
Besides, he calls them brethren at the Conclusion, ch. xiii. 22 ; 
and beloved, after that sharp admonition, ch. vi. 9. He who 
will weigh well, in this Synopsis of the epistle, these ad- 
dresses, and the Divisions marked by them, ch. ii. 17, x. 19-21 — 
the one of which is followed immediately by its own discussion in 
the text, whilst the other is preceded by it, — and also the particle 
therefore, will readily perceive that this very Synopsis is not a 
thing of our invention, but is drawn from the epistle itself; and 
he will derive profit from it. 

In the same Synopsis we have noticed some comparisons ; but 
the epistle itself has many more, which, however, may be 
generally referred to two heads. I. There are great prophets, 
angels, Moses, Joshua, Aaron, etc. ; but Jesus infinitely greater. 
The opinion of the old Hebrews is, — King Messias is greater 
than Abraham and the patriarchs, than Moses and the minis- 
tering angels. This opinion is quoted in this connection by 
Schoettgenius, whose ' Horse ' on this epistle is an especially 
profitable work. H. The condition of the ancient believers was 
good, but the condition of Christians is better ; and this second 
fact is chiefly treated of in ch. xi. But everywhere bad and 
wretched examples also are interspersed among those that are 
good and blessed. We find, then, in this epistle the recapitula- 
tion of the whole of the Old Testament, and at the same time 
the setting aside of Judaism as obsolete, and the promulgation 
of the New Testament carried to its an/i)) and utmost height, at 
the very boundary of the fourth and fifth thousandth year. See 
Ord. temp,, p. 288. [Ed. ii., p. 247, 248.] 



CHAPTEE I. 

1. TloXv/jLipSis xat m\vTp6'!rug) GoD spoke voXufiepug, in muny 
portions. The creation was revealed in the time of Adam ; the 
last judgment in the time of Enoch ; and so from time to time 
knowledge was given more fully unfolded. He also spoke 
lokvrpoiroig, in divera modes of revelation, in dreams and visions. 

VOL. IV. T 



^** HEBREWS I 1. 

Therefore iroXv/iipui refers to the matter, rnXuTpo-irus to the form. 
In both there is an antithesis to one total and most perfect 
communication of God to us in Jesus Christ. The very multi- 
tude ot ipro^hets shows, that they "prophesied in part;" there- 
fore, says he, you ought not to be frightened at the novelty of 
Christianity. — iraXai, in time past) For a very considerable 
space of time there had arisen no prophets, in order that the 
Son might be the more an object of expectation. [MalacJd, the 
last of the prophets of the Old Testament, prophesied at the inter- 
val of some ages before the birth of Christ. — ^V. g.] — 6 @ihg, God) 
The apostle treats of God in this passage ; of Christ, ch. ii. 3 ; 
of the Holy Ghost, ch. iii. 7. — kaXriaag, having spoken) A 
Sjmecdoche* for every sort of communication, as Ps. ii. 5. So 
■13T prificc, a word, is used in a wide sense. — b, in) [Not as Engl. 
Vers, by] Therefore God Himself was in the prophets, as also 
especially in the Son. A mortal king speaks by his ambassador, 
not, however, in his ambassador. If the apostle had not used 
the £11, in, with a view to what follows, in order that it might 
apply to the Son, he would doubtless havr put dia rav ■jrpo(ptiTuv, 
by the prophets. For this reason it is not inconsistent to urge the 
use of the b, in. — b roTs ■TpofnTuig, in the prophets) Artemonius, 
Part I., cap. 43, contends that Luke wrote b toT; ayyiXoig ; for 
he is of opinion, that Luke wrote this epistle, p. 98 ; and this 
opinion is not inconsistent with Clem, Alex, adumbr. on 1 Pet. 
v. 13, where Luke is said to have translated the Epistle of Paul 
to the Hebrews, although we have proved above that it was 
written in ^^^tfMil|l himself. All the copies'* have b nii 
-rpoprirai; ; anoB U^^*""! showing the excellence of Christ by 
using so manyo^SparSns, certainly prefers Him to the pro- 
phets also, and to them all : Matt. xi. 13, xii. 41 ; John viii. 53. 
But it prefers Him to the prophets, if not in this passage, then 
nowhere else ; and here, indeed, it touches upon it, as it were by 
the way, at the very beginning, as this comparison is immediately 
after swallowed up by others more illustrious. In the mean 
time, this mention of the prophets summarily, made at the very 

> A part for the whole. See Append, 
this Enitn"^v,"!'7°"^' '""«»»'«»««. does not only refer to the MS. copies of 
quoted --rk ''"' "^"''"^ '° ^^^" '''"^'' '° "^'"^ "''^ P*=^^S« '"^y''* 



HEBREWS I. 1. 33» 

beginning of the epistle, admirably anticipates objections, and 
presents a conciliatory argument ; so that the apostle hereby 
declares, that he embraces the whole scripture of the Old Testa- 
ment, and asserts nothing contrary to it. Wolfius has more on 
this passage. 

Moses occupies the first place among the prophets, of whom 
Paul afterwards speaks separately. The antithesis of the pro- 
phets and the Son is the same as in Matt. xxi. 34, 37, and th 
very appellation, Son, indicates His excellence above the pro- 
phets : and whatever is presently said of the angels [as to their 
inferiority to the Son] is intended to be understood as holding 
good much more of the prophets. — l^r lir^^arou raJn ti/aspcav tovt<>iv, 
in the last of these days) There is a similar expression in Num. 
xxiv. 14, QiDTI JTiiriNn, LXX., sw egxo-TOU tUv iifiepuv ; in like 
manner, 1 Pet. i. 5, 20, and in a different sense 2 Tim. iii. 1, 
note. The antithesis is vtiXai, in time past. The apostle inti- 
mates, that no further speaking was afterwards to be expected. 
This whole epistle, concerning which comp. 2 Pet. iii. 15, sets 
before us the end of all things as at hand : ch. ii. 8, ix. 26, 28, 
X. 13, 25, 37, xi. 40, xii. 23, xiii. 4. — eXdXrieev, hath spoken) all 
things, in one most perfect way [as contrasted with the many 
ways of revealing Himself formerly]. — rif^n, to us) The antithesis 
is roTg varpaeiv, unto the fathers. — h Tiifi, in the Son) 'En often 
denotes by, but here it has a higher meaning ; comp. John xiv. 
10. How great a prophet is the very Son of God ! The name, 
Son, is put here by Antonomasia,^ as equivalent to a proper 
name ; but a proper name in Hebrew is without the article ; and 
so in the present case the article is omitted. It is also omitted 
in ver. 5, iii. 6, v. 8, vii. 28. So nn, Ps. ii. 12. God hath 
spoken to us in the Son alone. The apostles were also spoken 
to ; who themselves also are considered in the light of persons 
to whom the word was spoken, before that they could speak the 
word to others : they were wji/ilra; roD Xoyov, ministers of the 
word ; but the apostles taught nothing new after Christ, and as 
the Father spoke in the Son, so the Son spoke in the apostles. 
The Son also spoke by the prophets in the Old Testament : but 
in a different manner. The majesty of this Son is set forth, 

' See Append. 



340 HEBREWS I. 2, 3. 

I. Absolutely, — a) by the very name of Son, ver. 1 ; /3) by 
three glorious predicates, expressed by as many finite verbs 
along with the pronoun who : Whom He has appointed, by 
WJiom He made. Who sat down ; and in this way His course, as 
it were, is described fi:om the beginning of all things till He 
reached the goal, ver. 2, 3. H. In comparison with the angels, 
ver. 4. The Confirmation presently after corresponds to this , 
proposition, and the very name of Son is presently proved at 
ver. 5 ; as also the inheritance, at ver. 6-9 ; the making of the- 
worlds, ver. 10—12 ; the sitting on the right hand, at ver. 13, 14. 
Let us consider them one by one. 

2. "Ov E^))jc£ xXripovofjiyOv rrdvTCiiv, whom He appointed heir of all 
things) Immediately following the name of Son, mention is appro- 
priately made of the inheritance or heirship ; and God really ap- 
pointed Him heir, before that He made the worlds, Eph. iii. 11 ; 
Prov. viii. 22, 23 ; hence in the text the making of the worlds 
follows after the heirship. As the Son, He is the first-begotten : 
as the Heir, He is the heir of the whole universe, ver. 6. — 5/ ou 
xa,! Imiriat Toiig alZvag) This is the ancient order of the words : 
by whom also He made the worlds. The emphasis of the particle 
xa,!, also, falls on the verb made in this sense : He not only ap- 
pointed the Son heir of all things before creation, but also made 
the worlds by Him.^ The particle hit, by, takes away nothing 
from the majesty of the Son. On the fact, see ver. 10 ; and on 
the particle, comp. ch. ii. 10. By the Son He made the viorlds, 
and all things that are therein ; ch. xi. 3. Therefore the Son 
was before all worlds ; and His glory is evident, looking back- 
wards to anterior times, although it is not until these last days 
that God has spoken to us in Him. Indeed in this way He has 
conferred on these last days complete salvation. 

3. "Os — u-vJ/JiXo/i, who — on high) This is the third of those 
glorious predicates. He sat down on the right hand of the Majes^ 
on high. Again, three points of importance are introduced into 

' Therefore in the Germ. Vers., which has put the word gemacht last, we 
must compensate by pronunciation for what the author has here conceded 
to convenience of arrangement. — E. B. 

ABD(A) corrected, / Vulg. Memph. Syr. read the order as Bengel does. 
But Rec. Text, without any very old authority, save Orig. 4, 60c, and later 
Syr., read roii; aluva.; ' oi'miv. — Ed, 



HEBREWS I. 3, 341 

this predicate, by the three participles. Paul mentions these 
points in the same order, Col. i. 15, 17, 20. The first participle 
and likewise the second, from the finite verb ixdheev, sat down, 
being the aorist, have the meaning of an imperfect tense, and 
may be resolved into because, uiv, (pifuv n, because (inasmuch as) 
He was, because (inasmuch as) He was upliolding (comp. &)v, 
ch. V. 8) ; but the third, as being without the particle «, and, 
cohering more closely with the same finite verb, is to be resolved 
into after that : 'iroirisd/nvo;, after that He made. — uiv — (pipuv n, 
because [inasmuch as] He was — and upheld) That glory, on 
which the Son entered when He was exalted to the right hand 
of the Father, no angel was capable of taking, but the Son 
took it ; for He also had it formerly in respect of God, whose 
glory shines refulgently in Him, and in respect of all things, 
which He upholds ; John vi. 62 ; Rev. i. 18. — dvalyaeiLa, the 
brightness) Wisd. vii. 25, 26 : For she (wisdom) is the breath of 
the power of God, and a pure influence flowing from the GLOET 
(aOSHS) of tlie Almighty : therefore no defiled thing falls into 
her. For she is the brightness (AnATFASMA) of the everlast- 
ing light, and the unspotted mirror of the power of God, and the 
image of His goodness. 'Airh has in this compound word an 
intensive power — as in awoBTiX^ai, a-roxusia, a.'jrorixTiit, am^ii, — not 
the power of diminishing. It does not imply less or greater, 
but propagation [extension of the Father's glory]. — rij; &6^ri?, oj 
the glory) Glory denotes the nature of God revealed in His 
brightness, the same as His eternal power and Godhead, Rom. i. 
20. — yjx.pa.xrnp, the impress, the express image) Whatever the 
hypostasis (personal essence) of the Father has, that is repre- 
sented in the Son, as His express image. — h'Koet&eecai, of His 
hypostasis) [of His personal essence]. If we gather fi-om the 
LXX. the meaning of this word, variously used by them — never 
however concerning GoD — it denotes here the immoveable ever- 
lastingness of the Divine life and power ; comp. ver. 11. There- 
fore the parallels are 3o'f a, the glory, always undefiled [' incor- 
ruptible'], Rom. i. 23, and bvoaraeig, the hypostasis or personal 
essence, which always holds as it were the same place. It was 
with this feeling that the old Rabbins, as it would seem, called 
God mpD, Place, or rather State. — ra irana, all things) [the uni- 
verse\ The article is to be refeixed to vdvroiv, of all things, ver. 2. 



342 HEBREWS 1. 4. 

rSj pfii/-a,ri, hy the word) The Son of God is a person ; for He 
has the word. — odiTov) The same as lauroD in the next clause. — b! 
iavnZ) by Himself, i.e. without the external Levitical instrumen- 
tality or covenant. This power of His shines forth from the 
titles already given. — xaSapig/jihv, purification) There hes hidden 
here an anticipation.' When Christ lived in the flesh, it did 
not appear that so majestic things should be predicated of Him ; 
but the apostle replies, that His sojourn in the weakness of the 
flesh was only for a time, for the purging of our sins. In this 
chapter he describes the glory of Christ, in that light chiefly, as 
He is the Son of God ; then subsequently he describes the 
glory of Christ as man, ch. ii. 6. He mentions the actual glory 
of the Son of God before His humiliation in a summary man- 
ner ; but His glory after His exaltation, most fuUy ; for it was 
from this exaltation in particular, and not before, that the glory 
which He had from eternity began to be most clearly seen. 
And the purging of our sins, and subsequent sitting on the right 
hand of the Majesty, are most fully treated of in ch. vii., etc. — 
cxdSigev, He sat down) by the will of the Father ; comp. 'iOtixi, 
He appointed, ver. 2. On this sitting, see ver. 13, 14. The 
ministering priests stood; the ste'n^r therefore denotes the accom- 
phshment of the sacrifice, and the glorious kingdom begun. By 
this finite verb, sat down, after the participles, is implied the 
scope, subject, sum of the epistle; comp. viii. I.—tTj; /j,iyaKu- 
evvrii) of the Majesty, i.e. of God. — h u-^rjXoTg, on high) in the 
heavens, viii. 1. 

4. TosouTifi, so much) This verse has two clauses, of which, hy 
Chiasmus, the second is discussed in ver. 5, but the first in ver. 
13 ; and the Interrogation gives a point to both. The Chiasmus,^ 
"X^f*"' X"^"'^'''} oratio decussata, is so frequent in this epistle, that 
the observation of this figure alone contributes very much to the 
explanation of the epistle. See ver 9, ch. ii. 9, 12, 17, iii. 1, 8, 
iv. 14, 15, 16, V. 7, vL 7, vii. 6, viii. 4, 10, ix. 1, x. 20, 23, 33, 
38, xi. 1, 33, xii. 22, 23, 24, xiii. 10, with the annott. It may 
be asked. Why, in this one epistle, does that figure occur in every 
chapter ? Ans. It is shown, at some of those passages wliich I 

' ' Occupatio.' All anticipation of an objection that might be' raised, 
and which is therefore answered beforehand. See Append. — Ed. 
* See Appendix 



HEBREWS 1. 5. 843 

have just now quoted, that Paul uses the Chiasmus even else- 
where, but more frequently to the Jews; and Surenhusius 
shows, in the jS/jSXos xaraXXayris, p. 78, etc., 607, 608, that 
their teachers greatly delight in this figure of speech in their 
writings. Therefore the apostle, who became all things to all 
men, has adapted his style to the Hebrews; and these men, 
who were guided by the Spirit, had quite ready at their com- 
mand all the forms of discourse, in a greater degree than the 
most practised rhetoricians. — xpelrrtav yivof/iivog, being made better) 
by His exaltation, ver. 3, 13. The antithesis is ri\aTTu//,ivov, 
made loioer or less, eh. ii. 9. This may be compared with Mark 
X. 18, note, [where Jesus, in His voluntary humiliation, saith, 
"Wliy callest thou Me good?" etc.] xpiiTrm, better, more ex- 
cellent, more powerful : o! xpilmvig, the gods, among the ancient 
heathens. — ruv ayyiXuv, than the angels) whose excellence is 
elsewhere spoken of as great. — ^raf' aurous) vapii denotes great 
pre-eminence above [as compared with] others. Comp. vapa,, ver. 
9, ch. iii. 3. Angels are excluded in part explicitly, ver. 5, 13, 
and in part by impHcation ; for while none of them has taken 
this name, the Son of God, from that very circumstance they 
are not the heirs of this name, and therefore not the heirs of all 
things ; but they are a portion, no doubt a distinguished one, of 
the inheritance of the Son, whom they worship as Lord, ver. 6 : 
nor were the worlds created by them, but rather they them- 
selves were created, ver. 7. — }i.i>tXripov6/^rix.iv 'ivof/,a, He hath in- 
herited a name) The name of Son is proper for the Son, because 
He is the Son ; and in this name principally the inheritance con- 
sists. ^ZZ ^/w'n^s are an addition to the inheritance, ver. 2. The 
inheritance of the name is more ancient than the worlds them- 
selves. The inheritance of all things is as old as all things them- 



5. T/w ycip, for to which [whom]) A frequent argument in 
this epistle is derived from the silence of Scripture: ver. 13, 
ch. ii. 16, vii. 3, 14. — rZv ayjikm, of the angels) For none of 
them took [was capable of taking] this glory. — Tik, the Son) 
Acts xiii. Z^.—iyii—r'ih) So the LXX., 2 Sam. vii. 14. That 
promise, I will he to Him a Father, and He shall be to Me a 
Son, had regard to Solomon, but much more, considering how 
august the promise is, to the Messiah ; otherwise Solomon also 



344 HEBREWS I. 6. 

would be greater than the angels. The seed of David, or the 
Son of David, is one name, under which, according to the 
nature (relation) of the predicate, sometimes Solomon, some- 
times Christ — sometimes Solomon, and at the same time, in a 
higher sense, Christ — is intended ; an ambiguity well suited to 
the times of expectation, Ps. Ixxxix. 27, 28. The apostles are 
the true interpreters of the Divine words, even though we should 
not have arrived at such an idea (such a mode of interpretation) 
as this without them [had it not been for their interpreting 
Scripture so]. 

6. 'Orav he makiv eleayayri rhv vpcaroToxov iig rnv oixov/iivrjv, and 
again, when He brings His First-begotten into the world) Comp. 
with orav, when, orav in James i. 2, joined with the 2d Aor. 
subj. Tlie particle 5s, but, intimates that something more im- 
portant is to follow. Not only is the Son greater than angels, 
but He is worshipped by angels, ij o/xou/ibj), is the world subject to 
Christ, ch. ii. 5, as the First-begotten ; see the psalm last quoted, 
and presently about to be quoted. This introduction implies 
something more than a mission, or mere sending. Both, how- 
ever, take for granted t^v vpotvap^iv, the pre-existence of the Son 
of God ; and His entrance into the world corresponds to that 
pre-existence : ch. x. 5. He entered, by the will of God, when 
He presented Himself to do the wiU of God, ch. x. 5 ; with 
which comp. ch. ix. 11 ; when He came into the world, as He is 
everywhere said to have done. TiaXiv, again, is brought in, cor- 
responding to the common word, likewise, where scripture upon 
scripture is quoted, ver. 5, ch. ii. 13, x. 30 ; but the meaning 
of this particle is more clearly seen when it is enclosed in a 
parenthesis, the verb, I say, or some other of that kind, being 
supplied, in this manner : But when (I shall again state what 
God says concerning His Son) He brings in His First-begotten. 
So John xii. 39, They could not believe, because (I shall again 
quote Isaiah) the same prophet says. He has blinded, etc. Matt. 
V. 33, Ye have heard (I shall again bring forward an example) 
that it was said to the ancients. For the forms of quotation are 
somewhat freely introduced into a speech ; ch. viii. 5, ipa y&f 
fn"!, instead oi For, He says. See. 

The appellation. First-begotten, includes the appellation. Son, 
and further shows the force of its signification. For it involves 



HEBREWS I. 7. S-IS 

the rights o{ primogeniture, which the Only-begotten most emi- 
nently possesses. Paul also uses similar language, Rom. viii. 
29 ; Col. i. 15, 18. In this passage, the appellation, First-be- 
gotten, includes the description of the subject of Whom the 
Psalm is treating, with the JEtiology' or reason given for the 
predicate, viz. He is brought in, for He is the First-begotten- — 
Xiyii, He says) An abbreviated mode of expression. When the 
bringing in was predicted, the word was given ; when the bring- 
ing in was accomplished, the same word was fulfilled. He says, 
viz. God ; comp ver. 5. Therefore the word aire. Him, pre- 
sently after, refers to the Son. — %ai irpoexuvriadrasav airp wdvrii 
ayyiKoi ©sou, and let all the angels of GoD worship Him) Lxx., 
Deut. xxxii., before ver. 43, has these words : iu<ppa,v6riTs olpam) 
tt/ta auTjS xa/ 'jrpoaxuvriedTueav avTtfi vavTsg ayyiXoi ©sou, which are 
wanting in the Hebrew text and in the Chaldee Paraphrase. 
Mill is of opinion that the omission was occasioned long ago by the 
recurrence of the verb Winn. Then [after the words in the lxx. at 
the beginning of ver. 43] there follows in Moses, ilxppdvSriTi 'ihn 
litTot, rou Xaou ahroii, 1DJ? D''1J yjlii (where 3 after D is wanting), 
which Paul, Rom. xv. 10, also refers to the times of the Messiah. 
Moses, especially in the Song, wrote of Christ. Nevertheless, 
Ps. xcvii. 7 has, Tpoexwrjean airSi 9ravrss 0/ ciyysXoi aurou ; and 
Paul refers to this psalm, for the bringing in of the First-begotten 
into the world, in this passage, corresponds to the inscription of 
the psalm in the LXX, rj<J Aa^id, on it yjj auTou xa6!(Sra,rai, that is, 
of David, when the land is brought under his authority, as 
Oederus has observed. 

7. Upig, unto) [Engl. Vers, of, i.e. in reference to] " He saith 
to the angels," by an indirect speech ; comp -rphg, to, xi. 18, note, 
[" Li reference to whom it was said. In Isaac shall thy seed be 
called."] The apostle seems also to have had in his mind ver. 20 
of 103d Psalm, which immediately precedes the passage, Ps. civ. 
4. — X'syti, He saith) viz. God, by the prophet. — ■itoiuv — (pXoya) 
LXX., in exactly as many letters, Ps. civ. 4. nvEu,«aTa, spirits, 
and wvphs (pXoya, a flame of fire, signify not only the office of 
angels, but their very nature, which is no doubt of surpassing 
excellence, as the metaphor is taken from things the most effica- 

1 ^tiologia. See Append. 



340 HEBREWS I, 8, 9. 

cious and the most subtile, but yet very far inferior to the ma" 
jesty of the Son. Therefore the expression, micov, who maketh, 
intimates that the angels are creatures, made by His command ; 
but the Son is eternal, ver. 8, and the Creator, ver. 10. The 
subject, viz. ayyikoi, angeh, and Xnrovpyo!, ministers, as is proved 
by their being put with the article,^ has its antithesis in ver. 8, 9. 
Moreover, the antithesis of Who makes, intimating the creation 
of the angels, is found in ver. 10, 11. I consider it to be the 
predicate of the Father ; comp. ver. 8. 

8. Uphs rh r'lhv to the Son) by a direct speech. Comp. vphg, 
to, ver. 7. — o Spovo; — /mto'x^ous aov) So again, the LXX. say dis- 
tinctly, Ps. xlv. 7, 8, Thy throne, God, is for ever and ever : 
the sceptre (rod) of thy kingdom is a sceptre (rod) of righteousne^. 
Thou hast loved righteousness, and hast hated iniquity ; therefore 
God, even thy God, has anointed thee with the oil of gladness 
above thy fellows. Concerning the Throne, comp. Lam. v. 19, 
[^Government over all is indicated. — V. g.] — o Qiog, God) The 
vocative case with the article is in the highest degree emphatic. 
They clearly do violence to the text, who hold the opinion, that 
it is the nominative case in this passage, as Artemonius does, 
Part. ii. c. 2. The Throne and the Sceptre are joined ; nor did 
God say, / will be thy throne, but, / will establish the throne of 
the son of David; Ps. Ixxxix. 5, 30, 37. — a/ww sMttito;, for 
ever : of righteousness) Eternity and righteousness are attributes 
very closely connected, Ps. Ixxxix. 15, where the words p3D and 
IDHp'' should be well considered. See also ver. 3 of this Ps. xlv., 
where DPIp may be taken into consideration. 

9. A/A j-oiiro, therefore) From the love of righteousness, in 
which Christ excels, there is deduced here not so much His 
anointing, as the duration of the office for which He was 
anointed. This discourse has four parts : the throne — the sceptre 
— thou lovest — therefore. Of these the first and fourth, the 
second and third, are parallel by Chiasmus ; for the former de- 
scribe the supreme happiness of the King ; the latter. His virtue. 
— Qihg, &toi ecu) It may be resolved thi;s : God, who is thy 
God. Comp. Ps. xliii. 4, Ixvii. 7 : but the Son Himself is called 

' The article always distinguishes the subject from the predicate : there- 
fore we cannot translate, " Who maketh winds His angels, or messengers, 
and a flame of fire His ministers." — Ed. 



347 

God, as in the preceding verse. — 'iXaiov ayaXXidgias) the oil of 
gladness, and everlasting joy, is the Holy Spirit. — ■jrapa rovg 
/iiroy^ous eov, above [as compared with] thy fellows) These fellows 
may seem to some the angels ; for even the angels have the name 
of gods, sons of God, morning stars, although in a far lower sig- 
nification ; and the name oi Angel is wont to be given to the Son 
of God, although with a more majestic meaning. And indeed 
the Son of God has the angels as His companions, Gen. xviii. 2 ; 
Job xxxiii. 23 ; Ps. Ixviii. 18 ; 1 Tim. iii. 16 ; Matt. xxv. 31 : 
and it might have seemed proper that He should rather assume 
[take to Himself as associates] angels than the seed of Abraham, 
if a different economy [dispensation] had not demanded some- 
thing different, ch. ii. 16 ; and that very humiliation, of which 
Ibid., ver. 7, takes for granted intercourse with them. In short, 
the 45th Psalm itself addresses Christ as God in this very verse, 
and a little before as 1133, brave, strong, ver. 4 ; a term applied to 
the angels, Ps. ciii. 20. Therefore the angels may appear to be 
called the fellows of Christ, especially since Paul refers all the 
sayings here quoted to the superiority of Christ above the angels. 
Nevertheless the peculiar relationship of Christ to men leads us 
to conclude, that men are here meant by " His fellows," ch. ii. 
11, etc. For the Bridegroom has His companions, as the Bride 
has hers, Ps. xlv. 14 : and there is the same comparison, ibid. ver. 
2, Thou art fairer than the sons of men. 

10. Ka/', and) This particle connects the testimonies. — eii %a.z 
a.f)(kc, — ouz iyCkil-^iaMdi) Ps. cii. 26-28 ; LXX. xar a.(yji.i ffi), Ku/j;s, 
T)i» yrst, etc., the remainder in the same words. The time of the 
creation is intimated, to which the end of the world is opposed ; 
and by this very fact. Dissertation iii. of Artemonius is done 
away with. — ei. Thou) The same to wliom the discourse is 
directed in the preceding ver. — Y-lifn, Lord) The LXX. have 
repeated that from ver. 23 of the same psalm. Christ is 
preached (proclaimed) even in those passages, where many 
might contend that the writer was principally spealdng of the 
Father. — ynv, the earth : oipavol, the heavens) A gradation. There 
is no reason why the angels may not be included in the word 
heavens, as the creation of man is included under the word earth, 
which passes away. 

11. Auro;, they) the earth and heaven. — amXoiJvTcti, shall 



348 HEBREWS I. 12-14.-II. 1. 

perish) There is the same word at Luke v, 37 ; James i. 11 ; 1 
Pet. i. 7 ; 2 Pet. iii. 6. 

12. 'AWd^eig, Thou sJialt change. — aXXoiy^eoirai, they shall be 
changed) Many read for aKXd^iii, ixl^sig : but there is the one 
verb ^bn twice in the Hebrew, which the LXX. often translate 
aXKdgscii, never by ikieeoi} — o aurJ;) Sin, the same, never another 
(anything different), without old age and change. See Hiller, 
Onom., p. 71, 262. So 1 Sam. ii. 10 nin'', lxx. Airo's. 

13. As, hut) An Epitasis. [See Append.] 

14. Udvrig, all) although distinguished into various orders by 
various names, implying even some dominion : Eph. i. 21. — 
XeiTovpyixd — a'!roereXX6/jt,sm, who minister — who are sent) They 
minister before God [are employed in praises. — V. g.] ; are sent, 
viz. abroad, to men [in order that they may execute the com^ 
mandments of GoD concerning other created things. — V. g.J 
Both are opposed to sitting at the right hand. Comp. Luke i. 
19. — roi; fiiXXoiiras xXripovo/MTv, those who shall receive the inherit- 
ance of) i.e. the elect, and them who believe or who are about to 
believe. A sweet periphrasis. — aurripiav, salvation) from so many 
and so great dangers. 



CHAPTEE IL 

1. Aef) Elsewhere he uses the verb oipifKsiv, to owe ; here isT, 
it behoves. The former implies obligation; the latter urgent 
danger, ver. 3. Now the discourse is verging towards exhorta- 
tion, point by point corresponding to the preceding chapter, 

1 It must be observed, however, that the marg. of the 2d Ed., dififering 
from the larger Ed., does not assign a greater value to the reading «?iA«|e/f 
than to i'hi^ui. Umwenden, which is read in the Germ. Vers., accords with 
this. Therefore the latter views of Bengel are not refuted but confirmed 
by the decision which Ernesti gives, Bibl. th., T. vi., p. 6. But the same 
learned man, T. v., p. 216, reminds us that aXXals/f and k'hi^eii, in the 
idiom found in Hebraizing Greek, are the same as. Thou slialt abolish, 
shah reduce to nothing. Let them so consider who can. — E. B. 

AB and the oldest MS. of Vulg. Amiat. have shl^u;. D(A) corrected,yj 
and Victor's Vulg. have aXKa^ns. — Ed. 



HEBREWS II. 2, 349 

concerning Christ the prophet, the liing, the priest : concerning 
Him as the prophet, for it is said, He hath spoken, ver. 2 : con- 
cerning Him as king, for it is said, Thy throne, ver. 8 : concern- 
ing Him a& priest, for it is said, He hath made purification, ver. 
3. And so ch. ii., concerning Him as prophet, presently in ver. 
1, etc. : concerning Him as king, Thou hast crowned, ver. 7 : con- 
cerning Him as priest, everywhere. The exhortation begins in 
the first person ; then becomes stronger in the second, ch. iii. 1. 
— mpmoTepag, the more abundantly) The comparative in the strict 
sense ; comp. the following verses : it is construed with diT, it 
behoves. — -nfoaiyiiv, to attend, to give heed) by obedience ; comp. 
ver. 2, note. — rati axouehTgi, to the things which we have heard) 
The reference is to ch. i. 1, at the end : and comp. below ver. 3, 
ch. V. 11. The part (office) of speaking and hearing is, there- 
fore, superior to that of writing and reading. — /jj^mn ■jrapappuu/^.ev) 
2d Aorist pass, with an act. signification, fi-om piuu, [flow, and / 
pour out; lest at any time, he says, we should [let them slip, Engl. 
Vers.] flow past (them) ; i.e. allow them to flow away with ex- 
treme levity of inind ; comp. Gen. xlix. 4. The apostle had 
respect to the LXX., Prov. iii. 21, v'ii, /iij •jrapappvrjg, do not flow 
or slip by them, my son, let them not depart from thine eyes ; 
where also, ver. 20, we read, vspjj sppiri Sp6au, the clouds dropped 
with dew, in an active sense ; and so everywhere. Zosimus, 1. 2 : 
ij 'Piii/jLaluv oipytt vireppvti xara ^pa^u, the empire of the Romans 
gradually failed. Greg. : iVa jj^n s^lrriXa rffl x!""'?' y^i'i''"' ra xaXot 
xal //ifi -rapocppvfi, that what is beautiful should not be effaced by 
time and should not slip away. This word frequently occurs in 
a metaphorical sense. * Hesychius : •?rapa^puZfji,sv, i^oKieSZ/jbev. The 
punishment of the slothful is expressed by a similar word, 
irdxrjSav, they wasted away, or were consumed, Wisd. i. 1 6. The 
word stands : the slothful man slips away. 

2. A/' ayy'iXuv, by angels) Aia, by, is taken in the strict sense, 
as in the following verse, comparing the words of Paul, Gal. 
iii. 19. Otherwise the apostle's argument fi:om angels to the 
-iord would not hold good, ver. 5. God therefore spoke by 
angels, Ex. xx. 1, [in such a way, however, as that it was the 
very sound of God's voice, xii. 26. — ^V. g.] In the New Testa- 
ment God spoke by the Lord. — hyinTo ^e^ouog, was made sted- 
fast) its authority being established by the penalties incuned 



36C HEBREWS U. 3. 

on the part of those who were guilty of its violation. — ir&ga, 
every) without respect of persons. — 'xapa^aeig xat vafaKoii) 
irapa^agii, transgression, by doing evil : irapaaori, disobedience, 
by neglecting to do good. The Metonymy of the abstract for 
the concrete, viz. for the transgressor and disobedient, who 
properly receive the recompense of reward. The antithesis in 
the concrete is, we neglecting [if we neglect], ver. 3 ; the 
antithesis to which in the abstract is, ver. 1, vpoeB^eiv roTg axovo- 
SeTsi, to give heed to those things which have been heard. As?' has 
the accusative with the infinitive. Thence the sentiment : We 
(the subject) ought to give heed to those things which are heard (the 
predicate). This predicate has the antithesis in the abstract. — 
iXa^ev, received) not only in the sanction, but in the execution. 

3. Hug riiJ^iTi ixpsu^ofi^eSa) how shall we escape the just and 
severe retribution ? So xii. 25, They did not escape ; (therefore) 
we shall not escape. — eairriplag) salvation, in the world to come, 
joined with glory, ver. 5, 10, notes. The term salvation, which 
is repeated in the tenth verse, is akin to the name Jesus, which 
resounds in the gospel of salvation. — apx'ji', beginning) Formerly 
there had not been preached so great a salvation, and by so 
august an interpreter [exponent or mediator of it]. — XaXeTsSai, 
to be spoken) from His baptism up to His ascension. Acts i. 2. 
— di^ rou Kvplov, by the Lord) A majestic appellation; comp. 
oh. iii. 4, and the following verses ; Ps. ex. 1. He does not 
say here, by our Lord ; for he intimates that He is also Lord 
of the angels, whom the angels themselves call Lord : Luke ii. 
11 ; Matt, xxviii. 6. [Whatever is mentioned, ch. i., and after- 
wards, ver. 7-10, is included in this appellation. — ^V. g.] The 
antithesis is, by angels, ver. 2. Comp. ver. 5, and the following. 
— M Tuv axovedvTtav) by those who had heard it face to face from 
the Lord Himself. They also had been eye-witnesses and 
ministers, Luke i. 2 : but the apostle mentions their having 
heard Him here, agreeably to what he began with, ver. 1, 2. 
The apostle has regard not only to the evangelical history in 
general, but even to particular heads of it, for example, that 
concerning the supplication in the garden, etc., ch. v. 7, note. 
Paul, writing to the churches of the Gentiles generally, speaks 
aiuch of his calling, and of the fruits of his labour ; but here, 
when he writes to the brethren of the circumcision, he most 



HEBREWS II. 4, 5. 351 

especially appeals to the apostles who had been long with the 
Lord; comp. Acts i. 21, x. 41, xiii. 31, note; and he only- 
appeals to the testimony of those apostles in a general way, in 
order that he may bring the Hebrews to the Lord alone. — s/'s 
rifio,^, to us) This denotes that age then present. — i^iBaiiiSri, has 
been confirmed) not by penalties, but by spiritual gifts. This 
word corresponds to l3il3a,iog, firm, stedfast, ver. 2. 

4. 2unm/iaf>rufoCvros) A double compound. It is the office of 
Christ to testify, it belongs to God to superadd testimony : and 
He did so, both when Christ was walking upon the earth, by 
signs and wonders, and when He was taken up into heaven, by 
divers miracles, Acts ii. 22, 33. The whole of that testimony 
refers to the Lord Jesus Christ, Acts ii. 36, x. 36, 42 ; Eom. 
xiv. 10 ; 1 Cor. xii. 3 ; Phil. ii. 11. If any one should be in- 
clined to refer the divers miracles also to Christ, whilst He was 
still upon the earth, I have no objection. The parallelism 
mentioned in the following note, if I am not mistaken, has led 
me [to refer the divers miracles to the apostles after the ascen- 
sion]. — woixlKais, by vaiious or divers) The parallel is fiipi6/ji,oTe, 
divisions, distributions [Engl. Vers., gifts'] ; comp. 1 Cor. xii. 
11. — xaT& rrjn avrou SsXrjeiv, according to His will) most freely, 
most abundantly, most mercifiiUy, not according to the will 
(caprice) of them who receive them. Whence it is evident 
that the gift is quite supernatural, auroD, of God Himself. 

pn, LXX., 6iXri6is. 

5. Ou yap ayyeXoig, for not to angels) The -Etiology [assign- 
ing of a reason ; Append.], referring to ver. 3, where the terms 
salvation and Lord are skilfully introduced, serves the purpose 
of beginning a new paragraph. The greater the salvation, 
and the more glorious the Lord, that are despised, the more 
aggravated is the offence of them who despise them. God 
subjected both angels and all things, not to the angels, of whom 
nothing was written to that effect [implying any such intention], 
but to man, or the Son of Man, Jesus Christ. The angels had 
more to do in the Old Testament ; but in the New Testament, 
^hen human nature was exalted by Christ, the angels are our 
fellow-servants. I ventured to say, more to do ; and it may be 
also supposed from the antithesis, that greater reverence was 
due to the angels in the Old Testament than in the New Testa- 



362 HEBREWS 11. 5. 

ment, where they are now our fellow-servants. And from this 
very circumstance, that they are our fellow-servants, we under- 
stand that they are not inactive under , the New Testament, 
but merely that they act under a different relation from that 
under which they acted under the Old Testament. As in this 
passage angels are opposed to the Lord, so ver. 16, they are 
opposed to the brethren [ver. 11, 12]. The apostle couples 
believers alone with Christ alone. — ivsroc^e, subjected) This verb 
is now brought forward at once from the eighth verse, God 
subjected; for the language refers to ch. i. 1. — rfiv oixovfievfjv r^t 
fijiXkoveav, the world to come) There is but one earth, olxov/ihri, 
belonging to all times, ch. i. 6. Therefore the expression, the 
world to come, is used as we say to-morrow's sun, although there 
is but the one sun of all days. N3n in Hebrew is expressed by 
fiiXXouaa, in Greek. The. world is one (and the same world), 
under grace and under glory ; the epithet, to come, is added to 
it, not because it is not already existing, but because it was 
formerly predicted. The newness which was introduced by 
Christ in the New Testament is considered of so much import- 
ance in Scripture, that there arises from it a twofold division 
(dichotomia), viz. between the times of the Old and those of 
the New Testament, with one and the same eternity depending 
upon them. These latter taken together are called ij oixovfiivn 
n //,sXXov<fa, the world to come. They are ever and anon /jLiXXovra, 
about to come, when regarded from the Old Testament point of 
view, which prophetically looks forward to the New Testament ; 
but in the New Testament they are present Good things, obtained 
by Christ ; which commence while the world to come is in 
the course of being subjected to Him, at the time when first 
He was crowned with glory and honour. Concerning this ex- 
pression of Paul, comp. note at Rom. iii. 30. Although, even 
in reference to the time of this epistle, it is to come, fiiWovea, 
in its own way, viz. at the time when all things shall be made 
subject to Christ, even including death, 1 Cor. xv. 24, 25. 
Consider the not yet, ver. 8, and the actual description of " the 
world to come," ch. xii. 26, etc. The noun, world, is of very 
wide meaning. See the psalm which is presently quoted. 
TlaTtif roij MEAA0NT02 almog, Pater futuri seculi. Is. ix. 6, in 
the Greek and Latin versions ; the Father of the world to come ; 



HEBREWS II. 6. 353 

in our translation, " the everlasting Father." — mpl rii XaXoufnv, 
of which we speak) We speak, we teachers, ch. v. 11, note. By 
this clause the force of a proposition is obtained for [is imparted 
to] this short verse. And the proposition is, all tilings shall be 
subjected to Jesus Christ. 

6. Ais/iapruparo d's ffou Hg, but one in a certain place testified) 
one, viz. a witness. David did not here speak of himself; 
wherefore it was not necessary to introduce his name. Nor 
should we stop short with the intermediate messengers, but 
should look to the word of God, when it has testified once for 
all. David testified in Ps. viii., to which this chapter often 
refers, even from the tenth verse, as we shall see. A«, but, forms 
an antithesis between the angels and Him to whom the psalm 
testifies that all things are subjected.— r/ ism — mduv aurou) So 
altogether the LXX., Ps. viii. 5—7. That clause, and Thou hast 
set Him over tlie works of Thy hands, the apostle does not 
assume, at least in his reasoning, but deduces the " all things" 
fi:om what goes before and follows in the psalm. There are 
mentioned in that clause the works of God's hands, i.e. heaven, 
the moon and stars. (The sun is wanting, either because, as the 
slavery and deliverance of his seed was shown to Abraham in 
the night time, Gen. xv, 12 ; so the humiliation and exaltation 
of the Messiah were shown to David and sung by him during 
the night ; as also the word of the Lord seems to have come 
to Job by night, Job xxxviii. 7, 31, 32 ; or because Messiah, 
when forsaken on the cross, saw the moon and stars after that 
the sun was darkened.) But the authority of Christ continues 
beyond the duration of these. — ri lenv avifia'rroi) what is man 
with respect to the works of God, the heaven, etc. ; but what 
is man with respect to God Himself 1 The expression is thus 
more humble than if he had said : Who am I ? ^ man, Mpmiroi, 
without the article, as one of many. B^JK, a man, iraSnrh, 
subject to sufferings and death. — on //,ifi,v^sxji avrou, that Thou art 
mindful of him) Such is the description of the Messiah's con- 
dition, in which He might seem to have passed away from the 
remembrance and care of God. Whence, with wonderful 
humilty, He is astonished Himself at this very thing, the re- 
membrance of Him : how much more at so great glory prepared 
for Hun 1 It could not be otherwise. Acts ii. 24 ; but He prays 

VOL.*IV. Z 



3fl4 HEBREWS II. 7, 8. 

as if it could scarcely be so. — ri, or) DHK p, the son of man, in 
this passage, conveys the notion of something more insignificant 
than am, man. — vlog dvSpiimv) Dl« p, comp. Ps. xlix. 3.^ Again 
without the article. — emgxiirrr/ auroi/, takest account of him, visitest 
Mm) An increase in the force of the expression ; for remem- 
brance refers even to the absent ; ima^ii'irregia.i, to visit or look 
after, denotes the care of one present. 

7. Bpa^ii ri, a very short time) The same word occurs at Luke 
xxii. 58. — vap ayy'ikmi) In Ps. viii. 6, the Hebrew tOJJD imonni 
dTi^ND has this meaning : Thou hast made the Son of Man to be 
a little less than God, that is, than Himself. The beautiful para- 
phrase of Christopher Corner is as follows : Christ having become 
man, humbled Himself under the cross, and abased Himself below 
God, when the Divine nature remaining quiescent, and not exerting 
its power, God Himself and the Lord of Glory was crucified and 
put to death. — Expos. Psalm, p. 24. This is the force of Mem 
prefixed, 2 Chron. xv. 16 ; Is. lii. 14. See Nold. Concord, on 
this particle, § 21. Mem following "iDriD itself, Eccl. iv, 8. 
This mode of expression we find in another of Paul's phrases : 
/iri uv TeaQiSi and Tuviidas eavrov ; Phil. ii. 6, 7, note. But Paul 
retains the interpretation of the LXX interpreters as suited to his 
purpose ; for the homonymy^ of the Hebrew word D^npN signifies 
an invisible nature, and therefore, whether angelic or divine, 
superior to the human nature ; and He, who was made lower 
than the angels, was certainly made lower than God : but He 
as it were anew supplies the appellation, God, in ch. iii. 4. 
For so the apostle is accustomed to use appropriately to his 
purpose the words of the LXX interpreters, and to bring before the 
reader anew the force of the Hebrew words, when they are more 
to his purpose ; ch. x. 8, xii. 6, notes. 

^8. ndvTa hvira^ai) See 1 Cor. XV. 27, and what goes before 
with the annot. — yap, for) The apostle shows the reason why he 
quoted this passage, namely, because we are taught in it that it 
was Jesus to whom all things were subjected, and therefore 

' See the Hebrew Bis^Ja. Also Ps. cxliv. 3. — Ed. 

' Things differing in nature called by one name by analogy. Append. 
—Ed. 

' Tas iayx row x^ip"" fov, the works of Tfiy hands) The sun, moon, stars, 
etc., Ps. viii. 4. — V. g. 



HEBREWS II. 9. 855 

the world to come, vei*. 5. Often y&p, for, is useful for the 
Mtiology oi [assigning a reason for] wJiat is said; ch. vii. 14, 
ix. 24 ; and so Paul, Eom. iii. 28. — aura, aOrffl) under Him, 
under Him, the man of whom he is speaking, the Son of Man. 
This is explained in the middle of ver. 9, concerning Jesus, the 
application to Him having been most suitably put off till that 
place. — 7-(i Tavra) to, in the second and third place has the force of 
a relative to the ntaira, all things, which precedes. The same 
force of the article may be found at John xix. 5, 7 ; Gal. v. 
13, vi. 14. — ohhh, nothing) not even angels ; ver. 5, ch. i. 6. — 
afn'/iiv, left) in the language of the psalm, to which the events 
partly correspond, partly will correspond. — vvv Si o'iivu, but now 
not yet) Nvv, now, serves the purpose of an Anthypophora ;^ for 
the time is denoted in ouvu, not yet, and the latter is construed 
with opufiiv, we see, in antithesis to the present ^'Kiiroix.ev, we per- 
ceive? More things are already subjected to Christ than we see ; 
and all things will be entirely subjected to Him at the proper 
time, and we shall behold it ; Eph. i. 22 ; 1 Cor. xv. 27, 28. 
But why not yet all things ? Because both His body, the Church, 
is in distress, and He Himself is not acknowledged, at least is not 
seen. The verb /SXetw, Hook, I perceive, denotes something more 
definite ; opda, I see, something more extensive and more august. 
9. As, but) The antithesis is oetween that in tie psalm, which 
we do not yet see, and that which we already perceive fulfilled 
in Jesus. But what do we perceive ? We perceive, as regards 
Jesus, who was made a little lower than the angels, that He, on 
account of the suffering of death, has been crowned with glory 
and honour. In this paragraph, r{karroi[iAvoy {bia — kncpavati-hov) 
Sirag, x.r.X., is a Chiasmus, such as Paul has. Gal. iv. 4, 5 : and 
in the present clause, 8i&, x.r.X. (which clause requires no point 
before fiof jj), that for (on account of) which Jesus was crowned, 
namely, the suffering of death, is mentioned according to the 
natural order of the subject, and not without emphasis, before 

' Part of a refutation of an objection that might be made by anticipation. 
Append. 

' B^iviiv, to looh, to use the eyes, whether seeing something or not. 
'Opau, to see something; and is never used absolutely. Thus the Greeks 
never used ipit, but always fiy^iTriia, of the situation of a region. Tittm. 
Syn Ed, 



356 HEBREWS II. 9. 

tlie actual crowning. The apostle takes away from the Jews the 
offensive scandal (stumbling-block) of the cross : and so refutes 
the argument, which might be drawn from the sufferings of 
Christ against His glory, and that glory the source of glory to 
us also, as that he even inverts it [turns it into an argument for, 
instead of against Christ]. He shows that the suffering of death 
is so far from obstructing the glory and honour of the Messiah, 
that it rather confirms them to us. Whence he infers, that the 
fact of Jesus being " made lower than the angels," which was 
only for a little, did not refer to the circumstance that He should 
continue under the power of death, but that, after He had once 
suffered death to the utmost. He should have everything made 
subject to Him. It is Jesus to whom the humbling and crown- 
ing, as described in the psalm, apply. It is therefore the same 
Person, to whom also the power over all appropriately belongs, 
which (power) follows close after, in the gradation of the psalm. 
— ^payjj ri, for some little time [a little]) Some hours on the cross, 
days of suffering, years of toils, how little are they all, when 
compared with eternity ! — irap ayyiXou;, than the angels) who are 
incapable of suffering and dying. — ^XarTui/iivov) made wwer, less, 
a worm : comp. Luke xxii. 43. The participle implies, that 
Jesus of Himself, and for His own sake, might have entered 
upon glory without suffering; but the good of His brethren 
was Ukewise to be regarded. — ^Ximiiiv, we perceive) The act of 
looking, saith he, speaks (of itself). The same word occurs, 
ch. iii. 19, X. 25. The fact and the issue agree with the faith of 
the previous testimony; ver. 6, at the beginning. — rh m^n/^a, rou 
6amrou, the suffering of death) The suffering of death is the main 
feature [in His sufferings, and so is put for all the rest] : ch. v. 7. 
— U^rj xal Ti//.fi, with glory and honour) becoming the Son of God. 
[Glory presupposes death ; honour, suffering. — V. g.] — ienipam- 
ILivov, crowned) after death.— Svug, that) This ought to be con- 
nected with being made lower, and therefore denotes the end (the 
final cause). — %af/5-; ©eoS, by the grace of God) Some formerly 
read %w^;'s^ Siov, except God. Both readings give a good sense ; 
let us look at each. The clause with x'^P'h except, stands thus : 

' ABCD(A)/Vulg. read xh"'- Orig. 4,41c, 3926, 393c, 4506, reads 
Xip)f:butin the two first places quoted he mentions the reading ;<;«/i/t(, 
but evidently not as the generally received one.— Ed. 



HEBKEWS II. 9. 857 

Christ tasted death for every one except God. This sentence is 
to be explained by its members. I.) ndvrog, as the iravra, occur- 
ring five times in ver. 8, 10, is neuter, which is acknowledged 
by Orig. Theod. Ambros., quoted in Estius ; for in the mascu- 
hne it is wont to be plural, lirif ■jrdvTuv, 2 Cor. v. 15 ; 1 Tim. ii. 
6 : and the plural, <!rdvTuv and mai, is generally masc, some- 
times neuter ; but ■jravrh;, mmri, put without a substantive or a 
participle, are always neut. [but Engl. Vers. " for every man"]. 
See above, at 2 Cor. xi. 6 ; Mark ix. 49. The apostle shows 
the glory of Christ from the eighth Psalm, and especially from 
the clause. Thou hast put 73, everything, under His feet ; and he 
supplies the emphasis of the singular number (He put every- 
thing), which is contained in that significant syllable ^3, and was 
omitted by the lxx. transl., when he says, and only in this 
place, which is the leading strength (sinew) of his argument, 
wanro's. For woivrhe, neut., without the article, is good Greek, 
since it is used by Hesiod, •ttXeov rj/jneu -jravng, the half (obtained 
by fair means) is more than the whole (obtained unfairly). This 
wSiv, this all, to which o\j&h, nothing, likewise in the neuter, is 
opposed, ver. 8, and in which all, in the masc, are included, 
John iii. 35, 36, chiefly comprehends angels, than whom Christ 
had been made a little (ov for a little) lower; and thus the Pro- 
tasis and Apodosis correspond to each other, We do not yet see all 
things subject to Him, but yet that for which He tasted death is 
All, (mv), ' Omne.' II.) To taste death, implies the reality, 
and yet in this place also the shortness, of death ; as Chrysostom, 
Sedulius, Haymo, Flacius, on this passage, acknowledge. III.) 
Hence we at length gather the meaning of hitip, for all (javrhg, 
omni) ; Germ, um alles, not fiir alle : i<7rip denotes here the 
thing to be obtained, as in John xi. 4 ; 2 Cor. i. 6, xii. 8, 19 ; 
2 Thess. i. 5. He tasted death for all (omni), that He might 
claim all (' omne') for Himself, that He might obtain power 
over all things : or in other words, for this, that what was 
written might be fulfilled to Him, Thou hast put All (Omne) 
under His feet. IV.) That All has a very manifest and proper 
exception. Paul, 1 Cor. xv. 27, treating of the same psalm, 
the same verse, and the same word, b, all, adds, it is manifest 
that He is excepted, who put all things under Him. The same 
exception therefore is made in this place, ;^w/»''s &sou l-jrif liamLi, 



358 HEBREWS 11. 9. 

all, but God, ie subject to Christ : x^P'i ^ used to express an 
exception. So Epiphanius, 8i& 'jravrhs, %w^/j -jivrriiiogTric, at all 
times except Pentecost : hseres. Ixxv. Thomas Magister writes, 
H tXijh nal rh Jjcroj, to yoipii irikovei ; yj^ph is explained by -irXriv 
and ixTog, except. Theodoritus acknowledges that x'^P^^ in this 
passage expresses an exception ; and the parallelism of the 
psalm shows us what the exception is. And the exception itself 
very significantly, and yet, lest the discourse should be inter- 
rupted, very briefly, points out the vast extent of the things 
subject to Christ, which are absolutely all but God; and the 
exception is properly put before the subject, from which the 
exception is made. The same clause, if %a/;/r;, by grace, be re- 
tained, will be thus explained : that by the grace of God He might 
taste death for everything. By the grace of GoD in regard to us. 
Gal. ii. 21 ; Eom. v. 8, and to Jesus Himself. His enemies 
thought that Jesus suffered and died in consequence of the wrath 
of God, Ps. xxii. 8, 9, Ixix. 27 ; Isa. liii. 4 ; John xix. 7. But 
it was altogether by the grace of God, that He suffered and died, 
of which grace the gift is honour and glory : Phil. ii. 9, Exapiearo, 
" God hath given Him," etc. ; Luke ii. 40, 52 ; Eom. v. 15. 
And this noun, %«?"■/, expresses the same idea as the verbs, /i//ir- 
v^djitj, iiTisKivT-fl, rememberest ('■' art mindful"), visitest, ver. 6, 
from that eighth Psalm. In this interpretation, I'jrip Tavrl; 
might be equivalent to for all (men). Germ, filr alle, so far as 
the preposition is concerned, but the neuter, iroDiTog, is an objec- 
tion [therefore it must be for everything : in order that everything 
may be subject to Him]. "We now inquire which reading is 
genuine. I am not ignorant that x°'P'" i* more favourably 
received than x"f'?) ^'^^ ^ would be disposed, without any 
trouble, to dismiss the latter and adopt the former. But when 
the question concerns the word of God, even one little word of 
God, we ought to settle nothing merely to gain time. The 
over-ofEciousness of the transcribers, which seeks after all things 
plain, more easily changed xw^/g into x^-f^h tban xa^/n into 
%w^;j ; and yet x'^?'"^ remains in ancient, numerous, and imports 
ant documents. The list is given in App. Grit. To them may 
be added the book of the Abbot Anastasius against the Jews, 
who flourished in Palestine in the eighth century, directly exhi- 
biting this reading. Nor will any one, I hope, call in question 



HEBKEWS II. 10. 369 

this reading, nor the interpretation which has been here pro- 
posed by us ; yet it is open to the reader to consider the matter 
more fully. La Croze, Kb. iii., de Christianismo Indico, c. 3, 
§ 64, shows the consistency (unanimous agreement) of the 
Syriac copies in joining both readings. — yiUrirai, might taste) 
The reality of death is implied in this phrase, as everywhere 
else ; and here, as we have said, at the same time the shortness 
(rh ^pa,yp) of its duration, for denoting which the gen. ^amroM 
is well fitted ; comp. ch. vi. 4, note. To taste a part of death is 
one thing ; a part or the shortness of the time, in which the whole 
of death is tasted, is another.' Matt. xvi. 28 does not present 
any objection to the signification of shortness of duration ; for 
there the expression is negative, as in Luke xiv. 24. Moreover, 
Ps. xxxiv. (8) 9, gives weight to this view, ysuaagSi xal 7diTi, 
i.e. Only taste and you will see ; otherwise taste would not be 
put before sight. 

10. "E'TtpiTi, it became) So Ps. viii. 2 (1), llin, lxx., ij fisya- 
XoTpiwiid goM, " Thy becoming — magnificence (to which it be- 
came here alludes) is set above the heavens." Moreover (for 
the rest) in the whole of this verse 10, the proposition, which 
in verses 8, 9, was clothed in the words of the same psalm, is 
now set forth in words more ne^ly accommodated to the purpose 
of the apostle ; but with this difference, that ver. 8, 9, treat 
more expressly of glory, (taken) from what goes before, ver. 7 ; 
whereas ver. 10 treats more expressly of His sufferings, thereby 
preparing us for the transition to what follows. The predicate 
of the proposition is, It became Him, on account of whom all 
things, and by whom all things exist : The subject follows, to 
make perfect, or consummate, through sufferings the Captain of 
their salvation, who thereby brings many sons to glory. ^ 'Ayayovrot, 
might be resolved into ha, kyajisv TiXniigyi. But this is the' con- 
struction, ayayovToi. rh> apyTiyh, that the first Leader or Captain of 
salvation may be also the One bringing unto glory. ' A-fxiyhg is 

1 It is the latter, not the former, that is true of Jesus ; for He tasted the 
whole of death, though its duration was short. — Ed. , 

' Or, perhaps, Beng. takes TiT^siZaai thus : that the Captain of their sal. 
nation, in bringing {dyttyoura) many sons to glory, should make consumma- 
tion (viz. of His own work and glory, and so of theirs) through His suffer- 
ngt. Heb. xii. 2 favours this. — Ed. 



380 HEBREWS II. 10. 

compounded of af%)5 and ayoi ; and apx^ looks forward in the 
text to nXiiugoj (comp. ch. xii. 2), but ayu looks back to ayct- 
yivTo,. Therefore the proposition comprehends a number of im- 
portant sentiments, which may thus be unfolded : — 

1. Jesus is the Captain of salvation. 

2. It was necessary to procure salvation by suffering. 

3. He was perfected (consummated) by suffering. 

4. The glory of the sons was united with that consummation. 
f). The sons are many. 

6. This whole plan was highly becoming God, though unbelief 
considers it a disgrace. 

7. It became God, that Jesus should suffer and save the sons ; 
because for Him, are all tilings. 

8. It became God, that Jesus should be made perfect (consum- 
mated), and sons brought to glory ; for hy Him are all things. 

We set down four of these points, marked by as many letters, 
at the same time observing the order of the text : — 

A. B. 

The glory of the sons : The Captain suffering . 

C. D. 

The salvation of the sons : The consummation of the Captain. 

These points are referred to God, for whom and hy whom all 
things exist, i.e. to whom are to be attributed the beginnings 
and ends of all things. B and C refer to the beginnings of 
things, D and A to the ends of things. But the same four 
points are transposed in the text by Chiasmus, so that the dis- 
course proceeds in most beautiiul order from the end. A, to 
those intermediate, which are included in B C D. — aurS) Him, 
God the Father, who is mentioned in ver. 9, and is to be under- 
stood in ver. 5. — 3/ or 8i' o5, for whom : by whom) Paul gene- 
rally accumulates prepositions by a nice and elegant discriminar 
tion. — ToXXovg, many) as many as possible, whence ixxXriela,, the 
general assembly, in ver. 12. — vioug, sons) In the style of writing 
usual in the Old Testament, they are called vaiila, children; 
comp. ver. 13, 14, note : in the style of the New Testament 
they are vhl, sons, whose condition is opposed to slavery or 
bondage, ver. 15; as with Paul, Kom. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6. 
Jesus Himself is the Son ; He makes us sons of God, He con- 



HEBREWS II. 11. 861 

siders us as His own offspring : D''!?*, vailia, (soboles), offspring, 
are synonymous. Comp. Ps. xxii. 31 ; Is. liii. 10. — e/'s ho^av, 
unto glory) This glory consists in this very circumstance, that 
they are sons, and are treated as sons ; Rom. viii. 21. Examine 
John xvii. 10, 22, and that whole prayer ; and comp. ver. 7 of 
this second chapter. Glory and holiness, bringing unto glory 
and sanctification, have a very closely connected meaning ; ver. 
11. — rni euTTipiag axjTuv, of their salvation) This word presupposes 
destruction ; and that we might be delivered from it, Christ must 
suffer. Ao^a., glory, follows salvation, in the style of Paul,^ 2 
Tim. ii. 10, note. — riKuoigai, to make perfect, to consummate) 
Bringing to the end of troubles, and to the goal full of glory, 
ch. V. 9, is included in this word. A metaphor derived from 
the contests in the public games. For TiXuodgSai, riXudi, nXno- 
TTig, TiXiiiasig, riXnoirrig, regarding Christ and Christians, are fre- 
quent in this epistle. This perfecting by sufferings includes two 
points : I. The glory of Christ, inasmuch as all things are sub- 
jected to Him, now tfiat He has been made perfect. II. His pre- 
vious sufferings. He presently afterwards treats directly of 
His sufferings, ver. 11-18, although he has slightly referred to 
them in the preceding part of the chapter. He has put the 
discussion concerning Glory in this very passage first, for the pur- 
pose of sharpening (giving the more point to) his exhortation, and 
meeting beforehand the scandal attached to His suffering and 
death. But he has interwoven a fuller consideration of both points 
with the following discussion respecting the Priesthood, which 
is brought forward at ver. 17. And indeed, as regards His 
Sufferings, the fact is evident (openly stated) : but he describes 
the Glory (by implication), while he mentions, at convenient 
places, that Jesus was consummated or made perfect, that He is 
in heaven, that He is made higher than the heavens, that He sits 
at the right hand of God, that He will be seen a second time, that 
His enemies will be made His footstool : in this verse, and ch. iv. 
14, V. 9, vii. 26, 28, viii. 1, 2, ix. 24, 28, x. 12, 13, xii. 2. 

11. Tap, for) The closest relationship was the reason why it 
was becoming that Jesus should not be made perfect (consum- 

1 Note once for all— the frequent Italicising of PauZV name in such cases, 
is to show that his style accords with that of the -writer of this Epistle : a 
proof that Paul was the writer. — Ed. 



362 HEBREWS II. 12. 

mated) without us. — o dyidt^m, He that sanctifieih) Christ, ch. xiii. 
12. Christ is called He that sanctifieth, on account of that whole 
benefit, viz. that He by Himself makes us holy, i.e. divine [be- 
longing to God]. — 0/ ayia^o/ji.tm, they who are sanctijied) the people, 
ch. X. 10, 14, 29. To sanctify, to bring to God, to be sanctified, to be 
brought to GoD, to draw near, to have access, are synonymous. 
He who sanctifies was begotten by the Father, and appointed 
the Sanctifier ; they who are sanctified, are those created by 
God and appointed to receive sanctification ; comp. Uinxu, " The 
children whom God hath given me," ver. 13. This is the origin 
of His brotherhood (with us), and of His communion with flesh 
and blood (ver. 14). — sg hhg, of one) that sJc, one, is Abraham, 
as Mai. ii. 15 ; Is. li. 2 ; Ezek. xxxiii. 24. All men are of 
one, Adam ; all the descendants of Abraham are of one, Abra- 
ham. In this whole passage, Paul, writing to the descendants 
of Abraham, accommodates his discourse to them apart, ver. 16, 
17, ch. xiii. 12 ; as also in Ps. xxii., which is here quoted, ver. 
12, the writer is speaking of Israel, ver. 22, etc., but of the 
Gentiles, ver. 25—31 ; and the whole of the subsequent discus- 
sion respecting the priesthood and sacrifices is chiefly suited to 
the comprehension of the Hebrews. Wherefore, this epistle 
will at some time contribute much to the salvation of Israel. 
If this one meant God, the angels should be included, who are 
put away at ver. 16. — ita^nc,, all) This is construed with a-yia- 
Z^o/jihoi, who are sanctified; for he says -Travng, all; he would 
have said both, if he intended to include Him that sanctifies in 
the 'ravrig, all. — ohx s'lraia^vnTui) He is not ashamed, whereas, 
but for this cause (that they are of Abraham, who is considered 
not as a sinner, as in need of salvation, but as the common 
ancestor, as he who had received the promise), there might 
have been many things for which he might be ashamed [to call 
them brethren] ; for, far from being holy, we had been exceed- 
ingly guilty, ver. 14, 15: yet He is not ashamed; nay. He 
accounts it a glorious thing to Himself, because of the holiness 
and glory unto which He has brought us. It becomes God to 
have such sons restored to Him. Christ is not ashamed of such 
brethren ; comp. " God is not ashamed," ch. xi. 16, note. — xaXs/v) 
to call, to declare by calling. 

12. Aiyoiv, saying) Here three things are quoted from the 



HEBREWS II. 13. 8B3 

Old Testament, by which the preceding discourse of the apostle 
is admirably confirmed, by Chiasmus, in retrograde order. For 

the apostle mentions Christ says, in the words of the 

Old Testament, 
Ver. 10, So7is. Yer. 13, at the end, I and the 

cliildren. 
Ibid., The perfecting, or con- Ver. 13, at the beginning, / mi7^ 

summation hy sufferings. put My trust. 

Ver. 11, The relationship of Ver. 12, Unto My brethren. 
Him who sanctifies, and 
of those who are sanctified. 

And again, ver. 14-1 7, in inverted order, the children, and the 
successful work of Christ, and brethren, are mentioned. The two 
chains of quotations, ch. i. on the Glory of Christ, ch. ii. on Re- 
demption, most sweetly correspond to one another. — kmayjixZi — 
hfh^inisai ae) Ps. xxii. 23, LXX., S/jj/jjcro/Aa; : as to the rest, the words are 
the same. Messiah declares the name of the good Lord, which 
was unknown to His brethren, that the brethren may also praise 
Him. Ps. already quoted, ver. 24. — u/iv^ifw, 1 will sing') as the 
leader of the choir : comp. Ps. viii. 3. 

13. 'EyA 'iaofjjai vi'TToda; eir aurip, I will put my trust in Him') 
LXX. xal vsvoiSiic sffofiai ii: alrw, in Isaiah immediately before the 
place firom ch. viii., which will be afterwards quoted : itiiroiiiii 
hoi^ai y avrOJ, 2 Sam. xxii. 3, which the Church imitates. Is. xii. 
2. The filial confidence of the Messiah is indicated, fieeing 
from His sufferings to the Father [and by no means disappointed : 
comp. ver. 10, at the end. — V. g.], ch. v. 7 : comp. 2 Sam. xxii. 
4, etc. A small portion is quoted ; the whole passage is in- 
tended by the apostle. Our Theologians rightly blame the 
Schoolmen, who are of opinion, that the atonement of Christ 
was not simply and in itself condign or meritorious. See Calov. 
Matseol. pass, in Dedic. But yet the most fi-agrant part of this 
atonement is the exceedingly pure confidence by which solely 
He was supported in His approach to the Father ; Ps. xxii. 10 ; 
Matt, xxvii. 43. For He did not show His merits, but rather 
confessed the sins that were laid upon Him, Ps. Ixix. 6. As He 
therefore by Himself confidently (by faith) trusted in the Father, 



364 HEBREWS II. 14. 

SO we confidently (by faith) put our trust in Christ, and througli 
Christ in the Father, The argument is very important against 
the merit of men's works. But Christ exhibited this confidence 
not for Himself, for He and the Father are one, but for His own 
people, ver. 16. Every instance of present assistance gave 
assurance of assistance for the future (comp. Phil. i. 6), until He 
obtained a complete victory over death and the devil. — i&oi — 
0£o's) Is. viii. 18, LXX., in the same words. He calls them 
irmhia, D''l7'', children, sons, using an expression well becoming the 
First-begotten, who intimates that the same are both His 
brethren and His inferiors (juniors) ; and He presents all these, 
to be glorified alike with Himself, before God, who has given 
them to Him to be saved. 

14. 'Ete/ olv T& rraidia, forasmuch then as the children) The 
children here, t& -ffaidla, is not a noun denoting a natural age, 
but is brought down from ver. 13. The Messiah here could not 
be suitably placed in the company of the children according to 
the flesh ; He is speaking of His spiritual sons ; o5v, therefore, is 
an inference irom ver. 10, etc. — xsxoiviivrixiv ai/j.a,Tog xal eapnig, 
toere partakers of flesh and blood) The past, in respect of the 
greater part, who had already lived at the time of the testimony 
given in the psalm. He mentions brethren in the psalm, children 
in Isaiah: in relation to that time in which David and Isaiah pro- 
phesied, many of the brethren and children were then living, and 
had lived, whom He was to reconcile unto God. These are not 
excluded but included. Koivuv'sia, with the genitive, Prov. i. 11, 
where also, ver. 18, furi^tu is used with the same meaning : 
nomnirisag o3oD, Job. xxxiv. 8. In this passage, however, the 
change of the words is elegant ; so that /i^Tis^t may express the 
likeness of one to the rest [here, of Jesus to those whose nature 
He took part of] ; xoivmeh, to the likeness of many among one 
another. sApf xal affj-a are sometimes used by metonymy for 
man. Gal. i. 16 ; but here they are more properly taken in the 
abstract, as in 1 Cor. xv. 50 : although in that passage of Paul 
to the Corinthians ffii^g xa,i alf^a, include the notion of the oldness 
of the corrupt nature. Elsewhere, as we have just now seen, 
aafi, xai cx.7tia, is the expression used (is the order of the words), 
the principal part, viz. flesh, being put first, which is also some- 
times written alone : here aliia xa! tfa^g (although some have 



HEBREWS II. 14. afiS 

transposed the words) is the order of the words, just as in Eph. 
vi. 12, rphg cJfia xai gdpxa. Whether the expressions are used 
indiscriminately, or af/i^a is put first sometimes for a certain de- 
finite reason (which may be sought fcsr in this passage from 
those who write on Physics), I dare not determine. Although 
my commentary does not descend to such things, yet it with 
difficulty avoids the stigma of too curious refinement, in the 
estimation of those who generously weigh heavenly words. — 
a'jrhi) Close after this, there sweetly follows tuv aurm. — 
vafairXriisidig, in like manner) •jtapk in vapwjrXrigiog sometimes, like 
the Latin sub, diminishes the signification of the compound, jusl 
as in Tdfiyyug ; but here it is almost the same as presently xara 
Tcivra,, in all things, ver. 1 7 : ch. iv. 15. Therefore 'irapairXnelai, 
in like manner, serves the purpose of the apostle, as he enters 
upon this discussion, in the way of reverent caution (^luXdSuav), 
that he may gradually speak what he thinks ; comp. Phil. ii. 
27, note : and the particle that is less significant' is the more 
convenient on this account, that the expression, without sin, is 
not yet added in this place. Therefore the reality of the parti- 
cipation remains, which is asserted by Eaphelius in his annot. 
on Herodotus. — tuv avruv) This is not a mere relative, as the 
article shows : rd avrd, the same things, which happen to the 
brethren labouring under flesh and blood, without even except- 
ing death. — im, that) Here the subject is briefly noticed: it is 
more fiiUy explained, ch. v. 7, 8, 9. It will be of advantage to 
compaxe .both passages together, ch. v. and ii., and seriously 
meditate upon them, till it be perceived how both terminate in 
a eulogium on the great High Priest. — did rou davdrou, through 
death) A paradox. Jesus suffered and overcame death ; the 
devil, wielding death in his hand, succumbed. Jesus in turn 
imparts to us life through His flesh and blood ; John vi. He 
assumed our nature, that His body might be delivered up, and 
His blood poured out. Therefore the delivering up of the body 
and the pouring out of the blood are the facts wiiich are chiefly 
had regard to : John vi. 51. — xaTapy^g-/}, might destroy) This is 
an inference fi:om the verb wlra^as, thou hast subjected, ver. 8 : 

' Xlapa'z-Xnaiai, expressing that He took part of flesh and blood in a 
somewhat similar manner as the children partake of flesh and blood — not in 
an altogether similar manner ■ for He was without sin. — Ed. 



3G6 HEBREWS II. 15, 16. 

comp. 1 Cor. XV. 27 with the preceding, where Paul uses the 
same synonyms, xaTapyiTv, hiroTageiiv. So Ps. viii. 3, nilKTi? toZ 
xaraKvaai, that thou mightest still the enemy and the avenger. — 
t6 xpdrog, power) great indeed, Matt. xii. 26, 29. — b^ovto) having 
[who had] by a certain law [right], namely, in so far as no injury 
was thereby done to the captives : comp. p'^'TS, Is. xUx. 24, where 
the devil does not seem to be called just, morally, but a mighty 
tyrant, who had iS,ousioi,v, authority, over the captives ; Col. i. 13 ; 
2 Pet. ii. 19, at the end : although here it is called ^owe?- in a 
restricted sense, not authority. Death was the executioner and 
minister of the devil as a cruel master, dehvering up men to him 
whom he led away in sin : but Jesus dying made them dying His 
own, Rom. xiv. 9. — roD damrou, of death) by sin. — rourlor;, that is) 
His power was manifest : who it was that lurked beneath this 
power as wielding it, escaped the notice of mortal men. 

15. ' Am-aXKa^ri) rrdght deliver from the devil, who had the 
power of death. — rovrovg, these) A demonstrative with relation to 
what precedes. — po/3w, through fear) even before they experi- 
enced the power itself, for that followed; concerning /ea?*, comp. 
ch. xii. 19, 20 ; Ex. xix. 21, 22 ; 2 Sam. vi. 9.—6avdTou, of death) 
Sudden deaths were inflicted, in the time of Moses and after- 
wards, even on unwary transgressors. — Sid ■javrhg, through alt) 
This is an antithesis to for a little, ver. 9. There are many ages, 
and these coming one after another, of the brethren. — toD ^jjv, 
life) That kind of life was not life. — douXa'ag, to bondage) The 
antithesis is, sons unto glory. Paul brings out the same anti- 
thesis, Rom. viii. 15, 16. Politicians define liberty to be to tri» 
iig ^ouXsrai rig, living as we choose ; slavery to be rh t,fiv /J'fl oig 
^ouXerai, to live not as we choose. 

16. Afi'TTov) [you will grant, we may suppose]. A particle ex- 
pressive of courtesy, and implying some degree of conjecture, 
erajasiLh ; but by the oux being added, promoting ^ijSaluisiv, con- 
firmation [ver. 3, assurance]. The whole verse has a wonderful 
power of explanation ; comp. (t^oSjiXoi/, ch. vii. 14. Not angels, 
therefore us ; there is no third party. — dyy'sXm, of angels) with- 
out the article. That is, they are not angels without flesh and 
blood, of whom He lays hold. — I'TriXafi^dvirai) Christ lays hold 
of, or takes, in the words quoted; about to bring assistance, about 
to deliver, ver. 15, 10, 11. The same word occurs, ch. viii. 9; 



HEBREWS II. 17. 367 

Matt. xiv. 31. If the apostle were speaking of the very incar- 
nation of the Son of God, there would be in the antithesis the 
singular number ayyiXov, an angel, or the angelic nature ; as it 
is, since ayyeXiav occurs in the plural, g'jripju.aTOi, seed, is taken as 
a collective noun.^ — s'jrsp/iarog ' Aj3f>aa/ju, seed of Abraham) So he 
calls the whole human race, but by Synecdoche, because the refer- 
ence is to Genesis; and there the promise is found which was given 
to Abraham, and which belonged especially to his descendants : 
and Christ was bom of the race of Abraham. It is to be added 
to these observations, that the apostle is writing here to the 
descendants of Abraham, and it was not suitable to say, ewEp/j.a^ 
Tog 'Adafjb, of the seed of Adam, because the first and second 
Adam are opposed. And yet the Gentiles are not excluded ; 
for " the seed of Abraham " is not opposed to them, but to " the 
angels ;" and all believers are the seed of Abraham. [See ver. 
12, respecting "the great congregation ;" comp. Ps. xxii. 23, 26, 
28. — V. g.] I think the omission of the article before ev'ep/^aTog 
corresponds to the construct state of the Hebrew. The omis- 
sion of the article would not so much include the Gentiles, as 
exclude the carnal Jews. 

17. "Ohv) The particle Msv occurs six times in this epistle, but 
never in the epistles to which the apostle has affixed his name ; 
and yet it occurs in Paul's speech. Acts xxvi. 19. — ups/Xs, 
it behoved Him) A grand expression, ch. v. 3. It behoved Him 
from the relationship of consanguinity, and because He had un- 
dertaken it in the Old Testament, ver. 12, 13. He now 
exhibits greater confidence in the tone of his speaking ; comp. 
ver. 11, He is not ashamed. — xara ■jravra, in all things) in all 
sufferings and temptations. — ro?s adiX^oTg, to His brethren) ver. 
11. — o,aoiuSnvai, to be made like) This is a recapitulation of those 
things which precede. The sum of those which follow is im- 
mediately added.— ;va, that) The apostle thrice glances at the 
High Priesthood, till he comes to its full discussion, ch. vii. He 
touches upon it in three successive steps. I. He ought to be 
made like to His brethren, that He might become a merciful 

1 2'irippticTog, as a collective noun, expresses not the seed or nature which 
He assumed, but the whole race which He, as it were, takes by the hand to 
help. Thus a%ipfiaro(, collective, is a just antithesis to the plural, ojyylxmv. 
— £d. 



868 HEBREWS II. 17. 

and faithful High Priest, in the passage before us. II. He 
■WAS CALLED a High Priest at the time when He was made 
TDerfect ; ch. v. 10. III. He was made High Priest when 
He entered into that which is within the veil ; ch. vi. 20 ; 
and when this entrance was made once for all, He always, 
as a Priest for us, presents Himself before the face of 
God; ch. ix. 24. — eXeri/j,uv, merciful) This word, as well as 
msToc, faithful, is construed with apyjiptiig, high priest; ch. iv. 
15, V. 2. He was made merciful to the ■people labouring under 
sins : •jrierhg, faithful, so far as GoD is concerned. There is a 
Chiasmus here.'^ We have the Priest and the High Priest, who 
has the right of drawing near and of bringing men to GoD. 
The word faithful is treated of, ch. iii. 2, with tjie addition of 
the practical application : the word iXirifim, merciful, ch. iv. 14, 
etc., with the practical application also added : the word 
af)(_iipiijg. High Priest, is treated of, ch. v. 4, 5, vii. 1, 2, with the 
practical application added, ch. x. 19. The proposition or 
statement of many things at Kom. i. 16 (where see the note), 
very much resembles this. Of these three points, one, iXirifim, 
merciful, is put before yhrirai, that He might become, because it 
is deduced from what was previously said. The other two are 
properly connected together, because they come to be treated of 
afterwards along with the first. But the word merciful, and, 
conjointly with it, faithful High Priest, elegantly have in this 
proposition a rather absolute signification, because again (in turn) 
the subsequent discussion contemplates faithfulness without the 
priesthood in the case of Moses, and mercy with the priesthood 
in the case of Aaron. First, Jesus is merciful. No one can 
suppose that Jesus had more mercy before He suffered, and 
that now He has more severity. Only let us now flee (escape) 
from the wrath of the Lamb, which is even yet to come. — 
^ Apyjifiiii) High Priest. The Latin Pontifex was so called from 
the fact, that he huilt a bridge at Rome, or sacrificed on a 
bridge; and ihe pontifex, iipiu;, was either alone or with others; 
but the apx'^piug, high priest (pontifex maximus), was exalted 
above the others, over whom he presided. In the Evangelists 
and Acts, where the Jewish Jiigh priests are frequently men- 

' E>ie^i«4i» (1) referring to AaoD (4) : and arwrcf (2) to <5)eo'» (3). — ^Ed. 



HEBREWS II. 18. 869 

tioned, the term pontiff {pontifex), used by the Vulgate and 
other translations, will not, I think, offend any one ; but in this 
epistle, in which Christ is the principal subject, I do not know 
whether that term may be as well suited to the style of Paul as 
to the institutions of Numa. At least Seb. Schmidius uses it 
with reluctance, and occasionally substitutes for it chief priest 
{princeps sacerdos) ; but a single word is better, especially when 
other epithets are added, as here merciful and faithful ; for we 
cannot conveniently say, ch. iv. 14, a great chief (greatest) 
pontiff {pontifLcem maximum magnum). High priest (archisacer- 
dos) is the most convenient term which the learned have long 
used, and which sounds as well as archiguhemus, in the writings 
of Jabolenus, archiflamen, archiprcesul, archipontifex, and 
various other terms, which Vossius stigmatizes in his work, 
De vitlis Latini Sermonis, p. 371, and some other wiiters. With 
respect to the subject now before us, this glorious title of High 
Priest occurs presently again, ch. iii. 1. But nowhere, except 
in the 110th Psalm, and Zech. vi. 13, and in this epistle, is 
Christ expressly called a Priest ; and it is only in this epistle 
that the priesthood of Christ is professedly discussed. Whence 
it is evident, how extraordinary in its character, and how neces- 
sary, is this book of the New Testament. However, in all 
these passages, which are even of the Old Testament, there is 
added the mention of the kingdom, which is oftener spoken of 
elsewhere without the priesthood. Nay, on the Cross, on which 
this Priest offered His sacrifice, He had the title (inscription) of 
King. The priesthood, as well as the kingdom, is appropriate 
(belongs fittingly) to this First-begotten. — tcc vph; rhv 0shv, 
towards God) So ch. v. 1. — el; rJ iXdexsaSai) to make atonement 
or reconciliation. — r&; diLaprlag, the sins) which bring death and 
the fear of it. — rov Xaou, of the people) the people, whom he 
called the seed of Abraham, ver. 16. He Himself knew no 
sin. He made atonement for the sins of the people, Isa. 
hii. 8. 

18. 'El- ^, in that) This is like an adverb ; Eom. ii. 1. — 
iimTui, He is able) This abiUty of mind (viz. His power to 
sympathize) is treated of, ch. iv. 15, v. 2. — ^on^risai, to succour) 
Hence Paul infers the ^o^duav, help, ch. iv. 16. 

VOL. IV. A A 



370 HEBREWS IH, 1. 



CHAPTEK III. 

1. 'o^fK, whence) An urgent particle. From those very things 
which have been said in ch. ii., consideration ought to flow. — 
adiXipol, brethren) He now for the first time addresses those to 
whom he is writing. And the title, brethren, from ch. ii. 11, 
has in it the idea of sanctity. — ayioi, holy) There is a Chiasmus 
in this verse. — xKrjeeais ivovpat/iov, of the heavenly calling) made 
by the Lord from heaven, and bringing them on to that place, 
whence it was made, ch. xii. 25, of the calling of God from 
above (r^s am xkrieitai), as Paul says, Phil. iii. 14. The correlative 
of calling is otioXoyla, confession ; concerning which the writer 
treats presently : so Paul in 1 Tim. vi. 12. — /isro^o/, partakers) 
There is the same word, ver. 14, ch. vi. 4, i. 9, xii. 8.— rov 
airogToXov, the apostle) the Ambassador of God the Father ; Him 
who pleads the cause of God with us. Thence we are said to 
be partakers of the heavenly calling. — xai ap^np'sa,, and High 
Priest) who pleads our cause with GoD. On this account we 
are called holy.. This Apostleship and High Priesthood are in- 
cluded in the one term Mediator. He compares Jesus as an 
apostle to Moses, and as a priest (and this appellation is taken 
up again, iv. 14) to Aaron, and at the same time prefers Him 
to both ; He alone holds both dignities united, and in a more 
eminent degree, which those two brothers [the duumvirate of 
brothers] held apart. Here He is called in a relative sense 
marhg, faithful, as a>.r}6rie, true, John v. 31, unverwerflich, a 
testimony which cannot be refused. — r^s o/i,o\oyiag, of our corir 
fession or profession) The confession or profession is intended, 
not that which is made to men, but that which is made to 
God. This word admirably expresses the nature of faith, 
which is borne with a ready response towards (in respect to) 
the promise : GoD, who sent His Son and gave Him as a priest 
to us, yiysi, speaks : man o/jioXoytT, declares his agreement, assents, 
subscribes. So ch. iv. 14, x. 23. They did that most solemnly 
in baptism. The opposite is avuXcyta, contradictiorif ch. xii. 3. 



HEBREWS III. 2-4. 371 

2. Uierov ovra, who is faithful) Num. xii. 7, at the end, ''lay 
Kin IDK3 W3 bn nt^D, lxx., o hpairav /iov (comp. presently after- 
wards, ver. 5) Mmarj; h oXui rc3 o/'xw //,ou Tidrog iffri. He calls 
him faithful, who is both himself so, and is acknowledged to be 
so by God, and is praised on that account. From this flows 
faithfulness in ofEce, and the faith of the hearers without ex- 
ception, for this very reason that Moses is pHi ; comp. Num. 
same chap., ver. 8, likewise at the end. — rp mi^aavTi aMv, to 
Him that appointed Hini) His heavenly Father made or appointed 
Jesus Christ to be both His Apostle and High Priest, ch. v. 5 ; 
where rh ymnSrivot,!, to be made, viz. by the word of the Lord, 
corresponds to rjS miriaavri. Add Acts ii. 36. And this rouses 
us to the exercise of fiith. There is an expression which Very 
much resembles this in 1 Sam, xii. 6, 8 : " It is the Lord who 
made [Engl. Vers., advanced^ (lxx., i ifoifiaag) and sent Moses 
and Aaron^' — ws xni MmiJij^s, as also Moses) So Deut. xviii. 15. 
He praises Moses, and thus conciliates the Jews, before that 
he prefers Christ to him ; although he has prepared their minds 
for hearing it, by his preferring the same Jesus even to angels. 
— tiktf, in His house) A rare appellation in the time of Moses. — 
auroD, His, of Him) of GoD, ver. 6, note. 

3. WKiimog, of more) Christ, a prophet as Moses, Acts iii. 22, 
note (whereas the other prophets only explained Moses) ; and 
yet He was different from Moses, ch. viii. 9 ; John i. 17. He 
is greater than Moses according to this passage. — ycip, for) 
The reason assigned (JEtiology) has relation to xaravorjean, 
consider, — do^rig, glory) Presently afterwards, ri/ji^riv, honour : n/tjj 
here rather denotes something internal ; 86^a, follows it. — tou 
o'lxw) The genitive is governed by rrkelova, the comparative ; for 
it is an Enthymeme [a covert syllogism, wherein one or other 
premiss needs to be supplied], as follows : Christ is greater than 
the house (for the house is being prepared [' built,' xara- 
Msua^sra/] ; Christ hath prepared f' built'] the house and all 
things, and so Christ is God) : therefore Christ is greater than 
Moses. The reason is : for Moses is less than the house, as a 
minister and as in some measure a portion of the house ; comp. 
Matt. xii. 6, note. 

4. *o 8f, but He) Christ. The article points out the subject, 
and also possesses in this passage a relative meaning, as in ch. 



372 HEBREWS HI. 5, 6. 

vii. 6. &ihg, God, is the predicate,— ©eJs, God) absolutely. 
Moses was a ' god' to Aaron, but he was not God absolutely. 

5. Ka!, and) Another reason for the superiority of Christ to 
Moses.— Sepd-Tuv, servant) So the Lxx., Num. xii. 7. This 
intimates the excellence of Moses in comparison with all other 
prophets ; but again it speaks of Moses as inferior to Christ 
the Lord. — iJg, for) He was a servant, in order that testimony 
should be given by him. — tuv Xa,Xr}6ri(!o/j,iviav, of those things which 
were to be spoken) which Moses was to speak (ch. ix. 19), chiefly 
of Christ ; and subsequently Christ Himself was about to speak. 
In ch. ix. 19, there is a verbal parallelism, which however at 
the same time infers a like reason, viz. what Moses, in accord- 
ance with the time, Num. xii., both had spoken and was about 
to speak. Miriam did not assail the authority of Moses respect- 
ing the past ; but she wished to claim just as much for herself 
for the future, on account of certain past specimens (of God 
speaking by her and Aaron). 

6. Xpigrbg 8i, but Christ) Moses yields to Him. An am- 
bassador, in the absence of the king, is very highly distinguished 
— in the presence of the king, he falls back among the multi- 
tude. Here also supply msro's sen, is faithful. The Son shows 
His faithfulness in all that belongs to His Father and in all that 
is His own. — Iv!, over) This svi, 7V, over, shows His surpassing 
power : h, in, is applied to Moses, ver. 5. — aurou, His, of Him) 
of God, ch. x. 21. — oj) This reading is very old.^ Some read 
ou, from its alliteration with abrou. In this case Paul should 
have written ou 6 oTxo;, as Erasmus showed at the beginning. 
For we say, ou rh icrhm, rig o aSi'k(poc, ut rJ drofj-a, uv ra ov6/j,aTa, 
oil il wXriyrj, wif r& xSiXa., ou jj (ptavri, ou ij olxla. The question here 
is not. Whose house is it ? for that very point is just now 
denoted by the auroD, His ; but, Wliat is the house ? as distin- 
guished from that of which Moses was a portion. — iav, if) The 
same sentiment is found at ver. 14. An abbreviated expression : 
the house are we, since we have confidence : the house we shall be, 

'■ The Gnomon here agrees with the 2d Ed. and the Germ. Vers., having 
changed the decision of the older Ed., which had given the preference to the 
reading ov. — E. B. 

Ov is the reading of ABC and Rec. Text ; oV of D(A) corrected, / Vulg. 
Lucif.— Ed 



HEBREWS ni. 7-9. 873 

if we retain our confidence. There is an expression of Paul's 
very similar, Col. i. 23, note. — rijv wa^prjglav) A word of frequent 
occurrence in this epistle: iruppttela, eh. iv. 16, x. 19, 35; and 
c'kvlg, ch. vi. 11, 18, vii. 19, x. 23, in like manner irXvipopopia, 
vmsradis, vappiiisiav, confidence, viz. towards God : xad-^riij^a, 
glorying, with respect to enemies. — %a.Ti.(syj»ii,tv, if we hold fast) 
So ver. 14 ; ch. x. 23. So xpareTv, iv. 14, vi. 18. 

7. A/1, wherefore) A choice inference, and the strength of 
this whole passage. Jesus is mgrhg, faithful : be not ye amfroi, 
unfaithful, ver. 2, 12. — ^Xiyn rh nnij/i.a, rh"Ayiov, the Holy Ghost 
saith) So ch. ix. 8, x. 15. — e^/npov — TigexpaxovraeTt}- Sih irpogd^Sisa, 
— xal iJ'jra, all) Ps. xcv. 7, at the end ; LXX., e^/iepov — naaapaxovTa 
iTTj irpogoi^diga. The word e^/iepov, to-day, is an expression of 
David's, and is opposed to that day, which was in the time of 
Moses, ver. 8. — lav, if) If you will obediently hear His voice. 
Under this hearing, there is included any sort of hearing what- 
ever, ver. 16, ch. iv. 2. The force of this clause (hemistich) is 
joined in the Hebrew with what goes before, and thence it re- 
dounds upon what follows. — ipt/iviji, voice) which is full of grace, 
in these words of the prophet, to be heard on that very account. 

8. Hapa.'jrixpa.gfiif) — iriipag//,od, in the provocation — in the tempta- 
tion) By Chiasmus, in ver. 9, as compared with ver. 8, tempta- 
tion is first treated, then provocation ; ugnpov irporepov i^paidiv, as 
Franc. Junius says, when he observed the same figure occur- 
ring several times in this epistle. Both refer to the History, 
Ex. xvii. 7, as the first offence ; comp. below ver. 16, they that 
came (went) out. The first offence ought to be guarded against ; 
for more very easily spring up from it, and the first is wont to 
be most severely reproved. — xara, according to) that is, as in the 
day. So the Hebrew text. — h rfj ep^/j^(fj, in the wilderness) the 
theatre of very great events. 

9. 05) viz. mipa.g/iod, Attic for w. — s'lrilpagdv Ms, they tempted 
Me) [to try] whether I was able or willing. — o/ irar'spi; l/iSiv, your 
fathers) whose hardness of heart is very often mentioned. 
Therefore the authority of the ancients is not conclusive. — 
eScxi/iagav, proved) i.e. searched out, put Me to the test ; not ap- 
proved. Weigh well what follows. — tJiov, they saw) evidently, 

' Kit6ai, even as) The Apodosis is at ver. 12. — Not. Crit. 



374 HEBREWS UI. 10. 

bat w^hout improvement. — to, 'ipya /iov, my works) most glorious 
in affording help, partly also in executing vengeance. — Tiegap- 
dxovra iTr\, forty years) This is joined witli vpoai-xPiaa. in the Lxx. 
and in the Hebrew, and below ver. 17. At the same time the 
people both saw the hvii, work of G OD, and offen ded God, until they 
filled up the full measure of their guilt. Here it is joined with J^ov, 
they saw ; and therefore the hard heart of the people is implied. 
10. A/5, wherefore) This particle is not in the Hebrew, nor in 
the LXX. — vpoeuytisa) A word of very frequent occurrence in the 
LXX., but scarcely to be met with anywhere else. Eustathius 
has 'a^^oi (or ix^ri, in general a high place ; in particular, a bank): 
irap^ TO 'ix^iv, i.e. ^S,sx^iv, to he high, to be prominent. It denotes 
roTi-iih s'jravddTrj/ia, a local, eminence : thence oxSsn and oxSl^in, 
applied to the mind, signifies / am roused, — Tpo(rw;»^^<ira, I was dis- 
pleased with them, so that they should not enter into the land, 
when they wished too late to do so. The phrase, to walk con- 
trary, Lev. xxvi. 24, 28, is closely connected with it. — rri yivi^ 
sxsivri) Ixilvri, with that, has the meaning of removal and aliena- 
tion ;^ Heb. "ii13 absolutely, with the same meaning. — xal eha, 
and I said) I declared with my lips the displeasure o/my soul. 
Observe the subsequent gradation : first displeasure with those 
who sinned made Him say ; then anger, more severe than 
that displeasure, viz. towards those who did not believe, made 
him swear ; comp. ver. 17, 18. The first temptation, Ex. xvii., 
was presently the cause why God was grieved or displeased. 
The complaint regarding the erring of their heart, then anger 
(wrath) and the oath followed. So the displeasure and anger, the 
complaint and the oaiA, respectively, are the better distinguished. — 
auTol, they) Dn in Heb. is repeated with great force. The accents 
[in the Hebrew] here begin the hemistich of this clause. There- 
fore it is not included under ihrov, I said, but this is the meaning : 
they perceived that I was displeased with them ; aurol is, and 
yet they, the same persons, did not a whit the more wish to know 
My ways. There is a similar antithesis, they and I, ch. viii. 9 ; 

' The margin of both Ed. prefers the reading tosi/tj), and the Germ. 
Vers, follows it. Therefore the explanation of the pronoun ixui/tj is at least 
hypothetical. — E. B. 

'EKehji is the reading of C and Rec. Text. But Taiirjj is read hj 
ABD(A) corrected and Vulg. — Ed 



HEBREWS III. 11, 12. 375 

comp. ver. 10. So hut they, Ps. cvi. 43 ; comp, also Luke vii. 
5 ; Is. liii. 7, in the Hebrew. — oIk 'iyvuaav, they have not known) 
This is the a'jrMiia, not to believe ; the afiaprla, sin, is described, 
ver. 9, I'Kiipa.aa]!, they tempted. Concerning both, again, ver. 12, 
13, and ver. 17, 18. — ras hboi); /iou. My ways) in which I wished 
to lead them as My flock into a place of rest. 

11. 'D.5 Si//,oea, as [so] / sware) The oath preceded the forty 
years.— £/', if) The Apodosis omits something for the sake of 
euphemism, which has the force of the oath itself: il here is 
negative, as tj f(,riv is afBrmative, ch. vi. 14. — e'lgeXeiaovTai, they 
shall enter) by My ways. — els Tr^v xarairaualv //,ou, into My rest) in 
the promised land. The people, the sheep ; Ps. xcv. 7. nnUD, 
rest, is their benefit [their peculiar privilege], Ps. xxiii. 2. 

12. BKsviTi) This word depends on Sih, wherefore, ver. 7 : the 
Apodosis here to ver. 7 [where see the note] not incorrectly also 
brings in the word brethren ; 1 Thess. iii. 7. The same word 
is found at ch. xii. 25. We must not trust to the heart; Jer. 
xvii. 9. — ij.fl 'sroTi — amarias, lest — of unbelief) Observe the con- 
nection. Christ is irierls, faithful, ver. 2 ; therefore we ought to 
be m<STol, faithful to Him, not unfaithful (unbelievers), as our 
fathers were in regard to Moses ; ver. 18, 19, ch. iv. 2, 3, vi. 
12. In like manner Paul places in opposition the faithfulness 
of God and the faithlessness of men, Kom. iii. 2, 3 ; 2 Tim. ii. 
13. — iSTai, lest there should be) Care must also be extended to 
the future on account of the greatness of the danger. He uses 
the fut. indie, in preference to the pres. subj. — irovne^,, evil) An 
&msToi, unbelieving people ; JTi an evil nation and unhappy ; comp. 
xaxous xaxSig, Matth. xxi. 41. — h tSi u'lrodTrivai, in departing) The 
antithesis is vpogep^d/jiiSa, let us come unto, ch. iv, 16, and 
ttnerasiug, substance [i.e. solid confidence], presently at ver. 14 ; 
comp. Jer. vi. 8, /J>7i a<!roerr] ri ■4"'%'5 t^"" ^""^ "'"''j ^^^ ^"^ '"'^y ^^^^ 
depart from thee. This whole passage of the apostle agrees with 
Jer. xvii. 5, 6 : EniKATAPATOS o avSpumg, OS rfiv EAniAA 
iXSi y avSpuTov — xa! AHO KTPIOT AHOSTH rj xapdicc aurou — 
elx i-i^iTM orav eXiji rk AFAOA. CUKSED is the man who TEUSTETH 
in man, and whose heart DEPARTETH/rom the Lord : he shall 
not see when good cometh, — aith QioZ t,avros, from the living God) 
The life of God most powerfully and effectually animates our 
faith. The living God is also praised, ch. ix. 14, x. 31, xii. 22. 



376 HEBREWS III. 13-15. 

He who revolts from Christ, revolts from God ; ch. iii. 12-19. 
Chiasmus. 

ver. 12\. ^-^^^ 

13 ^<^ 17 

13. 'EauTous, yourselves) Let every one exhort himself and 
another ; so far ought you to be from instigating and provok- 
ing one another [to unbelief]. — ^/'■'^pav, erifiipov, daily, to-day) 
Conjugates ; ch. iv. 7. — a^ig oZ, whilst) as long as. This^ to- 
day will not continue for ever. — ro) the relative. — xaXiTrai, 
is called) while that psalm is heard and read. — 7va /ifi exXripuvSri 
TIC, that no one be hardened) This is repeated from ver. 8. — 
awdrfi, through the deceitfulness) This corresponds to vXavuvrai, 
they err, ver. 10. — rijg a/iaprlag, of sin) a'TriaTia, d/j-apria, unbelief 
and sin, which are much the same thing, John xvi. 9 ; Neh. 
vi. 13 : where carisrla, and &/j,ci.pTia are mentioned together, 
they differ as species and genus ; and unbelief, as the principal 
species of sin, has in its nature something more sad and destruc- 
tive. But if sin be put by itself, the genus a/j^apria is contracted 
into this particular species, namely, unbelief: as afiapna is 
properly, when the main aim is missed, which is a result pro- 
duced in the greatest degree through unbelief, amsHav, in con- 
sequence of the grace of God having been neglected. 

14. MiToxoi XpiSToiJ, partakers of Christ) ver. 1, 6. So i/.iro'xpi, 
'^partakers of the Holy Ghost," ch. vi. 4. — a.pyj]v — imxP' teXous, the 
beginning — to the end) comp. ch. vi. 11, xii. 2. A Christian, so 
long as he is not made perfect, considers himself as a beginner. — 
rris litosraaitiig, of our solid confidence) [lit. substance], xi. 1 ; 2 
Cor. ix. 4, note. — ^i^a'iav, stedfast) A word of frequent occur- 
rence in this epistle, with its synonyms, axkiviic, a/isTdieros, defa- 
Xiig, lex'Jpo;. 

15. 'En rjB 'KeyieSa.i, while it is said) The connection is with 
ver. 13, in reference to 'irapaxaXirri. Even in the psalm the 
Divine exhortation (paraclesis) precedes, viz. O come ye. Comp. 
DlTi, Ps. xcv. 7, taking into consideration the preceding 
Athnach, which is a subdistinctive of the latter hemistich [in 
the Hebrew] ; i.e. it entirely depends on you that this may not 
only be a mere invitation and offer, in the first instance, but 



HEBREWS III. 16. 377 

also [the source of] real enjoyment, in the second. So h ra 
Xiyiiv, in that He saith, ch. viii. 13. — iis h rSi •xapa'jrmpasiMifij as in 
the Provocation) n3''"iD3 ; it is taken as a proper name, with its 
signification. 

16. TivH, who) Many write rmg, some; but the argument of 
the apostle is thus rendered somewhat feeble : rmg, aXX' ou m&vTis, 
some, hut not all, is rather a general expression concerning the 
Provocation, ch. iv. 6 ; Ex. xvii. 2. Tim is plainly interro- 
gative, as ch. i. 5, 13, and at the same time a very weighty 
Anaphora,^ t/ves, riei, rki, ver. 16, 17, 18 ; and there are 
brought under our notice in these three verses, 1. The begin- 
ning of the Provocation, soon after the departure from Egypt ; 
2. The forty troublesome years in the wilderness ; 3. The re- 
fusal of the entrance into the land of rest. 'AXX' oO is used, ver. 
16, as £/' /*)), ver. 18 ; for neither is properly interrogative, but 
both stand under the interrogative word, rim. That the power 
of the particle may be more clearly seen, suppose some one to 
say, r\<sa]i avdpaToi irapamxpaivovrsg, aXX' ouj^ ouro; o'l i^iXSovris, There 
were men who provoked, but not those that went out. The apostle 
denies that, and therefore says, rlvig ^aav, aXX' ou^ ouro; ; who 
were they, but these ? — i.e. these were the very persons. There are 
similar particles in Luke, Tig, aXX' o\Jx>, xvii. 7, 8 ; and in Paul, 
Tig, n ohy^l xal, x.T.X., 1 Thess. ii. 19. ndvTsg, in this passage, is 
none else but, merely those, a meaning of the word wg which Ka- 
phelius, at James i. 17, beautifully explains, ex Ariano. Germ. : 
Diejenige, die eine Erbitterung angerichtet haben, wer waren sie ? 
es warenlauter solche Leute, die von Egypten ausgegangen waren 
durch Mosen. These are not in this passage said to have been 
led out, but to have come out. They had already the pledge of 
Divine assistance, and had followed the Divine guidance ; but 
their future progress did not correspond to that excellent begin- 
ning (comp. ver. 14). Chrysostom evidently reads rmg : Tlvm 
fi'e/ivriTal fn<si exXripuv6hTav ; who, says he, have been mentioned as 
being hardened; where exXripuvfivTig (comp. ver. 15) are the same 
as ira.poi'jrmpdvavTig. — rixovgccvTig, after having heard) ver. 15.— 
raptirlxpavav, provoked) the Lord, namely, by chiding with 
Moses, Ex. xvii. 2.— fi/d Mui'dsmg, by Moses) whose words, when 
they heard them, they should have obeyed. 

' The frequent repetition of the same word in beginnings.— £d. 



378 HEBKEWS III. 17-I9.-1V. 1. 

17. ''ilv, whose) The event proves the fact. So also ver. 19. 
— wv T-A xSiXa i'TTsffsv h T7I epfjiiw) Num. xiv. 29, LXX., b rrj cprj/^iji 
ravrn 'irieiTrai t& xwXa v//,uv. This appellation, D''"1JS, xwXa, car- 
cases, mere bodies, subject to decay, always indicates indignation. 
KwXa, limbs, properly feet, according to Eustathius. If the forty 
years be resolved into days, and the average number of those 
that died daily be computed, every day had forty deaths of men, 
A great cause for writing the 90th Psalm ! 

19. Oux 7ibvv^6ri(Sav, they were not able) though they afterwards 
had wished it. 



CHAPTER IV. 

1. <iio^ridu/isv, let US fear) Since many have fallen, there is 
cause for fear. — xaraXn'jrofi.ivyi; svayyiXta;) Since a promise has 
been left and reserved for us, after the others have neglected it. 
The same word is found, in the same sense, Horn. xi. 4. A 
kindred verb is avokuirira,!, is left, remains, ver. 6, 9, ch. x. 26. 
This expression, interwoven with the exhortation, is a proposi- 
tion which is proved, ver. 3. The verb sva.'yyiy.Xo/j.ai, I promise, 
is very often found in this epistle, as well as the noun, iiiayjiXia, 
a promise. In this chapter the apostle is speaking of the rest 
of eternal life ; for to-day still continues, when (since) there re- 
mains the danger of falling, if we give way to hardness of heart. 
To-day, well improved, terminates in rest. Rest is that which, 
once obtained, is not again lost. "We now (comp. ch. ii. 5, note) 
are urged to look still further. Foretaste in this life is not de- 
nied : fall rest is. All foretastes of rest are evidently small, when 
compared with things above. — Soxri ric, any one should seem) 
Euphemism. Every man should so run, that it may be said of 
him, without any appearance of the contrary. This man runs. 
AoxtTv, in this passage, vmdnyfiba, an example, ver. 11, and hStlx- 
vueSai, to show, ch. vi. 11, are conjugates : delxu, pret. mid. S'e- 
doxa, thence dox'su, and the ideas agree ; for he who shows a desire 
does not seem to remain ; he who seems to remain is an example 
of obstinacy. — Ignprixlva,!, to have failed) to liave come short 



HEBREWS IV. 2, 3. 379 

The same word occurs, xii. 15. The examples, xii. 17 ; Num. 
xiv. 40 ; Luke xiii. 25 : ugnpsTv iroitjaai rh 'xag^a, to fail to keep 
thepassover, Num. ix. 13. 'TdTtpiiv, with Plato, at the beginnhig 
of the Gorgias, is to come after the festival is ended. 

2. rap, for) This refers to ^o^rida/j,iv, let us fear, — i!jjjyyiXig/j,£m, 
to us was the Gospel preached [we have had the Gospel preached 
to us]) We should think that this expression is spoken especially 
to us, who are called Evangelical : ver. 6. — xaxiTm [as well as 
they], as well as to them) The promise of the land of Canaan 
had been proclaimed to those men of old, ver. 6. — oux lixp'sXrigiv, 
did not profit) There is less said here than is intended (Meiosis). 
On the contrary [so far was it from profiting them], the unbe- 
lievers incurred the greatest guilt and punishment. Supply, 
nor will it be profitable to us without faith.— /iij svyxixpafisvog, 
not being mixed with) The word is entirely mixed with and in- 
sinuated into the believing soul ; and when it is thus mingled, it 
makes its way wonderfully, as a health-giving draught, and 
something more powerful even than that, ver. 12, 13. — rJj mem) 
with faith, the dative. — ToTg axouaaffiv) So far as concerns them 
that heard it. Comp. Rom. iv. 12, note. To these are opposed 
o; nanisavTig, those who^ believed, in the following verse. 

3. Tap) This word refers to the expression, a promise being 
left, ver. 1. — %a,6ui, as) Unbelief alone acts as a hinderance. — 
xairoi, although) The Protasis is, although the works were finished 
from the beginning of the world. The Apodosis is, yet He said, I 
have sworn. But because the Apodosis in the text comes first, 
yet is omitted. The proposition is, a rest remains to us. This 
proposition, ver. 3-11, is proved thus. Eest is mentioned in the 
psalm ; and yet there it does not signify, I. the rest of God from 
creation ; for this was long before the times of Moses. Therefore 
another rest was to be expected in the times of Moses, of which 
those during the same period, who had heard, evidently came 
short. Nor yet, 11., does that rest which they obtained by 
Joshua, support the title to this rest ; for it was not until after- 
wards that the Psalmist sung of it. Therefore, III., he sung of 
a rest more recent than all these kinds of rest, viz. a rest which 
would be enjoyed in heaven. — rZv 'ipyuv o.'kI xarajSoX^S xoV/aou yevri- 
6i\iTm) The genitive absolute, i.e. although the works of the Creator 
were finished and perfected from the foundation of the world. 



380 HEBREWS IV. 4-9. 

4. E7f>nxs, He said) viz. GoD, who also speaks in ver. 5, 7. — 
i^iifirii) viz. fj/iepag. — xal xaTiTavcfiii 6 Bihg b rjj, x.r.X.) Gen. ii. 2, 
LXX., xal xari'Travae rfj tifispcf rr\ e^do/iri avi ixavruv ruv 'ipyoiv auroC, m 
'i-jToinet, He rested, He withdrew Himself, so to speak, to His 
eternal tranquillity. It is remarkable that Moses has mentioned 
the end of the former days, but not of the seventh : Heb. frwn 
His work. It was one work, comprehending many works. The 
single term xaTS'xoi.vgiv corresponds to the Heb. nniJD and DDB', 
by most suitably connecting the two passages Ps. xcv. and 
Gen. ii. 

5. 'Ell roirui) in this, viz. saying of the psalm. So h iTip<jj, in 
another, ch. v. 6. 

6. 'Em! ouv, seeing therefore) GoD does not wish that His rest 
should be empty (not filled with guests) : Luke xiv. 23. — "rpoTipot, 
first) in the time of Moses. — ivayyeXisesvrfc) A rare use of the 
word applied to the men of old. He is no doubt speaking of 
the promise of the land of Canaan, but with a view to the Gospel- 
preaching of eternal life. 

7. Iid'kiii, again) Who would have thought that there is a 
sermon so important and so solemn in the 95th Psalm ? Let us 
highly value the words of GoD ; comp. ch. x. 8, note.—opl^si, 
He limits) viz. God. — fifiipav, a day) This is deduced from the 
quotation, gfifjupov, to-day, which is presently brought forward. 
See how beautifully he lays stress on the word, DV, a day, 
and single words in the same manner often, ch. ii. 8, 11, 
12, vii. 11, 21, viii. 13, x. 9, xii. 5, 27 : the day, viz. that of 
striving for the heavenly rest : ver. 8. — h, in) So ch. i. 1. — 
■KiaovTov xponov) so long a time, more than four hundred years irom 
Moses and Joshua to David, who sung this psalm. — xa.6ii( 
rrpoiipnrai, as it was before said) The apostle refers his hearers to 
the whole text, as repeated above from the psalm. 

8. 'IjjffoDs) Joshua. — DUX Siv) There is a similar mode of reason- 
ing, ch. vii. 11, viii. 4, 7, xi. \6.—!tipi &Xkni ii/j.ipag, of another 
day) By observing which an access would be opened also to 
another rest. 

9. "Apa, therefore) For this reason, because He speaks of 
another day. — saBBaTie/ihi, sahhatism, rest) The word is changed 
for xaraicaxisii;, rest ; comp. the following verse. In time there 
are many sabbaths ; but then, there will be a sahbatism, the 



URBKEWS IV. 10-12. 381 

enjoyment of rest, one, perfect, eternal. The verbal noun is 
extremely emphatic : it is not met with in the LXX. There will 
be no elementary sabbath in heaven ; because earthly labour 
shall have passed away : but the rest will be perpetual, which, 
however, itself will again have its own various modes (ways, 
divisions), according to the different state of the priests and of 
the rest of the blessed in their resurrection bodies (carnis beatse), 
and according to the intervals of the heavenly times to which 
the new moons and Jewish Sabbath corresponded : Isa. Ixvi. 21, 
23. — rcS XaO rov &iov, to the people of God) He had said abso- 
lutely, of the people, ch. ii. 17, when he was treating of recon- 
ciliation : but now, when he is treating of eternal rest, he says, 
to the people of God, that is^ to the Israel of God, as Paul 
speaks. Gal. vi. 16. He therefore specially intends the Israel- 
ites (inasmuch as he is writing to the Hebrews), and them, too, 
believers. 

10. Tap, for) Verse 9 is proved thus : He who has entered 
into the rest of God, rests from his labours ; but the people of 
God do not yet rest : therefore they have not yet entered in. 
It remains, that they enter in. — airo tuv 'ipyuv avrov) from his 
works, even from those that were good and suitable to the time 
of doing work. Labour precedes rest ; and that would have 
doubtless been the case, even in paradise. Gen. ii. 15. — aemp, 
as) The work and rest of GoD are that archetype to which we 
ought to be conformed. 

11. 'Exfhriv, that) future, great. — h ra ahrlfi) in, or after the 
same, as those men of former times. — imder///,ari, example) The 
same word is found at viii. 5, ix. 23. He who falls through 
unbelief, is an example to others, who then say, Behold, 6 Sina, 
that man, has in like manner fallen. — •jrieri) fall, with the soul, 
not merely with the body: ch. iii. 17. Moses speaks without 
reference to the ruin of souls, when he recounts the destruction 
of the people in the wilderness. 

12. zZv yap, for quick, lively) The efficacy of the word of 
God and the omniscience of God Himself is described as 
saving to those in the case of whom the word of God is mixed 
with faith on their part [ver. 2j, but as terrible to those 
who are obstinate : comp. 2 Cor. ii. 15. — 6 Xoyog rou Qeou) the 
word of God that is preached, ver. 2, and which is the Gospel- 



382 HEBREWS IV. 12. 

word, ib., and is joined with threatening, ver. 3. For Christ, 
the hypostatic Word, is not said to be a sword, but to have a 
sword (comp. Jos. v. 13, to which passage this passage, relating 
to Joshua, ver. 8, seems also to refer) ; nor is He called xpmxhi, 
judicial, but xpir^s, the Judge. The appellation of Sword, 
given to God, Deut. xxxiii. 29, is suitable to the song, not to the 
ordinary style of epistolary writing. — To//^ujrepoi) more cutting, 
sharper. — Siixvo{i//,svog &^pi (jjipits/j^ov, piercing even to the dividing) 
Its parallel presently, xpinxhg, judicial, judging, discerning. — 
■i^xt-X/ii Ti xal i:viu//,aToc, of soul and spirit) Hence it is evident 
that soul and spirit are not synon3mious, but the spirit is in the 
soul. Man, contemplated according to his nature, consists of 
soul and body. Matt, x, 28 : but when he has in him the work- 
ing of God's word, he consists of spirit, soul, and body. The 
inmost parts, and the recesses in the spirit, soul, and body of 
man, are called by Synecdoche^ apii,oi xal fmeXol, joints and mar 
row (marrows). Moses forms the soul, Christ the spirit, 2 Cor. 
iii. 6. The soul attracts (draws with it) the body, the spirit 
both, 1 Thess. v. 23. The spirit is divided from the soul by the 
efficacy of the word of God, when the former is claimed for 
God ; the latter is left to itself, in so far as it either does not 
attain to, or does not follow the spirit. And as the joints are 
not only divided from the marrow, but the joints and marrow 
respectively are divided into their own parts : nor are the inten- 
tions only distinguished from the thoughts, but the intentions 
themselves, as well as the thoughts themselves, are discerned 
[decided upon] : so, not only is the soul divided from the spirit, 
but as it were a part of the spirit is divided from part of the 
spirit, a part of the soul from part of the soul : Luke ii. 35. 
Flesh and spirit are also separated : 1 Pet. iv. 6, note. — hSu- 
fir}geuv xal InoiSiv, of the intentions and thoughts) He comes from 
the greater parts as soul and spirit, and from the less as joints 
and marrow, to the faculties of the mind. 'EvS{i/j,rigii, intention, 
involves feeling ; there follows by gradation 'imia, thought, which 
expresses something simpler, previously existing and internal. 
Both nourish and foster either good or evil, eu/iht from Sdai, 
ip/jku- v6ti( from viu, xivoufiai. 

' A part for the whole. Append. — ^Ed. 



HEBREWS IV. 13, U. S83 

13. KnV/s, a creature) A word quite general : presently after- 
wards we find irdvTa, all things. — hdviov aJroD, in His sight) His, 
God's, ver. 12. The analysis of the statement will be easy, if 
both of its parts are put in the nominative ease : It is God, 
whose word is quick or living : it is God, before whom there is 
no creature that is not manifest. So, in ch. xi. 23, the nomi- 
native case is to be understood : By faith the parents of Moses 
concealed Moses. Ibid., ver. 30 : By faith the Israelites went 
round the walls of Jericho, that they might fall down. The 
omniscience of God is laid open to men by the word ; and those 
who have not the word still feel that omniscient power in their 
consciences. A remarkable argument for the truth of religion 
from its efficacy. — rirpa^riXiefiiva) rpa-)(rikiZ^u, I throw one on his 
hack, is used in Greek and Latin for / lay open. Bodies which 
lie on the belly are scarcely considered naked, for they cover 
themselves : those lying on their back are laid open to the view 
in all their noblest and most distinguishing parts. Show, O 
man, shame and fear towards thy God ; for no veil, no twisting, 
bending, colouring, or disguise, can cover faithlessness. — auroD, 
of Him) This again is to be referred to God. — irphg h iiih7i i Xoyos, 
with whom we have to do) We have to do with Him, with God, 
with such a one as is described, ver. 12, 13, [whose face and 
judgment we cannot escape. — V. g.] We have therefore need of 
earnestness [ver. 11, gvovdd.gufj.ev]. The relative ov, whom, has the 
power of the demonstrative pronoun : Xo'yoj, "I31, concern, busi- 
ness. So the LXX., Judg. xviii. 28, Xo'yos oux sUtiv auToTg /i,sr& 
av6pii'!rov, they had no business with any man ; 2 Kings ix. 5, X6yo; 
tto/ -rfos tfs ; comp. Acts xis. 38. There is the same expression 
in Chrysostom, 'irspl hptaa., p. 336, «/ Svyar'tpig Tuv lepeciiv, aTs oudel; 
rphi rriv hpueivj^v Xoyog, the daughters of the priests, who have no- 
thing to do with the priesthood. 

14, "Ex'vrss, having) The exhortation begins in the same way, 
ch. X. 19, xii. 1. — ovv, therefore) He resumes the proposition 
which he had laid down, ch. ii. 17. — /i'eyav, great) for He is the 
Son of God, higher than the heavens. He is called absolutely 
in Hebrew phraseology, a High Priest, ch. x. 21 : but here the 
Great High Priest, greater than the Levitical high priest. — 
iitXtiXvOoTa) who has passed into, not merely has entered the 
heavens : ch. vii. 26.^^xparZfii.tv, let us hold fast) From. ch. iii. 1 



S«t HEBREWS IV. 15, 16. 

to ch. V. 3, there are four points explained by Chiasmus, inas- 
much as they contain the doctrine and practical application, 
the practical application and the doctrine. Look back again, I 
request, at the summary view (Synopsis) of the epistle. 

15. Ou, not) The apostle institutes, by Chiasmus, a comparison 
between the Levitical high priest and Christ, 1) So far as 
qualities are concerned: 2) So far as calling is concerned. 
In the first there are an Apodosis and a Protasis; in the 
second, a Protasis and an Apodosis: ch. iv. 15, 16, v. 1, 2, 
4, 5. — e\)fi,'!ra6n<sct,i, to he touched with a fellow-feeling) He is 
touched with a fellow-feeling, as having suffered the same 
things, Is. 1. 6, 4 : mercy is a cognate noun, ver. 16. The 
reference is to ch. ii. 17. — rcug asknlaig, with our infirmities) A 
suitable expression : ch. v. 2. The idea of sin, in respect of us, 
is included ; in respect of Christ, is excluded. The words, 
toithout sin, presently after follow. — yiaS ofjLowrriTa., in the likeness) 
Inasmuch as He was made like us ; ch. ii. 17. — ^a-p 'f a/iapriai, 
without sin) So ch. ix. 28 : but how can one, tempted without 
sin, be capable of sympathising with those who are tempted 
with sin ? With respect to the understanding, the mind of the 
Saviour much more acutely perceived the forms of temptation 
than we who are weak ; with respect to the will. He as quickly 
repressed their assault as the fire represses a drop of water cast 
into it. He therefore experienced what power was necessary to 
overcome temptations. He is capable of sympathising, for He 
was both tempted without sin, and yet He was truly tempted. 

16. Upodep^oof/^iSa,, let us draw near) The same word occurs, 
ch. vii. 25, x. 1, 22, xi. 6, xii. 18, 22 : in like manner, cyyilm, 
ch. vii. 19 : ilespx^fSai, ch. vi. 19 : ilaodog, ch. x. 19. So Paul 
also, Eom. v. 2, irpoaayayf}. — Tifi ipovtj], to the throne) ch. viii. 1, 
xii. 2 ; Is. xvi. 5. — rns ^dpirog, of grace) This word is also of 
frequent occurrence in this epistle. — Xd^ai/j,iv, x.t.X.) The mercy 
of Christ being shown, is obtained (is taken, Xd^ta/i$v) : and 
further, the grace of God is found (Eu^w/tfn). The appropriate 
verb is put before the one noun, and put after the other: 
Chiasmus.^ — 'iXiov, mercy) This refers to touched with a fellow- 
feeling. — x"'!"') grace) This refers to of grace. — iimaipov, in the 
needful time, seasonable) Believers do not feel at once the pre- 

' See Append. 



HEBREWS V. 1, 2. 385 

parations of grace made for a long time to come ; ^ but when 
the time comes, they find it present with them; and this 
seasonableness especially falls on the tiraes of the New Testa- 
ment, Kom. iii. 26, v. 6, and under it on the times ef persecu- 
tion (the cross). — jSo^Ssiav, help) ch. ii. 18. 



CHAPTER V. 

1. n&i) Every priest of the house of Levi. An antithesis to 
Christ ; for the apostle is speaking of the Levitical priesthood, 
ver. 1—3 : and the Apodosis is not added, because it is included 
(contained virtually) in the antecedent observations. But in 
ver. 4, there is a Protasis in a new part of the comparison 
with the Apodosis subsequently following it. This is the sum. 
Whatever is excellent in the Levitical priests, that is in Christ, 
and indeed in a more eminent degree ; whatever is defective 
in them, that however is also in Christ. — If avSpu'^uv \ati,^a.wjhiwi, 
tahen from among men) A part of the predicate. Before they 
were taken, they were evidently of the same condition. — u'rip, 
for) from among men, for men, an elegant (neat) expression. — 
xaiisraTai, is ordained) The present; is usually ordained. — rri 
irphs rhv Qihv, in things pertaining to God) So the LXX., Deut. 
xxxi. 27. — Supa, gifts) referring to things without life. — halag 
Imf a/iapriSiv, sacrifices for sin) consisting of animals. 

2. MsrpiovakTv, To have a feeling of moderation [have compas- 
sionj) Hesychius, /LiTpio'TraSrig, fiixpSi vrac^wv 5] ewyyivuiffxav imeixSi;. 
Th /j,sTpov, moderation is opposed to severity and rigour, which 
are shown towards none but the obstinate ; ch. x. 28. — duva/isvog, 
who is able) who does not please Himself; comp. Eom. xv. 3. 
— ayvoouffi xal •!rXav(^,aemg, to the ignorant and them that are out 
of the way [in error]) those that sin through ignorance and 
error: mv, LXX., ayvoiTv, to be ignorant. Simple ignorance is 
merely want of attention and memory ; but error (being out of 

1 A supply of grace is in store for believers against all future needs : but 
believers are not permitted to know and feel it all at once, but only accord- 
ing as the need arises. — Ed. 

VOL. IV. B B 



386 HEBREWS V. 3-6. 

the way) interchanges [confounds] good and evil, truth and 
falsehood. — aahveiav, infirmity) which is sinful and to be expiated 
by sacrifices. 

3. A/a Tavrnv, on account of this) Supply infirmity : or radrriv, 
this, is put for the neuter, as in Matt. xxi. 42. 

4. Kal, and) The apostle here commences a discussion on 
the actual (very) priesthood of Christ. — rig, any) Levitical 
priest. — rr^v Tiiir]\i, honour) The priesthood is an honour. Its 
synonym is ho^a, glory, ver. 5. — Aapm, Aaron) received it by 
being called. 

5. 'Apx'^pia, High Priest) So Christ is often called ; and yet 
at the same time often, and presently at ver. 6, He is termed a 
priest (simply). He is a priest absolutely, because He stands 
alone in that character without an equal. He is High Priest in 
respect of the Aaronic type, and in respect of us, whom He has 
made priests by His access to God and guidance of us. — o 
XaX^ffas irphg avrov. He who spoke to Him) yS IDS niiT', Ps. ii. 7. 
— \ji6g fiov, my Son) The apostle does not mean that the Father 
conferred the honour of the priesthood on the Son at the time, 
when the Father said. Thou art my Son ; for the generation of the 
Son is certainly prior to His priesthood : but declares, that the 
Son, who can do nothing of Himself, and who is always under 
the authority of the Father and does only what the Father 
wills, and receives only what the Father gives, has also received 
from the Father the honour of the priesthood, of which none 
but the Son Himself was capable. Hence the connection, 
xaSug, as, in the following verse. In this manner David had 
(treated) his sons (as) priests [Engl. Vers., chief rulers'], i.e. 
admitted to terms of closest intimacy. 2 Sam. viii. 18, with 
the Scholia of Michaelis : and the name of Son and Priest, 
quoted from the Psalms in ver. 5, 6, is presently afterwards 
repeated ver. 8, and ch. vii. 3, 28. 

6. 'Ev erspifj, in another) So Paul also. Acts xiii. 35. — Xiyti, 
He says) God. — su) Ps. ex. 4, where the Lxx. have it in as 
many words. — Mik-^isihi-/., Melchisedec) It is of no importance to 
know in other respects who Melchisedec was, beyond what is 
mentioned of him ; nay, the very silence respecting the other 
parts of his history contains mysteries. He was certainly a 
king and priest at that time, and of the human race. 



HEBREWS V. 7. 387 

7. "Of, who) namely Christ, the Son of God, the Priest. This 
is not said, but who, with great significancy in the relative pro- 
noun ; for the subsequent discourse corresponds to the names 
given in ver. 5, 6. A summary of those things, which are to be 
discussed in eh. vii. and the following chapters, is contained 
in ver. 7-10, and introduced with a remarkable anticipatory 
caution' and preparation, ver. 11, 12. And there is most ex- 
quisitely comprehended in this summary the onward progress of 
His passion, with its most secret (inmost) causes, from Geth- 
semane even to Golgotha, and the expressions used here are the 
same as those used by the evangelists : comp. also Ps. xxii. 3, 
20, etc., 25, Ixix. 4, 11, cix. 22. — h raig fi/^'epouc rrji gapxb; auTou, 
in the days of His flesh) in those days, the two especially, during 
which He suffered those things, and in order to suffer them. He 
assumed 7?esA like to that, which was sinful and mortal : ch. ii. 
14, X. 20 ; Matt. xxvi. 41, at the end : when by reason of weak- 
ness He seemed to be a mere man, John xix. 5. — diriius « xal 
Ixerriplas, both prayers and also supplications) plural ; for in 
Gethsemane He prayed thrice. The particle n, both, indicates 
that the words are not mere synonyms in this passage : prayers 
refer to the mind ; supplications, also to the body, as the origin 
of the word, /jcsrsuaj, / supplicate shows, in Eustathius. Regard- 
ing both see Matt. xxvi. 39. — irphg ror dvvdfiivov cd^iiv aurbv ex 
Savdrov, to Him that was able to save Him from death) Abba 
Father, says He, all things are possible to Thee ; let this cup 
pass from Me. Mark xiv. 36 : comp. John xii. 27. This possi- 
bility of all things to God is opposed to the weakness of Christ's 
flesh. — ewt,iiv, to save) eiiiZin, and presently eoirriplag, are conju- 
gates, to save, salvation. — Ix) Presently; afterwards a*i. The 
two words, in other respects, equivalent, agree here with the 
difference of the subject : out of death, from terror. He, how- 
ever, in obedience to the will of the Father underwent the death, 
out of Qx) which the Father might have delivered Him, so that 
He should not have died : He was altogether delivered from 
(awJ) its horror, in that He was heard. — ^sra xpawyrie lax'jp&s ^a.) 
Saxpum, with strong crying and tears) On the cross. He is said to 
have cried, not to have shed tears. Both of these particulars, as 

• See Append, on TpoSspuvim. 



388 HEBKEWS V. 7. 

tlie series of the events shows, refer to Gethsemane. %(a.tfn and 
xpauyri, in the Lxx. correspond to the verbs pVI, and pyx, and jngj, 
and denote a cry from the depths of the soul, or vehement de- 
sire ; exreviaripov, more earnestly^ Luke xxii. 44 ; with a most 
willing spirit, Matt. xxvi. 41, whatever may be the words uttered : 
these occur very often in the Psalms, as n»X, to speak, to say, 
signifies also thought. Indeed, the cry of the mind, while the 
lips are closed, is more suitable to tears and sorrow ; and yet 
there is no doubt, that Jesus added to His prayers in Gethse- 
mane an incitement by uttering at intervals short cries, as well 
as to His supplications by tears (observe the Chiasmus) which 
were dravm forth not only from the eyes, but from the whole 
face and body, during that extreme heat [agony]. See Luke as 
quoted above : comp. with Rev vii. 17, 16. xavf^a, Sax^uov, heat, 
tears. The sweat and blood of Christ were poured out like 
water. During the whole of His passion He alternately cried 
and was silent. Matt. xxvi. 37, etc. ; Ps. xxii. 2, 3, 15, bdx. 2, 
etc., cix. 21, etc., where silence is an intimation of a wounded 
heart. — xal iidaxouakli, and being heard) JCB'in lxx. iieaxounv, Ps. 
Iv. 17 ; Tfy in like manner, 2 Chron. xviii. 31 : therefore in this 
passageffw^£/v aTiisi(!oi.-x.o{jiiv,to save,a.nd to hearken to,are verynearly 
the same. The agony and its issue are here referred to, iip^art 
XuiriTuSai xa,i abrjiionh. He began to be sorrowful and very heavy. — 
Ewf 6avart\j, unto death, Matt. xxvi. 37, 38. — ex6a,/ji,j3iTg£ai, Mark 
xiv. 33 : Luke xxii. 44 mentions the agony and sweat. When 
the cup was presented, there was also presented to the soul of 
the Saviour the horrible image of death, which was joined with 
sorrow, ignominy, and cursing, and was of a lingering nature, 
and He was moved to pray for the removal of the cup. But the 
purity of filial affection in the Saviour with the exercise of holy 
reason and moderation instantly softened that horror, and sub- 
sequently absorbed it completely, as the serenity of His mind 
returned. And He was heard, not that He should not drink the 
cup, but that He should now drink it without any horror; 
whence also He was strengthened by an angel. The fear was 
a something more horrible than death itself; when the feeling 
of horror was taken away before the coming of His enemies. He 
lays it down as a fixed principle, that the cup which he had 
wished conditionally not to drink, now cannot but be drunk. 



HEBREWS V. 8. 389 

John xviii. 11. — a*J) An abbreviated expression, iieaxcuaSii; diro, 
as e^^avTisfiihoi d*J, ch, X. 22. So Ps. cxviii. (cxvii.) 5, ''JJK 
amoa sV^xouirs /«,ou tl; vXarve/iov. — a.'zh rrig luXa^iias [not as Eng. 
Ver. in that He feared^ from horror). The Greek word here has 
singular elegance and denotes something wore subtle than if one 
were to say fear. No Latin word more suitable than horror 
occurs to us. Comp. iiiXa^rihtg, ch. xi. 7. He had lately used 
Samrov, without the article ; now he has Trjg suXa/3f/as with the 
article, of which the relative power indicates that the significa- 
tion of iuXa.0ilas is included in the mention made of death, which 
was horrible in its assault. 

8. Kaimp wv iiihg, though He was a Son) This paragraph, in 
the days, etc. has two parts. The first is, in the days — obedience 
by the things which He suffered ; the second, and being made per- 
fect — of eternal. The first part speaks of things very humble ; 
for death and to be in horror, and, although the horror of it be 
removed, to die, and to learn obedience from such suffering, may 
appear somewhat servile : wherefore, by this clause, although He 
was a Son, precaution is taken, that nothing said in that part, 
before and after, should be a stumbling-block to any. The 
second part is altogether joyful and glorious, and he insinuates 
(implies) that we must repeat from ver. 5, because He was the 
Son: comp. ch. vii. 28, at the end. In His agony in Geth- 
semane He so sweetly, so frequently, appealed to the Father, 
Matt. xxvi. 39, etc. : and from this fact we have the clearest 
confirmation of the truth that Jesus was not the Son of God 
merely because He rose from the dead, and not previously. — 
s/j,a,Siv, He learned) The word learning put before the word suf- 
fering, elegantly points to Christ learning with the utmost readi- 
ness and willingness. He learned obedience whilst He began to 
suffer, whilst He set Himself to drink the cup. The word to 
learn implies a kind of beginning, and the making perfect corre- 
sponds to this beginning, of which we shall afterwards speak. 
There is a pleasant paronomasia^ in s/jiaSiv a,(fm 'i-^rah. He also 
had experience of the adage, ■jTaShf'aTa ihcLiniha.ra [sufferings, the 
means of learning]. Christ alone fortified [secured] the path of 
obedience in a way consonant to the will of the Father Obe,- 

' See Append. 



890 HEBREWS V. 9, 10. 

die.nce may be performed without prayers} — ap uv) So [iahtv awh, 
Matt. xxiv. 32. — Tr,v v'Traxoriv, obedience) That kind of humble 
obedience which is shown in suffering and dying. Phil. ii. 8, note. 
He says to the Father, as Thou wilt. — t/gajioveklg, and i-^raxoriii, 
are conjugates. The Father hearkened to the Son, and the Son 
to the Father. In like manner Christ obeyed the Father;^ we 
obey Christ ; see the following verse. 

9. Kal TsXmahl;, and being made perfect) by sufferings, ch. ii. 
10. — roTg iiTaxovovgiv ahrSi, to them that obey Him) 2 Cor. x. 5. 
We must obey likewise through sufferings and death [as Christ 
obeyed the Father. — V. g.J and chiefly by faith, ch. xi. 8. — vaeiv, 
to all) GvesA power, ch. ii. 10, 11, 15. — a'Jnag etarnpiag aiaivm, 
the author of eternal salvation) Dessen habe der liebe Herr Jesu 
Dank von uns in Ewigkeit. " For which the beloved Lord Jesus 
may have thanks from us in eternity," E. Schmidius, piously. 
Moreover alnog is a word extremely worthy of Him and (comp. 
1 Sam. xxii. 22, ahiog ■^v-xfiv) one by which it is intimated, that 
Christ, being made perfect, pleads the cause of the brethren, from 
this circumstance, because it now evidently belongs to Him to 
accomplish [to make good] their salvation ; for He is able : comp. 
dvvdfiivov, who was able, ver. 7, ch. vii. 25 : and ought (it behoved 
Him) to do so, comp. oupiiKe, He ought, ch. ii. 17. [Der fur 
Etwas stehet, an der man sich halten kann. He stands for 
something to which one can cling. — V. g.] We must also ob- 
serve the epithet, eternal salvation, which is opposed to the 
shortness of the days of Jesus' flesh, and flows (is derived) from 
ver. 6, for ever. Concerning this salvation, look back to ch. ii. 
10, 14, etc. The eternity of salvation is mentioned, Is. xlv. 17. 
'igpariX aal^iTai h'nh Kuphv dciirripiav a'luviov, Israel is saved by the 
Lord with an eternal salvation. 

10. Upoeayopivhlg) called. His name was the Son of God; 
His surname. His appellation was Priest : vpogriyopla. His being 
called a priest, not only followed the perfecting of Jesus, but also 
preceded His passion at the period mentioned in Ps. ex. 4. 
The same word occurs 2 Mace. xiv. 37, where it is said that 
Ilazis was called (vpoaayopivo/nvog) the father of the Jews. 

1 But Christ joined both prayers and obedience : and this is the Father's 
will.— En. 
^ Equivalent to hearkened to, so as to obey, obedio, Th. ob audio. — Ed. 



HEBREWS V. 11, 12. 391 

11. Uipl ou, of whom) Oil, masc, comp. oe, who, ver, 7. He 
now enters upon that very long anticipatory or precautionary' 
preface or preparation, which consists of rebuke, admonition, 
exhortation, and consolation. The Ehetoricians call it the 
securing (Captatio) of the kindly feeling of the reader or hearer. 
The preparation of the heart [of the hearer by the teacher], to 
which the doctrine is committed, often requires greater exertion 
than the teaching of the doctrine itself. — mXvc) 31, much, i.e. too 
much :" comp. ch. xiii. 22. — -/iz/^Tv, to us) Paul includes, as usual, 
Timothy or others : comp. ch. vi. 1, 3, 9, 11, ii. 5, xiii. 18. — 
SiidipfiriviuTog, hard to interpret) not from any fault in the writer, 
but in yourselves. — Xiyeiv) a correlative to axoaTg. Al/s/v is not 
redundant, speahing is opposed to writing, as ch. xiii. 22. Hard 
to be uttered, harder to be written, and yet the more necessary 
to be written on that account. — mifot) ch. vi. 12. The root 
implies ereprjaiv toxi hn, the negation of running ') verlegen " to 
loiter" on the road. — yeyomri, ye have become) The state of the 
Jews needed to be noticed, as well in so far as it was good, as 
also in so far as it was bad, v. 12, vi. 10, x. 25, 32, 33, xii. 4, 
5,12. 

12. AiSaffxaXoi, teachers) A term not of office, but of ability in 
this passage. The antithesis is rou diddexiiv u/aSs, that one should 
teach you. — &« rhv XP^"^') ^Y reason of the length of time. So 
Arist. 1. 7, Polit. c. 9, iises this phrase. The antithesis is di& rriv 
'i^iv, by reason of the matured faculty \habitual use], ver. 14. 
Time or age is used here either in the abstract for years ; or in 
the concrete for strength. Age either brings vigour with time, 
or is impeded by it. — •xaXiy yjfiiai £%£«, ye again have need) 
Tiyivari ^fE/av 'ixovrig, ye have need, follows. The former has 
respect to the doctrinal articles of the Old Testament, the latter 
to those of New Testament. — tIvo) You must not only be taught 
the very elements, but also (jlva) what they are. They are 
therefore enumerated, ch. vi. 1, 2. — eroiyj'"'^) elements. A word 
used by Paul, Gal. iv. 9. And this passage to the end of the 
chapter plainly abounds in expressions peculiar to Paul. 
Letters, Buchstaben, elements, first (primary), simple. The 

' See Append, on "nrpohpaviin. — Ed. 

' More than it would be expedient now to say. — Ed. 

' An improbable derivation. Rather akin to iiuH< and »o'tfo; — E». 



392 HEBREWS V. 13, 14. 

articles of the Old Testament are to the perfection of the doc- 
trines of the New Testament, as letters are to further learning. 
But yet letters, Buchstaben, denote by a trope the principles of 
learning, which are called rudiments. So every kind of learning 
has its own elements, and the title elements is often given to a 
system by no means subtle. Comp. the end of the note on 2 
Pet. iii. 10. — TTii &eyj\i, of the beginning) Jirst principles, ch. iii. 
14, where the one phrase illustrates the other : although the one 
refers to theory, the other to practice. The antithesis, by the 
introduction of a resemblance from meats, is explained at the 
beginning of ch. vi., where the same word again occurs. — rm 
Xoy'ioiv rou 0£oD, of the oracles of God) Rom. iii. 2. — yakaTirog, of 
milt) Milk is here the doctrine brought from the Old Testament ; 
1 Cor. iii. 2. — xat) and so. To this refer yap, for, in the follow- 
ing verse. 

13. 'O /i£rE;^a)v, he that partakes) Even strong men feed on 
milk, but not on milk chiefly, much less on milk alone. There- 
fore they are intended in this passage, who, in short, either take 
or seek nothing but milk. — H-jrupog, unskilful) not expert, without 
strength and practice. — \6yov dixaioeuvrig, in the word of righteous- 
ness) Alxaiov from dl^a : comp. didxpiaiv, discernment, in the fol- 
lowing verse. For Sixaioeuvt}, righteousness, is such perfection 
(D''Dn Jos. xxiv. 14, Lxx.) as after having put away evil from it, 
attains to the just (proper) degree of good : yeyv/j,m(!,u,im (ver. 
14), exercised, is in consonance with it ; comp. xii. 11, where in 
like manner exercise and righteousness are joined. Such a word 
of righteousness is the doctrine of Christ in the New Testament. 
Righteousness of faith and of life is imderstood, and each on 
either side, according as circumstances have arisen. — vrjmog, a 
babe) The antithesis is tiXbImv, of them that are perfect : comp. 
Eph. iv. 13, 14. 

14. TiXilm, of them that are perfect) riKnirriTa, perfection, ch. 
vi. 1, is the conjugate term. TeXe/o; x.a} /ji,av6a,vovTig are opposed 
to each other, 1 Chron. xxv. 8, T'DPfT'Dy \'^2'a. — 'iffrDi, is [belongeth 
to]) They who are perfect both desire and take solid meat. — Si&) 
by reason of. — rtiv s^iv, habitual strength of understanding^ ['wse']) 
The Lxx. use this word, Judg. xiv. 9 ; 1 Sam. xvi. 7 ; Dan. vii. 

' Latin habilum, Th. haheo : as e J(f from ex"- — Ed. 



HEBREWS VI. 1. 393 

15 ; and also Wisd. xxx. 14. It is said of a whole, in which the 
parts have themselves and are had in turn, hold and are held in 
turn ; and here it denotes the strength of the faculty of percep- 
tion (discernment) arising from the maturity of the spiritual age. 
not habit acquired by practice, ha. r^v s^m, because they are pos- 
sessed of more habitual strength of understanding. Exercise 
follows habit (habitual faculty) ; and strength makes a man put 
his faculty in exercise with alacrity, dexterity, profit, without 
affectation or the perverse imitation of others. — tol alsSriTripia) 
properly the organs of the senses, for example, the tongue, the 
organ of tasting : comp. algSrieii, in perception, sense, Phil. i. 9, 
note. 



CHAPTER VI. 

1. All), wherefore) It might be thought that we should say 8s, 
hut : but the particle 8ih, wherefore, is better fitted to rouse. So 
Paul also, Rom. ii. 1, note.^ — af/'mre;, leaving) in this discussion. 
In other respects these heads of doctrine are not thrown away, 
but are taken for granted. The apostle speaks, in his own name 
and in the name of the other teachers, in the plural number. — 
Tov \6yov, the doctrine, the word) ch. v. 11 [6 Xdyos]. — r^s «/'%')& 
roD XpigTou, of the principles of Christ) Three pairs of particulars 
(heads), which are enumerated in this and the following verse, 
were of that kind, that a Jew, well instructed among his country- 
men out of the Old Testament, ought to have applied them for 
the most part to Christianity. Regarding repentance, the resur- 
rection, and the judgment, the point is clear ; for inasmuch as 
eternal life is only mentioned by implication among these, and 
expressly in the antithesis, ver. 5, it also agrees with the system 
of both testaments: as also the apostle speaks of /aM toward 
God, not toward the Lord Jesus ; comp. Acts xi. 21, note. He 
speaks of baptisms in the plural, of which the Jews had various 
kinds for the purpose of initiation ; and the imposition of hands 

' The illative particle, as being the stronger, absorbs the transitive par- 
ticle.— Ed. 



804 HEBREWS VI. 2. 

(Num. xxvii. 18, 23) was very much practised among them 
Whosoever was well acquamted with these two, quickly com- 
prehended the doctrine of Christian baptism and of the imposition 
of hands by the apostles ; and this is the very reason why these 
two particulars are interwoven with other points more funda- 
mental ; namely, because the gift of the Holy Spirit corresponds 
to these in the antithesis, of which each refers to perfection, not 
to initiation. Therefore these six particulars vfexeXhe principles 
of the oracles of God, ch. v. 12 ; likewise the ;j apyri rou Xpiffrou, 
principles of the doctrine of Christ, viz. among those learning 
Christ ; for Christ is often used by Paul, by Metonymy of the 
concrete for the abstract, for Christianity : Gal. iv. 19 ; Phil, 
i. 21, " my life, or abiding in the flesh, is Christ," that is, 
is the work of Christ. Add Col. iii. 11, note. These particulars 
had been, if we may say so, the Christian Catechism of the Old 
Testament ; and such Jews, who had begun to recognise Jesus as 
the Christ immediately upon the new light being brought to 
bear (being shed) on these fundamental heads, were accounted 
as having the principle of the doctrine of Christ. Perfection — i.e. 
the perfect doctrine concerning Christ Himself— is opposed to this 
beginning principle {n d^%ii) [ver. 4, 5]. — <pepu/j,eSa, lei us go on, or 
be carried forward) A word implying active exertion. He pro- 
perly puts this subjunctive before the indicafijve, mrieofiiv, we will 
do, ver. 3. — -^rdXiv, again) Again, ver. 6, accords with this. — 
h/isXiov, foundation) A synonym of apx^s, of the beginning prin- 
ciplct — -■H.aro.^aXKoit.imi, laying) An architectural term. — /leravolag, 
x.r.'K., of repentance, etc.) He might have said, concerning GoT> and 
faith in Him, concerning sin and repentance ; or at least, concern- 
ing repentance from dead works, concerning faith in GoD ; but he 
forthwith says, the foundation of repentance, etc. Therefore we 
ought not to delay in the consideration of sin, but to begin with 
active repentance. Therefore we ought to connect faith with the 
first mention of GoD. Therefore Theology is practical. — avh 
vsxpSiv 'ipyav, from dead works) So ch. ix. 14. This term implies 
a loathing of sin. 

2. BavTie/iSiv dida^r}i) Kal is not put before Ba-rTie/iu) ; for 
three pairs of chief particulars (heads) are enumerated, and the 
second particular (head) in every pair has the conjunction ; but 
only the third pair is similarly connected : from which it is also 



HEBREWS VI. 3, i. 305 

evident, that ^aTne/jiuii and hibayra must not be separated. 
BoMrig/ioi didcc^tjg^ were baptisms which were received by those 
who devoted themselves to the sacred ddctrine of the Jews ; 
therefore, by the addition of diSaxrii, they are distinguished from 
the other Levitical washings; ch. ix. 10. — xpi/iuTog almlov) of 
eternal judgment. See Mark iii. 29, note. 

3. TovTo, this) The reference is to (pepufaSa, let us go on. — 
edv Tip, if indeed) For, in the following verse, refers to this. 
Without the Divine blessing, the cultivation of the ground does 
not succeed ; ver. 7. 

4. 'A&uvarov) it is impossible for men, however qualified. — 
awaf , once for all) The adverb does not extenuate the matter, 
but renders the expression precise. — pwr/ff^enras, enlightened) 
Christianity is the Whole, into which men get an entrance 
through the Grospel received by faith, and through baptism. 
There follow here the three parts in respect of the three principal 
benefits in the New Testament, proceeding from the Son of God, 
from the Holy Spirit, from God. So, enlightened (illuminated), 
ch. X. 32. Whence the use of this word is very frequent in the 
writings of the Fathers concerning baptism. Life and light 
are often mentioned conjointly ; the one is often observed to be 
included in the notion of the other. Therefore, as regeneration 
is said to take place in baptism, so also enlightening. And this 
phrase is particularly suited to the Israelites, who had not been 
without life by faith, according to the Old Testament, when 
they abstained from dead works, ver. 1 ; but yet afterwards 
they were bathed in the new light of the New Testament. — 
ytueafj^mvi " t"^? Siapiag rrig I'Tovpavlou, who have tasted the heavenly 
gift) The enjoyment of light is in vision : now to vision is added 
taste, by which believers, being allured, ought to be always re- 
tained, 'h daipi^ 71 imvpaviog, the heavenly gift, is the Son of GoD, 
as it is expressed, ver. 6, — Christ, who is tasted by faith, and 
also in His own sacred Supper ; 1 Pet. ii. 3 ; and this taste in- 
volves more than repentance from dead works, and faith toward 
God. The participle, jiusa/jihovg, although the genitive [ver. 4] 
and accusative [ver. 5] are often used promiscuously, seems, 
however, in this passage to carry with it a difference in the 

1 Bengel evidently understands these words, baptisms of or into doctritir, 
not as Engl. Vers., the doctrine ofbaptxtms. — Ed. 



396 

cases. The one (Genitive) denotes a •part ; for we do not ex- 
haust the tasting [enjoy the whole fulness, but only a ■pari\ of 
Christ, the heavenly gift, in this life : the other (Accusative) ex- 
presses more, inasmuch as the whole tasting of the Word of 
God preached belongs to this life, although the powers of the 
world to come are joined to this Word. — /t£ro;^6uc, partakers) 
This partaking, as we have observed at ver. 1, involves more 
than the doctrines of baptism and the imposition of hands. In 
this clause the word taste is not used, because the Holy Spirit 
here is considered as rather producing the taste, than as its ob- 
ject. — nveu/iaros ' Ay'm, of the Holy Ghost)'H.e isof^en mentioned 
in connection with Christ ; Acts ii. 38. 

5. riueafiivovg, who have tasted) A new taste, likewise involv- 
ing more than the knowledge of the resurrection of tJie dead and 
of eternal judgment. — xaXov pri/j^a, the good word) Jer. xxxiii. 
14, Dltsn 13in nx, the Gospel. — duvdfiei;, powers) of the most 
exquisite taste. The plural is highly significant. The same 
word occurs, ch. ii. 4 ; comp. xi. 34. Both passages show the 
emphasis of the word, Hvvd/ms. — iiiXkowog aiuvoi, of the world to 
come) Eternal glory is principally intended ; comp. ver. 2, at 
the end; as the city to come is spoken of, ch. xiii. 14; but' the 
present time is not excluded under the New Testament, for in 
this sense things to come are also mentioned, ch. ix. 11, x. 1, 
ii. 5, note. 

6. Ka/ 'jrapa'ffesovrag, and who have fallen away) A word of 
weighty import, suddenly occurring, strikes us with just terror. 
It is thus the LXX. translate the Hebrew I've. He does not 
merely speak of those relapsing into their former condition, but 
of those falling away (prseterlapsos, lapsing aside) from that en- 
tire state of highest glory, and at the same time from faith, hope, 
and love, into a new species of ruin, ver. 10, etc. ; and that, too, 
of their own accord; ch. x. 26. A fall such as this may be 
separated from the blasphemy against the Holy Ghost, but yet 
the bitter state of their soul is nearly the same ; comp. ch. x. 
29, note. The apostle does not say, that they to whom he is 
writing are such as these, but he hints that they may become 
so. The egg which held and lost the stamina of the chicken 
is not even fit to be eaten : the man who has lost his faith is in 
a more deplorable condition than he who never believed. — 



HEBREWS VI. 7. 807 

ffaX;v avaxaiviZiiy, to form anew [renevi] again) A renewal {a form- 
ing anew) had been already made; therefore vakiv, again, is 
added, and it corresponds to the &ira^, once, ver. 4. But we 
must particularly observe, that amxaivi^nv, to make anew or re- 
new, is used in the active voice ; it is impossible for men, not for 
GrOD. Therefore the apostle undertook the doing of this which 
he is doing, on this very condition, if GoD permit ; ver. 3, note ; 
Matt. xix. 26. [There is a similar admonition, x. 26. — V. g.] 
Men, ministers, have already done for such persons what they 
could; Tit. iii. 11. Ministers have a certain measure, and 
those obstinate persons have gone beyond it in their opposition : 
it remains for ministers to leave them to God, and (whether 
they in the meantime admonish them more or less, and enter- 
tain hopes concerning them) to wait what God will give, 2 Tim. 
ii. 25, by means of special afflictions and operations. The 
Grseco-Latin copy, Claromontanus, has in this place ahlivarov, 
' difficile'^ — tig //-iravolav, unto repentance) He appropriately men- 
tions that, which is first in the foundation, ver. 1. But the 
other things are left to be supplied, considered either by them- 
selves or in their effect. — dvagTaupoiJvra;, since they crucify afresh) 
He has described the subject by former participles : he now sub- 
joins the reason (Etiology, Append.) of that impossibility. The 
preposition in avagraupouvras signifies upwards in Herodian, but 
in this passage again, for it is the echo of a,v& in avaxccivl^av. 
'EauToTs, to themselves, which is added, makes an antithesis to 
•sa.fa.htyihaTiZpvTo.i, making an open showing, viz. to others : see 
eraupota with the same case. Gal. vi. 14. From which it is 
manifest, that he is speaking of those who scoff at Christ fi-om 
hatred and bitterness of spirit, for the sake of indulging their 
humour (dehberately and intentionally) : truly, if these men 
had it in their power, they would do to Christ what the Jews 
did under Pontius Pilate. Those who deny the efficacy of 
the cross of Christ, which has been akeady endured, or think 
that He was justly crucified by the Jews, do the same as if they 
were to say, that He must still be crucified ; Eom. x. 6, 7. 

7. r^, the earth) This is figurative. — movsa, drinking) not 
merely on the surface. — et' ahrng, upon it) This is more signi- 

' Vulg. has " impossibile.' — Ed. 



3SS HEBKEWS VI, 8, 9. 

ficant than if it had been i-r auT^v, over it ; for it denotes the 
unceasing (continuous) bounty of heaven. — ■jro'K'Kdxig, often) 
Henqe the a^a^, once, is softened, ver. 4. — sp^6/iim, coming) 
spontaneously. — tIxtovsdc, which bringeth forth) by the regular 
mode of generating. The antithesis is sKfipovda,, that which 
heareth, without law and order, in the following verse. The 
LXX. transl. also use lx<pipu in a good sense ; but here the force 
of the particle Se, but, falls upon ixpipovea,, that which beareth. — 
luhrov, meet) The antithesis is aSSxi/j^og, rejected. — di oSj) for the 
sake of whom. — xal, also) This particle gives an intensive power 
to the present tense of the verb yeapyeirai, is constantly dressed : 
cultivation, blessing; cursing, burning, are opposed by Chiasmus 
(i.e. the first to the fourth, the second to the third). — ^/israXa/i- 
(SavE/, is partaker of) The antithesis is, nigh. The Divine 
blessing on good land is lasting : the Divine curse follows bad 
land. Concerning both, comp. Jer. xvii. 5, 7. — a-jrh roD &iou, 
from God) It is not merely cultivated by men. 

8. ''EjKpipouaa, bearing) This also coheres with miwea, drinking. 
— a-AMcti xa,l rpijSiXovg, thorns and briars) entirely, or at least 
chiefly. — ah6xi[i,og, rejected) so that it may be left uncultivated. — 
xardpa; iyyvg, nigh to cursing) so that it may be overwhelmed 
with all evil. — is) viz. yJjs, of which land. — I'li xaZeiv, for burning) 
These words in this passage are expressive of great avoro/ila, 
severity. Supply iSXots; or 'ipytrai ; comp. LXX., Prov. xiv. 12, 
13, xvi. 25 ; or lerl, comp. Lxx., Isa. xliv. 15, ha fi avSpuiroi sis 
xautiv. The same ellipse is found at ver. 16, wipag ii; ^ijSalumn. 
Fire is the punishment of the Jews, Matt. xxii. 7, and of their 
land. A prophetical strictiu?e a very few years before that the 
city Jerusalem was burnt. Those of the Jews were the most 
desperate, who resisted the faith in the city and around it. 

9. Xli'jreiefieSot, — dyaTr^jro/, we are persuaded — beloved) 1 Cor. 
xiii. 7. In this one place he calls them beloved, namely, for the 
sake of exhortation. For Paul often gives exhortations without 
this title, but he never uses it except for the purpose of exhorta- 
tion. . So in the epistle to the Romans, in like manner once, 
viz. ch. xii. 19, but oftener to the Corinthians and Philippians. 
— di, but) A remarkable Epitherapia^ and softening of what 

1 See App. An after miligaiion of what has been said. 



HEBREWS VI. 10, 11. 399 

might have appeared harsh. — wtpl i/iSv, of you) An antithesis, 
in the hypothesis, to those, who are stigmatized in the thesis, 
ver. 6, 7, 8. — ra, xptlaeom, better things) more consistent with 
godUness, ver. 10. — I'^ofLivajnarripla.g, which [accompany'] are near 
to salvation) An admirable expression. God, conferring upon 
us salvation, s%s(, holds us : we, leaning upon Him by faith, are 
held, s^6/j,iSa; in which way we say i^egSaj ayxvpag, to hold 
one's self resting on the anchor : comp. ver. 19. Salvation itself 
will retain [hold safe] good men. 

'10. Ou yap adiKog, for God is not unrighteous) i.e. He is en- 
tirely just and good. — ayaitng, of love) He is treating of hope, 
ver. 11 : of faith, ver. 12 : of love in this verse. So Paul, 
1 Cor. xiii. 13, and elsewhere often ; likewise below, ch. x. 22, 
23, 24. He lays hold of their love, as an occasion for sharpen- 
ing their faith and hope. — inhi^aeh, you have shown) Even 
where hope is somewhat small, from whatever cause, in present 
circumstances, the past is often calculated to be of great advan- 
tage : Rev. iii. 10. Paul uses the same word, 2 Cor. viii. 24. — 
i'lc rh hiiia axiToZ, toward His name) In like manner the Hebrews 
use W. Comp. 3 John 7 ; Matt. x. 41. The name of God 
excites true love. — Siajcov^gatires roTg ayloig, in that ye have minis- 
tered to the saints) This is the phraseology of Paul, Eom. xv. 25 ; 
1 Cor. xvi. 15. It was to the poor saints at Jerusalem that the 
ministry of beneficence was afforded ; it was the brethren in 
Greece and Asia who afforded it. See the passages quoted. It 
thus frequently happens with Paul, that although he be speak- 
ing to Jews and Gentiles indiscriminately, he nevertheless em- 
ploys those motives which affected either party in particular. 

11. 'Em9vfj,ov/iiv Si, moreover we desire) therefore we thus 
speak. — exaarov, every one) not merely as you have hitherto 
done, in common [jointly, but also individually]. — rnv avrriv) the 
same in hope and faith, as in love. This epistle rather held the 
necessity of urging faith; that o{ James, works: ch. x. 36, xiii. 
7. — hSilxmaSai, to show) The verb is repeated from ver. 10. — 
T^^s) i.e. as far as concerns. — rrjv irKripofopla,)/ rrig iXvldog, the full 
assurance of hope) Long-suffering is closely connected with it, 
ver. 12. So h 'jrXrj po<popi(f <gierioig, in full assurance of faith,- ch. 
X. 22 : and Paul often, for example, Rom. iv. 21. nXriptK^opia,, as 
it were, a full march, implies fulness either of employment, 



♦00 HEBREWS VI. ]2-16. 

2 Tim. iv. 5, 17, or [full persuasion] of the mind, 1 Thess. i. 5, 
and in this passage; Eccl. viii. 11, LXX. — ^%/'/, even unto) Con- 
strued with hdilxmsdai, to show. 

12. Nadpol, slothful) There follows presently after the anti- 
thesis, dt& 'nriiTeia;, hy faith, etc. They were viaSfoi TaTg axoaTg, 
dull of hearing, ch. v. 11 : he now cautions them, not to be- 
come slothful absolutely, viz. also in mind. — dia vlsTidig xal /j,aKpo- 
6u/i,ia,;, through faith and patience) So Paul, 2 Tim. iii. 10, and 
James v. 8. There is the patience or long-suffering of love, 1 Cor. 
xiii. 4 : there is also the long-suffering of faith, ver. 15.— 
xXnpovofiovvTuv) The participle of the imperfect tense ; comp. ver. 
15 : for Abraham is referred to. — ivayyiXias, promises) By this 
very word their confidence is roused ; and iwayyuXd/ievo;, hav- 
ing promised, presently follows. 

13. Kar oudivhg, by none) This epistle abounds in compari- 
sons : here we are informed that no comparison [none to be 
compared with God] was to be found. — Sifiose, He swore) He 
now aflPords consolation by the oath of God's grace, to those 
whom, in ch. iii. and iv., he had admonished by the oath of God's 
wrath, although indeed the oath of His wrath did not extend its 
force beyond the wilderness for ever ; for David and Paul bring 
down nothing of that oath to their own times : but the oath of 
grace is in force for ever. 

14. ''H/iijv) '3, Gen. xxii.17, LXX., xar i[ia,\iTO\i (jifiioea, Xiyii Kupio;, 
ri fi,ijv siiXoyuv fuXoyfieoi as, x.r.X., " I have swom by Myself, saith the 
Lord, that blessing I vrill bless thee," etc. So ? /ifiv. Gen. xlii. 16. 
Devarius, when he had collected examples of the particle ? /4i)i<, 
infers that this word is used merely by the way of ornament, when 
it is applied to a promise or an oath : it is quite different in simple 
affirmations, in which it is necessarily (not merely ornamentally) 
used. But it may be resolved thus : fi, let there be, whatever 
shall happen, i.e. occur what may, /tijii, yet this shall be done. 

15. Maxpoh/iridag, after he had patiently endwed) This is 
evident from the life of Abraham. — Wir\>-xi ri^s i'TrayyeXlag, he 
obtained the promise) he got what was promised ; ver. 14. 

16. KaT& Tod //,ill^ovoc, by the greater) generally by GoD Him- 
self. — xal, and) and so, on account of the authority of the 
greater, which is appealed to. — avTiXoylag vepag tig ^e^alcogm, an 
end of contradiction, or strife, unto confirmation) by which a con- 



HEBKtWS VI. I7-aO. 401 

troversy is terminated in the confirmation of the point in dis- 
pute, beyond all exception : Prov. xviii. 18, D^J^D, avriXoyloa 
<!ra\iei xX^/>os. — o opxog, the oatK) The last resource, which we 
ought not to use, so long as any other method of removing strife 
remains. 

17. 'Ev Si, in whicli) in which case. — mpieaoTspov) more abun- 
dantly than it might seem to have been done, had it been with- 
out an oath. — ^ouXo/avos — rns jSovXrig) are conjugates. The utmost 
benignity is here expressed. — l/iiaiTivesv) He came doion into the 
midst of us : God [who might require of us to have the greatest 
faith in His mere word. — ^V. g.] drawing nearer to us with won- 
derful condescension by an oath, although He is the greatest, as 
it were acts as a Mediator, and comes in between Himself and 
us ; as if He were less, while He swears, than Himself by whom 
He swears. Dost thou not yet believe, thou that hearest the 
promise ? 

18. Alio, two) The one the promise, the other the oath. — si 
<iT;, in which) This refers to 8uo, two.—lgx^pSi.v, strong) So as that 
it may swallow up all strife (contradiction) arising from distrust. 
Bi^aiav, firm, stedfast, foUows, ver. 19. Both words are joined, 
ch. ix. 17. 'lB-)(uphi impKes that strength by which a man is able 
to inflict hard blows on his enemy : ^'e^aio;, that firmness by 
which he does not allow himself to be moved from the position 
which he occupies. — o/ xaTa(pv'y6vTic, who have fled for refuge) as 
from a shipwreck : ayxupav, an anchor, foUows. — 'jrpoxii/ihtig) set 
before us. The same word occurs, ch. xii. 1, 2. 

19. "Hv) which hope. The following things are compared:— 

A ship ; The soul : 

A sure anchor ; Hope, i.e. heavenly good things 

set before us by God, hoped for 
by us : in a complex sense. 

The connection of the ship and The consolation through the 
the anchor ; promise and oath of God. 

— agpaXri, sure) in respect of us. — ^e^alav, firm) in itself. — roD 
xaTa-irirde/iaros, the veil) He gradually retm^ns to the priesthood, 
ch. ix. 3, X. 20. 

20. np6&po/ioi, forerunner) swift. A very significant word : a 
VOL. IV. C C 



402 HEBREWS VII. 1-3. 

forerunner has those who follow him. He is elsewhere called 
thsi first, the first fruits, the first-begotten. — xarA, according to) 
is put at the beginning of the clause for the sake of emphasis. 



CHAPTER VII. 

1. Ouros) The subject, namely, This man, who is mentioned 
ch. vi. 20 from the psalm, and the same who is mentioned in 
Genesis. The Predicate is, ver. 3, avariap — e/'s rh S/jjvexEf, 
without father— for ever. The summary of this chapter is : 
Christ, as is shown by the type Melchisedec, who was greater 
than Abraham himself, from whom Levi is descended, has a 
priesthood truly excellent, new, perfect, stedfast, everlasting. — 
^aaiXeus — hpiijg, king — priest) Christ is also both. — iipiiig rov ©sou 
icvj/iVrou) So the Lxx., Gen. xiv. 18 ; that is, Priest of the Most 
High God. — 6 ewavrrigas 'A^fia&fi I'ltoerpifom aith Trig M-7:ng) The 
LXX., ibid. ver. 17, s^^Xh &s ^ctSiXsiig "S.obofLuti vg euvdvrriaiv abr^ /iitA 
vb 'vaoarpi-^ai ahrhv a'jrh TTJg M'Trrjg, x.r.X. In the Ordo Temporum, p. 
176, I have taken rijii xo^^v, in the strict sense, for the slaughter 
and destruction of the kings ; but the meaning, flight, is also one 
consistent with the word man (lxx. xo'j-i)). Gen. xiv. 17 ; comp. 
ver. 15. Therefore this passage does not prevent us from be- 
lieving that Arioch, king of Ellasar, lived and reigned after the 
disaster. There I did not venture to affirm that Arioch is the 
same as Arius, and I am less disposed to do so now. To such a 
degree is the antiquity of the Assyrians uncertain abroad, which 
L. Offerhaus speciously discusses in the second book of his 
Spicilegia. — iliXoy^Sag) LXX. luKoyriss. 

2. AijidTrjV avh irdvTuv — 4. 'iiuxiv) LXX. 'eduKSV auTu) dixdrrjv 
avi 'jrdvTuv. — irpSirov, first) from his own name : 'i'Treira,, then, from 
the name of the place. There are often mysteries even in the 
proper names of men and places. — Sixaioednrig' elprjvrig) So righteous- 
ness and peace are often mentioned together by Paul, E.om. v. 
1. — Se xal) viz. tliv : for o sau corresponds to ip/Lrivitj6//,svog, 

3. 'Avdrup, ajj^rir lap, ayinakiyrirog, without father, without mothet , 
without genealogy [desoentj) The parents, ancestors, children, 



HEBREWS VII. 4 403 

posterity of Melchisedec are not descended from Levi, as was 
required to be the case with the Levites, ver. 6, and they are 
not even mentioned by Moses ; and this silence is foil of mys- 
tery, which is immediately unfolded. There are even few of the 
Levitical priests whose mothers are mentioned in Scripture ; but 
yet their Levitical sanctity (as to their wives) is universally 
enjoined, Lev. xxi. 13, 14 ; and, at all events, the wife of Aaron, 
from whom all the priests are descended, is mentioned, Ex. vi. 
23 : and Sarah, the wife of Abraham himself, Is. li. 2. — [irjTt 
apyiiy, nor beginning) The eternity of the Son of God is intimated. 
— 'ix'^h having) with Moses, who nevertheless relates the death 
of Aaron. — fi/npZv, of days) It was not so suitable to say, the 
beginning of life or the end of days, ver. 16, where power is men- 
tioned along with life. — a(paifi,oiii/t,hog di rSi I'li^ rou 0£oD, but made 
like to the Son of God) Be, but, properly has respect to the oppo- 
sition between the negatives, which precede, and the positive, 
which follows, and takes the former for granted. The likeness 
of Melchisedec to the Son of God refers both to the former and 
the latter ; but it is also more directly connected with the latter, 
because it has more reference to the purpose in hand. The 
Son of God is not sard to be made hke to Melchisedec, but the 
contrary (vice versa) ; for the Son of God is more ancient, and 
is the archetype ; comp. viii. 5, \where in like manner heavenly 
things are set forth as more ancient than the things belonging to 
the Levitical priesthood. — ^V. g.] — /ilns/, remains) The positive 
for the negative in respect of Melchisedec : he remains and lives, 
ver. 8 : i.e. nothing is mentioned of his decease or succession. 
But it holds good in its strict meaning from Christ. 

4. ©icafiTTs) you see ; comp. Acts xxv. 24, note ; or rather see, 
consider. For Paul begins to teach in this passage, and at the 
same time excites our admiration : olrog, this man, accords with 
this view. — !^, to whom) as greater, and as a priest.— xa/) even. 
The greatness of Melchisedec is described in all those things 
which precede and follow this clause ; but the principal thing is 
receiving the tithes. For this is the privilege of a superior.— 
l-A. rm axpoMaiv) of the spoils, which had properly belonged to 
Abraham as the conqueror. Hesychius explains: axpodivm, 
airapx,^ xapvSJv, ri gxvXa, Xapvpuv kitapxaU ' Axpo^imv, o.'Xa.px^ '■"' 
iiviiv, 61vi( di ikiv 01 eupol ruv 'rrupuf n npiSuv' ^ aaaa amapyTi '■ 



404 HEBREWS VU. 5-9. 

" axpodivlov is Jirst fruits, or arms, clothes, the first fruits of 
spoils : axpoSiviov, the first firuits of 6heg, and 61vss are heaps of 
wheat or barley ; or any first fruits whatever." — o ■jra.Tpidpx^s, 
the patriarch) He highly praises Abraham, that Melchisedec 
may be made the greater. The patriarch is even greater than 
a king, as being the progenitor of kings. 

5. Tod Xabv, the people) An abbreviated expression, to be re- 
solved into a subject and predicate consisting each of two 
members. The priests (and Levites) tithe (the Levites and) the 
people, Num. xviii. 21, 26; Neh. x. 38. So the style oi Paul 
admits, Eom. v. 1 6, note. — xara rh vo/jlov) according to or in the law, 
ch. ix. 19. — adiXipoiig, brethren) with whom they are of the same 
natural condition. To these, however, are preferred the Levites; 
to these latter, the priests ; to these again, Abraham : to Abra- 
ham is preferred Melchisedec. 

6. 'E| a\)Tuv)from them, as he was more ancient even than they. 
— xal, and) This verse has two propositions, of which the expla- 
nation precedes the first, follows the second : Chiasmus. And 
at the same time this second point — the superiority of Melchisedec 
to Abraham — namely, the blessing, is conveniently connected 
with the former point concerning tithes, because its description 
is afterwards completed. — rh 'iyovra, who had) This both increases 
Abraham's dignity, and intimates that even the posterity, who 
had been then already promised to Abraham, would yield the 
superiority to Melchisedec. — rag i-jrayyiXlag, the promises) plm'al. 
Where Christ is the subject, it is called the promise : promises 
refer to other things. Already God had twice promised to 
Abraham, Gen. xii. 2, xiii. 15, before the blessing of Melchisedec. 
— liiXoytixi, blessed) The blessing which the priests pronounced on 
the people, is also by implication contained in the Protasis con- 
cerning the Levitical priests. 

7. EuXoyiiTui, receives the blessing) namely, if the blessing be 
given, for instance, with sacerdotal authority. 

8. Maprupoi/isvos) He of whom it is witnessed {WIio was 
honoured with the testimony). — on t,fi, that He liveth) The death 
of Melchisedec is not mentioned in the Old Testament. That 
circumstance is positively expressed by the term, life, for the sake 
of the Apodosis, respecting Christ. 

9. 'ns iTOf e'lTih) When, in the explanation of any subject 



HEBREWS VII. 10, 11. 406 

something of the highest importance must be unexpectedly said 
after the other parts, which had been and might be treated of, 
where the particle denique is an apt expression in Latin, this 
courteous phrase, ug 'ivos I'miHi, or ws s/Ve/v, not to be met with 
elsewhere in the New Testament, has been generally used by 
the Greeks to avoid hyperbole and the prolixity of a somewhat 
precise discourse, or for the sake of anticipatory mitigation ^ and 
softening the expression, by which it was intimated that the 
matter can scarcely be told unless it be expressed in the present 
words, and yet that it must be told. See Not. ad Chrys. de 
Sacerd., p. 494. — Asuf, Levi) the progenitor of the priests. — 
Xafi^avm, who receivetJi) ver. 5. 

10. "En, still) He says, still, not already now. The offspring, 
after withdrawing from the power of the parent, become their 
own guardian; but while they are under the power of the 
parent, nay, in his loins, they follow his condition. It may be 
said. Was not Christ Himself, according to the flesh, as well as 
Levi, in the loins of Abraham ? Comp, Acts ii. 30. Ans. 
Christ is expressly set forth by the psalm as a priest after the 
order of Melchisedec, and that too in such a way that Melchisedec 
is made like to the Son of GoD, not the Son of God to Mel- 
chisedec : nor is Christ subjected to Abraham, but stands in 
opposition to the sons of Levi. And Abraham, when Mel- 
chisedec blessed him. Gen. xiv. 19, already had the promises, 
Heb. vii. 6 ; namely, those in which were included both the 
blessing expressed more generally and the natural seed, and so 
also Levi, Gen. xii. 3, 7, xiii. 15, 16 : but those promises under 
which Christ was comprehended, followed Abraham's meeting 
with Melchisedec, as well as the faith of Abraham, which was 
in the highest degree commended. Gen. xv. 1, etc., where we 
have the remarkable beginning. After these things. 

11. e; /ib oZv, if then) Now, the apostle, by referring to the 
110th Psalm, shows that the Levitical priesthood yields to the 
priesthood of Jesus Christ : because Melchisedec, according to 
whose order and likeness Jesus Christ is a priest, (1.) is opposed 
to Aaron, ver. 11-14 ; (2.) has no end of hfe, ver. 15-19 — 
TiXiiuaig, perfection) The LXX. put this word for the Hebrew 

' Jlnhpavelx. Append. 



406 HEBREWS VII. 12, 13. 

WVi'pp, Ex. xxix. 22, etc. ; Lev. vii. 37, viii. 22, 28, 29, 31, 33, 
where the writer is treating of Levitical perfection ; but here 
reXelueis rf\tia, absolute perfection, is intended: comp. ver. 19. 
The article is not added, and therefore Paul increases the force 
of the negative expression. — ?v) if — were. So rjv, ch. viii. 7. — 
Xahi yap, for thepeople) The conjunction y&p put after the noun, 
as in ver. 28, intimates that the noun people is here emphatic • 
the whole people of God. It at the same time shows why any 
one might perhaps ascribe perfection to the Levitical priesthood, 
and why it is necessary that that opinion should be confuted ! 
comp. Y&p, for, which is likewise subjoined to the word el, if, ch. 
viii. 7, 8. — STT auTjj, under, or in connection with I'i) Under the 
Levitical priesthood. 'E*/ with the dative, on, upon, concerning, 
in the case of, etc., often denotes the object, and that too having 
the force either of cause or effect, ch. viii. 1, 6, ix. 10, 17, xi. 4. 
— vtmfioS'srtiTo, had received the law) The Pluperfect, because a 
time intervened before the 110th Psalm was given. As DTin is 
vo>os, the law, ver. 12, so the Lxx. translate the verb mm 
io/jLohTin ma, to instruct any one : Ps. xxv. 8, xxvii. 11, cxix. 33, 
102. The people were only instructed about the Levitical 
priesthood, with which the whole law is occupied, and speaks of 
no other priesthood, ver. 5 ; but the 110th Psalm introduces a 
different system of instruction, namely, because God has changed 
the priesthood. — Hi 'in, what any longer now) This now any longer 
is very urgent. — %?2/a, necessity) for GoD does nothing in vain. 
— iTipov, another) Comp. the epithets, new, second, ch. viii. 13, x. 
9. — avleragSai) should arise anew, ver. 15. The antithesis is 
X'syisSai, should be called, according to the old form of instruction. 
— XiyieSai, should not be called) in the psalm, at the time of 
which Aaron, i.e. the order of Aaron, flourished. 

12. MiTaTihfihrig, being transferred or changed) from order to 
order, from tribe to tribe. — yap, for) He shows why, in ver. 11, 
he presses the words of the psalm concerning the order of Mel- 
chisedec, because it follows from this, that the law was also 
changed along with the priesthood, and that both are brought to 
Christ. — vi/iou, of the law) ver. 5, 16, 19, 28 ; ch. viii. 4. Td^K, 
order (not v6//,og), is the expression used of Christ. 

13. 'Ep' Sc) He, respecting whom these things are spoken by 
the Fsahxast.~/j,ir'e(!^nxiv, belonged to, had part in) We have 



HEBREWS VII. 14-18. 407 

the same verb, ch. ii. 14. — rp SugiagTi^plai, at the alfar) Le- 
vitical. 

14. xipihiiXov) it is manifest. Therefore, at that time the genea- 
logy of Jesus Christ laboured under no difficulty ; and this very 
circumstance entirely sweeps away the difficiJties that after- 
wards arose. It is both evident and sufficient, that this point 
was formerly clear. — eg 'lohia, from Judah) See Luke i. 27, 39, 
note, and ch. ii. 4, 5. For the Tribe is what is particularly re- 
ferred to ; not, however, to the exclusion of the city where our 
Lord was born, Bethlehem-Judah ; nay, even there is reference 
to Hebron, a city of Judah, where Lightfoot says, in Chron. 
N. T. Part L sect. 3 and 4, and in Harmon, evangel, on Luke 
i. 39, that it is very probable He was conceived. — on uvariraXMv, 
that our Lord sprang) as the Branch {avardk^) of Righteous- 
ness. — £/s fi\i) in respect of which. So s/'s, Eph. v. 32 ; 1 Pet, 
i. 11. 

15. KaraSjjXoi/ kgri) it is evident, namely, that which is asserted, 
ver. 11, [that there was no perfection realized hy the Levitical 
priesthood — V. g.] — e/, if) An elegant particle for o«, when, 
in reference to those to whom this point might seem to be either 
new or doubtful ; as Acts xxvi. 23. — o/to;or^ra, similitude) which 
is included in rd^ii, order, and is called similitude, because 
here the discourse is designed to show the everlasting vigour 
and freshness of the priesthood in the following verse, from 
the phrase, tig rhv alum, for ever, ver. 17. 

16. "Os yiy oviv) who is made a priest. Kara, according to, is 
construed with the word, priest. — vo/iov brokTis gapjuxjj;, the law of 
a carnal commandment) Power is presently opposed to the law ; 
life to commandment ; endless to carnal. Commandment occurs 
again, ver. 18 ; law, ver. 19. Concerning the flesh, comp. ch. ix. 
10. — bLmfiiv Z^urii, the power of life) Both words occur again, 
ver. 25. 

18. 'ASerrjgii, a disannulling) So avaipiT, takes away, ch. x. 9. 
— yhirai, takes place) in the psalm. — rrpoayovgris hroXiji, of the 
commandment going before) This commandment is denoted in 
the abstract, ver. 16, and in the concrete, in conjunction with 
men, ver. 28 ; in the same manner as the first testament or 
covenant, ch. viii. 7, 8. — aghiie xal avaifiiXis, weakness and un- 
profitableness) So Paul uses the term, weak elements, Gal. iv„ 



iOS HEBREWS VII. ]!)-24, 

9 ; and he also often desires and has regard to that which is 
' profitable/ ch. xiii. 9 ; comp. Epistles to Timothy and Titus. 

19. o!iSh eTiXiliidiv i vofiog, the law made nothing perfect) Paul 
speaks much in the same way of the powerlessness (to ahhvaTov) 
of the law, in that it was weak through the flesh, Kom. viii. 3. — 
h-jTiigayuyn) properly, the bringing in afterwards [superintro- 
ductio]. It is construed with yinrai, takes place, ver. 18, 
L — in the psalm, to wit. — ^V. g.] The antithesis is manifest : a 
disannulling indeed, but the bringing in. 'Et/ in iTiisayayrj is 
opposed to the -jrph in irrpoayovarii;, and is the same as /ierqi,, after, 
ver. 28. — xpelrTosog, of a better) that is, not weak and unprofit- 
able. The epithet, xpilrTuv, often occurs in this epistle, as well 
as aiuivioc, aXtidmhg, dehrepog, dia(popuTipog, iripoi, f^Siv, xccivhc, fiiXkm, 
vios, 'spodfarog, TiXtios. — syyl^o/iiv, we draw near) This is true 
TiXiicdffis, perfection. 

20. Kaf ogov, inasmuch as) Supply from what follows, He was 
made a priest. The Apodosis is in ver. 22, xara, roaoZrov, by 
so m.uch. — opxa/ioslag) A magnificent compound. 

21. Ai& roD XsyovTog irphg ahrh, by Him that said to Him) On 
other occasions, he who receives the office swears ; here. He 
who conferred the priesthood swore. There is nothing about 
this oath in Moses, but in the psalm. See how great authority 
belongs even to the Psalms ! ver. 28. — Sifioee Kiipiog xa! ou 
ILiTafLikri^rjSirai, the Lord hath sworn and will not repent) So 
irXX. It is intimated by the oath itself that the decree is one 
afLiTa/i'eXriTov, not to be disannulled by any repentance. 

22. KpeiTTovog, of a better) testament or covenant, not to be 
repented of, eternal, ch. xiii. 20. — diaSfixrig, testament) After 
this passage this word is of frequent occurrence, ch. viii., ix., x. ; 
likewise ch. xii. 24, xiii. 20. Paul also uses it often in other 
places. It denotes a divine appointment, comprising the rela- 
tions and bearings, partly of a covenant, partly of a testament. 
— 'iyyvog, surety) Hesychius, eyyvog, dvd&o^og. Its synonym is 
/itgirng, mediator, ch. viii. 6. 

23. liXtloveg, many) one after another. — -jrapafiEveiv) to remain 
together on earth. The antithesis is /liviiv, to remain absolutely 
in heaven, ver. 24. 

24. M'iviiv, because that He continueth) in life and in the 
priesthood. — axirh) because He Himself continues : Su, Thou 



IIEBRE-WS VII. 25, 2G. 409 

art a Priest, in the singular. — avapd^arov, not passing away) 
into the hands of successors. 

25. "OSev, whence) From this, that He remains. — xal, also) 
He not only remains, but also saves. — (Tw^e/v, to save) by His 
own name, Jesus, ver. 22. — elg rh vavTiXig, to the uttermost) So 
Luke xiii. 11. The meaning of 'navn'kug is, in all ways, 1, 2 
Mace, often. It is construed with bmarai, He is able ; as vdv- 
nrt, always, with Zuv, living. — roiig vpogfp^^o/ji.ivoti;, those that come 
near) by faith, eh. iv. 16, x. 22. — Si aurou, by Him) as by a 
priest. — TSi ©es, to God) ch. xi. 6, xii. 22, 23. — vAvron tiZv, 
ever living) Because He always lives, therefore He is able to the 
uttermost. He is not prevented by death ; comp. ver. 23. — s/'s, 
to) that is, even so as that He intercedes for them. The gra- 
dation may be compared in a passage of Paul's very like this, 
Rom. viii. 34, and ilg rh below, ch. xi. 3. There was but one 
offering, ver. 27 ; but hnv^ig, intercession, for our salvation is 
continued in the heavens, ver. 26. "Whence it results, that we 
can never be separated from the love of God in Christ. See 
again Rom. viii. 34, 38, 39. 

26. Toiouro;, such) From what goes before, great exultation 
and holy boasting are diffused into this and the following verse. — 
iirpiiriv rifjJn, became us) who were by no means godly, etc. Thus 
the verb, became, renders the expression a paradox, such as Paul 
loves, when he kindles into applause. The same word occurs, 
ch. ii. 10. — bsiog, pious) with respect to God. — axaxog, harmless, 
without a fault) with respect to Himself. O'tiT), lxx., axaxog. 
— A/ilavTog) undefiled, deriving no stain from other men. The 
same word is found at ch. xiii. 4. All these predicates conjointly 
make the periphrasis of the word, ayiog, holy, and are illustrated 
by the preparation of the Levitical high priest for the feast of 
expiation, when he also was bound to remain in solitude, and in 
the high place [as Jesus was separate and made higher, ver. 26]. 
Our High Priest must be entirely free from sin, and, after He 
had tasted death once for all, also from death. — MympieiJjmg ai-J 
Tuv kihapruKm) not only free from sin, but also separate from 
sinners. He was separated when He left the world. Examine 
the following clause, and John xvi. 10 ; 1 John ii. 1. — h-i^r{kir- 
Tipog ruiv oxjpamv) higher than the heavens, and therefore than the 
inhabitants of the heavens. [He is therefore the true God: 



410 HEBREWS VII. 27, 28. 

comp. Job xxii. 12 ; Ps. Ivii. 6 ; Prov. xxx. 4. — V. g.j Eph. 
i. 21, IV. 10. — yhoiiivos, made) Christ both was formerly higher 
than the heavens, and was made so afterwards ; comp. yem/tEvos, 
being made, ch. i. 4. We have the same force in the participle, 
TtTiXimfj/svov, made perfect, at ver. 28. 

27. oh, not) The Negation has a double force, and is thus to 
be explained : He has no necessity to offer, 1. daily : 2. for His 
own sins also. Not daily, for He has done that once for all. 
Not for His own sins, for He offered Himself, a holy sacrifice. 
There is besides in it an inverted Chiasmus. The first follows 
fi-om the second, the second is confirmed by the 28th verse. 
Often in Scripture two positions (theses) are laid down, and are 
proved by the yap, for, twice following them. — xa^' ti/jiiipav, daily) 
xar eviavTov, year by year, properly, ch. x. 3. The Hebrews 
speak of the day, instead of the day of expiation ; whence some 
translate xaS'' iifiipav, on every day of expiation : but it retains 
here its usual meaning, so that there is as it were a kind of in- 
dignant hjqjcrbole (such as at ch. x. 1, i/f rh dirivsais, for ever), 
intimating that the high priest was of no more avail by offering 
yearly on a stated day, than if he had offered daily with the 
common priests, ch. ix. 6, 7. — toZto) this is simply to be referred 
to His offering, not to His offering also for Himself. — IpaTag, 
once) Eom. vi. 10, note ; so below ch. ix. 12, x. 10. 

28. 'O vo'/ios y&'P' X070S hi, for the laio : but the word) The an 
tithesis is very express, as the conjunction is put after the nouns. 
— Xiyog, the word) rendered as strong as possible in consequence 
of the oath. — r^s /nsra To\i vo/xov) Not only the word, but the oath 
of God, is said to have been given after the law (comp. v. 18) in 
the time of David, and that too by David, as God very often 
swears by the mouth of the prophets. Comp. Acts ii. 30, where 
Peter speaks of the kingdom of Christ sanctioned by an oath 
in that same age. Paul is reasoning from the order of revelations, 
as Gal. iii. 17, note. Below, ch. x. 7, 16. — T/'Jv) Son of God. 
The antithesis is, men having infirmity. — e/'s roi/ aluva, for ever) 
It is thus resolved : The Son (once made perfect) was constituted 
a priest for ever, ch. v. 9, 10, note. Absolute eternity is here 
intended. Jesus continues a priest for ever. His work being 
finished. His state remains. 



HEBREWS Vin. 1-4. 411 



CHAPTEE VIII. 

1. KipaXam, the head, the sum) The Accusative absolute, which 
Paul uses, 1 Tim. ii. 6, note. The head, that is, the principal 
point. — ewl ToTi Xiyofi,hoig) while these things are being spoken of, 
while we are treating of this object, while we are stating all 
these things concerning our High Priest, the sum of the whole 
discourse, as the arrangement so requires it, comes now to be 
mentioned : comp. M, ver. 6, ch. ix. 10, 15, 17, x. 28. The 
force of the Greek prepositions ought sometimes to be taken by it- 
self, nor does it admit of an adequate Latin or German periphrasis. 
See note 3 on ver. 15, ch. ix. I did not quote that verse at ch. 
vii. 11, note 5 ; wherefore the words of this note 5 are not to 
be extended to ch. ix. 15. 'Et/ also applies to concomitancy, 
which is expressed by while. — mourov, such) The capital propo- 
sition standing out very prominent. For, after having finished 
the explanation of the type in Melchisedec, he begins simply 
(without type) to discuss the excellence of the priesthood of 
Christ above the Levitical priesthood. — hdSigiv, sat down) after 
having presented His oblation. [This is the very sum of the 
whole discussion, says the Apostle, that Christ, sitting in heaven, 
performs His office of priest, ch. x. 12. — V. g.] — t^s //.lycxXweivm, 
of the majesty) i.e. rou 0iod, of God, ch. xii. 2, at the end. 

2. tZv kjim, of the holy things) the sanctuary, so called abso- 
lutely, the true, not made with hands, ch. ix. 8, 12, x. 19. — 
XtiTovpyog) namely, wv: so XnToupyla, ver. 6. We may say in Latin, 
but in a very solemn sense, officialis, officium. — rrjg a-in^ng, of tlie 
tabernacle) ch. ix. 11, note. — rtjg dKriSivrn, of the true) ch. ix. 24. 
— 'i-xn^i)!, pitched, fixed) firmly. — om dvSpumg, not man) as Moses, 
ver. 5. 

3. Tap, for) The reason why he called Him Xtiroupfov, ver. 2. 
— amyxam, necessary) viz. was ; for the aorist follows, vpoemyzYi, 
should offer. 

4. Tap, for) The reason why he said Iv roTg oipavoTg, in the 
heavens, ver. 1 : a Chiasmus : comp. ver. 2, 3. — It/ ylig) If our 
Priest were a priest upon the earth, if His priesthood terminated 



419 HEBREWS Till. 5, 6. 

on the earth, He would not even be [in the true aensej a priest 
at all. Christ, whilst He discharged the duties of the priesthood, 
entered into heaven. — ovrcav) inasmuch as there were already at 
the time priests existing. 

5. ' rmSiiyfian xa! exia) A Hendyadys. The latter is added, 
lest the former should be understood in too august a sense: each 
is repeated apart, chap. ix. 23, x. 1. But it is the ablative in 
this passage, after the example and shadow. So IvoSsiyf^aTi, ch. 
iv. 11. — Xarpivovsi, serve) The same verb, ch. ix., often ; x, 2, 
xiii. 10. He speaks in the present tense, as the temple was not 
yet destroyed, ch. ix. 6, xiii. 11. — rZv s'jovpavluv, of heavenly things) 
which are both more ancient in design and more far-reaching in 
the finishing. Comp. Eev. xi. 19. The mentioning of the mount 
accords with heaven. — xi^prifiansTai) he was commanded by God. 
— opa, yap <pr)gi, 'S'oififfri; 'irdvra, xard. rh rvirov riv hny^iUra Soi h rp 
opei) Ex. XXV. 40, LXX., is the same as the above, with the excep- 
tion of Hv dideiy/i'svDv instead of rJv dsixiivTo,, and so ibid. ver. 9, 
xxvi. 30, xxvii. 8. 

6. Nuv/, now) This is opposed to the il, if, ver. 4. — ^tstiuxi) 
The same phrase is found, 3 Mac. v. 32, Borihla; rsntj^oTis. — 
otrw, by how much) The character of the duty [of Christ as our 
mediating Priest] follows the nature of the testament, viz. that 
the promises, which it contains, may come to their accomplish- 
ment. — SiaSfixrii /Lsdirrig — I'TrayyiXla.ig v£vo//,oSsTriTai) These are all 
Paul's expressions, 1 Tim. ii. 5 ; Horn. ix. 4. — l-^rayyiXlaig, on 
promises) which are enumerated, ver. 10, 11. The old promises, 
considered in precise strictness, referred to the things of this life, 
and they were exactly fulfilled, so that the people, being satiated 
with them, might then the more eagerly embrace the heavenly 
promises. — ve]iofio6srrirai) By an elegant difference in the words it 
is said of the Old Testament, 6 XaJs vetiofioSirriro, the people was 
established in the law, ch. vii. 11 ; but the New Testament itselj 
nnfMiiTTjTai, has been established on the law. Man violates it: 
God keeps it.^ The Greek word, HvofiLoSirrirai, does not admit the 
particle, as if; and yet the meaning is durch ein Gesetz, or durch 
Gesetze, ver. 10, hj^os, a law, a thing established. 

' Aiet(fioparipa;. more excellent) heavenly. — ^V. g. 

^ This is the reason of the difference in the wording here and ch. vii. 11. 
—Ed. 



HKBKEWS VIU. 7-9. 413 

7. 'H vpiirti, the first) A Metonyifly ; for blame (finding fault) 
does not fall upon a divine institution, but upon a real and per- 
sonal object. AuToT;, with them, is said ver. 8 ; from whicb it is 
plain, that not only the New Testament itself was faultless, but 
also its people. — sxihn, that) The pronoun adapted to a past event. 
— et,riTiTTo, should have been sought) A suitable expression : that 
first covenant would have anticipated all. 

8. M£//,p6fii)/o;) A choice expression, as afis/^vrog in the last 
verse. Ammonius : Msfi'yl/ii, a/MXodvrog xartiyopla. Blame is an 
accusation against a careless person ; and a/j^'iXtia, disregard, care 
lessness, was the fault of the ancient people. There was active 
(practical) carelessness or disregard, on the part of the people, 
which provoked God not to care for or regard them ; ver. 9 
(^/ilXjjffa auruv), note. — auroTg) finding fault with them who were 
under the Old Testament : iJ,iiL<^oiJ,ai governs the dative. — Iboij, 
behold) Jer. xxxi. 31-34. We shall point out where the Lxx. 
differ. — Xiyii) lxx., <pnai ; and so ver. 9, 10 : for the very solemn 
phrase, saith the Lord, is used thrice. — ewTikisu) LXX., Siad^ao- 
fiai, the Heb. ^m31 ; for which word the LXX. give auvnXiTv, 
Jer. xxxiv. 8, 15. The expression is suited to this passage, / 
will perfect ; comp. with the antithesis at the end of ver. 9, and 
with the promise at the end of ver. 10. — l-Tri) lxx., rffl o/xw 
'lepariX xai rffi o/'xw 'lovda : Heb. ns, with. The dative is retained, 
ver. 9, as to the Old Testament ; but the preposition J^r/, con- 
cerning, with respect to (super), is more significant in respect of 
the New Testament. — 'lepafiX — 'louda, Israel — Judah) There- 
fore the Ten Tribes, as well as Judah, are partakers of this 
covenant. 

9. ''Ei:oiri<sa, I made) LXX., dii6's/jLriv, I have arranged or dis- 
posed. To perfect is more than to make and dispose. — ri/J'Spcf, in 
the day) Days, in the plural, are opposed to this one day, ver. 
8. These many days are the days that intervened between the 
day of the Exodus and the New Testament. — imXa^o/iUou fiou 
rrjg yiiplg u'otZv, when I took them by the hand) Whilst their sense 
of the Divine help and power was recent, these men in old 
times obeyed ; but they were wont soon to revolt and turn God 
firom them. This was their custom ; comp. presently after, they 
continued not. It was not merely one singular act. — sx. ynt 
Aiyxi'irrou, out of the land of Egypt) There are three periods : 



4U HEBREWS VIIl. 10. 

— 1. That of the promise ; 2. That of instruction (psedagogise) ; 
3. That of fulfilment. The instruction (as children) began at 
the time of the departure from Egypt, with that which was des- 
tined to become old (ver. 13). — aurol ovx yefiuvav h rri 5/a^^xJi 
/iou, x(fyi> rifLiXriea airuiv, they did not continue in My covenant, 
and I did not regard {care for) them) Correlatives, as ver. 10, 
from the opposite, I will be to them a God, and they shall be to 
Me a people; but the method of proceeding is now reversed : the 
people had begun first to put an end to the covenant : God 
both begins and perfects aU things in the new covenant, ver. 10, 
11. — rx^yi) fiiJ,tKrtea aiirSiv) LXX., nal syii riij/ikri<sa aurwv, and I did 
not regard them. 03 ^n^va ^33N1, and I ruled over them ; although 
some claim for the verb ?V3, the meaning ?V3, disregard, fi-om 
the Arabic idiom. God's ruling and disregard may, in some 
measure, be reconciled in this view : / treated them as if they 
were not Mine ; Hos. i. 9 : nor was I propitious to 'their sins ; 
Deut. xxix. 19, xxxi. 16, etc. They are not regarded over 
whom such lordly rule is exercised ; they do not rejoice in (are 
not privileged with) that access, in which those who are in cove- 
nant or in friendship rejoice ; John xv. 15 : but they are treated 
as slaves ; nor are they held in great consideration, whatever 
may befall them ; Ezek. xxiv. 6, at the end ; Jer. xv. 1, 2. The 
passages, Jer. iii. 14, Ezek. xx. 33, 37, express a somewhat 
similar idea : but in both places there is rather a promise than a 
threatening ; nay, even in the present, Jer. xxxi. 32, The 
Hebrew Masters, as Surenhusius shows, in /3//3?ip TtaraXkayn;, 
p. 628, understand the word ^nf'ya to apply to the dominion of 
love and good pleasure ; and it is not, save by an error in writ- 
ing, that they turn it into the contrary, Tl^na, / have disdained 
or disregarded (fastidivi). The LXX. seem evidently to have 
read 03 *n?j;j, which very word Jeremiah uses, ch. xiv. 19, 
i<A9i uTh ^liiv a'TTiern (npyj) ^ •4^u%^ aou ; hath thy soul loathed 
Sion ? 

10. AiaS^xn) biaSrixn //,ou, LXX. — 'leparjX, Israel) Here Judah 
IS to be understood. A new union together of the people. 
There were two houses in the Old Testament, ver. 8 : they be- 
come one house in the 'Sew.—biboh) The participle for the verb ; 
2 Pet. i. 17 : i,bo!ig iusoi, lxx. So bi&oig, Is. xl. 29. There are 
forr sentences arranged by Chiasmus. The first, / will givt, 



HEBREWS VIII. lU 415 

(put) ; the second, and I will be ; the third, and not ; the fourth, 
because (for) all. The second explains the first ; the fourth, the 
third. — viJ/ious ft,o\i) Heb. 'mm ns, my law. We have the sum 
of these laws presently, / will be to them a God, and they shall 
be to Me a people. — ih r^jv didmiav aOrwv) 03 ip3, into the midst of 
them, that they may ohey willingly (from the heart). — I*/ 
xapdiag) Genitive, ch. x. 16. — Imy^a-vj/w aureus) LXX., yfa-^u 
aliTOiii, xal o-^ofiai avrovg. 

11. Ou /*;) Sidd^tadiv, they shall not teach) A Metonymy of the 
consequent for the antecedent : i.e. All will be taught by God 
Himself especially the love, which is the sum of the law. The 
exertions of brethren in teaching are not absolutely denied ; for 
men must first be taught, whilst the covenant itself is being 
promulgated to them ; Acts iii. 25 ; Is. ii. 3 : then the instruc- 
tion of brethren is plainly no longer necessary, at least to those 
who attain to the very power of the covenant in the remission 
of sins, and in the knowledge of the Lord. We have no need to 
write, nor you to be written to, says Paul, 1 Thess. iv. 9, 
V. 1. There will be a very full accomplishment of these pro- 
mises when that which is perfect has come, even eternal life. 
But on the way to it every man should certainly teach and ex- 
hort himself and his brother ; xiii. 22, Jude 3. In short, even 
the doctrine, which is either sohd meat or milk for the strong 
and for the weak, both alike being godly, delights the godly ; 
Heb. V. 12, 13, xiii. 7 : nay, these very persons now at last, and 
not till now, fully comprehend doctrine {' teaching') ; 1 Cor. ii. 6, 
iii. 1 ; and the apostle himself, both here and in the whole of his 
office, teaches. That precept of highest importance. Know the 
Lord, is learned from the Lord. One proclaims to another 
every doctrine (every kind of teaching) that is agreeable to this 
one, which stands highest : and admonition has the principal 
place; 2 Pet. i. 12. In the mean time the doctrine is not diffi- 
cult and forced, because grace renders all very teachable ; for it 
is no longer the ministry of the letter, but of the spirit ; 2 Cor. 
iii. 6, note. Nor does the firmness of believers depend on the 
authority of human teachers. This is also the reason why the 
scripture of the New Testament is shorter, and why some things 
are not so clearly decided. God Himself teaches His people. 
— rh ddiXphv, his brother) This implies a closer relation than a 



♦16 HEBREWS Vlll. 12, 13. 

neighbour or fellow-citizen^ — ^ a'Trh /iixpov, from a little one [tlie 
least]) He that is feeble among them shall he as David, Zech. 
xii. 8. 

12. 'Or;, because) The forgiveness of sins, the root of all 
benefits and of all knowledge of the Lord. — ra/f aiiMaig airuv, 
to their unrighteousnesses) The abstract for the concrete : sin is 
aboHshed ; suiners obtain grace or favour. — xa! ruv avofnut 
auTuv, and their iniquities) This is not found in the Hebrew nor 
in the LXX. ; but the apostle adds it for the sake of giving to the 
discourse greater weight ; ch. x. 17 : comp. ibid. ver. 8, 5. — oD 
fin /ivrieSu 'in, I will remember no more) Comp. x. 3. 

13. El-) in. The time is hereby denoted, wherein the pro- 
phecy was spoken by Jeremiah. — TETaXa/wxs, He hath made old) 
For place cannot be found at the same time for both. The em- 
ployment of the preterite of the verb iriiraXaiuxi implies that it 
was become old at the time when He spoke by Jeremiah. The 
New covenant was only once promised in the Old Testament 
under this very appellation. And yet the apostle urges this 
appellation very much : of so great importance are the very 
words of the prophets. — rh ■TraXa.iov/ievov, that which is made old or 
antiquated) by the declaration of God. So also in 2 Cor. iii. 14, 
Paul calls it the old testament. — xal yripdaxov, and that which be- 
comes old) by the revolt of the people. HaKaiog and nanlg are 
opposed : so also yij>m and nog ; thence ha^n^n via, ch. xii. 24 : for 
there is a new life, ch. x. 20 ; 2 Cor. v. 17, 15. — Jy/us, near) 
Jeremiah uttered these prophecies in the time of the Babylonish 
captivity, almost in the last age of the prophets, at a long interval 
\i.e. of 899 years. — V. g.] after the departure from Egypt, not 
very long [namely, about 627 years] before the coming of the 
Messiah, whose propinquity (nearness) was being proved by this 
very circumstance. 

' A citizen, he says : for the reading jroX/rni/ is preferred to that of 
5r?i.)7(7('oi/ on the margin of both Ed., and is translated in the Germ. Vers, by 
the word Mitbiirger. — E. B. 

ABD(A), and almost all the oldest authorities, read ■KiKknv. But 
Vulg. reads, as Rec. Text, ir^-wjioi). — Ed. 

' KUturoval fie, they shall know Me) from the utmost experience of My 
grace ; Jer. ix. 24 V. g. 



HEBREWS IX. 1, 2. 417 



CHAPTEE IX. 

1. 'H irpuiTYi, the first) Supply d/aS^xri, testament or covenant ; 
not sxrivfi, tabernacle. For the tabernacle itself was the worldly 
sanctuary, which we shall presently see. By a very elegant 
ellipsis, the word diaSrixij is left out, because it is rather appro- 
priate to the New Testament ; whence also, ver. 15, it is called 
diaSrixrig xaivjjs, the substantive being put before the adjective. 
[We have here an admirable description of Chris fs entrance into 
the true sanctuary, as far as to ch. x. 18. — Y. g.] — 5//a;w/iara, 
regular duties, or ordinances) those by which the duties of the 
sacred office were fulfilled [ver. 6]. The same word occurs, ver. 
10. — Xarpiiae, of worship) external. — aym xoa/j^ixbv, the worldly 
(mundiale) sanctuary) An Oxymoron. That sanctuary was 
worldly (which word [mundiale] of Sidonius is well fitted to 
express the idea ' material '), or mundane \mundanurn\ (as Paul 
speaks of the elements of the world. Gal. iv. 3), and carnal, ch. 
vii. 16. It consisted of precious materials, but still it was ma- 
terial. This verse may be thus divided : first, the duties are set 
before us (as the Proposition), then the sanctuary ; there follows 
the discussion, first, concerning the sanctuary, ver. 2-5, next 
concerning the duties, ver. 6, etc. {Paul has a very similar 
Chiasmus, 1 Cor. ix. 1, note) : the antithesis to both is in ver. 
11, 12. 

2. 'H vpdrri, the first) the anterior tabernacle. — n ''£ >^u%wa xal 
n rpdve^a, the candlestick and the table) A type of light and life. 
— )j vpokeii ruv oiprm, the setting forth of bread) A Metonymy of 
the abstract for the concrete, i.e. the loaves which were set forth. 
—ayia) The accent is on the first syllable ; ' and the feminine 
nng, is no objection to this construction, for we have a similar 
phrase presently, ri Xiyofiht) &yia ayluv. T& dyia often in this epistle 
signifies the holy of holies ; but here ayia without the article de- 

1 That is, in other words, the last syllable is short, and it is therefore the 
neuter plural : not long, which would make it feminine singular. — Ed. 
VOL IV. D D 



418 HEBREWS IX. 3, 4. 

notes the holy place or sanctuary, in antithesis to ayicc aytm, the 
holy of holies. Some have ayla, in this place.' 

3. 'H Xiyo/j-evri, which is called) So ver. 2, Xiyirai, is wiled. 
The opposite is ruv aXrihvuv, of the true, ver. 24. 

4. Xpvsouv, golden) The apostle uses such words as signify 
something precious and glorious, as 6o|jj$, of glory, ver. 5. — 
6\jfMa,Tripiov) censer. So the Lxx. express mtapD, a censer for 
frankincense ; not the altak of incense, which had no more need 
to be mentioned than the altar of whole burnt-offering, which is 
not mentioned. But the censer alone, along with the ark of the 
covenant, is named in this verse, because it was the principal 
part of the furniture which the high priest used on the day of 
expiation ; and although it was on that day alone that he both 
carried in and again carried out the censer, yet the participle 
t%(!U(ra, having, is consonant with the fact." Further, this is put 
first, because a description of the ark follows at greater length. 
— h fi, in which) namely, xifSurSi, the ark ; for to it also is to be 
referred aur^j, over it, ver. 5. — erai/^mg ^pue^ i'/ouaa, to fi,a.mx., 
the golden pot that had manna) /iciiiva, manna, has the article, not 
erdfLvos, the pot ; for the thing contained was of more importance 
than the golden vessel which contained it. Ex. xvi. 33,rins T\Tiyi ; 
LXX. grd/Mov ^pugovv 'ha. Some suspect that this pot and rod of 
Aaron, two most remarkable memorials, which were furnished 
with a perpetual miracle, had been taken out of the ark before 
the building of the temple ; others, that they were put in not 
until afterwards, because in 1 Kings viii. 9 mention is only made 
of the tables laid up in the ark. But in the same passageat is 
distinctly affirmed, that Solomon acted according to the example 
of Moses ; and the apostle refers to the times of Moses, ver. 6, at 
the beginning ; ch. viii. 5 : comp. ch. xiii. 11, where there is no 
mention made of the city, as here none of the temple. What 
then shall we say ? The tables were alone in the ark itself, but 
the pot and the rod mij?n ^:sh, before the testimony, and therefore 
before the ark, Ex. xvi. 34 ; Num. xvii. 25, in the Hebr., very 

^ Lachm. r^ads xyia. ayiuv, with AD(A) corrected /. B reads t« 
ayix ; Vulg. ' sancta ;' Tisch. and Klzev. Rec. Text, iyia. : but Stephens' 
Rec. Text ayi'«. — Ed. 

' The Holy of Holies continually had the censer ; though it was only on 
the day of atonement that the high priest used it. — Ed. 



HEBREWS IX. 5-8. 419 

near the ark, as appendages to it ; in the same way that the book 
of the law and the deposits of the Philistines [the five golden 
emerods and mice] were put on the side of the ark : Deut. xxxi. 
26 ; 1 Sam. vi. 8. Therefore h in this passage is used with some 
latitude, as Luke ix. 31, etc. — rJ /j,d\iva, the manna) A memorial 
of God's providential care of Israel. — f; pd^do^, the rod) A me- 
morial of a lawftil priesthood, Num. xvii. 16, etc., in the Hebr. 
— a'l 'jrXdxeg r^j diaS^xrig, the tables of the covenant) Deut. ix. 9. 
These are put in the last place by gradation. 

5. X£fou/3/>, the Cherubim) Ex. xxv. 20, xxxvii. 9. — do^ri;, of 
glory) They were formed of the most precious materials, and 
represented the Glory of God riding upon the Cherubim ; 
Ezek. X. 4. — xaTagmd^ovra) Lxx., guaxid^ovrsi, in the passages 
quoted above. — mpl S,v, concerning which) The pronoun relates 
to the whole enumeration, from ver. 2. — ovx, isri vuv Xiynv, we 
cannot now speak) The apostle had determined to treat, not so 
much of the sanctuary and its furniture, as of the sacrifices ; 
and he does not say, we cannot afterwards, but we cannot now, 
implying, that each of these things also might be profitably dis- 
cussed. 

6. E/V/atf/ii) enter, in the present. So ver. 7, 13, 22, 25, ch. 
X. 1. 

7. "A-s-ag roii hia.vTov) So LXX., Lev. xvi. 34, once every year ; 
on one day of the year, and on that same day but once. See 
A. A. Hochstetteri Ex. de Ingressu Summi Pontificis in 
Sanctum Sanctorum, pp. 19—24. — u'jep mutoZ) for himself. The 
Vulgate has pro sua, for his own, viz. error of ignorance ; I do 
not think, however, that vnp tuv iavnu vpas in the Greek copy 
from which it was translated. Although the priest was exempt 
from the errors or ignorance of the people, yet he was not without 
sin, and therefore stood in need of sacrifices, ch. vii. 27. — ayvori- 
/j,dTu\i, ignorance, errors) This term has a very extensive meaning, 
as, on the contrary, l-jriymsig, knowledge. See Num. xv. 22-31* 

8. AriXouvTog, signifying) as it were a thing which would have 
otherwise remained concealed from us ; so driKor, showeth or sig- 
nifieth, ch. xii. 27. — •jrsipavspueSa.i, was made manifest) The same 
word occurs, ver. 26. — ruv ayiuv, the holy place or sanctuary) 
[viz. the heavenly sanctuary^. The plural in the Greek cor- 
responds to the singular in the Hebrew. As the holy place was 



430 HEBREWS IX. 9, 10. 

to the holy of holies, so the whole Levitical tabernacle was to 
the heavenly sanctuary ; then, as the holy place prevented the 
people from having access to the holy of holies, so the whole 
tabernacle prevented an entrance into the heavenly sanctuary 
Therefore -rrpwrric, first, yvhich. immediately foUows, has a para 
boli^ amphibology : if we understand it of place, it denotes the 
anterior part of the tabernacle, as opposed to the holy of hohes ; 
but if of time, it denotes the whole Levitical tabernacle, as op- 
posed to heaven. — 6S6\i, the way) much less i'leoiov, entrance; 
comp. ch. X. 19, 20. — l^ovar}? erdm, having as yet a standing) A 
suitable phrase. ^»JJ», LXX., erdeii. When Paul was writing, 
the temple, or first tabernacle, was not yet destroyed ; but still 
it had no standing (or status) any longer, from the time that 
the veil had been rent ; and when its standing was broken up, 
the tabernacle itself soon after was utterly destroyed. 

9. °Hr;f irapalSo'kfi, which is a figure) rin; for 3, before the 
feminine, ■Kapa^aXn. This relative has regard to the three pre- 
ceding verses. — mernxora) present, in respect of that standing. 
The standing, emphatically as such, now no longer existed, 
although ij exm, the tabernacle, was not yet broken up, was not 
yet destroyed, was not yet razed to the foundation. The anti- 
thesis is, /LiXKovToiv, oi things to come, ver. 11. — hupd re xa! haiai 
firi dum/j,sva.i, x.r.X., gifts and sacrifices not able, etc.) The victims 
(sacrifices) might seem to be more efficacious than the other gifts : 
therefore with great elegance the efficacy is more expressly with- 
held from the sacrifices [by dwd/Mivai being made agree with Suelai, 
not BSipui]. — aunibri<siv, conscience) The same word occurs, ch. x. 
2, 22. The antithesis is eapxhg, of the flesh, ver. 10, as ver. 13, 
14 [1 Pet. iii. 21]. — rm Xarpevovra, him that did the service) the 
priest, who offered for himself; or the Israehte, for whom the 
priest offered. 

10. Movov, only) The commandments concerning meats are 
as it were an appendage to the commandments concerning 
sacrifices ; and this particle lessens the weight of that append- 
age. Sacrifices do not purge the conscience ; meats have respect 
to the flesh. Concerning both, comp. ch. xiii. 9, etc. Paul 
often puts iJkovoi!, only, absolutely ; 1 Cor. vii. 39 ; Gal. ii. 10, v. 
13 ; Phil. i. 27 ; 2 Thess, ii. 7.— it!, on) i-!r!, with the Dative, 
implies something concurrent, as we have already remarked 



HEBREWS IX. 11, 12. 421 

regarding tlie appendage; comp. ver. 15, 17, 26. Sacrijlcea 
concur in public worship, and meats also in daili; life ; while thts 
same ceremonial law treats of both, and is wholly occupied with 
these and similar matters. — Sfu/iaai, in meats) of which some 
have never been allowed to any, others not to all, and not 
always, nor everywhere. — vii/iaai, in drinks) Lev. xi. 34 ; Num. 
vi. 3. — Siafiopoig BomTidfioTg, in different washings) These were 
manifold, of the priests, of the Levites, of other men. — Sixaiut- 
/iara) The apposition of the nominative and an oblique case, 
as Luke xxii. 20, where see the note. — dwpSuisecag, of reforma- 
tion) D^D^^, Lxx., diopdouv, Jer. vii. 3, 5 ; therefore the verbal 
8i6p6iijsis, reformation, corresponds to the adjective upsiTraiv, better, 
ver. 23. — sTixilfitva, imposed, lying upon) as a burden, without 
intermission. 

11. Xpisrbg — apyjipdg, Christ — High Priest) So Lev. iv. 5, 
Upiug xpidTog, the priest that is anointed. Paul also here has 
respect to Christ as the Priest, but with Moses %f/(rrJs, anointed, 
is an epithet. — •jra.pa.yivo/Mvog, being made present, being come) 
He then said suddenly, Withdraw, ye sons of Levi, ch. x. 5, 7. — 
TJD» fitXKovTiitv ayaSuv, of good things to come) So ch. x. 1. Those 
good things are described at the end of ver. 15. — dia, by) Con- 
strued with i\(Sr{Kki, entered, ver. 12. — y^i'itpvog) which was 
greater and more noble. So, ^Xs/ova, a more excellent, ch. xi. 4. — 
nT^mg, tabernacle) That was His own Body, ch. x. 5, 20 ; comp. 
John ii. 21. His body is opposed to the tabernacle, as His 
blood to the blood of goats, etc., ver. 12. Schomerus says cor- 
rectly, in exig. on this passage, p. 33, the tabernacle is here taken 
for the way to the inner sanctuary. For the subsequent appel- 
lation, xTleecug, of this institution or building, proves an abstract 
notion of that sort ; so that, not the Tabernacle itself is denoted, 
but the building or institution, die Anstalt {establishment or 
arrangement). Therefore the Body, or Flesh (for flesh is inse- 
parable from the body), is the veil, and the sanctuary is Heaven. 
Thus, as I hope, the matter is distinctly explained. — oi x'^'P"'^"'^- 
Tov, not made ivith hands) Therefore this was greater, ver. 24. 
So, Paul, Col. ii. 11. — 01. Ta.\iT7]Q, not of that) The Tabernacle, 
through which Christ entered, was not of that workmanship or 
structure. 

12 -VpAyuiv %ai iJ^dex^^j of goats and calves) One goat and one 



423 HEBKEWS IX. ]3, 14. 

bullock was sacriticed at one time, Lev. xvi. 9, 3 : but that par 
ticular animal was not by itself better than all the animals of 
the same species ; therefore it is here put in the plural number 
An additional reason besides, for the plural, was the annual re- 
petition of the sacrifices. ID, lxx., i^^iexoo, Lev. xvi. 9, 3, and 
elsewhere. — ih ''« oiyia, into the holy place) into heaven, ver. 24, 
almiav, eternal) not merely for a day or a year. — ivpd/iivos, 
having found or obtained) So, / have found a ransom, Job xxxiii. 
24. The zeal of Him who has found or obtained, as also His 
fidelity and wisdom, are denoted : the newness and joyousness 
o{ the finding ov thing found, ch. x. 20. The access of Christ 
to the Father was arduous ; ch. v. 7. No one previously had 
trodden the way of life ; Acts ii. 28 ; John iii. 13. Christ 
could not hut find: but yet to seek was a matter of labour and 
difficulty. 

13. TA.p, for) He confirms the fact, that the power of the one 
sacrifice of Christ is as great as he intimated at ver. 12. — raii^m 
xal rpdym) of bulls and goats, which are mere brutes. Extenua- 
tion.^ — SafidXicag, of a heifer) which was to be red. Num. xix. 
Andr. Christ. Zellerus has enlarged the treatise of Maimonides 
on this subject, and compares with it this passage of the apostle, 
p. 504. It is a tradition among the Jews, that nine heifers of 
that sort were sacrificed from the time of Moses to the destruction 
of the second temple; see ibid., pp. 416, 417. — roig xixoimf/.iv'ovi, 
those defiled or made unclean) A participle [defiled on 'some par- 
ticular occasion] : less strong than xomvg, [habitually] common 
or defiled. Construe with ayidl^n, sanctifies; compare what fol- 
lows. — xaSapoTtiTa, cleanness or purifying) Purifying was per- 
formed by sprinkling, not by washing ; but washing followed by 
inseparable connection : Num. xix. 19. This fact is exceedingly 
useful for making a distinction between justification and renew- 
ing. 

14. tJ oJ//,a) The blood, and death : see the following verses. 
— did TJnOfiaTog almlou, by the eternal Spirit) See Luke iv. 18 : 
and comp. Eom. i. 4, xv. 16. The Spirit is opposed to the con- 
dition of irrational animals, ver. 13. The epithet eternal is un- 
derstood fi-om ver. 12, 15, ch. vii. 16, and is opposed to the heifer 

' See App. The same as Litotes. The blood of bulls, etc. , a less fcrci- 
ble expression than is the meaning, viz. sacrifices. — Ed. 



HEBKEWS IX. 15-17. 423 

reduced to ashes [ashes of a heifer]. — a/ioi/Aoi;, without spot') Supe- 
rior as contrasted witli every Levitical victim. — na^apuT, shall 
purge) It corresponds to xaSapornra, purifying, ver. 13. So ver. 
22, 23, ch. X. 23, i. 3. It is put in the future as an antithesis 
to the present, ayia,Z,ii, sanctifies, Levitically, ver. 13. — utcI) a-rro, 
tig, from, to, denote things contrary. — vixpuv 'ipym, from dead 
works) Things dead most of all defle. The antithesis is t,covTi, 
living. The power of sin and death was aboUshed by the 
blood of Christ. — ilg ri XaTpihuv, to serve) for ever, in a maimer 
most blessed and truly sacerdotal, [ver. 12 ; Eev. xxii. 3. — 

v.g.j 

15. Aiairj-Afii xaivrig, of the neio testament) Here the testa- 
ment is rather urged, than the newness of the testament: comp. 
ver. 16. — davdrou ysvofisvou, by means of death that took place) that 
is, at the time when the death had taken place. The moment 
of this (His) death properly divides the Old Testament from the 
New. — I'lg d'TroXvrpusiv tSiv I'tt! rjj erf wj-jj diaBrjUyj Tapa^destiiv, for the 
redemption of the transgressions, that were under the first testament) 
There is a passage of Paul very like this in Eom. iii. 24, 25. 
The preposition iir}, under, not merely denotes the time, but in- 
timates that the first testament had no power of redemption, and 
that the people of old were more on account of it transgressors. 

.' AmXuTpusig, the compound, occurs here : Xurpuaig, the simple 
word, occurs, ver. 12. — imayjiXim, the promise) ^\ en to Abraham. 
— \dfiaisiv, might receive) fov formerly they could not. — o/ xex'Krj/ji.ivoi) 
those called, named heirs (ch. iii. 1). — xK>}povo//:la(, of the inherit- 
ance) An apposite appellation ; for there is an allegory : testa- 
ment, death, inheritance. 

16. AiaSriJcrj) testament. This is the peculiar force of the 
Greek word, as compared with (above, pras) the Hebrew nna. 
The article ii omitted agrees with the general sentiment ex- 
pressed, as in Gal. iii. 15. — pipieSai) be shown, or made good, ful- 
filled (prasstari). The Greek words, (pipeaSai, trpoe^ipiaSai, ver. 14, 
allude to each other. — roD biaki/.i)iou, of the testator) Christ is the 
testator in respect of us. This agrees with the words of the 
Lord before His death ; Luke xxii. 29. 

17. 'Em' viTtpoTg, over [super] the dead) briefly expressed, instead 
of this expression, over or upon the death of the testators. So 
Lxx. Lev. xxi. 5, lirl vixpSj, over the dead [upon the death of a 



424 HEBREWS IX. 18, 19. 

relative]. — i^n'^ari) This particle plainly implies an interrogation;* 
moreover, 1*6/, with an interrogation, has great force, Rom. iii. 
6 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 16, xv. 29. See Not. ad Chrys. de Sacerd., 
p. 424. 

18. "O^Ev, whence) The two words nni and diaS^xyj differ; but 
yet they signify the same thing, in so far as both denote an 
agreement or an arrangement of that sort, which is ratified by 
blood. Where the agreement is ratified by the blood of another, 
viz. of animals, which cannot make a covenant, much less testify 
or make a testament, it is not properly dia6fixri, a testament ; but 
yet T\''-\2, a covenant, is not very much different from the char- 
acter (nature) of a testament, on account of the victims slain. 
Where the arrangement is ratified by the blood of him that makes 
the arrangement, i.e. by his death, it is properly iia^nm, testa- 
ment, which is also expressed by the Hebrew word JT'ia, having 
(taken in) a wider signification. The particle ikv, whence, ought 
not to be pressed too far, as if the Old Testament were also con- 
secrated by the blood or death of the testator : but still it has its 
own proper force, in so far as it is intimated, that the New Tes- 
tament, and therefore also the Old, needed to be dedicated 
with blood. — syxixahisrai, was dedicated or initiated) So the 
Lxx. express the Hebrew word Hin. On the very day of initia- 
tion or dedication, the Old Testament most properly began, and 
it continued till the night and day when the Lord was betrayed 
and died. 

19. AaXrihlerii, having been recited or spoken) Ex. xxiv. 16, 
etc. — irdaris hroXris x.a,T& vSfiov, every precept according to the 
law) Moses had recited or read those commandments which 
occur in Ex. xx., and perhaps also those which occur in the 
following chapters. And the brief indication of the written 
book was tantamount to a recapitulation of all that was recited. 
— ruiv fios^m xal rpdymv, of calves and goats) In Ex. xxiv. 5 they 
are expressly called /Jboax^pia, little calves : the word oXoxavru- 
l^ara in that passage implies the rpdyovg, spoken of here. — /isra 
uSaros xal iplov xoxxhou xai iaauvoij, with water and scarlet wool 
and hyssop) These are not found in the passage quoted, but are 
taken for granted as already well known from other passages in 
the writings of Moses, Lev. xiv. 5, 6. The scarlet wool corre- 

' Sd Lachm. rightly has an interrogation marked at o "Sixiifiivo: ; — Ed. 



HEBREWS IX. 19, 425 

spends to the Hebrew nySnn ''Jt}', The Lxx. translate wbm x6x. 
xmv, ''itJ' xXusTiv dmXoiJv, double spun (twined), from its form : the 
apostle terms it irom its material (wool) ; scarlet colour, viz, as 
being like blood. — ^i^\'m) Many, and the Latins too from- the 
Vulgate, construe this word with l^pdvnei, he sprinkled; but it 
should evidently be construed with XajSiiv, having taken, as Ex. 
xxiv. 7, xcc! Xa^iiv rh ^i^Xlov r^g dia6fixrig, and having taken the book 
of the covenant. There is an elegance in the conjunction, rh aT//,a 
ahro n to ^i^Xiov, as appears by comparing those words, tbuto rh 
aJf/^a rrig SiaS'^xrig ; that in this ceremony the blood may be shown 
by itself; the testament, by the showing of the book ; and that 
lyxameiihg, the dedication, may be perfected by that double exhi- 
bition (showing) : aM, itself, is added, because the testament 
described in the book, was of more importance than that blood, 
T£ does not always refer to the following xal, ver. 1 ; John ii. 15, 
where the n connects the discourse rather with what goes before, 
than with what follows : also the sheep and the oxen : comp. 
moreover Acts xxvi. 11; wherefore it is not necessary here to 
construe aM n rJ ^i^Xlov xal itoMTO, -rh Xah sppdvncii. The Other 
things which are here mentioned by the apostle, and yet are not 
found in the 24th chap, of Exod., may be derived from other 
passages ; but respecting the sprinkling of the book, which not- 
withstanding, if true, would constitute a very large portion of 
that ceremony, we find nothing in all the books of Moses. 
Furthermore, if the book had been sprinkled, and if the apostle 
had spoken of that sprinkling, he would have joined it, not with 
the sprinkling of the people, but with the sprinkling of the taber- 
nacle and the vessels, and therefore of the altar; comp. Van 
Hoeke, p. 190. See, however, Jun. 1. 1209, 1. 54. But indeed it 
was not befitting that the book itself should be even sprinkled, for 
the book, containing the word of GoD, represented there God Him- 
self, as Flacius in Gloss, says; where, however, he is of opinion that 
the book was also sprinkled. No doubt the tabernacle along with 
the vessels [the tabernacle being at that very time adapted to the 
altar, Ex. xxiv. 6-8, xxv. 8.— V. g.] needed purification, ver. 21; 
Lev. xvi. 16, 19, 20, 33; 2 Chron. xxix. 21 ; but the book, or 
the word of God, did not need it. And since these things are 
so, yet xal before vavTa is not only no disadvantage, but has much 
elegance. For the sentence is copulative : KM rnvra rbv Xnin 



426 HEBREWS IX. 20-24. 

i^poLVTiei, " Moses sprinkled all the people," on the one side ; KAI 
rriv exm), Se — Ifpamgiv (ver. 21), "and the tabernacle indeed— 
he the same sprinkled," on the other. The Latins say, et, et 
vero, both, and indeed, or, non modo, verum etiam, not only, but 
also. So oxjTi — xai ou, Eev. ix. 20, 21. — iravra, rJv X«ov sppavrisi) 
LXX., xarsdTieSaci Tou Xaov, in the place quoted above. But else- 
where they often put palm, pavrlZoi, x.t.X. 

20. ToDto rh al[Jja rns diaS^xtig, ?ig iviTilXaro '!rpos vfiag o ©fof) 
LXX.,. /Sou 5-0 af/J^a rrii dmSnxng, ni Mhro Kvpiog vpli i/iag -Jtipl mr- 
9-4)1/ tSi\i Xoyuv rouTCiiv. — hirilXuTo irphg hfj^ag) commanded me to bring 
to you. 

21. T(i exibn, the vessels) also the garments. — Vppavrtei) LXX., 
rh riiJjieu To\J al/iaros -n-pogs^ii irphg rl Sugiaerrjpwj. 

22. S^E^ii-, almost) [with blood for the most part]. The force 
of this restrictive particle does not fall upon vavra, all things ; 
for it admits of no exception : but upon the next word, vdth 
blood ; because other material things besides the blood were also 
used, ver. 19. — X^^'S ai/Jjanxyyelag, oh y'lnrai afigig, there is no 
remission, without shedding of blood) This axiom is found in so 
many words in Tr. Talmudico Joma. See especially Lev. xvii. 
11. — &<piffig, remission) Levitical. 

23. oSv, therefore) The particle intimates that the execution 
of those things which were mentioned at ver. 18 is compre- 
hended in this passage. — -/.pilrroei 6ue!aig, with better victims or 
sacrifices) The plural, corresponding to the Levitical plural, 
is used for the singular, on account of the excellence of the one 
sacrifice of Christ, which was perfect in all its parts. If a Jew 
asks. What are your sacrifices ? We answer : Our sacrifices con- 
sist in the one matchless sacrifice of Him who was crucified. 
In this Apodosis, the word xaSaplligSui, to be purified, which is to 
be supplied, makes a Hypallage ;^ for the heavenly things are pure 
in themselves, but we needed to be purified in order that we 
might enjoy them, .ver. 14. So ayid^iTai, is sanctified, 1 Tim. 
iv. 5, 4, i.e. the use is rendered holy in respect of us. Comp. 
Lev. xvi. 16, 19 ; Num. xviii. 1. 

24. oi, not) Jesus never went into the inmost recesses of the 

' See Append. A change, whereby a thing is attributed to one subject 
■which ought to be attributed to another. Here purification is attributed to 
the heavenly things, which really applies to ourselves. — Ed. 



HEBREWS IX. 25, 26. 427 

temple at Jerusalem ; never caused a sacrifi'ce to be ofiFered for 
Himself, during the whole period that elapsed between His bap- 
tism and the offering up of Himself. — avrinj-jra, tuv aXri^ivuv, the 
figures of the true) The true were the more ancient : those made 
with hands were imitations of them ; viii. 5. — ils auj-Jv tov ohpmhv, 
into heaven itself) and there is nothing beyond it. — vw, now) So 
ver. 26. — s/ipavieSrimi, to present Himself, to appear) An appro- 
priate word in respect to God : in respect to us, vKpav'ipurai, 
He hath been manifested, ver. 26, and opirjairai, He shall he seen, 
ver. 28 [The Engl. Vers, loses the distinction, translating all 
alike, appear'\. — ris irpoaw'jru ro\) 0£oD, before the face [in the 
presence] of God) More than Aaron in the tabernacle before 
the ark. 

25. OliS ha) He did not enter for this purpose, viz. that. 

26. ''E.'ml 'ihii, for then it would have been necessary) Here it 
is taken for granted that Christ suffered for the sins committed 
from the beginning of the world : ver. 15. Christ in the be- 
ginning already was He who is according to the divine na- 
ture.^ Philo shows that the high priest of the Hebrews offered 
sacrifices for the whole human race, de mon., p. 637. — irahTv, 
that He should often have suffered) Therefore the offering is not 
(there can be no oblation) without suffering. — a-rag, once) This 
once is absolute, being shadowed forth in the once, relative, 
which was Levitical : ver. 7. — M euvnXila, at the consummation) 
when sin had reached its height ; comp. note to John i. 10. — 
ruv aliivcav, of ages) The beginning of these ages is not to be 
computed from the time of Moses, but from the foundation of 
the world : comp. ch. i. 2, note : and therefore the consummation 
here is not the end of the Old Testament, but of the world. 
'H (fuvTiXsia, Tou aiuvog, is the very consummation of the world or 
age (seculi), a phrase which we often find in Matthew : ;j emriKua 
Tuv aiumv in this passage includes times nearer our own, as being 
in the plural number. The sacrifice of Christ divides the age 
of the world into two portions, of which the first is certainly 
not shorter than the second. — a/iuprla;, of sin) The singular, 

' Beng. seems to mean, that Christ from the very beginning sustained His 
character as the Word op God, John i. 1 — a title implying His divine 
nature, at the same time implying also His coming into tlie world, as sent 
by the Father, to be its Saviour. — Ed. 



428 HEBREWS IX. 27, 28. 

with great force. ^ — ■^Kpavipuriti, has been manifested) in the 
world. 

27. KaS' osov, inasmuch as) This expression has the force of com- 
parison, and of giving intensity to the Apodosis. — am-AiiTm, it is 
appointed, it is reserved) by Divine sanction. — aVa^, once) The 
once in the following verse is to be referred to this. — aitodanTv, 
to die) The verb for the noun ; death and its condition. — /j,eTa di 
TouTo, and after this) Death and judgment are immediately con 
joined, because the intermediate state of man is uniform.^ — 
xpitfi;, judgment) at the time when Christ shall be seen (appear) ; 
and comp. with this the same ver. (28), and also Matt. vii. 22, 
note. 

28. Ouru, so) i.e. Christ hath delivered us from death and 
judgment, notwithstanding that, as death, so also judgment 
remains, as far as the name is concerned. — 'Trpoeivi^hlg tig ri 
aviviyxiTv, having been offered to bear) There is a difference be- 
tween the words ; comp. 1 Pet. ii. 24, ra; ci,/J,apria,c avrjviyxcv, 
He bore our sins : Our sins were laid on Him by the Father : 
while therefore He was lifted up on the cross. He bore (took) 
up our sins along with Him. The LXX. use the same expres- 
sion. Num. xiv. 33, avokouei rrjv vopi/elav v/j,uv, they shall bear your 
whoredoms. In other places they are put indiscriminately : 
ch. vii. 27. — mXXuv, of many) A pleasant antithesis: once; of 
many, who lived during so many ages. Isa. Hii. 12, in the LXX. 
version, xat aurhg a/LapTiag voXkuv avrjveyxi, and He bore the sins 
(sin, Heb.) of many. Thus the absolute power of the one 
sacrifice of Christ is very clearly evinced. The word again, 
John xiv. 3, accords with a second time, here. Both places treat 
of His coming, regarded as to itself (secundum se). But His 
coming, for the first time in the flesh, was in the strange form 
of a servant : His second coming is in His own glory. In the 
eyes of all, who had not formerly seen, [not only so] but had 

^ All the sins of all men of every age are regarded as one mass laid on 
Christ. Sin is here put in the abstract, to express that He destroyed sin 
itself, as well as atoned for actual sins. — Ed. 

* Beng. probably does not mean to deny a difference in the intermediate 
state of bad and good : see Gnomon on Luke xvi. 23 ; but only that the 
term lySji? is applied to all alike in that state. The definite separation to 
heaven and hell (Gehenna) is not till after the judgment. — Ed. 



HEBREWS X. 1-3. 429 

not either acknowledged Him, He is at that time Cominy {h 
sfX6ii,itoi, The Comer). Let us suppose the arrival of a guest, the 
intimate friend of the father of the family, but unknown to the 
family. The father of the family will think, A brother eetuens . 
whereas in the family it will be said, A guest is coming. — 
b<p6riaiTai, He will be seen) in His ^ovj.—anmibixiiiimi, to them 
that looh for Him) The dative of advantage. The unrighteous 
also will see Him, but not for salvation. To them that looh for 
Him, He will be the Saviour, Phil. iii. 20. — s/j euTtipiav, unto 
salvation) and therefore to set us free from condemnation. 



CHAPTER X. 



1. 'Sxiav, shadow) The antithesis is slxom, image. — auriiv rriv 
e!x6m, the very image) the archetype, the original and solid 
image, ch. ix. 24, note. The shadow,^ although it was the pre- 
lude of fiiture events, did not however precede, as in a picture, 
but followed a little after. See by all means ch, viii. 5. — xar 
hiaurhv, yearly) This refers to the whole sentence to the end of 
the verse. — raig axiraTg, with the sam,e) the same, not in the num- 
ber, but in the kind of sacrifices. — a; nrpogifipoueiv ilg rh dirivixsg, 
which they offer continually) offer, viz. those who offer, who draw 
near and perform the service. They offer for ever ; that is, they 
do not cease to offer, nor will they cease, unless they be com- 
pelled. — oudi'TroTe d-JvaTai, never can) So. ver. 11. 

2. 'Ewii) So, altogether, i-jrii, with an interrogation, in ch. 
ix. 17, note. 

3. 'Ev aura?;, in those) sacrifices. — avafivtiaig, a remembrance) 
public ; comp. ver. 17. — a/iapnuv, of sins) viz. those of the last 
year, and of all years. The day of expiation was not on that 
day on which Christ was crucified, but on the tenth day of 
Tisri, of which see Ord. Temp., p. 22. The forgetting [the "re- 
membering no more"] of sins is opposed to this admonitory re- 

1 Used here of the first outline or sketch drawn, preparatory to a paint- 
ing. — Ed. 



*aO HKBKEWS X. i, 6. 

membrance : ver. 17. — xar hiaurhv, yearly) An Epanalepsis ;' 
comp. ver. 1. He is speaking chiefly of the solemn yearly 
sacrifices. 

4. 'AipaipiTv, to fake away) 'iripuXiTv,' to remove entirely ; ver. 
11. In the writings of Moses, great effects are ascribed to these 
elementary ordinances of worship, in order that it might appear 
that it is not in themselves that these have so great efficacy. 

5. Sieep^6fi£vog tig tIv x6e/ji,ov, when He conies into the world) In 
the 40th Psalm, the entrance of the Messiah into the world is 
set before us. The tabernacle itself was part of the world, ch. 
ix. 1 ; and it is here called the world, because the sacrifice of 
the Messiah extends much more widely than the Levitical sacri- 
fices, reaching, as through all times, so through all the world, 
which is claimed for Him as His, Ps. xl. 10, because He is its 
heir. The word, iUipyaiuwc,, entering, is elicited from ^'xw, I am 
come, and is represented by it, ver. 7. — h'slav — om iu&6xriga,i. — 
Tou 'jroinea.i, 6 Qehg, rh 6iXij//,d gou) Lxx., in the psalm now quoted, 
6uelav — oux i^firrjdag — rov •roi^dai ro 6e7\ri/ji,d Sou, 6 &i6s /iou, ^/Soi/X^^jjc, 
xal rhv ro/iow sou sv ij/ksm t^s xoiXiag fiov. The apostle joins those 
words, roD mirteai, o &ihg, rh SsXri/jid sov, which had been separated 
from those following, with those going before, which relate to 
the same thing, as the words, "forty years, in the wilderness," 
ch. iii. 9. — goj/ia ds xarriprieoi i^oi) Heb., thou hast bored my ears 
(comp. Exod. xxi. 6), namely, that I may subserve Thy will 
with perfect love ; comp. Is. 1. 5. The slave, whose ears were 
bored, was claimed by the master whom he loved with his 
whole body as his property. Sam. Petitus, in var. lect. c. 28, 
ascribes the Greek translation of the Prophets and Psalms to 
the Essenes, and he ascribes to the Essenes this phrase, Thou 
hast fitted or prepared for me a body ; for he says, that among 
the Essenes there was no slave, but that they had bodies or col- 
leges, whose members served and obeyed one another. The 
favom-ers of liberty, however strong in that cause, might still 
retain the reading, ears ; but the apostle maintains the proper 

' See Append. The same word in beginning of the preceding and in the 
end of the following member : or antecedent repeated after a parenthesis. 
—Ed. 

' Tlfpittipiiv is to remove on every side {vipl) and in every respect : pror- 
«us toUere. ' htftiioui/, to take off or away. — Ed. 



HEBREWS X. 7. 431 

(strict) acce])tation of the term, body. The ears are a part • 
the body, as a whole, follows the example of their obedience. 
Thou hast prepared for me a body, viz. for the offering ; ver. 10. 
The mentioning of the whole here is very suitable. There is an 
expression of Paul, concerning the body of Christ, very similar 
to this, Rom. vii. 4. 

7. Tote, then) We shall speak of this particle at ver. 8. The 
parallels are, then ; I am come ; in the book : and corresponding, 
r said ; of Me ; it has been written. — t^xu, I am here at hand, I 
am come) It corresponds to the Hebrew preterite, TiK^.^ The 
verb, ijxca, is treated of at Rev. ii. 25. — iv xKpaXidi /3//3x/ou yeypa-ir- 
rai Tipt Ifiov, in the volume of the booh it is written of Me) fhya 
1SD, LXS., MfaXii /3;/3x/ou here, and Ezek. ii. 9. ni^JD is rendered 
by the same translators xi<paXlg, Ezek. iii. 1, 2, Ezra vi. 2. This 
phrase (nomenclature) cannot be understood of any particular 
part of the Pentateuch (for, except it, no other prophetical 
writings, to which the psalm might seem to refer, existed in the 
time of David), for many, nay, all the parts, treat of Christ ; 
nor can it be understood of the whole Pentateuch, for although 
the whole volume of the law is often quoted, yet it never re- 
ceives this appellation. Moreover, the sacrifices in this passage 
are called rb •spurov, the first, ver. 9 : wherefore the volume of 
the book does not denote the book which contained the very ac- 
count also of the sacrifices heretofore offered. Also, the Divine 

1 I come, or rather, I have come, was the creed (symbolum), as it were, of 
the Lord Jesus. / am come, says He, to fulfil the law, Matt. v. 17 : to 
preach, Mark i. 38 : to call sinners to repentance, Luke v. 32 : to send a 
sword, and to set men at variance, Matt. x. 34, 35 : / have come down from 
heaven to do the mil of Him that sent Me, John vi. 38, 39. These are the 
very words of the fortieth Psalm. T am sent to the lost sheep of the 
house of Israel, Matt. xv. 24 : / am come into this world for judg- 
ment, John ix. 39 : / have come that they may have life, and may have it 
mare abundantly, .Tohn x. 10 : to save what had been lost. Matt, xviii. 11 : to 
save men's lives, Luke ix. 56 : to send fire on the earth, Luke xii. 49 : to 
minister. Matt. xx. 28 : to seek and to save that which was lost, Luke xix. 10, 
comp. with 1 Tim. i. 15 : /am come into the world the Light, John xii. 46, 
etc. : to bear witness to the truth, ch. xviii. 37. See, Reader, that thy 
Saviour obtain what He aimed at in thy case. But do thou, for thy part, 
say why thou art come here. Dost thou, then, also do the will of God ? 
from what time ? and in what way ? — V. g. 



432 HEBREWS X. 8, 9. 

rejection of sacrifices (Thou wouldest not), and the Messiah's exhi- 
bition of Himself to do the will of God, came after the perpetual 
offering of them, and not previously. What, then, is the volume 
of the booh ? We do not require to go far to learn ; it is the 
very page on which this very psalm was written. There are 
these two parallels : / have said, lo I I come ; and, in the volume 
of the hook it is written v3?, concerning Me, of Me : hy this very 
writing I undertake to do Thy will. The Messiah places Himself 
as surety by both expressions ; and hence the presence, in the 
highest degree, of the Spirit of prophecy is perceived. David 
had before his eyes, and in his hand, the book in which the 
psalm was written, and shows this very book as the written con- 
tract of the Messiah ; comp. Neh. x. 1. From that very day 
when this psalm was written, it became incumbent on Christ, by 
some new way, to do the will of God. It is consistent with all 
this, that it is not said, in Thy book, or in the hook of the Lord, 
as in Ps. cxxxix. 16, and Is. xxxiv. 16, but simply, in the book. 
Comp. note on the following verse. Augustine understands " the 
volume of the hook" here, of the beginning of the book of Psalms ; 
but at that time the Psalms had not yet been collected into one 
volume. Others have understood it of the whole Scripture ; 
but even the writings of the Old Testament which then existed, 
had not been so collected into one, as to be called one book. — 
rJ 6iXri//,d mu, Thy will) That God wills and has pleasiu-e in some- 
thing different from the legal sacrifices, was evident from this very 
fact, that the flesh of oxen and the blood of goats did not afford 
Him satisfaction ; but what His will is, we deduce from the 
very preparing of the Messiah's body, by which, when it was 
offered, we were to be sanctified ; ver. 10. Christ, in the 
Psalms, acknowledges and embraces this as the will of God. 

8, 9. ' Avurepov X'eyuv — toti s'iptixiv. Above, when He said — then 
said He) Paul urges the order of the words of the psalm which 
depends on the particle, TK, tote, then, showing that it falls on 
that very time when the prophet sang the psalm in the charac- 
ter of Christ, and on that very point of time when, immediately 
after the words, Suelav, x.r.X., sacrifice, etc., placed avunpov, 
above, in the psalm, there sprang up the words, Idoi), rixu, lo ! 1 
come. Therefore tN is altogether demonstrative of the present 
(comp. TS, TOTt, then, Ps. Ixix. 5), with an antithesis between 



HEBREWS X. 9- 12. 483 

the things concerned, from which the wisdom of the apostle in- 
fers the Jirst and second, fS, (ver. 9) ; comp. /ht^, after, ch. vii. 
28, note. Let this rs be the terminus (the point of boundarj' 
between the Old and New Testament). Paul also puts, in the 
first place, the general word of the Lxx., eJnv, then one more 
significant, £"pnx(v ; whence it is evident, that Xsycov, saying, is of 
the imperfect tense [when He said, or was saying]. But ob- 
serve how great authority the Psalms possess. The oath of 
Jehovah was given at the very time when Ps. ex. was written. 
The solemn invitation was issued to the people when Psalm 
xcv. was vsrritten ; ch. iv. 7 ; Heb. vii. 28, note. The declara- 
tion of the Son was made when Ps. ii. was written ; Acts 
xiii. 33, note. So, the Messiah promised to God that He would 
' do His will, at the time when Ps. xl. was written. This hand- 
writing, which David executed, is opposed to the law written 
by Moses ; ver. 8, at the end. Wherefore Christ always ap- 
pealed with the greatest force to the Scriptures, and especially 
at the beginning of His passion. — xarii rhv vof^ov, according to the 
law) The strong argument by which that very point which is 
asserted in ver. 1 is proved from the psalm. 

9. "Iva) A powerful particle ; that He may forthwith and in 
consequence estabUsh the second. — or^u')), may establish) with 
the highest authority, as it were, by His own hand-writing. 
From igrrifii comes grdsi;, ch. ix. 8, with the same idea. 

10. 'Kv ^ hXfi/iciTi) in or by which will of GoD, which has 
been accomplished and fully satisfied by Christ and His sacrifice. 
Does not this well deserve to be called a satisfaction or atone- 
ment? — ^yiae/j-hoi, sanctified) The same word occurs, ver. 14, 29, 
ch. xiii. 12, ii. 11. — ew/iarog, of the body) ver. 5. 

' 12. OuToi) So ch. iii. 3. Others read aMi by an easy allite- 
ration.2 — //,la\i, one) The antithesis is, the same sacrifices often, 
ver. 11. — lis rh Sirivixis, continually) The oifering of Christ, once 
for all made, will continue the one and only oblation for ever : 
no other will supersede it. — ladSiisiv, sat down) The antithesis is 

' Ver. 11. ttZs lepiis, every priest) especially every high priest.— V. g. 

" The older Ed. had preferred airo;, but the margin of the 2d Ed. and 
the Germ. Vers, agree with the Gnomon. — E. B. 

ACD(A) corrected /Vulg. read ovtos : and so Lachm. Tisch., with no 
good authority, reads ain-o;, as Rec. Text. — Ed. 

VOL. IV. ^ ^- 



434 HEBREWS X. 13-15. 

Effnjxe, is toont to stand or standeth, ver, 11. The sacrifice of the 
mass is inconsistent with sitting at the right hand of God : for 
the sacrifice of Christ is neither continued nor repeated in the 
mass. The apostle not only urges the identity, but also the 
word a-rag, once, once for all, concerning the sacrifice of Christ, 
in antithesis to the Levitical sacrifices, often offered, although they 
were the same. A sacrifice which is often repeated, although it 
be the same, does not satisfy or make atonement to God. Not 
only is the body of Christ one, but also His ofibrmg is one, and 
that too inseparable from His passion : eh. ix. 26. Every later 
oblation shows that the former is of no value ; every former one 
proves that the later one is superfluous : ch. x. 2, 18. 

13. 'Exdixo/J'^o'S, expecting) By this word the knowledge of our 
exalted Lord is not denied, Kev. i. 1 : comp. Mark xiii. 32 : but 
His subjection to the Father is intimated ; Acts iii. 20. Sitting 
and at rest, He expects. — oJ l%^p(i/ avTou, His enemies) whose 
strength consists in sin. 

14. Mi^ yap -jr^ogpop^, for by one offering) Or should we rather 
read t^la yap vpoaipopA, for one offering?^ For the language is 
framed (moves on) in the abstract also in ver. 11 ; and with the 
same verb riXeioZv, to perfect, which here sustains the Apodosis, it 
was similarly framed, ch. vii. 19, ix. 9, x. 1. — y&p, for) The as- 
signing of a reason (iEtiology, Append.) is to be referred to (has 
reference to) ver. 12. — rotig ayia^o/ihov;, those who were sanctified) 
A participle of the imperfect tense. For this sanctification was 
accomplished in the very act of oftering the sacrifice, ver. 10. 

15. Kal) also. There is added, not a testimony to the 
arguments ; for the testimonies even preceded the latter ; but 
/iaprupZv to //,apTupo\J\iTas [the Holy Ghost witnessing in addi- 
tion to those who bear witnessl. Paul had given the testi- 
mony of the Father to the priesthood of Christ, ch. v. 10, and 
of the Son, ch. x. 5 ; now also that of the Holy Spirit: the testi- 
mony of each everywhere carrying with it the same conclusion ; 
ver. 18. Look back to the General View (Synopsis) of the epistle. 
And he presently afterwards repeats in his admonition this re- 
ference to the Holy Trinity, ver. 29, note. — /ttrA, after) The verb 

' The Germ. Vers., following the reasons assigned by the Gnomon, pre- 
fers this reading, which was considered of equal authority by the margin of 
both Ed.— E. B. 



HEBREWS X. 16-22. t35^ 

fnolv, says He, is swallowed up in the clause, Xiyii Kbpio;, saith 
the Lord, in the following verse. But this fiirot., after, shows that 
the forgiveness of sins belongs to the New Testament. There- 
fore the intermediate words of Jeremiah are not repeated here. 
The passage in Jer. is quoted Heb. viii., on account of the word 
xaiyfiv, and ch. x. on account of atpim. The appellation of the 
Spirit of grace is consonant with this : ver. 29. 
16. AtjTTi, this) See ch. viii. 10, 12. 

18. "Afigig, forgiveness) This is evident from ver. 17. 

19. "E%ov5-£s, having) The exhortation is derived from those 
things which have been treated of from ch. v. 4, beginning at 
the recapitulation. — i'leohov — lipia fiiyav, entrance — Hi^h Priest) 
ver. 21. The apostle treated of the High Priest from ch. v. 4, 5; 
of the entrance from ch. ix. 1, 12. Now he makes mention (in 
reverse order), by Chiasmus, of the entrance in this verse, and of 
the High Priest, ver. 21, at the commencement of his exhorta- 
tion. There is the same, both sentiment and figure, at ch. vi. 
20 : comp. the following chapters. 

20. "Hi') namely, t'leo&ov, for there foUows ibhv, which is as it were 
synonymous. They are not, however, simply synonymous, but in 
as far as it idhg, the way, extends to (reaches) the goal, thkough 
the veil. — hinahisiv, hath consecrated) The same verb occurs, ch. ix. 
18. It is intimated by this verb, that it is our duty to follow in 
that way by which Christ has gone. — irpodfarov) The LXX. often 
use this word. II/>offparoi' is properly applied to an animal recently 
hilled as a victim. — •r^ oVparoi/ Kal ZSitsav, new and living) The way, 
as being secured by the shed blood and death of Christ, is a new, 
and it is a living way. It is opposed to a thing old and lifeless. 
Life is ascribed to the way by personification, from the very life of 
Christ, who is the way. It denotes the vigour of the New Tes- 
tament as a living hope. It stand